substitution request - Alliance Construction Solutions

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

FOR 

HOMEWOOD HOMEWOOD SUITES 

SUITES 

AND 

AND 

HAMPTON HAMPTON INN INN & & & SUITES 

SUITES 

550 550 15 15 

TH STREET 

DENVER, DENVER, COLORADO 

COLORADO 

PREPARED BY: 

PPahl ll ARCHITECTURE 

RCHITECTURE 

303 303 E. E. 17 17 

th Avenue, Suite 555 

Denver, Denver, Colorado Colorado 80203 80203 

80203 

10 May 2012

550 550 15 15 

th Street Dual Brand Hotel 

Denver, Denver, Colorado 

Colorado 

TABLE TABLE OF OF CONTENTS 

CONTENTS 

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

Section 01 1000 Summary 

Section 01 2500 Substitution Procedures 

Section 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures 

Section 01 2900 Payment Procedures 

Section 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination 

Section 01 3200 Construction Progress Documentation 

Section 01 3300 Submittal Procedures 

Section 01 4000 Quality Requirements 

Section 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 

Section 01 6000 Product Requirements 

Section 01 7300 Execution 

Section 01 7700 Closeout Procedures 

Section 01 7823 Operation and Maintenance Data 

Section 01 7839 Project Record Documents 

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 

Section 02 4119 Selective Structure Demolitions 

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 

Section 03 1100 Lightweight Geo-Synthetic Fill 

Section 03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 

Section 04 2000 Unit Masonry 

DIVISION 05 – METALS 

Section 05 1200 Structural Steel Framing 

Section 05 3100 Steel Decking 

Section 05 4000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 

Section 05 5000 Metal Fabrications 

Section 05 5100 Metal Stairs 

Project No. 10145 TABLE OF CONTENTS 

550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel TOC-1 

10 May 2012

DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 

Section 06 1053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 

Section 06 4023 Interior Architectural Woodwork 

Section 06 6115 Cast Marble 

Section 06 6400 Plastic Paneling 

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 

Section 07 1326 Sheet Waterproofing 

Section 07 2100 Thermal Insulation 

Section 07 4213 Formed Metal Wall Panels 

Section 07 5323 EPDM Roofing 

Section 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 

Section 07 8100 Applied Fireproofing 

Section 07 8413 Penetration Firestopping 

Section 07 9200 Joint Sealants 

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 

Section 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 

Section 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors 

Section 08 3113 Access Doors and Frames 

Section 08 4100 Folding Wood and Glass Door Systems 

Section 08 4113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 

Section 08 4229 Automatic Entrance Doors 

Section 08 7100 Door Hardware 

Section 08 7200 Guestroom Locking System 

Section 08 8000 Glazing 

Section 08 8300 Mirrors 

Section 08 9000 Louvers and Vents 

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 

Section 09 2116 Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies 

Section 09 2216 Non-Structural Metal Framing 

Section 09 2400 Cement Plastering 

Section 09 2900 Gypsum Board 

Section 09 3000 Tiling 

Section 09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 

Section 09 6219 Decorative Laminate Flooring 

Section 09 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories 

Section 09 6519 Resilient Tile Flooring 

Section 09 6816 Sheet Carpeting 

Section 09 7200 Wall Coverings 

Section 09 9113 Exterior Painting 

Section 09 9123 Interior Painting 

Section 09 9300 Staining and Transparent Finishing 



10 May 2012

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 

Section 10 2113 Toilet Compartments 

Section 10 2600 Wall and Door Protection 

Section 10 2800 Toilet and Bath Accessories 

Section 10 3000 Prefabricated Fireplaces 

Section 10 4413 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 

Section 10 4416 Fire Extinguishers 

Section 10 5113 Metal Lockers 

Section 10 8240 Shower Doors 

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 

Section 11 0200 Security Equipment 

Section 11 3100 Residential Appliances 

Section 11 5213 Projection Screens 

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 

Section 12 4813 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames 

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 

Section 13 1500 Swimming Pool 

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 

Section 14 9100 Facility Chutes 

End of Table of Contents 



10 May 2012

Division Section Title Pages 

DIVISION DIVISION 22 22 - PLUMBING 

SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS GROUP 

GROUP 

220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 3 

220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 7 

220517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 4 

220518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 2 

220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 7 

220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 9 

220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 13 

220548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 11 

220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 8 

220719 PLUMBING INSULATION 9 

221116 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING 18 

221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 10 

221123 PLUMBING PUMPS 7 

221223 DOMESTIC WATER STORAGE TANKS 3 

221323 SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS 3 

221423 SANITARY AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 9 

223400 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 2 

223500 DOMESTIC-WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS 4 

224100 PLUMBING FIXTURES 6 

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS GROUP 

GROUP 

DIVISION DIVISION DIVISION 23 23 – HEATING HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 

230010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 20 

230513 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 13 

230516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 8 

230517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 4 

230518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 2 

230519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 11 

230523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 11 

230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 13 

230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 12 

230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 8 

230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 13 

230713 MECHANICAL INSULATION 12 

231113 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING 12 

231123 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 8 

232113 HYDRONIC PIPING 19 

232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS 6 

233113 METAL DUCTS 10 

233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 10 

233413 HVAC FANS 11 

233600 AIR TERMINALS 5 

233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 5 

235233.19 BOILERS 7 

235700 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 7 

238219 FAN COIL UNITS 4 

238239 UNIT HEATERS 5 

238416 MECHANICAL DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS 11 



DIVISION 26 

Electrical 

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 

260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 4 

260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6 

260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 5 

260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 12 

260544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 4 

260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4 

260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 7 

260933 CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS 9 

262200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 4 

262416 PANELBOARDS 9 

262726 WIRING DEVICES 11 

262813 FUSES 3 

262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 8 

265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 10 

265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 13 


PART 1 - GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: 

SECTION 01 1000 

SUMMARY 

1. Project information. 

2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 

3. Correlation and intent of the Contract Documents 

4. Owner-furnished products. 

5. Access to site. 

6. Work restrictions. 

7. Specification and drawing conventions. 

1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION 

A. Project Identification: Hampton Inn & Suites and Homewood Suites. 

1. Project Location: 550 15 th Street, Denver, Colorado. 

B. Owner: Combotel, LLC, 9100 E. Panorama Drive, Suite 300, Englewood, Colorado 

80112. Phone (303) 785-3100. 

C. Architect: Pahl ARCHITECTURE, 303 E, 17 th Avenue, Suite 555, Denver, Colorado, 

80203. Phone: (303) 861-7147. Fax: (303) 861-7227. Web: www.pahlarch.com 

D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals 

who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 

1. Structural: Jirsa/Hedrick & Associates, Inc. 

2. Civil/Landscape: Sterling Design Associates, LLC. 

E. Contractor: Alliance Construction Solutions, LLC has been engaged as Design-Build 

Contractor for this Project. 

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 

1. The remodeling of an existing office building into a dual brand Homewood 

Suites and Hampton Inn & Suites hotel, containing a total of approximately 300 

guestrooms and associated support areas including, but not limited to, lobby 

and registration areas, guest dining facilities, meeting spaces and fitness 

facilities as well as required back of house spaces. Work shall include all 

necessary civil, landscape and structural. 

Project No.: 10145 SUMMARY 

550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 011000 - 1 

19 March 2012

B. Type of Contract: 

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 

1.4 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

A. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper 

execution and completion of the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary, 

and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Anything 

mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or shown on the 

Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown or 

mentioned in both; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent 

consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being 

necessary to produce the indicated results. 

B. The Drawings and Specifications have no inherent order of precedence. 

C. Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and 

arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among 

Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 

D. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known 

technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in 

accordance with such recognized meanings. 

E. Construction Documents include: 

1. Homewood Suites by Hilton Standards Effective 8/1/2010 

2. Hampton USA Standards Effective 8/1/2010 

1.5 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS 

A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, 

handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making 

building services connections. 

1.6 ACCESS TO SITE 

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations 

during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's 

right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. 

B. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by 

construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. 

Repair damage caused by construction operations. 

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS 

A. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of 

entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes. 


550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 

19 March 2012 

011000 - 2

1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS 

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of 

language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used 

in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the 

Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on 

the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically 

stated otherwise. 

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to 

the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. 

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on 

Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following 

are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms 

used in the individual Specifications Sections. 

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published 

as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes 

referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 

END OF SECTION 01 1000 



19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. 

B. Related Requirements: 

1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting 

comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 

1.2 DEFINITIONS 

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction 

from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS 

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify 

product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification 

Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the 

following, as applicable: 

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation 

cannot be provided, if applicable. 

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed 

to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and 

separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed 

substitution. 

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with 

those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable 

Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as 

performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design 

characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements 

indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. 

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and 

fabrication and installation procedures. 

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. 

f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. 

g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and 

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. 

h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and 

interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. 

Project No.: 10145 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 


19 March 2012 

012500 - 1

i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for 

Project, from ICC-ES. 

j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed 

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the 

overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction 

cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from 

manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of 

purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. 

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract 

Sum. 

l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with 

requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in 

substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is 

appropriate for applications indicated. 

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may 

subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed 

substitution to produce indicated results. 

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or 

documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for 

substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of 

proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of 

receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. 

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or 

Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. 

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a 

proposed substitution within time allocated. 

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed 

substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to 

perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of 

need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and 

review of related submittals. 

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the 

following conditions are satisfied: 

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will 

produce indicated results. 

b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction 

schedule. 



19 March 2012

c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities 

having jurisdiction. 

d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 

e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the 

Work. 

f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 

g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested 

substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is 

uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is 

acceptable to all contractors involved. 

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if 

received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed. 

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the 

following conditions are satisfied: 

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, 

energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional 

responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities 

may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation 

services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar 

considerations. 

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract 

Documents. 

c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will 

produce indicated results. 

d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction 

schedule. 

e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities 


f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 

g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the 

Work. 

h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 

i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested 

substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is 

uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is 

acceptable to all contractors involved. 





19 March 2012

Project: 

To: 

Re: 

Substitution Request Number: 

From: 

Date: 

A/E Project Number: 

Contract For: 

Specification Title: Description: 

Section: Page: Article/Paragraph: 

Proposed Substitution: 

Manufacturer: Address: Phone: 

Trade Name: Model No.: 

Installer: Address: Phone: 

History: New product 2-5 years old 5-10 yrs old More than 10 years old 

Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: 

Point-by-point comparative data attached - REQUIRED BY A/E 

Reason for not providing specified item: 

Similar Installation: 

Project: Architect: 

Address: Owner: 

Date Installed: 

Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: No Yes; explain 

SUBSTITUTION 

REQUEST 

(After the Bidding Phase) 

Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ ). 

Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: No Yes [Add] [Deduct] days. 

Supporting Data Attached: Drawings Product Data Samples Tests Reports 

Copyright 1996, Construction Specification Institute, 

601 Madison Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-1791 

Page of September 1996 

CSI Form 13.1A

SUBSTITUTION 

REQUEST 

(Continued) 

The Undersigned certifies: 

• Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. 

• Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. 

• Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. 

• Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. 

• Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become 

apparent are to be waived. 

• Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. 

• Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the 

substitution. 

• Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. 

Submitted by: 

Signed by: 

Firm: 

Address: 

Telephone: 

Attachments: 

A/E's REVIEW AND ACTION 

Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. 

Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. 

Substitution rejected - Use specified materials. 

Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials. 

Signed by: Date: 

Additional Comments: Contractor Subcontractor Supplier Manufacturer A/E 

Copyright 1996, Construction Specification Institute, 

601 Madison Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-1791 

Page of September 1996 

CSI Form 13.1A


1.1 SUMMARY 


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and 

processing Contract modifications. 

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, 

not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on "Architect's 

Supplemental Instructions" form. 

1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS 

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Owner will issue a detailed description of 

proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the 

Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised 

Drawings and Specifications. 

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to 

stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 

2. Within 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, 

submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the 

Contract Time necessary to execute the change. 

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit 

costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If 

requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and 

amounts of trade discounts. 

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 

d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the 

effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity 

duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available 

total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 

e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect. 

B. Contractor-Initiated Work Change Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require 

modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request 

for a change to Architect. 

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the 

change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. 

Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the 

Contract Time. 

Project No.: 10145 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 


19 March 2012 

012600 - 1

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with 

total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey 

data to substantiate quantities. 

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of 

trade discounts. 

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 

5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of 

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and 

finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting 

an extension of the Contract Time. 

6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the 

proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or 

system specified. 

7. Work Change Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect. 

1.4 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE 

A. Construction Change Directive: Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive on 

AIA Document G714 or other pre-approved form. Construction Change Directive 

instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in 

a Change Order. 

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the 

Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the 

Contract Sum or the Contract Time. 

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work 

required by the Construction Change Directive. 

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data 

necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. 

1.5 HILTON HOTESL REVIEW 

A. Copies of all Change orders shall be submitted to Hilton Hotels. 




Project No.: 10145 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 


19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


PAYMENT PROCEDURES 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and 

process Applications for Payment. 

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of 

Contractor's construction schedule. Cost-loaded Critical Path Method Schedule may 

serve to satisfy requirements for the schedule of values. 

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative 

forms and schedules, including the following: 

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. 

b. Submittal schedule. 

c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's 

construction schedule. 

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later 

than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for 

Payment. 

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line 

items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification 

Section. 

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of 

values: 

a. Project name and location. 

b. Name of Architect. 

c. Architect's project number. 

d. Contractor's name and address. 

e. Date of submittal. 

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued 

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with 

Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal 

subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. 

Project No.: 10145 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 


19 March 2012

a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts 

for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the 

Contract Sum and subcontract amount. 

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 

5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work 

where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased 

or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. 

6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, 

for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that 

part of the Work. 

7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each 

allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit 

cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract 

Documents to determine quantities. 

8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be 

complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and 

profit for each item. 

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of 

actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the 

schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at 

Contractor's option. 

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next 

Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change 

Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and 

payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial 

Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. 

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the 

Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered 

by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. 

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703, 

or other pre-approved forms acceptable to Owner and Architect, as form for 

Applications for Payment. 

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a 

person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will 

return incomplete applications without action. 

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction 

schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued 

before last day of construction period covered by application. 



19 March 2012

E. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for 

Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of 

lien and similar attachments if required. 

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording 

appropriate information about application. 

F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of 

mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the 

Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous 

application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or 

full waivers. 

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must 

submit waivers. 

4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. 

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must 

precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the 

following: 

1. List of subcontractors. 

2. Schedule of values. 

3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 

4. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 

5. Initial application for payment may not be certified by Architect until all items are 

submitted. 

H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate 

of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent 

completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete 

and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued 

previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. 

I. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final 

Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously 

submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and 

proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 

3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 

4. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and 

Claims." 

5. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 

6. AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 

7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 



19 March 2012

8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar 

data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of 

and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 

9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. 






19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on 

Project including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Coordination drawings. 

2. Requests for Information (RFIs). 

3. Project meetings. 


A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or 

clarifications of the Contract Documents. 

1.3 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES 

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the 

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. 

Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each 

other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results 

where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other 

components, before or after its own installation. 

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum 

performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later 

installation. 

B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required 

administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to 

ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not 

limited to, the following: 

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 

2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 

4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 

5. Progress meetings. 

6. Preinstallation conferences. 

7. Project closeout activities. 

8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 

Project No.: 10145 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 


19 March 2012

1.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS 

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to 

requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop 

Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination 

is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by 

more than one entity. 

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough 

to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on 

standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: 

a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of 

architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. 

b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions 

that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum 

clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating 

proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and 

difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural 

elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical 

Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical 

ceiling grid. 

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, 

mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components 

within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on 

Drawings. 

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms 

showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, firealarm, 

and electrical equipment. 

4. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is 

being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are 

Contractor's responsibility. 

1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) 

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or 

interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI 

in the form specified. 

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by 

Contractor with no response. 

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in 

Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. 

3. The Contractor shall be responsible for complete review and understanding of 

the Contract Documents. RFIs shall not be used to locate information for the 

Contractor. The Architect will not respond to requests where such information is 

available from a careful study and comparison of the Contract Documents, field 

conditions, or prior project correspondence or documentation. 



19 March 2012

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information 

or interpretation and the following: 

1. Project name. 

2. Project number. 

3. Date. 

4. Name of Contractor. 

5. Name of Architect. 

6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 

7. RFI subject. 

8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 

9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 

10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 

11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the 

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 

12. Contractor's signature. 

13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product 

Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary 

to fully describe items needing interpretation. 

C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated 

above, acceptable to Architect. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat 

PDF format. 

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and 

respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received 

by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: 

a. Requests for approval of submittals. 

b. Requests for approval of substitutions. 

c. Requests for approval of Contractor’s means and methods. 

d. Requests for information already indicated in the Contract Documents. 

e. Requests for acceptance of non-conforming Work. 

f. Requests for proposed corrective action for non-conforming Work. 

g. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. 

h. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. 

i. Requests for modifications to the Contract Documents. 

j. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case 

Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional 

information. 

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the 

Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal 

according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures." 

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract 

Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of 

receipt of the RFI response. 

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI 

number. Submit log weekly. Include the following: 



19 March 2012

1. Project name. 

2. Name and address of Contractor. 

3. Name and address of Architect. 

4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 

5. RFI description. 

6. Date the RFI was submitted. 

7. Date Architect's response was received. 

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI 

response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if 

Contractor disagrees with response. 

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change 

Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 

2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal 

Request, as appropriate. 

1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS 

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless 

otherwise indicated. 

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose 

presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and 

Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited 

attendees. 

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant 

discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to 

everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the 

meeting. 

B. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before 

each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators 

involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with 

other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend 

the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for 

the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the 

following: 

a. Contract Documents. 

b. Options. 

c. Related RFIs. 

d. Related Change Orders. 

e. Purchases. 

f. Deliveries. 

g. Submittals. 

h. Review of mockups. 

i. Possible conflicts. 

j. Compatibility problems. 



19 March 2012 

013100 - 4

k. Time schedules. 

l. Weather limitations. 

m. Manufacturer's written instructions. 

n. Warranty requirements. 

o. Compatibility of materials. 

p. Acceptability of substrates. 

q. Temporary facilities and controls. 

r. Space and access limitations. 

s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 

t. Testing and inspecting requirements. 

u. Installation procedures. 

v. Coordination with other work. 

w. Required performance results. 

x. Protection of adjacent work. 

y. Protection of construction and personnel. 

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, 

including required corrective measures and actions. 

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other 

parties requiring information. 

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully 

concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to 

performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. 

C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals. 

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each 

contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current 

progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future 

activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting 

shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the 

Work. 

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. 

Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for 

discussion as appropriate to status of Project. 

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last 

meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, 

or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. 

Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure 

commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule 

revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will 

be completed within the Contract Time. 

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the 

following: 

1) Interface requirements. 

2) Sequence of operations. 

3) Status of submittals. 

4) Deliveries. 

5) Off-site fabrication. 

6) Access. 

7) Site utilization. 

8) Temporary facilities and controls. 



19 March 2012 

013100 - 5

9) Progress cleaning. 

10) Quality and work standards. 

11) Status of correction of deficient items. 

12) Field observations. 

13) Status of RFIs. 

14) Status of proposal requests. 

15) Pending changes. 

16) Status of Change Orders. 

17) Pending claims and disputes. 

18) Documentation of information for payment requests. 

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute 

the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. 


a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each 

progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or 

recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each 

meeting. 





19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the 

progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 

1. Contractor's construction schedule. 

2. Construction schedule updating reports. 


A. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, 

but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as 

needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 

1. PDF electronic file. 

B. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire 

construction period. Show logic ties for activities. 

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire 

schedule for entire construction period. 

D. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. 

1.4 COORDINATION 

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of 

construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. 

B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal 

schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and 

reports. 

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from 

entities involved. 

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and 

schedule them in proper sequence. 

Project No.: 10145 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 


19 March 2012


2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL 

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date 

of Substantial Completion. 

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that 

shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. 

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each 

main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless 

specifically allowed by Architect. 

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead 

items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate 

activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, 

submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in 

Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal 

review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 

5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for 

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures 

necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion 

of punch list items and final completion. 

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract 

Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is 

affected. 

1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 

2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each 

contract. 

3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work 

performed by Owner. 

4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: 

a. Coordination with existing construction. 

b. Limitations of continued occupancies. 

c. Uninterruptible services. 

d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. 

e. Use of premises restrictions. 

f. Provisions for future construction. 

g. Seasonal variations. 

h. Environmental control. 

5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion 

of the Work. 



19 March 2012

D. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to 

occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the 

following issues: 

1. Unresolved issues. 

2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 

3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 

4. Notations on returned submittals. 

5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. 

E. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar 

days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule 

indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. 

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) 

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Ganttchart-type, 

Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the 

Notice to Proceed. 

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first 

workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 

PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to 

reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule before each regularly 

scheduled progress meeting. 

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions 

have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the 

report of each such meeting. 

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, 

but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and 

activity durations. 

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. 

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect and Owner, separate 

contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor 

with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 

1. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and 

post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have 

completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in 

performance of construction activities. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and 

procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and 

other submittals. 


A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require 

Architect's responsive action. 

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that 

do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not 

complying with requirements. 

1.3 HILTON HOTELS REVIEW 

A. Submit the following construction submittals to Hilton Hotels for review and approval: 

1. Value engineering considerations. 

2. Plumbing fixture cutsheets. 

3. Light fixture cutsheets. 

4. Door hardware cutsheets and schedule. 

5. Roof material sample and cutsheets. 

6. Exterior wall finish samples and product data. 

7. Swimming pool shop drawings. 

8. Vanity and tub surround material. 

9. Vanity base shop drawings. 

10. Knockdown wall texture for color and texture. 

11. Fire sprinkler shop drawings. 

12. Front desk shop drawings. 


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order 

by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, 

manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional 

time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and 

additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 

Project No.: 10145 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 


19 March 2012

1.5 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE 

A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by 

dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, 

ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, 

and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 

2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction 

Schedule. 

3. Submit updated schedule to reflect current status and changes in timing for 

submittals. 

B. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 

1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 

2. Specification Section number and title. 

3. Submittal category (action or informational). 

4. Name of subcontractor. 

5. Description of the Work covered. 

6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. 

1.6 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: At Contractor’s written request, electronic copies of digital 

data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in 

preparing submittals, subject to the following conditions: 

1. Release of CAD files for the purposes of preparing submittals does not relieve 

the Contractor from constructing an accurate and complete project in the event 

of a graphic error in the CAD Drawings. Contractor shall be wholly responsible 

for full compliance with the scope of work as defined by the complete Contract 

Documents. 

2. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital 

data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. 

3. Contractor’s payment of $200.00 per sheet to Architect for time and expenses to 

prepare and transfer files. 

4. CAD files are limited to availability of Architect’s consultant files. 

5. CAD files are limited to files that already exist. 

a. Floor plans. 

b. Reflected ceiling plans. 

B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as 

follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No 

extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit 

submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 

1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow 

additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect 

will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for 

coordination. 



19 March 2012

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same 

manner as initial submittal. 

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 14 days for review of each resubmittal. 

4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's 

consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review 

of each submittal. 

a. Structural Shop Drawings. 

5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that 

submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's 

consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be 

returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. 

C. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for 

identification. 

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title 

block. 

2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to 

record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 

3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: 

a. Project name. 

b. Date. 

c. Name of Architect. 

d. Name of Construction Manager. 

e. Name of Contractor. 

f. Name of subcontractor. 

g. Name of supplier. 

h. Name of manufacturer. 

i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 

j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 

k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 

l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 

m. Other necessary identification. 

D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal 

file as follows: 

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating 

submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with 

links enabling navigation to each item. 

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision 

identifier. 

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and 

approval markings and action taken by Architect. 

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to 

Owner, containing the following information: 


b. Date. 

c. Name and address of Architect. 

d. Name of Construction Manager. 



19 March 2012 

013300 - 3


f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 

g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 

h. Category and type of submittal. 

i. Submittal purpose and description. 

j. Specification Section number and title. 

k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic 

name for each of multiple items. 

l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 

m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 

n. Related physical samples submitted directly. 

o. Indication of full or partial submittal. 

p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. 

q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 

r. Other necessary identification. 

s. Remarks. 

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. 

F. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. 

G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial 

submittal. 

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, 

suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary 

for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 

I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only 

final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action 

stamp. 


2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: 

1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. Architect will return 

annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project 

record document file. 

2. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless 

otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 

3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes 

signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and 

certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign 

documents on behalf of that entity. 

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of 

construction and type of product or equipment. 



19 March 2012

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard 

published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product 

Data. 

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are 

applicable. 

3. Include the following information, as applicable: 

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. 

b. Manufacturer's product specifications. 

c. Standard color charts. 

d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. 

e. Testing by recognized testing agency. 

f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 

g. Notation of coordination requirements. 

h. Availability and delivery time information. 

4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 

5. Submit Product Data in PDF electronic file format (preferred) or paper copies. 

a. Number of Copies: Architect will retain one copy; consultant, if 

applicable, will retain one copy; remainder will be returned. Mark up and 

retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do 

not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard 

printed data. 

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include 

the following information, as applicable: 

a. Identification of products. 

b. Schedules. 

c. Compliance with specified standards. 

d. Notation of coordination requirements. 

e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 

f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 

g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit 

Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 

42 inches. 

3. Submit Shop Drawings in PDF electronic file format (preferred) or opaque 

copies. 

a. Number of Copies: Architect will retain one copy; consultant, if 

applicable, will retain one copy; remainder will be returned. 

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of 

these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics 

between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 

1. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the 

following: 



19 March 2012

a. Generic description of Sample. 

b. Product name and name of manufacturer. 

c. Sample source. 

d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. 

2. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for 

quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. 

Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction 

associated with each set. 

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in 

individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an 

undamaged condition at time of use. 

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as 

Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 

c. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where 

color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected 

from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with 

options selected. 

E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 

013200 "Construction Progress Documentation." 

F. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply 

with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 

G. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and 

personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of 

Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. 

Include names of firms and personnel certified. 

H. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying 

that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where 

required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. 

I. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead 

certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 

Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. 

J. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing 

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for 

compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 

K. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on 

testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests 

performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers 

and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 

L. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field 

tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its 

final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 



19 March 2012


3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW 

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination 

with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. 

Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to 

Architect. 

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION 

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval 

stamp and will return them without action. 

B. Architect’s review is for general conformance and compliance with the design concept, 

drawings and specifications only. Any action noted does not waive any requirements of 

the Contract Documents. Verification of details, and/or dimensions, quantities, 

coordination of trades, the maintenance of the highest standards of safety and the 

satisfactory performance of the work are the Contractor’s complete and total 

responsibility. 

C. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate 

corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with 

an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows: 

1. Final Unrestricted Release: Where the submittal is marked “No Exception” the 

Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with the 

Contract Documents. Final acceptance will depend on that compliance. 

2. Final-but-Restricted Release: Where the submittal is marked “Make Corrections” 

the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies both with 

Architect’s notations and corrections on the submittal and the Contract 

Documents. Final acceptance will depend on that compliance. 

3. Returned for Resubmittal: Where the submittal is marked “Revise and Resubmit,” 

do not proceed with the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, 

fabrication, delivery, or other activity for the product submitted. Revise or 

prepare a new submittal per Architect’s notations and corrections. Do not use, or 

allow others to use, submittals marked “Revise and Resubmit” at the Project site 

or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 

D. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or 

will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each 

submittal to appropriate party. 

E. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be 

returned for resubmittal without review. 

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be 

discarded. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and 

quality control. 

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements 

specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for 

compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other 

quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the 

Contract Document requirements. 

2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services 

required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by 

provisions of this Section. 

C. Related Requirements: 

1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 


A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and 

during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate 

that proposed construction will comply with requirements. 

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during 

and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the 

Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include 

contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. 

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are 

constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic 

effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review 

coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and 

to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not 

Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by 

which the Work will be judged. 

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before 

products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or 

compliance with specified criteria. 

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a 

testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having 

Project No.: 10145 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 


19 March 2012 

014000 - 1

jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified 

requirements. 

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the 

source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. 

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for 

installation of the Work and for completed Work. 

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. 

Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 

I. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having 

successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and 

extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having 

complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS 

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the 

standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or 

quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting 

requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before 

proceeding. 

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified 

shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply 

exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum 

within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values 

are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer 

uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities 

and responsibilities. 

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" 

Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications 

in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized 

authority. 

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN 

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice of 

Award, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in 

format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, 

tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and 

quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule. 



19 March 2012

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained 

and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control 

procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. 

1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent. 

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements 

through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of 

personnel responsible for submittal review. 

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of 

Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following: 

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed 

tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractorelected 

tests and inspections. 

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on 

the "Statement of Special Inspections." 

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract 

Documents, including tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the 

Commissioning Authority. 

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection 

during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to 

testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to 

bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract 

requirements and approved mockups. 

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log 

of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as 

nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming 

work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities 


1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS 

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in 

other Sections. Include the following: 

1. Date of issue. 

2. Project title and number. 

3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 

4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 

5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 

6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 

7. Complete test or inspection data. 

8. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 

9. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and 

testing and inspecting. 

10. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work 

complies with the Contract Document requirements. 

11. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. 



19 March 2012


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification 

levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. 

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems 

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service 

performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those 

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well 

as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or 

assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, 

whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service 

performance. 

E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with 

the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as 

documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in 

individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is 

acceptable to authorities. 

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary 

Laboratory Accreditation Program. 

F. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of 

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect 

installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to 

those indicated for this Project. 

1.8 QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's 

responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of 

testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting 

they are engaged to perform. 

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated 

by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to 

Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. 

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are 

Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to 

verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified 

testing agency to perform these quality-control services. Contractor shall not 

employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 



19 March 2012

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that 

requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit 

a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract 

Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having 

jurisdiction, when they so direct. 

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's 

representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's 

services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, 

inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. 

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were 

Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and 

reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract 

Documents. 

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in 

performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and 

inspections. 

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed 

in the Work during performance of its services. 

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ 

tests are conducted. 

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether 

tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and 

similar quality-control service through Contractor. 

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements 

or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. 

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, 

and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as 

requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of 

personnel. Provide the following: 

1. Access to the Work. 

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing 

and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 

5. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at 

Project site. 

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required qualityassurance 

and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of 

removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 



19 March 2012

1.9 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to 

conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the 

responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 

1. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies 

observed in the Work during performance of its services. 

2. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol 

service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

3. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial 

Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 

4. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and 

inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 

5. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. 



3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG 

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the 

following: 

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 

3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 

4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. 

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access 

to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION 

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, 

repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other 

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore 

patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams 

that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document 

requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution." 

B. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of 

responsibility for quality-control services. 

Project No.: 10145 


QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 


19 March 2012 

014000 - 6


1.1 SUMMARY 


TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and 

protection facilities. 

1.2 USE CHARGES 

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be 

included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use 

temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, 

testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water 

system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. 

Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 

C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing 

system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. 

Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas 

for construction personnel. 

B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA 

Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more 

stringent. 

C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities 

having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire 

prevention program. 


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for 

temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. 

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect 

each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 

C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1. 

Project No.: 10145 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 


19 March 2012

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to 

assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent 

service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of 

previously assigned responsibilities. 


2.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 

A. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, 

Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project 

meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. 

B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to 

accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 

2.2 EQUIPMENT 

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required 

by locations and classes of fire exposures. 

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide 

vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space 

thermostatic control. 

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type 

heating units is prohibited. 

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a 

qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and 

marked for intended location and application. 

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system 

for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each 

return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC 

system as required in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." 


3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum 

interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required 

by progress of the Work. 

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until 

facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed 

permanent facilities. 



19 March 2012

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service 

can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 

C. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and 

maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial 

Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. 

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use 

of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction 

for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 

E. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or 

drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse 

effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a 

harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 

F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by 

construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting 

installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will 

not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 

Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and 

minimize energy consumption. 

G. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain 

equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. 

H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate 

illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic 

conditions. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection 

requirements without operating entire system. 

I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for 

use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. 

1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. 

a. Police and fire departments. 

b. Ambulance service. 

c. Contractor's home office. 

d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. 

e. Architect's office. 

f. Engineers' offices. 

g. Owner's office. 

h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 

2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use 

when away from field office. 



19 March 2012

J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field 

office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access project electronic documents 

and maintain electronic communications. 

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION 

A. General: Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion 

inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after 

Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions 

acceptable to Owner. 

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and 

utilities. 

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. 

C. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. 

D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having 

jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or 

adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. 

E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to 

handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities 

having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 

"Execution." 

F. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 

G. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided 

elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At 

Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, 

including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life. 

1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 

2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to 

protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, 

elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work 

so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be 

refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or 

provide new units as required. 

H. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs 

are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial 

Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to 

protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, 

restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. 



19 March 2012 

015000 - 4

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION 

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, 

utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except 

those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. 

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct 

construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize 

possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable 

effects. 

C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of 2003 

EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more 

stringent. 

D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent 

flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. 

E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize 

attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform 

extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests 

and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, 

using environmentally safe materials. 

F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed 

areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, 

vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work 

day. 

G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having 

jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and 

lighting. 

H. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as 

indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 

I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in 

progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, 

and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, 

insulate temporary enclosures. 

J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of 

types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. 

Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire prevention program. 

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and 

similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for 

personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish 



19 March 2012 

015000 - 5

procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post 

warnings and information. 

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a 

warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not 

to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL 

A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. 

Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. 

B. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the 

building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain 

as follows: 

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in 

conditions. 

2. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured 

moisture level within 48 hours. 

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL 

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste 

and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. 

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security 

and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. 

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service 

has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no 

later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent 

construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary 

facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that 

cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of 

Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification 

signs. 

2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used 

during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in 

Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products 

for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard 

warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. 


1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 


A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for 

Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms 

"material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including 

make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's 

published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract 

Documents. 

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another 

project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not 

considered new products. 

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through 

submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, 

dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other 

characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. 

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific 

manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design 

product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the 

significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, 

physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating 

comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 


A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable 

product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include 

Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 

1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or 

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable 

product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of 

Project No.: 10145 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 


19 March 2012 

016000 - 1

proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 

seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is 

later. 

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." 

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a 

comparable product request within time allocated. 

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 

013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or 

more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously 

selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent 

damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with 

manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Delivery and Handling: 

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent 

overcrowding of construction spaces. 

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for 

items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to 

deterioration, theft, and other losses. 

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's 

original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and 

instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract 

Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly 

protected. 

C. Storage: 

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting 

of units. 

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a 

weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent 

condensation. 

4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for 

period of installation and concealment. 

5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, 

humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 

6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 



19 March 2012

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES 

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, 

other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and 

limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under 

requirements of the Contract Documents. 

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer 

for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to 

provide specific rights for Owner. 

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and 

identification, ready for execution. 

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information 

and properly executed. 

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, 

prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 

3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 33. Sections for specific content requirements and 

particular requirements for submitting special warranties. 

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." 


2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES 

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract 

Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of 

installation. 

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other 

items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard 

options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been 

produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in 

conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make 

selection. 

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the 

Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 

B. Product Selection Procedures: 

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide 

the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or 

substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or 

source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies 



19 March 2012

with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's 

convenience will not be considered. 

3. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a 

product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the 

specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other 

named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, 

dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. 

Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of 

an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. 

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", 

provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. 

Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with 

other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 

"Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. 

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by 

Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that 

complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture 

from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS 

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for 

comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following 

conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to 

record noncompliance with these requirements: 

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract 

Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce 

the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those 

named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as 

performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and 

requirements indicated. 

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and 

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 

5. Samples, if requested. 





19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


EXECUTION 

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing 

execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Construction layout. 

2. Field engineering and surveying. 

3. Installation of the Work. 

4. Cutting and patching. 

5. Progress cleaning. 

6. Starting and adjusting. 

7. Protection of installed construction. 

8. Correction of the Work. 


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to 

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing 

land-surveying services of the kind indicated. 

B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and 

patching of construction elements. 

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify 

Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect 

before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting 

and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could 

change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection 

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related 

components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as 

intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life 

or safety. 

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements 

or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that 

results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in 

increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in 

visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed 

construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's 

aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and 

patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 

Project No.: 10145 EXECUTION 


19 March 2012


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For 

exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the 

fullest extent possible. 

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when 

installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and 

functional performance of in-place materials. 


3.1 EXAMINATION 

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and 

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, 

investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical 

and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of 

connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; 

underground electrical services, and other utilities. 

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by 

public utilities serving Project site. 

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component 

of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator 

present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances 

and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual 

locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and 

systems are to be installed. 

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with 

existing finishes or primers. 

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 

3.2 PREPARATION 

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, 

move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility 

appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities 




19 March 2012

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. 

Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are 

indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field 

measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction 

progress to avoid delaying the Work. 

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown 

diagrammatically on Drawings. 

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the 

need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions 

outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect 

according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." 

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT 

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on 

Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies 

are discovered, notify Architect promptly. 

B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, 

grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. 

C. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required 

lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather 

conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and 

tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 

3.4 INSTALLATION 

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct 

alignment and elevation, as indicated. 

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for 

maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing 

products in applications indicated. 

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible 

results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial 

Completion. 

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging 

operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of 

occupancy. 

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of 

construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. 



19 March 2012

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise 

levels. 

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to 

be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm 

that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with 

indicated requirements. 

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of 

adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately 

located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of 

attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount 

components at heights directed by Architect. 

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and 

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor 

bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or 

masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not 

indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to 

form hairline joints. 

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not 

considered hazardous. 

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and 

patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete 

without delay. 

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or 

performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore 

surfaces to their original condition. 

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or 

damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with 

materials so as not to void existing warranties. 

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. 

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent 

damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project 

that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. 

E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, 

and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage 

elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures 

with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 



19 March 2012

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not 

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, 

and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover 

openings when not in use. 

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed 

surfaces. 

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw 

or a diamond-core drill. 

4. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are 

complete. 

F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar 

operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as 

invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements 

specified in other Sections, where applicable. 

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to 

demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish 

restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize 

evidence of patching and refinishing. 

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one 

finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new 

space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and 

appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new 

materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an 

even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores 

enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity 

of building enclosure. 

G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. 

Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING 

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce 

requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste 

materials and debris. 

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or 

three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other 

waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to 

regulations. 

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. 

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness 

necessary for proper execution of the Work. 



19 March 2012

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum 

the entire work area, as appropriate. 

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to 

written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only 

cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not 

recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and 

that will not damage exposed surfaces. 

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. 

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary 

to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste 

materials down sewers or into waterways. 

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and 

adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to 

ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. 

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary 

through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable 

components to ensure operability without damaging effects. 

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the 

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or 

otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING 

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove 

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. 

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper 

operation without binding. 

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and 

safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION 

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without 

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, 

including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 

2. Final completion procedures. 

3. Warranties. 

4. Final cleaning. 

5. Repair of the Work. 

1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 

A. Certificates of Occupancy: From authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. 

1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items 

specified in other Sections. 

1.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES 

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be 

completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on 

the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. 

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following prior to requesting 

inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are 

incomplete at time of request. 

1. Certificates of Occupancy: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having 

jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services 

and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar 

releases. 

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including 

project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final 

completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement 

surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 

Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service 

agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 

Project No.: 10145 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 


19 March 2012

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual 

Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, 

and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with 

manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 

5. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, 

and maintenance. 

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following prior to requesting 

inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are 

incomplete at time of request. 

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 

2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise 

Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 

3. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 

4. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local 

emergency responders. 

5. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with 

mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 

6. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 

7. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate 

visual defects. 

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion 

a minimum of seven days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final 

inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection 

or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of 

Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on 

Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or 

corrected before certificate will be issued. 

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous 

inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final 

completion. 

1.5 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES 

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final 

completion, complete the following: 

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment 

Procedures." 

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial 

Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), 

endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each 

item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance 

coverage complying with insurance requirements. 

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On 

receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of 

unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after 



19 March 2012 

017700 - 2

inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected 

before certificate will be issued. 

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous 

inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 

1.6 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) 

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected 

by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, 

if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and 

proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories 

for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 

3. Submit list of incomplete items in one of the following formats: 

a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated copy. 

b. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated copy. 

c. Three paper copies unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two 

copies. 

1.7 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES 

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated 

portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of 

Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might 

limit Owner's rights under warranty. 

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents 

of the Project Manual. 

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf 

binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 

8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate 

warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed 

description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and 

the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title 

"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete 

warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file 

with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of 

contents at beginning of document. 

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance 

manuals. 



19 March 2012


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer 

or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are 

potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 


3.1 FINAL CLEANING 

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to 

comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and 

antipollution regulations. 

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. 

Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building 

cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for 

certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated 

portion of Project: 

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction 

activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste 

material, litter, and other foreign substances. 

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, 

and other foreign deposits. 

c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material 

from Project site. 

d. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. 

e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free 

condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid 

disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective 

surfaces to their original condition. 

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including 

roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and 

similar spaces. 

g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. 

h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; 

clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains 

remain. 

i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and 

windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, visionobscuring 

materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other 

damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not 

to scratch surfaces. 

j. Remove labels that are not permanent. 

k. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 



19 March 2012

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK 

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for 

determination of Substantial Completion. 

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing 

defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, 

and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot 

be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating 

components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent 

facilities used during construction to specified condition. 

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, 

and other damaged transparent materials. 

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and 

surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair 

or restoration. 

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, 

including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to 

required labels and identification. 

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may 

impede operation or reduce longevity. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation 

and maintenance manuals, including the following: 

1. Emergency manuals. 

2. Product maintenance manuals. 


1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance 

manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in 

individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. 

Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance 

submittals are acceptable. 

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to 

revisions and field conditions. 

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically 

indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. 

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with 

applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation 

and maintenance directory. 

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals. 

2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. 

Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return 

two copies. 

C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for 

Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and 

training. Architect will return copy with comments. 

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 

copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's 

comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. 

Project No.: 10145 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 


19 March 2012


2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and 

maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready 

access to desired information. 

B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate 

section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of 

equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in 

the order listed: 

1. Title page. 

2. Table of contents. 

3. Manual contents. 

C. Title Page: Include the following information: 

1. Subject matter included in manual. 

2. Name and address of Project. 

3. Name and address of Owner. 

4. Date of submittal. 

5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 

6. Name and contact information for Architect. 

D. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, 

indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section 

number in Project Manual. 

E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents 

alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions 

for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 

F. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite 

electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. 

Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for 

minimum readable file size. 

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents 

based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, 

and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group 

documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite 

bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks 

reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file 

tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. 

G. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled 

volumes. 

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf or post-type binders, 

in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch 



19 March 2012 

017823 - 2

paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and 

with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. 

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the 

manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and 

major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, crossreferenced 

to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose 

diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. 

2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS 

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 

1. Type of emergency. 

2. Emergency instructions. 

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, 

include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, 

and component: 

1. Fire. 

2. Flood. 

3. Gas leak. 

4. Water leak. 

5. Power failure. 

6. Water outage. 

7. Chemical release or spill. 

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error 

messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating 

personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain 

warranties. 

2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS 

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and 

finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, 

repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. 

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name 

and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, 

address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, 

and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. 

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 

1. Product name and model number. 

2. Manufacturer's name. 

3. Color, pattern, and texture. 

4. Material and chemical composition. 

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. 



19 March 2012

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the 

following: 

1. Inspection procedures. 

2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 

4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 

5. Repair instructions. 

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials 

and related services. 

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of 

circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 


3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION 

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating 

procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for 

types of emergencies indicated. 

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data 

indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated 

into the Work. 

C. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, 

include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to 

identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more 

than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from 

the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to 

information not applicable. 

D. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate 

the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control 

sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained 

in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and 

maintenance manuals. 

E. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting 

operation and maintenance documentation. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record 

documents, including the following: 

1. Record Drawings. 

2. Record Specifications. 


1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and 

maintenance manual requirements. 

2. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for project record 

documents of the Work in those Sections. 


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints. 

B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including 

addenda and contract modifications. 


2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS 

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings 

and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are 

issued. 

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation 

varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained 

record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar 

entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up 

record prints. 

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would 

be difficult to identify or measure and record later. 

b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. 

c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 

Project No.: 10145 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 


19 March 2012

2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. 

Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of 

marked-up record prints. 

3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to 

distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same 

location. 

4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change 

Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. 

B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT 

RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into 

manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include 

identification on cover sheets. 

2. Identification: As follows: 


b. Date. 

c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." 

d. Name of Architect. 


2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS 

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where 

installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract 

modifications. 

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations 

that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, 

and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information 

necessary to provide a record of selections made. 

4. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable. 

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy. 

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA 

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where 

installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations 

that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes 

in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 

3. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable. 

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF 

electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data. 



19 March 2012 

017839 - 2

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS 

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for 

miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of 

the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use 

and reference. 

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file or scanned PDF 

electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals. 


3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE 

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for 

project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record 

documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. 

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and 

Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. 

Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record 

documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from 

deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's 

reference during normal working hours. 




19 March 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 



SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 

2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 


A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site 

unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. 

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent 

damage, and deliver to Owner. 

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and 

reinstall where indicated. 

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed 

and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed 

and reinstalled. 

1.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS 

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS 

A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner 

as far as practical. 

B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before 

proceeding with selective demolition. 

C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in 

the Work. 

1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately 

notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under 

a separate contract. 

D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. 

Project No.: 10145 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 


19 March 2012

E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them 

against damage during selective demolition operations. 

1.05 WARRANTY 

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or 

damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void 

existing warranties. 


2.01 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before 

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. 



A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition 

operations. 

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of 

selective demolition required. 

C. When unanticipated structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are 

encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a 

written report to Architect. 

3.02 UTILITY SERVICES 

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and 

protect them against damage. 

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, 

disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services serving areas to be selectively 

demolished. 

1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 

2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide 

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that 

maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 



19 March 2012


A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal 

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other 

adjacent occupied and used facilities. 

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to 

prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as 

required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of 

construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement 

or collapse of construction being demolished. 

3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL 

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new 

construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within 

limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. 

Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining 

construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, 

not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. 

Temporarily cover openings to remain. 

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid 

marring existing finished surfaces. 

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At 

concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of 

hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and 

portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 

4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to 

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 

5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 

B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 

1. Clean salvaged items. 

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 

4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 

3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 

4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new 

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous 

materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. 



19 March 2012

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and 

soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to 

a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and 

reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 

3.05 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS 

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, 

reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished 

materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent 

surfaces and areas. 

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device 

that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of 

them. 

3.06 CLEANING 

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective 

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective 

demolition operations began. 




19 March 2012

PART 1 GENERAL 

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 

A. Lightweight, Geo-Synthetic Fill. 

1.2 REFERENCES 


LIGHTWEIGHT GEO-SYNTHETIC FILL 

A. ASTM C 165 - Test Method for Measuring Compressive Properties of Thermal 

Insulation 

B. ASTM C 203 - Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-Type Thermal 

Insulation 

C. ASTM C 303 - Test Method for Dimensions and Density of Preformed Block an 

Board-Type Thermal Insulation 

D. ASTM C 390 - Practice for Sampling and Acceptance of Thermal Insulation lots 

E. ASTM D 1621 - Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics 

F. ASTM D 1622 - Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics 

G. ASTM D 1623 - Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics 

H. ASTM C 2863 - Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to 

Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index) 

I. ASTM D 6817 - Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Geofoam 

J. ASTM D 7557 - Standard Practice for Sampling of Expanded Polystyrene Geofoam 

Specimens. 

1.3 UNIT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 

A. Lightweight, Geo-Synthetic Fill. 

1. Basis of Measurement: By cubic yard (cubic meter). 

2. Basis of Payment: Includes supplying fill materials, stockpiling, placing and 

anchoring. 

1.4 SUBMITTALS 

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 

3. Installation methods. 

B. Shop Drawings: Showing the following: 

1. Profile and section view of the proposed embankment. 

2. Size, type, location and orientation of all Geofoam blocks. 

3. Location and type of connectors. 

4. Ballasting or guying techniques. 

5. Placement sequence and methods. 

Project No.: 10145 LIGHTWEIGHT GEO-SYNTHETIC FILL 


19 March 2012

C. Verification Samples: For each product specified, two samples, minimum size 4 

inches (102 mm) square, representing actual product. 

D. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed the following: 

1. Manufacturer's test reports showing the physical properties and standards for 

the products specified as tested in accordance with ASTM D 7557. 

2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance for the first 100 yd (376 m3) and for 

every 1500 yd3 (1147 m3) thereafter of Geofoam before product is delivered 

to the site. 

3. Computer generated stress-strain data and the accompanying curves from 

compressive testing. Curves and/or data shall clearly indicate the stress at 1 

percent strain and the modulus of elasticity. 

4. Each delivery shall have the compression test data for each lot attached with 

the delivery paperwork. 

5. Certificate of Compliance shall include current inspection reports showing that 

the Geofoam manufacturer is in compliance with a UL follow-up service 

program for both flame and physical properties. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with a minimum of 5 years documented 

experience in the manufacture of lightweight, geo-synthetic fill. Manufacturer must 

also have a UL classification in category BRYX. Manufacturer must also maintain a 

UL classification in category QORW that ensures physical properties in accordance 

with ASTM D 6817. Third-party certifications that only include ASTM C 578 physical 

properties will not be considered as an alternative equal and will be rejected. 

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Handle and store products in accordance the manufacturer's recommendations until 

ready for installation. 

B. Prevent damage to the Geofoam blocks during delivery, storage, and construction. 

C. Geo-Synthetic Fill that is anticipated to be exposed to sunlight for more than six 

months shall be covered with an opaque material to prevent ultraviolet light 

degradation. Remove material that is exposed for excessive period beyond six 

months. 

D. Protect the Geo-Synthetic Fill from: organic solvents such as acetone, benzene, and 

paint thinner; petroleum based solvents such as gasoline and diesel fuel; and open 

flames. 

E. Geo-Synthetic Fill should be considered combustible and should not be exposed to 

open flame or any source of ignition. 

1.7 SEQUENCING 

A. Ensure that placement drawings and other information required for installation of 

products of this section are furnished to affected trades in time to prevent 

interruption of construction progress. 



19 March 2012

PART 2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 MANUFACTURERS 

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Insulfoam, a Carlisle Company, which is located at: 6004 

N. Westgate Blvd. Suite 120 ; Tacoma, WA 98406; Toll Free Tel: 800-248-5995; Tel: 

253-572-5111; Email: request info (info@insulfoam.com); Web: www.insulfoam.com 

B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Geo-Synthetic Fill: InsulFoam GF shall conform to ÅSTM D 6817 and may be 

fabricated using material with recycled content. Blocks shall have a height of at least 

36 inches (.91 m), a width of at least 48 inches (1.22 m), and length of at least 96 

inches (2.44 m). Blocks shall be within tolerances of 0.5 percent of respective 

height, width and length dimensions. Additional field and/or shop trimming and 

cutting shall be required as necessitated by the geometry of the fill being 

constructed. 

1. Type EPS15: Physical Properties when tested in accordance with ASTM D 

6817 shall be: 

a. Density shall be a minimum of 0.90 lb/ft3 (14.4 kg/m3) when tested in 

accordance with ASTM D 1622. 

b. Compressive Resistance at 1 percent deformation shall be a minimum 

of 3.6 psi (25 kPa) when tested in accordance with ÅSTM D 1621. 

c. Flexural Strength shall be a minimum of 25.0 psi (172 kPa) when 

tested in accordance with ÅSTM C 203. 

d. Elastic Modulus shall be a minimum of 360 psi (2500 kPA) when tested 

in accordance with ÅSTM C 203. 

e. Oxygen Index shall have a minimum volume of 24.0 percent when 

tested in accordance with ASTM C 2863. 

B. Connectors: Connectors shall be galvanized steel multi-barbed connectors or a 

urethane adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. Each connector shall 

have a lateral holding strength of at least 60 lbs (27.22 kg) when tested with an 

EPS15 Geofoam. 

PART 3 EXECUTION 


A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. 

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of 

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 


A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 

B. Prepare surfaces for uniform bearing using the methods recommended by the 

manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project 

conditions. 


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 



19 March 2012

B. Geo-Synthetic Fill fill shall be placed to the lines and grades shown in the Drawings 

and as directed by the Engineer. The surface of a layer of Geo-Synthetic Fill blocks 

to receive additional Geo-Synthetic Fill blocks shall be constructed with a variation in 

surface tolerance of no more than 0.05 feet (15 mm) in any 10 foot (3 m) interval. 

C. All blocks shall accurately fit relative to adjacent blocks. No gaps greater than 0.07 

feet (20 mm) will be allowed on vertical joints. 

D. Finished surfaces of the Geo-Synthetic Fill immediately beneath pavement sections 

shall be constructed to within the tolerance of zero to minus 60 mm (0.20 ft) of the 

indicated grade. 

E. Finished surfaces of the Geo-Synthetic Fill on side slopes that receive soil cover 

shall be constructed to within a tolerance of plus 0.30 feet (90 mm) to minus 0.30 

feet (90 mm) of the indicated grade. 

F. Blocks placed in a row in a particular layer shall be offset 2.0 feet (0.6 m) relative to 

blocks placed in adjacent rows of the same layer as shown on the Drawing. In order 

to avoid continuous joints, each subsequent layer of blocks shall be rotated on the 

horizontal plane 90 degrees from the direction of placement of the previous layer 

placed. 

G. When needed to prevent blocks sliding during embankment construction, InsulGrip 

galvanized steel multi-barbed connector plates from Insulfoam or urethane adhesive 

should be placed between horizontal layers of blocks. Install a minimum of 2 

connectors for each 4 feet (1.22 m) by 8 feet (2.44 m) section of Geofoam material 

or as shown on plans or directed by the Engineer. Press firmly into the rigid foam 

until the connector is flush with the surface. Position the next foam block as 

specified and seat firmly before placing subsequent blocks. 

H. Blocks shall be cut using a hot wire. 

I. Because of the light unit-weight of the geofoam fill, provide temporary weighting 

and/or guying as necessary until all the blocks are built into a homogeneous mass, 

and the pavement section as well as any soil cover are in place. 

J. Embankment over the side slopes of Geo-Synthetic fills shall be placed starting at 

the bottom of the slope in such a manner to prevent damage to the fill. Finished 

Geo-Synthetic Fill on side slopes shall have a minimum of 2 feet (0.61 m) 

embankment cover. 

K. Embankment material, in areas beyond the lateral distances necessary to protect 

Geo-Synthetic Fill from damage, shall be compacted according to Section 03215. 

L. During placement of the load distribution slab over the top surface of the Geo- 

Synthetic Fill, it is permissible to use rebar supports to support the reinforcing steel 

during concrete placement. 

3.4 PROTECTION 

A. Protect installed products until completion of project. 

B. Repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 

END OF SECTION 



19 March 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete 

materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. 

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, 

and placement. 

D. Welding certificates. 

E. Material certificates. 

F. Material test reports. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete 

products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities 

and equipment. 

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete 

Production Facilities." 

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to 

AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel." 

D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the 

Contract Documents: 

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5 and 

Section 7, "Lightweight Concrete." 

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 

E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform 

material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. 

Project No.: 10145 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 


19 March 2012 

033000 - 1

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 


2.01 FORM-FACING MATERIALS 

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, 

and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of 

joints. 

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved 

material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 

2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed. 

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from asdrawn 

steel wire into flat sheets. 

C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet. 

D. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated 

from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets. 

E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and 

fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar 

supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of 

Standard Practice. 

2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS 

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, 

and source, throughout Project: 

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I/II, gray. Supplement with the following: 

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F 

b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. 

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded. 

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal. 

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. 

C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 

D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 



19 March 2012

2.04 ADMIXTURES 

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with 

other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those 

permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing 

calcium chloride. 

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, 

Type G. 

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 

2.05 FIBER REINFORCEMENT 

A. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and designed 

for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1-1/2 inches long, 

78 ksi tensile capacity minimum, 1300 ksi modulus of elasticity minimum, and aspect 

ratio between 80-100. 

2.06 WATERSTOPS 

A. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, 

butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to 

concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch 

2.07 VAPOR RETARDERS 

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick. 

2.08 CURING MATERIALS 

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for 

application to fresh concrete. 

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, 

weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. 

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene 

sheet. 

D. Water: Potable. 

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, 

Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with 

bonding of floor covering. 



19 March 2012 

033000 - 3

F. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: 

ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 

G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, 

Type 1, Class A. 

2.09 RELATED MATERIALS 

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic 

fiber. 

2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES 

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis 

of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 

B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and 

silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would 

otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. 

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Use water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement 

and workability. 

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, 

low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use 

industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and 

concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 

D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: As indicated. 

E. Proportion structural lightweight concrete mixture as follows: As indicated 

2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT 

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 

2.12 CONCRETE MIXING 

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to 

ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information. 

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time 

from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce 

mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 



19 March 2012


3.01 FORMWORK 

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support 

vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, 

until structure can support such loads. 

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, 

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. 

C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. 

3.02 EMBEDDED ITEMS 

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining 

work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, 

templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 


A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to 

ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 

3.04 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 

3.05 JOINTS 

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder 

before placing concrete. 

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of 

concrete. 

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at 

locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning 

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least 

one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and 

finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction 

joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete 

surfaces. 



19 March 2012

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof 

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete when 

cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before 

concrete develops random contraction cracks. 

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at 

slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade 

beams, and other locations, as indicated. 

E. Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated according to 


3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded 

items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. 

B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no 

new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or 

planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints 

as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 

1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to 

ACI 301. 

C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1. 

D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301. 

3.07 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES 

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie 

holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed 

specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view 

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, 

arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and 

patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits 

on formed-surface irregularities. 

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view. 

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where 

indicated: 

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten 

concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until 

producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that 

created by the rubbing process. 



19 March 2012

2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of 

thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to 

one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and 

water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color 

of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess 

grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp 

by fog spray for at least 36 hours. 

3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part 

portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and 

water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color 

of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding 

surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float. 

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed 

surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching 

adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly 

across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 

3.08 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS 

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and 

finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. 

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bullfloated 

or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 

1/4 inch in one direction. 

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated 

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is 

small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low 

spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, 

granular texture. 

1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated. 

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by 

hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is 

free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface 

defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated. 

2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an 

unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and 

placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch. 

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated. While 

concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces. 

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and 

elsewhere as indicated. 



19 March 2012 

033000 - 7

3.09 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING 

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot 

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hotweather 

protection during curing. 

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, 

dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and 

during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after 

placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. 

C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining 

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends 

lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not 

less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period 

using cover material and waterproof tape. 

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or 

roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to 

heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of 

coating and repair damage during curing period. 

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without 

damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound 

manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere 

with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a 

continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial 

application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain 

continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 

3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS 

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. 

Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. 

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 

two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for 

handling and placing. 

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, 

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, 

and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more 

than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch in depth. 

Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, 

and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with 



19 March 2012

patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching 

mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and 

standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match 

surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture 

and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and 

strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and 

structural performance as determined by Architect. 

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish 

and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test 

surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, 

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that 

penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless 

of width, and other objectionable conditions. 

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing 

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish 

repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair 

underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according 

to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and 

level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut 

out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match 

adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer 

according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, 

plane, and level surface. 

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in 

diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas 

with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch 

clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete 

and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as 

original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to 

blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching 

mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off 

dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply 

bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact 

patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area 

continuously moist for at least 72 hours. 

3.11 POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS 

A. Post-installed anchors shall be installed in conformance with all manufacturer’s 

instructions. 

B. Manufacturer shall provide on-site training for all personnel who will be installing postinstalled 

adhesive anchors at the beginning of the work. 



19 March 2012

3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to 

perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

B. Inspections: 

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 

2. Steel reinforcement welding. 

3. Headed bolts and studs. 

4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 

5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 

6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 

C. Steel Reinforcement Inspection: 

1. Reinforcing shall be inspected prior to placing of concrete. Inspect all reinforcing 

for conformance with Contract requirements with regard to bar size, grade, 

placement, splice lengths, clearance from soil or formwork, supports, and 

attachment of accessories and embedded items. Inspection shall be according to 

ACI 318 and IBC, chapter 19. Inspect all reinforcing steel that is welded according 

to AWS D1.4, IBC chapter 10, and ACI 318. 

2. Inspect all bolts and embedded items that will be cast into concrete. Verify size, 

spacing, embedment length, and location according to IBC chapter 19. 

D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to 

ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or 

fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. 

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength 

tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five 

randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite 

sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 

Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test 

for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each 

concrete mixture. 

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air 

temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for 

each composite sample. 

5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one 

test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of 

each concrete mixture. 

6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. 

a. Cast and laboratory cure four 6” diameter or five 4” standard cylinder 

specimens for each composite sample. 

7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; 



19 March 2012

a. One specimen will be tested at 7 days, 2 specimens (3 specimens for 4” 

diameter specimens) will be tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen will be 

retained in reserve for later testing if required. 

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a 

set of 2 specimens (3 specimens for 4” diameter) obtained from the same 

composite sample and tested at age indicated. 

8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three 

consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive 

strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive 

strength by more than 500 psi. 

9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and 

Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall 

contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name 

of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, 

design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and 

materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day 

tests. 

10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device 

may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or 

rejection of concrete. 

11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of 

concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive 

strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. 

Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete 

by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as 

directed by Architect. 

12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to 

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 

13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not 

comply with the Contract Documents. 




19 March 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 


1. Concrete masonry units (CMU's). 

B. Related Sections: 


UNIT MASONRY 

1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels for unit masonry. 

2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing manufactured 

reglets installed in masonry joints. 

1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING 

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing 

agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail 

to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 

1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to 

ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. 

2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to 

ASTM C 780 for compressive strength. 

3. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to 

ASTM C 1019. 



B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry 

reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete 

Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls. 

C. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units 

include data on material properties. 

D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and 

proportions of ingredients. 

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. 

Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for 

water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. 

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply 

with compressive strength requirement. 

Project No.: 10145 UNIT MASONRY 


19 March 2012


A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by 

requirements in the Contract Documents. 


A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated 

with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry 

damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction 

requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements 

contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 


2.01 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL 

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of 

units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do 

not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. 

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for 

fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by 

equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, 

headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 

B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water 

repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength for exposed units. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc. 

b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus. 

c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block. 

C. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area 

compressive strength of 2150 psi. 

2. Density Classification: Lightweight 



19 March 2012

2.03 MASONRY LINTELS 

A. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam 

CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with course grout. 

2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS 

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather 

construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color 

indicated. 

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime 

containing no other ingredients. 

D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 



a. Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement. 

b. Cemex S.A.B. de C.V.; Brikset Type N or Citadel Type S 

c. Essroc, Italcementi Group; Brixment or Velvet. 

d. Holcim (US) Inc.; Mortamix Masonry Cement 

e. Lafarge North America Inc.; Magnolia Masonry Cement or Lafarge Masonry 

Cement 

f. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Masonry Cement 

g. National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement. 

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 

1. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing 

the No. 16 sieve. 

2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 

3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to 

produce required mortar color. 

F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 

G. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying 

with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in 

masonry mortar of composition indicated. 



H. Water: Potable. 

a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. 

b. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. 

c. Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA. 



19 March 2012

2.05 REINFORCEMENT 

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, 

Grade 60. 

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 

2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 

3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 

4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 

5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch diameter. 

6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 

7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units. 

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with 

single pair of side rods. 

2.06 TIES AND ANCHORS 

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials 

that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with 

ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 

2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial 

Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 

3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway 

through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are 

bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer. 

C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide. 

1. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 

D. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow 

vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular 

to plane of wall. 

1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- diameter, hot-dip 

galvanized steel wire. 

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry 

face, made from 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 

E. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- diameter metal rod 6 

inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod 

to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 

F. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 

hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with 

ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated. 



19 March 2012 

042000 - 4

2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES 

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; 

compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene or PVC. 

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, 

complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with 

ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain 

lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, 

Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 

2.08 MASONRY CLEANERS 

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for 

removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new 

masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly 

approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units 

being cleaned. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers 

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not 


a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. 

b. EaCo Chem, Inc. 

c. ProSoCo, Inc. 

2.09 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES 

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, 

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless 


1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 

2. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be 

exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is 

consistent. 

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. 

Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend 

ingredients before delivering to Project site. 

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the 

following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M 

2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 

3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S. 



19 March 2012

4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet 

walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and 

for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. 

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) 

that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of 

grout spaces and pour height. 

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for 

specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi. 

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to 

ASTM C 143/C 143M. 



A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous 

pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, 

sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is 

specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. 

B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors 

and textures. 

3.02 TOLERANCES 

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch 

or minus 1/4 inch. 

2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus 

or minus 1/2 inch. 

3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than 

plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total. 

B. Lines and Levels: 

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 

1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not 

vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch 

maximum. 

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 

feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and 

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 

feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 

3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 



19 March 2012 

042000 - 6

C. Joints: 

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 

inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 

2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 

3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 

3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or 

minus 1/8 inch. 

3.03 LAYING MASONRY WALLS 

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint 

thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and 

offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where 

possible, at other locations. 

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in 

running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions 

at corners or jambs. 

C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other 

Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 

D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise 

indicated. 

E. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, 

and similar items unless otherwise indicated. 

3.04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING 

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed 

joints. 

2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 

3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on 

footings. 

4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting 

course on footings where cells are not grouted. 

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with 

sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints 

or slush head joints. 

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint 

thickness unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other 

than paint) unless otherwise indicated. 



19 March 2012

3.05 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT 

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 

5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 

inches. 

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 

2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet 

walls. 

3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and 

extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. 

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. 

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. 

3.06 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE 

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural 

steel or concrete to comply with the following: 

1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and structural 

steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and 

other rigid materials. 

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to 

structure. 

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 

inches o.c. horizontally. 

3.07 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION 

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support 

reinforced masonry elements during construction. 

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry 

as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. 

Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction 

and curing of reinforced masonry. 

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened 

sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them 

during construction. 

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained 

enough strength to resist grout pressure. 

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for 

grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches 



19 March 2012 

042000 - 8


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and 

inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, 

as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with 

specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 

B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of siteprepared 

mortar. 

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of 

grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. 

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. 

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. 

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for 

compressive strength. 

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according 

to ASTM C 780. 

G. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019. 

3.09 PARGING 

A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to 

a total thickness of 3/4 inch. 

B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface. Form a wash at top of 

parging and a cove at bottom. 

C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured. 

3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING 

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove 

mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as 

follows: 

1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for 

comparison purposes. 

2. Protect surfaces from contact with cleaner. 

3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by 

rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 

4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical 

Notes 20. 



19 March 2012

5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to 


6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A 

applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 

3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL 

A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soilcontaminated 

sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with 

fill material as fill is placed. 

1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. 

B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as 

described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. 




19 March 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 


STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 

A. Section includes structural steel and grout. 


A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of 

Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract 

Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads 

indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated. 

2. Use LRFD; data are given at factored-load level. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer fabricator & testing agency. 


E. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. 

F. Source quality-control reports. 


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricators shall comply with AISC standards. 

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality 

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE. 

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to 

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 

Project No.: 10145 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 


19 March 2012

D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 

1. AISC 303. 

2. AISC 360. 

3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 


2.01 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS 

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M, Grade 50. 

B. Channels, Angles -Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. 

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 

2.02 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS 

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural 

bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, 

hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. 

B. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex 

steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and 

ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers. 

1. Finish: Hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc coating. 

C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, 

heavy-hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex 

carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. 

1. Finish: Plain or mechanically deposited zinc coating. 

D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, coldfinished 

carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B. 

E. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 

1. Configuration: Straight 

2. Finish: Plain or Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. 

F. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 straight. 



19 March 2012 

051200 - 2


G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M 

2.03 PRIMER 


A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting 

primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. 

2.04 GROUT 

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic 

aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable 

for application and a 30-minute working time. 

2.05 FABRICATION 

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate 

according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and 

AISC 360. 

B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear 

connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to 

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. 

2.06 SHOP CONNECTIONS 

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for 

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint 

specified. 

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. 

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding 

procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 

2.07 SHOP PRIMING 

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded 

members to a depth of 2 inches. 

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 

3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 

4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 



19 March 2012

5. Galvanized surfaces. 

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and 

spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications 

and standards: 

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 

2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's 

written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film 

thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, 

edges, and exposed surfaces. 

2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to 

perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being 

fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. 

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with 

the Contract Documents. 

C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's 

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 

D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be 

tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection 

procedures, at testing agency's option: 

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 

2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished 

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 

3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 

4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. 



A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces 

and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with 

requirements. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 



19 March 2012

3.02 ERECTION 

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to 

AISC 303 and AISC 360. 

B. Base Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing 

materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 

2. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and 

plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge 

of plate before packing with grout. 

3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids 

remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply 

with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. 

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for 

Steel Buildings and Bridges." 

3.03 FIELD CONNECTIONS 

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for 

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint 

specified. 

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened 

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding 

procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of 

temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency 

to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. 

B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's 

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 

C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to 

AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 

1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to 

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's 

option: 

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on 

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not 

be accepted. 



19 March 2012 

051200 - 5

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 

d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. 

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with 

the Contract Documents. 




19 March 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following: 

1. Roof deck. 

2. Noncomposite form deck. 



STEEL DECKING 

A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing 

channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other 

construction. 

C. Product certificates. 


E. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. 

F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck. 


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding 

Code - Sheet Steel." 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to 

those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations of applicable testing and 

inspecting agency. 

2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing 

and inspecting agency. 

C. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck 

according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel 

Structural Members." 

Project No.: 10145 STEEL DECKING 


19 March 2012


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, 

storage, and handling. 

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a 

waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. 



A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the 

following: 

1. ASC Profiles, Inc. 

2. Canam Steel Corp.;The Canam Manac Group. 

3. Consolidated Systems, Inc. 

4. DACS, Inc. 

5. D-Mac Industries Inc. 

6. Epic Metals Corporation. 

7. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. 

8. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 

9. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. 

10. Roof Deck, Inc. 

11. United Steel Deck, Inc. 

12. Valley Joist; Division of EBSCO Industries, Inc. 

13. Verco Manufacturing Co. 

14. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation. 

2.02 ROOF DECK 

A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with 

"SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and 

with the following: 

1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 

minimum, shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive 

primer. 

a. Color: Manufacturer's standard. 

2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 G90 

zinc coating. 


3. Deck Profile: As indicated. 

4. Profile Depth: As indicated. 

5. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated 



19 March 2012 

053100 - 2

2.03 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK 

A. Noncomposite Steel Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form-deck 

panels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form 

Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with 

the following: 

1. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 

minimum. 

2. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 

minimum, with underside surface shop primed with manufacturer's standard bakedon, 

rust-inhibitive primer. 


3. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33G90 

zinc coating. 


4. Profile Depth: As indicated. 

5. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 

6. Span Condition: As indicated. 

2.04 ACCESSORIES 

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with 

requirements indicated. 

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically 

driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws. 

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbonsteel 

screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. 

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber. 

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 

33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and 

finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. 

F. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer. 



A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary 

in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, requirements in this Section, 

and as indicated. 



19 March 2012

B. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately 

aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not 

stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. 

C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or 

deflection. 

D. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting 

through or adjacent to deck. 

E. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, 

continuity of deck, and support of other work. 

F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, 

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. 

G. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical 

fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. 

H. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1- 

1/2 inches. 

I. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld 

or mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space connections not more than 12 inches 

apart with at least one connection at each corner. 

1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld or 

mechanically fasten. 

J. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end 

closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. 

Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 

1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

K. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting 

structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. 

L. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to 

deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of 

ribs and sides of deck. 


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform 

field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. 

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and 

Architect. 



19 March 2012

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. 

E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance 

of corrected work with specified requirements. 

3.03 REPAIRS 

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces 

of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both 

surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. 




19 March 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 



COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 

1. Exterior load-bearing wall framing. 

2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 

3. Roof joist framing. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product and accessory indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal 

framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical 

fasteners. 

C. Welding certificates. 

D. Qualification data. 

E. Product test reports. 

F. Research/evaluation reports. 


A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency 

indicating steel sheet complies with requirements. 

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding 

Code--Sheet Steel." 

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing 

identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and 

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for 

the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed 

Steel Framing - General Provisions." 

1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design." 

2. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design." 

Project No.: 10145 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 


19 March 2012


2.01 MATERIALS 

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade 

and coating weight as follows: 

1. Grade: As noted on structural drawings 

2. Coating: G60, A60, AZ50, or GF30. 

2.02 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING 

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, 

punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated 

2. Section Properties: As indicated. 

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, 

unpunched, with straight flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs. 

C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form 

header beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated. 

2. Flange Width: As indicated. 

3. Section Properties: As indicated 

2.03 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING 

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, 

punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch 

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. 

3. Section Properties: As required. 

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, 

unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel 

studs. 

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of 

accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through 

positive mechanical attachment to stud web. 

D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; 

unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free 

vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads. 

E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, 

consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges. 



19 March 2012 

054000 - 2

2.04 ROOF JOIST FRAMING 

A. Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated, 

unpunched with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated 

2. Flange Width: As indicated 

3. Section Properties: As indicated 

B. Steel Joist Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel joist track, of web depths 

indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel joists. 

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches minimum. 

2.05 FRAMING ACCESSORIES 

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural 

Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing 

members, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to 

ASTM A 123/A 123M. 

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and 

carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process 

according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. 

D. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to 

sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per 

ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 

E. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, 

fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a 

load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted 

by a qualified independent testing agency. 

F. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping 

steel drill screws. 

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard 

elsewhere. 

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035. 

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, 

ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum 

water required for placement and hydration. 

C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching. 



19 March 2012 

054000 - 3

D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's 

standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. 



A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track 

and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform 

bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. 

B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top 

of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 


A. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel 

Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more 

stringent requirements are indicated. 

B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and 

with connections securely fastened. 

C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths. 

D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable 

in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in 

place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and 

permanent connections to framing are secured. 

E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. 

Independently frame both sides of joints. 

F. Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior 

framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that 

are inaccessible on completion of framing work. 

G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's 

standard punched openings. 

H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a 

maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan 

location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of 

sheathing or other finishing materials. 



19 March 2012

3.03 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION 

A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and 

securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows: 

1. Anchor Spacing: As indicated 

B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch 

between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of 

studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows: 

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated. 

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or 

warped surfaces and similar configurations. 

D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs 

cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. 

E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously 

reinforce track to transfer loads. 

F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting 

structure as indicated. 

G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above 

openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to 

transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or 

gusset plates. 

1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as 

indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute 

loads. 

2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks 

to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as fullheight 

wall studs. 

H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support 

fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring 

attachment to framing. 

1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's 

written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight 

or load resulting from item supported. 

I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced as required. Fasten at each stud 

intersection. 

1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of 

punched studs with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for 

framing members up to 6 inches deep. 



19 March 2012

J. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web 

stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete 

and stable wall-framing system. 

3.04 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION 

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor 

to supporting structure as indicated. 

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space 

studs as follows: 

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated. 

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or 

warped surfaces and similar requirements. 

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of 

vertical loads while providing lateral support. 

1. Install single deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 

2. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing or infill studs and anchor to primary 

building structure. 

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but 

not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 

1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 

[12 inches] [18 inches] of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, 

steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid 

blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges 

and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 

a. Install solid blocking at centers indicated. 

2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of 

punched studs. 

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip 

angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and 

stable curtain-wall-framing system. 

3.05 JOIST INSTALLATION 

A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track 

to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings. 

B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final 

position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track. 

1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches. 



19 March 2012

2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist 

hangers, steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings. 

C. Space joists not more than 2 inches from abutting walls, and as follows: 

1. Joist Spacing: As indicated. 

D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, 

or another combination of connected joists if indicated. 

E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section 

located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist 

reinforcement, or as indicated on Shop Drawings. 

1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above. 

F. Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist 

intersection as follows: 

1. Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist 

webs. 

G. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange. 

H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure 

pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to 

provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly. 


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to 

perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. 

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. 

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified 

requirements. 

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine 

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 

3.07 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION 

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and 

installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to 

ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer 

and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or 

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 




19 March 2012 

054000 - 7

PART 1- GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 


METAL FABRICATIONS 


1. Rough Hardware 

2. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates 

3. Loose Steel Lintels 

4. Metal Ladders 

5. Support Angles for Elevator Door Sills 

6. Elevator Sump Pit Cover 

7. Pipe Bollards 

8. Miscellaneous Metal Trim 

9. Steel Framing and Supports for Applications where framing and 

supports are not specified in other Sections 


A. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication 

indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications 

and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates 

for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other sections. 


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal 

fabrications similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production 

capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of metal fabrications specified in 

this Section by same firm that fabricated them. 

C. Quality welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the 

following: 

1. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" 

2. D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel" 

3. D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum" 

D. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for 

welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 

1.4 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS 

A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to 

which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before 

fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate 

fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 

Project No.: 10145 METAL FABRICATIONS 


19 March 2012


2.1 FERROUS METALS 

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon 

completion of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, 

smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose 

exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, 

roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted 

by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet. 

B. Welding Rods: Select in accordance with AWS Specifications for the metal alloy 

to be welded. 

2.2 FASTENERS 

A. General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into 

exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required for each 

application and complying with applicable standards. 

2.3 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT 

A. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, 

noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout 

specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior heavy-duty 

loading applications of type specified in this Section. 

B. Interior Anchoring Cement: Factory-prepackaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, 

hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at 

Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. 

Use for interior applications only. 

C. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-prepackaged, nonshrink, 

nonstaining, hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with 

water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting 

compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure 

without need for protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and is 

recommended for exterior use by manufacturer. 

2.4 CONCRETE FILL AND REINFORCING MATERIALS 

2.5 PAINT 

A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements as shown on 

Drawings, with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 PSI, unless 


B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A-615, Grade 60, unless noted otherwise. 

A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fastcuring, 

lead and chromate-free, universal modified alkyd primer selected for 

good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish 



19 March 2012 

055000 - 2

paint systems indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for 

field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure complying with performance 

requirements of FS TT-P-664. 

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in 

galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by 

weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20. 

2.6 FABRICATION - GENERAL 

A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated 

but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements 

indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using 

proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or 

specified for various components of each metal fabrication. 

B. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change 

(range) of exterior metalwork in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, 

and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of 

joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on 

actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime 

sky heat loss. Temperature Change (Range): 120 Degrees F., ambient; 130 

degrees F., material surfaces. 

C. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and 

straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 

inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius 

possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. Form 

exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed 

fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not 

indicated, Phillips flathead (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where 

least conspicuous. 

D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations 

and the following: 

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop 

strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 

3. Remove welding flux immediately. 

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and 

blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour 

E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. 

Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended 

use. 

F. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to 

minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for 

shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural 

value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated 

installation. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated 

to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. 



19 March 2012

G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or 

provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 

2.7 ROUGH HARDWARE 

A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, 

dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing 

and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete 

or other structures. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. 

Furnish malleable-iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood 

structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. 

2.8 METAL LADDERS 

A. General: Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, 

and anchorages as indicated. 

1. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1. 

3. Siderails: Continuous, steel, 3/8" x 2-1/2" flat bars, with eased edges, 

space 18" apart. 

4. Bar Rungs: 7/8" diameter steel bars, spaced 12" o.c. 

5. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer 

rail faces. 

6. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points space 

not more than 5' o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. 

2.9 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES 

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or 

concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required 

thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting 

as required. Galvanize after fabrication. 

2.10 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS 

A. Fabricate loose structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size 

indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations 

indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where 

indicated. 

B. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. 

C. Size loose lintels for equal bearing of one inch per foot of clear span but not less 

than 8 inches bearing at each side of openings, if not indicated on Drawings. 

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS 

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated or which 

are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work. 

B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive 

adjacent other construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from 

structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using 



19 March 2012 

055000 - 4

2.12 PIPE BOLLARDS 

mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, 

hangers, and similar items. 

A. ASTM A153 galvanized schedule 40 steel pipe with concrete fill, as detailed on 

Drawings. Provide smooth radius for concrete top to prevent accumulation of 

rainwater. Provide field painted finish. 

2.13 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM 

A. Provide shapes and sizes indicated for profiles shown. Unless otherwise 

indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars, with 

continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field 

splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required 

for coordination of assembly and installation with other work. 

1. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports in exterior locations and 

where shown to be painted. 

2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES 

A. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc-coating by 

the hot-dip process in compliance with the following requirements: 

1. ASTM A-153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 

2. ASTM A-123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and 

steel products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, 

plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier. 

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to 

comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface 

preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed 

metal fabrications: Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning". 

C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with 

galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or 

masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA1 

"Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting. Stripe paint all edges, 

corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 



A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, 

instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete 

inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors 

that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate 

delivery of such items to project site. 

B. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations; protect 

sleeves from water and concrete entry. 




19 March 2012 

055000 - 5

A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners 

where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place 

construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle 

bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required. 

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for 

installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately 

in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, 

and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. 

C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built 

into concrete masonry or similar construction. 

D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded 

metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in 

correctly welding work, and the following: 

1. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and 

blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of 

welded surface matches those adjacent. 

3.3 SETTING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES 

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond-reducing materials, 

and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. 

B. Set leveling and bearing plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nutes. After the 

bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. 

Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of 

the bearing plate before packing with grout. 

1. Use nonmetallic nonshrink grout, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no 

voids remain. 

3.4 INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS 

A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or 

tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has 

cured. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 

1. Paint bollards yellow. 

3.5 TOUCH-UP PAINTING: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted 

connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same 

material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA1 requirements for touch-up 

of field painted surfaces. 

A. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 

B. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and 

apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 




19 March 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 



METAL STAIRS 

1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. 

2. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs. 

3. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. 

B. See Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings not attached to 

metal stairs or to walls adjacent to metal stairs. 


A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by 

a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria 

indicated. 

B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads 

and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft.. 

2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.. 

3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in 

addition to loads specified above. 

5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch, 

whichever is less. 

C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and 

the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: 

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. 

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. 

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

2. Infill of Guards: 

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. 

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

Project No.: 10145 METAL STAIRS 


19 March 2012


A. Product Data: For metal stairs. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other 

work. 

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance 

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the 

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 


A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for 

Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair 

designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 

1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class. 


2.01 METALS 

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise 

indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials 

without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) grade B. 

D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with 

ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. 

E. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M 

or ASTM A 1018/A 1018M. 

F. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510. 

G. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 25, 

unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed. 

H. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, structural steel, Grade 30, 

unless another grade is required by design loads. 


A. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as 

standard with manufacturer. 



19 March 2012

B. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units set into concrete. 

C. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units set into concrete. 

D. Fasteners: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or 

ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior 

walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 

E. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd 

primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich 

primer. 

F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 

G. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section 

"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a 

minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated. 

H. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches, W1.4 by W1.4, unless 


2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL 

A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, 

brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs 

and platforms on supporting structure. 

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 

B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble 

units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. 

Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 

D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work. 

E. Weld connections to comply with the following: 

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and 

corrosion resistance of base metals. 



4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed 

fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 

G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide 

weep holes where water may accumulate. 



19 March 2012 

055100 - 3

2.04 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering 


following: 

1. Alfab, Inc. 

2. American Stair, Inc. 

3. Sharon Companies Ltd. (The). 

B. Stair Framing: 

1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels. 

2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing 

members as indicated. 

3. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces. 

C. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown 

from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less 

than 0.067 inch. 

1. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal-pan subtreads filled with 

reinforced concrete during fabrication. 

D. Metal Floor Plate Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from rolledsteel 

floor plate of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less 

than 1/4 inchForm treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Weld steel 

supporting brackets to stringers and weld treads to brackets. 

E. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." 

1. Fabricate treads and platforms from steel grating with 1-1/4-by-3/16-inch bearing 

bars at 15/16 inch o.c. and crossbars at 4 inches o.c. 

2. Fabricate grating treads with rolled-steel floor plate nosing and with steel angle or 

steel plate carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers 

with bolts. 

2.05 STAIR RAILINGS 

A. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, 

dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post 

spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 

1. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch- diameter top and bottom rails and 1-1/2-inch- square 

posts. 

2. Picket Infill: 1/2-inch- square pickets spaced less than 4 inches clear. 

3. Gates: Form gates from steel tube of same size and shape as top rails, with infill to 

match guards. Provide with cam-type, self-closing hinges for fastening to wall and 

overlapping stop with rubber bumper to prevent gate from opening in direction 

opposite egress. 



19 March 2012

B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at 

connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around 

at connections, including at fittings. 

1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 

welds: no evidence of a welded joint 

C. Form changes in direction of railings by bending. 

D. Form curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling. 

E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 

F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails. 

G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, 

miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to 

other work. 

1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding. 

H. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, to 

transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses. 

2.06 FINISHES 

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for 

recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 

B. Finish metal stairs after assembly. 

C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M 

for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron 

products. 

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with 

SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning” 

E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components. Comply with SSPC- 

PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of 

Steel," for shop painting. 



A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing 

metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from 

established lines and levels and free of rack. 



19 March 2012

B. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into 

concrete unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that 

are not to be left as exposed joints. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units 

that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 

D. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article. 

E. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 03 Section 

"Cast-in-Place Concrete." 

1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. 

F. Install precast concrete treads with adhesive supplied by manufacturer. 

G. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for 

concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 

3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and 

abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for 

shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and 

repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 



MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 

1. Framing with dimension lumber. 

2. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 

3. Wood blocking and nailers. 

4. Plywood backing panels. 


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. 

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer 

and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with 

requirements. 


2.1 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and 

AWPA C27 (plywood). 

B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing 

and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry, unless otherwise indicated. 

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER 

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or 

attachment of other construction, including the following: 

1. Blocking. 

2. Nailers. 

3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 

19 percent maximum moisture content of any species. 

Project No.: 10145 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 


19 March 2012

2.3 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS 

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, fireretardant 

treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch 

nominal thickness. 



A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and 

fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. 

Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching 

other construction. 

B. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, 

complying with Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building 

Code. 


Project No.: 10145 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 


19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 



INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 

1. Interior standing and running trim. 

2. Wood trim and wood ceiling closure panel for recessed screen. 

3. Flush wood paneling and wainscots. 

4. Shelves. 

5. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 

6. Plastic-laminate countertops. 

7. Wood cabinets. 

8. Granite countertops. 

9. Slatwall display. 

10. Shop finishing of woodwork. 

B. Related Sections include the following: 

1. Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications” for steel supports for countertops. 

2. Division 06 Section “Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry” for wood furring and 

shims required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction 

before woodwork installation. 

3. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board” for blocking and hanging strips required 

for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before 

woodwork installation. 


A. Product Data: For cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and 

processes. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, largescale 

details, attachment devices, and other components. 

C. Samples: Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut, 

finished on one side and one edge. 

D. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification 

Program certificates. 


A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural 

Woodwork Quality Standards." 

Project No.: 10145 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 


19 March 2012


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is 

enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining 

temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the 

construction period. 

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify 

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and 

indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with 

construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork 

by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on 

Shop Drawings. 

2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without 

delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork 

without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and 

coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to 

established dimensions. 


A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other 

related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural 

woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Indicated on Interior Design Drawings. 

B. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood. 

C. Wood Products: 

1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 

2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 

3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 

4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 

D. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished 

with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with 

LMA SAT-1. 

E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not 

indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 



19 March 2012

F. Granite Countertops: With bull nose front edge, 4-inch back and side splashes with 

polished and eased edges. See interior finish schedule for specifications and for color, 

finish and product details. 

G. Slatwall: Paz Systems, Inc. or comparable product. 

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS 

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with 

performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use 

Exterior Type or Interior Type A. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not 

bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Kiln-dry material after treatment. 

B. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels made from softwood particles and fire-retardant 

chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 

or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 

C. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2 medium-density fiberboard panels made 

from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at 

time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed 

index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. 

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES 

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with 

architectural woodwork, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door 

Hardware." 

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 110 degrees 

of opening. 

C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter. 

D. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 

1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; fullextension 

type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. 

E. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. 

F. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. 

G. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with 

BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 


A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project 

site. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and 

fitting. 



19 March 2012

1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom. 

2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to 

remove splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat 

of varnish. 

B. Interior Standing and Running Trim: 

1. For transparent-finished trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered 

construction. Do not glue for width. 

2. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat 

members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 

3. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of 

installation require field assembly. 

C. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets: 

1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. 

2. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate as 

follows: 

a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGL. 

b. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. 

c. Edges: PVC tape, 0.018-inch minimum thickness, matching laminate in 

color, pattern, and finish. 

3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 

D. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: 

1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGP. 

2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 

3. Core Material at Sinks: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue or 

exterior-grade plywood. 

2.5 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH 

A. Grade: Custom. 

B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. 

C. Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: Indicated on Interior Design drawings. 

1. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. 

D. Hardwood Plywood: ANSI/HPMA HP hardwood and decorative plywood, Good 

Grade (1) or better, of thickness, species, cut, and core construction indicated. 

E. Hardwood Lumber: Clear, dry, sound, and free of defects selected from First Grade 

lumber (NHLA), of species indicated. 

F. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, Class 1, tempered. 



19 March 2012

G. Solid Lumber: Dry, sound, selected to eliminate appearance defects, of any species 

of hardwood or softwood with color and grain characteristics similar exposed portions. 

H. Plywood Face Veneer: Same species as exposed lumber, unless otherwise indicated, 

selected for grain and color compatible with exposed solid lumber, no defects. 

Edgeband exposed edges with solid wood of same species as face veneer. 

I. Style of face construction for base, wall, and full-height units, if any, with drawer 

fronts, doors, and fixed panels as follows: 

1. Panel, concealing face frames of cabinet body. 

2. Panel Door Construction: Lumber core plywood, 5-ply with hardwood face 

veneer and crossbanding. 

3. Drawer Front Construction: Same as door or, where standard with manufacturer, 

solid or glued-up lumber, not less than 1/2" thick. 

J. Construction for face frame style casework as follows: 

1. Rails and Stiles: Not less than 1-inch by 1-5/8 inch solid lumber with glued 

mortise and tendon joints. 

2. Exposed Ends: Not less than 1/2 inch thick, medium-density particle board 

core with exterior veneer to match door and drawer fronts and not less than 

4-mil vinyl laminate on interior surfaces. Connect to stile with pressureglued 

tongue and plow joint and supplement by concealed mechanical fasteners. 

3. Unexposed Ends: Not less than 1/2 inch thick, medium-density particle 

board with not less than 4-mil prefinished vinyl laminate on interior surfaces. 

Attach to front frame in same manner as exposed ends. 

4. Back, Top, and Bottom Rails: Not less than 3/4 inch by 3 inch solid lumber, 

machined to interlock with end panels, and rabbeted to receive top and bottom 

panels; with back rails secured under pressure with glue and mechanical 

fastening devices. 

5. Shelving: Not less than 5/8 inch thick particle board core plywood or 1/2 

inch thick medium-density particle board prefinished with not less than 4-mil 

vinyl laminate on top, bottom, and exposed (front) edge. 

K. Construction for wall units with doors and fixed panels as follows: 

1. Tops and Bottoms: Not less than 1/2 inch thick particle board or 3/8 inch 

thick hardwood plywood, fully supported by and secured in rabbets in end 

panels, front frame, and back rail. 

2. Backs: Not less than 1/8 inch hardboard or 3/16 inch plywood fastened to 

machined rear edge of ends and to top and bottom hanger rails. 

L. Construction for base units with doors and fixed panels as follows: 

1. Front Frame Drawer Rails: Not less than 1 inch by 1-1/4 inch lumber mortised 

and fastened into face frame. 

2. Bottoms: Not less than 1/2 inch thick particle board with 4-mil vinyl laminate 

finish or 3/8 inch thick, 5-ply veneer core plywood, fully supported by 

and secured in rabbets in end panels, front frame, and back bottom rail. 

3. Back Panels: Not less than 1/8 inch thick hardboard fastened to machine 

rear edge of end panels and to top and bottom rails. Interior surface prefinished 

with 4-mil vinyl laminate. 

4. Toe Boards: Not less than 5/8 inch particle board core attached between 

end panels and extended from bottom panel to floor. 



19 March 2012

5. Corner Blocks: Glued and fastened in each of four top corners to maintain 

cabinet squareness and rigidity. 

M. Construction for drawer units as follows: 

1. Drawer Body: Not less than 3/8 inch thick vinyl faced particle board 

subfront, back, and sides. Provide box-type construction with subfront and 

back rabbeted into sides and secured with glue and mechanical fasteners. 

Exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of 

body. Drawer bottom of not less than 1/4 inch thick hardboard, set into 

rabbets in back, sides, and front. 

N. Millwork Hardware: 

1. Manufacturers 

a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware (800-543-3658) 

b. Epco Engineered Products Co. (810-767-2050) 

c. Garcy Corp., (708-345-2500) 

d. Grant Hardware, Hettich America LP (800-777-1772) 

e. H.B. Ives, (203-294-4837) 

f. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Co. (800-253-1561) (KV) 

g. Stanley Hardware, Div. of the Stanley Works (800-337-4393) 

h. Grass America (800-334-3512) 

O. Products: Coordinate finishes of exposed cabinet hardware with adjacent finish 

hardware as specified in Section 08 7100. 

2.6 SHOP FINISHING 

A. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, 

and polishing until after installation. 

B. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to 

concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling. 



A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in 

installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as 

required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 

B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in 

Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. 

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 

inches. Shim as required with concealed shims. 

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair 

damaged finish at cuts. 



19 March 2012

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. 

Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for 

complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, 

countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent 

finish is indicated. 

F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using fulllength 

pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. 

Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, 

and finish same as wood base if finished. 

G. Railings: Install rails with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch variation from a straight 

line. 

1. Guard Rails: Glue and dowel or pin balusters to treads and railings, and 

railings to newel posts. 

2. Wall Rails: Support rails on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall 

framing. 

H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are 

accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to 

provide unencumbered operation. 

I. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or 

other supports into underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall 

with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


CAST MARBLE 

A. The following products shall be cast marble: Tub/Shower Surround. 


A. Cast Marble: Cast Polymer, Cultured Marble, Synthetic Marble; synonymous terms. 

B. Description: A patterned, non-porous homogeneous mixture of natural minerals and 

polyester resins thermally bonded to produce solid fabrications with polished sealed 

surfaces. Colors and grain pattern shall run all the way through the base material. 



B. Samples: Submit 6” by 6” samples; indicate full color range and pattern variation for 

approval by architect. Approved samples will be standard for all cast marble. 


A. Cast marble manufacturer qualifications: 

1. ICPA member one calendar year, minimum, prior to Contract date. 

2. Five (5) years experience, minimum, in manufacturing similar type units. 

3. Fabricated five (5) Projects, minimum, of comparable magnitude in last three (3) 

years. 

B. Installer Qualifications: 

1. Installed five (5) Projects, minimum, or comparable magnitude in last three (3) 

years. Provide reference list of those completed Projects for review and 

verifications. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install units until spaces are enclosed and 

weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient 

temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels. 

A. Field Measurements: Shop drawings are to be filed verified by Contractor to ensure 

proper fit of materials. 

Project No.: 10145 CAST MARBLE 


19 March 2012 

066115 - 1


A. Tub / Shower Surround: 

1. Manufacturers: 

a. Basis-of-Design: Mincey Marble Manufacturing, Inc. 

b. Introsul 

c. Project Stone 

d. MPL Corporation 

2. Model No.: TS-DS 

3. Matte finish with diamond design. 

4. Provide 2 surface mount soap dishes (including one corner mount) and 2-inch 

trim pieces. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of 

the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected. 


A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, 

grease, dirt, and dust. 


A. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Install components in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and plans. 

C. All materials to be plumb, level and rigid. Neatly scribe to adjoining surfaces. Field 

trim all components as needed to fit field conditions. 

D. Immediately replace any material that is cracked, chipped, broken or otherwise 

defective. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Contractor to protect all finished work until final acceptance by Owner. 

B. Clean installed units not more than 48 hours prior to Date of Substantial Completion. 

Repair or replace damaged or stained cast marble work. 



CAST MARBLE 


19 March 2012 

066115 - 2


1.1 SUMMARY 


PLASTIC PANELING 

A. Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling and trim accessories. 



B. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories. 


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according 

to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate 

markings of applicable testing agency. 

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 


2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING 

A. General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with 

ASTM D 5319. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available 

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, 

but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Kemlite Company Inc. 

b. Nudo Products, Inc. 

c. Sequentia, Inc. 

2. Surface Finish: Smooth. 

3. Color: White. 

Project No.: 10145 PLASTIC PANELING 


19 March 2012


A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to 

retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside 

corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges. 

B. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer. 

C. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant 

recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in 

Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 



A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, 

grease, dirt, and dust. 

B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation 

according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 

C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at 

corners are not less than 12 inches wide. 


A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. 

C. Install trim accessories with adhesive. 

D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside 

corner trim in a bead of sealant. 

E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. 

F. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent 

recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no 

residue remains. 


Project No.: 10145 PLASTIC PANELING 


19 March 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 


SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 

A. Section includes self-adhering modified bituminous sheet waterproofing. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 


2.01 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING 

A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Minimum 60-mil nominal thickness, self-adhering sheet 

consisting of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated on one side to a 4-mil- thick, 

polyethylene-film reinforcement, and with release liner on adhesive side. 

1. Physical Properties: 

a. Tensile Strength, Membrane: 250 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, 

modified. 

b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. 

c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 

d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement; 

ASTM C 836. 

e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154. 

f. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour 

immersion at 70 deg F; ASTM D 570. 

g. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms maximum; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Water 

Method. 

h. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 200 feet minimum; ASTM D 5385. 

2.02 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for 

intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. 

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by sheet-waterproofing 

material manufacturer. 

C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate 

by sheet-waterproofing material manufacturer. 

Project No.: 10145 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 


10 May 2012

D. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforcedasphaltic 

core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as 

follows: 

1. Thickness: 1/8 inch, nominal, for vertical applications; 1/4 inch, nominal, 

elsewhere. 

2. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofing manufacturer 

for protection course type. 


3.01 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET-WATERPROOFING APPLICATION 

A. Prepare surfaces and install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing 

manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in ASTM D 6135. 

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that 

will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more 

than 24 hours. 

C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets 

and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal 

seams, and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation. 

D. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low to high points of decks to ensure that laps 

shed water. 

E. Apply continuous sheets over already-installed sheet strips, bridging substrate cracks, 

construction, and contraction joints. 

F. Seal edges of sheet-waterproofing terminations with mastic. 

G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. 

Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches 

beyond repaired areas in all directions. 

H. Immediately install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane. 

3.02 PROTECTION, REPAIR, AND CLEANING 

A. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; 

repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings. 

B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and 

procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. 


Project No.: 10145 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 


10 May 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Concealed building insulation. 

2. Vapor retarders. 



THERMAL INSULATION 

A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose 

test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing 

identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in 

UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities 


1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, 

peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 

hours at 2500-fpm air velocity. 

2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold 

growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, 

after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 

days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark. 




A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a 

single manufacturer. 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the 

fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products 

per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate 

markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 

3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 

Project No.: 10145 THERMAL INSULATION 


19 March 2012


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, 

soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with 

manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during 

installation. 


2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION 

A. Available Manufacturers: 

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 

2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 

3. Johns Manville. 

4. Owens Corning. 

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without 

membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped 

indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion 

characteristics. 

2.2 SLAG-WOOL-FIBER/ROCK-WOOL-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION 


1. Fibrex Insulations Inc. 

2. Owens Corning. 

3. Thermafiber. 

B. Unfaced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I 

(blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread 

and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for 

combustion characteristics. 


A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance 

rating of 0.13 perm. 




requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for 

other conditions affecting performance. 



19 March 2012

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected. 


A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including 

removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with 

insulation attachment. 


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and 

application indicated. 

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left 

exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow. 

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and 

fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that 

interfere with placement. 

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, 

coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and 

insulation encapsulates piping. 

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected 

from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of 

insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise 

shown or required to make up total thickness. 

3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION 

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's 

written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with 

adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support 

of units. 

B. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the 

following requirements: 

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing 

members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that 

will produce a snug fit between ends. 

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit 

between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 

3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS 

A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor 

transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system. Extend vapor 



19 March 2012 

072100 - 3

etarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with 

loose-fiber insulation. 

B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall 

studs. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at 

perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c. 

C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating 

vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating 

objects and vapor retarder. 

D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other 

work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 


A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather 

exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or 

enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected 

by permanent construction immediately after installation. 




19 March 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 


FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 

A. Section Includes: Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels. 



B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of 

edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, 

flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. 


A. Maintenance data. 

1.04 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair 

or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within 

specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer 

agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of 

factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 

1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.01 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS 

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping 

and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through 

panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for 

weathertight installation. 

B. Extruded-Rib-Profile, Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with raised, 

trapezoidal ribs; with interlocking joint between panels. 

Project No.: 10145 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 


19 March 2012 

074213 - 1

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Berridge 

Manufacturing Company, HR-16, or comparable product. 

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with 

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated 

steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; 

structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with 

ASTM A 755/A 755M. 

a. Nominal Thickness: 0.022 inch. 

b. Exterior Finish: Finish shall be full strength Kynar 500 PVDF resin-based 

coating, applied by the manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line, with 

a top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.80 mil over 0.20 to 0.30 mil prime 

coat, to provide a total topside dry film thickness of 1.0 plus or minus 0.10 

mil. Reverse side shall be coated with primer and wash coat of 0.30 mil plus 

or minus 0.05 mil. Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility, 

and longevity as specified by the Kynar 500 PVDF resin-based coating 

supplier. 

c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

3. Panel Coverage: 16 inches. 

4. Panel Height: 0.875 inch. 


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated 

steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, 

Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide 

manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel 

system. 

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel 

system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, 

sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of 

metal panels unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal 

panels. 

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from 

material recommended by manufacturer. 

3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefinfoam 

or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure 

strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where 

indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. 

C. Substrate: Minimum ½ inch plywood, 24-gauge metal deck or open-framed purlins at 4 

feet o.c. 

D. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels 

as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations 

include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed 

openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim 

with same finish system as adjacent metal panels. 



19 March 2012

E. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide 

exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or 

factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners. 

F. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible 

with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish. 

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene 

compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch 

thick. 

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal panel 

manufacturer. 

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. 


A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by 

manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated 

performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated 

profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. 

B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's 

recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" 

that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 

2.04 FINISHES 

A. Panels and Accessories: 

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less 

than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. 

2. Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish. 



A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel 

support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel 

manufacturer's written recommendations. 

3.02 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION 

A. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped 

joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. 

B. Watertight Installation: Comply with manufacturers standard instructions and conform to 

standards set forth in the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by SMACNA, in 

order to achieve a watertight installation. 



19 March 2012

C. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and 

weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with 

flashings and other components. 

D. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written 

installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide 

concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install 

work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight. 

3.03 CLEANING 

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are 

installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On 

completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal 

panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. 




19 March 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 


EPDM ROOFING 

A. Section Includes: Adhered ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer (EPDM) roofing system and 

roof insulation. 


A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA 

Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section. 



B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and 

attachments to other work. 

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 

1. Sheet roofing, of color required. 

2. Walkway pads or rolls, of color required. 


A. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES. 


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by 

roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive 

manufacturer's special warranty. 

Project No.: 10145 EPDM ROOFING 


10 May 2012


2.01 EPDM ROOFING 

A. EPDM: ASTM D 4637, Type I, nonreinforced, uniform, flexible EPDM sheet. 

1. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 

2. Exposed Face Color: White on black. 

2.02 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS 

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended 

use and compatible with roofing. 

B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application. 

C. Protection Sheet: Epichlorohydrin or neoprene nonreinforced flexible sheet, 55- to 60-mil- 

thick, recommended by EPDM manufacturer for resistance to hydrocarbons, non-aromatic 

solvents, grease, and oil. 

D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based. 

E. Seaming Material: Single-component, butyl splicing adhesive and splice cleaner or 

manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- wide minimum, 

butyl splice tape with release film. 

F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with 

corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening membrane to 

substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 

G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide lap sealant, water cutoff mastic, metal termination 

bars, metal battens, pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, molded 

pipe boot flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM 

securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and 

other accessories. 

2.03 SUBSTRATE BOARDS 

A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 

thickness as required. 



a. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck. 

b. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Extended Exposure Sheathing. 

c. Temple-Inland, Inc; GreenGlass Exterior Sheathing. 

d. USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Roof Board. 



10 May 2012

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with 

corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel 

to roof deck. 

2.04 ROOF INSULATION 

A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glassfiber 

mat facer on both major surfaces. 

B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 

inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes 

where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 

2.05 WALKWAYS 

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, 

surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to 

roofing system manufacturer. 


3.01 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water 

from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain 

is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining 

roofing. 

C. Install roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain 

weathertightness of transition and to not void warranty for existing roofing system. 

3.02 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION 

A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof 

slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 

1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at 

corners, perimeter, and field of roof according to roofing system manufacturers' 

written instructions. 

3.03 INSULATION INSTALLATION 

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to 

precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. 



10 May 2012 

075323 - 3

B. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. 

C. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall 

insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each 

succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each 

direction. 

3.04 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION 

A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system 

manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before 

installing. 

B. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by 

manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice 

area of roofing. 

C. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, 

and perimeters. 

D. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal 

membrane roofing in place with clamping ring. 

3.05 WALKWAY INSTALLATION 

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations required for equipment and 

rooftop access. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according 

to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 

3.06 PROTECTING AND CLEANING 

A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of 

construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, 

inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written 

report, with copies to Architect and Owner. 

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with 

requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a 

condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and 

according to warranty requirements. 




10 May 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 

1. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications. 

2. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 

3. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. 



B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim. 

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 

2. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 

3. Include identification of finish for each item. 

4. Include pattern of seams and details of termination points, expansion joints and 

expansion-joint covers, direction of expansion, roof-penetration flashing, and 

connections to adjoining work. 

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 

1.03 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal 

flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 


1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 



A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural 

movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to 

defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 

Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain 

watertight. 

Project No.: 10145 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 


10 May 2012

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet 

Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent 

requirements are indicated. 

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface 

temperature changes. 

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 

2.02 SHEET METALS 

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by 

applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. 

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, 

with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required. 

1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: 

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not 

less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, 

and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and 

resin manufacturers' written instructions. 

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to 

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet 

according to ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; 

prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 

1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: 

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not 

less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, 

and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and 

resin manufacturers' written instructions. 



A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, 

and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim 

installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise 

indicated. 

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets 

and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and 

recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal. 

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. 



10 May 2012

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps 

or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing 

washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. 

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for 

metal being fastened. 

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 

3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: 

Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to 

ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. 

C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric sealant; of type, grade, class, and use 

classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain 

watertight. 

D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187. 


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown 

and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, 

geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet 

metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 

1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 

2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, 

buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges 

folded back to form hems. 

3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed 

fasteners on faces exposed to view. 

B. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, 

filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. 

C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to 

provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal 

standard. 

D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored 

or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. 

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal 

standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 

F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with 

elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended 

use. 



10 May 2012

2.05 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS 

A. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with 

mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and 

anchors. 

B. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers to dimensions required, with closure flange trim to 

exterior, 4-inch- wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or 

tapered strip into field of roof. 

C. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge 

and of dimensions and shape required, complete with outlet tubes. 

2.06 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS 

A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 12-foot- long, sections. 

Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to 

support edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners, fasten and seal watertight. 

2.07 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS 

A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- long, but not 

exceeding 12-foot- long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate 

discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall 

openings; and form with 2-inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 

B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, and similar flashings to 

extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- high, end 

dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 



A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work 

securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, 

solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as 

required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide 

uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight 

performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before 

fabricating sheet metal. 

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two 

fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of 

buckling and tool marks. 

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 



10 May 2012

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts 

pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or 

corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent 

separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space 

movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or 

intersection. 

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, 

filled with sealant concealed within joints. 

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by 

fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. 

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to 

minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a 

tight installation. 

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Prepare joints and apply sealants to 

comply with requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants." 

3.02 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage 

system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate 

installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system. 

B. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide hangers with 

fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and 

bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. 

C. Parapet Scuppers: Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges 

to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. 

D. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall, with elevation of conductor head rim at 

minimum of 1 inch below scupper discharge. 

3.03 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance 

requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet 

metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, 

levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently 

watertight and weather resistant. 

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to 

recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock 

bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate. 

C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in 

cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. 



10 May 2012 

076200 - 5

D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with 

top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base 

flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. 

E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with 

installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and 

clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. 

3.04 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture 

according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate 

installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, 

doors, and louvers. 

B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, and similar 

flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. 

3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. Clean off excess sealants. 

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and 

trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation 

instructions. 




10 May 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 


APPLIED FIREPROOFING 

A. Section includes sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRM). 




A. Product certificates. 

B. Evaluation reports. 

C. Field quality-control reports. 


2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements 

of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos. 

2.02 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 

A. SFRM: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying 

with indicated fire-resistance design, and mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry 

or mortar before conveyance and application or conveyed in a dry state and mixed with 

atomized water at place of application. 


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates 

and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated. 

1. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer. 

2. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer. 

Project No.: 10145 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 


10 May 2012



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and 

according to each fire-resistance design. 

B. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials 

during application. 

C. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in 

writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and 

is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing. 

3.02 APPLICATION 

A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and 

products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, 

sealers, topcoats, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work. 

B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, 

application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply 

fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to 

achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 

C. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in 

each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method 

recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. 

D. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been 

applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications. 


A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform special inspections. 

Test and inspect as required by the IBC, 1704.10. 

B. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Remove 

and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. Apply 

additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate 

insufficient thickness, and retest. 

C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 

3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIRING 

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of 

Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and 

clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. 

B. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction. 

C. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using 

manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product. 


Project No.: 10145 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 


10 May 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 



PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 

1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 

2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 

3. Penetrations in smoke barriers. 




A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to 

FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found 

to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the 

following requirements: 

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency 


2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced 

in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems bearing marking of 

qualified testing and inspection agency. 





following: 

1. Grace Construction Products. 

2. Hilti, Inc. 

3. Johns Manville. 

4. 3M Fire Protection Products. 

5. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 

Project No.: 10145 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 


19 March 2012

2.02 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire 

according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and 

maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping 

systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and 

with penetrating items if any. 

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or 

UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, 

based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 

1. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions 

penetrated. 

2. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions 

penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. 

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined 

per UL 1479. 

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at 

both ambient and elevated temperatures. 

E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smokedeveloped 

indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 

F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are 

needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those 

components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified 

testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 




requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other 

conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation 

instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. 

C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials 

during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and 

depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 



19 March 2012

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible 

forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of 

firestopping. 

D. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and 

penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and 

penetrating items. 

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to 

produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


JOINT SEALANTS 

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those 

specified by reference to this Section: 

1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 

2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 

3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 

4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. 

B. Compatibility and adhesion test reports. 


A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test 

their adhesion to Project joint substrates according to the method in ASTM C 1193 that 

is appropriate for the types of Project joints. 

1.4 WARRANTY 

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair 

or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other 

requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 


B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric 

sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace 

those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this 

Section within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. 

Project No.: 10145 JOINT SEALANTS 


19 March 2012



A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other 

Part 2 articles. 


A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are 

compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and 

application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field 

experience. 

B. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for 

each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing 

ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and 

joint substrates. 

C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be 

nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing 

according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for 

Project. 

2.3 SILICONE SEALANTS 

A. Low modulus silicone sealant for exterior expansion joints: 

1. Available Products: 

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. 

b. Tremco; Spectrem 1 (Basic). 

c. Pecora Corporation; 890. 

2. Characteristics: Single-component, low modulus silicone rubber: 

a. Type S, Grade NS. 

b. Class 25. 

c. Custom colors as selected by the Architect. 

d. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per 

ASTM C 1248. 

B. Medium modulus silicone sealant at metal framing non-porous substrates and all other 

exterior applications: 

1. Available Products: 

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. 

b. Tremco; Spectrem 2. 

c. Pecora Corporation; 895. 



19 March 2012

2. Characteristics: Single-component silicone rubber: 

a. Type S, Grade NS. 

b. Class 25. 

c. Custom colors as selected by the Architect. 

2.4 SILICONE BATH SEALANT 

A. Available Products: 

1. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. 

2. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. 

3. Pecora Corporation; 898. 

B. Characteristics: Single-component silicone rubber, mildew-resistant and stain-resistant. 

Color as selected by the Architect. 

2.5 TWO-PART POLYURETHANE SEALANT 


1. Tremco; Vulkem 245/255. 

2. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200. 

3. ChemRex, Sonneborn; SL-2 / NP-2. 

B. Characteristics: Two-component polyurethane sealant for horizontal traffic-bearing 

surfaces meeting ASTM C 920 classifications: 

1. Type M. 

2. Grade P or NS; self-leveling for flat surfaces and non-sag for sloped surfaces. 

3. Class 25. 

4. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect. 

2.6 ACRYLIC SEALANT 


1. Bostik; Chem-Calk 600. 

2. Tremco; Mono 555. 

B. Characteristics: Single-component, acrylic polymer sealant. Standard colors as 

selected by Architect. 

2.7 ACRYLIC-LATEX CAULKING COMPOUND 


1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk Painter’s Calk. 

2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 

3. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac. 



19 March 2012

4. Tremco; Tremflex 834. 

B. Characteristics: Flexible, paintable, non-staining, non-bleeding acrylic emulsion. 

2.8 FDA APPROVED SEALANTS 


1. General Electric Company, Construction 1200 Silicone Sealant. 

2. Tremco, Inc., Proglaze Silicone Construction Sealant. 

3. Pecora Corp., #863 Silicone. 

B. Characteristics: One-part, moisture-curing silicone rubber; FDA approved for use in 

indirect food contact areas. 

2.9 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING 

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are 

compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are 

approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience 

and laboratory testing. 

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a 

surface skin) O (open-cell material) B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of 

the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint 

application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise 

contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 

C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing 

complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of 

remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low 

compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant 

depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. 

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant 

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler 

materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant 

failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for 

adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction 

joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. 

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of 

sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances 

capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any 

way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. 



19 March 2012



A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint 

sealants. 

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with 

adhesion of joint sealant. 

a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast 

cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to 

produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond 

with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning 

operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free 

compressed air. 

2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 

a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do 

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with 

adhesion of joint sealants. 

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant 

manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior 

experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written 

instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or 

migration onto adjoining surfaces. 

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with 

adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such 

contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape 

immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 


A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use 

of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 

B. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at 

position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants 

relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant 

application and replace them with dry materials. 

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used 

between sealants and backs of joints. 



19 March 2012

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same 

time backings are installed: 

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that 

allow optimum sealant movement capability. 

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning 

or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form 

smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to 

ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and 

that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 

3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless 


F. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by 

methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint 

sealants and of products in which joints occur. 

3.3 SCHEDULE 

A. Exterior Joints in Masonry and Stone Veneer: Medium modulus silicone sealant. 

B. Exterior and Interior Joints at Perimeter of Skylights, Storefronts, and Windows: 

Medium modulus silicone sealant. 

C. Exterior and Interior Horizontal Traffic-Bearing Joints, excluding tile joints: Two-part 

polyurethane sealant. 

D. Interior Concealed Bedding Joints and Thresholds: Acrylic sealant. 

E. Typical Interior Joints and Seams at Abutting and Adjacent Materials, except as 

specified herein: Acrylic-latex caulking compound. 

F. Interior Joints in Conjunction with Vanities, Fixtures and Tile Finishes: Silicone bath 

sealant. 

G. Interior Joints and Seams at Abutting and Adjacent Materials in Food Service Areas: 

FDA Approved Sealant. 

H. Tile Expansion and Control Joints: Refer to Section 093000 – Tiling. 

I. Firestopped Joints: Refer to Section 078413 – Penetration Firestopping. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 

A. Section Includes: Standard hollow metal doors and frames. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, 

material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, 

and finishes. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 

1. Elevations of each door design. 

2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal 

thicknesses. 

3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal 

thicknesses. 

4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 

5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 

6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 

7. Details of accessories. 

8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 

C. Other Action Submittals: 

1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the 

supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings 

as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single 

manufacturer. 

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and 

labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on 

testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 

C. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784. 

Project No.: 10145 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 


19 March 2012


A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during 

transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack 

welded to jambs and mullions. 

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units 

maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4inch- 

high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 

1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air 

circulation. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements 

before fabrication. 


A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting 

drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, 

concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to 

Project site in time for installation. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; 

suitable for exposed applications. 

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free 

of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. 

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; 

with minimum A40 metallic coating. 

1. Provide minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating for doors and frames located in 

pool area rooms. 

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating 

designation; mill phosphatized. 

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with 

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized 

according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 



19 March 2012

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. 

F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured 

according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. 

2.2 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS 

A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; 

fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless 

otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 

1. Design: Flush panel. 

2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, 

polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steelstiffener 

core. 

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. 

b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors 

fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0 

deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 

1) Locations: Exterior doors. 

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. 

4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end 

closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 

5. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel 

Doors and Frames." 

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors 

complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level 

and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 

1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). 

C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metalliccoated 

sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below 

by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for 

physical performance level: 

1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). 

a. Provide doors of metallic-coated sheet steel at pool area rooms. 

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing 

plates from same material as door face sheets. 

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hotrolled 

steel sheet. 



19 March 2012

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and 

profile. 

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 

2. Fabricate frames as fully welded unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. 

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is 

indicated. 

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 

2. Fabricate frames as fully welded unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Provide frames of metallic-coated steel sheet at pool area rooms. 

4. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. 

5. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. 

6. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.042-inch- thick steel sheet. 

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement 

plates from same material as frames. 

2.4 FRAME ANCHORS 

A. Jamb Anchors: 

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame 

size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less 

than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch 

thick. 

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less 

than 0.042 inch thick. 

3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression 

anchors. 

4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8inch- 

diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from 

frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor 

location. 

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, 

and as follows: 

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive 

fasteners. 

2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, 

allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at 

finish floor surface. 



19 March 2012


A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. 

Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness 

of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure 

proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory 

assembled before shipment. 

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. 

C. Hollow Metal Doors: 

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to 

permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water 

penetration. 

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 

D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or 

handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of 

same thickness metal as frames. 

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make 

smooth, flush, and invisible. 

2. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or 

joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at 

crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed 

fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 

4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to 

be grouted. 

5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four 

spot welds per anchor. 

6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: 

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and 

bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as 

follows: 

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 

2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and 

bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as 

follows: 

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 

2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 

3) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and 

mounted in metal-stud partitions. 

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. 

d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches 

from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches 

o.c. 



19 March 2012 

081113 - 5

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door 

silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. 

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door 

silencers. 

b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door 

silencers. 

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either 

cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. 

F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated 

mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping 

according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in 

Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to 

ANSI/SDI A250.8. 

2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surfacemounted 

door hardware. 

3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and 

ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for 

hardware. 

2.6 STEEL FINISHES 

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and 

pretreating. 

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free 

primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by 

primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied 

coatings despite prolonged exposure. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 


the Work. 

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations 

before frame installation. 




19 March 2012


A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by 

grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and 

invisible on exposed faces. 

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for 

squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness. 

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surfacemounted 

door hardware. 


A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely 

fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. 

Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until 

permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove 

temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. 

b. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. 

c. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames 

have been properly set and secured. 

d. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are 

constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to 

floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. 

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of 

postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop 

Drawings. 

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 

4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling 

space between frames and masonry with grout. 

5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with 

postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make 

smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 

6. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled 

expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, 

and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 

7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, 

alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: 

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 

90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 



19 March 2012

. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal 

line parallel to plane of wall. 

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of 

jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. 

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances 

specified below. Shim as necessary. 

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: 

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. 

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. 

c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. 

d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): 

Maximum 3/4 inch. 

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 

3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105. 

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and 

with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before 

final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and 

replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or 

otherwise unacceptable. 

B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged 

areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. 

C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair 

paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. 




19 March 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 



FLUSH WOOD DOORS 

1. Solid-core doors with plastic-laminate faces. 

2. Hollow-core doors with plastic-laminate faces. 


A. Product Data: For each type of door. 

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of 

door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 

2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 

3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 

4. Undercuts. 

5. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. 

C. Samples: For plastic-laminate door faces. 


2.01 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL 

A. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a 

qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive 

pressure according to NFPA 252. 

1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection 

rating indicated. 

2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications 

indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed 

intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 

B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft 

control, based on testing according to UL 1784. 

C. Mineral-Core Doors: 

Project No.: 10145 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 


19 March 2012

1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced 

quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating 

indicated. 

2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability 

approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate 

through-bolting hardware. 

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with 

improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified 

requirements for exposed edges. 

D. Hollow-Core Doors: 

1. Construction: Standard hollow core. 

2.02 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED DOORS 

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: 

1. Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with 

NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. 

2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate 

manufacturer's full range of products. 

3. Construction: Three plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is 

abrasive planed before faces are applied. 

B. Interior Hollow-Core Doors: 

1. Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with 

NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. 

2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate 

manufacturer's full range of products. 


A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance 

requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors. 

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 

C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 



A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." 

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions 

and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 



19 March 2012

1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. 

2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105. 

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as 

indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or 

permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges 

of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. 

Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering 

unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 

inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. 

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 



ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 

1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. 


A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction 

details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames 

for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments 

to other work. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door(s) and frame(s) through one 

source from a single manufacturer. 

B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical 

to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics and 

that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable 

to authorities having jurisdiction. 


A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain 

access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work. 


2.1 STEEL MATERIALS 

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 591/A 591M with cold-rolled 

steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), 

exposed. 

Project No.: 10145 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 


19 March 2012

C. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and 

Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 

1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, 

"Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could 

impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, 

complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC- 

SP 8, "Pickling." 

2. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and 

pretreating. 

2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS 

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited 

to, the following: 

1. Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co. 

2. Dur-Red Products. 

3. Jensen Industries. 

4. J. L. Industries, Inc. 

5. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 

B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet. 

1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 

2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face 

flange of frame. 

3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with 1-inch- wide, surfacemounted 

trim. 

4. Hinges: Continuous piano. 

C. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated 

from steel sheet. 

1. Locations: Ceiling surfaces. 

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 

3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes. 

4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet 

metal with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch. 


trim. 


7. Automatic Closer: Spring type. 

8. Latch: Self-latching device with interior release. 

D. Fire Rated, Uninsulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: 

Fabricated from steel sheet. 

1. Locations: Wall surfaces. 

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 

3. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal, flush construction. 



19 March 2012


trim. 


6. Automatic Closer: Spring type. 

7. Latch: Self-latching device with interior release. 


A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units 

ready for installation. 

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide 

materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with 

exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. 

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. 

Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to 

types of supports indicated. 

1. Exposed Flanges: As indicated. 

2. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood 

framing. 



A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. 

B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 


A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. 

B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise 

damaged. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


FOLDING WOOD AND GLASS DOOR SYSTEMS 

A. Section Includes: Engineered sliding/folding wood and glass door system, including 

wood/aluminum frame, threshold, wood panels, sliding/folding and locking 

hardware, splines, weather stripping, glass and glazing; designed to provide an 

opening glass wall, with sizes and configurations as shown on drawings. 


A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers 

Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act 

(ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 


A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s literature including independently tested data listing 

performance criteria and Owner’s Manual with installation instructions. 

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensioning, direction of swing, configuration, swing panels, 

typical head jamb, side jambs and sill details, type of glazing material and handle 

height. 


A. Manufacturer: Provide complete, precision built, engineered, pre-fitted unit by a single 

source manufacturer with at least 20 years experience in providing folding/sliding door 

systems for large openings in the North American market. 

1. The manufacturer must have a quality management system registration to the 

ISO 9001: 2008 standard. 

2. The manufacturer must have an environmental management system registration 

to the ISO 14001: 2005 standard. 

B. Performance Requirements: Provide from manufacturer that has independently tested 

typical units. Testing results to include air infiltration in accordance with ASTM E 283, 

water penetration in accordance with ASTM E 547, structural loading in accordance 

with ASTM E 330, and forced entry in accordance with AAMA 1303.5 and CAWM 

300-96. 

C. Thermal Performance U value: Unit to be rated, certified and labeled in accordance 

with NFRC 100, shown in manufacturer’s latest published data for the glazing, sill and 

direction of opening specified. 

Project No.: 10145 FOLDING WOOD AND GLASS DOOR SYSTEMS 


19 March 2012

D. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Unit to rated, certified and labeled in 

accordance with NFRC 200, shown in manufacturer’s latest published data for 

the glazing, sill, and direction of opening specified. 

E. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in the installation of manufacturer’s 

products or other similar products for large openings. Installer to provide reference list 

of at least 3 projects of similar scale and complexity successfully completed in the last 3 

years. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for folding door 

systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop 

Drawings. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty against defects in materials and 

workmanship. 

B. Warranty Period: Ten years for rollers and for seal failure of insulated glass 

supplied. For all other components: two years from date of Substantial Completion. 



A. Basis-of-Design Product: WD66, the Standard Wood Framed Folding System as 

supplied by NANA WALL SYSTEMS, INC. 

B. NANA WALL SYSTEMS, INC. 

707 Redwood Highway, Mill Valley, CA 94941 

Toll Free: (800) 873-5673 

Telephone: (415) 383-3148 

Fax: (415) 383-0312 

Website: www.nanawall.com 

Email: info@nanawall.com 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Frame and Panels: From manufacturer’s standard profiles, provide head track, side 

jambs, panels, and glazing stops with dimensions shown on drawings. 

B. Aluminum Extrusion: Extrusions with nominal thickness of .078” (2.0 mm). Alloy 

specified as AIMgSi0.5 with strength rated as 6063-T5 or F-22 (European standard). 

Anodized conforming to AAMA 611.98. 



19 March 2012

C. Glass: Provide manufacturer’s standard glass and dry glazing with EPDM gaskets and 

glass stops fixed with hidden nails. Glass to comply with safety glazing requirements of 

ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR 1201. 


A. Use solid, three layer, cross grained frame and panel profiles, hinges and spines, 

sliding and folding hardware, locking hardware and handles, threshold and track, 

glass and glazing and weather stripping as specified herein to make a folding glass 

wall. Factory pre-assemble as is standard for manufacturer and ship with all components 

and installation instructions. 

B. Sizes and Configurations: See drawings for selected custom dimensions within 

maximum frame sizes possible as indicated in manufacturer’s literature. See drawings 

for selected number of panels and configuration. 

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified 

in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 


3.1 ERECTION 

A. Because of the large dimensions involved and the weight and movement of the 

panels, verify the structural integrity of the header such that the maximum deflection 

with live and dead loads is limited to be the lesser of L/720 of the span and 1/4”. 

Structural support for lateral loads (both wind load and eccentric load when the panels 

are stacked open) must be provided. It is recommended that all building dead loads be 

applied to the header prior to installing the NanaWall. If so and if a reasonable amount 

of time has been allowed for the effect of this dead load on the header, then only the 

building’s live load can be used to meet the above requirements of L/720 or 1/4”. If not, 

both the dead and live loads need to be considered. 

B. Examine surfaces of openings and verify dimensions; verify rough openings are level, 

plumb, and square, with no unevenness, bowing, or bumps on the floor. 

C. Installation of units constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. 


A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements 

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 




19 March 2012


A. General: 

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

2. Do not install damaged components. 

3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 

4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 

5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and 

electrolytic deterioration. 

6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Install frame in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and installation 

instructions. Properly flash and waterproof around the perimeter of the opening. 

C. Installer to provide appropriate anchorage devices and to securely and rigidly fit frame 

in place, absolutely level, straight, plumb and square. Install frame in proper 

elevation, plane and location, and in proper alignment with other work. 

D. If necessary, provide drain connections from lower track. 

E. Install panels, handles and lock set in accordance with manufacturer’s 

recommendations and installation instructions. 

F. If necessary, adjust hardware for proper operation. 

G. Finishing: seal and finish promptly after installation and prior to exposure to weather 

in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 

H. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 

Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. 

I. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and 

without warp or rack. 

J. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to 

produce weathertight installation. 

3.4 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust operating door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by 

manufacturer. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 



ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 

1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. 

2. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors. 


A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers 

Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act 

(ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 


A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the 

following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure 

due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 

1. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 

2. Failure includes the following: 

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. 

b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. 

c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal 

and structural movements to glazing. 

d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural 

movements. 

e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other 

components. 

f. Sealant failure. 

g. Failure of operating units. 

B. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through 

fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested 

according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. 

ft.. 

C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not 

evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested 

according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of 

positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.. 

Project No.: 10145 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 


19 March 2012

D. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal 

movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and 

surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of 

materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material 

surfaces. 

2. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F. 

E. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and 

framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45 when 

tested according to AAMA 1503. 

F. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and 

framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F 

when tested according to AAMA 1503. 



material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes 

for aluminum-framed systems. 

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, 

details, and attachments to other work. 

1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for 

drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. 

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a 

qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with 

performance requirements. 

D. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals. 

E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and 

approved for installation of units required for this Project. 

B. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & 

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines. 

C. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from 




19 March 2012


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminumframed 

systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements 

on Shop Drawings. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to 

repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with 

requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 

b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. 

c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. 

d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. 

e. Failure of operating components. 




A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for aluminum-framed systems is based on EFCO 

Corp. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a 

comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Kawneer. 

2. Vistawall Architectural Products. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish 

indicated. 

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 

2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 

3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 

4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 

5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. 

B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, 

complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface 

preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to 

recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable 

SSPC standard. 



19 March 2012

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 

3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS 

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of 

thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 

1. Construction: Thermally broken. 

2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 

3. Glazing Plane: Center. 

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with 

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, 

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out 

from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 

D. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, 

nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. 

E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by 

manufacturer for joint type. 

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS 

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." 

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or 

extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. 

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS 

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing 

operation. 

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- 

thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten 

corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or 

that incorporate concealed tie rods. 

2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width. 



19 March 2012

a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 

inches above floor or ground plane. 

B. Entrance Door Hardware: Additional hardware specified in Division 08 Section 

"Guestroom Locking System." 

2.6 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE 

A. General: Provide entrance door hardware for each entrance door to comply with 

requirements in this Section. 

1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color 

indicated, and products complying with BHMA standard referenced. 

2. Opening-Force Requirements: 

a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch and not more 

than 30 lbf to set the door in motion. 

b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door. 

B. Opening-Force Requirements: 

1. Latches and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf required to release latch. 

C. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner. 

1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into 

a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed. 

2. Exterior and Pool Room Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 

3. Quantities: 

a. For doors up to 87 inches high, provide 3 hinges per leaf. 

D. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and 

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, 

based on testing according to UL 305. 

1. See Division 08 Section “Guestroom Locking System.” 

E. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated 

for aluminum framing. 

F. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6. 

G. Surface-Mounted Holders: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. 

1. Provide with SRI finish at pool room. 

2. Provide with overhead stop. 

H. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. 

1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or 

ASTM D 2287, molded PVC. 



19 March 2012

2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile 

with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing. 

I. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed 

fasteners on mounting strip. 

J. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 

1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch. 

2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified 

in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 

requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 


A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. 

B. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the 

following characteristics: 

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 

3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and 

moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 

4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 

5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and 

framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 

6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 

7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to 

greatest extent possible. 

C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting 

stops. 

D. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door 

operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 

1. At exterior and pool room doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed 

stops. 

E. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 

1. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. 

F. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the 

greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door 

hardware before applying finishes. 



19 March 2012

G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project 

according to Shop Drawings. 

2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES 

A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film 

thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for 

cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 

1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample. 



A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements 

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 



A. General: 

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

2. Do not install damaged components. 

3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 

4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 

5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and 

electrolytic deterioration. 

6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Metal Protection: 

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action 

by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by 

installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this 

purpose. 

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by 

painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. 

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing 

members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 

Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. 

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and 

without warp or rack. 



19 March 2012

F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." 

G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact 

points. 

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather 

stripping. 

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door 

hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written 

instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 

H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to 

produce weathertight installation. 

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES 

A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection 

tolerances: 

1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 

12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 

2. Alignment: 

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. 

b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 

inch. 

B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 

inch. 

3.4 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by 

manufacturer. 

1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide 

a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open 

position to 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading door edge. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 



SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 

1. Exterior and interior, sliding, power-operated automatic entrances. 


1. Division 08 Section “Guestroom Locking System” for card reader. 

2. Division 26 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for 

automatic entrance operators and access-control devices. 


A. AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers. 

B. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door 

operator to open the door. 

C. IBC: International Building Code. 

D. Safety Device: Device that, to avoid injury, prevents a door from opening or closing. 

E. For automatic door terminology, refer to BHMA A156.10 for definitions of terms. 


A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface 

temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to 

both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 


surfaces. 

B. Operating Temperature Range: Provide automatic entrances that operate within minus 

20 to plus 122 deg F. 

C. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 1.25 

cfm/sq. ft. of fixed entrance system area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a 

minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.. 

D. Opening-Force Requirements: 

Project No.: 10145 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 


19 March 2012

1. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbf required 

for a breakaway door or panel to open. 

E. Entrapment Force Requirements: 

1. Power-Operated Sliding Doors: Not more than 30 lbf required to prevent 

stopped door from closing. 




for automatic entrances. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical 

characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 

B. Shop Drawings: For automatic entrances. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, 

hardware mounting heights, and attachments to other work. 

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 

2. Activation and safety devices. 

3. Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities, 

and locations. 

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's 

standard sizes. 

D. Product Certificates: For each type of emergency-exit automatic entrance, from 

manufacturer. 

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a 

qualified testing agency, for automatic entrances. 

F. Maintenance Data: For automatic entrances, safety devices, and control systems to 

include in maintenance manuals. 

G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with company certificate issued by 

AAADM. 

B. Source Limitations for Automatic Entrances: Obtain automatic entrances from single 

source from single manufacturer. 

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in 

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and 

application. 

D. Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10. 



19 March 2012

E. Emergency-Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having 

jurisdiction for automatic entrances serving as a required means of egress. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings to receive automatic 

entrances by field measurements before fabrication. 


A. Templates: Obtain templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory 

prepared for installing automatic entrances, and distribute to parties involved. Check 

Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for 

locating and installing automatic entrances to comply with indicated requirements. 

B. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, 

thickness, hand, function, and finish. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrances 

with hardware required for rest of Project. 

C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic 

entrances with connections to power supplies and access-control system. 

1.8 WARRANTY 


repair or replace components of automatic entrances that fail in materials or 

workmanship within specified warranty period. 


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 

b. Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware. 

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond 

normal weathering and use. 



2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish 

indicated. 

1. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 

2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 

B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer 

complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface 



19 March 2012 

084229 - 3

preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to 

recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable 

SSPC standard. 

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 

3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 

C. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304. 

D. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304. 

E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcherleveled 

standard of flatness, in entrance manufacturer's standard thickness. 

F. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." 

G. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 

H. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 

requirements, except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 

I. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, 

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 

2.2 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances including 

doors, sidelites, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, 

activation and safety devices, and accessories required for a complete installation. 

B. Sliding Automatic Entrance: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 

Stanley, Dura-Glide 3000 or comparable product by one of the following: 

a. Biparting-Sliding Units: 

1) Besam Automated Entrance Systems, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group 

company. 

2) DORMA Automatics; Div. of DORMA Group North America. 

3) Stanley Access Technologies; Div. of The Stanley Works. 

2. Configuration: Biparting-sliding doors, with two sliding leaves and sidelites on 

each side. 

a. Traffic Pattern: Two way. 

b. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaves only. 

c. Mounting: Between jambs. 

3. Operator Features: 

a. Power opening and closing. 



19 March 2012 

084229 - 4

. Adjustable opening and closing speeds. 

c. Adjustable hold-open time between 0 and 30 seconds. 

d. Obstruction recycle. 

e. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator, key 

operated. 

f. Unlock and activation from remote switch at front desk. 

4. Sliding Door Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Manufacturer's 

standard carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon- or 

delrin-covered, ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a continuous roller 

track, or ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrincovered, 

continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier assembly by 

cantilever and pivot assembly. 

a. Rollers: Minimum of two ball-bearing roller wheels and two antirise 

rollers for each active leaf. 

5. Sliding Door Threshold: Manufacturer's standard threshold members and 

bottom-guide track system, with stainless-steel, ball-bearing-center roller wheels. 

a. Configuration: Saddle-type threshold across door opening and surfacemounted 

guide track system at sidelites. 

6. Combination Activation and Safety Device: Combination motion/presence 

sensor. 

7. Activation Device: Motion sensor mounted on each side of door header to 

detect pedestrians in activating zone and to open door. 

8. Finish: Finish framing, door(s) and header with finish and color matching 

adjacent storefront. 

2.3 ENTRANCE COMPONENTS 

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch 

thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 

1. Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum 0.062-inch wall thickness. 

B. Stile and Rail Doors: Manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- thick, glazed doors with 

minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. 

Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate 

concealed tie-rods that span full length of top and bottom rails. 

1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and 

manufacturer's standard preformed gaskets. 

2. Stile Design: Wide stile, more than 4-inch nominal width. 

3. Rail Design: 5-inch nominal height. 

4. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail member for each door; match stile design 

and finish. 

C. Sidelite(s): Manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- deep sidelite(s) with minimum 0.125inch- 

thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members matching door design 

and finish. 



19 March 2012

1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Same materials and design as for stile and rail 

door. 

2. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and 

manufacturer's standard preformed gaskets. 

3. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail members for each sidelite; match stile 

design. 

D. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded aluminum and 

extending full width of automatic entrance units to conceal door operators and controls. 

Provide hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door 

operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access. 

1. Mounting: Surface mounted. 

2. Capacity: Capable of supporting doors up to 175 lb per leaf over spans up to 

14 feet without intermediate supports. 

E. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with 

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 

2.4 HARDWARE 

A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and 

hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to 

match door finish. 

B. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Provide breakaway device that allows 

door to swing out in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any operating position. 

Maximum force to open door shall be 50 lbf according to BHMA A156.10. Interrupt 

powered operation of door operator while in breakaway mode. 

C. Locks: Coordinate with card reader and switch at front desk. 

D. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. 

1. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile 

with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing. 


A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and 

thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. 

1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. 

2. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or 

discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed 

surfaces by descaling or grinding. 

3. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners 

are required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to 

match framing. 

a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and 

structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. 



19 March 2012 

084229 - 6

. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 


by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape 

recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 

B. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. Complete 

fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment 

to Project site. 

1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard 

welded or mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required 

for a complete system to support required loads. 

2. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed 

finish surfaces. 

3. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 

4. Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection 

devices. 

5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to 

produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 

6. Fabricate exterior components to drain water passing joints and condensation 

and moisture occurring or migrating within system to the exterior. 

7. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly 

from building structure. 

8. Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units. 

C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required 

to support imposed loads and for installing hardware. 

D. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and 

type of glazing indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual." 

E. Hardware: Factory install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as 

required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. 

Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes. 

1. Provide sliding-type weather stripping, mortised into door, at perimeter of doors. 

F. Activation and Safety Devices: 

1. General: Factory install devices in doors and headers as required by 

BHMA A156.10 for type of door and direction of travel. 

2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS 



B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a 

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 



19 March 2012

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. 

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the 

range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 



A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of 

automatic entrances. 



A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline 

joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints 

watertight. 


by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape 

recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by 

painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. 

B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established 

lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor 

securely in place. 

1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent 

possible. 

2. Set headers, operating brackets, and guides level and true to location with 

anchorage for permanent support. 

3. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within 

framing members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior. 

C. Access-Control Devices: Connect access-control devices to access-control system as 

specified in Division 08 Section “Guestroom Locking System.” 

D. Activation and Safety Devices: Install and adjust devices to provide detection field and 

functions indicated. 

E. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to 

provide weathertight installation. 

1. Setframing members and flashings in full sealant bed. 

2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant. 

F. Signage: Apply signage on both sides of each door as required by referenced door 

standards. 



19 March 2012 

084229 - 8

G. Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to 

terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations 

on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. 

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation and for 

weathertight closure; comply with requirements in BHMA A156.10. 

B. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts as recommended by 

manufacturer. 

C. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation 

equivalent to 3 days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). Lubricate hardware, 

operating equipment, and other moving parts. 


A. Clean glass and metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and 

sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match 

original finish. 

1. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" for cleaning and 

maintaining glass. 

3.5 DEMONSTRATION 

A. Engage a certified inspector to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, 

and maintain automatic entrances. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 



DOOR HARDWARE 

1. Commercial door hardware for the following: 

a. Swinging doors. 

b. Non-fire-rated sliding doors. 

c. Other doors to the extent indicated. 

2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 

3. Electrified door hardware. 


1. Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for astragals provided as part of firerated 

labeled assemblies. 

2. Division 08 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for entrance 

door hardware, except cylinders. 

3. Division 08 Section “Guestroom Locking System” for hotel access control 

hardware. 

4. Division 26 Sections for connections to electrical power system and for lowvoltage 

wiring work. 

5. Division 28 Sections for connections to building fire alarm system. 


A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, 

dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 

B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following: 

1. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and fire alarm system. 

C. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, signed by product manufacturer. 

D. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance 

manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule. 

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 

Project No.: 10145 DOOR HARDWARE 


19 March 2012


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single 

manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and 

labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, 

for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 

1. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall 

be established at 40 inches or less above the sill. 

C. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a 

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended 

use. 


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware 

delivered to Project site. 

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door 

hardware sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary 

fasteners with each item or package. 

C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 


A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work 

specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of 

other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing 

door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 

B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door 

hardware with connections to power supplies and fire alarm system and detection 

devices. 

1.6 WARRANTY 


repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship 

within specified warranty period. 


a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 

b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. 

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond 

normal weathering and use. 



19 March 2012

2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, except as 

follows: 

a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 

b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and 

maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, 

and removal and replacement of door hardware. 


2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE 

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this 

Section and door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and 

products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products. 

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other 

distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in "Door Hardware 

Sets". Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are 

listed for door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum 

requirements. 

2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these 

standards and requirements for description, quality, and function. 

C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements 

apply to product selection: 

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, 


but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 

2.2 HINGES, GENERAL 

A. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 

1. Entrance Doors: Heavy-weight hinges. 

2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges. 

3. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges. 

B. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 

1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 



19 March 2012

2. Interior Hinges: Steel, with steel pin. 

3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin. 

C. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 

2.3 HINGES 

1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped 

holes. 

2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 

3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 

4. Screws: Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 

A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1. 

B. Available Manufacturers: 

1. Hager Companies (HAG). 

2. Stanley Commercial Hardware (STH). 

2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL 

A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, 

comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's 

"Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and 

Facilities (ADAAG)." 

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting 

of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. 

B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall 

not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, 

tool, or special knowledge for operation. 

C. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled 

fire doors, and as follows: 

1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw. 

2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw. 

3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw. 

D. Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, 

with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, and as 

follows: 

1. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 

2. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5. 



19 March 2012

2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES 

A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets 

comply with the following: 

1. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2. 

B. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated; Series 4000. 

1. Available Manufacturers: 

a. PDQ Manufacturing (PDQ). 

b. SARGENT Manf. Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 

c. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). 

2.6 AUXILIARY LOCKS AND LATCHES 

A. Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. 


a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM). 

b. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS). 

c. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (FAL). 

d. PDQ Manufacturing (PDQ). 

e. SARGENT Mfg. Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 

f. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). 

B. Push-Button Combination Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 for cylindrical locks. 


2.7 EXIT DEVICES 

a. Kaba Ilco Inc.; a Kaba Group company (KAB). 

A. Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. 

B. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating 

devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. 

Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities 

Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting 

of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. 

C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not 

require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, 

or special knowledge for operation. 



19 March 2012

D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to 

UL 305. 

E. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a 

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and 

panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. 

F. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder; material and finish to match locksets, unless 


1. Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated. 

G. Available Manufacturers: 

1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM). 

2. DORMA Architectural Hardware (DAH). 

3. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 

4. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD). 

2.8 LOCK CYLINDERS 

A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. 

B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, 

stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: 

1. Number of Pins: Six. 

C. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. 

2.9 OPERATING TRIM 

A. Standard: BHMA A156.6. 

B. Materials: Fabricate from stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Available Manufacturers: 


2. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 

3. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 

4. Trimco (TBM). 

2.10 CLOSERS 

A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating 

devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. 

Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities 

Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 



19 March 2012

1. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: 

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to 

door. 

b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall 

not require more than 30 lbf to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open 

door to minimum required width. 

C. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written 

recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to 

weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to 

meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 

D. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. Provide modern-with-cover type with type of 

arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise 

indicated. 


a. DORMA Architectural Hardware (DAH). 

b. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). 

c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company 

(SGT). 

2.11 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS 

A. Size: 1-1/2 inches less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch less than door width 

on pull side, by height specified in door hardware sets. 

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screws. 

C. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from 

the following material: 

1. Material: 0.050-inch-thick stainless steel. 


a. Hager Companies (HAG). 

b. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 

c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 

d. Trimco (TBM). 

2.12 STOPS AND HOLDERS 

A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. 

1. Provide wall stops for doors unless other type stops are scheduled or indicated. 

Floor stops are not permitted. Where wall stops are not appropriate, provide 

overhead holders. 



19 March 2012

B. Combination Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1. 

C. Electromagnetic Door Holders: BHMA A156.15. 

1. Coordinate with fire detectors and interface with fire alarm system for labeled 

fire door assemblies. 

D. Available Manufacturers: 

1. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). 

2. DORMA Architectural Hardware (DAH). 


4. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 

5. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX). 

2.13 DOOR GASKETING 


B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors; and provide 

smoke, light, and sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated, scheduled or 

required. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as 

indicated. 

1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and 

frame. 

2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are 

closed. 

3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door 

is closed. 

C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than 

for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283. 

D. Smoke Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by 

a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for 

smoke-control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 

1. Provide smoke gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled 

doors. 

E. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and 

labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, 

for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 

1. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall 

be established at 40 inches or less above the sill. 

F. Sound Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting 

agency, for sound rating of 30, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408. Provide 

evidence that this STC, as well as any requirements for smoke gasketing, can be 

maintained under industry allowable tolerances for warp (AWI) and plumb (SDI). 



19 March 2012

G. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702. 

H. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Provide a self-adhesive seal at the meeting stiles where an 

astragal is not permitted due to the operation of hardware or by code restrictions. 

I. Door Bottoms: Provide fully adjustable cap sweep door bottom for interior doors where 

designated. Where an undercut is required for HVAC design, provide product that 

allows air to pass but still blocks light and offers sound attenuation. Provide brush 

sweep door bottom with rain drip for exterior doors. 

J. Available Manufacturers: 

1. Door and Hardware Systems, Inc. (DHS). 


3. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). 

2.14 THRESHOLDS 


B. Accessibility Requirements: Where thresholds are indicated to comply with accessibility 

requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance 

Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings 

and Facilities (ADAAG)." 

C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 1/2 inch 

high. 

D. Thresholds for Guestroom Doors: Solid color PVC (or equal material) that complies 

with ASTM E 648 Class 1 Flammability requirements. 

E. Available Manufacturers: 

1. Door and Hardware Systems, Inc. (DHS). 


3. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). 

2.15 SLIDING AND FOLDING DOOR HARDWARE 

A. General: BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including rails, hangers, 

supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated. 

B. Bypassing Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 75 lb. 

2.16 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE 


B. Door Guard: Solid bar door guard with edge guard. Hinged bar 4-3/4 inch length, 

can be positioned 180 degrees away from the door when not in use. 



19 March 2012

C. Door Viewer: 200 degree door viewer, permits one-way observation. 

D. Rain Drip Cap: 2-1/2 inch overhead drip guard. 

E. Knox Box: Hardened steel plate recessed mount lock box. Provide model as required 

by local Fire Department, in quantity and locations as directed by the Fire Department. 

F. Available Manufacturers: 

2.17 FINISHES 

a. Hager Companies (HAG). 

b. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 

c. Knox Company (KNX). 

d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 

e. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 

f. Trimco (TBM). 

A. Standard: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets. 

1. US26D Satin Chrome, unless otherwise noted. 

2. The finish on all hardware must be the same, including hinges. 




3.1 HARDWARE SCHEDULE 

A. Manufacturers: 

1. Door and Hardware Systems, Inc. DHS 

2. IVES Hardware IVS 

3. Schlage SCH 

4. Falcon FAL 

5. Knox Company KNX 

6. Kaba Ilco, Inc. KAB 

Door Hardware Set No. 1 

Guestroom Entry Doors 

No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish 

3 Hanging Devices Spring Hinges US26D 

1 Closing Devices Surface Closer Alum 

1 Securing Devices Card Lockset See Section 08720 US26D 

1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D 

1 Frame Seal Gasket “Cush-N-Seal” DHS #105 Dark Brown 

1 Door Bottom “Cap Sweep” DHS #CS Dark Brown 

1 Threshold “Fire Threshold” DHS #FT2.75 Black 



19 March 2012

1 Accessories Door Guard IVS #482 US26D 

1* Miscellaneous Items Door Viewer Chrome 

* Provide 2 door viewers at accessible guestrooms. 


Guestroom Bathroom and Bedroom Doors 


3 Hanging Devices Hinges US26D 

1 Securing Devices Privacy Lockset US26D 



Guestroom Connecting Doors 


4 Hanging Devices Spring Hinges US26D 


2 Securing Devices Exit Latch SCH #AL25D US26D 

2 Securing Devices Deadbolt FAL #D-861M US26D 




2 Accessories Door Guard IVS #482 US26D 


Sliding Closet Doors 


1 set Sliding Door Hardware 9702 Series Hager US26D 


Interior Stair Doors 



1 Securing Devices Fire Exit Device US26D 


1 Protective Trim Kick Plate – 8 inch US32D 





19 March 2012


Exterior Stair Doors 



1 Securing Devices Exit Device – no trim US26D 

1 Closing Devices Surface Closer w/stop Alum 

1 Protective Trim Kick Plate – 8 inch US32D 

1 Frame Seal Gasket Weatherstripping 

1 Door Bottom Brush Sweep w/rain drip Alum 

1 Threshold Thermal Barrier Saddle Alum 

1 Miscellaneous Items Rain Drip Cap Alum 

1 Miscellaneous Items Knox Box KNX 


Exterior Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors 


1 Miscellaneous Items Knox Box KNX 

Balance of hardware by door supplier. 


Vestibule Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors 


1 Securing Devices Card Reader See Section 087200 

1 Securing Devices Remote Release Switch Door Supplier 



Typical Public Exit Exterior Doors 


1 Securing Devices Exit Device US26D 




Typical Exterior Doors 



1 Securing Devices Storeroom Lockset US26D 


1 Frame Seal Gasket Weatherstripping 

1 Door Bottom Brush Sweep w/rain drip Alum 

1 Threshold Thermal Barrier Saddle Alum 

1 Miscellaneous Rain Drip Cap Alum 



19 March 2012


Locked Storage, Mechanical, Elev. Equip., Pantry, Linen 






1 * Door Bottom “Cap Sweep” DHS #CS Dark Brown 

1 * Threshold Transition Strip DHS #HS2.75 Black 

1 Frame Seal Gasket Perimeter Gasket 

* Provide Door Bottom and Transition Strip at Elevator Equipment and Maintenance Rooms 


Electrical Room 








Unlocked Storage, Breakroom, Dryer, Meeting Room Closets 



1 Securing Devices Passage Latch US26D 



Registration, Admin. Area 



1 Securing Devices Key Pad Lock KAB Simplex L1000 US26D 

Series 




1 Miscellaneous Items Door Viewer Chrome 


Public Restroom Doors 



1 Operating Trim Pull Plate US32D 

1 Operating Trim Push Plate US32D 

1 Closing Devices Surface Closer US26D 



19 March 2012

1 Protective Trim Units Kick Plate – 8 inch US32D 




Office Doors 



1 Securing Devices Entry Lockset US26D 



Meeting Room Doors - single 




1 Closing Devices Surface Closer US26D 





1 Miscellaneous Items Door Viewer Chrome 


Unlocked Storage w/closer 








Laundry Room 





2 Protective Trim Units Armor Plates – 36 inch US32D 




1 Threshold Transition Strip DHS #HS2.75 Black 



19 March 2012


Linen Chute Termination Room 





1 Protective Trim Units Armor Plate – 36 inch US32D 



Employee Restroom 






Exercise Room , Business Center 



1 Securing Devices Card Lockset- no deadbolt See Section 087200 US26D 





Pool or Pool Vestibule 


1 Securing Devices Exit Device See Section 087200 





Pool Equipment Room 




1 Closing Devices Surface Closer SRI 







19 March 2012


Pool Public Restroom 







Guest Laundry 



1 Securing Devices Card Lock – no deadbolt See Section 087200 US26D 







Pool Equipment Storage Door 





1 Protective Trim Units Kickplate – 8 inch US32D 




Mechanical Room Doors 




1 Securing Devices Flush Bolts US32D 

2 Closing Devices Surface Closer w/holder Alum 

1 Miscellaneous Astragal 

1 Miscellaneous Coordinator 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


GUESTROOM LOCKING SYSTEM 

A. This Section includes guestroom locks, exit latch retraction bar, cards, encoders, 

computers and hard-wired stand-alone card readers to provide a complete locking 

system. 

1. See Division 8 Section “Door Hardware” for all other hardware items. 


A. Product Data: For each product specified. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include details of installation, wiring diagrams, and attachments to 

other Work. 



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 


1. Onity (TESA). 

2. ASI (CISA). 

3. Kaba Ilco. 

4. Safok. 

5. Assa Abloy Hospitality. 

6. Hotel Resource Group. 

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. Provide electronic lock system complete with the following components: 

1. Mortise lockset, Grade 1 or 2L, ANSI 15613, Series 1000. 

2. Deadbolt with a hardened steel insert with a minimum throw of 1 inch. 

3. Latch bolt, deadlocking type with a two-piece anti-friction mechanism and a 

minimum throw of ¾ inch. 

4. Occupancy indicator. 

5. Re-key after each guest use. 

6. Encoded card key 

7. Master key and emergency master key functions. 

8. Audit/interrogation feature. 

9. Back-up battery power. 

Project No.: 10145 GUESTROOM LOCKING SYSTEM 


19 March 2012

10. Latch bolt operated by inside lever at all times. 

11. When deadbolt is projected, all keys except emergency keys must be 

inoperable. 

12. Emergency key also acts as a lockout key. 

13. Inside lever must retract the latch bolt and deadbolt simultaneously. 

B. Finish: US26D Satin Chrome. 


3.1 INSPECTION 

A. Installer shall inspect doors and areas where equipment is to be applied and notify in 

writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with installation until 

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations for installation 

of system components. 

B. Install electronic lock units at the following locations and as directed: 

1. Guestroom entry doors. 

2. Guest use areas. 

3. Back of house areas, as indicated. 

4. Entry doors, as indicated. 

C. Adjust operation of units in place to ensure proper latching and locking. 


A. Provide instruction to Owner’s personnel to ensure that the system is operated 

properly. This training shall be accomplished before owner’s personnel are allowed to 

operate the system, and shall occur at project site. 


Project No.: 10145 GUESTROOM LOCKING SYSTEM 


19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


GLAZING 

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including 

those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference 

to this Section: 

1. Doors. 

2. Glazed entrances. 

3. Interior borrowed lites. 

4. Storefront framing. 


1. Division 08 Section "Mirrors." 


A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, 

or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. 

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to 

ASTM C 1036. 

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air 

or a specified gas. 

D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is 

attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage 

and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's 

written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or 

film on interior surfaces of glass. 


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement 

and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass 

breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and 

installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; 

deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. 

B. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from 

the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on 

glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on 

Project No.: 10145 GLAZING 


19 March 2012

surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat 

loss. 


surfaces. 

C. All glazing shall meet the requirements of AAMA Specification 603-85. 


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. 

B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- square Samples for glass 

and of 12-inch- long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips 

of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. 

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying 

that products furnished comply with requirements. 

D. Qualification Data: For installers. 

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 


A. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one 

source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated. 

B. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with 

NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable 

to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing 

according to NFPA 252. 

C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product 

manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are 

indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this 

Section or in referenced standards. 

1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines 

for Sealed Insulating Glass Units." 


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as 

needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, 

temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 

B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply 

with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing 

to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. 



19 March 2012


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate 

temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers 

and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other 

causes. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, 

made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace 

insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the 

nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 



2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS 

A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of 

class indicated. 

1. Ultra-Clear (Low-Iron) Float Glass: Class I (clear); with a minimum 91 percent 

visible light transmission and a minimum solar heat gain coefficient of 0.87. 

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; 

of class, kind, and condition indicated. 

1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass 

where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of 

individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in 

Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. 

2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 

3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other 

uncoated glass). 

4. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS 

(heat-strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated. 

C. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of 

glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for 

Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating- 

Glass Units" Article. 

1. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for 

insulating-glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are 

measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge. 

2. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows: 

a. Manufacturer's standard sealants. 



19 March 2012

3. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and 

construction. 

2.2 FIRE-RATED GLAZING PRODUCTS 

A. Monolithic Ceramic Glazing Material: Proprietary product in the form of clear flat 

sheets of 3/16-inch nominal thickness weighing 2.5 lb/sq. ft., and as follows: 

1. Fire-Protection Rating: As indicated for the fire window in which glazing material 

is installed, and permanently labeled by a testing and inspecting agency 


2. Product: "Standard FireLite" (unpolished on both surfaces) by Nippon Electric 

Glass Co., Ltd., and distributed by Technical Glass Products. 

2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS 

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following 

requirements: 

1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and 

with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of 

insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of 

service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on 

testing and field experience. 

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for 

selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions 

existing at time of installation. 

B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements 

indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those 

referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to 

exposure and joint substrates. 

C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to products used in test 

assemblies to obtain fire-protection rating. 

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced 

glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials 

for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces 

contacted in installation. 

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket 

manufacturer. 

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, 

plus or minus 5. 



19 March 2012

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer 

hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation 

indicated. 

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement 

(side walking). 

F. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test 

assembly to obtain fire-resistance rating. 

2.5 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS 

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with 

edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with 

written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to 

comply with system performance requirements. 

2.6 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS 

A. Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units: Class 1 (clear) Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass. 

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 

2.7 INSULATING-GLASS UNITS 

A. Clear Insulating-Glass Units: 

1. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: As indicated. 

2. Interspace Content: Air. 

3. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass. 



A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, 

and offsets at corners. 

2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 

3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. 




19 March 2012


A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately 

before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL 

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, 

and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, 

including those in referenced glazing publications. 

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged 

glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass 

with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and 

impair performance and appearance. 

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined 

by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. 

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing 

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course 

of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. 

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass 

lites. 

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as 

follows: 

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of 

glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, 

unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to 

maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance 

requirements. 

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to 

sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final 

compressed thickness of tape. 

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving 

sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and 

according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. 

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar 


I. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner 

recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal 

corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 



19 March 2012


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed 

streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. 

Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. 

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction 

operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating 

substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as 

recommended by glass manufacturer. 

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry 

surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for 

buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing 

by glass manufacturer. 

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is 

damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. 

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days 

before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. 

Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


MIRRORS 

A. This Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors. 

1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors. 


1. Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for metal-framed mirrors. 


A. Deterioration of Mirrors: Defects developed from normal use that are attributable to 

the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices 

for maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to mirror manufacturer's written 

instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 


A. Provide mirrors that will not fail under normal usage. Failure includes glass breakage 

and deterioration attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation. 


A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. Mirror mastic. 

2. Mirror hardware. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and 

attachments to other work. 

C. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic, signed by product 

manufacturer. 

D. Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer indicating that 

mirror mastic was tested for compatibility and adhesion with mirror backing and 

substrates on which mirrors are installed. 

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 

Project No.: 10145 MIRRORS 


19 March 2012


A. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from one source for each type of mirror 

indicated. 

B. Source Limitations for Mirror Glazing Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories 

from one source for each type of accessory indicated. 

C. Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations: 

1. GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 

Refer to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise 

defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 

2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the 

Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." 


A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to 

prevent damage to mirrors from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure 

to sun, or other causes. 

B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and 

handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and 

abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors, protected from 

moisture including condensation. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and 

humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by 

mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that deteriorate as defined in 

"Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified 

warranty period indicated below: 

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRROR MATERIALS 

A. Clear Glass Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Select Quality. 



19 March 2012


A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 85, 

plus or minus 5. 

B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror 

manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges. 

C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrors 

and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with 

glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed. 

2.3 MIRROR HARDWARE 

A. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep 

enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated 

and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece. 

1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 

and 7/8 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch. 

2. Top Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8 and 

1 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch. 

B. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it 

in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed. 

C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. 

Provide toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 

Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls 

and where indicated. 


A. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes. 

B. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible 

surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors. 

C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Rounded polished edge. 

1. Seal edges of mirrors after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric 

penetration of glass coating. 

2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory 

immediately after cutting to final sizes. 



19 March 2012



A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for 

compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions 

affecting performance. 

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of 

mirror mastic with existing finishes or primers. 

2. Proceed with mirror installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected and surfaces are dry. 


A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of 

substrates, including coating surfaces with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating 

where applicable. 


A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and 

with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner 

that avoids distorting reflected images. 

B. Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting 

surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. 

C. For wall-mounted mirrors, install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. 


A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from 

construction operations. 

B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water. 

C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to 

moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Fixed, aluminum louvers. 



LOUVERS AND VENTS 

1. Division 23 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment. 


A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 

apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 

B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades; i.e., the axes of the blades are 

horizontal. 

C. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain 

it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from 

opening. 

D. Storm-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain performance, 

as determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L. 


A. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as 

demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except 

for length and width according to AMCA 500-L. 



1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing 

specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. 

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, 

details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, 

angles, and spacing. 

Project No.: 10145 LOUVERS AND VENTS 


19 March 2012

1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing 

water intrusion. 

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of metal finish required. 

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according 

to AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a 

qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with 

performance requirements specified. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents from single source from a single 

manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color 

finish. 

B. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet 

Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements 

before fabrication. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6. 

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for 

forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. 

C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 319. 

D. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 

1. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 

2. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. 

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 


A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units 

as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly 

and coordinated installation. 

B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance. 



19 March 2012 

089000 - 2

C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with 

allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material 

tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 

D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. 

2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS 

A. Horizontal Storm-Resistant Louver: 

1. Louver Depth: 4 inches. 

2. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 

2.4 LOUVER SCREENS 

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 

1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 

2. Screening Type: Bird screening. 

2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL 



2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES 

A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film 

thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for 

cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 

1. Color and Gloss: Custom Color Match Architect's sample. 



A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 




19 March 2012


A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for 

installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry 

construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 


A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with 

adjacent work. 

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to 

screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight 

connection. 

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. 

D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, 

as indicated. 

E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes 

so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in 

the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide 

new units. 

F. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with 

concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying 

a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets 

or nonmetallic flashing. 

G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation 

progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 07 

Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation. 


A. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary 

covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil 

accumulate during construction period. 

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent 

not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. 

C. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence 

remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by 

Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 

1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color 

and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating. 



LOUVERS AND VENTS 


19 March 2012 

089000 - 4


1.1 SUMMARY 


GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 

A. Section Includes: Gypsum board shaft wall assemblies. 


A. Product Data: For each component of gypsum board shaft wall assembly. 



A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide 

materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to 

ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 

A. Fire-Resistance Rating: 2 hour. 

B. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end 

members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 

C. Room-Side Finish: Gypsum board. 

D. Shaft-Side Finish: As indicated by fire-resistance-rated assembly design designation. 

2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS 

A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints 

in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 

B. Gypsum Shaftliner Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; manufacturer's 

proprietary fire-resistive liner panels with paper faces. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may 

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. American Gypsum; Shaft Liner. 

b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC, Subsidiary of Georgia Pacific; ToughRock 

Fireguard Shaftliner. 

Project No.: 10145 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 


19 March 2012

c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Fire-Shield Shaftliner. 

d. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Liner Panel. 

C. Gypsum Board: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board." 

2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 

A. Steel Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal. 



A. General: Comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, 

manufacturer's written installation instructions, and ASTM C 754 other than studspacing 

requirements. 

B. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure, while maintaining 

continuity of fire-rated construction. 

C. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not 

more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 

D. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 


Project No.: 10145 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 


19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 

A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following 

applications: 

1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, 

etc.). 

2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.). 




A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that 

incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction 

identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an 

independent testing agency. 


2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL 

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of 

steel products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer 

recycled content is not less than 25 percent. 

B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Steel Stud Manufacturer’s Association members. 

2. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, 

unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Protective Coating: G40 or equivalent per ASTM A 1003, unless otherwise 

indicated 

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS 

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- 

diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire. 

Project No.: 10145 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 


19 March 2012

B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch 

diameter. 

C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 

0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 

D. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 

1. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. Depth as indicated on Drawings. 

2. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. 

2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES 

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 

1. Equivalent Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 

a. Typical partition: 0.0179 inch. 

b. Partition with ceramic tile: 0.0312 inch. 

c. Door openings for ballistic-rated or heavyweight doors: 0.0312 inch. 

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep 

flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction 

fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the 

top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 

2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of 

finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure 

above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to 

accommodate depth of studs. 

C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width 

indicated. 

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch or as indicated on Drawings.. 

D. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. 

2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 


A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding 

power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), 

nonperforated. 



19 March 2012

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener 

penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud 

size. 



A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754; except comply with framing sizes and spacing 

indicated. 

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that 

apply to framing installation. 

3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 

A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by 

building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 

B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects 

within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension 

system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset 

resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective 

means. 

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces 

hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support 

standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members 

and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or 

to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and 

appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to 

deteriorate or otherwise fail. 

4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. 

3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES 

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at 

exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. 

B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to 

structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are 

indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts 

penetrating partitions above ceiling. 

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, 

install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of 

finished assemblies. 



19 March 2012

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door 

frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb 

studs. 

a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 

b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 

1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint 

in finished assembly. 

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of 

overhead structure. 

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same 

as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below 

sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistancerated 

assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions 

continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. 




19 March 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 


CEMENT PLASTERING 

A. Section Includes: Exterior fiberglass reinforced portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on 

metal lath. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including 

plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. 

C. Samples: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated. 


A. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to 

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time 



A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. 

B. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for 

environmental conditions for applying finishes. 


2.01 METAL LATH 

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized 

zinc coating. 

1. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring, 

B. Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790, Type I, Grade D, Style 2 vapor-permeable paper. 

Project No.: 10145 CEMENT PLASTERING 


10 May 2012


A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with 

thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. 

B. Metal Accessories: 

1. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, 

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 zinc coating. 

2. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip 

galvanized zinc coating. 

3. External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with 

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 

4. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel. 

5. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; squareedged 

style; with expanded flanges. 

6. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piecetype, 

folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with 

perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 

2.03 PLASTER MIXES 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 

1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least 

two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber 

quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. of cementitious materials. 

B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat 

plasterwork. 

C. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For acrylic-based finish coatings, comply with 




A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful 

effects caused by plastering. 

B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction 

capability required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926. 

3.02 INSTALLING METAL LATH 

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. 



10 May 2012

3.03 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES 

A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations as required or indicated on Drawings. 

B. Reinforcement for External Corners: 

1. Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations. 

C. Control Joints: Install control joints in specific locations approved by Architect for visual 

effect as follows: 

1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum 

sizes: 

a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft.. 

b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft. 

2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet o.c. 

3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios 

of not greater than 2-1/2:1. 

4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 

5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped 

areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the 

dimension change. 

3.04 PLASTER APPLICATION 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926. 

B. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat 

plasterwork; 3/4-inch thickness. 

C. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and 

sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

3.05 PLASTER REPAIRS 

A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check 

cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to 

substrate has failed. 




10 May 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 


1. Interior gypsum board. 

2. Tile backing panels. 






GYPSUM BOARD 

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials 

and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 

by an independent testing agency. 

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction 

identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified 

according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 

2.02 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD 



following: 

1. American Gypsum. 

2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 

3. Lafarge North America Inc. 

4. National Gypsum Company. 

5. Temple-Inland. 

6. USG Corporation. 

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 

2. Long Edges: Tapered. 

Project No.: 10145 GYPSUM BOARD 


19 March 2012

C. Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and 

to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness. 



D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 



E. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- 

and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. 

1. Core: As indicated. 


3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 

2.03 TILE BACKING PANELS 

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's 

standard edges. 



a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer. 

b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer. 

2. Core: As indicated on Drawings. 


B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's 

standard edges. 


incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 

a. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard. 

b. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. 

c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 

2. Thickness: As indicated. 


2.04 TRIM ACCESSORIES 

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paperfaced 

galvanized steel sheet. 



19 March 2012

2.05 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. 

B. Joint Tape: 

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 

2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. 

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is 

compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 


A. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 

C. Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound 

transmission through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according 

to ASTM E 90. 

D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation." 

E. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation." 


3.01 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS 

A. Comply with ASTM C 840. 

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and 

mold damaged. 

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural 

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and 

trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges 

and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 

D. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at 

openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical 

sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with 

ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and 

closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing 

partitions above acoustical ceilings. 

E. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are 

readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 



19 March 2012

F. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners 

used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 

2. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific 

locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 

G. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. 

H. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as 

not intended to receive tape. 

I. Curved Surfaces: Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to 

extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch- long straight sections at ends of curves 

and tangent to them. 

J. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to 

ASTM C 840: 

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 

3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings. 

4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. 

5. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings. 

K. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly 

remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or 

otherwise damaged during drywall application. 

L. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Ceramic tile. 

2. Stone thresholds. 

3. Crack isolation membrane. 

4. Metal edge strips. 



TILING 

1. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for cementitious tile backer units. 


A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in 

ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. 

B. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. 

C. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. 


A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products 

with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 

Minimum 0.6. 



B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include 

Samples of accessories involving color selection. 

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 

D. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. 

Project No.: 10145 TILING 


19 March 2012


A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source 

or producer. 

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of 

consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous 

area. 

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform 

quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and 

each aggregate from one source or producer. 

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified 

in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product: 

1. Stone thresholds. 

2. Waterproof membrane. 

3. Crack isolation membrane. 

4. Metal edge strips. 


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and 

labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling 

tile packages. 

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry 

location. 

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained 

and contamination can be avoided. 

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 

E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent 

coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact 

bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete 

and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels 

indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS 

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products 

installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with 

labels describing contents. 



19 March 2012

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of 

amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 

2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each 

type, composition, and color indicated. 


2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL 

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, 

compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise 

indicated. 

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with 

ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards 

referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and 

other requirements specified. 

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory 

and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those 

taken from other packages and match approved Samples. 

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS 

A. Tile products as indicated in Interior Design documents. 

B. Threshold: Sealed marble threshold, 2-inch minimum width, not to exceed 5/16-inch 

height above bathroom floor level. 

2.3 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE 

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for 

standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application 

indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. 

2.4 SETTING MATERIALS 

A. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1. 

B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 

2.5 GROUT MATERIALS 

A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and 

white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated. 



19 March 2012

B. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6. 

C. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7. 

2.6 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS 

A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that 

comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in 


1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated 

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

2. Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant 

manufacturer. 

B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining 

sealed joints unless otherwise indicated. 

C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; 

Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, 

O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other 

nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and 

extreme temperatures. 

D. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; 

Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland 

cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting 

materials for installations indicated. 

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, 

metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for 

flooring applications; white zinc alloy exposed-edge material. 

C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming 

tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated 

by tile and grout manufacturers. 

D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does 

not change color or appearance of grout. 



19 March 2012



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer 

present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other 

conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are 

incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other 

substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness 

tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set 

mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations 

indicated. 

a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been 

mechanically scarified. 

b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding 

or grinding. 

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and 

mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been 

completed. 

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint 

locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. 



A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with 

adhesives or thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound 

specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. 

B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced 

mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward 

drains. 

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended 

and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as 

those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory 

blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 

D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to 

prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with 

continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile 

surfaces. 



19 March 2012

3.3 TILE INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation 

methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 

Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA 

installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting 

and grouting materials used. 

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile 

installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: 

a. Exterior tile floors. 

b. Tile floors in wet areas. 

c. Tile swimming pool decks. 

d. Tile floors in laundries. 

e. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. 

f. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. 

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form 

complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work 

neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint 

alignments. 

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without 

marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or builtin 

items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, 

and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. 

D. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 

1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch. 

2. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch. 

3. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. 

4. Decorative Thin Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. 

E. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions 

indicated. 

F. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including 

control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during 

installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after 

installing tiles. 

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly 

above them. 

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with execution requirements in 


G. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor 


H. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or 

other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated. 



19 March 2012

I. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to 

grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated 

grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 

3.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION 

A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's 

written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to 

substrate. 

B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane 

has cured. 

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING 

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so 

they are free of foreign matter. 

1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 

2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout 

manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. 

Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after 

determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other 

surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects 

of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating 

manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and 

remove coating to prevent drain clogging. 

B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction 

period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, 

apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. 

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is 

completed. 

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner 

from tile surfaces. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 

A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 


A. AC: Articulation Class. 

B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. 

C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. 

D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 



B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish 

required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 

1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, 

and texture. 

2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- long 

Samples of each type, finish, and color. 

C. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting 

suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer. 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with 

the following requirements: 

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following 

surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A 

materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: 

a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 

Project No.: 10145 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 


19 March 2012


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project 

site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned 

space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, 

temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. 

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a 

stabilized moisture content. 

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any 

way. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are 

enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above 

ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained 

at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with 

other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light 

fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are 

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing 

contents. 

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity 

installed. 

2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 

2.0 percent of quantity installed. 


2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL 

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration 

indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, 

patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical 

panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits 

fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no 



19 March 2012

mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and 

evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. 

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING 

A. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern 

as follows: 

1. As indicated in Interior Design documents; (Public Spaces) 

a. Edge/Joint Detail: Angled Tegular. 

b. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. 

c. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 

d. Narrow Grid: 9/16 inch. 

2. As indicated in Interior Design documents; (Back of House) 

a. Edge/Joint Detail: Square Lay-in. 



d. Standard Grid: 15/16 inch. 

3. Type and Form: Type XX, other types; described as high-density, ceramic- and 

mineral-base panels with scrubbable finish, resistant to heat, moisture, and 

corrosive fumes; Pattern G. (Kitchen and Laundry) 

a. Edge/Joint Detail: Square Lay-in. 



d. Aluminum Grid: 15/16 inch. 

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL 

A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal 

suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that 

comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. 

B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for 

Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating 

finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system 

indicated. 

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, 

Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design 

requirements. 

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following 

requirements: 

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, 

soft temper. 



19 March 2012

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING 

A. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners 

roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hotdip 

galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating 

designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges. 

B. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross 

runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, 

or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating 

designation, with prefinished 9/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges. 

C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Aluminum Suspension System: Main and cross 

runners roll formed from aluminum sheet, with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide, 

aluminum caps on flanges. (Kitchen and Laundry) 

2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM 

A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if 

not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that 

comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, 

finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 

1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge 

details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and 

configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that 

forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel 

and flange at exposed suspension member. 

3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to 

diameter required to fit penetration exactly. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which 

acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and 

anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions 

affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 


corrected. 


A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border 

widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at 

borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 



19 March 2012 

095113 - 4


A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic 

design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's 

"Ceiling Systems Handbook." 

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects 

within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling 

suspension system. 

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting 

horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces 

hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to 

support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension 

members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with 

a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or 

to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for 

substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or 

elevated temperatures. 

5. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing 

required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment 

of hanger wires. 

6. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported 

directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more 

than 8 inches from ends of each member. 

7. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads 

within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 

C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area 

and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 

D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one 

another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. 

E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension 

system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations 

to provide a neat, precise fit. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, 

and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for 

cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling 

components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate 

evidence of damage. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 



DECORATIVE LAMINATE FLOORING 

1. High-pressure decorative laminate flooring. 



material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material indicated. 

C. Maintenance Data: For flooring to include in maintenance manuals. 

D. Other Informational Submittals: 

1. Installation instructions. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Firm experienced in installation or application of systems 

similar in complexity to those required for this Project, including specific requirements 

indicated. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of materials and 

products from one source. 


A. Deliver flooring materials in unopened cartons or bundles. Protect flooring from 

damage. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install until spaces are enclosed and 

weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, 

and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and 

humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction 

period. 

Project No.: 10145 DECORATIVE LAMINATE FLOORING 


19 March 2012

1.6 WARRANTY 


repair or replace high-pressure decorative laminate flooring that fail(s) in materials or 

workmanship within specified warranty period. 



A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with 

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Laminate Flooring: Equal to 1 percent of amount installed. 



A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Wilsonart 

or Prego Select, or comparable product. 

2.2 FINISHES 

A. Provide wood grain appearance. 

1. Color selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 

2. Plank width selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 

2.3 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS 

A. ASTM E662, Smoke Density, Flaming and non-flaming ≤ 450. 

B. ASTM E90, Sound Transmission Class: STC ≥ 53. 

C. ASTM E492, Impact Insulation Class: IIC ≥ 57. 

D. ASTM D2047, Slip Resistance (neolite sole): µ ≥ 0.7. 

2.4 CUSHION 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Wilsonart Commercial Cushion; black polyethylene foam with 

black polyethylene moisture barrier filled with sound absorbing molecules and fortified 

with antimicrobial agent. 



19 March 2012



A. Examine substrates areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances, manufacturer’s requirements and other conditions affecting 

performance of the Work. 

B. Verify concrete slabs are dry according to ASTM F 1869 with maximum moisture 

emission rate of 5 pounds per 1000 SF per 24 hours. Do not install flooring with high 

alkaline content. 



A. Install flooring planks in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation 

instructions. 


A. Cover installed flooring to protect from damage or during remainder of construction 

period. Use heavy kraft-paper or other suitable covering. 

B. Maintain flooring in compliance with Manufacturer’s Maintenance Guidelines. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Resilient base. 

2. Resilient molding accessories. 



RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 

1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient floor tile. 



B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's 

standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, 

texture, and pattern required. 


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces 

to receive resilient products. 

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range 

recommended by manufacturer. 

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been 

completed. 




1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, 

of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 

Project No.: 10145 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 


19 March 2012


2.1 RESILIENT BASE 

A. Products as indicated on Interior Design Drawings. 

B. Outside Corners: Preformed. 

C. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed. 



A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements 

specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, 

scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 



A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion 

of resilient products. 


Project No.: 10145 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 


19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Vinyl composition floor tile. 



RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 

1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer 

strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings. 



B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. 




1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, 

color, and pattern of floor tile installed. 


2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE 

A. As indicated in Interior Design Drawings. 



A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

Project No.: 10145 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 


19 March 2012

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements 

specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, 

scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. 



A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion 

of resilient products. 

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. 

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. 

C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from 

construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of 

construction period. 

D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. 


Project No.: 10145 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 


19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 



SHEET CARPETING 

1. Preparation of Surfaces to Receive Carpeting. 

2. Carpet. 

a. Furnished by Owner, installed by Contractor. 

b. Stretch-in Installation, unless noted otherwise. 

3. Carpet cushion. 

a. Furnished by Owner, installed by Contractor 

4. Accessories, including tack strips, adhesives tapes and all other required 

accessories. 

5. Transition edges 


A. Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type 

of substrate: 

1. A copy of the manufacturer's printed installation manual shall accompany Bid for 

review and approval by the Owner's Representative. 

2. Shop Drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or pattern 

direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways, 

enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are 

required in carpet. Show installation details at special conditions. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with not less than 5 years of experience in installation of 

commercial carpeting of type, quantity, and installation methods similar to work of this 

Section, or can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. 

B. Successful vendor shall be responsible for field measurements to determine carpet 

layout. 

C. The carpet contractor is responsible for reviewing carpet manufacturer's published 

installation instructions prior to installation. This includes understanding dye lots, 

pattern sequencing, pattern matching and any special instructions. Failure to abide by 

the manufacturer's instructions could result in a backcharge to contractor for corrections 

to the installation. 

Project No.: 10145 SHEET CARPETING 


19 March 2012

D. Contractor is responsible for damages to work performed by others including but not 

limited to telephone or television wires placed in front of the tack-strip running the 

perimeter of the room. 

E. The installation contractor is responsible for verification of quantities. The contractor 

shall provide take-offs of all carpet and padding, as required for a complete 

installation. No compensation will be allowed to the installation contractor for 

materials and labor that may be required to install additional carpeting because of 

incorrect quantity takeoffs. 


A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 05: "Storage 

and Handling”. 

B. Do not deliver carpet until areas of building are ready for carpet installation. Provide 

protection from loss or damage. 

C. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated, 

dry area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures and 

humidity. Lay flat, blocked off ground. Maintain minimum temperature of 68 degrees 

F. (20 degrees C.) at least three days prior to and during installation in area where 

materials are stored. Never stack carpet more than two rolls high or stand up on roll 

ends on job site. Do not bend or fold carpet in storing. 

D. Carpet shall never be stacked more than five (5) rolls high. 


A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 07: "Site Conditions”. 

B. Do not commence with carpet installation until painting and finishing work is complete 

and ceilings and overhead work has been tested, approved, and completed. 

C. In areas to receive carpet, room temperatures shall be maintained at 65-90 degrees F 

and with relative humidity ranging between 20 and 65 percent minimum for 72 hours 

prior to, during, and 72 hours following application. Materials shall be conditioned at 

application temperature and humidity at least 24 hours prior to application. Provide 

sufficient lighting for carpet installation. 

D. Contractor shall provide method approved by the Owner's Representative to 

mechanically exhaust all spaces to receive carpet to the exterior during installation and 

a minimum of 72 continuous hours, or length of time required by the manufacturer or 

Owner after installation. 

E. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Before installing carpet Contractor shall verify that 

Moisture emission rate of not more than 3 lb/1000 sq. ft./24 hours when tested by 

calcium chloride moisture test in compliance with CRI 104, 6.2.1, with subfloor 

temperatures not less than 55 deg F, or as recommended by manufacturer. 



19 March 2012

F. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: Before installing carpet Contractor shall verify that a pH 

range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable water and pHydrion paper is 

applied. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Stretch-in installation labor shall be guaranteed for one (1) year. Sixty days after 

installation, the Subcontractor is to re-stretch all carpet where necessary and as directed 

by Owner’s Representative. 

B. It is the carpet Contractor’s responsibility to fill out the adhesive manufacturer 

warranties. The warranty must be returned to the adhesive manufacturer and a copy 

sent to the Contractor’s representative. 


2.1 As indicated in Finish Schedule on Interior Design Drawings. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for 

maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other 

conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions 

are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified. 

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the 

following: 

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, 

and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine 

adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and 

moisture tests recommended by the following: 

a. Carpet manufacturer 

b. Carpet cushion manufacturer 

2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section 

“Cast-in-Place Concrete” for slabs receiving carpet. 

3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale and foreign deposits. 

4. Ensure floors are level with maximum surface variation of ¼” in 10’. 



A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, “Site Conditions; Floor Preparation,” 

and carpet manufacturer’s written instructions for preparing substrates indicated 

to receive carpet installation. 



19 March 2012 

096816 - 3

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer’s 

written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. 

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are 

incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without 

using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by the following: 

1. Carpet manufacturer 

2. Carpet cushion manufacturer 


A. Stretch-In Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11, “Stretch-In Installation” 

1. Install tack strip with adhesive, drill and pin, or nailing, or combination, 

where required for adequate strength. 

2. Locate Tack strip 1/4 inch from wall to conceal carpet edge between 

stripping and base of wall. Strip entire perimeter of each carpeted 

space and at obstructions and cutouts. 

B. Comply with carpet manufacturer’s written recommendations for seam locations 

and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. 

At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. 

1. Level adjoining border edges 

C. Cut and fit carpets to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and 

built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and 

nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. 

1. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is no visible 

variation between cut pieces. 

2. Cut carpet, where required, in a manner to allow proper seam and pattern 

match. Ensure cuts are straight and true and unfrayed. 

D. Carpet shall extend to the back of all toe spaces, under all millwork, cabinetwork, 

convectors, bookshelving, and similar items to the limiting planes of the 

floor surface. Where carpet terminates at a doorway, termination of carpet shall 

occur under the edge of the closed door, or at the side of the threshold where 

this is required. Cut and fit carpeting to all obstructions protruding from the 

floor surface, such as columns, pipes, thresholds, electrical, and telephone outlets, 

etc. All raw edges shall be latexed and securely and neatly tucked into 

place. 

E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for 

future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, 

nonstaining marking device. 

F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 

G. Carpet shall be installed by experienced carpet layers in an approved manner, 

using the carpet manufacturer's recommended adhesive and procedures. Install 

carpet with pile running in the same direction, unless specifically directed to do 

otherwise. 

H. Install carpet cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams. 



19 March 2012 

096816 - 4

I. The final carpet pattern, layout, edge binding locations shall be as directed and 

approved by Owner's Representative. All associated installation shall be by this 

Contractor. 

3.4 SEALING CUT EDGES 

3.5 SEAMING 

A. To prevent fraying and raveling at all seams and transition areas, a continuous 

bead of seam adhesive must be applied to the first edge where the face yarn enters 

the backing. 

B. On woven carpet, all cut edges at seams and transition areas must be secured 

with a latex seam adhesive immediately following the seam trimming. 

A. Install pad and carpet seams in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 

B. Locate pad seams at right angles to carpet seams. Where not possible to locate 

at right angles, locate pad seam minimum 6 inches away from carpet seams. 

Butt pad edges tightly together to form seams without gaps. Tape pad seams. 

C. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doors, center seams 

under doors; do not place seams in traffic direction at doorways. 

D. Orcon Super 3S Wide tape will be used on all public area seams specifying hot 

melt tape. 

E. The seaming iron with heat shield must be of proper size, matching the hot melt 

tape being used. 

F. The proper head setting and exposure time must be used to assure proper transfer 

without creating damage to backing or pile yarn. 

G. Orcon Super 3S tape will be used in Guest Rooms and suites where seams are 

specified. 

H. Handsewing: 

1. An overhand stitch placed no more than 1/2 inch apart and no less than 

1/2 inch from the edge of the carpet is required. 

2. A latex coating must be applied over the stitching. 

3. The seam shall be allowed to dry at least eight (8) hours before stretching. 

I. Where conflicts between Owner’s requirements and manufacturer’s requirements 

occur, use Owner’s requirements. 


A. Provide carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to 

substrate. Edge guard shall be used in all doorways or openings where no sill is 

installed or as required. 



19 March 2012

3.7 ADJUSTING 

A. Stretch-In Installation: Restretch carpet sixty days after Substantial Completion, 

as directed by Owner. 


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 15, “Protection of Indoor Installation”. 

B. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps daily. 

C. Vacuum carpet daily using commercial machine with face-beater element. Remove 

spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed. Remove any 

protruding face yarn using sharp scissors. Knock down tacks at entries to baths 

and guest rooms (to protect feet). 

D. Maintenance Materials: Deliver specified overrun (if any) and usable scraps of 

carpet to Owner's designated storage space, properly packaged (paper 

wrapped) and identified. Usable scraps are defined to include roll ends of less 

than 9'-0" length, and 3'-0" wide. Dispose of smaller pieces as "construction 

waste". 

E. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of 

equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection 

methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 



WALL COVERINGS 

1. Vinyl wall covering; Furnished by Owner, installed by Contractor. 

2. Prime Coat on Walls 

3. Adhesives and Cleaning of Adjacent Surfaces 

4. All accessories for complete installation 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on physical 

characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics. 

B. Samples for Verification: Full width by 36-inch- long section of wall covering from lot 

to be used for each type of wall covering indicated for each color, texture, and pattern 

required. 


A. Contractor is responsible for receiving and handling on site and installing wall covering 

material furnished by Owner and will fill out and process all receiving reports furnished 

by Owner. 

B. Provide strippable adhesive and primer for all wall covering. 

C. Contractor shall provide wall covering quantity take-offs to the Owner within 45 days of 

award of the contract. 


2.1 WALL-COVERING PRODUCTS 

A. As indicated in Finish Schedule on Interior Design Drawings. 

B. Manufacturer's recommended adhesive, primer, and sealer manufactured expressly for 

use with the selected wallcovering. Provide materials that contain mildew inhibitors that 

are nonstaining to the wall-covering. 

Project No.: 10145 WALL COVERINGS 


19 March 2012




requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other 

conditions affecting performance of work. 



A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. 

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, 

mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust. 

C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of 

flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 

1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and 

concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 

2. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer recommended by wall-covering 

manufacturer. 

3. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. 

D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell 

finishes with fine sandpaper. 

E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture 

trims, and similar items. 

F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the 

installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 

G. Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall-covering 

manufacturer. Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for finished installation. Do not begin 

wall-covering installation until wall liner has dried. 


A. General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions 

applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent 

requirements apply. 

B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition 

breaks and corners. 



19 March 2012

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. 

B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. 

C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. 

D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture 

trims, and similar items. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


EXTERIOR PAINTING 

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the 

following exterior substrates: 

1. Steel. 

2. Galvanized metal. 

3. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 

4. Exterior gypsum board. 



B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of 

topcoat indicated. 

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 

2. Label each Sample for location and application area. 

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same 

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category 

specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 


A. MPI Standards: 

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved 

Products List." 

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural 

Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. 


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with 

ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 

Project No.: 10145 EXTERIOR PAINTING 


19 March 2012 

099113 - 1


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air 

temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. 

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 

percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet 

surfaces. 


A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) 

as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels 

describing contents. 

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each 

material and color applied. 


2.1 PAINT, GENERAL 

A. Material Compatibility: 

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one 

another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as 

demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by 

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 

B. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule. 

2.2 BLOCK FILLERS 

A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4. 

2.3 METAL PRIMERS 

A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79. 

B. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26. 

C. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95. 

2.4 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS 

A. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5). 



19 March 2012

B. Exterior Latex (Gloss): MPI #119 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 

60 deg). 

2.5 EXTERIOR ALKYD PAINTS 

A. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Gloss): MPI #9 (Gloss Level 6). 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with 

requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting 

performance of work. 

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with 

existing finishes and primers. 

C. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and 

surfaces are dry. 

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates 

and conditions. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI 

Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems 

indicated. 

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to 

be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, 

provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved 

to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, 

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, 

grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as 

required to produce paint systems indicated. 

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods 

recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. 



19 March 2012

E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet 

metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly 

etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. 

F. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation. 

G. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing 

compound is dry and sanded smooth. 


A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 

2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before 

final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat 

only. 

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until 

cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. 

C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush 

marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in 

sharp lines and color breaks. 


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded 

materials from Project site. 

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints 

by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished 

surfaces. 

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage 

to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved 

by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. 

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged 

or defaced painted surfaces. 

3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE 

A. Steel Substrates: 

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D. 

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. 

c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (gloss). 



19 March 2012

B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.3B. 

a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. 



C. Aluminum Substrates: 

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.4F. 

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum. 



D. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: 

1. Latex System: MPI EXT 9.2A. 

a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. 

c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss). 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


INTERIOR PAINTING 

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the 

following interior substrates: 

1. Steel. 

2. Galvanized metal. 

3. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 

4. Wood. 

5. Gypsum board. 

6. Cotton or canvas insulation covering. 


1. Division 09 Section "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation 

and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on interior wood 

substrates. 



B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of 

topcoat indicated. 

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 

2. Label each Sample for location and application area. 

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same 

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category 

specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 


A. MPI Standards: 

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved 

Products List." 

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural 

Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. 

Project No.: 10145 INTERIOR PAINTING 


19 March 2012


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with 

ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air 

temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. 

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less 

than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 


A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) 

as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels 

describing contents. 

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each 



2.1 PAINT, GENERAL 

A. Material Compatibility: 

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one 



2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by 

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 

B. Colors: As indicated in Interior Design schedule. 

2.2 PRIMERS/SEALERS 

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50. 

2.3 METAL PRIMERS 

A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79. 

B. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26. 



19 March 2012 

099123 - 2

C. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95. 

2.4 WOOD PRIMERS 

A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39. 

2.5 LATEX PAINTS 

A. Interior Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #44 (Gloss Level 2). 

B. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5). 

C. Interior Latex (Gloss): MPI #114 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 

60 deg). 

2.6 ALKYD PAINTS 

A. Interior Alkyd (Gloss): MPI #48 (Gloss Level 6). 

B. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5). 




requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting 


B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture 

meter as follows: 

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 

2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 

3. Wood: 15 percent. 

4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with 

existing finishes and primers. 

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and 

surfaces are dry. 

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates 

and conditions. 



19 March 2012


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI 

Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. 

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to 

be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, 

provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved 

to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, 

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, 

grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as 

required to produce paint systems indicated. 

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods 

recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. 

E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet 

metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly 

etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. 

F. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation. 

G. Wood Substrates: 

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 

3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 

4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or 

plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 

H. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is 

dry and sanded smooth. 

I. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign 

material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 


A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed 

surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed 

equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and 

similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 



19 March 2012 

099123 - 4

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until 

cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. 

C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush 

marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in 

sharp lines and color breaks. 

D. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and 

occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Mechanical Work: 

a. Uninsulated metal piping. 

b. Uninsulated plastic piping. 

c. Pipe hangers and supports. 

d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 

e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind 

air inlets and outlets. 

f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation 

covering or other paintable jacket material. 

g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for 

field painting. 

2. Electrical Work: 

a. Switchgear. 

b. Panelboards. 

c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for 

field painting. 


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded 

materials from Project site. 

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints 

by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished 

surfaces. 

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage 

to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved 

by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. 

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged 

or defaced painted surfaces. 

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE 

A. Steel Substrates: 

1. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E. 



19 March 2012

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. 

c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (gloss). 

B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 

1. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.3C. 

a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. 



C. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates: 

1. Alkyd Over Quick-Drying Primer System: MPI INT 5.4J. 

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum. 



D. Wood Panel Substrates: Including painted plywood. 

1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.4R. 

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. 

c. Topcoat: Interior latex (semigloss). 

E. Gypsum Board Substrates: 

1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. 

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. 


c. Topcoat: Interior latex (low sheen) (semigloss). 

2. Alkyd Over Latex Primer System: MPI INT 9.2C. 

(Suite Bathroom Ceilings and Pool Room) 



c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (semigloss). 

F. Cotton or Canvas Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including pipe and duct coverings. 

1. Latex System: MPI INT 10.1A. 



c. Topcoat: Interior latex (low sheen). 




19 March 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 


STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 

A. Section includes surface preparation and application of wood finishes. 


A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, 

according to ASTM D 523. 

B. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, 

according to ASTM D 523. 

C. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 

D. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 

E. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and 

application instructions. 

B. Samples: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish indicated. 

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include printout of current "MPI Approved 

Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for 

use highlighted. 


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that 

are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing 

contents. 

1. Stains and Transparent Finishes: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each 


Project No.: 10145 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 


19 March 2012


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each finish system indicated and each color selected to verify 

preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects 

and set quality standards for materials and execution. 

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application 

of each type of finish system and substrate. 

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. 

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 

2. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on mockups. 



a. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional 

mockups of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to 

Owner. 

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are 

listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." 

B. Material Compatibility: 

1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one 



2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by 

manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated. 

C. Stain Colors: As indicated in Interior Design schedule. 

2.02 WOOD FILLERS 

A. Wood Filler Paste: MPI #91. 

2.03 STAINS 

A. Stain, Semi-Transparent, for Interior Wood: MPI #90. 

2.04 POLYURETHANE VARNISHES 

A. Varnish, Interior, Polyurethane, Oil-Modified, Satin (Gloss Level 4): MPI #57. 

B. Varnish, Interior, Polyurethane, Oil-Modified, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #56. 



19 March 2012




requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance 

of the Work. 

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing 

finishes and primers. 

C. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and 

conditions. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural 

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. 

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. 

If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surfaceapplied 

protection before surface preparation and finishing. 

1. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to 

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 

C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions 

for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 

1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse 

thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil 

marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing. 

2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew 

removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer. 


A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in 

"MPI Manual." 

B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush 

marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. 


A. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by 

cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an 

undamaged condition. 



19 March 2012

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or 

defaced finished wood surfaces. 

3.05 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE 

A. Wood substrates, nontraffic surfaces, including wood trim and architectural woodwork. 

1. Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System: 

a. Stain Coat: Stain, semi-transparent, for interior wood, MPI #90. 

b. First Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat. 

c. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil-modified, satin (Gloss 

Level 4), MPI #57. 

d. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil-modified, gloss (Gloss 

Level 6), MPI #56. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


TOILET COMPARTMENTS 

A. This Section includes plastic-laminate units as follows: 

1. Toilet Enclosures: Overhead braced. 


1. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, 

and similar accessories. 



material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 


work. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other 

construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before 

fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 


2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE UNITS 

A. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, HGS, 0.048-inch nominal thickness. 

1. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect 

from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns. 

B. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Plastic-laminate facing sheets are pressure 

laminated to core material without splices or joints in facings or cores. Laminate is 

applied to edges before broad surfaces to seal edges and prevent laminate from being 

pried loose. Exposed core material is sealed at cutouts to protect core from moisture. 

1. Core Material: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 particleboard with 45-lb density. 

2. Doors and Panels: Finished to not less than 1 inch thick. 

Project No.: 10145 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 


19 March 2012

C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304, not 

less than 0.0312 inch specified thickness and 3 inches high, finished to match 

hardware. 

D. Brackets (Fittings): 

1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy 

(zamac) or clear anodized aluminum. 


A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating 

hardware and accessories. 

1. Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear anodized 

aluminum. 

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail 

with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. 

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless 

steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistanttype 

heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed 

anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel. 


A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, 

leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make 

provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide 

shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. 

B. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide in-swinging doors for 

standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 

32-inch- wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people 

with disabilities. 

1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold 

doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 

2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard latch unit designed for emergency 

access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units 

that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at 

compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 

3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped 

bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 



19 March 2012



A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units 

rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's 

recommended anchoring devices. 

1. Maximum Clearances: 

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. 

b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch. 

2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less than three 

brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. 

a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile 

joints. 

b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. 

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. 

Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang 

doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels and adjust so tops of doors are parallel 

with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. 

3.2 ADJUSTING 

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's 

written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors 

open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Corner guards. 



WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, firetest-response 

characteristics, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and 

finishes for each impact-resistant wall-protection unit. 

B. Material Test Reports: For each impact-resistant plastic material. 


A. Store impact-resistant wall-protection units in original undamaged packages and 

containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, 

extreme temperatures, and humidity. 

1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during 

the period plastic materials are stored. 

2. Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight. 

3. Store plastic wall-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until 

plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F. 

a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall-protection 

units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and 

HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 

72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction 

period. 

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, and other construction 

contiguous with impact-resistant wall-protection units by field measurements before 

fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 

Project No.: 10145 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 


19 March 2012


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are 

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing 

contents. 

1. Corner-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 

percent of each type, color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than two, 

4-foot- long units. 

B. Include mounting and accessory components. Replacement materials shall be from 

same production run as installed units. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Extruded Rigid Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, 

high-impact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color 

throughout; thickness as indicated. 

1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. of notch when tested according to 

ASTM D 256, Test Method A. 

2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543. 

3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635. 

4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 

5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M. 

C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, 

bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type 

fasteners where exposed to view. 

D. Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer for use with material being adhered to 

substrate indicated. 

1. Use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content 

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 

2.2 CORNER GUARDS 

a. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

b. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 

c. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. 

A. Surface-Mounted, Opaque-Plastic Corner Guards: Fabricated from PVC plastic, 

acrylic-modified vinyl sheet or opaque polycarbonate sheet; with formed edges; 

fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition. 

1. Location: Public area corridors. 



19 March 2012 

102600 - 2

2. Wing Size: Nominal 1-1/8 by 1-1/8 inches. 

3. Mounting: Adhesive. 

4. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

B. Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated from 1-piece, formed or extruded 

metal with formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition. 

1. Location: Laundry. 

2. Material: Stainless steel, Type 304. 

a. Thickness: Minimum 0.0500 inch. 

b. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4. 

3. Wing Size: Nominal 3-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches. 

4. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch. 

5. Mounting: Flat-head, countersunk screws through factory-drilled mounting 

holes. 



A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for installation tolerances, fire rating, and other conditions affecting 


1. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for 

blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the 

locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. 

2. For impact-resistant wall-protection units attached with adhesive, verify 

compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with 

existing finishes or primers. 


corrected. 


A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant 

wall-protection system components. 

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 


A. General: Install impact-resistant wall-protection units level, plumb, and true to line 

without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other 

defects that might be visible in the finished Work. 



19 March 2012

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using 

a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent. 

B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by 

manufacturer. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 



TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 

1. Public-use restroom accessories. 

2. Employee-use restroom accessories. 

3. Suite bathroom accessories. 

4. Food Prep accessories. 

5. Underlavatory guards. 

6. Custodial accessories. 


1. Division 08 Section "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 

1. Construction details and dimensions. 

2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in 

other work and substrate preparation. 

3. Material and finish descriptions. 

4. Manufacturer's warranty. 

B. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide 

products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect. 


A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances 

required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, 

operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. 

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to 

prevent delaying the Work. 

Project No.: 10145 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 


19 March 2012


2.1 ACCESSORY SCHEDULE 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. 

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable 

product by one of the following: 

1. American Specialties, Inc. 

2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 

3. Bradley Corporation. 

4. Franklin Brass. 

B. Public-use Restrooms: 

1. Automatic battery-operated paper towel dispenser; Bobrick B-2974. 

2. Roll-in-reserve toilet tissue dispenser; Bobrick B-2888. 

3. Countertop mounted liquid soap dispenser; Bobrick B-822. 

4. Grab bars; Bobrick B-6806 series. 

5. Napkin / tampon dispenser; Bobrick B-352. 

6. Napkin disposal; Bobrick B-354. 

C. Employee Restrooms: 

1. Semi-recessed combination paper towel dispenser / waste receptacle; Bobrick B- 

3944. 

2. Roll-in-reserve toilet tissue dispenser; Bobrick B-2888. 

3. Wall mounted liquid soap dispenser; Bobrick B-2112. 

4. Grab bars; Bobrick B-6806 series. 

5. Napkin disposal; Bobrick B-354. 

6. Clothes hook; Bobrick B-2116. 

7. Channel frame mirror; Bobrick B-165 series. 

D. Suite Bathrooms: 

1. Recessed reserve roll toilet tissue dispenser; Franklin Brass FB970. 

2. Robe hook; Franklin Brass FB1402. 

3. Towel shelf / bar; Franklin Brass FB2780SS 24”. 

4. Curved shower curtain rod; Bath Unlimited #190-5BS. 

(Mounted 6'-8" AFF to the centerline of the rod. The rods must be permanently 

secured. ADA showers are to have straight rods equal to Franklin Brass #165.) 

5. Grab bar; Franklin Brass FB5724 24”. 

6. Recessed facial tissue dispenser; Franklin Brass FB920. 

(Accessible suites include the following items as required) 

7. Folding shower seats; Bobrick B-508. 

8. Grab bars: Bobrick B-6806 series. 

E. Food-Prep Area 

1. Surface mounted paper towel dispenser; Bobrick B-262. 

2. Surface mounted liquid soap dispenser; Bobrick B-2112. 



19 March 2012

2.2 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS 

A. Underlavatory Guard: 

1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, 

that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access 

without removing coverings. 

2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white. 

2.3 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. 

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable 

product by one of the following: 

1. American Specialties, Inc. 

2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 

3. Bradley Corporation. 

B. Mop and Broom Holder: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B224. 

2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 

3. Length: 36 inches. 

4. Hooks: Three. 

5. Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 

6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 

7. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel. 

8. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch- diameter stainless steel. 


A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang 

doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed 

anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. 

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and 

resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. 



A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners 

appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install 

units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested 

according to method in ASTM F 446. 



19 March 2012


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or 

defective items. 

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. 

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written 

recommendations. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Prefabricated gas fireplace. 



PREFABRICATED FIREPLACES 

1. Division 23 Sections for gas piping and connections. 

2. Division 26 Sections for electrical starter and switch connections. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include installation instructions and 

details. 

B. Operation and maintenance data. 


2.1 FIREPLACE AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Manufacturer / Model: 

1. Basis-of-Design: See Interior Design Drawings/Specifications. 

B. Accessories 

1. Provide manufacturer’s ceramic cast oak logs with loose embers and cinders. 

2. Provide pilot light and key-operated starter. Provide remote on/off switch for 

fireplace pilot light behind front desk. 

3. Provide black steel mesh spark guard screening with screen pulls. 



A. Install in complete accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions and 

details. 


Project No.: 10145 PREFABRICATED FIREPLACES 


19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 



FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 

1. Fire protection cabinets for the following: 


a. Portable fire extinguishers. 

b. Fire hose valves. 

1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguishers." 




for fire protection cabinets. 

1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing 

mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, 

door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. 


A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in 

ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. 

B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer 

for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: 

1. Sheet: ASTM B 209. 

2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221. 

C. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 3 mm thick, 

with Finish 1 (smooth or polished). 

Project No.: 10145 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 


19 March 2012 

104413 - 1

2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET 

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher and extinguisher/hose valve. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may 

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group;. 

b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company;. 

c. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc.;. 

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated, 1-hour fire rated, and 2-hour fire rated. 

1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated 

from 0.0428-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- 

thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 

C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. 

D. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim 

indicated. 

1. Trimless with Concealed Flange: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with 

exterior finished surface of cabinet frame and door, without overlapping trim 

attached to cabinet. Provide recessed flange, of same material as box, attached 

to box to act as drywall bead. 

E. Door Material: Steel sheet. 

F. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear) or Acrylic sheet. 

G. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for 

cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 

1. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. 

H. Accessories: 

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire 

extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities 

of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 

I. Finishes: 

1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: 

a. Exterior of cabinet door except for those surfaces indicated to receive 

another finish. 

b. Interior of cabinet and door. 



19 March 2012


A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, 

door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 

1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 

2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials 

indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, 

minimum 1/2 inch thick. 

2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. 

2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS 



B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from 

damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 

C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. 

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. 

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the 

range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 

2.5 STEEL FINISHES 

A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, 

complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning". 

B. Factory Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromatefree, 

universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 

C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, 

apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and 

thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for 

applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 



A. Examine roughing-in for hose valves and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping 

connections before cabinet installation. 



19 March 2012 

104413 - 3

B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed 

cabinets will be installed. 



A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of 

cabinet and trim style. 


A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated 

or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall 

thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire 

protection cabinets. 

2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square 

and plumb. 

3. Fire-Rated, Hose-Valve Cabinets: 

a. Install cabinet with not more than 1/16-inch tolerance between pipe OD 

and knockout OD. Center pipe within knockout. 

b. Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant as specified in 

Division 07 Section "Firestopping." 


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection 

cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation 

instructions. 

B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that 

integral locking devices operate properly. 

C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces 

as recommended by manufacturer. 

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to 

factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or 

furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. 

E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond 

successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 

A. Section includes portable fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire 

extinguishers. 


1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets." 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, 


for fire extinguisher. 


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, 

"Portable Fire Extinguishers." 

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an 

independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 


2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and 

mounting bracket indicated. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available 


but are not limited to, the following: 

a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. 

b. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. 

c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 3-A:40-B:C, 5-lb 

nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameledsteel 

container. 

Project No.: 10145 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 


19 March 2012

1. Provide 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity a Laundry. 

2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS 

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher 

to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers 

indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish. 



A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. 



A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in 

compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction: 

1. Bracket Locations: Administration, laundry, maintenance, and elevator machine 

rooms. 

2. Bracket Height: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. 

B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at 

locations indicated. 


Project No.: 10145 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 


19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 



METAL LOCKERS 

1. Knocked-down, standard metal lockers. 


A. Uncoated Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Indicated as the minimum thicknesses. 


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of 

individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal locker. 


work. 

1. Show base, sloping tops and other accessories. 

2. Include locker identification system. 

C. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching 

mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain metal lockers and accessories through one source from a 


B. Regulatory Requirements: Where metal lockers are indicated to comply with 

accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers 

Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for 

Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 


A. Do not deliver metal lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for 

metal locker installation. 

Project No.: 10145 METAL LOCKERS 


19 March 2012


A. Field Measurements: Verify the following by field measurements before fabrication and 

indicate measurements on Shop Drawings: 

1. Concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support metal lockers 

before they are enclosed. 


A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other 

related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that metal lockers can be 

supported and installed as indicated. 



A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements 

apply to product selection: 

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may 

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products 

specified. 

3. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each metal locker specified is based on 

the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the 

named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers 

specified. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS) Type B, suitable for 

exposed applications. 

B. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type exposed bolt heads, and selflocking 

nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts. 

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for secure anchorage to each 

substrate. 

2.3 KNOCKED-DOWN, STANDARD METAL LOCKERS 


1. Lyon Workspace Products. 

2. Penco Products, Inc., Subsidiary of Vesper Corporation. 

3. Republic Storage Systems Company. 



19 March 2012

B. Locker Arrangement: Double tier. 

C. Locker Size: minimum 2.5 cubic feet. 

D. Body: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from 

unperforated, cold-rolled steel sheet with thicknesses as follows: 

1. Tops, Bottoms, and Intermediate Dividers: 0.0209 inch, with single bend at 

sides. 

2. Backs and Sides: 0.0209 inch thick, with full-height, double-flanged 

connections. 

3. Shelves: 0.0209 inch thick, with double bend at front and single bend at sides 

and back. 

E. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.0528-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; 

lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded 

into vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical 

main frames. 

F. Doors: One-piece; fabricated from 0.0528-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; formed 

into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges, and with right-angle single 

bend at horizontal edges. 

1. Doors less than 12 inches wide may be fabricated from 0.0428-inch- thick, coldrolled 

steel sheet. 

2. Box lockers less than 15 inches wide may be fabricated from 0.0428-inch- thick, 

cold-rolled steel sheet. 

3. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or 

stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches wide; welded to inner face of doors. 

4. Stiffeners: Manufacturer's standard full-height stiffener fabricated from 0.0428inch- 

thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; welded to inner face of doors. 

G. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed 

so locking device does not protrude beyond face of door; pry resistant. 

H. Combination Padlocks: Provided by Owner. 

I. Equipment: Equip each metal locker with identification plate and the following, unless 

otherwise indicated: 

1. Double-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall 

hooks. 

J. Accessories: 

1. Continuous Base: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, manufacturer's 

standard thickness, but not less than 0.0528 inch thick. 

a. Height: 4 inches. 

2. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, 

manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.0329 inch thick. 



19 March 2012 

105113 - 3

a. Closures: Vertical-end type. 

3. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.0209-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet. 

K. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. 



A. General: Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp; with metal faces flat 

and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges free of sharp edges and 

burrs, and safe to touch. 

1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet, 


2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for a 

complete installation. 

B. Unit Principle: Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; 

individual top, bottom, and back; and common intermediate uprights separating 

compartments. 

C. Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers for nominal assembly at Project 

site using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets. Factory weld frame members together to form a 

rigid, one-piece assembly. 

D. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated. 

E. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard etched, embossed, or stamped 

aluminum plates; with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch high. 

F. Continuous Base: Formed into channel or Z profile for stiffness, and fabricated in 

lengths as long as practicable to enclose base and base ends of metal lockers; finished 

to match lockers. 

G. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practicable, without visible 

fasteners at splice locations; finished to match lockers. 

H. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, 

except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished 

to match lockers. 

2.5 STEEL SHEET FINISHES 

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal 

Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 

B. Factory finish steel surfaces and accessories except stainless-steel and chrome-plated 

surfaces. 



19 March 2012

C. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other 

contaminants that could impair paint bond. Use manufacturer's standard methods. 

D. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning, pretreating, and phosphatizing, 

apply manufacturer's standard thermosetting baked-enamel finish. Comply with paint 

manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film 

thickness. 

E. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply 

manufacturer's standard baked-polymer thermosetting powder finish. Comply with 

resin manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film 

thickness. 



A. Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with 


work. 



A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. 

1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but 

not more than 36 inches o.c. Install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, 

channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion, using concealed 

fasteners. 

2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers. 

B. Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Assemble knocked-down metal lockers with standard 

fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on door faces or face frames. 

C. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures 

accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice 

plates. 

1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners. 

2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners. 

3. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on 

Drawings. 

a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two 

aluminum rivets. 

4. Attach sloping top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends. 

5. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed 

ends of nonrecessed metal lockers. 



19 March 2012 

105113 - 5

3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION 

A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily 

without binding. 

B. Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit 

metal locker use during construction. 

C. Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factoryfinished 

appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished 

by metal locker manufacturer. 




19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


SHOWER DOORS 

A. This Section includes swinging shower doors. 

B. Related Sections: Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for wood blocking for 

mounting brackets. 


A. Product Data: For each product specified. 

B. Show Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. 


2.1 PRODUCTS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design is based on products indicated. Subject to 

compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product. 

1. Sterling, a Kohler Company; designer pivot shower doors. 

2. American Shower Door. 

B. Provide a two panel (pivot door) shower door, silver finish with obscure glass. 

1. Comply with ANSI Z97.1 (tempered glass). 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Verify placement of 

concealed blocking or other supports built into walls; determine that back-up 

construction will sustain the securing fasteners. Do not proceed with installation until 

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Install shower door in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved shop 

drawings. 

Project No.: 10145 SHOWER DOORS 


19 March 2012 

108240 - 1

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust components and accessories for proper operation. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Clean surfaces according to manufacturer’s instruction after installation. 

B. Remove surplus materials packaging, rubbish and debris resulting from installation. 

Leave installation areas neat, clean, and ready for use. 


A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to 

manufacturer and installer that ensure shower doors are without damage at the time 



Project No.: 10145 SHOWER DOORS 


19 March 2012




SECURITY EQUIPMENT 

A. Product data: Indicate material types, finishes and sizes, fabrication and installation details and 

requirements. 

1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver equipment in protective packaging. 

B. Store in packaging to prevent soiling and physical damage. 

C. Handle to prevent damage to finished surfaces and operating mechanisms. 

1.3 JOB CONDITIONS 

A. Protection: Protect prefinished surfaces from damage or staining. Following installation, 

provide protective covering for equipment for duration of project. 

B. Coordinate installation of equipment required to be installed in other work. Lay out to rough 

dimensions provided by specialty manufacturer. 


2.1 SAFETY DEPOSIT BOXES 

A. Acceptable product: Diebold, Inc., Teller Lockers, Model 200-33 and 200-37. 

B. Characteristics: 

1. Description: Freestanding, 20" depth. 

2. Locks: Two (2) keyed access. 



A. Install equipment only after all other construction activities are completed in installation area. 

Install in accord with manufacturer's product data, plumb, level and true to line and location. 

B. Protect prefinished surfaces from damage during remainder of construction period. Clean 

surfaces prior to Date of Substantial Completion. 


Project No.: 10145 SECURITY EQUIPMENT 


19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Electric cooktops. 

2. Microwave ovens. 

3. Refrigerator/freezers. 

4. Dishwashers. 



RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 

1. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for cabinets and 

countertops that receive residential appliances. 

2. Mechanical drawings and specifications for kitchen sinks and waste disposals. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include operating characteristics, 

dimensions of individual appliances, and finishes for each appliance. 

1.3 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of each 

appliance specified agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components 

that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Microwave Oven: Five-year limited warranty for defects in the magnetron tube. 

2. Refrigerator/Freezer: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on the 

sealed refrigeration system. 

3. Dishwasher: 10-year warranty for in-home service against deterioration of tub 

and door liner. 


2.1 COOKING APPLIANCES 

A. Electric Cooktop: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Dual burner electric cooktop: 21.25” D x 16.625” W. 

Project No.: 10145 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 


19 March 2012

B. Microwave Oven: 

1. HWS Basis-of-Design Product: 30” W x 15” D x 16.25” H, 1000 watt, 1.6 cubic 

foot capacity, under-cabinet model with built-in vent hood and light. 

2. HIS Basis-of-Design Product: 17” W x 10-1/8” H x 12-7/8” D, under counter 

microwave. Sanyo EM-S2588W/B. 

3. Countertop Basis-of-Design Product: 11.75” H x 21.25” W x 15.75” D, 1100 

watt, 1.1 cubic foot capacity, countertop model. 

2.2 REFRIGERATION APPLIANCES 

A. Refrigerator/Freezer: 

1. HWS Basis-of-Design Product: 29.75” W x 29.56” D x 61.5” H, 14.4 cubic foot 

capacity, frost-free upright refrigerator with separate door for freezer. 

2. HIS Basis-of-Design Product: 18-5/8” W x 17-3/4” D x 24-7/8” H, under 

counter refrigerator. Sanyo SR-A2480W/K/M. 

2.3 CLEANING APPLIANCES 

A. Dishwasher: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: 24” wide, residential model. 

2. Type: Under the counter, operable at water pressures from 15 to 120 psi. 

2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL 







A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections 

before equipment installation. 




19 March 2012


A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with 

concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and 

rough openings are completely concealed. 

C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been 

completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate 

equipment. 


A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary 

adjustments. 

B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed. 

C. Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in clean 

condition, ready for operation. 


A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance 

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain residential appliances. Refer to Division 01 

Section "Demonstration and Training." 




19 March 2012


1.01 SUMMARY 


PROJECTION SCREENS 

A. Section Includes: Electrically operated, front-projection screens and controls. 


1. Section 06 4023 "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood trim and wood ceiling 

closure panel for recessed screen installation. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts and types of front-projection screens. Include the following: 

1. Anchorage details, including connection to supporting structure for suspended units. 

2. Location of wiring connections for electrically operated units. 

3. Wiring diagrams for electrically operated units. 


2.01 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED, FRONT-PROJECTION SCREENS 

A. General: Manufacturer's standard units consisting of case, screen, motor, controls, 

mounting accessories, and other components necessary for a complete installation. 

1. Controls: Remote, three-position control switch. 

a. Provide key-operated, power-supply switch. 

2. Motor in Roller: Instant-reversing motor of size and capacity recommended by 

screen manufacturer; with permanently lubricated ball bearings, automatic thermaloverload 

protection, and positive-stop action to prevent coasting. 

3. Screen Mounting: Top edge securely anchored to rigid metal roller and bottom 

edge formed into a pocket holding a 3/8-inch- diameter metal rod with ends of rod 

protected by plastic caps. 

B. Suspended, Electrically Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure and without Tab 

Tensioning: Motor-in-roller units designed and fabricated for suspended mounting; with 

bottom of case composed of two panels, fully enclosing screen, motor, and wiring; one 

panel hinged and designed to open and close automatically when screen is lowered and 

fully raised, the other removable or openable for access to interior of case. 

1. Provide screen case with trim flange to receive millwork finish. 

Project No.: 10145 PROJECTION SCREENS 


19 March 2012

2.02 FRONT-PROJECTION SCREEN MATERIAL 

A. Matte-White Viewing Surface: Peak gain of not less than 0.9, and gain of not less than 

0.8 at an angle of 50 degrees from the axis of the screen surface. 

B. Seamless Construction: Provide screens, in sizes indicated, without seams. 

C. Edge Treatment: Without black masking borders. 

D. Size of Viewing Surface: As indicated on Drawings. 



A. Install front-projection screens at locations indicated to comply with screen manufacturer's 


B. Install front-projection screens with screen cases in position and in relation to adjoining 

construction indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that produces 

a smoothly operating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when 

screen is lowered. 

1. Install low-voltage controls according to NFPA 70 and complying with 


a. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except in accessible ceiling spaces 

and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be 

used. Use UL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including 

plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. 

2. Test electrically operated units to verify that screen controls, limit switches, closures, 

and other operating components are in optimum functioning condition. 


Project No.: 10145 PROJECTION SCREENS 


19 March 2012


1.1 SUMMARY 



ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 

1. Entrance mats in recessed frames. 


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of 

individual components and profiles, and finishes. 

B. Maintenance Data: For floor mats and frames to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain floor mats and frames through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 

B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5 

in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans 

with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities 

(ADAAG)." 


A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 


A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete with installation of finish floors to 

receive floor mats and frames. 


2.1 ROLL-UP MATS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: See Interior Design Drawings/Specifications. 

Project No.: 10145 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 


19 March 2012


A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless 

otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed 

manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for 

maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically 

and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with 

hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints. 

B. Recessed Frames: As indicated, for permanent recessed installation, complete with 

corner pins or reinforcement and anchorage devices. 

1. Fabricate edge-frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions 

exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces 

possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by 

straight connecting pins. 

C. Coat surfaces of aluminum frames that will contact cementitious material with 

manufacturer's standard protective coating. 



A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, 

sizes, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats 

and frames. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected. 


A. Install recessed mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set 

mat tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; 

coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across mats to provide 

clearance between door and mat. 

1. Install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location and 

secure attachment of frames. 

2. Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at proper 

elevations, in recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth and level. 


A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of 

plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. 

Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial 

Completion. 


Project No.: 10145 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 


19 March 2012

1.1 SUMMARY 


SWIMMING POOL 

A. Pool construction shall be provided on a design/build basis for work of this Contract. 

All systems shall be designed and installed in strict accordance with local, State and 

Federal laws, codes and ordinances in addition to the current Homewood Suites and 

Hampton USA Design & Construction Standards. 

B. Submit complete design/build plans and specifications for pool construction and 

systems as required to complete the work. Contractor is responsible for all facets of 

design and construction of all pool related systems. 

C. All drawings, calculations and submittals required to execute the design/build work of 

this Contract shall be sealed by an Engineer licensed in the State of Colorado. 

D. Submit one copy of submittals to Architect for information only. Submit additional 

submittals to Owner and Hilton for review and approval. 

1.2 GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA 

A. Pool shall be constructed in accordance with “Minimum standards for public swimming 

pools” as published by the National Spa and Pool Institute. 

B. Fiberglass and stainless steel pools/whirlpools are not acceptable. 

C. The pool shall have a minimum depth of water in the shallow end of the main 

swimming area of between 3’-0” and 3’-6”. The depth of the deep end shall be a 

maximum of 5’-0”. 

D. Pool shall have at least two sets of ladders, stairs, steps, recessed steps or a 

combination thereof, located so as to fully serve both ends of the pool for purposes of 

entry and exit. Steps and handrail at the shallow end, ladder at the deep end. 

E. Hydraulic therapy lifter, stainless steel frame with a capacity to support 400 pounds 

with the horizontal arm fully extended. Provide lifter and all components required for a 

complete and operational installation. Provide sleeves in deck at pool. 

F. Actual pool depths must be measured and verified prior to marking the pool deck and 

sides. Lettering must be at least four inches high. Depths shall be in both English and 

metric units, English units shall be shown above the metric units. 

G. Pool Safety Equipment: Provide at least on shepherd’s hook or pole with a minimum 

length of 12 feet. Provide at two 24-inch life rings that have a United States Coast 

Guard approval. In addition, each life ring shall be attached to a line with a minimum 

diameter of 3/16-inch; the length of the life line shall be 1½ times greater than the 

greatest width of the pool. Provide a 16 unit first aid kit. 



SWIMMING POOL 


19 March 2012 

131500 - 1


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes laundry chutes. 



FACILITY CHUTES 


B. Shop Drawings: For chutes. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, weights, 

operational clearances, and attachments to other work. Indicate method of field 

assembly. 


A. Operation and maintenance data. 


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and 

labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for 

fire ratings indicated. 

1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric (neutral) pressure according to NFPA 252 or 

UL 10B. 

2. Intake Door: Class B labeled; 1-1/2-hour fire rated. 

3. Discharge Door: Class B labeled; 1-hour fire rated. 

B. Standard: Provide chutes complying with NFPA 82. 





following: 

1. Midland Chutes. 

2. U.S. Chutes. 

3. Valiant Products, Inc. 

4. Wilkinson Hi-Rise, LLC. 

Project No.: 10145 FACILITY CHUTES 


19 March 2012

2.02 CHUTES 

A. Chute Metal: Aluminum-coated, cold-rolled, commercial steel sheet; 

ASTM A 463/A 463M, Type 1 with not less than T1-40 coating. 

B. Size: 24-inch diameter. 

2.03 DOORS 

A. Intake Door Assemblies: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 stainless-steel, self-closing units 

with positive latch and latch handle; as required to provide fire-protection ratings 

indicated; and with frame suitable for enclosing chase construction. 

1. Door Type: Side hinged, limited access, 180-degree swing, square. 

2. Size: Manufacturer's standard size for door type, chute type, and diameter 

indicated. 

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard satin or No. 3 directional polish. 

4. Locks: Cylinder locks with keys that are removable only when cylinder is locked. 

For each chute, key locks to master key system. For each door, furnish four keys. 

B. Discharge-Door Assemblies: Aluminum-coated-steel doors as required to provide fireprotection 

ratings indicated; equipped with fusible links that cause doors to close in the 

event of fire. 

1. Horizontal Discharge: Provide top-hinged, self-closing, hopper door with selflatching 

hardware; floor-mounted leg brace designed to absorb impact of material 

dropping against chute; and minimum NPS 2 drain pipe connection. 


A. Fire Sprinklers: Manufacturer's standard NPS 1/2 fire sprinklers ready for piping 

connections. 


A. General: Factory assemble chutes to greatest extent practical with continuously welded or 

lock-seamed joints without bolts, rivets, or clips projecting on chute interior. Include intake 

door assemblies and metal supporting framing at each floor, and chute expansion joints 

between each support point. 

B. Roof Vent: Fabricate vent unit to extend 48 inches above roof with full-diameter, screened 

vent and metal safety cap or glass explosion-release cap. Fabricate with roof-deck flange, 

counterflashing, and clamping ring of nonferrous metal compatible with chute metal. 

C. Fire Sprinklers: Comply with NFPA 13. Locate fire sprinklers at or above the top service 

opening of chutes, within the chute at alternate floor levels in buildings more than two 

stories tall, and at the lowest service level. 



19 March 2012



A. General: Comply with NFPA 82 requirements and with chute manufacturer's written 

instructions. Assemble components with tight, nonleaking joints. Anchor securely to 

supporting structure to withstand impact and stresses on vent units. Install chute and 

components to maintain fire-resistive construction of chute and enclosing chase. 

B. Install chutes plumb, without offsets or obstructions that might prevent materials from free 

falling within chutes. 

C. Anchor roof flanges of chute vents before installing roofing and flashing. Install chute-vent 

counterflashing after roofing and roof-penetration flashing are installed. 

D. Intake and Discharge Doors: Interface door units with throat sections of chutes for safe, 

snag-resistant, sanitary depositing of materials in chutes by users. 

E. Test chute components after installation. Operate doors, locks, and interlock systems to 

demonstrate that hardware is adjusted and electrical wiring is connected correctly. 

Complete test operations before installing chase enclosures. 

F. After completing chase enclosure, clean exposed surfaces of chute system's components. 

Do not remove labels of independent testing and inspecting agencies. 


A. Demonstrate use of chute and equipment to Owner's personnel. 




19 March 2012


1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 


550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel 

03/16/2012 


COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, 

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 

600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment 

manufacturer for field installation. 


A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the 

following: 

1. Motor controllers. 

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. 


2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS 

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors. 

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS 

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 5280 feet above 

sea level. 

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads 

at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, 

and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 

22 0513 - 1 COMMON MOTOR 

REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING 

EQUIPMENT

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS 

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. 

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. 

C. Service Factor: 1.15. 

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 

2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. 

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed. 

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. 

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. 

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. 

I. Insulation: Class F. 

J. Code Letter Designation: 

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 

2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. 

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor 

frame sizes smaller than 324T. 

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection 

requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, 

suited to control method. 

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features 

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and 

tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by 

pulse-width modulated inverters. 

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected 

motors. 

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor. 



03/16/2012 



EQUIPMENT

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS 

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements 

of specific motor application: 

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 

2. Split phase. 

3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. 

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type. 

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust 

loading. 

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. 

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when 

winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. 

Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal 

range. 

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 



03/16/2012 




EQUIPMENT





03/16/2012 


EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Flexible-hose packless expansion joints. 

2. Metal-bellows packless expansion joints. 

3. Rubber packless expansion joints. 

4. Grooved-joint expansion joints. 

5. Pipe loops and swing connections. 

6. Alignment guides and anchors. 


A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures, 

and temperatures. 

B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors. 



B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with 

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the 


1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and 

for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and swing connections. 

2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and 

methods of assembly and attachment to building structure. 

3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure. 

4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end 

connections, and location for each expansion joint. 


A. Welding certificates. 

22 0516 - 1 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND 

LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

B. Product Certificates: For each type of expansion joint, from manufacturer. 


A. Maintenance Data: For expansion joints to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 

2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 


2.1 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS 

A. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints: 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 

b. Flexicraft Industries. 

c. Flex Pression Ltd. 

d. Metraflex, Inc. 

e. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc. 

2. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two flexiblemetal-hose 

legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible 

hose. 

3. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths. 

4. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper-alloy fittings with solderjoint 

end connections. 

a. Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 340 

psig at 450 deg F ratings. 

b. Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths with 700 psig at 70 deg F and 500 


5. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Copper-alloy fittings with 

threaded end connections. 

a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 300 psig at 70 

deg F and 225 psig at 450 deg F ratings. 

b. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 420 psig at 70 


6. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Stainless-steel fittings with threaded 




03/16/2012 







7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Stainless-steel fittings with flanged 






8. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 8 to NPS 12: Stainless-steel fittings with flanged end 

connections. 





B. Metal-Bellows Packless Expansion Joints: 


following: 

a. Adsco Manufacturing LLC. 

b. American BOA, Inc. 

c. Badger Industries, Inc. 

d. Expansion Joint Systems, Inc. 

e. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 

f. Flexicraft Industries. 

g. Flex Pression Ltd. 

h. Flex-Weld, Inc. 

i. Flo Fab inc. 

j. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 

k. Metraflex, Inc. 

l. Unaflex. 

m. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc. 

n. Universal Metal Hose; a subsidiary of Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 

2. Standards: ASTM F 1120 and EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers 

Association, Inc." 

3. Type: Circular, corrugated bellows with external tie rods. 

4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig unless otherwise indicated. 

5. Configuration: Single joint, Single joint with base and double joint with base classes 


6. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing: Single or multi-ply phosphor-bronze bellows, copper 

pipe ends, and brass shrouds. 

a. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint or threaded. 

b. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: threaded. 

c. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged. 



03/16/2012 



C. Rubber Packless Expansion Joints: 


following: 

a. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.; a div. of Vibration Isolation Products of Texas, Inc. 

b. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 

c. Flexicraft Industries. 

d. Flex-Weld, Inc. 

e. Garlock Sealing Technologies. 

f. General Rubber Corporation. 

g. Mason Industries, Inc.; Mercer Rubber Co. 

h. Metraflex, Inc. 

i. Proco Products, Inc. 

j. Red Valve Company, Inc. 

k. Tozen Corporation. 

l. Unaflex. 

m. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc. 

2. Standards: ASTM F 1123 and FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion Joints 

and Flexible Pipe Connectors." 

3. Material: Fabric-reinforced rubber complying with FSA-NMEJ-703. 

4. Arch Type: Single or multiple arches with external control rods. 

5. Spherical Type: Single or multiple spheres with external control rods. 

6. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 150 psig at 220 deg F. 

7. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 5 and NPS 6: 140 psig at 200 deg F. 

8. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 8 to NPS 12: 140 psig at 180 deg F. 

9. Material for Water: EPDM. 

10. End Connections: Full-faced, integral steel flanges with steel retaining rings. 

2.2 GROOVED-JOINT EXPANSION JOINTS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

1. Anvil International, Inc. 

2. Shurjoint Piping Products. 

3. Victaulic Company. 

B. Description: Factory-assembled expansion joint made of several grooved-end pipe nipples, 

couplings, and grooved joints. 

C. Standard: AWWA C606, for grooved joints. 

D. Nipples: Galvanized, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, steel pipe with grooved 

ends. 

E. Couplings: Five, flexible type for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM 

gasket suitable for cold and hot water, and bolts and nuts. 



03/16/2012 



2.3 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS 

A. Alignment Guides: 


following: 


b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. 

c. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 

d. Flexicraft Industries. 

e. Flex-Weld, Inc. 

f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 

g. Metraflex, Inc. 

h. Senior Flexonics Pathway. 

i. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc. 

j. U.S. Bellows, Inc. 

2. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer 

cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding spider for bolting to 

pipe. 

B. Anchor Materials: 

1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head. 

3. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. 

4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in 

hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for 

application. 

a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel. 

b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel. 

c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel. 

5. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud, bonding-system anchor for use with hardened 

portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. 


a. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy 

resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be 

installed. 

b. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud unless 



3.1 EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION 

A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed. 



03/16/2012 



B. Install metal-bellows expansion joints according to EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint 

Manufacturers Association, Inc." 

C. Install rubber packless expansion joints according to FSA-NMEJ-702. 

D. Install grooved-joint expansion joints to grooved-end steel piping 

3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION 

A. Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or 

compression produced during anticipated change in temperature. 

B. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings including tee in 

main. 

C. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including 

tee in riser. 

D. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including 

tee in main. 

3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION 

A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress. 

B. Install two guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to 

expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint. 

C. Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure. 

D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 

and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. 

E. Anchor Attachments: 

1. Anchor Attachment to Black-Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and 

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 

2. Anchor Attachment to Galvanized-Steel Pipe: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, 

Type 42, riser clamp welded to anchor. 

3. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, 

Type 24, U-bolts bolted to anchor. 

F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with 

ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding. 

2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener 


G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete. 



03/16/2012 





03/16/2012 








03/16/2012 


SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Sleeves and Stack-sleeve fittings. 

2. Sleeve-seal systems and Sleeve-seal fittings. 

3. Grout. 




2.1 SLEEVES AND STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS 

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron 

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel 

collar; zinc coated. 

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, 

with plain ends. 

D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded 

longitudinal joint 

E. Stack-Sleeve Fittings, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring, bolts, 

and nuts for membrane flashing. 

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS 


following: 

22 0517 - 1 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR 

PLUMBING PIPING

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 

2. CALPICO, Inc. 

3. Metraflex Company (The). 

4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 

5. Proco Products, Inc. 

B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space 

between piping and sleeve. 

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. 

Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Stainless steel. 

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length 

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 

C. Sleeve-Seal Fittings - Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made 

for imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center 

opening to match piping OD. 

2.3 GROUT 

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, 

hydraulic-cement grout. 

B. Characteristics: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications. 

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 


3.1 SLEEVE AND STACK SLEEVE FITTING INSTALLATION 

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. 

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to 

provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls. Sleeves are not 

required for core-drilled holes. 

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls 

are constructed. 

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or 

other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. 

2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal 

system. 



03/16/2012 


PLUMBING PIPING

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions. 


2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between 

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 

3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants 

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants 

specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 

E. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed. 

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between 


2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane 

waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200 "Sheet 

Metal Flashing and Trim." 

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. 

4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring 

is specified. 

5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings. 

F. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe 

penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in 

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM AND SLEEVE-SEAL FITTING INSTALLATION 

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service 

piping entries into building. 

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for 

sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, 

assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and 

sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a 

watertight seal. 

C. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed. 

D. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. 

Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall. 

E. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms. 

F. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings. 

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE 

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications: 

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above and below Grade, all sizes, Cast-iron wall sleeves with 

water stop/anchor. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between 

piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 



03/16/2012 


PLUMBING PIPING

2. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade and below Grade, all sizes, Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeveseal 

system. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and 

sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 

3. Concrete Slabs above Grade, all sizes, Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. 

4. Interior Partitions, all sizes, Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. 



03/16/2012 



PLUMBING PIPING





03/16/2012 


ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Escutcheons. 

2. Floor plates. 




2.1 ESCUTCHEONS 

A. One-Piece, or Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With rough-brass finish and setscrew fastener. 

B. One-Piece, or Split Plate Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip 

fasteners. 

2.2 FLOOR PLATES 

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners. 

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge. 



A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors, where 

penetration is exposed to view and on exterior of building. 

22 0518 - 1 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING 

PIPING

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD 

that completely covers opening. 

C. Furnish pipe Escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for 

unoccupied areas. 

D. Escutcheons for Moist Areas: Provide cast brass or sheet brass, solid or split hinged. 

E. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors. 

F. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD 


1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type. 

2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type. 


A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials. 



03/16/2012 


22 0518 - 2 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING 

PIPING





03/16/2012 


METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers. 

2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 

3. Thermowells. 

4. Dial-type pressure gages. 

5. Gage attachments. 

6. Test plugs. 

7. Test-plug kits. 


1. Section 221113 "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for domestic water meters and 

combined domestic and fire-protection water-service meters outside the building. 

2. Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters inside the building. 




A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer. 


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and 


22 0519 - 1 METERS AND GAGES FOR 

PLUMBING PIPING


2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS 


following: 

1. Ashcroft Inc. 

2. Ernst Flow Industries. 

3. Marsh Bellofram. 

4. Miljoco Corporation. 

5. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. 

6. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. 

7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 

8. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 

9. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA. 

10. Winters Instruments - U.S. 

B. Standard: ASME B40.200. 

C. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 3-inch or 5-inch nominal diameter. 

D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F and 

deg C. 

E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle and rigid, bottom, with unified-inch screw 

threads. 

F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 

G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel. 

H. Window: Plain glass. 

I. Ring: Stainless steel. 

J. Element: Bimetal coil. 

K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 

L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range. 

2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS 

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers: 


following: 

a. Flo Fab Inc. 

b. Miljoco Corporation. 

c. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. 



03/16/2012 


PLUMBING PIPING

d. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. 

e. Trerice, H. O. Co. 

f. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 

g. Winters Instruments - U.S. 

2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 

3. Case: Cast aluminum, 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 

4. Case Form: Adjustable angle. 

5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 

6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings 

graduated in deg F and deg C. 

7. Window: Glass. 

8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation. 

9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 

10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 

1.5 percent of scale range. 

2.3 THERMOWELLS 

A. Thermowells: 


2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 

3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI. 

4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES or CSA. 

5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 

6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 

7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 

8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 

9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 

10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 

11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer 

connection. 

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin. 

2.4 PRESSURE GAGES 

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: 


following: 

a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge. 

b. Ashcroft Inc. 

c. Ernst Flow Industries. 

d. Flo Fab Inc. 

e. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. 

f. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. 

g. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. 

h. Trerice, H. O. Co. 

i. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 



03/16/2012 


PLUMBING PIPING

j. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 

k. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA. 

l. Winters Instruments - U.S. 


3. Case: Liquid-filled type(s); cast aluminum; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter. 

4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 

5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and 

bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 

6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 

7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi. 

8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 


10. Ring: Metal or Brass or Stainless steel. 

11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range. 

2.5 GAGE ATTACHMENTS 

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and 

piston or porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated 

piping. 

B. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 

2.6 TEST PLUGS 


following: 

1. Flow Design, Inc. 


3. National Meter, Inc. 

4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 

5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 

6. Trerice, H. O. Co. 



B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended 

stem on units to be installed in insulated piping. 

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. 

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F. 

F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber. 



03/16/2012 


PLUMBING PIPING

2.7 TEST-PLUG KITS 


following: 









B. Furnish one test-plug kit(s) containing one thermometer(s), one pressure gage and adapter, and 

carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of 

diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping. 



A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in 

piping tees. 

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if 

required to match sizes. 

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping. 

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium. 

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions. 

F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect 

cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length. 

G. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the 

most readable position. 

H. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel. 

I. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids. 

J. Install test plugs in piping tees. 

K. Install thermometers in the following locations: 

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater. 

2. Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger. 

3. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank. 

4. Inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller. 



03/16/2012 


PLUMBING PIPING

L. Install pressure gages in the following locations: 

1. Building water service entrance into building. 

2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve. 

3. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump. 

3.2 CONNECTIONS 

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance 

of meters, gages, machines, and equipment. 

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility. 

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE 

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be the following: 

1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. 

B. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger shall be[ one of] the 

following: 


C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank shall be[ one of] the 

following: 


D. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length. 

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE 

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F. 

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F. 

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE 

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be: 

1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case. 

B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each water pressure-reducing valve shall be: 




03/16/2012 


PLUMBING PIPING

C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each domestic water pump shall be: 


3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE 

A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 160 psi. 

B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi. 



03/16/2012 



PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 – GENERAL 

1.01 DESCRIPTION: 



03/16/2012 

SECTION 220523 

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 

A. This Section describes general requirements for valves common to most plumbing piping 

systems which are specified elsewhere in Division 22. 

1.02 SUBMITTALS: 

A. Submit the following Product Data for all valves under provisions of Section 01300: Body 

material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, 

seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, 


B. Submit operating instructions and maintenance requirements for all valves. 

1.03 STANDARDS: 

A. All valves shall conform to applicable portions of the following standards and as required 

by the appropriate national and local codes. 

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 

American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 

American Welding Society (AWS) 

American Water Works Association (AWWA) 

Canadian Standards Association (CSA) 

Commercial Standards, National Bureau of Standards (CS) 

Compressed Gas Association (CGA) 

Copper Development Association (CDA) 

Federal Specifications (FS) 

Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) 

B. Solenoid valves shall be UL listed, FM/AGA/ANSI and CSA approved. 

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: 

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 

1. Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rusting and galvanic 

corrosion. 

2. Protect valve ends against mechanical damage to threads, flange faces, and weld 

end preps. 

3. Set valves in best position for handling. Globe and gate valves shall be closed to 

prevent rattling; ball and plug valves shall be open to minimize exposure of 

220523 - 1 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR 

PLUMBING PIPING



03/16/2012 

functional surfaces; butterfly valves shall be shipped closed or slightly open; and 

swing check valves shall be blocked in either closed or open position. 

B. Storage: Use the following precautions during storage: 

1. Valves shall be stored and protected against all dirt, debris and foreign material at 

all times. 

2. Do not remove valve end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall 

for storage. 

3. Protect valves against weather. Where practical, store valves indoors. Maintain 

valve temperature higher than the ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor 

storage is necessary, support valves off the ground and protect in watertight 

enclosures. 

C. Handling: Valves whose size requires handling by a crane or lift shall be slung or rigged 

to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Handwheels and stems shall not be used as 

lifting or rigging points. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 

2.01 MANUFACTURERS: 

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following in each category: 

2.02 VALVE FEATURES: 

1. Gate Valves: Nibco, Stockham, Hammond, Milwaukee. 

2. Ball Valves: Apollo, Nibco, Watts, Milwaukee, Stockham, Anvil. 

3. Eccentric Plug Balancing Valves: Keystone/Tyco, Milliken, DeZurik. 

4. Globe Valves: Nibco, Stockham, Hammond, Milwaukee. 

5. Swing Check Valves: Nibco, Stockham, Watts (threaded), Apollo, Milwaukee, 

Anvil (grooved only). 

6. Non-Slam Check Valves: Nibco, Keystone/Tyco, Milwaukee, Stockham, 

Centerline, Val-Matic, Metraflex, Technocheck, Golden Anderson, Anvil. 

7. Solenoid Valves: Magnatrol Valve Corp., Skinner, General Controls, Asco. 

A. General: Comply with MSS-92 1980 "Valve Users Manual." 

B. All valves of each type shall be of one manufacturer. 

C. Valve Design: Valves shall have rising stem, or rising stem outside screw and yoke design; 

except, non-rising stem valves may be used where headroom prevents full operation of 

rising stem valves. 

D. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. 

(Control valves shall be sized for required flow, 3 psi pressure drop maximum.) 

E. Operators: Provide the following special operator features: 

1. Handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter turn type. 


PLUMBING PIPING

2. Lever handle on quarter turn valves 6 inch and smaller, except plug valves. 

Provide one wrench for every group of plug valves within a room. 

3. Chainwheel operators for valves 2-1/2 inch and larger that are installed 7’-0” or 

higher above finished floor elevation. Provide chains to an elevation of 6’-3” 

above finished floor elevation. 

4. Worm gear operators of an enclosed weather-proof design shall be provided on 

all quarter turn valves 8 inches and larger. 

F. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems to 

allow full operation of the valve without interference by the insulation. 

G. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45. 

H. End Connections: As specified in the individual valve specifications. 

2.03 GATE VALVES: 

1. Threaded: Comply with ANSI B2.1. 

2. Flanged: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel, and ANSI 

B16.24 for bronze. 

3. Solder-Joint: Comply with ANSI B16.18. 



03/16/2012 

a. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a 

melting point below 840°F for gate, globe, and check valves and below 

421°F for ball valves. 

A. Gate Valves – 2” and smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 150 Class 200/300, body and bonnet of cast bronze 

conforming to ASTM B-62 for 150 psi / B-61 for 200/300 psi, threaded ends, solid wedge disc, union 

bonnet, rising stem, bronze gland, non-asbestos TFE impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. 

Stockham Fig. B-120/B-122 B-132/B-145 

B. Gate Valves – 2-1/2” and larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125 /Class 250, iron body conforming to ASTM A- 

126 C1 B, bronze trim, 0 S & Y design, flanged ends, and non-asbestos TFE-impregnated packing. 

2.04 BALL VALVES: 

Stockham Fig. G-623 /F-667 

A. Ball Valves – 1” and smaller: MSS SP-110, ANSI B16.34, Class 150 WSP / 600 WOG, 

rated for 150 psi at 350°F, two-piece end-entry body style, bronze body conforming to 

ASTM B-584 (zinc content not exceeding 12%), full-port chrome-plated solid brass ball, 

15% glass reinforced RTFE seats, RTFE packing, adjustable packing nut, blow-out proof 

stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends or threaded ends to match 

piping system. 

Apollo 77C-100/200 

B. Ball Valves – 1-1/4” through 2” and for all silver soldered or brazed lines: MSS SP-110, 

ANSI B16.34, Class 150 WSP / 600 WOG, rated for 150 psi at 350°F. Three-piece body 

style, bronze body conforming to ASTM B-584 (zinc content not exceeding 12%), single 


PLUMBING PIPING

full-port stainless steel ball and stem of ASTM A-276 type 316, 15% glass reinforced RTFE 

seats, RTFE packing, blow-out proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder 

ends or threaded ends to match piping system. 

Apollo 82-100/200. 

2.05 ECCENTRIC PLUG BALANCING VALVES: 

A. All Sizes: 125/150 psi rated; cast iron, corrosion-resistant, permanently lubricated body; 

straightway pattern; EPDM encapsulated eccentric plug; lever actuators, except 

handwheels where indicated; and flanged ends. Provide memory stop feature. 

Milliken 600 series. 

B. 2” and smaller: At contractors option, provide combination flow measuring device and 

balancing valve, complete with venturi flow meter on P/T port, and ball valve for control; 

125/150 psi rated. Provide memory stop feature. 

2.06 GLOBE VALVES: 

A. Globe Valves - 2” and smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 150/300 body, bonnet, bonnet ring 

cast of bronze conforming to ASTM B-62/61, stainless steel 500 BHN disc, union bonnet, 

non-asbestos Teflon-impregnated stem packing, copper-silicon bronze stem, brass 

packing gland, and malleable iron handle. 

Stockham Fig. B-29/B-74 

B. Globe Valves – 2-1/2” and larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125/250, cast of bronze conforming 

to ASTM B-62/61, bolted bonnet bronze mounted, rising stem / Teflon disc with bronze 

disc holder / bronze disc, OS & Y, non-asbestos Teflon-impregnated stem packing, and 

cast iron or malleable iron hand wheel. 

2.07 CHECK VALVES: 

Stockham Fig. G-512/F-532 

A. Swing Check Valves – 2-1/2” and smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, cast bronze body and 

cap conforming to ASTM B-62, horizontal swing design, Y-pattern, bronze/teflon disc, 

stainless steel pin, and threaded or solder ends. Class 150 valves meeting the above 

specifications may be used where pressure requires or where Class 125 is not available. 

B. Swing Check Valves – 2-1/2” to 3”: MSS SP-71, Class 125, cast of bronze conforming to 

ASTM B-62/61, horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring, 

and flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the 

line. For sewage ejector and sump pump discharge swing check valves 2-1/2” and larger, 

provide outside lever with weight or spring to assist disc in closing rapidly. 

C. Non-Slam Check Valves – 2” and smaller: Bronze body, 200 psi @ 250 degrees F., 

threaded ends, resilient seats, center guided spring-loaded disk. 



03/16/2012 


PLUMBING PIPING

D. Non-Slam Check Valves – 2-1/2” and larger: Class 125 cast bronze or stainless steel 

body, replaceable lapped bronze seat and balanced twin bronze flappers or bronze center 

guided disc and stainless steel trim. Valve shall be designed to open and close at 

approximately one foot differential pressure. Twin flappers or center guided disc shall be 

loaded with a stainless steel spring to assure even non-slam checking action. Seals shall 

be EPDM. 

2.08 DRAIN VALVES: 

A. For HVAC and plumbing hydronic systems, provide cast bronze ball valve with threaded 

hose end and cap with chain. 

2.09 SOLENOID VALVES: 

Apollo Fig. 78-100/78-200 Series 

A. Solenoid valves shall consist of a solenoid (electromagnet) with its core and a valve body 

containing one or more orifices. The solenoid shall be mounted directly on the valve 

body. 

B. Response time from fully open or closed to fully closed or open shall be slow acting. 

C. Solenoid valves shall be 2-/3-way type valves. 

D. Solenoid valves shall be normally open or normally closed as required for proper 

operation of the system, for protection against freezing and fire, and for safety. 

E. Solenoid enclosures shall meet the ICS-6 ANSI/NEMA standard and UL standards 429, 

508 and/or 1002 as follows: 

1. Type 1: General Purpose. 

2. Type 2: Drip proof. 

3. Type 3 and 3S: Raintight, dust tight and sleet (ice) resistant. 

4. Type 3R: Rainproof, sleet (ice) resistant. 

5. Type 4: Watertight and dust tight. 

6. Type 4X: Watertight, dust tight and corrosion resistant. 

7. Type 6: Submersible. 

8. Type 6P: Submersible, prolonged submersion at a limited depth. 

9. Type 7: Explosion proof, Class I, Division 1, Group A (acetylene); B (hydrogen); C 

(ethyl-ether vapors, ethylene or cyclopropane); D (gasoline, hexane, naphtha, 

benzene, butane, propane, alcohol, acetone, benzol, lacquer, solvent vapors or 

natural gas). 

10. Type 9: Dust-ignition proof, Class II, Group E (metal dust); F (carbon black coal 

or coke dust); G (flour starch or grain dust). 

11. Operating temperatures shall range from 185°F to 842°F for T1 through T6 code 

numbers. 

F. Parts in contact with fluid shall be brass, bronze, or stainless steel; core tube, 305 stainless 

steel; core and plug nut, 430°F stainless steel; seal, BUNA “N"; shading coil, copper; disc, 

BUNA “N" and Nylon; spring, 302 stainless steel (General Service). 



03/16/2012 


PLUMBING PIPING

G. Manual reset safety shut-off valve shall open manually and close upon interruption of 

current. 

H. Electric current shall be AC of voltage shown on Division 16 drawings. 

PART 3 – EXECUTION 

3.01 EXAMINATION: 

A. Install valves in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, including recommended 

lubrication. 

B. Examine valve interior through the end ports for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter 

and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks used which prevent disc 

movement during shipping and handling. 

C. Actuate valve through an open-close and close-open cycle. Examine functionally 

significant features, such as guides and seats made accessible by such actuation. 

Following examination, return the valve closure member to the position in which it was 

shipped. 

D. Examine threads on both the valve and the mating pipe for form (out-of-round or local 

indentation) and cleanliness. 

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions which might cause leakage. Check bolting for 

proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size and material, 

and for freedom from defects and damage. 

F. Prior to valve installation, examine the piping for cleanliness, freedom from foreign 

materials, and proper alignment. 

G. All valves shall be installed so that they are accessible and serviceable, and such that full 

length operating handles may be used without interference from structure or other pipes 

and/or equipment. 

H. Isolation valves shall be installed: 

1. In piping at each and every piece of equipment. 

2. In piping whenever said pipe enters or leaves an equipment room. 

3. At all branch take-offs from mains. 

4. Where shown on Drawings. 

I. Label all valves with tags indicating service and identification number. Tags shall be 1- 

1/2” in diameter, brass, and with 1/4”-high letters. Securely fasten with chain and hook. 

Match service abbreviations given on mechanical drawings. 

3.02 VALVE SELECTION: 

A. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select valves 

with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: 



03/16/2012 


PLUMBING PIPING

1. Copper Tube – 2” and smaller: Soldered ends, except in heating hot water and 

low pressure steam service, where threaded ends shall be used. 

2. Steel Pipe – 2” and smaller: Threaded or grooved-end. 

3. Steel Pipe – 2-1/2” and larger: Flanged or grooved-end. 

4. At all piping hot taps, provide a gate valve at the hot tap and a butterfly valve for 

shut-off service. Hot taps shall be provided only where approved by the Engineer. 

3.03 VALVE INSTALLATIONS: 

Valve Application Table 

SERVICE VALVE TYPE 

Plumbing Water Services – 2” and Ball Valve 

smaller 

Plumbing Water Services – 2-1/2” Butterfly Valve 

and larger 

Plumbing Pressure Reducing Bypass – Ball Valve 

2” and smaller 

Plumbing Pressure Reducing Bypass – Butterfly Valve 

2-1/2” and larger 

Plumbing Balancing – 2” and Calibrated Balancing Valve 

smaller 

Plumbing Balancing – 2-1/2” Eccentric Plug Balancing Valve 

and larger 

Plumbing Check Valves – 2” Swing Check 

and smaller 

Plumbing Pump Discharge Non-Slam Swing Check 

Check Valve – all sizes 

Sewage Ejector and/or Sump Pump Swing Check 

Discharge Check Valve – all sizes 

Condensate Piping Shut-off – 2” Ball Valve 

and smaller 

A. Locate valves for easy access, and provide separate support where necessary. 

B. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment in a manner to allow 

equipment removal without system shut-down. Unions are not required on flanged 

devices. 

C. Install 3-valve bypass around each pressure-reducing valve using throttling type valves. 

D. Gate and globe valves shall be installed with the stem in the upright position. In overhead 

horizontal piping, ball valves shall be installed with the handle at the side or bottom of the 



03/16/2012 


PLUMBING PIPING

piping. Butterfly valves shall be installed with the stem within 45 degrees of the horizontal 

position. The handle of quarter turn valves shall point in the direction of flow when the 

valve is open. Quarter turn valves with hand wheels or chain wheels shall be located so 

that the position indicator is visible from the floor without the use of a ladder or climbing 

on equipment or piping. 

E. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow and as follows: 

1. Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin level. 

2. Wafer Check Valves: Install between two flanges in horizontal or vertical 

upward flow position. 

3. Lift Check Valves: Install in piping line with stem upright and plumb. 

3.04 SOLDER CONNECTIONS: 

A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths. 

B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket, using steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire 

brush, to a bright finish. Clean valve socket in same manner. 

C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube. 

D. Open gate and globe valves to fully open position. 

E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves with composition discs. 

F. Insert tube into valve socket, ensuring that the end of the tube rests against the shoulder 

inside the valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux. 

G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder will melt upon contact. Feed 

solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating of the 

valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth 

or brush. 

3.05 BRAZED CONNECTIONS: 

A. Protect valves from temperatures which exceed the valve material temperature limitations 

as recommended by the valve manufacturer. 

B. Disassemble 3-piece ball valves prior to brazing. 

3.06 THREADED CONNECTIONS: 

A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve internal seat or 

wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve. 

B. Align threads at point of assembly. 

C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry 

seal threading is specified). 



03/16/2012 


PLUMBING PIPING

D. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the 

pipe is being threaded. 

3.07 FLANGED CONNECTIONS: 

A. Align flange surfaces parallel. 

B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and 

gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten 

bolts gradually and uniformly using a torque wrench. 

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 

A. Testing: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final 

adjusting and balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop 

leaks; replace valve if leak persists. 

3.09 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: 

A. Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and 

prepare to receive finish painting or insulation. 



03/16/2012 



PLUMBING PIPING


1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 



03/16/2012 


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 

A. Extent of supports and anchors required by this Section is indicated on drawings and/or 

specified in other Division 23 sections. 

B. Types of supports and anchors specified in this section include the following: 

1. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports. 

2. Vertical-Piping Clamps. 

3. Hanger-Rod Attachments. 

4. Building Attachments. 

5. Saddles and Shields. 

6. Spring Hangers and Supports. 

7. Miscellaneous Materials. 

8. Roof Equipment Supports. 

9. Anchors. 

10. Equipment Supports. 

C. Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as 

part of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections. 

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and 

anchors of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in 

similar service for not less than 5 years. 

B. Codes and Standards: 


1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable plumbing codes pertaining to 

product materials and installation of supports and anchors. 

2. UL and FM Compliance: Hangers, supports, and components shall be listed and 

labeled by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping systems. 

3. Duct Hangers: Comply with SMACNA Duct Manuals. 

4. MSS Standard Compliance: 

a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and 

manufacture comply with MSS SP-58. 

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation 

instructions, for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe hanger and support 

22 0529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 

PLUMBING PIPING AND 

EQUIPMENT

schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each 

required pipe hanger and support. 

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of 

support and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of 

assembly of components. 

C. Submit product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying 

that their products meet the specified requirements. 

D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and 

anchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in the Operating and 

Maintenance Manual, in accordance with the requirements of Division 23. 





1. Pipe Hangers and Supports: B-Line Systems Inc.; Carpenter and Patterson, Inc.; 

Fee & Mason Mfg. Co., Div. of Figgie International; Anvil Corp.; PHD 

Manufacturing, Inc.; Elcen Metal Products Company; Michigan Hanger Company; 

Unistrut Metal Framing System; Hubbard Enterprises (supports for domestic water 

piping); Specialty Products Co. (supports for domestic water piping). 

2. Saddles, Shields and Thermal Shield Inserts: Anvil Corp.; Pipe Shields, Inc.; B- 

Line; Insulated Saddle Shield Insert Product, Inc.; Michigan Hanger Company; 

Value Engineered Products, Inc. 

3. Roof Equipment Supports: Custom Curb, Inc.; Pate Co.; Thycurb, Div. of Thybar 

Corp.; Vent Products, Inc. 

4. Concrete Inserts and Anchors: Phillips Drill Company; Michigan Hanger 

Company; Unistrut Metal Framing Systems; Elcen Metal Products Company; ITW 

Ramset/Red Head; Hilti; B-Line. 

2.02 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS: 

A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and 

manufacturer complying with MSS SP-58. 

1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and 

equipment that will not have field-applied finish. 

2. Pipe attachments shall have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where 

attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. 

B. Adjustable Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1. 

1. Steel Pipe, sizes 3/8” thru 12”, Anvil fig. 260. 

2. Copper Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 4”, Anvil fig. CT-65. 

3. Cast Iron Pipe, sizes 4” thru 24”, Anvil fig. 590. 



03/16/2012 



EQUIPMENT

C. Adjustable Swivel Rings: MSS Type 10. 

1. Steel Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 2”, Anvil fig. 69; size 2-1/2” thru 8”, Anvil figs. 69 or 

70. 


D. Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 8. 



E. U Bolts: MSS Type 24. 


2. Copper Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 8”, Anvil fig. 137C. 

F. Straps: MSS Type 26. 


G. Pipe Stanchion Saddles: MSS Type 37. 

1. Steel Pipe, sizes 4” thru 12”, Anvil fig. 259. 

H. Yoke & Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43. 

1. Sizes 2-1/2” thru 20”, Anvil fig. 181. 

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous threaded steel, sizes as specified. 

I. Hangers: 

1. Hot Pipes: 



03/16/2012 

a. Sizes 1/2” through 1-1/2”: Adjustable wrought steel ring. 

b. Sizes 2” through 5”: Adjustable wrought steel clevis. 

c. Sizes 6” and larger: Adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. 

2. Cold Pipes: 


b. Sizes 2” and larger: Adjustable wrought steel clevis. 

3. Multiple or Trapeze: Structural steel channel (with web vertical), with welded 

spacers and hanger rods. Provide cast iron roll and stand for hot pipe sizes six 

inches and larger. Provide hanger rods one size larger than required for largest 

pipe in trapeze. If the deflection at center of trapeze exceeds 1/360 of the 

distance between the end hangers, install an additional hanger at mid-span or 

use a larger channel. 

J. Wall Supports for Horizontal Pipe: 

1. Sizes 1/2” through 3-1/2”: Steel offset hook. 



EQUIPMENT

2. Sizes 4” and larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. Provide 

adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe 200° F and higher and sizes 

six inches and larger. 

K. Supports for Vertical Pipe: Steel riser clamp. 

L. Upper Attachments: 

1. For attaching hanger rods to structural steel I-beams: 



03/16/2012 

a. Provide adjustable beam clamp, Elcen No. 95, with No. 235 rod socket or 

equal. Attach to bottom flange of beam. 

2. For attaching hanger rods to bar joists: 

a. When bottom chord is constructed of structural steel angles, provide Elcen 

No. 84H square washer or equal with nut. Place hanger rod between 

backs of the two angles and support with the washer on top of the angles. 

Spot weld washer to angles. 

3. When bottom chord is constructed of round bars, provide Elcen No. 137 bar joist 

washer or equal. 

2.03 CONCRETE INSERTS AND ANCHORS: 

A. Inserts: Case shall be of galvanized steel with square threaded concrete insert nut for 

hanger rod connection; 3/4” lateral adjustment; top lugs for reinforcing rods, and nail 

holes for attaching to forms. Michigan Hanger models 355 and 355N or equal by 

Unistrut or Elcen. This type of upper attachment is to be used for all areas having pouredin-place 

concrete construction. 

1. Size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 

B. Provide fasteners attached to concrete ceilings that are vibration and shock resistant. 

Provide hangers for piping and cuts attached to concrete construction with one of the 

following types: 

1. Concrete insert per MSS SP-58, Type 18. 

2. Powder driven fasteners, subject to approval. Each fastener shall be capable of 

holding a test load of 1000 pounds, but the actual load shall not exceed 50 

pounds. 

3. Self-drilling expansion shields. The load applied shall not exceed one-fourth the 

proof test load required. 

4. Machine bolt expansion anchor. The load applied shall not exceed one-fourth the 


C. Anchors: Carbon steel, zinc plated. Installation shall be in holes drilled with carbidetipped 

drill bits or by use of self-drilling anchors. 

1. Provide anchors suitable for the location of installation and designed to withstand 

all forces and movements acting on the anchor. Pipe anchors shall be 

manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-58. Provide a safety factor of four for 

the anchor installation. 



EQUIPMENT

2.04 SADDLES AND THERMAL SHIELD INSERTS: 

A. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching 

adjoining insulation. 

1. Anvil Figs. 160-165. 

B. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; 180° arc, minimum 20 ga. galvanized steel, and 

minimum 12” long, to prevent crushing of insulation. 

1. Anvil Fig. 167. 

C. Thermal Shield Inserts: Provide 100-psi minimum compressive strength, waterproof, 

asbestos-free calcium silicate, encased with a sheet metal enclosure. Insert and shield 

shall cover the entire circumference of the pipe and shall be of length recommended by 

the manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation. For cold piping, calcium silicate 

shall extend beyond the sheet metal shield to allow overlap of the vapor barrier. Where 

piping 4” and larger is supported on trapeze or pipe rollers, provide double thickness 

shields. For piping 12” and larger, provide 600 psi calcium silicate structural insert. 

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: 

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A-36. 

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C-150, Type I or Type III) and clean, uniformly 

graded, natural sand (ASTM C-404, Size No. 2). Mix ratio shall be 1.0 part cement to 3.0 

parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and 

hydration. 

C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld 

steel in accordance with AWS standards. 

D. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated 

steel, consisting of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding 

spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), 

and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated 

travel. 

2.06 ROOF EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: 

A. General: Construct roof equipment supports using minimum 18-ga galvanized steel with 

fully mitered and welded corners, 3” cant, internal bulkhead reinforcing, integral base 

plates, pressure treated wood nailer, 18-ga galvanized steel counter-flashing and rigid 

insulation. 

B. Configuration: Construct of sizes as indicated, and compensate for slope in roof so that 

top of support is dead level. 



03/16/2012 



EQUIPMENT


3.01 INSPECTION: 

A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do 

not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner 

acceptable to Installer. 

3.02 PREPARATION: 

A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building 

structural work has been completed in areas where these items are to be installed. Correct 

inadequacies, including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other 

building structural attachments. Review Structural Drawings to obtain structural support 

limitations. 

B. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet 

at project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection 

and testing agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordination 

with work of this Section, and Architect/Engineer for the purpose of reviewing material 

selections and procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with the 

requirements specified. Provide Shop Drawings showing methods of installation and 

support locations from structure. 

3.03 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS: 

A. Install building attachments within concrete or on structural steel. Space attachments 

within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional 

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion 

joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is 

placed; fasten insert to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 

psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. 

B. New Construction: 

1. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of 

reinforced concrete beams wherever practicable. 

2. Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. Provide reinforcement rod in 

concrete for inserts carrying pipe larger than 4” or ducts larger than 60” wide. 

3. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, finish inserts flush with slab surface. 

4. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide rod 

with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab if construction above permits. 

C. Existing Construction: 

1. In existing concrete construction, drill into concrete slab and insert and tighten 

expansion anchor bolt. Connect anchor bolt to hanger rod. Care must be taken 

in existing concrete construction not to sever reinforcement rods or tension wires. 

3.04 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: 



03/16/2012 



EQUIPMENT

A. Hangers for single pipes shall be adjustable clevis hangers, zinc-plated for steel pipes and 

copper-plated for copper pipes. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be oversized to 

accommodate pipe insulation thickness. 

B. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from 

building structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel 

runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze 

hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP- 

69. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space 

hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. 

Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from 

other piping. 

C. Install hangers and supports complete with all necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers 

and other accessories. 

D. Provide electrolysis isolators at all hangers and supports for domestic water, condenser 

water, and other water lines which are not insulated. 

E. Prevent electrolysis and abrasion in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and 

supports which are plastic coated, or with EPDM isolation strips. Duct tape or copper 

coated hangers are not acceptable. 

F. Support fire water piping independently from other piping systems. 

G. Install hangers and supports to allow for controlled movement of piping systems, to permit 

freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, 

expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. Install hangers and supports within 

1’– 0” of each horizontal elbow. 

H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and 

stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 

I. Provide vibration isolators on the first three supports upstream and downstream of 

equipment equipped with flexible connectors such as pumps, chillers, cooling towers, etc. 

J. Pipe Sloping: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe sloping, and so that 

maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31.9 Building Services Piping Code are not 

exceeded. 

K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements: 

1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps 

projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. 

2. Saddles: Install protection saddles, MSS Type 39, where supported by pipe rollers. 

Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. 

3. Shields: 



03/16/2012 

a. Install galvanized steel 180° insulation protection shields on all insulated 

piping of sizes 2” and smaller, except where required to be clamped. 

Where necessary to prevent dislocation, strap shield to pipe with wire ties 

or "Zip Strips." Insulation shall be continuous through hanger. 

b. Insulation lengths and galvanized steel saddle lengths and gauges 

(minimums) shall comply with Table 1 below. Where pipe hanger spacing 



EQUIPMENT



03/16/2012 

exceeds 10 feet, a second layer (180°) steel shield shall be used for 

additional strength. 

TABLE 1 

Pipe Size 1/2” to 2” 2-1/2” to 5” 6” to 10” 12” to 18” 20” to 24” 

Insulation Length (in.) 6 9 9 12 24 

Shield Length (in.) 4 6 6 9 18 

Gauge of Steel* 24 20 16 16 16 

*Bottom saddle only; top saddle may be one gauge lighter. 

4. Thermal Inserts: Provide a 360° insert of high density water-proofed calcium 

silicate at all supports for all insulated piping larger than 2” and for all piping 

required to be clamped. Insulation inserts shall extend one inch beyond sheet 

metal shield on all chilled water lines. Provide 180° inserts at clevis and roller 

hangers. Provide 360° inserts for all trapeze and clamped supports. 

L. Except where governed by more stringent local codes, install piping hangers with the 

following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing as indicated in Table 2 below: 

Pipe Material Pipe Size 

TABLE 2 

Max. Hanger 

Spacing 

Min. Hanger Rod 

Diameter 

Steel, Schedule 40 & 80, filled with 1/2" 5'-0" 3/8" 

water 3/4" 6'-0" 3/8" 

1" 7'-0" 3/8" 

1-1/4" 8'-0" 3/8" 

1-1/2" 9'-0" 3/8" 

2" 10'-0" 3/8" 

2-1/2" 11'-0" 1/2" 

3" 12'-0" 1/2" 

4" 14'-0" 5/8" 

5" 16'-0" 5/8" 

6" 17'-0" 3/4" 

8" 19'-0" 7/8" 

10" 22'-0" 7/8" 

12" 23'-0" 7/8" 

Steel, Std. Weight, filled with water 14" 25'-0" 1" 

16" 27'-0" 1" 

18" 28'-0" 1" 

20" to 24" 30'-0" 1-1/2" 

Copper, Types K, L, M and DWV 1/2" 6'-0" 3/8" 

3/4", 1" 8'-0" 3/8" 



EQUIPMENT



03/16/2012 

1-1/4" through 2" 10'-0" 3/8" 

2-1/2" through 5" 12'-0" 1/2" 

6" through 8" 14'-0" 3/4" 

Note: Maximum hanger spacings shown in Table 2 are based on maximum sag of 0.1” between 

hangers for straight pipe. Hanger spacing must be reduced to compensate for any valves and/or 

fittings installed in the pipe run. Spacing shall limit sag to 0.1” between hangers. Minimum 

hanger spacing for fire protection piping shall be per appropriate NFPA requirements. 

M. Support cast iron piping, in addition to the requirements of Table 3, as follows: 

1. Hub & Spigot – All sizes: One hanger to each joint, minimum. 

2. No-Hub – All sizes: 

a. With Clamp-All and Anaheim Series 4000 stainless steel couplings and 

MG cast iron couplings: one hanger to each joint. 

b. With all other stainless steel band-type couplings: one hanger to each 

side of joint. 

3. Support all horizontal cast iron pipe within 18 inches of each joint. 

4. Use hanger rods same size as required for steel. 

5. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each story height and at its base. Secure vertical 

hub-and-spigot pipe immediately below the hub. Support vertical no-hub pipe so 

that the weight is carried from the pipe to the support and not from the joint to the 

support. 

N. Place a hanger within one foot (0.305 m) of each horizontal elbow. 

O. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) minimum after piping 

is erected. 

P. Support vertical steel and copper piping at every story height, but at not more than 15-foot 

intervals for steel and cast iron and 10-foot intervals for copper. 

Q. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide trapeze 

hangers. All hanger members shall be sized with 5-to-1 safety factor. Verify load bearing 

capacity of structure before installation of trapeze hangers. 

R. Where practical, support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 

S. Support steam supply and condensate return pipe runs on adjustable roller hangers. 

T. Each pipe drop to equipment shall be adequately supported. All supporting lugs or guides 

shall be securely anchored to the building structure. 

U. Securely anchor and support plumbing domestic water piping in chases or walls. Use 

factory manufactured clamps and brackets connected to fixture carriers, wall studs or floor. 

Wires or straps will not be permitted. 

1. When copper supplies are connected to flush valves, support the tubing by the 

studs or by a fixture carrier, not by clamping to waste/vent piping. 



EQUIPMENT

2. Prevent copper tubing from making contact with steel brackets, using fire retardant 

polyethylene inserts or other dielectric insulating material. Duct tape shall not be 

used. 

V. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the 

following: 

1. In the event a self-drilling expansion shield or machine bolt expansion shield is 

considered to have been installed improperly, the Contractor shall make an 

acceptable replacement or demonstrate the stability of the anchor by performing 

an on-site test under which the anchor will be subjected to a load equal to twice 

the actual load. 

2. Powder-driven fasteners may be used only where they will be concealed after 

construction is complete. Where an occasional fastener appears to be improperly 

installed, additional fastener(s) shall be driven nearby (not closer than 6 inches) in 

undisturbed concrete. Where it is considered that many fasteners are improperly 

installed, the Contractor shall test load any 50 successively driven fasteners. If 10 

percent or more of these fasteners fail, the Contractor shall utilize other fastening 

means as approved and at no additional cost to the Owner. 

3. Hangers for piping and ductwork shall be attached to cellular steel floor decks 

with steel plates and bolted rods conforming to the steel deck manufacturer's 

requirements. Where the individual hanger load exceeds the capacity of a single 

floor deck attachment, steel angles, beams or channels shall be provided to span 

the number of floor deck attachments required. 

4. Welding may be used for securing hangers to steel structural members. Welded 

attachments shall be designed so that the fiber stress at any point of the weld or 

attachment will not exceed the fiber stress in the hanger rod. 

3.05 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS: 

A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by 

ANSI B31.9, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. 

B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to 

structure. Comply with ANSI B31.9 and with AWS Standard D1.1. 

C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with 

expansion unit manufacturer’s written instructions, to control movement to compensators. 

D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe 

runs and at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Make 

provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and 

contraction of piping. 

3.06 SHEET METAL DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: 

A. Provide in accordance with SMACNA HVAC duct construction standards. 

B. Provide also in the following locations: 

1. 2” to 24” from flexible connections of fans. 



03/16/2012 



EQUIPMENT

2. 2” to 24” from the outlets or flexible connections of VAV control units or mixing 

boxes. 

3. 12” to 36” from the main duct to the first hanger of long branch ducts. 

4. 2” to 12” from the ends of all branch ducts and linear diffuser plenums. 

5. 2” to 24” from fire damper break-away joints. 

6. At throat and heel of round or square elbows 48” or greater in width. 

3.07 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: 

A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support 

equipment above floor. 

B. All steel work shall be in conformance with the requirements of the AISC Specification for 

the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. Material shall 

conform to ASTM A-36. 

C. Bases and supports shall be constructed as detailed on approved shop drawings provided 

by the Contractor. 

D. All structural steel shall receive one coat of industrial enamel primer in the shop after all 

fabrication welding is complete. Paint all field joints with one coat of industrial enamel 

primer. After all steel is properly primed, paint with two coats of exterior grade enamel. 

Color to be as selected by the Architect. 

E. Grouting: Place grout under supports for piping and equipment. 

F. Concrete bases for mechanical equipment indoors and outdoors will be provided by the 

General Contractor only if shown on the architectural or structural drawings. Otherwise, 

all bases shall be provided by this Contractor. 

G. For inertia bases, see Section 230548. 

H. Provide housekeeping bases for all floor-mounted mechanical equipment (pumps, air 

handlers, water heaters, boilers, chillers, tanks, etc.). Bases shall be 4” thick minimum, 

and extended 6” beyond machinery bedplates. Coordinate location and size with the 

General Contractor. 

I. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper size and location of all bases and shall 

furnish all required anchor bolts and sleeves. If bases are provided by the General 

Contractor, furnish him with templates showing the bolt locations. 

J. Equipment shall be secured to the bases with anchor bolts of ample size. Bolts shall have 

bottom plates and pipe sleeves and shall be securely imbedded in the concrete. All 

machinery shall be grouted under the entire bearing surface. After grout has set, all 

wedges, shims and jack bolts shall be removed and the space filled with non-shrinking 

grout. This Contractor shall provide lead washers at all equipment anchor bolts. 

K. Construct equipment supports above floor of structural steel members or steel pipe and 

fittings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. 

L. Provide rigid anchors for ducts and pipes immediately after vibration isolation connections 

to equipment. See also Section 230548. 



03/16/2012 



EQUIPMENT

3.08 PREFABRICATED ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: 

A. Equipment Bases: 

1. Equipment base shall be solid top equipment base with stepped cant to match 

roof insulation. Base shall pitch to match roof pitch and provide level unit 

installation. 

2. Base shall be constructed of reinforced 18-gauge galvanized steel with all welded 

components, full mitered corners, factory installed 1-1/2” thick rigid fiberglass 

insulation, wood nailer, and galvanized steel counterflashing. Base shall be 

shipped as one piece. 

B. Equipment Rails: 

1. Equipment rail shall be constructed of 18-gauge galvanized steel shell, base plate, 

and counterflashing with factory installed wood nailer, fully mitered end sections, 

and stepped cant to match roof insulation. Rails shall pitch to match roof pitch 

and provide level installation. 

C. All supports shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 

3.09 FLASHING AND SAFING: 

A. Flash and counterflash where mechanical equipment passes through weather- or waterproofed 

walls, floors, or roofs. 

B. Provide lead flashing around ducts and pipes passing from equipment rooms, installed 

according to manufacturer's data for sound control. 

3.10 METAL FABRICATION: 

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment 

supports. Install and align fabricated anchors at indicated locations. 

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that 

cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc 

welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding 

work, and the following: 

3.11 ADJUSTING: 





4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and 

contours at welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 



03/16/2012 



EQUIPMENT

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to 

achieve indicated slope of pipe. 

B. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection of anchors and supports, clean field welds 

and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for 

shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA-1 requirements for touch-up of field-painted 

surfaces. 

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 

C. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas, and apply 

galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A-780. 



03/16/2012 




EQUIPMENT




03/16/2012 


VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 


A. Extent of vibration control work required by this Section is indicated on drawings and 

schedules, and/or specified in other Division 22 sections. 

1. All plumbing equipment and piping as noted or in the specification shall be 

mounted on vibration isolators to prevent the transmission of vibration and 

mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall 

be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably 

uniform deflection. 

2. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with component 

manufacturer’s and building construction standards. Whenever a conflict occurs 

between the manufacturer's or construction standards, the most stringent shall 

apply. 

3. Any variance from or non-compliance with these specification requirements shall 

be corrected by the contractor in an approved manner. 

B. The work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 

1. Vibration isolation for all plumbing systems/equipment, including, but not limited 

to, the following: Pumps (all types) 

2. Vibration isolation for piping. 

3. Equipment isolation bases. 

4. Flexible piping connections. 

C. Vibration control products furnished as an integral part of factory-fabricated equipment 

shall be accepted only if they fully comply with the requirements of this Section. 

D. For additional and supplemental requirements, refer to other Division 22 sections for 

equipment foundations; hangers; sealants; gaskets; requirements of electrical connections 

to equipment isolated on vibration control products; 


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of vibration 

control products, of types, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in 

satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years. 


1. Except as otherwise indicated, vibration control products shall be obtained from a 

single manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer. 

2. Engage manufacturer to provide technical supervision of installation of support 

isolation and associated inertia bases. 

22 0548 - 1 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC 

CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 

PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions 

for each type of vibration control product. Submit schedule showing size, type, deflection, 

and location for each product furnished. 

1. Include data for each type and size of unit, showing isolation efficiency, stiffness, 

natural frequency and transmissibility at lowest operating speed of equipment, 

detailing compliance with the specification. 

2. For spring units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height, solid-compression 

height, operating height, fatigue characteristics, ratio of horizontal to vertical 

stiffness, and basis of spring-rating selection for range of loading weights. 

3. Include detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing 

vibration isolators by referencing numbered descriptive drawings. 

4. Include performance certifications from manufacturers. 

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating 

dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components. 

Detail bases, and show location of equipment anchoring points coordinated with 

equipment manufacturer's shop drawings. 

1. Submit shop drawings showing structural design and details of inertia bases, steel 

beam bases and other custom-fabricated work not covered by manufacturer's 

submitted data. 



03/16/2012 

a. Furnish templates, anchor bolts and sleeves for equipment bases, 

foundations and other support systems for coordination of vibration 

isolation with other work. 

b. Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment. 

2. Submit shop drawings indicating scope of vibration isolation work and locations of 

units and flexible connections. Indicate support isolation points for piping and 

ductwork, including risers and inertia bases. 

a. Include schedule of units, showing size or manufacturer's part number, 

and weight supported and resulting deflection for each unit. 

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each type of vibration control product. 

Include this data, product data and shop drawings in the Operating and Maintenance 

Manual, in accordance with requirements of Divisions 23. 

1.04 CODE AND STANDARDS REQUIREMENTS: 

A. Applicable Codes and Standards: 

1. The International Building Code (IBC) as published by the International 

Conference of Building officials. 

2. All State and Local Codes. 

3. ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook, Sound and Vibration Control. 

1.05 MANUFACTURER'S RESPONSIBILITY: 

A. Manufacturer of vibration isolation equipment shall have the following responsibilities: 




1.06 RELATED WORK: 

1. Determine vibration isolator sizes and locations. 

2. Provide vibration isolation units as scheduled or otherwise specified. 

3. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision to ensure 

proper installation and performance. 

A. Housekeeping Pads: Details and design of housekeeping pad reinforcement and 

monolithic pad attachment to the structure shall be prepared by the contractor if not 

already indicated on the drawings. 

B. Supplementary Support Steel: Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all 

equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., including roof mounted equipment, as required or 

specified. 


2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the 

following: 

1. Mason Industries, Inc. 

B. Alternate Manufacturer: All vibration isolators described in this Section shall be the 

product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industries’ products are the basis of these 

specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems 

strictly comply with these specifications and have been reviewed by the Engineer. 

Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance with Section 1.03. 

2.02 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS: 

A. The following product descriptions are listed by a letter, which is used as the identifier in 

the Equipment Vibration Isolation Schedule and elsewhere in Part 3 of this Specification. 

1. Mountings: 



03/16/2012 

a. Specification “A”: Double deflection neoprene mountings shall have a 

minimum static deflection of 0.35”. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene 

covered to avoid corrosion and have friction pads both top and bottom so 

they need not be bolted to the floor. Bolt holes shall be provided for these 

areas where bolting is required. On equipment such as small vent sets 

and close coupled pumps, steel rails shall be used above the mountings 

to compensate for the overhang. Mountings shall be type ND or rails type 

DNR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

b. Specification “B”: Spring type isolators shall be free-standing and laterally 

stable without any housing and complete with ¼” neoprene-acoustical 

friction pads between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall 

have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring 

diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring 






03/16/2012 

at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid 

equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring 

diameters, deflections, compressed spring height and solid spring height. 

Mountings shall be type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

c. Specification “C”: Equipment with operating weight different from the 

installed weight such as chillers, boilers, etc. and equipment exposed to 

the wind such as cooling towers shall be mounted on spring mountings as 

described in engineering Specification B, except a housing shall be used 

that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is 

removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection, and 

cooling tower mounts shall be located between the supporting steel and 

roof or the grillage and dunnage as shown on the drawings. The 

installed and operating heights shall be the same. A minimum clearance 

of ½” shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the 

housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit 

stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Mountings used 

out-of-doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. Mountings shall be type SLR 

as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

2. Hangers: 

a. Specification “D”: Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring, located 

in a neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent shortcircuiting 

of hanger rod, and 0.3” deflection neoprene element in series. 

The spring shall be color coded for ease of identification. The neoprene 

element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through 

the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall 

be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc 

before contacting the hole and short-circuiting the spring. Springs shall 

have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated 

deflection. Submittals shall include a scale drawing of the hanger 

showing the 30° capability. Hangers shall be type 30N as manufactured 

by Mason Industries, Inc. 

b. Specification “D1”: Vibration hangers shall contain a 0.3” deflection 

neoprene element. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod 

isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Hangers shall be 

type HD as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

c. Specification “E”: Vibration hangers shall be as described in engineering 

Specification D, except they shall be precompressed to the rated deflection 

so as to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during 

installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to 

free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is 

subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of 

a scale. Hangers shall be type PC30N as manufactured by Mason 

Industries, Inc. 

d. Specification “F”: Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring located in 

a neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent short-circuiting 

of the hanger rod. The cup shall contain a steel washer designed to 

properly distribute the load on the neoprene and prevent its extrusion. 

Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough 

to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc before contacting the 

hole and short-circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum 

additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Hangers 

shall be provided with an eye bolt on the spring end and provision to 




3. Bases: 



03/16/2012 

attach the housing to the flat iron duct straps. Submittals shall include a 

scale drawing of the hanger showing the 30° capability. Hangers shall be 

type W30 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

a. Specification “G”: Vibration isolator manufacturer shall furnish integral 

structural steel bases. Bases shall be rectangular in shape for all 

equipment other than centrifugal refrigeration machines and pumps, 

which may have ‘T’ or ‘L’ shaped bases. Pump bases for split case pumps 

shall include supports for suction and discharge base ells. All perimeter 

members shall be beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/10 th of the 

longest dimension of the base. Beam depth need not exceed 14” 

provided that the deflection and misalignment are kept within acceptable 

limits as determined by the manufacturer. Height saving brackets shall be 

employed in all mounting locations to provide a base clearance of one 

inch. Bases shall be type WF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

b. Specification “H”: Vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide steel 

members welded to height saving brackets to cradle machines having legs 

or bases that do not require a complete supplementary base. Members 

shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent strains in the equipment. Inverted 

saddles shall be type ICS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

c. Specification “J”: Vibration isolator manufacturer shall furnish rectangular 

structural beam or channel concrete forms for floating foundations. Bases 

for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide support for suction 

and discharge base ells. The base depth need not exceed 12” unless 

specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity. 

In general, bases shall have a minimum depth of 1/12 th of the longest 

dimension of the base, but no less than 6”. Forms shall include minimum 

concrete reinforcement consisting of half-inch bars or angles welded in 

place on 6” centers running both ways in a layer 1-1/2” above the 

bottom, or additional steel as required by the structural conditions. Forms 

shall be furnished with drilled steel members with sleeves welded below 

the holes to receive equipment anchor bolts where the anchor bolts fall in 

concrete locations. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all 

mounting locations to maintain a 1” clearance below the base. Bases 

shall be type K as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. Provide 

concrete fill as required for a complete installation. 

4. Flexible Connectors: 

a. Specification “K”: Spherical flexible connectors shall employ peroxide 

cured EPDM in the covers, liners and Kevlar® tire cord frictioning. Any 

substitutions must have equal or superior physical and chemical 

characteristics. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raised face 

rubber flanged ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not 

acceptable. Sizes 2" (50mm) and larger shall have two spheres reinforced 

with a ductile iron external ring between spheres. Flanges shall be split 

ductile iron or steel with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16" (400mm) 

to 24" (600mm) may be single sphere. Sizes 3/4" (19mm) to 1½" (38mm) 

may have threaded two-piece bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and 

cable retention. Connectors shall be rated at 250 psi (1.72MPa) up to 

170 o F (77 o C) with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 215 psi 

(1.48MPa) at 250 o F (121 o C) in sizes up through 14" (350mm). 16" 






03/16/2012 

(400mm) through 24" (600mm) single sphere minimum ratings are 180 

psi (1.24MPa) at 170 o F (77 o C) and 150 psi (1.03 MPa) at 250 o F (121 o C). 

Higher rated connectors may be used to accommodate service conditions. 

All flexible connectors must be factory tested to 150% of rated pressure for 

12 minutes before shipment. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout 

shall be a minimum of 3/1. Concentric reducers to the above ratings 

may be substituted for equal ended connectors. 

b. Flexible connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of 

the connectors under pressure. Control rods need only be used in 

unanchored piping locations where the manufacturer determines the 

installation exceeds the pressure requirement without control rods. If 

control rods are used, they must have ½" (12mm) thick Neoprene washer 

bushings large enough in diameter to take the thrust at 1000 psi (.7 

kg/mm 2 ) maximum on the washer area. 

c. Submittals shall include two test reports by independent consultants 

showing minimum reductions of 20 dB in vibration accelerations and 10 

dB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies on this or 

a similar product by the same manufacturer. All flexible connectors shall 

be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves. Flexible 

connectors shall be SAFEFLEX series, type SFDEJ, SFEJ, SFDCR or SFU and 

control rods type CR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

5. Flexible Hoses: 

a. Specification “L”: Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel 

braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3” and larger shall be flanged. 

Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Lengths for each pipe size shall be 

as tabulated: 

Flanged Male Nipples 

3 x 14 10 x 26 ½ x 9 1-1/2 x 13 

4 x 15 12 x 28 ¾ x 10 2 x 14 

5 x 19 14 x 30 1 x 11 2-1/2 x 18 

6 x 20 16 x 32 1-1/4 x 12 

8 x 22 

b. Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves 

horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible. 

Hoses shall be type BSS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

6. Acoustical Floor, Ceiling, and Wall Seals: 

a. Specification “M”: Where piping passes through equipment room walls, 

floors or ceilings, the vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide a split 

seal consisting of two bolted pipe halves with ¾” or thicker neoprene 

sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the 

pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the 

piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with 

the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe 

prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall project a 

minimum of 1” past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 

240°F, 10 lb./cu.ft. density fiberglass may be used in lieu of the sponge. 

Seals shall be type SWS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 






7. Pipe Anchors: 



03/16/2012 

a. Specification “N”: Vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide an alldirectional 

acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of a telescopic arrangement 

of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum half inch thickness of 

heavy duty neoprene and duck or neoprene isolation material. Vertical 

restraints shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent 

vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material 

shall not exceed 500 psi, and the design shall be balanced for equal 

resistance in any direction. All-directional anchors shall be type ADA as 

manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

8. Horizontal Thrust Restraints: 

a. Specification “X”: Air handling equipment shall be protected against 

excessive displacement which might result from high air thrusts in relation 

to the equipment weight. The horizontal thrust restraint shall consist of a 

spring element in series with a neoprene pad as described in Specification 

B, with the same deflection as specified for the mountings or hangers. 

The spring element shall be contained within a steel frame and designed 

so it can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to 

allow for a maximum of ¼” movement at start and stop. The assembly 

shall be furnished with one rod and angle brackets for attachment to both 

the equipment and ductwork or the equipment and the structure. 

Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of thrust and 

symmetrically on either side of the unit. Horizontal thrust restraints shall 

be type WB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

9. Curb-Mounted Aluminum Bases: 

a. Specification “Y”: Curb-mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on 

vibration isolation bases that fit over the roof curb and under the isolated 

equipment. The extruded aluminum top member shall overlap the bottom 

member to provide water runoff independent of the seal. The aluminum 

members shall house cadmium plated springs having a 1” minimum 

deflection with 50% additional travel to solid. Spring diameters shall be 

no less than 0.8 of the spring height at rated load. Wind resistance shall 

be provided by means of resilient snubbers in the corners with a minimum 

clearance of ¼” so as not to interfere with the spring action except in high 

winds. The weather seal shall consist of continuous closed cell sponge 

materials both above and below the base and a waterproof flexible 

ductlike EPDM connection joining the outside perimeter of the aluminum 

members. Foam or other contact seals are unacceptable at the spring 

cavity closure. Caulking shall be kept to a minimum. Submittals shall 

include spring deflections, spring diameters, compressed spring height 

and solid spring height as well as seal and wind resistance details. Curb 

mounted bases shall be type CMAB as manufactured by Mason Industries, 

Inc. 




A. Examine areas and conditions under which vibration control units are to be installed. Do 

not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.02 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS: 

A. General: Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by ASHRAE, for selection 

and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated. 

B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with 

manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation 

materials and units to achieve minimum static deflection and displacement requirements. 

3.03 GENERAL: 

A. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and 

load application to vibration isolation materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units do 

not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not shortcircuited 

by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices (if 

any) intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation. 

B. All vibration isolators must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written 

instructions and all certified submittal data. 

C. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, 

piping or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment. 

D. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that 

degrades the noise and vibration control system herein specified. 

E. The contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, ductwork or conduit which makes 

rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. "Building" includes, but 

is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls. 

F. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact between the building and any 

vibrating equipment, piping, ductwork or conduits. 

G. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact between the building and 

equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be 

brought to the Architect's/Engineer's attention prior to installation. Corrective work 

necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible contractor's expense. 

H. Bring to the Architect's/Engineer's attention any discrepancies between the specifications 

and the field conditions or changes required due to specific equipment selection, prior to 

installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the 

responsible contractor's expense. 

I. All installations which are deemed defective in materials and/or workmanship shall be 

corrected at the responsible contractor's expense, at no additional cost to the Owner. 

J. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead support of 

equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of record for 

approval. Generally, bracing may occur from: 



03/16/2012 




1. Flanges of structural beams. 

2. Upper truss chords in bar joist construction. 

3. Cast-in-place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors. 

K. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as required. 

Independent steel rails are not permitted on this project. 

L. Install vibration isolation units between substrate and equipment as required for secure 

operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces. 

M. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible. 

N. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim 

units as required where substrate is not level. 

O. Install inertia base frames on isolator units so that minimum of 1” clearance below base 

will result when frame is filled with concrete and supported equipment has been installed 

and loaded for operation. 

P. Weld riser isolator units in place as required to prevent displacement from loading and 

operations. 

Q. Install flexible connectors and hoses on the equipment side of shut-off valves. Install hoses 

horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible. 

3.04 VIBRATION ISOLATION: 

A. Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three pipe hangers for the main lines near the 

mechanical equipment shall be as described in Specification E. Horizontal runs in all other 

locations throughout the building shall be isolated by hangers as described in Specification 

D. Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators as described in Specification C. Heat 

exchangers shall be considered part of the piping run. All Specification E hangers or the 

first three Specification C mounts, as noted above, shall have the same static deflection as 

specified for the mountings under the connected equipment. (Note: If piping is connected 

to equipment located in basements and hangs from ceiling under occupied spaces, the 

first three hangers shall have 0.75” deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 3”, 1.5” 

deflection for larger pipe sizes up to and including 6”, and 2.5” deflection for pipe sizes 

larger than 6”.) All other hangers and mounts shall have a minimum steel spring 

deflection of 0.75”.) Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead structure as 

practical. 

B. Equipment Room Seals: All piping passing through equipment room walls, floors or 

ceilings shall be protected against sound leakage by means of an acoustical wall seal as 

described in Specification M. 

C. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from Specification E hangers or supported by 

Specification C mountings, with the piping anchored or guided with Specification N 

anchors. Steel spring deflection shall be a minimum of 0.75” except in those expansion 

locations where additional deflection is required to limit load changes to plus or minus 

25% of the initial load. 

D. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated 

by a minimum 1/2” thickness of 60 durometer neoprene. The height of the guides shall 



03/16/2012 




e preset with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion or contraction. 

Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. 

Guides shall be capable of ± 1-5/8” motion, or as required to meet specific location 

requirements. Pipe guides shall be type VSG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

E. Flexible Pipe Connections: All equipment that is supported by or mounted on vibration 

isolators shall be piped with flexible connections. Specification “K” or Specification “L” 

flexible connections shall be installed parallel to the equipment shaft insofar as practical 

and on the equipment side of isolation valves. 

F. Equipment Isolation: All mechanical equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolators to 

prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building 

structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so 

as to produce reasonably uniform deflection. Isolator types shall be as noted on the 

equipment schedule below. 

EQUIPMENT VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE: 

(Not all types of equipment listed below are necessarily used on this project.) 

EQUIPMENT TYPE 

Floor-Mounted Pumps 

(Slab on Grade) 


Above/Below Occupied Spaces 

Structure-Hung Pumps 

* Omit if internal isolation is provided. 

** Omit for FPB without hydronic coil. 

*** Use type C mount for outdoor, wind-loaded installations. 

3.05 EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK: 



03/16/2012 

ISOLATOR SPECIFICATION 

Mount Type A; 

Connector Type K 

Base Type J; Spring Type B; 


Hanger Type D 


STATIC DEFLECTION 

(INCHES) 

A. Installer of vibration isolation work shall observe installation of other work related to 

vibration isolation work, including work connected to vibration isolation work; and, after 

completion of other related work (but before equipment start-up), shall furnish written 

report to Engineer listing any observed inadequacies which could prevent proper operation 

and performance of vibration isolation work. Report shall cover, but not necessarily be 


0.75 

1.50 

0.75 

1. Equipment installations (performed as work of other sections) on vibration 

isolators. 

2. Piping connections, including flexible connections. 

3. Ductwork connections, including provisions for flexible connections. 

4. Passage of piping and ductwork, which is to be isolated, through walls and floors. 

B. Do not start up equipment until inadequacies have been corrected. 





A. Clean each vibration control unit, and verify that each is working freely and that there is 

no dirt or debris in immediate vicinity of unit that could possibly short- circuit unit isolation. 

3.07 DEFLECTION MEASUREMENTS: 

A. Upon completion of vibration isolation work, prepare report showing measured equipment 

deflections, theoretical floor deflection and isolation efficiency for each major item of 

equipment. 

3.08 QUIET OPERATION AND VIBRATION: 

A. Mechanical equipment provided under this contract shall operate under all load conditions 

without noise or vibration which is objectionable in the opinion of the Engineer. In the 

case of rotating machinery, noise or vibration noticeable outside of the room in which it is 

installed, or annoyingly noticeable inside its own room, will be considered objectionable. 

Noise or vibration conditions considered objectionable by the Engineer shall be corrected 

in an approved manner by the Contractor at his expense. Vibration control shall be 

accomplished by means of approved vibration isolators installed in a manner 

recommended by the manufacturer of the isolators. 



03/16/2012 









03/16/2012 


IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 

A. Extent of mechanical identification work required by this Section is indicated on the 

drawings and/or specified in other Division 23 sections. 

B. Types of identification devices specified in this section include the following: 


1. Painted Identification Materials 

2. Plastic Pipe Markers 

3. Plastic Tape 

4. Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker 

5. Plastic Duct Markers 

6. Valve Tags 

7. Valve Schedule Frames 

8. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs 

9. Plastic Equipment Markers 

10. Plasticized Tags 

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of identification 

devices of the types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in 




1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, 

colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. 


for each identification material and device required. 

B. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 

8-1/2” x 11” bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as 

shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), size of valve, and variations for 

identification (if any). Only tag valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and 

similar special uses, such as valves to isolate individual system risers and individual floor 

branches, and building system shut-off valves. In addition to mounted copies of the valve 

schedules, furnish extra copies for Operating and Maintenance Manuals as specified in 

Division 23. 

22 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 

AND EQUIPMENT




following: 

B. Mechanical Identification: 



03/16/2012 

1. Allen Systems, Inc. 

2. Brady (W.H.) Co., Signmark Div. 

3. Brimar Industries, Inc. 

4. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. 

5. Seton Name Plate Corp. 

6. PVC Specialties 

2.02 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS: 

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for 

each application as referenced in other Division 23 sections. Where more than a single 

type is specified for an application, selection is at Installer's option; but provide single 

selection for each product category. 

2.03 PAINTED IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS: 

A. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications, with letter sizes 

generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping or to match existing 

size in existing building, but not less than 1-1/4” high letters for ductwork and not less 

than 3/4" high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions. 

B. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise 

indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade. 

C. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise 

indicated, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors or match existing building standard 


2.04 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS: 

A. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, colorcoded 

pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. 

B. Insulation: Furnish 1” thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe 

marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125°F 

(52°C) or greater. Cut length to extend 2” beyond each end of plastic pipe marker. 

C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6” (including insulation, if any), provide fullband 

pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one 

of the following methods: 


AND EQUIPMENT



03/16/2012 

1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. 

2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 

3/4” wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2”. 

D. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6” and larger (including insulation, if any), provide 

either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times the letter height 

(and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods: 

1. Steel spring or non-metallic fasteners. 


1-1/2” wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3”. 

3. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's 

standard stainless steel bands. 

E. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled, shown, or to 

match existing building lettering nomenclature system, and abbreviate only as necessary 

for each application length. 

F. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally 

with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate unit 

of plastic. 

2.05 PLASTIC DUCT MARKERS: 

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic duct markers. 

B. For hazardous exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by ANSI A13.1. 

C. Nomenclature: Include the following: 

2.06 PLASTIC TAPE: 

1. Direction of airflow. 

2. Duct service (supply, return, exhaust, etc.) 

3. Duct origin (from). 

4. Duct destination (to). 

5. Design cfm. 

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive) 

vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick. 

B. Width: Provide 1-1/2” wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including 

insulation, if any) of less than 6”, 2-1/2” wide tape for larger pipes. 

C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated. 

2.07 UNDERGROUND-TYPE PLASTIC LINE MARKERS: 

A. General: Manufacturer’s standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic 

tape, intended for direct-burial service, not less than 6” wide x 4 mils thick. Provide tape 

with printing which most accurately indicates type of service of buried pipe. 


AND EQUIPMENT

B. Provide multi-ply tape consisting of solid aluminum foil core between two layers of plastic 

tape. 

2.08 VALVE TAGS: 

A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gauge polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved 

piping system abbreviation in 1/4” high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2” high, 

and with 5/32” hole for fastener. 



03/16/2012 

1. Provide 1-1/2” diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated. 

2. Fill tag engraving with black enamel. 

OR 

Plastic Laminate Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer’s standard 3/32” thick 

engraved plastic laminate valve tags, with piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high 

letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2” high, and with 5/32” hole for fastener. 

3. Provide 1-1/2” square black tags with white lettering, except as otherwise 

indicated. 

4. Provide size, shape and color combination as specified or scheduled for each 


OR 

Plastic Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer's standard solid plastic valve tags with 

printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16” 

high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8” high, and with 

5/32” hole for fastener. 

5. Provide 1-1/8” square white tags with black lettering. 



B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or 

beaded type) and solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags 

to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. 

C. Access Panel Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard 1/16” thick engraved plastic 

laminate access panel markers, with abbreviations and numbers corresponding to 

concealed valve. Include 1/8” center hole to allow attachment. 

2.09 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES: 

A. General: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for 

removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded 

aluminum, with non-glare type sheet glass. 

2.10 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS: 

A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, 

in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the 


AND EQUIPMENT



03/16/2012 

sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise 

indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary 

because of substrate. 

B. Thickness: 1/8”, except as otherwise indicated. 

C. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive 

where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate. 

2.11 PLASTICIZED TAGS: 

A. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention 

tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4" x 

5-5/8”, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed 

wording including large-size primary wording (such as DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT 

OPERATE). 

2.12 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS: 

A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical 

identification work with corresponding designations shown, specified, scheduled and 

approved by the Owner/Engineer. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated 

and approved by the Owner/Engineer for proper identification and 

operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. 

B. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, 

provide identification which indicates individual system number as designated on the 

drawings or schedule as well as service. 


3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: 

A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, 

painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, 

install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to 

installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. 

3.02 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION: 

A. General: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork and duct access 

doors with duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing ductwork service 

and direction of flow, in black or white (whichever provides the most contrast with 

ductwork color). Identification in an existing building shall match the method which exists 

in the building. 

B. Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed or concealed only by a removable 

ceiling system, locate signs near points where ductwork originates or continues into 


AND EQUIPMENT



03/16/2012 

concealed enclosures (shaft, underground or similar concealment), and at 50 ft. spacing 

along exposed runs. 

C. Access Doors: Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in ductwork 

and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment), other maintenance and 

operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information. 

D. Concealed Doors: Where access doors are concealed above acoustical ceilings or similar 

concealment, plasticized tags may be installed for identification in lieu of specified signs, at 

Installer's option. 

3.03 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION: 

A. General: Install pipe markers of the following type on each system indicated to receive 

identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. Identification in an 

existing building shall match the method which exists in the building. 

1. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this 

section. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated 

pipes. 

OR 

Stenciled markers, including color-coded background band or rectangle, and 

contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend color band or rectangle 2” beyond 

ends of lettering. 

OR 

Stenciled markers, with lettering color complying with ANSI A13.1. 

OR 

Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever continuous colorcoded 

painting of piping is provided. 

B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in 

occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, 

plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations: 

1. Near each valve and control device. 

2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark 

each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. 

3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter nonaccessible 

enclosures. 

4. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of 

concealed piping. 

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 

6. Spaced intermediately at a maximum spacing of 25 ft. along each piping run, 

except with spacing reduced to 15 ft. in congested areas of piping and equipment. 

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. 


AND EQUIPMENT

3.04 UNDERGROUND PIPING IDENTIFICATION: 

A. General: During back-filling/top-soiling of each exterior underground piping system, 

install continuous underground type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 

6” to 8” below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in common trench 

and do not exceed an overall width of 16”, install single line marker. 

3.05 VALVE IDENTIFICATION: 

A. General: Provide valve tag on valves in each piping system. List each tagged valve in 

valve schedule for each piping system. 



03/16/2012 

1. Building services main shut-off valves. 

2. Each individual system main shut-off valves. 

3. Each individual system riser shut-off valves. 

4. Each individual system floor shut-off valves. 

5. Each individual system major branch shut-off valves. 

B. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in mechanical equipment rooms where 

directed by Architect/Owner/Engineer. 

C. Where more than one major mechanical equipment room is shown for the project, install 

mounted valve schedule in each major mechanical equipment room, and repeat only the 

main valves which are to be operated in conjunction with operations of more than a single 

mechanical equipment room. 

3.06 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION: 

A. General: Install minimum 2 inch x 4 inch, engraved plastic laminate equipment marker 

on each individual item of mechanical equipment. Provide signs for the following general 

categories of equipment: 

1. Main building systems control and operating valves, including safety devices and 

hazardous units such as gas outlets. 

2. Room thermostats, except gun tag labels are acceptable for room thermostats. 

3. Fuel-burning units including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills and absorption 

chillers. 

4. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers and similar motor-driven units. 

5. Heat exchangers, cooling towers, heat recovery units and similar equipment. 

6. Fans and blowers. 

7. HVAC units. 

8. Tanks and pressure vessels. 

9. Water treatment systems and similar equipment. 

B. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4" high lettering for name of unit. 

C. Text of Signs: In addition to the identified unit, inform operator of operational 

requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and 

improper operations. 



AND EQUIPMENT

A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually 

blocked by work of this division or other divisions. 

B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts. 



03/16/2012 



AND EQUIPMENT





03/16/2012 


MECHANICAL INSULATION 

A. The work covered by this Specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, 

materials, accessories, and performance of all operations necessary for the installation of 

all insulation on all hot and cold surfaces of plumbing, piping, space heating and air 

conditioning systems in strict accordance with the specifications and applicable drawings. 

B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following: 

1. Piping System Insulation: 

a. Fiberglass. 

b. Cellular Glass. 

c. Calcium Silicate. 

d. Thermal Ceramic. 

2. Equipment Insulation: 


b. Calcium Silicate. 

c. 25/50 Rated Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric. 

C. Refer to other Division 22 sections for requirements related to protection saddles, 

protection shields, thermal hanger shields, mechanical identification, and duct linings, 

which are not part of the work of this section. 


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical 

insulation products and systems, of the types and sizes required, whose products have 

been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. 

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on 

projects with mechanical insulation. All insulation shall be installed per manufacturer’s 

recommendations by skilled workmen regularly engaged in this type of work. 

C. Furnish insulation systems to the project site bearing the manufacturer’s label with product 


1.03 FIRE HAZARD RATING: 

A. All insulation products (including insulation, jacket, and adhesive used to adhere the jacket 

to the insulation) shall have composite Fire and Smoke Hazard ratings, as tested under 

procedures defined by ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723, not exceeding: 

22 0719 - 1 PLUMBING INSULATION

Flame Spread 25 

Smoke Developed 50 

B. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements and cloth for fittings shall have the same 

component ratings as listed above. Paper laminate jackets shall be permanently fire and 

smoke resistant. Chemicals used for treating paper in jacket laminates shall not be water 

soluble and shall be unaffected by water and humidity. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions and 

maintenance requirements for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule 

showing manufacturer's product number, k-value, thickness, density, and furnished 

accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. Submit detailed product 

information and installation information for all jacketing systems specified in this section. 


A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with 

manufacturer's stamp or label affixed, showing fire hazard indexes of products. 

1.06 PROTECTION: 

A. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, or mechanical damage before, during, and 

after installation. Any such insulation or covering damaged prior to final acceptance of 

the work shall be satisfactorily replaced. 



A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the 


1. Mechanical Insulation: Johns Manville; Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.; 

CertainTeed Corp.; Knauf Fiberglass; Manson; Armstrong World Industries Inc.; 

Pittsburgh Corning Corp.; PABCO, Inc.; Rubatex Corp. 

2. Jacketing & Covering Products: Childers; Ceel-Co; Zeston; Alpha Associates, Inc. 

2.02 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS: 

A. Specification “A”, Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C-547, Class I or Class II unless 

otherwise indicated. “k” factor shall be maximum of 0.24 at 75° F mean temperature. 

Insulation shall have jacket with tensile strength of 35 lbs/in and factory applied vapor 

barrier jacket with permeability of 0.02 perm with adhesive self-sealing lap joint. 



03/16/2012 


B. Specification “B”, Cellular Glass Piping Insulation: ASTM C-552, Type II, Class 2. “k” 

factor shall be maximum of 0.29 at 75° F mean temperature. 

C. Specification “C”, Calcium Silicate Piping Insulation: ASTM C-533, Type I. “k” factor shall 

be maximum of 0.45 at 500° F mean temperature, compression strength of 200 psi for 

5% compression, transverse strength of 200 psi for 5% compression, and minimum 

flexural strength of 60 psi. 

D. Specification “D”, Thermal Ceramic Insulation: “k” factor shall be a maximum of 1.5 at 

1500° F mean temperature, 2000° F temperature limit. 

E. Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C-921, Type I for piping with temperatures below 

ambient, Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all 

piping at Installers option. 

1. Fitting Covers: UV-resistant PVC, premolded, with maximum flame spread rating 

of 25 and maximum smoke developed rating of 50. Use PVC tape for cold 

systems, serrated tacks or PVC tape for hot systems. 

2. Aluminum Jacketing: Manufactured from T3003 (or T5005) H14 to H19 

aluminum alloy with 3/16” corrugations, and having a factory-attached 1 mil thick 

polyethylene moisture barrier continuously laminated across the full width of the 

jacketing. Jacketing shall be .016” thick minimum. Provide matching factoryfabricated 

covers for 90° and 45° elbows, tee fittings, flange fittings, valve bodies, 

blind ends, reducers and other fittings as necessary to make the covering system 

complete, waterproof and weatherproof. All jacketing shall have color coated 

baked-on polyester finish, with color selected by Architect. 

3. PVC Jacketing: UV-resistant PVC, 20 mil thick, maximum flame spread rating of 

25, maximum smoke developed rating of 50, factory cut and curled to fit O.D. of 

insulated pipe. Solvent weld adhesive for sealing joints and seams. 

4. Cloth Jacketing Material: Not less than 8 oz. per square yard, with adhesives, 

cement and sealer as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the intended 

application. PVC premolded fitting covers shall not be provided. 

F. Piping Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, cements and similar 

accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the applications indicated. 

G. Piping Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, sealers, protective finishes and similar 

compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the applications indicated, 

and additional finishes as specified. 

2.03 EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS: 

A. Specification “A”, Rigid Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C-612, Class 2. “k” factor 

shall be a maximum of 0.28 at 200° F mean temperature, 6 lbs. per cu. ft. density, 450° F 

temperature limit. 

B. Specification “B”, Rigid Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C-612, Class 2. “k” factor 

shall be a maximum of 0.28 at 200° F mean temperature, 6 lbs.per cu. ft. density, 450° F 

temperature limit. The insulation shall have factory applied FSK vapor barrier facing 

laminate of aluminum foil and kraft paper with reinforced fiberglass scrim. 



03/16/2012 


C. Specification “C”, Flexible Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C-553, Type I, 1.5 lb. 

per cu. ft. density. “k” factor shall be a maximum of 0.45 at 250° F mean temperature, 

450° F temperature limit. 

D. Specification “D”, Calcium Silicate Equipment Insulation: ASTM C-533, Type I, block-type. 

“k” factor shall be a maximum of 0.87 at 1000° F mean temperature, compression 

strength of 200 psi for 5% compression, and minimum transverse strength 60 psi. 

E. Specification “E”, Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation: ASTM C-534, Type I. “k” 

value shall be a maximum of 0.27 at 75° F mean temperature, 220° F temperature limit, 

and water vapor permeability of 0.10 perm or less. 

F. Jacketing Material for Equipment Insulation: Provide presized glass cloth jacketing 

material, not less than 7.8 ounces per square yard, or metal jacket at Installer's option, 

except as otherwise indicated. 

G. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cements, sealers, mastics and 

protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the applications 

indicated. 

H. Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape, corner 

angles, anchors and stud pins as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the 

applications indicated. 



A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do 



B. Workmanship shall be first class and of the highest quality. Poor installation or 

unacceptable appearance, as determined by the Engineer, shall be due cause to reject the 

entire project in whole, and retainage will be withheld until corrective action is completed 

to the Engineer's satisfaction. 

3.02 PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION: 

A. All portions of the following piping systems shall be insulated with Specification “A” 

Fiberglass Piping Insulation. See Table 1 for minimum insulation thicknesses required. 

1. Piping systems to be insulated: 



03/16/2012 

a. Domestic cold water piping. 

b. Non-potable cold water piping. 

c. Domestic chilled water piping. 

d. Domestic hot water: supply, recirculated and tempered. 

e. Interior horizontal storm water and overflow drain piping below roofline, 

including roof drain bodies. 

f. Pumped storm water piping exposed to weather, horizontal and vertical. 




03/16/2012 

g. Steam and condensate lines. 

h. Sanitary waste piping exposed to weather. 

2. Piping Systems on which insulation is not required: 

Piping System Type 

a. Indoor/outdoor vertical storm water piping. 

b. Chrome-plated exposed plumbing piping to sinks, toilets, etc. (except for 

handicapped accessible lavatories). 

c. Flexible connectors, air chambers, strainer and check valve bodies, drain 

lines from water coolers, condensate lines, balancing cocks and flow 

regulators located in conditioned spaces maintained above 50°F (chilled 

water systems not included). 

Minimum Insulation Thickness (in.) for Pipe Sizes 

up to 1" 1-1/4"- 2" 2-1/2"- 4” 5"- 6" 8" & up 

Domestic cold water piping. 0.5 0.5 1 1 1.5 

Non-potable cold water piping 0.5 0.5 1 1 1.5 

Domestic chilled water piping. 0.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A 

Domestic hot water: supply, 

recirculated and tempered. 

Interior horizontal storm water 

and overflow drain piping below 

roofline, including roof drain 

bodies. 

Pumped storm water piping 

exposed to weather, horizontal 

and vertical. 

1 1 1 1.5 2 

0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 

1 1 1 1.5 1.5 

Steam and condensate lines. 2 3 3 4 4 

Sanitary waste piping exposed to 

weather. 

1.5 1.5 2 2 2 

Note: For any piping not noted above to be exposed to outdoor ambient 

temperatures, increase insulation thickness by 0.5 inches where installed in such 

exposed locations. 

3.03 EQUIPMENT INSULATION: 

Table 1 

Piping Insulation Schedule 

A. Insulate equipment specified in Table 3 with the type and thickness of insulation shown: 

Table 3 

Equipment Insulation Schedule 


Item Specification Thickness 

Pumps, tanks, and all 

cold equipment not 

factory insulated. 

Cold water storage 

tanks 



03/16/2012 

Vapor Seal 

Required 

B 2" Yes 

B 2" Yes 

Air separators B 2" 

Boilers not factory 

insulated 

Yes (only on chilled 

water) 

A 2" No 

Hot water storage tanks A 2" No 

Heat exchangers A 3" No 

Condensate pumps A 2" No 

3.04 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION: 

A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions 

and in accordance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that insulation serves its 

intended purpose. 

B. Install insulation on piping systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, testing, and 

acceptance of tests. 

C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of 

piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use 

cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. 

D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to 

ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. 

E. Where factory premolded, one-piece, PVC insulated fitting covers are to be used, the 

proper factory precut insulation shall be applied to the fitting using two layers for pipe 

temperatures above 250°F or below 35°F, and single-layer insulation for pipe 

temperatures between 35°F and 250°F. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly 

into the throat of the fitting and the edges adjacent to the pipe covering, tufted and tucked 

in, fully insulating the pipe fitting. Covers shall overlap the adjoining pipe insulation and 

jackets, and on cold pipes shall be sealed at all seam edges with vapor barrier adhesive. 

The circumferential edges of all covers shall be sealed with pressure sensitive type. The 

tape shall overlap the jacket and cover by at least 1”. 


F. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier jackets on cold pipe insulation, and protect to prevent 

puncture or other damage. 

1. Do not use staples or tacks on vapor barrier jackets. 

2. Seal vapor barrier penetrations with vapor barrier finish recommended by the 

manufacturer. 

3. Seal fitting covers with PVC tape. 

4. Cover all unions, check valves, and other in-line devices. Mark outer covering 

with indelible marker to identify item covered. 

G. Neatly bevel insulation at all exposed edges, and seal with finishing cement. 

H. At locations where PVC covers are prohibited, the Contractor shall insulate fittings, etc., 

using one coat of insulation cement, premolded fiberglass fitting covers and/or segments 

of pipe insulation. Finish shall be ASJ jacket or glass fabric embedded in fire retardant 

mastic. Raw ends shall be coated with vinyl acrylic mastic (CP-10/11) for hot piping or 

shall be coated with vapor barrier mastic (CP-30 or Fosters 30-35) for cold piping. 

I. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and 

composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut 

or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated. 

J. Pipe insulation shall be continuous through walls and floor openings except where walls 

and floors are required to be firestopped. 

K. Insulation on all cold surfaces shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal. 

Supports, anchors, etc. that are secured directly to cold surfaces shall be adequately 

insulated and vapor-sealed to prevent condensation. 

L. Piping installed below grade shall be spiral wrapped with 10 mil PVC tape (Scotchwrap 

No. 50 or equal) with 50% overlap, and laid in bed of sand with 3” minimum cover on all 

sides. Fittings shall be double-wrapped with second layer extended a minimum of 12” 

beyond fittings. 

M. See Section 220529 for insulation inserts and shields. Butt pipe insulation against pipe 

hanger insulation inserts. For all piping, apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on 

butt joints and seal all joints and seams with 3” wide vapor barrier tape or band. 

N. Cellular Glass Insulation: 

1. Apply in a single layer. Secure to pipe with 1/2” wide aluminum bands. 

2. For indoor applications, apply all-purpose Kraft paper/aluminum foil/vinyl coating 

jacket. Seal all lap and butt joints with self-sealing vapor barrier tape. 

O. Calcium Silicate Insulation: 

1. Secure 3/4" high rib lath by wire on 16” centers with ribs turned to create 3/4” air 

space. Secure metal lath to outstanding ribs by welding or wire on 16” centers to 

serve as insulation base. Secure insulation to metal lath with 14-gauge 

galvanized wire ties on 16” centers. Stretch 1” hexagonal, 20-gauge mesh 

smoothly and securely over insulation. Apply 1/2” thick coat of insulating and 

finishing cement to exterior surface, and finish smooth. Allow cement to dry, and 

cover with 8-oz. canvas applied with lagging adhesive. Brush with one final coat 

of lagging adhesive. 



03/16/2012 


P. Piping Exposed to Weather: All insulation on piping exposed to weather shall have vapor 

barrier and shall be protected with weather-proof aluminum jacket. 

1. Jacketing shall be secured by 1/2” wide stainless steel bands on 24” centers. All 

joints and seams shall be caulked with clear silicone. Locate all longitudinal 

seams at the bottom of piping to minimize joint exposure to weather. Contractor 

may propose pre-fabricated sealing and fastening systems, for which samples and 

product data must be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 

3.05 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION: 

A. General: Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's 

written instructions and in compliance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that 

insulation serves its intended purpose. Complete finishes as specified. 

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces. 

Redo poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gaping joints and 

excessive voids resulting from poor workmanship. 

C. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier on equipment insulation, and protect to prevent 

puncture and other damage. 

D. Do not apply insulation to equipment, mufflers, breechings, or stacks while hot. 

E. Apply insulation using staggered joint method and double layer construction; apply each 

layer of insulation separately. 

F. Insulation board shall be cut and mitered to fit the contour of the vessel and shall be 

applied with edges tightly butted, joints staggered where two or more layers are necessary 

(due to available thickness of insulation), and secured with 1/2” x 0.015” galvanized steel 

bands on 12” centers or with weld pins or stick clips with washers on 18” centers. 

G. Coat insulation surfaces with layer of insulating cement, and cover the insulation with 1” 

galvanized wire mesh tightly stretched in place with edges tied together. Finish with two 

coats of insulating cement troweled to a hard finish. 

H. Do not insulate over ASME stamp or manufacturer's nameplate on hot equipment. Provide 

neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation. 

I. Cold equipment requiring access: Provide removable section of insulation, fabricated 

from flexible elastomeric insulation, adhered to an aluminum jacket, and joined with 

velcro strips around entire perimeter. Reinforce removable section and adjoining 

insulation at attachment points. Removable insulation shall be provided for all equipment 

requiring periodic inspection, access or maintenance, including: 

1. Strainer basket access. 

2. Heat exchanger tube access. 

3. Handhole/cleanout covers. 

J. Hot equipment requiring access: Provide removable section of insulation, fabricated from 

rigid fiberglass insulation board, adhered to an aluminum jacket, and fastened to the 

equipment with stainless steel bands. At Contractor's option, provide pre-fabricated, 

canvas-jacketed, lace-up insulation blankets. 



03/16/2012 


Provide removable insulation for hot equipment requiring access with accessible 

components over 100 square inches or any component operating over 200°F, including: 

K. Equipment Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installation of 

aluminum jacketing, as recommended by manufacturer. On flexible elastomeric 

insulation, apply two (2) coats of manufacturer's approved U.V. resistant finish. 

3.06 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR: 

A. Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation, both previously damaged or 

damaged during this construction period. Use insulation of same thickness as existing 

insulation; install new jacket lapping and seal over existing. 

3.07 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT: 

A. Replace all damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units 

with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units. 

B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation 

work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. 



03/16/2012 







12/23/2011 


BASIC PLUMBING PIPING 

A. This Section specifies piping materials, testing and installation methods common to 

Division 22 and includes joining materials, piping specialties, and basic piping installation 

instructions. 

B. Related Sections: Refer to other Division 21 sections for fire protection systems, piping 

specialties, valves, expansion compensation, supports and anchors, mechanical 

identification, mechanical insulation, meters and gauges, and fire barrier penetration 

seals. 

C. Standards: Piping materials and installation methods shall meet the requirements of the 

applicable sections of the latest standards of the following organizations listed below: 

Air-conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 






Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) 






National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau (NCPWB) 

Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) 

Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI) 

D. All piping shall conform to applicable portions of the above standards and as required by 

the appropriate national and local codes. 


A. Refer to Division 1 and Basic Plumbing Requirements for administrative and procedural 

requirements for submittals. 

B. Product Data: Submit industry standard and manufacturer’s technical product data, 

installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of pipe and pipe fitting. 

C. Submit piping schedule showing pipe or tube weight, fitting type, and joint type for each 


D. Submit Welder’s certifications. 

22 1116 - 1 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING

E. Submit data on Joining Materials. 

F. Submit welding Procedures Specifications. 

G. Brazing Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work. 

H. Grooved Joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product submittals 

and shall be specifically identified with the applicable Victaulic style or series number. 

1.03 SCHEDULING: 

A. Plan the work so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference with other trades. Inform 

the General Contractor of openings required in the building structure and coordinate 

mechanical equipment locations with the Structural Shop Drawings. 

B. Install pipe and duct sleeves and pipe support inserts before concrete is poured. 

C. Cutting and patching made necessary by failure to plan the work shall be the responsibility 

of this Contractor. 


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of pipes and pipe 

fittings of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar 

service for not less than 5 years. 

B. Welder's Qualifications: All welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and 

Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. 

C. Welding procedures and testing shall comply with the latest revisions of the applicable 

sections of B31 of the ANSI/ASME standard codes for pressure piping, noted as follows: 

B31.1 – Pressure Piping Code / B31.2 – Fuel Gas Piping Code / B31.5 – Refrigeration 

Piping / B31.9 – Building Service Piping Code. 

D. Before any welding is performed, the contractor shall submit to the owner, or his 

authorized representative, a copy of the Manufacturer's Record of Welder or Welding 

Operator Qualification Tests and his Welding Procedure Specification together with the 

Procedure Qualification Record as required by Section IX of ASME Boiler and Pressure 

Vessel Code. 

E. The types and extent of non-destructive examinations required for pipe welds are as shown 

in Table 136.4 of the ASME Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI/ASME B31.1 – Power Piping. 

If requirements for non-destructive examination are to be other than that stated above, the 

degree of examination and basis for rejection shall be a matter of prior written agreement 

between the fabricator or contractor and the purchaser. 

F. All welding performed on the mechanical systems shall be done following acceptable 

procedures by operators qualified for the type of welding and materials being welded. 

Each manufacturer or contractor shall be responsible for the quality of welding done by his 

organization, whether performed at the job site or in the fabrication shop, and shall repair 

or replace any work not in accordance with these specifications. 



12/23/2011 


G. Soldering and brazing materials and procedures shall conform to applicable sections of 

the CDA Copper Tube Handbook and applicable sections of the latest published version of 

the ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31. 

H. To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components in grooved piping systems, 

all grooved products utilized shall be supplied by a single manufacturer including gaskets, 

valves, and straining devices. Grooving tools shall be supplied by the same manufacturer 

as the grooved components. 


2.01 GENERAL: 

A. Piping Materials: Provide piping and tubing of type, pressure and temperature ratings, 

capacities, joint type, grade, size and weight (wall thickness or class) indicated for each 

service. Where type, grade or class is not indicated, provide proper selection as 

determined by Installer for installation requirements, and comply with governing 

regulations and industry standards. 

B. Pipe/Tube Fittings: Provide factory-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class and 

pressure rating indicated for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching 

the pipe, tube, valve or equipment connection in each case. Where not otherwise 

indicated, comply with governing regulations and industry standards for selections, and 

with pipe manufacturer's recommendations where applicable. 

2.02 STEEL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS: 

A. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53, Grade B, type E, electric resistance welded. 

B. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53, Grade B. 

C. Seamless Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53, Grade B, type S or A106 high temperature. 

D. Cast-Iron Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.1, including bolting (Class 125 and 250). 

E. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4 (Class 125 and 250). 

F. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated (Class 

125 and 300). 

G. Malleable-Iron Threaded Unions: ANSI B16.30, Class 150, 250 or 300; selected by 

Installer for proper piping fabrication and service requirements, including style, end 

connections, and metal-to-metal seats (iron, bronze or brass); plain or galvanized as 

indicated (Class 150, 250 and 300). 

H. Threaded Pipe Plugs: ANSI B16.14. 

I. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, ASTM A-234 (Fire Protection) including bolting and 

gasketing of the following material group, end connections and facings, except as 




12/23/2011 


Material Group: Group 1.1. 

End Connections: Buttwelding. 

Facings: Raised-face. 

J. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short-radius 

elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe. 

K. Cast-Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.12. 

L. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use 

less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2” and 

where pipe size is less than 1-1/2”, and do not thread nipples full length (no closenipples). 

M. Stainless-Steel Vic Press 304 Fittings: Use with ½” through 2” Schedule 10S, Type 

304/304L stainless steel piping system up to a maximum of 500 psig. Precision cold 

drawn stainless steel fittings with Grade “H” HNBR suitable for potable water and up to 

210 deg. F or Grade “E” EPDM suitable for hot water up to 250 deg. F and pressuresealed 

ends. 

N. Stainless-Steel Grooved End Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C606 

2.03 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS: 

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B-88; Type K or L as indicated for each service; hard-drawn 

tempered, except as otherwise indicated. 

B. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B-306. 

C. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.18. 

D. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22. 

E. Cast-Copper Solder-joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23 (drainage and vent with DWV 

or tube). 

F. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29. 

G. Cast-Copper Flared Tube Fittings: ANSI B16.26. 

H. Bronze Pipe Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.24 (Class 150 and 300). 

I. Copper-Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use 

in service indicated. 

J. Grooved End Copper-Tube Dimensioned Couplings and Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C606. 

2.04 BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS: 

A. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B-43 

B. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.15, Class 125 or 250 



12/23/2011 


C. Cast-Bronze Threadless Fittings: ASTM B-61 or B-62, brazed joints. 

2.05 CAST-IRON PRESSURE PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS: 

A. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Class 52, ANSI A21.51; AWWA C-151; 350 psi pressure rating. 

B. Cast-Iron Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C-110/A21.10. 

C. Ductile-Iron Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C-110/A21.10. 

D. Rubber-Gasket Joints: ANSI/AWWA C-111/A21.11. 

2.06 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS: 

A. General: All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark 

of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI). 

B. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: FS WW-P-401 and CISPI Standard 301 piping with CISPI 310 

couplings. 

C. Cast-Iron Hub-and-Spigot Soil Pipe: ASTM A-74. 

D. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Couplings: Neoprene gasket complying with ASTM C-564, 

CISPI Standard 310, and stainless steel clamp holding band. 

E. Cast-Iron Hub-and-Spigot Soil Pipe Fittings: Match soil pipe units; comply with ASTM A- 

74. 

F. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C-564. 

2.07 PLASTIC PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS: 

A. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe: ASTM D-1527, 3” thru 12"; SDR-23.5, 

4” and 6”; SDR-35, 3”, 4” and 6"; SDR-42, 8", 10” and 12". 

B. ABS Pipe Fittings: 

Schedule 40 Socket: ASTM D-2468. 

Schedule 80 Socket: ASTM D-2469. 

Schedule 80 Threaded: ASTM D-2465. 

Solvent Cement: ASTM D-2235. 

Solvent Cement (to join ABS to PVC): ASTM D-3138. 

C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe: ASTM D-2729, 2" thru 6"; ASTM D-2665, 1-1/2” 

thru 8”. 

2.08 GROOVED PIPING PRODUCTS: 

A. General: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings may be used for piping systems 

having operating conditions not exceeding 230 deg. F (110 deg. C), excluding steam 



12/23/2011 


piping and any other service not recommended by manufacturer, in lieu of welded, 

flanged, or threaded methods. 

B. Coupling Housings: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536. 

C. Flexible Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages 

grooved pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create 

seal. Cast in two or more parts, and secured together during assembly with nuts and 

bolts. Permits degree of contraction and expansion as specified in manufacturer's latest 

published literature. 

D. Rigid Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved 

pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast in 

two or more parts with angled mating pads which grip the pipe rigidly and force the pipe 

ends to their maximum separation. Secured together during assembly with nuts and bolts. 

E. Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure-responsive so that internal 

pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties as 

designated by ASTM D-2000. 

1. Water Services: EDPM Grade E, with green color code identification. 

2. Other Services: As recommended by Manufacturer. 

F. Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A-183, minimum tensile strength of 

110,000 psi. Provide tamper-resistant nuts in exposed locations. 

G. Branch Fittings: Similar to coupling, with full circumference gasket and integral branch 

outlet in both the housing and gasket. 

H. Fittings: Grooved end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings. 

1. Ductile Iron: ASTM A-536. 

2. Fabricated Steel: ASTM A-53, carbon steel, Schedule 40, Type F, for 3/4” to 

4”; Type E or S, Grade B, for 5” to 20”. 

3. Steel: ASTM A-234. 

4. Wrought Copper and Bronze: ASTM B-75 tube and ASTM B-584 bronze castings. 

5. Galvanized: ASTM A-106, ASTM A-46 or A-536. Couplings for use with AWWAdimensioned 

piping shall conform to AWWA C-606. 

I. Grooves: Conform to the following: 

1. Standard Steel: Square cut or roll grooved in accordance with manufacturer’s 

specifications. 

2. Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved. 

3. Cast Iron: Radius cut grooved, AWWA C-606. 

J. All other pipe products shall conform to the requirements of the Division 23 sections. 

Acceptance of grooved pipe systems does not imply acceptance of the coupling 

manufacturer’s valves, flow measuring stations, strainers, or other specialties. 

K. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping products 

by one of the following: 

Anvil International – Gruvlok. 



12/23/2011 


2.09 JOINING MATERIALS: 

Grinnell Mechanical Products, Div. of Tyco. 

Victaulic Company of America. 

A. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide lead- and zinc-free welding 

materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 

1. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding 

materials. 

B. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide silver soldering materials. 

1. Above Ground: 95-5 Tin-Antimony, ASTM B-32, Grade 95TA (lead-free type). 

2. All refrigeration piping and all below-ground water piping: Silver-Tin-Copper 

Alloy, ASTM B-32 (NSF). 

C. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials to comply with 

installation requirements. 

1. Comply with AWSA 5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for 

brazing filler metal materials. 

a. Copper phosphorus – BCuP. 

b. Silver – BAg 

D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for 

steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Piping Connectors for Dissimilar Non-Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric annular ring insert, or 

elastomeric flexible coupling secured at each end with stainless steel clamps, sized for 

exact fit to pipe ends and subject to approval by plumbing code. 

F. Pipe Thread Sealant Material: Except as otherwise indicated, provide all pipe threads with 

the sealant material as recommended by the manufacturer for the service. 

2.10 PIPING APPLICATION: 

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping thread 

sealant material. “Tyte-Unyte” for general use and Acorn no. 3500 for cleanouts. 

A. Domestic Hot and Cold Water: 

1. Above Grade, Inside Building: 



12/23/2011 

a. Type “L” hard drawn copper tube with wrought copper or bronze fittings, 

95-5 tin-antimony / silver brazed soldered joints. Type 304 stainless steel 

schedule 10S roll grooved pipe with T304 stainless steel fittings may be 

used as an alternate (230 deg. F max.). 

2. Below Grade, Inside and Outside Building: 




12/23/2011 

a. 3” and smaller: Type K soft drawn copper with wrought copper fittings, 

silver brazed solder joints. 

b. 4” and larger: Ductile iron, tar coated outside, cement mortar lined 

inside. Full lengths of pipe shall be utilized to the greatest extent possible. 

Fittings for ductile iron pipe shall be 350 psi pressure rated, tar coated 

outside and cement lined inside. Utilize rubber gasket joints. 

B. Sanitary Drainage and Vents – Inside Building: 

1. Above Grade: CISPI 301 cast iron, no-hub type, with neoprene gaskets and 300 

series stainless steel clamps; or DWV copper with wrought copper or cast brass 

fittings. 

2. Below Grade: For sizes 2” to 20”, ASTM A-74 service weight cast iron, hub-andspigot 

type only, with neoprene compression gaskets; or, for sizes 12” and larger, 

ductile cast iron with neoprene gasket joints. 

C. Sanitary Sewer – Beyond 5 feet Outside Building: ASTM D-2665 SDR-35 PVC Sewer Pipe; 

ductile cast iron with neoprene gaskets for sizes 12” and larger; or service weight cast iron, 

hub-and-spigot type, with neoprene gaskets. 

D. Roof Drainage – Inside Building: 

1. Above Grade: CISPI 301 cast iron, no-hub type, with neoprene gaskets and 300 

series stainless steel clamps; or schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with galvanized 

cast iron drainage fittings and threaded joints. Full lengths of pipe shall be 

utilized to the greatest extent possible. 

2. Below Grade: For sizes 2” to 20”, ASTM A-74 service weight cast iron, hub-andspigot 

type, with neoprene compression gaskets; or, for sizes 12” and larger, 

ductile cast iron with neoprene gasket joints. 

E. Storm Sewer – Beyond 5 feet Outside Building: ASTM D-3034 SDR-35 PVC sewer pipe; 

ductile cast iron with neoprene gasket joints for sizes 12” and larger; or service weight cast 

iron soil pipe, hub-and-spigot type, with neoprene gaskets. 

F. Natural Gas Piping: 

1. Above Grade: 

a. Exposed locations: 

i. 2” and smaller: Schedule 40 black steel pipe, beveled ends, with 

150 psi malleable iron fittings and threaded joints. 

ii. Larger than 2”: Schedule 40 black steel pipe with seamless steel 

butt-weld fittings and welded joints. 

b. Inaccessible Locations: 

2. Below Grade: 

i. All sizes: Schedule 40 seamless black steel pipe, beveled ends, 

with socket-weld fittings same thickness as pipe, and welded 

joints. 




12/23/2011 

a. Within Building: Schedule 40 seamless black steel with 150 psi forged 

steel fittings and welded joints. Provide piping with machine-applied 

coating and wrapping in accordance with local code and utility company 

requirements. Provide cathodic protection as called for on the drawings. 

b. Outside of Building: Polyethylene (PE) pipe, as approved by local utility 

company and code authorities having jurisdiction. 

G. Equipment Drains, Condensate Drains and Overflows: 

1. Type “M” or “DWV” copper. 

H. Sump Pump Discharge: 



1. Schedule 40 galvanized steel with 125 psi cast iron or 150 psi malleable iron 

galvanized threaded fittings; or Type L, seamless, hard drawn copper tube with 

ANSI/ASME B16.22 wrought copper or bronze solder-joint pressure fittings. 

A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all water distribution piping may 

be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, original design, and the 

referenced standards. 

B. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having water 

connections in order to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. 

C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION: 

A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices 

which will achieve permanently leak-proof piping systems, capable of performing each 

indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and 

couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and 

maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use 

of reducing fittings. Make pipe runs straight and true. Align piping accurately at 

connections, within 1/16” misalignment tolerance. 

1. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping. 

2. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and 

other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures. Only piping 

serving this type of equipment space shall be allowed. 

3. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) 

indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. Locations and 

arrangements of piping take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, 

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, 

install piping as indicated. 

4. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections. 


5. Install piping at right angles, parallel or at right angles to the building walls, and 

as high as possible. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated. 

6. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, 

and below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view. 

7. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent 

elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation application, with 1” 

clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling 

panels to allow for panel removal. 

8. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit application of 

insulation and servicing of valves. 

9. Provide for complete drainage of water systems. At all low points in mains, risers, 

and branch lines, provide drains consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4” ball valve, and 

short 3/4” threaded-end nipple and cap with chain. 

10. Install all piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to 

permit proper insulation application. 

11. Fire and Smoke Wall Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire and smoke 

rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors, maintain the fire and smoke rated 

integrity. Refer to Division 15, Sections 15120 and 15050 for materials. 

12. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using 

sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals (see Section 15120). Pipe sleeves smaller 

than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch and larger shall be sheet metal. 

13. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction. 

14. Coordinate penetrations through foundation and all other structural penetrations 

with structural engineer. 

15. Install hangers and guides as necessary to provide piping systems which are selfsupporting 

and not dependent upon connection to equipment. All piping shall be 

adequately supported from the building structure with adjustable hangers to 

maintain uniform grading where required and to prevent sagging and pocketing. 

16. Allow flexibility in the erection of the piping system in order to prevent excessive 

stresses in materials and joints due to thermal expansion or equipment vibration. 

Provide sufficient swing joints, anchors, expansion loops, expansion joints, and/or 

other devices as necessary, and install so as to permit free expansion and 

contraction without causing undue stresses. Make all changes in direction with 

fittings. Support piping independently at all equipment so that its weight shall not 

be supported by the equipment. Provide bracing where necessary to prevent 

swaying. 

17. At high points of all piping, install manual air vents consisting of a line size nipple 

6 inches long for an air collection chamber, pipe cap on top of nipple with 1/4 

inch top, and 1/4 inch copper tubing with gauge cock. Locate gauge cock at 

accessible location and anchor to adjacent pipe or wall. Provide access panels as 

required for access. 

18. Provide shutoff valves and unions or flanges to isolate each item of equipment, 

branch circuit, or section of piping. Unions shall be provided at each threaded 

valve (manual or automatic) and at all equipment having threaded connections. 

19. Arrange piping and valves near each piece of equipment to allow for complete 

service and maintenance of the equipment without disturbing the shutoff valves. 

20. Provide dielectric unions or "Clearflow" fittings at all junctions of dissimilar metals 

in fresh water systems. 

21. Use full lengths of pipe; short lengths with couplings will not be permitted. All 

pipe sections shall be de-burred to full I.D. before joining. 

22. Extend chains for valve operators to 6'-3" above the floor or platform. Brace 

extension handles and provide a means of indicating open and closed positions. 

23. All piping installed below grade (unless factory pre-insulated) shall be spiral 

wrapped with 10 mil PVC tape (Scotchwrap No. 50 or equal) with 50% overlap, 



12/23/2011 




12/23/2011 

and laid in bed of sand with 3” minimum cover on all sides unless otherwise 

noted. Compaction per Division 2. 

a. Fittings shall be double-wrapped with second layer extended a minimum 

of 12” beyond fittings. 

B. Sanitary Waste and Vent; Roof Drain and Storm Drain Piping: 

1. Verify all invert elevations of existing waste and storm drain piping prior to any 

new work. 

2. Install plumbing drainage piping with minimum 1/4” per foot (2%) downward 

slope in direction of drain for piping 3” and smaller. Install 4” and larger piping 

with minimum 1/8” per foot (1%) downward slope unless otherwise indicated on 

drawings and when approved by Administrative Authorities where 2% slope is 

impractical due to depth of street sewer or building structural limitations. Install 

cast iron pipe in accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Handbook. 

3. Install 1” thick extruded polystyrene over underground drainage piping above frost 

line and not under building. Provide width to extend minimum of 12" beyond 

each side of pipe. Install directly over pipe, centered on pipe center line. 

4. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate 45 

degree wyes, half-wyes, or long-sweep quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends. 

SANITARY CROSSES OR SHORT QUARTER BENDS SHALL NOT BE USED IN 

DRAIN PIPING. Where two fixtures are installed back to back, they may be served 

by a common vertical drain pipe with each fixture wasting separately into an 

approved double fitting having inlet openings at the same level. 

5. Provide thrust restraints (bracing to structure or rodded joints) at branches and 

changes in direction for cast iron pipe 5” and larger suspended within the 

building. 

6. Where cast iron piping is suspended in excess of 18” on single rod hangers, sway 

bracing shall be provided to prevent shear at the joints. 

7. Install underground drain piping to conform with the plumbing code, and in 

accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Engineering Manual. 

8. Lay piping beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment 

indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. 

9. Place bell ends or groove ends of piping facing upstream. 

10. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of 

lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. 

11. Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth, firm, and stable foundation, free from 

rock, throughout the length of the pipe. 

12. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes 

shall be laid, and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated invert 

elevation. 

13. Shape bottom of trench to fit the bottom 1/4 of the circumference of pipe. Fill 

unevenness with tamped sand. At each pipe joint, dig bell holes to relieve the bell 

of the pipe of all loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on 

the foundation. 

14. No-hub cast iron pipe couplings shall be torqued to 100-125 inch-pounds. 

15. Grade vent piping for proper ventilation (minimum 1/8” per foot) and to allow 

piping to free itself quickly of condensation of water. 

C. Condensate Drain Piping: 

1. Condensate drain piping from air conditioning unit coil condensate drain pans 

shall be of the sizes shown on the drawings. 


2. Slope condensate lines minimum 1/4 inch per foot. 

D. Natural Gas Piping: 

1. Provide 6” drip leg for piping trapped by change of grade and at final connection 

to equipment. 

3.03 PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS: 

A. General: Provide joints of type indicated for each piping system. 

B. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 

Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint 

compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, 

on male threads at each joint, and tighten joint to leave not more than three threads 

exposed. 

C. Braze copper tube-and-fitting joints in accordance with ASME B-31. 

D. Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints with silver solder or 95-5 tin-antimony solder. Cut 

tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and 

inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full 

depth into fitting, and solder in a manner which will draw solder to full depth and 

circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens. 

E. Welding: 

1. All welding on piping, including tack welding, shall be performed by welders currently 

qualified and certified for the applicable welding process. A file shall be 

maintained, for examination upon request, of all qualified welding procedures 

and the names of the qualified welders performing this work. 

2. Examine the inside of each length of piping to ensure it is free from dirt and 

obstructions. If obstructed in any way, the pipe shall be swabbed out before being 

incorporated into the system. 

3. Before and after piping fabrication, all flanges, threaded connections, and 

beveled pipe ends shall be protected with end protectors and suitable grease to 

prevent corrosion and damage until installed into the system. 

4. Before welding, the end of the pipe and fittings shall be cleaned of rust, scale, dirt, 

grease, protective coating, or other foreign matter which might affect the quality of 

the welds. 

5. When pipes of different wall thicknesses are to be welded together, the end of the 

thicker pipe shall be smoothly tapered to the wall thickness of the thinner pipe. 

The taper angle shall not be more than 30° from the axis of the pipe. 

6. Before welding, the piping shall be aligned as required in ASME Code for Pressure 

Piping B-31. 

7. Pipe, flanges, and fittings damaged during fabrication or shipment shall be 

replaced. Any damaged sections shall be removed from the job site. 

8. The necessity of preheating of welds and the temperature used are requirements 

of the welding procedure. If the metal temperature is below 32°F, local 

preheating to a temperature warm to the hand is required for materials which 

otherwise do not require preheating. 

9. The preparation of butt-welded ends of pipe, welding neck flanges, pipe fittings, 

and any other piping component, including valves which are butt-welded into the 



12/23/2011 




12/23/2011 

piping system, shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.25 with the following 

exceptions: 

a. No permanent backing rings shall be used. 

b. Use of consumable inserts is permitted and encouraged as a means of 

obtaining required weld quality. 

10. Spacers may be used in fitting up pipe and weld fittings for tack welding to a 

proper gap for full penetration welds. Small tack welds which penetrate to the 

bottom of the welding groove shall be used. Tack welds lacking full penetration 

are not acceptable and shall be removed. 

11. All pipe welds that allow visual inspection on the inside and that can be reached 

by hand shall be inspected by the welder immediately after welding, and the 

following actions shall be taken: 

a. Weld spatter, flux, and debris shall be removed. 

b. Excessive penetration shall be removed by grinding. 

c. Areas without penetration or fusion shall be ground to sound metal and 

repair welded. 

12. Cleaning of excessive flux shall be performed between welding passes using wire 

brushing or grinding. 

13. Flanges welded to pipe spools shall be oriented with the bolt-holes straddling the 

centerlines established on the piping drawings. Take precautions throughout 

fabrication not to mar the gasket face on flanges. 

F. Domestic water Piping: Provide dielectric unions at all junctions of dissimilar metals. 

G. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and 

equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform 

compression of gaskets. 

H. Hubless Cast-Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer's installation instructions. 

3.04 EXPOSED PIPING IN FINISHED AREAS: 

A. Plumbing piping and fittings which are exposed (and uninsulated) in finished areas 

generally occupied by people, shall be installed with a smooth, high polish, durable 

chrome-plated finish. 

3.05 GROOVED PIPING SYSTEMS: 

A. All changes in direction shall be made with radius type elbows. 

1. Use long radius (R=1.5D) fittings wherever possible. 

2. Angles less than 22-1/2° may be made with pre-manufactured mitered fittings. 

3. Use of the angular deflection capabilities of grooved pipe couplings for intentional 

changes of direction shall not be allowed. 

B. All changes in pipe size shall be made with reducing fittings, not bushings or reducing 

couplings. 


C. All branch outlets shall be made with Victaulic Style 920/920N Mechanical-T® bolted 

branch outlets for branches more than four pipe sizes smaller than the main, or Victaulic 

No. 25 or W25 grooved end reducing tees. 

D. Pipe shall be adequately laterally supported to prevent "pipe squirm." Provide a minimum 

of one hanger per pipe section. No pipe section shall be left unsupported between any 

two couplings. 

E. Risers more than 8’ high shall be made with rigid type couplings. 

F. Rigid style couplings shall be used in mechanical rooms, except where flexible style 

couplings are specifically allowed for thermal expansion compensation and/or vibration 

isolation, and to accommodate seismic movement. 

G. Flanges shall be standard welded slip-on or weld neck with a spool piece to a grooved 

end joint. "Flange adapters" are not allowed. 

H. Grooved pipe systems shall not be considered to be electrically conductive. 

1. Provide wire jumpers across all couplings where the piping system is required to 

be electrically conductive. 

I. Flexible couplings may be used for vibration elimination. 

1. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations. 

2. Provide 3 degrees of freedom by installing sufficient flexible couplings in different 

orientations. 

3. Use spring hangers for all sections of pipe intended for deflection. 

4. Roll-grooved fittings and pipe shall be considered to have 1/2 the deflection of 

cut-grooved fittings and pipe. 

J. Victaulic Style 177, 77 or W77 flexible couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors 

for vibration isolation at equipment connections. Three (3) couplings, for each connector, 

shall be placed in close proximity to the source of vibration. 

K. Grooved joint piping systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's 

guidelines and recommendations. All grooved couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties 

shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same 

manufacturer as the grooved components. 

L. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the 

intended service as specified. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by Victaulic. 

M. Grooved end shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the 

area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing. 

N. A Victaulic factory-trained field representative shall provide on-site training for contractor's 

field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools and installation of grooved piping 

products. Factory-trained representative shall periodically review the product installation. 

Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products. 

3.06 PIPING TESTS: 



12/23/2011 


A. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Test 

piping system before insulation is installed, wherever feasible; and remove control devices 

before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not 

use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure 

rating. Fill each section with water, and pressurize for indicated pressure and time 

duration. 

B. Test all piping systems as specified. Correct leaks by remaking joints. Remove equipment 

not able to withstand test procedure during test. 

C. Work to be installed shall remain uncovered until the required tests have been completed. 

D. Piping which is to be concealed shall be tested before being permanently enclosed. 

E. When work has been completed, conduct preliminary tests to ascertain compliance with 

specified requirements. Make repairs or replacements as required. 

F. Give a minimum of twenty-four hours notice to Engineer of dates when acceptance test will 

be conducted. Conduct tests as specified for each system in presence of representative of 

agency having jurisdiction or his representative. 

G. Submit three (3) copies of successful test report to the Engineer for his review. Report shall 

state the following: Date of test, lines tested, test medium, length of time, test pressure 

held, pressure drop or rise, and extent of venting or repressurizing. 

H. Contractor shall obtain certificates of approval, acceptance and compliance with 

regulations of agencies having jurisdiction. Work shall not be considered complete until 

such certificates have been delivered by the Engineer to the Owner. 

I. All costs involved in these tests shall be borne by Contractor. Should contractor refuse or 

neglect to make any test necessary to satisfy the Architect/Engineer, such test may be made 

by an independent testing company and Contractor charged for all expenses. 

J. System Tests 

1. Hydrostatic Test: The test shall be accomplished by hand pumping the system to 

the specified water pressure, and maintaining that pressure until the entire system 

has been inspected for leaks, but in no case for a time period of less than eight 

hours. 



12/23/2011 

a. Domestic water systems: 100 psig or 150% of system pressure, whichever 

is greater. 

b. Condenser water system: 100 psig or 150% of system pressure, 

whichever is greater. 

c. Gas: 100 psig air test. 

2. Compressed Air or Nitrogen Test: Compressed air tests may be substituted for 

hydrostatic tests only when ambient conditions or existing building conditions 

prohibit safe use of hydrostatic testing and must be reviewed by the Engineer prior 

to any testing. For tests of this type, the piping system shall be subjected to the 

gas pressure indicated for that specific system. The piping shall be capped or 

plugged and water-pumped with oil-free air, or nitrogen from a bottle shall be 

introduced into the entire system to the pressure specified. The system shall 

maintain that pressure for the duration of a soapy water test of each joint. 


3. Waste, Drain and Vent Piping: All waste and vent piping, including building 

drain, roof drain and building sewer, shall be subjected to a water test. All 

openings in the piping system shall be tightly closed, except the highest opening, 

and the system filled with water to the point of overflow. The water shall be kept 

in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 15 minutes before inspection 

starts; the system shall then be tight to all points. No section shall be tested with 

less than a ten foot head of water. Roof drain piping shall be closed at the lowest 

point and filled with water to the point of overflow. 

4. Sump Pump Discharge: With water in sump and pump running at full capacity, 

check for leaks until satisfied that system is tight. 

5. Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by disassembly and 

re-installation, using new materials to extent required to eliminate leakage. Do 

not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair 

methods. 

6. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been 

completed. 

3.07 UNDERGROUND PIPE INSTALLATION: 

A. Clean fittings, nipples and other field joints thoroughly before coating. 

B. Protect ductile cast iron pipe installed below grade with polyethylene encasement applied 

in strict accordance with ANSI/AWWA C-105/A21.5. 

C. Install ductile iron pipe below grade as prescribed by AWWA C-600. 

D. Provide concrete thrust block and 3/4” threaded steel tie bar at each change of direction 

on underground pressure pipe. Imbed tie bar in thrust block and connect to upstream 

fitting. Paint tie bar with two coats of bitumastic #50 paint. 

E. Bury all outside domestic water, waste, and storm piping minimum 5’-0” below grade 

(earth cover below finish grade) to top of pipe. 


A. Preparation for testing: Prepare hydronic piping in accordance with ASME B-31.9 and as 

follows: 

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during the 

test. 

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints which cannot sustain the 

reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are not practical, isolate 

expansion joints from testing. 

3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 

4. Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure from the piping. 

If a valve is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing 

against the test pressure without damage to the valve. 

5. Install relief valve set at a pressure not more than 1/3 higher than the test 

pressure, to protect against damage by expansion of liquid or other source of 

overpressurization during the test. 

B. Testing: Test hydronic piping as follows: 



12/23/2011 


1. Use ambient temperature water as the testing medium, except where there is a risk 

of damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workmen 

and compatible with the piping system components. 

2. Use vents, installed at high points in the direction of flow, in the system to release 

trapped air while filling the system. Use drains installed at low points for complete 

removal of the liquid. 

3. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test 

pressures are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight 

and that low-pressure filling lines are disconnected. 

4. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the 

system is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not 

exceed the maximum pressure rating for any vessel, pump, valve, or other 

component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to 

pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of 

specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the “SE” value in Appendix A of 

ASME B31.9, Code For Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping. 

5. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least four hours, 

examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by 

tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat 

hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 

6. “Stop-Leak” compounds shall not be added to the system at any time. 


A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and 

prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out piping systems with clean 

water before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of each system for 

completion of joints, supports and accessory items. 

1. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31. 

B. Disinfect all potable water mains and water service piping in accordance with local health 

department requirements. Submit test results report. 

C. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing 

has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position. 

3.10 STERILIZATION: 

A. Each unit of domestic water supply and distribution system shall be sterilized with liquid 

chlorine or hypochlorite before acceptance for operation, in accordance with American 

Water Works Association G601 “Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains.” Work shall be 

done by contractor, and, unless otherwise required by legally constituted authorities having 

jurisdiction, sterilization shall conform to the following: 

B. Materials: 

1. Liquid Chlorine: U.S. Army Specification No. 4-1. 

2. Hypochlorite: Liquid shall conform to FS 0-C-114a, and Int. Amendment 3, 

Grade D. 

3. Method: Amount of chlorine used shall provide a concentration of not less than 

50 parts per million. 



12/23/2011 


3.11 COMMISSIONING: 

4. Introduce chlorination material into lines and distribution system in manner 

approved by the Architect/ Engineer. 

5. After a contact period of not less than 24 hours, during which period chlorine 

residual shall be maintained at not less than five parts per million, flush out 

systems with clean water until residual content is not greater than 0.2 parts per 

million. 

6. Flush entire system, including all hose bibs, fixture outlets, dead ends, and other 

points where stagnant water may collect. 

7. Open and close valves in lines being sterilized several times during contact period. 

8. Furnish a copy of test report of complete and adequate sterilization to the 

Architect/Engineer before final acceptance of work. Certificates shall bear 

signature of an official of laboratory responsible for test. 

A. Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment. 

B. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system is 

completely full of water. 

C. Before operating the system, perform the following steps: 

1. Open valves to full open position. Close heat exchanger bypass valves. 

2. Remove and clean strainers. 

3. Check pump for proper rotation and proper wiring. 

4. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. 

5. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and 

operating freely (automatic type) or able to bleed air completely (manual type). 

6. Check operation of automatic bypass valve. 

7. Check and set operating temperatures of water heaters to design requirements. 

8. Lubricate motors and bearings. 



12/23/2011 







03/16/2012 


DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 

A. This Section specifies the water distribution piping system, including potable cold, hot, and 

recirculated hot water piping, fittings, and specialties within the building to a point five feet 

outside the building. 

B. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include water meters which will be 

provided by the local utility, to the site, ready for installation. The following is the name 

and address of the local utility: 

Denver Water 

1600 W. 12 th Ave. 

Denver, CO 80204-3412 

C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 

1.02 DEFINITIONS: 

1. Refer to Division 2 and/or Division 22 for below-grade water service piping from 

public utility water main to building. 

2. Refer to Division 2 and/or Division 22 for materials and methods of trenching and 

backfilling for underground piping installations. 

3. Refer to other Division 22 sections for piping materials; methods for sealing pipe 

penetrations through basement walls and fire and smoke barriers; thermometers, 

flow meters and pressure gauges; mechanical identification; plumbing pumps; 

and dielectric unions, strainers and pressure regulating valves. 

A. Water Distribution Piping: Piping within the building or on the premises which conveys 

water from the water service piping or meter to the points of usage. 

B. Water Service Piping: Piping from the water main or other source of potable water supply 

to the water distribution system of the building served. 

C. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS). 


A. Refer to Division 1 and Basic Mechanical Requirements for administrative and procedural 

requirements for submittals. Submit the following: 

1. Data for each piping specialty and valve specified. 

2. Certification of Compliance with ASME and UL fabrication requirements. 

3. Test reports specified in Part 3 of this Section. 

4. Manufacturer and product data for lead-free solder, with material breakdown. 

221119 - 1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 

SPECIALTIES


5. Maintenance data for each piping specialty and valve specified, for inclusion in 

the Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 22. 

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following: 

1. ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products and installation. 

Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 

2. ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing 

Qualification," for Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators. 

3. Local Plumbing Code and Utility Department requirements. 

4. Colorado cross connection control manual. 

5. Latest edition of the Engineering Standards of the Denver Board of Water 

Commissioners. 

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: 

A. Store piping in such a manner as to prevent sagging and bending. 

B. Cap ends of piping when being stored. 

1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: 

A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts 

into pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 

3. 

B. Coordinate the installation of pipe sleeves for foundation wall penetrations. 

1.07 EXTRA STOCK: 

A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish one valve key for each key-operated wall hydrant, hose bibb 

and faucet installed. 





1. Hose Bibbs and Faucets: 



03/16/2012 

a. Watts Regulator 

b. Woodford 

c. Nibco 

d. Crane 


SPECIALTIES

e. Chicago 

2. Wall and Yard Hydrants: 



03/16/2012 

a. Josam 

b. Jay R. Smith 

c. Zurn 

d. Woodford 

e. Wade 

3. Hose Stations: 

a. Leonard 

b. T & S Brass 

c. Duco 

4. Backflow Preventers: 

a. Febco 

b. Wilkins 

c. Watts Regulator 

d. Ames 

e. Apollo 

5. Water Meters: 

a. Badger 

b. Hersey 

c. Neptune 

d. Rockwell Int’l. 

e. Hays 

6. Relief Valves: 

a. A.W. Cash 

b. Watts Regulator 

c. Apollo 

d. Wilkins 

7. Shock Arresters – Bellows Type: 

a. Josam 


c. Wade 

d. Zurn 

8. Shock Arresters – Piston Type: 

a. Precision Plumbing Products 

b. Sioux Chief 


9. Water Tempering Valves 


SPECIALTIES

a. Powers 

b. Leonard 

c. Rada 

d. Apollo 

10. Pressure Reducing Valves: 



03/16/2012 

a. Watts Regulator 

b. Mueller 

c. Apollo 

d. Wilkins 

11. Vacuum Breakers for Hose Connections: 

a. A.W. Cash 

b. Apollo 


12. Domestic Hot Water Expansion Tanks 

a. Amtrol 

b. State Industries 

c. Taco 

d. Apollo 

2.02 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS: 

A. General: Provide pipe material and pipe fittings complying with Division 22, Section 

22116. 

2.03 BASIC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS: 

A. General: Provide supports and anchors complying with Division 22, Section 220529. 

2.04 GENERAL DUTY VALVES: 

A. General: Provide valves complying with Division 22, Section 220523. 

2.05 SPECIAL DUTY VALVES: 

A. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Refer to Section 220523. 

B. Balancing Cocks: Ball valve complying with Section 220523, with memory stop device. 

2.06 PIPING SPECIALTIES: 

A. Provide water distribution components as scheduled on the drawings and listed below, 

including, but not limited to, hose bibs, wall hydrants, yard hydrants, hose stations and 

backflow preventers. 


SPECIALTIES

B. Shock Arresters – Bellows Type: Stainless steel casing and bellows, rated for 250 psi, 

200ºF, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201. 

C. Shock Arresters – Piston Type: 60 psi precharge, sealed from system water with free 

sliding piston and EPDM O-rings, threaded connections, and suitable for up to 150 psi 

and 180°F. 

D. Pressure Reducing Valves – Direct Acting: 

1. Low and Medium Capacity (15 to 120 GPM): All-bronze pressure reducing valve, 

with sensitive spring and diaphragm for accurate pressure control, manual 

adjustment for outlet pressure, integral strainer, and female thread connections. 

See detail on mechanical plans for size, capacity and piping arrangement. 

Watts Model UB5 

Watts Model N223BS 

2. High Capacity (50 to 1800 GPM): Epoxy-coated cast iron body pressure 

reducing/sustaining valve, with stainless steel seats; sensitive spring and large 

Buna-N diaphragm area for accurate pressure control; pilot valve with manual 

adjustment for outlet water pressure; female thread connections for sizes up to 2- 

1/2” and flanged connections for sizes 3” and larger. Provide in-line inlet water 

strainer, inlet and outlet valves, and threaded or flanged connections for easy 

valve removal. See detail on mechanical plans for size, capacity and piping 

arrangement. 

Watts Model N223BS 

E. Water Tempering Valves (Pressure-Equalizing with Thermometer): Concealed-type, 3-port, 

all-bronze, pressure-balancing mixing valve with integral angle check stops, maximum 

temperature limit stop, stainless steel balancing piston, chrome-plated finished wall plate 

with hot and cold water marking, and volume control. Unit to hold temperature steady 

and constant with pressure fluctuations of up to 85 percent. Unit shall have integral or 

separate flush-with-wall, 3-color dial thermometer with scale from 70º F to 130º F and 

chrome-plated trim ring for separate thermometer. 

Watts Model L111 

F. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Exposed type, all-bronze, thermostatically-controlled mixing 

valve with stainless steel piston, fail-safe automatic shutdown if either hot or cold water 

pressure fails, union connection, and polished chrome finish. Valve to deliver 1 to 225 

gpm at a pressure differential of 12 psi; 3 in. hot and cold water inlet pipe sizes, 3 in. 

tempered water outlet pipe size. 

Leonard Model TM-186 (High-Low) 

G. Pressure/Temperature Relief Valves: Fully automatic, all-bronze pressure/temperature 

relief valve with test lever and extension thermostatic element; temperature relief setting at 

210º F and pressure relief setting at 150 psig. Valve shall meet ASME Standards and 

comply with the latest AGA ratings. Relief opening to be piped to an indirect connection at 

nearest floor drain. 

H. Domestic Water Filter (In-Line Type): "Filtrine" Model 10-DUP-TM Duplex Water Filter with 

type 304 stainless steel housing, F-13 activated carbon replaceable filter sheet, and 1” 

inlet and outlet. Provide connections with dielectric unions, inlet and outlet valves, and full 

size bypass with valve. 



03/16/2012 


SPECIALTIES

I. Backflow Preventer for carbonated water beverage dispensing equipment: Stainless steel 

body and parts, positive double check valve rated for 150 psi at 140º F. Heavy duty 

rubber seats shall comply with FDA food additive regulations. 

1/2” – Watts Model SD-2. 

2.07 WATER METERS: 

A. General: Provide water meters with registration in gallons. 

1. Water Meters – 2” size and smaller: Disc type conforming to AWWA C700. 

2. Water Meters – 3” size and larger: Compound type, conforming to AWWA C702. 

B. Remote registration system shall be per local utility standards. 

2.08 DOMESTIC HOT WATER EXPANSION TANKS: 

A. Fabricated of steel, designed and constructed in accordance with ASME Section VIII, 

Division I. 

B. Heavy duty removable Butyl bladder. 

C. Working pressure of 55 psig. 

D. Maximum operating temperature of 240ºF. 

E. Tank liner of FDA approved materials. 




be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and 

the referenced standards. 


connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. 



A. Refer to Section 221116, "Basic Plumbing Piping," for installation of piping. 

B. Install backflow preventers on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may 

occur and on boiler make-up lines, hose bibbs and flush valves. 

C. Install pressure reducing valves to limit maximum static pressure at plumbing fixtures to 60 

psig. 



03/16/2012 


SPECIALTIES

D. Install water hammer arresters in domestic water piping system at each set of flush valves 

and in other locations where hydrostatic shock pressures could occur. 

E. Install yard hydrants as shown on plans. 

3.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: 

A. Refer to Section 220529, "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment," for 

supports and anchors. 

3.04 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION: 

A. Refer to Section 221116, "Basic Plumbing Piping," for pipe joints. 

3.05 INSTALLATION OF WATER METER: 

A. Install water meter in accordance with local utility’s installation instructions and 

requirements. 

B. Set meter on concrete pad as indicated. Refer to Division 3 for concrete, formwork, and 

reinforcing requirements. 



03/16/2012 

OR 

C. Mount meter on wall brackets as indicated. 

D. Size meter and arrange piping and specialties to comply with utility company's 

requirements. 

3.06 ROUGH-IN FOR WATER METER: 

A. Install rough-in piping and specialties for water meter installation in accordance with local 

utility’s instructions and requirements. 

3.07 VALVE APPLICATIONS: 

A. General Duty Valve Applications: The drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where 

specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 

1. Shut-off duty: Use ball or butterfly valves. 

2. Throttling duty: Use globe, ball, or butterfly valves. 

3.08 INSTALLATION OF VALVES: 

A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves on each branch and riser, close to main, where 

branch or riser serves two or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and 

elsewhere as indicated. For sectional valves 2” and smaller, use ball valves; for sectional 

valves 2½” and larger, use butterfly valves. 


SPECIALTIES

B. Shut-off Valves: Install shut-off valves on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, on inlet 

of each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. For shut-off valves 2” and smaller, 

use ball valves; for shut-off valves 2½” and larger, use butterfly valves. 

C. Drain Valves: Install hose-end drain valves on each plumbing equipment item, located to 

completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install hose-end drain valves at the base 

of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and elsewhere as required to completely 

drain distribution piping system. For drain valves use ball valves. 

D. Check Valves: Install swing check valves on discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere 

as indicated. 

E. Balancing Cocks: Install in each hot water recirculating loop, at discharge side of each 

pump, and elsewhere as indicated. 

F. Hose Bibbs: Install on exposed piping where indicated, with vacuum breaker. 

G. Wall Hydrants: Install where indicated, with vacuum breaker. 

3.09 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES: 

A. Install backflow preventers at each connection to mechanical equipment and systems, and 

in compliance with the plumbing code and authority having jurisdiction. Locate in same 

room as equipment being connected. Pipe relief outlet, through air gap and without 

valves, to nearest floor drain. 

B. Install pressure regulating valves with inlet and outlet shut-off valves, and balancing cock 

bypass. Install pressure gauge on valve outlet. 

C. Install shock arresters in locations shown on drawings and at all water connections to 

equipment or groups of equipment with quick closing valves, including, but not limited to, 

water closet and urinal flush valves, dishwashers, clothes washers, ice makers, autoclaves, 

pre-rinse spray hoses, etc. Install in accessible location, and provide isolation valve. 

Provide access doors in accordance with architectural recommendations. 

1. Units shall be sized in accordance with the following schedule: 



03/16/2012 

Drawing Designation Fixture Unit Rating P.D.I. Size 

SA-1 1 – 11 A 

SA-2 12 – 32 B 

SA-3 33 – 60 C 

SA-4 61 – 113 D 

SA-5 114 – 154 E 

SA-6 155 – 330 F 

3.10 INSTALLATION OF DOMESTIC HOT WATER EXPANSION TANKS: 

A. Install expansion tanks in compliance with the Plumbing Code and the authority having 

jurisdiction. 


SPECIALTIES

B. Locate expansion tanks in the same room as the water heaters or storage tanks, and connect to 

the cold water supply line as close to the water heater or storage tank as possible. Installation is 

to be between the water heater or storage tank and backflow preventer, check valve, pressure 

reducing valve and/or meter. 

C. Provide independent support for in-line mounted tanks. 

D. Precharge tank to 40 psi gauge pressure at the tank location. 

3.11 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS 

A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping runouts to fixtures of sizes 

indicated, but in no case smaller than required by Plumbing Code. 

B. Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water piping system to mechanical 

equipment as indicated. Provide shut-off valve and union for each water connection, and 

provide drain valve on drain connection. For connections 2½” and larger, use flanges instead of 

unions. 


A. Inspections: Inspect water distribution piping as follows: 

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it 

has been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 

2. During the progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having 

jurisdiction at least 48 hours prior to the time that each of the following 

inspections must be made: 



03/16/2012 

a. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before 

being concealed or closed in after system is roughed in, and prior to 

setting fixtures. 

b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to 

observe the tests specified below and to insure compliance with the 

requirements of the Plumbing Code. 

3. Reinspections: Whenever the plumbing official finds that the piping system will not 

pass the test or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for 

reinspection by the plumbing official. 

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the plumbing official. 

B. Test water distribution piping as follows: 

1. Refer to Section 221116, "Basic Plumbing Piping," for piping test. 


A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows: 

1. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems which 

have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use. 


SPECIALTIES

2. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by the authority having 

jurisdiction, or in case a method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure 

described in AWWA C651, AWWA C652, or as described below: 



03/16/2012 

a. Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until the water coming 

from the points of outlet is free of visible dirt and debris. 

b. Fill the system, or part thereof, with a water/chlorine solution containing at 

least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system, or 

part thereof, and allow to stand for 24 hours. 

c. Drain the system, or part thereof, of the previous solution, and refill with a 

water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of 

chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. 

d. Following the aforementioned standing time, flush the system with clean 

potable water until the water coming from the system is free of chlorine. 

e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the authority having jurisdiction. 

Repeat the procedure if the biological examination made by the authority 

shows evidence of contamination. 

B. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities. 


A. Fill the system. 

B. Check compression tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system is 



1. Open indoor fixture valves to full open position. Close drain valves, hydrants, and 

sill cocks. 


3. Check pumps for proper direction of rotation. Correct improper wiring. 

4. Lubricate pump motors and bearings. 



SPECIALTIES





03/16/2012 


PLUMBING PUMPS 

A. Plumbing pump types and capacities are as indicated on the drawings and schedules, and 

by requirements of this Section. 

B. Types of pumps specified in this Section include the following: 

1. In-Line Circulation Pumps. 

2. Water Pressure Booster Systems. 

3. Pedestal Type Sump Pumps. 

4. Submersible Sump Pumps. 

C. Pumps furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as part of 

equipment assembly in other Division 22 sections. 

D. Refer to other Division 22 sections for insulation of pump housings and vibration control of 

plumbing pumps. 

E. Provide the following electrical work as work of this Section, complying with requirements 

of Division 26 sections: 


1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and pump 

control panels. 

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of plumbing 

pumps with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in 

satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 


1. HI Compliance: Design, manufacture, and installation of plumbing pumps shall 

be in accordance with HI (Hydraulic Institute) standards. 

2. UL Compliance: Design, manufacture, and installation of plumbing pumps shall 

be in accordance with UL 778, "Motor Operated Water Pumps." 

3. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide pumps with electric motors and components 

which are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA 

standards. 

4. SSPMA Compliance: Testing and rating of sump and sewage pumps shall be in 

accordance with Sump and Sewage Pump Manufacturers Association (SSPMA) 

standards. Pumps shall be provided with certified rating seal. 

5. National Electrical Code (NEC). 

6. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 

221123 - 1 PLUMBING PUMPS

C. Certification of Pump Performance: Provide pumps whose performance, under specified 

operating conditions, is certified by manufacturer. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications, installation and start-up 

instructions, and current accurate pump characteristic performance curves, including pump 

curve and system curves, with selection points clearly indicated. 


dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of 

components. 

C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring 

to plumbing pumps. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and 

control wiring. Diagrams shall clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are 

factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. 

D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of pump, 

control, and accessory, including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, 

product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in the Operating and Maintenance 

Manual, in accordance with the requirements of Division 15. 

E. Submit sequence of operation (domestic water booster system). 

F. Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals will not be accepted. 

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Handle plumbing pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting 

and scoring. Do not install damaged plumbing pumps or components; replace with new. 

B. Store plumbing pumps and components in a clean, dry location. Protect from weather, 

dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage. 

C. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading plumbing 

pumps and moving them to final location. 

1.05 DESIGN CRITERIA 

A. The drawings indicate sizes, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of 

plumbing pumps and are based on specific manufacturer types and models indicated. 

Pumps having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be submitted 

on, provided that any deviations in dimensions and profiles and efficiencies do not change 

the design concept or intended performance, as judged by the Architect/Engineer. 


2.01 GENERAL 



03/16/2012 


A. Provide factory-tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned and painted with one coat of machinery 

enamel prior to shipment. 

B. Provide all pumps of same type by the same manufacturer. 

C. Casings shall be fabricated in such a manner as to allow removal and replacement of 

impellers without necessity of disconnecting piping. 

D. Motors shall conform to NEMA Standard MG-1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design 

B (except Design C where required for high starting torque); single, multiple, or variable 

speed, with type of enclosure and electrical characteristics as indicated, and greaselubricated 

ball bearings. 

1. Motors shall be selected that are non-overloading within the full range of the 

pump performance curve. 

2. Motors shall be selected for continuous duty at site altitude; Class F insulation shall 

be provided where required to meet ambient/altitude operating requirements at 

1.0 service factor. 

3. Built-in overload protection shall be provided. 

E. All pump motors 1 HP or larger shall be of the high-efficiency type. 

F. Vibration: Pumps shall be factory balanced such that vibration amplitude, velocity, and 

acceleration values do not exceed ISO General Machinery Vibration Chart “Very Good” 

curves or manufacturer’s standards, whichever is more stringent. 




1. In-Line Circulation Pumps: 



03/16/2012 

a. Bell & Gossett ITT, Fluid Handling Div. 

b. Grundfos Pumps Corp. 

c. Taco, Inc. 

d. Peerless Pumps 

e. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 

f. Dunham-Bush, Inc. 

2. Water Pressure Booster Systems: 

a. Grundfos Pumps Corp. 

b. Bell & Gossett ITT, Fluid Handling Div. 

c. Syncroflo, Inc. 

d. Paco Pumps 

e. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 

f. PSF, Div. of Messco, Inc. 

g. Peerless Pumps 

3. Pedestal Type Sump Pumps: 

a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 




03/16/2012 

b. Ingersoll-Rand Co. 

c. Peerless Pump. 

d. Weil Pump Co. 

e. Weinman Pump LFE Corp., Fluids Control Div. 

4. Submersible Sump Pumps: 

2.03 IN-LINE CIRCULATION PUMPS: 

a. Hydromatic Pumps 

b. Goulds Pumps, Inc. 

c. Kenco Pump Div., American Crucible Products Co. 

d. Peabody Barnes. 

e. Weil Pump Co. 

f. Weinman Pump LFE Corp., Fluids Control Div. 

g. Zoeller Co. 

h. Peerless Pumps 

A. General: Provide in-line circulation pumps where indicated, and of capacities as 

scheduled. 

B. Type: Horizontal, oil-lubricated, designed for 125 psi working pressure, 225°F (107°C) 

continuous water temperature, and specifically designed for quiet operation. 

C. Body: Bronze or stainless steel construction. 

D. Shaft: Steel, ground and polished, with integral thrust collar. 

E. Bearings: Two horizontal sleeve bearings designed to circulate oil. 

F. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon seal face rotating against ceramic seat. 

G. Coupling: Self-aligning, flexible coupling. 

2.04 PEDESTAL TYPE SUMP PUMPS: 

A. General: Provide pedestal type sump pumps as indicated, of sizes and capacities as 

scheduled. 

B. Pump: Centrifugal, semi-open impeller type sump pump, complete with galvanized-steel 

strainer, cast-iron base plate, suction plate and casing, and cast-iron or bronze impeller. 

C. Shaft: Stainless steel of length to suit depth of basin, connected with flexible coupling to 

motor, and intermediate sleeve bearing for lengths over 4 ft. 

D. Motor: Open drip-proof, with electrical characteristics as scheduled. 

E. Basin: Fiberglass construction of indicated dimensions, with inlet connections of sizes and 

locations as indicated. Maintain minimum of 3 ft. depth below lowest inlet invert. 

F. Cover: Cast-iron or steel circular cover with manhole or handhole opening, depending on 

diameter. Provide openings for pump, control rod, and discharge piping. 


G. Controls: Provide NEMA 1 motor-mounted float switch complete with float, float rod, and 

rod buttons. 

2.05 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS: 

A. General: Provide submersible sump pumps as indicated, of sizes and capacities as 

scheduled. 

B. Pump: Cast-iron shell, cast-iron impeller, stainless steel shaft, factory-sealed grease 

lubricated ball bearings, ceramic mechanical seal, and perforated steel strainer. 

C. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start, with built-in overload protection and electrical 

characteristics as scheduled. Provide 10 ft. of 3-conductor PVC cord and molded 

grounding plug. 

D. Controls: Float-operated mercury switch. 

E. Control Panel: Duplex panel in NEMA 1 enclosure. Panel shall have hinged door and 

shall include: 

1. Fused disconnect switches with lock-out handles through cover. 

2. Magnetic starters with OL and LV protection. 

3. Test-off-automatic selector switches. 

4. Electric Alternator. 

5. Control circuit transformers. 

6. Green pump running lights. 

7. OL reset buttons. 

8. Alarm silencing switch. 

9. Terminal switch. 

F. Provide remote alarm panel for high-water condition, with alarm bell and alarm light with 

flasher. 

G. Provide submersible sewage ejectors with quick-remove system including floor discharge 

elbow, stainless steel lifting rope and upper guide pipe bracket. 



A. Examine areas and conditions under which plumbing pumps are to be installed. Do not 

proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner 


3.02 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS: 

A. General: Install plumbing pumps where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's 

published installation instructions and in compliance with recognized industry practices, to 

ensure that plumbing pumps comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. 



03/16/2012 


B. Access: Provide access space around plumbing pumps for service as indicated, but in no 

case less than that recommended by manufacturer. 

C. Support: 

1. Install base-mounted pumps on minimum of 4” high concrete housekeeping pad, 

with anchor bolts inserted in place. Set and level pump, and grout under pump 

base with non-shrink grout. 

2. Install in-line pumps supported from piping system. 

3. Refer to Division 15 section "Vibration Control" for additional supporting and 

mounting requirements for plumbing pumps. 

D. Basins: Install sump pump basins in indicated locations, and connect to sewer lines. 

Brace interior of basin in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to prevent distortion 

or collapse during concrete placement. Refer to Division 3 for concrete work. Set cover 

over basin, and fasten to top flange of basin. Install so that cover is flush with finished 

floor. 

E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to 

be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical 

Installer. 

1. Power wiring, as required, shall be the responsibility of the electrical contractor. 

All wiring shall be performed per manufacturer’s instructions and applicable state, 

federal and local codes. 

2. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer’s 

submittal and installation requirements of Division 16 sections. Do not proceed 

with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment 

installer. 

F. Piping Connections: Refer to Division 15 plumbing piping sections. Provide piping, 

valves, accessories, gauges, supports, and flexible connections as indicated. 


A. Alignment: Check alignment, and, where necessary, realign shafts of motors and pumps 

to within manufacturer’s recommended tolerances, in the presence of manufacturer’s 

service representative, prior to system start-up. 

B. Start-up: Lubricate pumps before start-up. Provide start-up in accordance with 

manufacturer's instructions. 

C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with 

manufacturer's touch-up paint. 

3.04 DEMONSTRATION: 

A. The system manufacturer or factory-trained representative shall provide start-up of 

packaged pumping systems. This start-up shall include verification of proper installation, 

system initiation, adjustment and fine tuning. Start-up shall not be considered complete 

until the sequence of operation, including all alarms, has been sufficiently demonstrated to 

the Owner or Owner’s designated representative. This jobsite visit shall occur only after all 



03/16/2012 


hook-ups, tie-ins, and terminations have been completed and signed off on the 

manufacturer’s start-up request form. 

B. The system manufacturer or factory-trained representative shall provide on-site training for 

Owner’s personnel. This training shall fully cover operation and maintenance of all system 

components. 



03/16/2012 







03/16/2012 


DOMESTIC WATER STORAGE TANKS 

A. Extent of storage tanks work is indicated on the drawings and in provisions of this Section, 

including schedules and equipment lists associated with either the drawings or this Section. 


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of storage tanks 

of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service 

for not less than 5 years. 

B. Installer’s Qualifications: Firms with at least 3 years of successful installation experience 

on projects with storage tank work similar to that required for this project. 

C. Codes and Standards: 


1. ASME Code Symbol Stamps: Tanks shall comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure 

Vessel Vode requirements for storage tank construction and shall be stamped with 

ASME Code symbol requirements. 

2. AWWA Compliance: Tanks shall comply with applicable requirements of 

American Water Works Association standards pertaining to steel water tanks. 

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data, including size, capacity, and 

weight of selected model; furnished specialties and accessories; and installation and startup 

instructions. 

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s assembly type shop drawings indicating 

dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of all components. 

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of storage tank, 

including “trouble-shooting” maintenance guides. Include this data, product data, and 

shop drawings in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, in accordance with 

requirements of Division 22. 




following: 

22 1223 - 1 DOMESTIC WATER STORAGE 

TANKS

1. Steel Water Tanks: 

2.02 STEEL WATER TANKS: 



03/16/2012 

a. A.O. Smith 

b. Raypak 

c. State 

d. PVI Industries 

e. Patterson-Kelley 

A. General: Provide steel water tanks of size, capacity, and orientation (vertical) as indicated 

on drawings. 

B. Construction: Hot-dipped galvanized steel, constructed with nontoxic welded joints, and 

rated for 125 psi working pressure. 

C. Lining: Interior of tanks shall be glass-lined and shall meet requirements of applicable 

regulatory standards for potable water tank linings. 

D. Support: Horizontal tanks shall be provided with steel saddles; vertical tanks with steel 

legs. 

E. Manholes: Manholes and covers shall be provided for tanks over 36” diameter, of sizes 

and locations as indicated. 

F. Tappings: Tappings shall be provided in sizes and locations as indicated; threaded 

female for 3” and smaller, flanged for 4” and larger. 

G. Accessories: Provide relief valve; pressure gauge; air volume operated controls; air 

charging connections; and gauge glass, brass fittings, compression stops, and heavy 

guard. 



A. Examine areas and conditions under which storage tanks are to be installed, and substrate 

which will support storage tanks. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions 

have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 

3.02 INSTALLATION OF WATER TANKS: 

A. General: Install water tanks as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s installation 

instructions, and in compliance with applicable codes. 

B. Support: Set units on concrete pads, level and plumb. 

C. Make connections between water tanks and domestic water piping with isolation valves 

and dielectric unions or flanges, as indicated. 


TANKS


A. Testing: Upon completion of installation, pressure-test water tanks hydrostatically to 

ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks, in accordance with applicable sections 

of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 

3.04 CLEANING: 

A. Flushing: Flush water tanks upon completion of installation in accordance with 

manufacturer’s instructions, and comply with applicable health codes. 



03/16/2012 



TANKS





03/16/2012 


SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS 

A. Extent of interceptors work is indicated on the drawings and in provisions of this Section, 

including schedules and equipment lists associated with either the drawings or this Section. 

B. Refer to other Division 22 sections for drainage piping which is required external to 

interceptors; not work of this section. 


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of interceptors, of 

types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar 




1. Plumbing & Drainage Institute Compliance: Grease interceptors shall be tested 

and rated in accordance with PDI Standard G101, "Testing and Rating Procedure 

for Grease Interceptors." 

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of 

selected models indicated, weights, furnished specialties and accessories, and installation 

and start-up instructions. 


dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of all components. 

C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems 

products, in accordance with requirements of Division 22. 

D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of interceptor. 

Include "trouble-shooting" maintenance guides. Include this data, product data, and shop 

drawings in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, in accordance with requirements of 

Division 22. 


A. Handle interceptors carefully to prevent damage and/or breakage. Do not install 

damaged or broken interceptors; replace with new. 

B. Store interceptors in a clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, water, construction 

debris, and physical damage. 

22 1323 - 1 SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS




following: 

1. Interceptors: 



03/16/2012 

a. Copeland Precast 

b. Rockford 

c. Jay R. Smith 

d. Wade 

e. Zurn 

2.02 OIL AND SAND INTERCEPTORS: 

A. General: Provide oil and sand interceptors of type, size and capacity as indicated on the 

drawings. 

B. Construction: Cast iron, coated with acid resisting rubber on outside and inside. Provide 

flow control fitting. 

C. Variations: Provide the following variations as required: 

1. Steel extension. 

2. Anchor flange. 

3. Flashing flange and flashing device. 

2.03 SOLIDS INTERCEPTORS: 

A. General: Provide solids interceptors of type, size and capacity as indicated on the 

drawings. 

B. Construction: Cast-iron body, aluminum cover, aluminum sediment basket, and 

removable bronze screws. 

2.04 COMMERCIAL CLOTHES WASHER LINT TRAP: 

A. General: Provide lint trap of type, size and capacity as indicated on the drawings. 

B. Construction: Aluminum plate construction. 




A. Examine areas and conditions under which interceptors are to be installed, as well as 

substrate which will support interceptors. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory 

conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 

3.02 INSTALLATION OF INTERCEPTORS: 

A. General: Install interceptors as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's installation 

instructions, and in compliance with applicable codes. 

B. Support: Anchor interceptors securely to substrate, and locate so adequate clearance is 

provided for removal of covers and sediment baskets. Set recessed units so top of cover is 

flush with finished floor. 

C. Piping: Connect inlet and outlet piping to interceptors. 


A. Protect interceptors during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with 

construction materials and debris, and to prevent damage from construction debris and 

traffic. 



03/16/2012 







03/16/2012 


STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 

A. This Section specifies building sanitary drainage, storm drainage and vent piping systems, 

including drains and drainage specialties. 

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 


1. Refer to Division 2 and/or other Division 22 sections for materials and methods of 

trenching and backfilling for underground piping installations, not work of this 

Section. 

2. Refer to Division 2 and/or other Division 22 sections for storm water drainage 

piping beginning from 5’-0” outside the building, sanitary drainage piping 

beginning from 5’-0” outside the building, and foundation drain piping; not work 

of this Section. 

3. Refer to other Division 22 sections for piping materials and methods, sealing of 

pipe penetrations through basement and foundation walls and fire and smoke 

barriers, and mechanical identification. 

A. Building Drain: That part of the lowest piping of a drainage system which receives the 

discharge from soil, waste, and other drainage pipes within the confines of the building 

and conveys it to the building sewer to a point 5’-0” outside the building wall. 

B. Building Sewer: That part of the horizontal piping of a drainage system which extends 

from the end of the building drain and conveys its discharge to a public sewer, private 

sewer, individual sewage disposal system, or other point of disposal. 

C. Drainage System: Includes all the piping within a public or private premises which conveys 

sewage, rain water or other liquid wastes to a point of disposal. It does not include the 

mains of public sewer systems or a private or public sewage treatment or disposal plant. 

D. Vent System: A pipe or pipes installed to provide flow of air to or from a drainage system, 

or to provide circulation of air within such system to protect trap seals from siphonage and 

back pressure. 

E. See legend on drawings for additional information. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for all plumbing items 

including model, clearly indicated; operating weights; furnished specialties and 

accessories; and installation instructions. 

22 1423 - 1 SANITARY & STORM DRAINAGE 

PIPING SPECIALTIES

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating 

dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components. 



D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of drain and 

accessory, including "troubleshooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data 

and shop drawings in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, in accordance with 

requirements of Division 15. 


A. Regulatory Requirements: 

1. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of International 

Plumbing Code. 

2. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to 

materials, products, and installation of soil and waste systems. 

3. ASSE Compliance: Comply with applicable ASSE standards pertaining to 

materials, products, and installation of soil and waste systems. 

4. PDI Compliance: Comply with applicable PDI standards pertaining to products 

and installation of soil and waste systems. 

5. PVC, PP and ABS Piping: Only Contractor's personnel which have received 

training in the installation of these materials and meet the manufacturer’s 

qualifications shall perform the assembly of such materials. 


A. Coordinate the installation of roof drains, flashing, and roof penetrations. 

B. Coordinate flashing materials installation with roofing, waterproofing, and adjoining 

substrate work. 

C. Coordinate the installation of drains in poured-in-place concrete slabs to include proper 

drain elevations, installation of flashing, and slope of slab to drains. 

D. Coordinate with installation of sanitary and storm sewer systems as necessary to interface 

building drains with drainage piping systems. 

E. Coordinate all penetrations of structural elements with Structural Engineer. 

F. Coordinate all installations with other trades. 







03/16/2012 


PIPING SPECIALTIES

1. Drainage Piping Specialties, including backwater valves, expansion joints, drains, 

cleanouts, trap primers, flashing flanges and vent flashing sleeves: 



03/16/2012 

a. Josam 


c. Zurn 

d. Wade 

e. Woodford 

f. Precision Plumbing Products 

g. Sioux Chief 

2. Non-Metallic Trench Drains: 

a. ACO 

b. Quazite 

c. Josam 

3. Precast Concrete Basins and Manholes: 

a. Arco 

b. Copeland 

c. Amcor 

2.02 SANITARY AND STORM DRAINAGE, VENT AND SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE PIPE AND FITTINGS: 

A. General: Provide piping and pipe fittings complying with Division 22, Section 221116. 

2.03 BASIC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS: 

A. General: Provide supports and anchors complying with Division 22, Section 220529. 

2.04 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES: 

A. Provide drainage piping specialties as scheduled on the Drawings. 

B. Backwater Valves: Valve assembly shall be bronze-fitted cast iron, with bolted cover. 

Design shall provide for a maximum 1/4” clearance between flapper and seat for air 

circulation. Valve ends shall suit piping. Jay R. Smith Fig. 7012. 

C. Trap Primers: Bronze body valve with automatic vacuum breaker, with 1/2” connections 

matching piping system, and in compliance with ASSE 1018. 

1. Valves shall be easily adjusted to high or low pressure and shall be automatically 

activated whenever any faucet is opened in the building, causing a pressure drop. 

2. Connections: 1/2" NPT male inlet; 1/2" NPT female outlet. 

3. Valves shall be "Prime-Rite" Trap Primer Valve as manufactured by Precision 

Plumbing Products, Inc., or approved equal. 

4. When more than one (1) trap is to be primed, provide one or more distribution 

units as required by the manufacturer. 


PIPING SPECIALTIES

D. Expansion Joints: Cast-iron body with adjustable bronze sleeve and bronze bolts with 

wing nuts. 

E. Flashing Flanges: Cast-iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring. 

Provide underdeck clamp and sleeve length as required. 

F. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Cast-iron caulking type roof coupling for cast-iron stacks, cast-iron 

threaded type roof coupling for steel stacks, and cast-bronze stack flashing sleeve for 

copper tubing. 

2.05 CLEANOUTS: 

A. Cleanout Plugs: Cast brass, with threads complying with ANSI B2.1 and local plumbing 

code. 

B. Floor Cleanouts: Round, with cast-iron body, recessed bronze closure plug, scoriated 

polished bronze frame, and cover plate. 

C. Wall Cleanouts: Cleanout tee with raised-head brass plug tapped for 1/4-20 thread, flat 

style chrome-plated wall cover plate with hole for 1/4” bolt, and 1/4-20 threaded bolt with 

chrome-plated flat head. 

D. Surface Cleanouts: Cast-iron body ferrule with raised-head brass plug. Medium duty 

cast-iron manhole cover and 12” diameter ring to be set in concrete pad. Neenah No. R- 

1791-A. 

E. Line Cleanouts: Cast-iron tapped cleanout ferrule with raised-head brass plug. 

2.06 FLOOR DRAINS, FLOOR SINKS, AND AREA DRAINS: 

A. Floor drain, floor sink, and area drain type designations and sizes are indicated on 

Drawings. 

2.07 CATCH BASINS: 

A. Catch basin type designations and sizes are indicated on Drawings. 

2.08 TRENCH DRAINS: 

A. Trench drain type designations and sizes are indicated on Drawings. 

B. Cast-Iron Trench Drains: Cast-iron shallow hub body and grate with end plates and 

gaskets, assembled in standard lengths for total length and width as indicated, with the 

following features: 

1. Sediment bucket. 

2. Flashing device. 

3. Heel-proof, vandal-proof, convex grate. 

4. Dome bottom strainer. 

5. Bottom outlet, inside caulk. 



03/16/2012 


PIPING SPECIALTIES

C. Non-Metallic Trench Drains: Polyester resin and quartz aggregate, precast, interlocking 

design, with bottom radius and 0.6 percent slope. 

2.09 ROOF DRAINS: 

1. Precast Material: Load pressure of 14,500 psi, bending pressure of 2,900 psi, 

frost-proof, salt-proof, inert under dilute acid and alkali conditions, and less than 

1.0 percent water absorption rate. 

2. Grates: Cast iron or steel as indicated, for heavy-duty truck traffic, with openings 

designed to prevent entry of bicycle or wheelchair tires. 

A. Roof drain type designations and sizes are indicated on Drawings. 



1. Standard Roof Drain: Cast-iron body with sump, removable cast-iron vandalproof 

dome strainer, cast-iron flashing flange and cast-iron ring with integral 

gravel stop, and underdeck clamp. 

2. Overflow Drain: Cast-iron body with sump, removable cast-iron vandal-proof 

dome strainer, cast-iron flashing flange and cast-iron clamp with integral gravel 

stop, cast-iron underdeck clamp, and standpipe with inlet flow line two (2) inches 

above the low point of the roof under dome strainer. 

A. General: Install piping in accordance with governing authorities having jurisdiction, except 

where more stringent requirements are indicated. 

B. Inspect piping before installation to detect any apparent defects. Mark defective materials 

with white paint and promptly remove from site. 

C. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all drainage and vent piping and 

specialties may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the 

original design, and the referenced standards. 

D. Verify all existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles, and topographical conditions prior to 

installations. 

E. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having drain 

connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. 

F. Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and 

specialties are to be installed. 

G. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.02 FOUNDATION PREPARATION FOR UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAINS: 

A. Refer to Division 2 for trenching and backfilling requirements. 



03/16/2012 


PIPING SPECIALTIES

3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION: 

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) 

indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and 

arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. So far as 

practical, install piping as indicated. 

B. Install overflow roof drains with the inlet flow line located a maximum of 2” above the 

lowest point of the roof. 

C. All floor drains are to be provided with P-trap the same size as the floor drain outlet, 

unless otherwise noted on Drawings. 

D. Provide flashing membrane for all floor drains in structure above slab on grade level. 

E. Lubricate cleanout plugs with a mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Prior to building 

turnover, remove cleanout plugs, relubricate, and reinstall using only enough force to 

ensure permanent leakproof joint. 

F. Provide flashing for all floor drains, floor cleanouts and shower drains above grade. 

Make watertight with Chloraloy 240 underslab moisture vapor barrier as manufactured by 

the Nobel Co. of Grand Haven, Michigan. Flashing shall extend at least 24” from drain 

rim into floor membrane or on structural floor. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device and 

make watertight, durable joint. Provide flashing collar extension with all drains and 

cleanouts installed above grade. 

3.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: 

A. General: Refer to Section 220529 for supports and anchors. 

3.05 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES: 

A. Install backwater valves in sanitary building drain piping as indicated, and as required by 

the plumbing code. For interior installation, provide minimum 13” dia. cleanout cover 

flush to floor centered over backwater valve cover and of adequate size to remove valve 

cover for service. 

B. Install expansion joints on vertical risers at every 75 feet or as otherwise indicated on 

plans, and as required by the plumbing code. 

C. Above-Ground Cleanouts: Install in building drain piping as indicated, and: 

1. As required by plumbing code; 

2. At each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees below slab; 

3. At minimum intervals of 100 feet; 

4. At base of each vertical soil or waste stack; 

5. At sinks and urinals on grade; 

6. At each upper terminal; 

7. At egress of building (surface cleanout); 

8. At each water closet or toilet group. 



03/16/2012 


PIPING SPECIALTIES

D. Cleanouts Covers: Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, types as 

indicated, in accessible locations. 

E. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and 

cleanout passing through waterproof membranes. 

F. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing 

in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

3.06 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION: 

A. Install pipes and pipe joints in accordance with Section 221116. 

3.07 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS: 

A. Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations 

indicated. 

B. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of 

drains flush with finished floor. 

C. Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer with minimum trap size same as outlet size 

of drain connected. 

D. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and 

adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated. 

E. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain. 

3.08 INSTALLATION OF TRAP PRIMERS: 

A. Install trap primers with piping pitched towards drain trap, minimum of 1/8” per foot (1 

percent). Adjust trap primer for proper flow. 

3.09 INSTALLATION OF ROOF DRAINS: 

A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas, in accordance with the roof membrane 

manufacturer’s installation instructions. 

B. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain and 

adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated. 

C. Position roof drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain. 

3.10 SERVICE CONNECTIONS: 

A. Provide new sanitary/storm sewer services. Before commencing work, check invert 

elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts, and ensure that these 

connections can be properly made with slope for drainage and adequate cover to avoid 

freezing. 



03/16/2012 


PIPING SPECIALTIES

B. Provide all necessary piping and connections from building drain/storm drain system to 

connection with city sewer systems in location shown on civil site plan. 

3.11 CONNECTIONS: 

A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures 

and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by 

the plumbing code. 

B. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or 

drains. 


A. Inspections: 

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until 

it has been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 

2. During the progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having 

jurisdiction at least 48 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. 

Perform tests specified in Section 15055 in the presence of the plumbing official. 



03/16/2012 

a. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before 

being concealed or closed in after system is roughed in, and prior to 

setting fixtures. 

b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to 

observe the tests specified below and to insure compliance with the 

requirements of the plumbing code. 

3. Reinspections: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or inspection, 

make the required corrections, and arrange for reinspection. 

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the plumbing official. 

B. Piping System Test: Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures of 

the authority having jurisdiction, or, in the absence of a published procedure, as described 

in Section 15055. 


A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 

B. Clean drain strainers, domes, and traps. Remove dirt and debris. 


A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and 

debris, and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. 

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops. Piping 

shall not be left open-ended during construction. 


PIPING SPECIALTIES

C. Exposed ABS or PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of 

water-based latex paint. Color selection shall be by Architect. 



03/16/2012 



PIPING SPECIALTIES





03/16/2012 


DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 

A. Provide a complete plumbing system as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein, 

consisting of, but not limited to, water heaters and associated accessories, installation, and 

connections. 

1.02 DOMESTIC HOT WATER: 

A. Domestic hot water is to be supplied from gas-fired water heaters. 


A. Product Data: Submit Product Data and installation instructions for each water heater and 

accessory specified; clearly indicate rated capacities of selected models of water heaters. 

B. Shop Drawings: Submit rough-in drawings with brand names for each item on each 

sheet. Detail dimensions, rough-in requirements, required clearances, and methods of 

assembly of components and anchorages. 

C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer’s electrical requirements and wiring diagrams for 

power supply to water heaters. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are 

factory installed and portions that are field installed. 

D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts list for each type of water 

heater and accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in the 

Operating and Maintenance Manual in accordance with the requirements of Division 23. 

E. Submit certification of compliance with specified AGA, UL, NSF, and ASHRAE 

requirements. 

F. Submit certification of compliance with performance verification requirements specified in 

this Section. 


2.01 GAS-FIRED WATER HEATER (COMMERCIAL): 

A. Approved manufacturers are State, Rudd, Rheem, A.O. Smith, Bradford-White, and 

Lochinvar. 

B. The water heater shall be gas-fired with automatic controls, including 100% shut-off in 

case of loss of pilot and/or excessive tank water temperature. The design shall be certified 

22 3400 - 1 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

y the AGA and shall have approval of the National Sanitation Foundation for supplying 

180°F water both as a booster and as a storage heater. 

C. The storage capacity and recovery capacity shall be as shown on the drawings. 

D. Tank shall be of heavy gauge steel rated for 150 psi working pressure with inner lining of 

glass. Tank shall have insulation completely around tank except at the bottom. There 

shall be a hose thread drain valve at bottom of tank and a handhole cleanout. 

E. Water heater shall have magnesium anode rod suspended in tank to minimize internal 

tank corrosion. 

F. The water heater shall have a jacket of cold rolled steel with baked-on enamel finish. 

Jacket shall have provisions for access to all controls and burners. 

G. Temperature/pressure relief valve shall be provided with AGA temperature steam rating in 

excess of the input rating of the water heater. 

H. Water heater shall have a ten-year warranty. 


3.01 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION: 

A. Make connections between water heaters and domestic water piping with isolation valves 

and dielectric unions. 

B. Pipe relief valve discharge to within 4” of the floor. Anchor end of pipe to adjacent 

surface. 



03/16/2012 


22 3400 - 2 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS





03/16/2012 


DOMESTIC WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS 

A. Extent of heat exchangers work required by this section is indicated on drawings and 

schedules, and by requirements of this section. 

B. Types of heat exchangers specified in this section include the following: 

1. Water-to-Water U-Tube Heat Exchangers. 

2. Water-to-Water Plate and Frame Heat Exchanger. 

C. Refer to other Division 22 sections for insulation of heat exchangers; piping, valves, 

specialties, and controls required in conjunction with heat exchangers; not work of this 

section. 

1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE: 

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of heat 

exchangers, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in 




1. ASME Compliance: Construct heat exchangers in accordance with ASME Boiler 

and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII "Pressure Vessels", Division 1. 

2. TEMA Compliance: Construct and install heat exchangers in accordance with 

"Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association". 

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for heat exchangers including 

performance data, materials, dimensions, weights, and installation data. Submit 

Manufacturer’s Data Report f or Pressure Vessels, Form U- 1, as required by provisions of 

ASME code rules. 



components. 


products in accordance with requirements of Division 22. 

D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each heat exchanger 

including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data and product data in 

maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 22. 

22 3500 - 1 DOMESTIC WATER HEAT 

EXCHANGERS

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: 

A. Handle heat exchangers carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting, and scoring. Do 

not install damaged units or components; replace with new. 

B. Store heat exchangers in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, 

construction debris, and physical damage. 

C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading heat 

exchangers, and moving them to final location. 




following: 

1. Water-to-Water U-Tube Heat Exchangers: 



03/16/2012 

a. Amtrol, Inc. 

b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 

c. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. 

d. Dunham-Bush Inc. 

e. Patterson-Kelley Co; Div. of Harsco. 

f. Precision Heat Exchanger Co. 

g. Taco, Inc. 

2. Water-to-Water Plate and Frame Heat Exchangers: 

a. Paul Mueller Co. 

b. Tranter, Inc. 

c. APV 

d. Alfa Laval 

2.02 WATER-TO-WATER U-TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS: 

A. General: Provide water-to-water U-tube heat exchangers as indicated, of capacity as 

scheduled, and as specified herein. 

B. Type: Shell and tube, U-bend removable tube bundle, heating water in shell, heated 

water in tubes. 

C. Materials: 

1. Shell: Steel. 

2. Tubes: ¾” O.D. copper. 

3. Heads: Cast iron or steel. 

4. Tube Sheets: Steel. 

5. Baffles, Tie-Rods, Spacers: Steel. 


EXCHANGERS

D. Construction: ASME construction for 125 psi design pressure at 300 deg. F. 

2.03 WATER-TO-WATER PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER: 

A. This Contractor shall provide plate heat exchanger of capacity as scheduled and where 

shown on the drawings with embossed heat transfer plates, perimeter gaskets, guide rails, 

and frames and compression bolts. 

B. Units shall be ASME rated for 125 psig operating pressure, 300 deg. F. maximum 

temperature, have a heat transfer area to be produce the conditions scheduled on the 

drawing. 

C. Plates shall be Type 316L stainless steel and copper brazed. 

D. Nozzles shall be 150 lb. ASA rated loose flange type, of the size called for on the 

drawings. 



A. Examine areas and conditions under which heat exchangers are to be installed. Do not 

proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner 


3.02 WATER-TO-WATER U-TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS: 

A. General- Install water-to-water U-tube heat exchangers as indicated, and as specified 

herein. 

B. Mounting: Mount heat exchangers on steel floor stands as indicated, located for required 

clearance for tube bundle removal. 

C. Mounting: Mount heat exchangers on trapeze hangers as indicated, located for required 

clearance for tube bundle removal. 

D. Water Piping: Provide piping as indicated, including union, shutoff valve, and 

thermometer on each inlet and outlet connection; relief valve on tube bundle outlet, with 

outlet piped to floor drain; and ½” drain valve on shell drain connection. 

3.03 INSTALLATION OF WATER-TO-WATER PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGERS: 

A. General: Comply with water-to-water plate and frame heat exchanger manufacturer's 

instructions for installation. 

B. Install water-to-water plate and frame heat exchangers, piping and accessories in 

accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 



03/16/2012 


EXCHANGERS

C. Water Piping: Provide piping as indicated, including shutoff valves (ball valve with infinite 

memory stop where required for balancing), thermometers and pressure gauges at each 

inlet and outlet, and hose-end drain valve at lowest connectors, or unit side of valves. 

D. Insulate areas of heat exchanger which would exceed 120°F. 


A. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with 




03/16/2012 



EXCHANGERS





03/16/2012 


PLUMBING FIXTURES 

A. Provide a complete plumbing system as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein, 

consisting of, but not limited to, plumbing fixtures and trim, rough-in, setting, and 

connections. 

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 

A. Permits, Tap Fees, and Basic Piping Materials and Methods. 


A. Codes and Standards: 

1. Local plumbing code and/or ordinances. 

2. International Plumbing Code. 

3. Regulations of water and/or sewer agencies having jurisdictional control of the 

area in which the project is to be constructed. 

4. ASHRAE Standard 18: “Method of Testing for Rating Drinking-Water Coolers with 

Self-Contained Mechanical Refrigeration Systems.” 

5. ARI Standard 1010: “Drinking Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically- 

Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers.” 

6. ANSI Standard A117.1: “Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities 

Accessible To and Usable By Physically Handicapped People.” 

7. Public Law 90-480: “Architectural Barriers Act of 1968.” 

8. UL Standard 399: “Drinking-Water Coolers.” 

9. Public Law 101-336: “Americans with Disabilities Act” (ADA). 

10. NSF Standard 61: “Drinking Water Components.” 

11. Energy Conservation Act – 1992: “Energy Conservation Standards.” 

B. Where fixtures are specified as handicapped-accessible, it shall be the sole responsibility of 

all manufacturers and/or suppliers to provide plumbing fixtures and related trim which 

meet or exceed the ADA requirements. 


A. Product Data: Submit Product Data and installation instructions for each fixture, faucet, 

specialty, accessory and trim specified; clearly indicate rated capacities of selected models 

of water coolers. 

B. Shop Drawings: Submit rough-in drawings with brand names for each item on each 

sheet. Detail dimensions, rough-in requirements, required clearances, and methods of 

assembly of components and anchorages. Coordinate requirements with Architectural 

22 4100 - 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES

Woodwork shop drawings specified in Division 6 for fixtures installed in countertops and 

cabinets. Furnish templates for use in woodwork shop. 

C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer’s electrical requirements and wiring diagrams for 

power supply to units. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory 

installed and portions that are field installed. 

D. Color Charts: Submit manufacturer’s standard color charts for cabinet finishes and fixture 

colors. 

E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts list for each type of 

manufactured plumbing fixture, valve, and trim. Include this data, product data, and shop 

drawings in the Operating and Maintenance Manual in accordance with the requirements 

of Division 15. 

F. Submit certification of compliance with specified ANSI, UL, and ASHRAE requirements. 

G. Submit certification of compliance with performance verification requirements specified in 

this Section. 


A. Store fixtures where environmental conditions are uniformly maintained within the 

manufacturer’s recommended temperature range to prevent damage. 

B. Store fixtures and trim in manufacturer’s original shipping containers. Do not stack 

containers or store in such a matter as to cause damage to the fixtures or trim. 


A. Schedule rough-in installations with the installation of other building components. 

1.07 MAINTENANCE: 

A. Extra Stock: 


1. Furnish special wrenches and other devices necessary for servicing plumbing 

fixtures and trim to Owner, with receipt, in a quantity of one device for each 10 

fixtures, minimum of one wrench and one device. 

2. For each type of faucet, furnish faucet repair kits complete with all necessary 

washers, springs, pins, retainers, packings, O-rings, sleeves, and seats in a 

quantity of one kit for each 40 faucets, minimum of one repair kit per faucet type. 

2.01 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM: 

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following 

approved manufacturers in each category. (The following list is not necessarily all- 



03/16/2012 


inclusive, nor are all fixture types listed necessarily used on this project; refer to drawings 

and schedules.) 

1. Water Closets – Kohler, American Standard, Crane, Universal Rundle, Eljer. 

2. Urinals – Kohler, American Standard, Crane, Universal Rundle, Eljer. 

3. Lavatories – Kohler, American Standard, Universal Rundle, Eljer. 

4. Sinks (cast iron) – Kohler, American Standard, Universal Rundle, Eljer. 

5. Sinks (stainless steel) – Just, Elkay. 

6. Bathtubs – Kohler, American Standard, Universal Rundle, Eljer. 

7. Mop Basins and Receptors – Fiat, Arco, Stern-Williams. 

8. Drinking Fountains – Kohler, American Standard, Universal Rundle, Eljer, Cordley. 

9. Electric Water Coolers – Elkay, Oasis, Halsey Taylor, Sunroc, Haws. 

10. Faucets – Delta, Chicago, Moen. 

11. Shower Valves – Symmons, Powers, Speakman, Lawler, Leonard. 

12. Flush Valves – Delany, Sloan, Zurn, Moen. 

13. Water Closet Seats – Furnished with fixture or equal by Olsonite, Beneke, Sperzel, 

Bemis. 

14. Fixture Carriers – Josam, Smith, Zurn, Wade. 

15. Wash Fountains and Group Showers – Bradley. 

16. Floor Drains/Sinks – Josam, Smith, Zurn, Wade, Sioux Chief. 

B. Where possible, fixtures of the same type and fittings of the same type shall be the product 

of one manufacturer. 

C. All exposed trim shall be chrome-plated brass unless otherwise specified in schedule. 

2.02 FIXTURE CARRIERS AND SUPPORTS: 

A. Wall Mounted Lavatory Supports: Commercial grade adjustable cast iron type, with thin 

concealed arms and sleeves, and complete with escutcheons and mounting fasteners. 

B. Wall Mounted Lavatory Supports: Commercial grade cast iron type, having tubular steel 

uprights with concealed arms and sleeves, mounted on adjustable headers, and complete 

with heavy cast iron short feet bolted to floor, alignment trusses, and mounting fasteners. 



03/16/2012 

OR 

C. Water Closet and Clinical Service Sink Supports: Commercial grade adjustable type, 

factory painted; with cast iron face plate, support base, and appropriate type waste fitting 

having face plate gasket; zinc-plated steel fixture studs and fasteners; coated and threaded 

adjustable wall coupling with neoprene closet outlet gasket; and chrome plated fixture cap 

nuts and fiber fixture washers. Provide an appropriate model to suit deep or shallow 

rough-in, siphon jet or blow-out action, and type of sanitary piping system to which it is 

connected. For wheelchair water closets, provide unit with elevated fixture mounting 

height as required. 

D. Urinal Supports: Commercial grade type; with steel top and bottom plates with bolts to 

support fixture independently from the wall; adjustable sleeves, steel tubular uprights 

bolted to floor, and alignment trusses; and steel plates with adjustable holes, bolts, nuts, 

and chrome plated cap nuts and washers. Top supporting plates shall have cutouts when 

used with back inlet urinals. 


2.03 FITTINGS, TRIM, AND ACCESSORIES: 

A. Supplies and stops for Lavatories and Sinks: Polished chrome-plated, loose-keyed, angle 

stop having 1/2” inlet, 3/8” O.D. x 12” long flexible tubing outlet, wall flange and 

escutcheon. Quantity to match trim specified. 

B. Supplies and Stops for Water Closets: Polished chrome-plated, loose-keyed, angle stop 

having 1/2” inlet, 3/8” O.D. x 12” long flexible tubing outlet with collar, wall flange and 

escutcheon. 

C. Traps for Drinking Fountains, Lavatories and Bidets: 17-gauge tubular brass, 1-1/4” 

adjustable “P” trap and waste to wall. 

D. Traps for Sinks: Cast brass, 1-1/2” adjustable “P” and waste to wall. 

E. Tub waste and Overflow Fittings: 17-gauge brass bath waste and overflow, having 

chrome-plated waste spud with universal type outlet connection suitable for 1-1/2” I.P.S. 

or 1-1/2” O.D. tubing, or 1-1/2” solder-joint outlet connection on waste tee. 

F. Escutcheons: Chrome-plated cast brass with set screw. 

G. For all ADA accessible lavatories, supplies and waste shall be insulated with molded vinyl 

covers. Use Truebro, Inc. Lav-Guard insulation kit, or approved equivalent. 



A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all plumbing fixtures may be 

installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the 


B. Examine rough-in for potable water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of 

piping connections prior to installing fixtures. 

C. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be 

installed. 

D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.02 INSTALLATION: 

A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer’s written 

instructions, rough-in drawings, pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and 

the referenced standards. Provide connections to individual fixtures not less than the sizes 

scheduled on the drawings, unless specifically noted otherwise. 

B. Fixture mounting height and rough-in dimensions shall be as indicated on the architectural 

drawings and specifications. 



03/16/2012 


C. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports or building structure. Secure supplies behind 

or within wall construction to provide rigid installation. Provide rigid bracing for each flush 

valve stub-out. 

D. Set shower receptors and mop basins on a leveling bed of cement grout. 

E. Install a stop valve in an accessible location in the water connection to each fixture. 

F. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished 

locations and within cabinets and millwork. 

G. Seal fixtures to walls, countertops and floors using General Electric silicone sealant or 

equal. Match sealant color to fixture color. 

H. Visible parts of fixture brass and accessories shall be chrome-plated. (Trim with external 

finish of chrome-plated plastic shall not be used.) 

I. Install hose end faucets and hose connections with vacuum breakers. 

J. Provide chrome-plated anchor bolts and washers for all lavatories and china bolt caps for 

all floor-mounted water closets. Solidly attach floor-mounted water closets to floor with 

hex expansion shield of cast iron closet flanges. 

3.03 ADA ACCESSIBILITY: 

A. Review Mechanical and Architectural drawings to determine fixtures requiring ADA 

accessibility. Notify Architect/Engineer of any physical conflicts preventing full dimensional 

compliance prior to beginning work. 

B. Comply with the installation requirements of ANSI A117.1 and Public Law 90-480 with 

respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped. Arrange flush valve/flush tank 

handles with proper orientation to meet ADA requirements. 


A. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after 

units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning units, then retest. 

B. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures. 


A. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, shower valves, and flush valves to 

provide proper flow and stream. 

B. Replace washers of leaking or dripping faucets and stops. 




03/16/2012 


A. Remove all labels, and clean fixtures, trim, and strainers using manufacturer’s 

recommended cleaning methods and materials. Leave installation ready for use. 


A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures, water coolers, and trim. 

B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless expressly approved in writing by 

the Owner. 



03/16/2012 




1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 



03/16/2012 


BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and 

Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01 Conditions and specification sections, apply to 

this section. 

B. Related Sections: Refer to all sections in Division 21, 22, 23, and 26 specifications and 

drawings. 


A. The work included under this Division, consists of furnishing all materials, supplies, 

equipment, tools, transportation, and facilities, and performing all labor and services 

required in connection with, or properly incidental to, mechanical work as described in 

Division 23 Sections of the Specifications, as shown on the Contract Drawings, or 

reasonably implied there-from. 

B. While all work is in progress, except for short designated intervals during which 

connections are to be made, continuity of service to all existing systems shall be 

maintained. Contractor shall be directly responsible for any interruptions to service and 

shall be required to repair any damages to existing systems which are caused by his 

operations. 

C. Any work which will affect the Building Occupants, including, but not limited to, work 

which generates excessive noise, dust, smoke, or inconvenience to Building Occupants, 

shall be performed after business hours, unless prior approval has been obtained from the 

Building Manager. 

D. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with Owner at all times for all new-toexisting 

connections, system shutdowns, restart-up, and flushing and filling of both new 

and existing affected systems. 

E. Provide temporary piping services where required to maintain existing areas operable, as 

shown on the drawings. 

1.03 WORK NOT INCLUDED: 

A. Painting of exposed piping and unfinished portions of fixtures and equipment, except as 

otherwise specified within this Division. 

B. Concrete work including miscellaneous metal in connection with foundations, pits, sumps, 

and/or concrete housekeeping pads under heat exchangers, pumps, and other 

mechanical equipment; however, furnish template for spacing and sizes of concrete pads 

and anchor bolts under the Mechanical Sections of these Specifications. 

23 0010 - 1 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS



03/16/2012 

Exception: Concrete inertia bases for mechanical equipment. 

C. Temporary heat will be provided by the General Contractor. Use of the permanent 

heating system will not be allowed without written authorization. 

D. Lintels over wall openings. 

E. Cutting and patching of new and existing work. 

F. Temporary water and toilet facilities will be provided by the General Contractor. 

1.04 PREPURCHASED EQUIPMENT: 

A. The Owner has prepurchased certain items of equipment as indicated on the drawings 

and specified in this Division. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to include in 

his bid his costs for state and local taxes, rigging and installation of equipment and all 

accessories, piping connections to equipment, isolation (if required), installation of motors 

where required, and any other items required which are not furnished with equipment and 

are necessary for a complete and operable system. 

B. All responsibility for the above equipment as outlined in Division 23 will be assigned to the 

successful bidder, including, but not limited to, start-up, training for operating personnel, 

administration of warranties provided by equipment supplier, etc. 

1.05 EXAMINATION OF SITE: 

A. The contractor shall visit and examine the premises and/or job site so as to ascertain, prior 

to bidding, the existing conditions in which he will be obliged to operate in performing his 

part of the contract. No extras will be allowed due to lack of knowledge of these 

conditions. 

B. Field verify all existing conditions prior to submitting bids. 

C. Report any existing damaged equipment or systems to the Owner prior to any work. 

1.06 ACCESSIBILITY: 

A. Install all equipment and materials in such a manner as to provide required access for 

servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and 

devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow 

ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. In the event 

that changes of indicated locations and arrangements are deemed necessary by the 

Architect/Engineer, they shall be made by the Contractor without additional charges, 

provided the change is ordered before work is performed and no extra materials are 

required. 

B. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location. 

C. Furnish hinged steel access doors with concealed latch, whether shown on drawings or 

not, in all walls and ceilings where required for access to all concealed valves, shock 

absorbers, air vents, motors, fans, balancing cocks, and other operating devices requiring 

adjustment or servicing. 


D. The minimum size of any access door shall not be less than the size of the equipment to be 

removed, or 24” x 24” if used for service only. 

E. Furnish access doors to trades performing work on equipment or fixtures in which they are 

to be built, in ample time for building in as the work progresses. 

F. Whenever possible, group valves, cocks, etc. in such a manner as to permit use of a 

minimum number of access doors within a given room or space. 

G. Factory manufactured access doors shall be of a type compatible with the finish on the 

equipment or fixtures on which they are to be installed. 

H. Access doors in fire-rated walls and ceilings shall have equivalent UL label and fire rating. 

1.07 ROUGH-IN: 

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of 

the actual equipment to be connected. 

B. Refer to equipment shop drawings and manufacturer's requirements for actual provided 

equipment for rough-in requirements. 

1.08 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: 

A. Chemical and physical properties of all materials, and the design, performance 

characteristics and methods of construction of all items of equipment shall be in 

accordance with the following applicable regulations, references and standards of current 

editions in effect 30 days prior to receipt of bids: 



03/16/2012 

1. Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA) 

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 

3. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 

4. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers 

(ASHRAE) 

5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 

6. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 

7. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 

8. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 

9. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) 

10. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 

11. Factory Insurance Association (FIA) 

12. Factory Mutual Laboratories (FM) 

13. Manufacturers Standards Institute (MSI) 

14. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 

15. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 

16. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI) 

17. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 

B. All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of all codes 

and ordinances of the local, state and federal authorities having jurisdiction. Such codes, 

when more restrictive, shall take precedence over these plans and specifications. As a 

minimum, the installation shall comply with the latest published version of the following 

codes: 




03/16/2012 

1. International Building Code (IBC) 

2. International Fire Code (IFC) 

3. National Electric Code (NEC) 

4. National Fire Code (NFC) 

5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) 

6. International Mechanical Code (IMC) 

7. International Plumbing Code (IPC) 

8. Applicable state and local codes and amendments. 

C. Comply with standards in effect at the date of these Contract Documents, except where a 

different standard or specific date or edition is indicated. 

D. The handling, removal and disposal of regulated refrigerants shall be in accordance with 

U.S. EPA, state and local regulations. 

E. After entering into contract, Contractor will be held responsible for completing all work 

necessary to meet these requirements without additional expense to the Owner. 

1.09 REQUIREMENTS OF LOCAL UTILITY COMPANIES: 

A. Comply with rules and regulations of local utility companies. Include in bid the cost of all 

valves, valve boxes, meter boxes, meters and such accessory equipment which will be 

required for the project. 


A. It is the intention of these specifications and drawings to call for finished work, tested and 

ready for operation. Wherever the word "provide" is used, it shall mean "furnish and install 

complete and ready for use." 

B. "Contractor" shall mean any contractor performing work under this Division of the 

Specifications. 

C. Where this Division of the Specifications states work to be performed by the use of the 

words "shall" or "secure" or other performance terms, it shall be assumed that such work 

shall be performed by the Mechanical Contractor unless stated otherwise. 

D. The word "Mechanical" applies to all work specified herein wherever applicable 

1.11 PERMITS AND TAP FEES: 

A. Secure and pay for all permits, tap fees, taxes, royalties, licenses, and inspections in 

connection with the work specified under this Division and indicated on the drawings, 

unless otherwise noted in the General and Supplementary Conditions and/or Division 1. 

B. File all necessary plans, prepare all documents, and obtain all necessary approvals 

required by all governmental departments having jurisdiction. 

C. Upon completion of work, furnish to the Architect/Engineer a certificate of inspection and 

final approval of the local inspection authority. 


1.12 DRAWINGS: 

A. Drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate every required 

offset, valve, fitting, etc. 

B. All drawings relating to this structure, together with these specifications, shall be 

considered in bidding and construction. The drawings and specifications are 

complementary, and what is called for in either of these shall be binding as though called 

for by both. Should any conflict or omissions arise between the drawings and 

specifications, such conflict shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for 

resolution. 

C. Drawings shall not be scaled for rough-in measurements or used as shop drawings. 

Where drawings are required for these purposes or must be made from field 

measurement, Contractor shall take the necessary measurements and prepare the 

drawings. 

D. Before any equipment is installed, determine that said equipment will properly fit within the 

space allocated, that required piping grades can be maintained, and that ductwork can be 

run as intended without interferences with other systems, structural elements or the work of 

other trades. 

E. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above and below 

ceilings with suspension system, light fixtures, and other building components. All 

components shall be located as tight to structure as possible. Coordinate ceiling cavity 

space carefully with all trades. In the event of conflict, install mechanical and electrical 

systems within the cavity space allocation in the following order of priority: 



03/16/2012 

1. Plumbing waste and vent piping and roof drain mains and leaders. 

2. Supply, return and exhaust ductwork. 

3. Fire sprinkler mains and leaders. 

4. Electrical conduit. 

5. Domestic hot and cold water. 

6. Fire sprinkler branch piping and sprinkler runouts. 

F. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 

G. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for 

mechanical installations. 

H. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in pouredin-place 

concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 

I. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installation of mechanical materials and equipment 

for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring 

positioning prior to closing in the building. 

J. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the 

installation of mechanical equipment and materials. 

K. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and 

overhead equipment in such a manner as to provide the maximum headroom possible. 


L. Install all mechanical equipment in such a manner as to facilitate maintenance and repair 

or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for 

ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. 

M. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead 

utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised 

service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each 

service. 

N. The Contractor shall provide all labor and material required for all necessary ancillary 

work, including, but not limited to, the starting/stopping of all mechanical equipment, 

opening/closing of all valves, draining/refilling of all mechanical systems and 

operating/verifying the operation of all mechanical systems and controls as required to 

accomplish all work necessary to meet construction document requirements. 

O. Drawings are not intended to show complete or accurate details of buildings, equipment, 

ductwork and piping in every respect. They indicate general layout, approximate 

locations, relations and arrangements and are not intended to show details of 

manufacturer’s equipment. Details of equipment shall be furnished by manufacturer and 

Contractor for Architect/Engineer’s review. 

P. Not all details of piping systems are shown on drawings nor are they specified herein. 

Piping shall be such as to legally pass all inspections by the local Inspection Department, 

State and Federal Authorities and Insurance Company having jurisdiction. Any changes or 

additions which may be necessary to obtain such inspection and approval shall be made 

by the Contractor as a part of this Contract without additional cost to the Owner. 

Q. Unless otherwise indicated, all equipment and performance data listed is for job site 

conditions (elevation 5,280 ft.). 

1.13 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING: 

A. General: 



03/16/2012 

1. Provide all necessary excavation and backfill for installation of mechanical work in 

accordance with Division 21,22 and 23 (beneath building and 5’-0” beyond) 

B. Contact Owners of all underground utilities to have them located and marked, at least 2 

business days before excavation is to begin. Also, prior to starting excavation, brief 

employees on marking and color codes, and train employees on excavation and safety 

procedures for natural gas lines. When excavation approaches gas lines, expose lines by 

carefully probing and hand digging. 

1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING: 

A. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of mechanical equipment, components, and 

materials and includes removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components, and 

equipment. 

B. Portable ventilation fans shall be provided for any procedure which generates smoke, dust, 

dirt, etc. 


C. When coring requirements are identified, an x-ray of the area is to be taken prior to the 

performance of the work operation. 

D. Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of cutting 

and patching. 

E. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result 

of mechanical installations. 

F. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work that is 

necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations. 

G. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials as required 

to: 



03/16/2012 

1. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work; 

2. Remove and replace defective work; 

3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract 

Documents; 

4. Remove samples of installed work for testing as specified; 

5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures; 

6. Uncover and restore work to provide for Architect’s or Engineer’s observation of 

concealed work, upon written instructions from the Architect or Engineer. 

H. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and 

materials as indicated, including, but not limited to, removal of mechanical piping, heating 

units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new 

work. 

I. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or 

scheduled to be removed. 

J. Provide and maintain approved type of temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to 

prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. The Contractor shall coordinate 

electrical power with the Engineer. 

K. Locate, identify, and protect mechanical and electrical services passing through 

remodeling or demolition area and serving other areas required to be maintained 

operational. When transit services must be interrupted, provide temporary services for the 

affected areas and notify the Owner prior to changeover. 

1.15 TEMPORARY FACILITIES: 

A. Light, Heat, Power, etc. 

1. The General Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary electricity, 

heat and other facilities. 

2. Permanent building equipment shall not be used without written permission from 

the Owner. If this equipment is used for temporary heating or cooling, it shall be 

adequately maintained per manufacturer's instructions and protected with filters, 

strainers, controls, reliefs, etc. The guarantee period shall not start until the 

equipment is turned over to the Owner for his use. 


1.16 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS: 

A. Certain materials and/or equipment in this specification are specified by manufacturer and 

catalog numbers. The design is based on the specified equipment, which establishes a 

standard of quality, performance, physical configuration, etc. If the Contractor should 

elect to use equipment other than the equipment specified and used as a basis for design, 

but is listed as "acceptable" in the specifications, he shall be responsible for space requirements, 

configuration, changes in performance, bases, supports, vibration isolators, 

structural members, openings in structure, and effects on other apparatus due to its use. 

B. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between reviewed 

submittals and/or shop drawings and the contract documents (design drawings and specifications) 

are discovered after submittals and/or shop drawings are processed by the 

Contracting Officer, the design drawings and/or specifications shall control and shall be 

followed unless modified by addenda or change order. 

C. Where no specific manufacturer is listed, a first-class item of cataloged manufacture shall 

be furnished. 


A. All materials and equipment shall be new, free of defects, and installed in accordance with 

manufacturer’s current published recommendations in a neat manner and in accordance 

with standard practice of the Industry. Maintain maximum headroom and space 

conditions at all points. 

1.18 SUBSTITUTION APPROVALS: 

A. Equipment and/or materials manufactured by any one of the manufacturers listed in this 

specification or on the drawings shall be acceptable. 

B. Approval Prior to Bidding: Materials or equipment specified by manufacturer’s name is 

used as a basis of standard. Materials of equal quality may be used if approved prior to 

bidding. Requests for approval shall be received at the Architect/Engineer’s office at least 

ten (10) calendar days before bid opening. 

C. Substitution Requests after Execution of Contract: If Contractor wishes to furnish or use a 

substitute item of material and/or equipment after execution of the contract, he must 

submit a change order request to the Architect/Engineer. The request for change order 

shall itemize each of the proposed substitutions identified by applicable specification 

section, paragraph number and/or drawing number. A price change (increase or 

decrease) shall be listed for each item along with compete data showing performance over 

entire range, physical dimensions, electrical characteristics, material construction, 

operating weight and other applicable data. The change order request will be reviewed 

for equality, suitability and reasonableness of price differential. A single substitution 

change order listing the approved items will be issued, with the net cost of the change 

order being the sum of the approved item costs less the sum of the corresponding 

specified item costs. No subsequent substitution change orders will be considered. The 

Architect/Engineer’s decision will be final. 

D. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the substitute material and/or 

equipment fits into the space provided. The Contactor shall pay for all extra costs incurred 

by other trades for any and all changes necessitated by these substitutions. 



03/16/2012 


E. Contractor shall submit shop drawings for all substitute materials and equipment, showing 

any changes required in piping, ducting, electrical wiring, space allocation, etc. 

Contractor shall be responsible for making these changes at his expense without any 

additional cost to Owner. 

1.19 MECHANICAL SUBMITTALS: 

A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary), Division 1. 



03/16/2012 

1. All mechanical submittals shall be packaged by specification section. "Piece-meal" 

or "partial" submittals will be returned, unless prior approval from the Engineer 

has been obtained –- NO EXCEPTIONS. 

2. The Contractor shall identify any "long lead time" items which may impact the 

overall project schedule. If these submittal requirements affect the schedule, the 

Contractor shall identify the impacts and confer with the Engineer within two 

weeks of entering into the Contract. 

3. The first submittal package shall be provided in expandable, 3-post, hard-back 

binders, sized to fit all future submittals for this job. The cover shall be identified 

with the job name, Owner's project number, date, prime contractor's name, etc. 

4. Each submittal shall be tabbed by the mechanical specification section in which it 

is specified. 

5. An index shall be provided which includes: 

a. Product 

b. Plan Code (if applicable) 

c. Specification Section 

d. Manufacturer and Model Number 

6. Coordination drawings do not apply to the above. These drawings may be 

submitted in a separate submittal. 

B. The manufacturer's material or equipment listed in the schedule or identified by name on 

the drawings are the types to be provided for the establishment of size, capacity, grade 

and quality. If alternates are used in lieu of the scheduled names, the cost of any changes 

in construction required by their use shall be borne by Contractor. 

C. All equipment shall conform to the State and/or local Energy Conservation Standards. 

D. Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only when 

submitted by and stamped by the General Contractor. Data submitted from 

subcontractors and material suppliers directly to the Engineer will not be processed unless 

prior written approval is obtained by the Contractor. 

E. Before starting work, Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect/Engineer four 

(4) sets of all shop drawings and descriptive equipment data required for the project. 

Unless each item is identified with specification section and sufficient data is provided to 

determine its compliance with the specifications and drawings, the submittal will be 

returned without action and marked "Revise and Resubmit." Where an entire submittal 

package is returned for action by the Contractor, the Engineer will mark up two sets, keep 

one, and return the remainder. Contractor shall continue to submit four (4) sets of any 

individual shop drawings, product data or samples which were returned without a "Make 

Corrections Noted" or "No Exceptions Taken" action, until they are so marked. When a 

"Make Corrections Noted" marking is received, Contractor shall make the required 




03/16/2012 

corrections for inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manual. Submittals marked 

"Make Corrections Noted" shall not be resubmitted during the submittal process. 

F. Submittals shall include the following specified materials and, in addition, any materials 

not listed below but which are specified in the individual sections of Division 23 which 

follow: 

Pipe Markers. 

Water treatment equipment, including water softeners. 

Valves, including pressure relief and pressure regulating. 

Pumps. 

Tanks, including expansion and fuel storage. 

Thermometers and pressure gauges. 

Boilers, burners, trim and feed equipment. 

Piping specialties, including hot water and steam. 

Supports, anchors and seals. 

Expansion compensators. 

Flexible pipe connectors. 

Water flow meters. 

Vibration isolators. 

Insulation, including plastic pipe fitting insulation covers and manufacturer's 

installation instructions. 

Heat exchangers. 

Terminal heat transfer units. 

Air conditioning equipment and specialties. 

Fans, ductwork, dampers, louvers, grilles, registers and diffusers. 

Automatic control systems. 

Wiring diagrams, control panelboards, motor test data, motors, starters and 

controls for electrically operated equipment furnished by mechanical trades. 

Identify each item with specification section and sufficient data to certify its compliance with the 


1.20 JOB SITE PERSONNEL: 

A. Furnish the services of an experienced superintendent who shall be constantly in charge of 

all installation work and shall supervise all skilled workmen, plumbers, fitters, metal 

workers, welders, helpers, and labor required to unload, transfer, erect, connect-up, 

adjust, start, operate, and test each system. 

1.21 WORKMANSHIP: 

A. The appearance of the finished work shall be of equal importance with its mechanical 

efficiency. All work shall be done in accordance with acceptable commercial practices. 










03/16/2012 


accomplished by means of approved vibration eliminators installed in a manner 

recommended by the manufacturer of the eliminators. 

1.23 MECHANICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS: 

A. Prepare and submit a set of coordination drawings as necessary or as required by the 

Engineer, showing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment 

and materials in relationship with other building components. Prepare drawings to an 

accurate scale of 1/4” =1’-0” or larger. Indicate the locations of all equipment and 

materials, including clearances for installing and maintaining insulation, servicing and 

maintaining equipment, valve stem movement, and similar requirements. Indicate 

movement and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 

B. Prepare floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and details to conclusively 

coordinate and integrate all installations. Indicate locations where space is limited and 

where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow 

of the work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 

1.24 PRODUCT LISTING: 

1. Mechanical equipment room layouts. 

2. Specific equipment installations, including: 

a. Chillers 

b. Cooling towers 

c. Boilers 

d. Pumps and compressors 

e. Tanks and heat exchangers 

f. Furnaces 

g. Air-handling units 

3. Work in pipe spaces, chases, trenches, and tunnels. 

4. Exterior wall penetrations. 

5. Ceiling plenums which contain piping, ductwork, or equipment in congested 

arrangement. 

6. Installations in mechanical riser shafts, at typical sections and crucial offsets and 

junctures. 

7. Pipe expansion loops. 

8. Numbered valve location diagrams. 

9. Exterior underground lines in common excavation. 

10. Manifold piping for multiple equipment units. 

A. Prepare listing of major mechanical equipment and materials for the project within (2) two 

weeks of signing the Contract Documents, and transmit to the Mechanical Engineer. A 

sample schedule is included at the end of this section to aid in completing this 

requirement. 

B. Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment shall be of domestic (USA) 

manufacture and shall be of the best quality used for the purpose in commercial 

application. 

C. Provide all information requested. 


D. Submit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in Division 1, 

"PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTION." 

E. When two or more items of the same type of equipment are required (e.g., plumbing 

fixtures, pumps, valves, air conditioning units, etc.), they shall be of the same 

manufacturer. Product manufacturer uniformity does not apply to raw materials, bulk 

materials, piping, tubing, fittings (except flanged and grooved types), sheet metal, wire, 

steel bar stock, welding rods, solder, fasteners, motors for dissimilar equipment, and 

similar items used in work, except as otherwise indicated. 

F. Provide products which are compatible within systems and other connected items. 

1.25 NAMEPLATE DATA: 

A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of mechanical equipment, 

indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, 

operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential 

data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location. 


A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, 

compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications. Products 

shall be adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, 

and handling. 

B. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. 

Protect stored equipment and materials from damage, dirt, dust and moisture. 

C. Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction site 

congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities 

needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations. 

D. Provide factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe and tube, except for 

concrete, corrugated metal, hub-and-spigot, and clay pipe. Maintain end-caps through 

shipping, storage and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, 

debris, and moisture. 

E. Protect stored pipes and tubes. Elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof 

wrapping. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor. 

F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt by inside storage and 

enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. 

1.27 RECORD DOCUMENTS: 

A. Refer to Division 1. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1. 

B. Keep a complete set of record document prints in custody during entire period of 

construction at the construction site. 



03/16/2012 


C. Mark Drawing Prints to indicate revisions to size and location of piping and ductwork, both 

exterior and interior; location of coils, dampers and other control devices, filters, boxes, 

and similar units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, 

dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; 

concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; mains and branches of piping 

systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, 

and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion 

compensators, tanks, etc.); Change Orders; concealed control system devices. Changes 

to be noted on the drawings shall include final location of any piping or ductwork 

relocated from where shown on the drawings. 

D. At the completion of the project, mark all valve tag numbers on the drawings and turn 

these drawings over to the General Contractor for his submission to the Architect. This 

contract will not be considered completed until these record drawings have been received 

and reviewed by the Engineer. 

1.28 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA: 

A. The Contractor shall prepare an Operating and Maintenance Manual covering all systems 

and equipment installed under this Division. 

B. The Operating and Maintenance Manual shall be 8-1/2” x 11” in size and assembled in 

loose leaf three-ring or post binder. The manual shall be adequately indexed and contain 

the following information: 



03/16/2012 

1. Contractors’ names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 

2. Alphabetical list of all system components, with the name and address and 24hour 

phone number of the company responsible for servicing each item during the 

first year of operation. 

3. Guarantees and warranties of all equipment whenever applicable. 

4. All manufacturers’ data applicable to the installed equipment, such as the 

following: 

a. Shop drawings 

b. Installation instructions 

c. Lubrication instructions 

d. Wiring diagrams 

5. A simplified description of the operation of all systems, including the function of 

each piece of equipment within each system. These descriptions shall be 

supported with a schematic flow diagram when applicable. 

6. Temperature control diagrams, including an explanation of the control sequence 

of each system along with the following instructions wherever applicable: 

a. Emergency procedures for fire or failure of major equipment. 

b. Normal starting, operating and shutdown. 

c. Summer or winter shutdown. 

7. System balancing report. 

8. Valve tag list when applicable. 

9. An outline of a preventative maintenance program for each system, which shall 

include a schedule of inspection and maintenance. It shall suggest the 


1.29 SCHEMATIC FLOW DIAGRAM: 



03/16/2012 

maintenance and inspection that should be performed by the Owner and that 

which should be done with outside service. 

A. Prepare a schematic flow diagram for each system showing all component parts, including 

all main isolation valves. The schematic flow diagrams presented in the contract drawings 

may be used for this purpose, provided they are properly edited to reflect as-built 

conditions. Relate all valve tag numbers to this diagram where applicable. 

B. The schematic flow diagrams and the temperature control diagrams are to be wallmounted 

under glass in an accessible location, preferably in the main mechanical equipment 

room. 

1.30 INITIAL LUBRICATION OF EQUIPMENT, ADJUSTING, AND FILLING OF SYSTEMS: 


B. Contractor shall properly lubricate all mechanical pieces of equipment which he has 

provided before turning the building over to the Owner. He shall attach a linen tag or 

heavy duty shipping tag on each piece of equipment showing the date of lubrication and 

the type and brand of lubricant used. 

C. Furnish the Engineer with a typewritten list, in quadruplicate, of each item lubricated and 

type of lubricant used, no later than two (2) weeks before completion of the project, or at 

time of acceptance by the Owner of a portion of the building and the mechanical systems 

involved. 

D. Before operating any mechanical systems, all equipment bearings shall be lubricated, and 

bolts, pulleys and other moving parts shall be checked for alignment and tolerances in 

accordance with manufacturer’s operating instructions. All piping and liquid systems shall 

be flushed out and filled with operating fluids under the supervision of the Water 

Treatment Contractor. 

E. After tests, valves and other parts of work shall be adjusted for quiet operation. All 

strainers shall be cleaned out by removing and washing basket or screen. Compressors 

shall have lubricating oil changed. Vibrations and noise shall be suppressed. 

1.31 DEMOLITION: 


Any demolition process shall require a detailed Method of Procedure. 

B. During the demolition phase of this contract, it is the responsibility of this Contractor to 

carefully remove existing equipment, piping, ductwork and related items, either as shown 

on the demolition drawings as being removed, or as required for the work. These items 

shall be tagged, protected from damage, and stored as directed by the Architect or 

Engineer. A list of all items stored shall be turned over to the Architect or Engineer. At the 

completion of the remodeling work or when directed by the Architect, all stored items not 

reused or wanted by the Owner shall be removed from the premises. 


C. The location of existing equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., shown on the drawings has 

been taken from existing drawings and is, therefore, only as accurate as that information. 

All existing conditions shall be verified from field measurements with necessary adjustment 

being made to the drawing information. 

D. If asbestos material, in any form, is discovered by this contractor in the process of his work, 

he shall report such occurrence to the Architect or Engineer immediately. The Architect or 

Engineer will determine the action to be taken for the asbestos removal, which is not a part 

of the work to be done under this Division. 

1.32 WARRANTIES: 

A. Refer to the Division 1 for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties. 

B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 15 into the Operating and 

Maintenance Manual. 

C. Provide complete warranty information for each item, which shall include name of product 

or equipment; date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and 

names, addresses, and telephone numbers of manufacturing/servicing personnel as well 

as procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. 

D. The Contractor shall warrant all materials, workmanship and the successful operation of 

all equipment and apparatus installed for a period of one (1) year from the date of final 

acceptance of the entire work as identified in the General Conditions, and shall guarantee 

to repair or replace at his own expense any part of the apparatus that may show defect 

during that time, provided such defect is, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, due to 

imperfect material or workmanship and not due to carelessness or improper use on the 

part of the owner/operator. 

E. Include repair of damage to any part of the premises caused by water and gas leaks or 

breaks in piping, fixtures or equipment furnished and installed under this Division which 

occur within the warranty period. 

F. Include repair of damage to or replacement of any part of the equipment and replacement 

of refrigerant and oil caused by leaks or breaks in piping and equipment within the 

warranty period. 

1.33 OWNER ACCEPTANCE: 

A. At the time of acceptance of the building by the Owner, all Division 23 systems shall be in 

first-class operating condition in all respects and satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer. 

1.34 CLEANING OF EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND PREMISES: 

A. Clean equipment and materials thoroughly. Leave surfaces to be painted smooth and 

clean, ready for painters. Clean entire premises of unused materials, rubbish, debris, 

grease spots and dirt left by each Subcontractor. Remove, clean and replace pipeline 

strainers after systems have been in operation for a period of thirty (30) calendar days. 

B. Provide detergents, solvents and other cleaning agents that are compatible with materials 

used in fabrication of systems. They shall not adversely affect materials or mechanisms in 



03/16/2012 




03/16/2012 

systems and must be acceptable to equipment manufacturers. Detergents, solvents and 

other cleaning agents shall be compatible with process streams to be handled by systems 

in which they are used. 

C. After each section of piping and equipment has been flushed clean, remove strainers. 

Clean and reinstall permanent strainers in system. Reconnect vessels, equipment and 

piping and reinstall control valves, safety valves, controllers, rupture discs, orifice plates 

and other instruments and with new gaskets, thread lubricants, etc. If a subsequent 

pressure test is required, it may be necessary to leave some such items out of the system 

until after completion of pressure test. For systems which must be hydrostatically tested 

and dried, hydrostatic test may be connected prior to cleaning and drying. 

D. Clean each vessel separately. If vessel or equipment is large enough to have a manhole, 

use clean water to wash down all internal surfaces. Leave bottom open for trash and dirt 

to drain thoroughly. If vessel is too small for flushing through a manhole, connect clean 

water line to inlet and flush with a continuous flow of water in the same direction flow 

would be if in service. The vessel should be full of water in order to have maximum 

turbulence. Shut off flow and allow to drain. With drain still open, allow more water to 

enter vessel for a short time to flush any remaining trash from the bottom. 

E. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with new filters during final cleanup. 

1.35 SAFETY: 

A. Refer to Division 1. Comply with the latest OSHA requirements as well as any additional 

state and local regulations and any requirements of the Owner. 

1.36 MAINTENANCE: 

A. Twice during the warranty period, the Temperature Controls Contractor shall check all 

controls in the building to ascertain that they are functioning as designed. This shall apply 

to all thermostats, aquastats, humidistats, freezestats, and firestats. This portion of the 

work shall be performed by the Contractor that installed the controls. 

1.37 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES: 

A. The Contractor for this work shall examine the drawings and specifications for other parts 

of the work, and if headroom or space conditions appear inadequate or if any 

discrepancies occur between the plans for his work and the plans for the work of others, 

he shall report such discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer and shall obtain written 

instructions for any changes necessary to accommodate his work with the work of others. 

Any changes in the work covered by this specification made necessary by the failure or 

neglect of the Contractor to report such discrepancies shall be made by and at the 

expense of this Contractor. 

1.38 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR: 

A. The Contractor is responsible for the complete and satisfactory installation of the work in 

accordance with the true intent of the drawings and specifications. He shall provide, 

without extra charge, all incidental items required, as a part of his work. The installation 




03/16/2012 

shall be so made that its several component parts will function together as a workable 

system and shall be left with all parts adjusted and in working order. 

1.39 PROJECT CLOSEOUT: 

A. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, complete the requirements listed 

below. 

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the following Mechanical Checklist by performing 

and/or coordinating such items prior to applying for certification of substantial completion. 

1. Refer to individual specification sections for additional requirements. 

C. Mechanical Checklist: 


ITEM 



03/16/2012 

SUBMITTALS 

SHOP 

DRAWINGS 

PRODUCT 

DATA 

TEST/REPORT 

REQUIREMENTS 

FACTORY REP 

SUPERVISION 

AT SITE 

TRAINING 

REQ'D AT SITE 

EXTRA 

MATERIAL 

EQUIPMENT WARRANTIES X 

O & M MANUALS X 

COORDINATION DRAWINGS X 

RECORD DRAWINGS 

MOTORS, STARTERS AND 

X X 

DRIVES X X X X X 

PIPE X X X 

PIPE FLUSH/CLEAN 

PIPE DISINFECTION 

X X 

(POTABLE H2O) X X X 

WELDERS CERTIFICATE X 

SPECIAL PIPING SYSTEMS X X X X X 

SPECIAL PIPING SYSTEMS X X X X X 

VALVES X X 

PIPING SPECIALTIES X X 

PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS X X 

METERS AND GAUGES X X X 

SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 

MECHANICAL 

X X X 

IDENTIFICATION X X X 

VIBRATION CONTROL X X X X 

MECHANICAL INSULATION X 

FIRE PROTECTION X X X X X X X 

FIRE PUMPS 

WATER DISTRIBUTION 

X X X X 

PIPING X X X X X 

DRAINAGE & VENT SYSTEMS X X X X 

PLUMBING FIXTURES X X X 

PLUMBING PUMPS X X 

STORAGE TANKS X X X 

WATER TREATMENT X X X X X X X 

23 0010 - 18 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 

O & M

TREATMENT X 

TREATMENT CHEMICALS X 

WATER HEATERS X X X 

INTERCEPTORS X X X 

COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS X X 

FUEL OIL SYSTEMS X X X X X 

MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS X X X X 

NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS X X X X X 

GLYCOL SYSTEMS X X X X X X 

STEAM PIPING X X X X 

STEAM SPECIALTIES 

CONDENSATE PUMP & REC. 

X X 

SETS X X 

HVAC PUMPS X X 

BOILERS X X X X X 

BOILER ACCESSORIES 

BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS & 

X X 

STACKS X X X 

FEEDWATER EQUIPMENT X X X X 

DEAERATORS X X X X 

FORCED AIR FURNACES X X 1 X 

FUEL-FIRED HEATERS X X 

CONDENSING UNITS X X 1 X X X 

ABSORPTION CHILLERS X X 2 (RECIPROCATING)(SCROLL)C 

X X X 

HILLERS X X 1 CENTRIFUGAL CHILLER-H2O 

X X X 

COOLED X X 1 X X X 

COOLING TOWERS X X X X X 

EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS X X X X X 

AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS X X 1 X X X 

HEAT EXCHANGERS X X X 

PACKAGED A/C UNITS X X X 

ROOFTOP A/C UNITS X X 1 X X X 

HEAT PUMPS X X 1 COMPUTER ROOM A/C 

X X X 

UNITS X X 1 X X X 

HUMIDIFIERS X X 1 X 

TERMINAL UNITS X X 

ELECTRIC HEATING CABLES X X 

ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS X X X X X 

AIR HANDLING FANS X X 3 X X X 

AIR HANDLING UNITS X X X X X 



03/16/2012 


AIR CLEANING X X X X 

METAL DUCTWORK X X X X X 

NON-METAL DUCTWORK X X X X X X 

HVAC CASINGS X X X 

DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES X X X X 

SOUND ATTENUATORS X X X 

AIR OUTLETS & INLETS X X X 

AIR TERMINALS X X 

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL 

SYSTEMS X X X X X X 

ELECTRIC CONTROL 


PNEUMATIC CONTROL 


TESTING, ADJUSTING AND 

BALANCING X 

MECHANICAL 

COMMISSIONING X 

1 Warranty – 5 years 

2 Warranty Report/Warranty 

3 Kitchen Exhaust Hood 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) 

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) 



03/16/2012 






03/16/2012 


MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 


A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are either 

separate components or are an integral part of all mechanical equipment. These 

components include, but are not limited to, factory-installed motors, starters, variable 

frequency drives and disconnect switches furnished as an integral part of packaged 

mechanical equipment. 

B. This Section includes wiring of field-mounted switches and similar mechanical/electrical 

devices provided for mechanical systems to equipment control panels. 

C. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for 

mechanical equipment are scheduled on the Electrical Drawings. In case of conflict, 

Electrical Drawings shall take precedence. Do not purchase motors or electrical 

equipment until power characteristics available at building site location have been 

confirmed by Contractor. 

D. Related sections: Refer to all sections in Division 23. Refer to Division 26 Specification 

Section and Division 26 drawings. 

E. The Electrical service to this project is 480/277 volt, three phase, four wire with 208/120 

volt, three phase, four-wire step-down transformer. 


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of motors, motor starters and 

drives of types, ratings and characteristics required, whose products have been in 


B. Single Manufacturer: Provide all motors, starters and variable frequency drives for the 

project by a single manufacturer except when part of factory packaged equipment. 

C. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on 

projects utilizing motors, motor starters, capacitors and drives similar to that required for 

this project. 

D. All equipment covered by this specification shall be designed, manufactured, tested, and 

installed in accordance with all currently approved or accepted provisions of the following 

codes, standards, and regulations, and as specified herein. 

1. IEEE 51 - Harmonic Distortion Standards. 

2. NEC – National Electrical Code. 

3. NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association. 

4. UL and/or ETL Testing Laboratory. 

5. NFPA 70E. 

23 0513 - 1 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQ. 

FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

E. Coordination with Electrical Work: Wherever possible, match elements of electrical 

provisions of mechanical work with similar elements of electrical work specified in Division 

26 sections. Comply with applicable requirements of Division 26 sections for electrical 

work of this section which are not otherwise specified. 




B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional drawings of VFD's showing accurately scaled 

equipment layouts. Drawings shall include, as a minimum, the following: physical 

dimensions of each unit, weight, general arrangements with incoming and outgoing 

conduit locations, schematic, and connection diagram sufficient to install system. 

C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit schematic power and control wiring diagrams, prepared for this 

project, of complete VFD and soft-start starter assemblies. Terminals and conductor 

identification shall correspond to power and control schematics submitted under other 

sections. General wiring diagrams with various non-applicable options shown are not 

acceptable. Clearly differentiate between factory and field wiring. 

D. Listing of Motors for Mechanical Work: Concurrently with submittal of mechanical 

products listing, submit separate listing showing rating, power characteristics, efficiencies, 

power factors, application and general location of every motor to be provided with 

mechanical work. Also include notations of whether motor starter is furnished or installed 

integrally with motor or equipment containing motor. Submit updated information 

promptly when and if initial data is revised. 

E. Motor Submittal Data: The following data shall be submitted for all motors: 

1. Full load current and service factor running current at operating voltage. 

2. Locked rotor current, starting power factor and power factor at full load. 

3. Efficiency at full load. 

4. Data to substantiate Class F insulation with Class B temperature rise at 100% 

load. 

5. Capacitor size (KVAR) for maximum power factor correction at 95% lagging. 

6. Synchronous and full load speeds (rpm). 

7. Enclosure type (ODP, TEFC, EXP, TENV, WPI, etc.). 

Note: All tests (except locked rotor current) shall be made at full voltage and rated frequency. 

1.04 PRODUCT STORAGE: 

A. All variable frequency drives shall be protected from dirt, debris, and moisture at all times. 

Variable frequency drives shall be wrapped air and water tight with dust-tight and 

moisture-proof material until factory start-up of variable frequency drives is initiated. 

Exception: Drives may be opened only during wiring terminations by temperature controls 

contractor and/or electrical contractors. 

B. All motors not designed for exposure to water or moisture shall be protected at all times. 



03/16/2012 





A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following 

manufacturers for each type of product: 

2.02 MOTORS: 

1. Motors: Century/MagneTek, Baldor, Reliance, Westinghouse, Siemens-Allis, 

General Electric. 

2. Starters: Cutler Hammer, Allen-Bradley, S & S, Square D. 

3. Variable Frequency Drives: Robicon, ABB, Reliance, Cutler Hammer, Allen- 

Bradley, Square D, Toshiba, Graham, Motor Drive Inc. (MDI). 

A. The following are basic specifications for motors: 

1. Larger than 1/2 HP shall be three-phase, except where specifically noted 

otherwise. 

2. Motor construction: 



03/16/2012 

a. NEMA Standard MG-1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design “B,” 

except “C” where required for high starting torque. 

b. Copper windings, 40°C ambient with Class F insulation, Class B 

temperature rise at 100% load, unless otherwise noted. 

c. Frames per NEMA standards as required by application. 

d. Bearings: 

i. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals; minimum 

40,000-hour L-10 life. 

ii. Permanently sealed, except regreasable for 360T and larger 

frames. 

iii. Designed to resist thrust loading. 

e. Enclosure Type: 

i. Open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily 

housed and properly ventilated during operation. 

ii. Weather protected Type I for outdoor use when enclosed or 

housed with adequate ventilation, or TEFC when exposed to 

weather or moist locations. 

f. Starting Capability: Frequency of starts not less than NEMA standard (two 

cold starts and one hot start per hour). 

g. Service Factor: 1.15 for three-phase motors and 1.35 for single-phase 

motors, except 1.0 for inverter-rated motors. 

h. Efficiency: All motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in 

Table 1 in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method B and NEMA 

Chart 12-10. If efficiency is not specified, motors shall have a higher 

efficiency than the “minimum efficiency standard," in accordance with IEEE 

Standard 112, test method B and NEMA Chart 12-10. 





03/16/2012 

i. Noise Rating: NEMA standard (90 dBA maximum for single or two-pole, 

85 dBA maximum for three-pole). 

i. Motor Connections: Flexible conduit, except where plug-in 

electrical cords are specifically indicated or furnished as OEM 

equipment with motor. 

Motor 

Horse- 

Power Open Motors, ODP Enclosed Motors, TEFC 

1200 RPM 1800 RPM 3600 RPM 1200 RPM 1800 RPM 3600 RPM 

1 80.0 82.5 - 80.0 82.5 75.5 

1.5 84.0 84.0 82.5 85.5 84.0 82.5 

2 85.5 84.0 84.0 86.5 84.0 84.0 

3 85.5 86.5 84.0 87.5 87.5 85.5 

5 87.5 87.5 85.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 

7.5 88.5 88.5 87.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 

10 90.2 89.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 

15 90.2 91.0 89.5 90.2 91.0 90.2 

20 91.0 91.0 90.2 90.2 91.0 90.2 

25 91.7 91.7 91.0 91.7 92.4 91.0 

30 92.4 92.4 91.0 91.7 92.4 91.0 

40 93.0 93.0 91.7 93.0 93.0 91.7 

50 93.0 93.0 91.4 93.0 93.0 92.4 

60 93.6 93.6 93.0 93.6 93.6 93.0 

75 93.6 94.1 93.0 93.6 94.1 93.0 

100 94.1 94.1 93.0 94.1 94.5 93.6 

125 94.1 94.5 93.6 94.1 94.5 94.5 

150 94.5 95.0 93.6 95.0 95.0 94.5 

200 94.5 95.0 94.5 95.0 95.0 95.0 

(Table 1-cont’d ↑) 

Note: For other types of motors, including, but not limited to, multi-speed motors, explosion proof 

motors and/or special hermetic motors packaged with equipment, efficiency and power factors 

may vary from above values. For these special applications, motors shall be high-efficiency type 

and are subject to review by the Engineer. 

B. Inverter Duty Motors: 

Nominal Full-Load Efficiency (Table 1) 

1. Motors 7-1/2 HP and larger supplied for use with Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) 

shall be rated for inverter duty and must include a stainless steel nameplate for 

identification as “Inverter Duty Motor.” 

2. Nameplate shall also show that motor is suitable for variable torque operation on 

VFD power from 6 to 60 hz and show rated torque in lb-ft on inverter power in 

addition to the standard nameplate data specified in NEMA standards. 



3. Motor insulation shall be an “Inverter Grade” system designed to meet the voltage 

spike limits defined by NEMA MG-1. Insulation systems shall use triple layer 

magnet or shall use magnet wire which has a Pulse Endurance Index (PEI) greater 

than 50. Insulation systems utilizing heavy film and two-film wire with a Pulse 

Endurance Index less than 50 are not acceptable. Complete insulation of the slot, 

cell, and phase groups is required. The system shall be rated for Class F 

temperature rise or better. 

4. Inverter Duty stator core designs shall be of high rigidity type with reinforced end 

turn construction to minimize mechanical fatigue of the winding, and to reduce 

resonant noise. Single dip and bake cycles are not acceptable. 

5. Motor manufacturer shall supply certification with submittals that the motor is 

constructed to meet all requirements of NEMA MG-1. 

6. Rotor cores and/or assemblies shall be of a low vibration design that meets 1/2 of 

the NEMA MG-1 recommended levels for balance. 

7. Inverter duty motors shall include a normally closed winding over temperature 

thermostat suitable to be wired to the VFD panel for drive shutdown. 

8. Motor Selection Criteria: 



03/16/2012 

a. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the 

driven loads. 

b. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven loads will not require 

the motor to operate in the service factor range. Minimum horsepower 

ratings are shown or scheduled on the drawings. 

c. Motors shall be selected so that operating limits (temperature rise, service 

factor, etc.) are not exceeded at operating altitude and rated load. 

9. Pump motors shall be “non-overloading,” i.e., shall not operate within service 

factor range at any point on pump curve. 

10. Provide reduced voltage starting for motors 25 HP and larger or when required by 

local regulations, except when motor is controlled by a VFD. Maximum allowable 

in-rush current shall not exceed 300% of motor full load amps unless specified 

otherwise. 

11. Power Factor Correction: (Disregard this item if motor is controlled by VFD.) 

2.03 DISCONNECT SWITCHES: 

a. Capacitors shall be installed on all motors 25 HP and larger that have an 

uncorrected power factor of less than 90% at rated load. KVAR size shall 

be as required to correct motor power factor to 95% lagging. 

b. Capacitors shall have: 

i. Individual unit cells. 

ii. All welded steel housings. 

iii. Non-flammable synthetic liquid impregnant. 

iv. Craft tissue insulation. 

v. Aluminum foil electrodes. 

c. Each capacitor shall be internally fused. 

A. See Division 26 for requirements. 

B. Provide safety disconnect switches for all mechanical equipment unless specifically shown 

on Division 26 requirements. 



2.04 STARTERS: 

A. Furnish individual combination type full NEMA rated starters with HMCP or fused 

disconnect switch for all motors provided (except for starters that are shown to be provided 

in motor control centers). All combination starters shall be adequately braced for the fault 

current available. 42,000 AIC @ 480V, three phase and 65,000 AIC @ 208V, threephase 

shall be the minimum ratings. 

1. Enclosures: NEMA Type 1, general purpose enclosures with padlock ears, except 

in wet locations, where NEMA Type 3R enclosures with conduit hubs shall be used. 

Units in hazardous locations shall have enclosure of proper NEC class and 

division appropriate for the application. 

2. All starters for three-phase motors shall be of magnetic type, complete with the 

following accessories: 



03/16/2012 

a. Three-leg Class 10 trip-free overload protection with externally operated 

manual reset and visual trip indicator. 

b. Separate three-phase voltage monitor to provide quick-trip on single 

phasing or phase reversal, with automatic reset. 

c. Control transformers with fused primary and secondary. 

d. 120-volt holding coils. 

e. Integral Hand-Off-Auto switch for single-speed motors. 

f. Integral High-Low-Off-Auto switch for two-speed motors. 

g. High-to-low speed time delay relay for two-speed starters. 

h. Auxiliary contacts, one N.O. and one N.C. minimum. 

i. “Run” pilot light. 

3. Two-speed, two-winding starters shall incorporate both mechanical and electrical 

interlocks between the high and low speed contactors and shall have individual 

overload current protection and auxiliary contacts for each speed. 

4. Starters for single-phase motors shall have horsepower rated thermal overload 

switches. 

5. All starters shall be full NEMA rated. IEC rated and/or NEMA equivalent rated 

starters are not acceptable. All starters shall be listed and labeled by NEMA, UL, 

and CSA. 

6. Provide complete submittal data for all single and three-phase starters. 

7. Approved manufacturers are Allen-Bradley, Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, 

Square D, and S & S. 

B. Furnish all necessary control devices such as speed controls, transformers, and relays as 

required for proper operation for all equipment furnished under this Division. 

C. Furnish all remote switches and/or push-button stations required for manually operated 

equipment, complete with low energy pilot lights of an approved type. 

D. Motors, starters, and other electrical control equipment installed in moist areas or in areas 

of special conditions, such as areas where explosive gases are present, shall be designed 

and approved for installation in such areas. 

E. Furnish circuit and purpose identification for each remote manual switch and/or pushbutton 

station furnished herein. Identification may be by means of either an engraved 

plastic sign for permanent mounting to wall below switch or a stamping on switch cover 

plate. All such identification signs and/or switch covers in finished areas shall match other 

hardware in the immediate areas. 



2.05 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES: 

A. Variable frequency drive (VFD) and associated fixed-speed bypass panel shall be in a 

single enclosure and shall be suitable for control of a standard NEMA MG-1 parts 30 & 31 

Design B three-phase induction motor. 

B. Variable Frequency Motor Control: 

1. The control shall be PWM type and shall produce a three-phase output capable of 

providing efficient operation of standard NEMA MG-1 parts 30 & 31 Design B 

induction motors. 

2. The control shall consist of a power section made up of a fixed AC-to- DC converter, 

a fused DC bus, storage network, and an inverter, using IGBT’s in the 

power switching section. The drive shall incorporate AC line reactors as required 

to provide for a power factor of .95 or better at design load. The power section 

shall be isolated from the control section between the driver output of the printed 

control circuit card and the power switching devices. 

3. Drives shall have a logic control section which is microprocessor based, using a 

32-bit processor and LSI for minimum part count and maximum reliability. 

4. Each VFD shall be provided with a two-line backlit liquid crystal display with a 

minimum of 32 characters. During normal operation, the display shall simultaneously 

show the VFD mode of operation, VFD status, VFD speed, and VFD load 

(amps). If a fault occurs, the reason shall be displayed as an English message 

such as “OUTPUT OVERLOAD” rather than fault codes. A digital keypad shall be 

provided to facilitate entry of all adjustments. All parameters shall be selected by 

clear English messages on the LCD screen, and shall be entered in Engineering 

units. VFD’s utilizing LED displays or displays with fewer than 32 characters will 

not be considered equal to the type specified. 

5. The drive shall use the latest available technology for motor noise and line 

harmonic reduction. 

C. Specification: 

1. NEMA 1 cabinet enclosure with a steel gasketed hinged door. Manual control 

and programming devices shall be door-mounted or accessible without opening 

door. NEMA 3R for outdoor from 32°F to 104°F. (Provisions should be made if 

above or below temperature range.) 

2. Input power: 460V, three-phase, 60 Hz or as noted on drawings. 



03/16/2012 

a. Nominal input voltage +/- 10% 

b. +/- 3% input frequency stability 

3. Voltage harmonic and current distortion requirements: 

a. All VFD’s shall meet the requirements as outlined in IEEE-519-1992 for 

individual and total harmonic voltage distortion. Individual or simultaneous 

operation of the VFD’s shall not add more than 3% total harmonic 

voltage distortion to the normal bus. The point of common coupling shall 

be at the MCC bus or panelboard bus to which the VFD is connected. 

The short circuit current at point of common coupling under utility 

operation is 42,000 AIC. 

b. If harmonic filters are required to meet the above requirements, the VFD 

manufacturer must provide the filters and is responsible for the design 

and manufacturing of the filters. A full harmonic analysis must be 





03/16/2012 

submitted by the VFD manufacturer with the submittal package, which 

includes all harmonics up to the 50th. Analysis shall include computergenerated 

waveforms, a statement of all assumptions, a one-line diagram 

of the system as analyzed, and a spectrum analysis showing individual 

harmonics along with a statement showing compliance with the 

standards. 

4. Manufacturer shall guarantee that harmonic voltage and current distortion on the 

line side (input terminals) of the VFD does not exceed 5% total voltage harmonic 

distortion and 15% total current harmonic distortion. 

5. Comply with FCC Subpart J of Part 15 for Class A computing devices from 7 MHz 

to 30 MHz for conduction limit without external modification. 

6. Output Power: Three-phase, 1.5 to 60 Hz, with variable voltage to provide proper 

and efficient operation of variable torque load, and capable of providing up to 

110% startup torque. 

7. Overload capacity minimum of 110% for 1 minute. 

D. The VFD shall be operable in two modes. In the "HAND" mode, the unit shall start and run 

at a speed as set on the manual speed adjuster. In the "AUTO" mode, the unit shall start 

in response to a contact closure and run at a speed established by a remote analog 

control signal. 

E. Minimum Requirements for Control Operation and Service: 

1. Door-interlocked disconnect switch (or MCB, 65,000 AIC minimum) for the entire 

unit. 

2. Isolated 120 VAC control transformer 

3. Digital annunciated fault and limit functions for: 

a. Thermal overload relay trip. 

b. Microprocessor self-check function. 

c. Output overcurrent trip. 

d. DC bus overvoltage trip. 

e. Inverse time overload trip. 

f. Heat sink overtemperature trip. 

g. DC bus fuse open. 

h. DC bus overvoltage (regen. limit). 

i. Output ground fault. 

j. Output line-to-line fault. 

4. Last 8 faults shall be retained in memory for operator recall. 

5. Isolated Binary Input Circuits: 

a. External safety lockout device. 

b. Remote Run/Stop command. 

6. Isolated Binary Output Circuits: 

a. Remote VFD fault trip alarm. 

b. VFD Run/Stop status. 

c. VFD Auto/Manual mode status. 

7. Analog Output Signals: 





03/16/2012 

a. 4-20 mA or 0-10 vdc output for VFD speed. 

b. 4-20 mA or 0-10 vdc output for VFD load. 

F. Minimum Required Standard Features: 

1. Door-mounted or visible components: 

a. Power-on light. 

b. Safety lockout indication. 

c. Inverter run indication. 

d. Bypass run light. 

e. VFD fault indication. 

f. 32-Character (minimum) alphanumeric liquid crystal display. 

g. Input keypad for parameter input and display selection. 

h. Manual speed adjustment means. 

i. Hand/Off/Auto VFD selector. 

2. Furnish only non-filament type indicating lights. 

3. Provide the following features: 

a. Adjustable current limit circuit to prevent nuisance tripping during 

acceleration or run conditions. 

b. Active regeneration limit circuit to prevent nuisance overcurrent tripping 

during deceleration. 

c. Input power single phasing and/or reverse phasing protection. 

d. Minimum and maximum speed adjustments, separate and noninteractive. 

e. Power loss restart selectable for Auto Restart in auto mode only. 

f. Automatic restart from undervoltage, power failure, or control fault. 

g. Critical frequency lockout for up to 2 points, available from 10% to 100% 

speed with an adjustable band width. 

h. Provide I2t fuses or other protection for power-handling components. 

Control shall survive load side short circuits without component failure, 

and shall annunciate output phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground faults. 

i. Volts-per-hertz ratio shall be automatic, tracking motor load requirements 

to achieve most efficient operation within the parameters selected. 

4. To reduce possible acoustical noise and electrical interference, drive control shall 

have an automatically variable carrier frequency of at least 800 to 2,500 hertz. 

There shall be no sudden frequency shifts which cause acoustical noise increases 

during shifts in the motor. 

5. Control shall be capable of starting into a spinning motor, and also switching 

from inverter to bypass back to inverter without tripping off line. Control shall also 

be capable of stopping a motor rotating in the reverse direction and then 

accelerating that motor in the proper direction. 

6. Control shall have a 4 - 20 mADC or 0 - 10 VDC isolated instrument control 

signal follower. Isolation shall be either optical or transformer type. The 

manufacturer shall include documentation with submittals that confirm the 

follower is of the isolated type. 

7. All components shall be supplied in an integral NEMA 1 or better metal enclosure; 

separate enclosures are not allowed. 

8. All drives shall carry ETL or UL nationally recognized testing laboratory approval. 



2.06 BYPASS PANEL: 

9. Provide with the VFD a Lonworks or Bacnet type communication card and required 

interface components and software necessary to forward VFD data information to 

and from the BAS/VFD. 

A. The fixed speed bypass panel shall be mounted and wired in a compartment separated 

from the VFD, and shall allow constant speed operation of the controlled motor while the 

VFD is out of service. Both VFD and bypass components shall be mounted in a single 

NEMA 1 enclosure with terminals for field connection to the three-phase power, the 

controlled motor, and the temperature control interface. 

1. Cabinet door(s) where either door dimension is greater than 30" shall be 

constructed of 14-gauge or heavier steel with at least three hinges and one lock 

per door. 

2. VFD and bypass manual control and programming devices shall be doormounted 

or accessible without opening main door. 

3. The prewired bypass panel compartment shall include: 



03/16/2012 

a. A VFD output contactor and a constant speed bypass contactor. 

b. A three-pole thermal motor overload relay with heaters connected to shut 

down the motor in both the VFD and bypass modes. 

c. A door-interlocked VFD disconnect switch, circuit breaker or contactor 

which shall allow power-off maintenance of the VFD while the motor 

operates in bypass mode, with a full sheet metal barrier between the 

bypass and VFD compartments. Bypass circuitry in the same 

compartment as the VFD will not be allowed, and an input contactor to 

the VFD will not be considered equal to the VFD disconnect switch 

specified. This disconnect is in addition to the fused disconnect for the 

entire unit, specified previously in para. 2.05, E-1. 

d. A 120-volt control power transformer with fused secondary. 

e. Control relays or control logic as necessary to allow for remote start/stop, 

and remote safety interlocks. 

f. An interlock to allow a controlled VFD deceleration ramp to stop. 

g. An adjustable delay function (1 to 30 seconds) to prevent rapid switching 

between bypass and VFD modes. 

4. A manual selector switch shall provide for the following operating mode: 

2.07 EQUIPMENT FABRICATION: 

a. A manual “VFD-OFF-BYPASS” control selector switch shall be provided on 

the bypass compartment door. In VFD mode, the output of the VFD shall 

be connected to the motor, allowing variable speed operation. OFF shall 

inhibit all motor operation. BYPASS shall start the motor across the line. 

A. General: Fabricate mechanical equipment for secure mounting of motors and other 

electrical items included in work. Provide either permanent alignment of motors with 

equipment, or adjustable mountings as applicable for belt drives, special couplings and 

similar indirect coupling of equipment. Provide safe, secure, durable, and removable 

guards for motor drives, arranged to allow for lubrication and similar runningmaintenance 

without removal of guards. 




3.01 TEST AND TEST DATA: 

A. A factory load test shall be performed on each motor of 1000 watt input or greater to 

assure compliance with the energy-efficiency section of this specification. 

B. Typical test data on every motor to be used on this project shall be made available upon 

request. 


A. Install motors on motor mounting systems in accordance with motor manufacturer's 

instructions, securely anchored to resist torque, drive thrusts, and other external forces 

inherent in mechanical work. Secure sheaves and other drive units to motor shafts with 

keys and Allen set screws. For motors of 1/3 hp and less, sheaves and drive components 

may be secured with Allen set screws on flat surface of shaft. Unless otherwise indicated, 

set motor shafts parallel with machine shafts. 

B. Deliver starters and wiring devices which have not been factory-installed on equipment to 

electrical installer for installation. 

C. Install power and control connections for motors to comply with NEC and applicable 

provisions of Division 26 sections. Install grounding except where non-grounded isolation 

of motor is indicated. 

D. Provide 4” high concrete housekeeping pad for floor-mounted variable frequency drives. 

E. Where a separate disconnect switch is provided in the motor feeders between a VFD and 

the motor, provide an end switch at the disconnect to open the remote interlock shutdown 

circuit power circuit. 

3.03 VFD START-UP SERVICES: 

A. The variable frequency drive (VFD) vendor shall provide, as a minimum, the following 

services: 

1. Service of certified factory-trained representative to supervise startup, adjustment, 

and fine-tuning of all VFD’s and to instruct Owner on proper operation and 

maintenance procedures. 

2. Training of user personnel in basic troubleshooting. Training shall be on-site, 

shall be a minimum of 1 day's duration, and shall be performed in addition to 

startup of system. 

3. Each VFD manufacturer shall have a local representative specifically trained in 

troubleshooting, service and repair of its VFD’s. A statement of the length and 

extent of experience of the local service organization shall be included with the 

submittals. 

3.04 VFD HARMONIC DISTORTION TESTING: 



03/16/2012 



A. After installation is complete, measure the harmonic voltage and current distortion of each 

VFD with the drive assembly in bypass mode, with the VFD running at 50% operating 

speed, and with the VFD running at highest operating speed. Take measurements on 

each phase (L-L) on the line side (input terminals) of the VFD. 

B. If measurements exceed the limits as specified in Part 2, install corrective reactors or filters 

at no additional cost to the owner, and retake measurements after corrective equipment is 

installed. 

C. Include all measurements (before and after installation of corrective equipment) in the 

harmonic distortion report. Provide the Engineer with a copy of the harmonic distortion 

report. 

D. The Harmonic Distortion Test and Report shall be conducted by an approved independent 

testing agency. 

3.05 VFD NOISE TEST: 

A. Measure the dBA sound level of the motor with the drive in bypass mode and with the 

drive operating from 25% to 100% speed output. 

B. If the measurements exceed the limits specified in part 2, correct as required at no cost to 

the Owner, and retake measurements. 

C. Report all tests to the Engineer. 

3.06 VFD INDUCED SHAFT VOLTAGE TEST: 

A. After installation is complete and system is operating under normal conditions, measure 

and report any voltage potential between the motor shaft and the motor frame. This test 

may occur anytime between substantial completion of the project and the end of the 

overall project warranty period. Report findings to the Engineer. Costs for any corrective 

measures required shall be included in the bid. 

3.07 MECHANICAL WIRING: 

A. Provide all temperature control wiring, all interlock wiring, and equipment that is to be 

provided under this Division unless specifically shown on Electrical drawings. 

B. All line voltage interlock and control wiring shall be not less than No. 14 insulated, color 

coded wire in conduit or raceway. 

C. Electrical wiring in connection with the automatic temperature control system, where shown 

on the Division 26 drawings, shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor. All other 

wiring, including 120V required for proper operation of the automatic temperature control 

system, shall be performed by the Mechanical Contractor. 

3.08 INSTALLATION COORDINATION: 

A. Furnish equipment requiring electrical connections to operate properly and to deliver full 

capacity at electrical service available. 



03/16/2012 



B. Immersion thermostats, remote bulb thermostats, motorized valves, floor controls, duct 

detectors, etc. which are integral parts of the mechanical equipment or directly attached to 

ducts, pipes, equipment, etc. shall be set in place by mechanical Contractor. 

C. It is the intent of this specification that one "General" Contractor enters into an agreement 

with the Owner. The use and coordination of subcontractors is at the option of the 

General Contractor. All mechanical equipment, motors and controls shall be furnished, 

set in place, and wired. The exact furnishing and installation of the equipment shall be 

coordinated by the Contractors involved. Contractor should note that the intent is for the 

Division 23 and 26 Contractors to be responsible for coordinating all control wiring as 

outlined, whether or not specifically called for by the mechanical or electrical drawings and 

specifications. Comply with the applicable requirements of Division 26 for all electrical 

work which is not otherwise specified. No extras will be allowed for Contractor's failure to 

provide for these required items. The Contractor shall refer to the Division 26 and Division 

23 specifications and plans for all power and control wiring requirements and shall advise 

the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies prior to bidding. 



03/16/2012 








03/16/2012 


EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Flexible, ball-joint, packed expansion joints. 

2. Expansion-compensator packless expansion joints. 

3. Flexible-hose packless expansion joints. 

4. Metal-bellows packless expansion joints. 

5. Rubber packless expansion joints. 

6. Grooved-joint expansion joints. 

7. Pipe loops and swing connections. 

8. Alignment guides and anchors. 


A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures, 


B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors. 



B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with 

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the 


1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and 

for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and swing connections. 

2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and 

methods of assembly and attachment to building structure. 

3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure. 

4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end 

connections, and location for each expansion joint. 


LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING


A. Welding certificates. 

B. Product Certificates: For each type of expansion joint, from manufacturer. 


A. Maintenance Data: For expansion joints to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 

2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 


2.1 PACKED EXPANSION JOINTS 

A. Flexible, Ball-Joint, Packed Expansion Joints: 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering 


following: 

a. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. 

b. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 

2. Standards: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section II, "Materials"; and 

ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials and design of pressure-containing 

parts and bolting. 

3. Material: Carbon-steel assembly with asbestos-free composition packing. 

4. Design: For 360-degree rotation and angular deflection. 

5. Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig at 400 deg F. 

6. Angular Deflection for NPS 6 and Smaller: 30 degree minimum. 

7. Angular Deflection for NPS 8 and Larger: 15 degree minimum. 

8. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. 

9. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged. 

2.2 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS 

A. Metal, Expansion-Compensator Packless Expansion Joints: 


following: 




03/16/2012 



. Flexicraft Industries. 



e. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 

f. Metraflex, Inc. 

g. Senior Flexonics Pathway. 


3. Configuration for Copper Tubing: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows with copper pipe 

ends. 


b. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Threaded. 

4. Configuration for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows; steel-pipe end 

connections; and carbon-steel shroud. 

a. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. 

b. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged Weld. 

B. Rubber, Expansion-Compensator Packless Expansion Joints: 


following: 




d. General Rubber Corporation. 

e. Mason Industries, Inc.; Mercer Rubber Co. 

f. Proco Products, Inc. 

g. Tozen Corporation. 

h. Unaflex. 


2. Material: Twin reinforced-rubber spheres with external restraining cables. 

3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 170 deg F unless otherwise indicated. 

4. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. 

C. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints: 


following: 

a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 

b. Flexicraft Industries. 


d. Metraflex, Inc. 

e. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc. 

2. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two flexiblemetal-hose 

legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible 

hose. 

3. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths. 



03/16/2012 



4. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper-alloy fittings with solderjoint 


a. Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 340 


5. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Copper-alloy fittings with 

threaded end connections. 

a. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 420 psig at 70 


6. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Carbon-steel fittings with threaded 




7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Carbon-steel fittings with flanged or 

weld end connections. 



8. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 8 to NPS 12: Carbon-steel fittings with flanged or 




9. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 14 and Larger: Carbon-steel fittings with flanged or 




D. Metal-Bellows Packless Expansion Joints: 


following: 


b. American BOA, Inc. 

c. Badger Industries, Inc. 

d. Expansion Joint Systems, Inc. 

e. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 

f. Flexicraft Industries. 

g. Flex Pression Ltd. 

h. Flex-Weld, Inc. 

i. Metraflex, Inc. 


k. WahlcoMetroflex. 



03/16/2012 



2. Standards: ASTM F 1120 and EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers 

Association, Inc." 

3. Type: Circular, corrugated bellows with external tie rods. 


5. Configuration: Single joint Single joint with base and double joint with base classes unless 


6. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing: Single or multi-ply phosphor-bronze bellows, copper 

pipe ends, and brass shrouds. 


b. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: threaded. 

c. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged. 

7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Single or multi-ply stainless-steel bellows, steel pipe 

ends, and carbon-steel shroud. 

a. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. 

b. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged or Weld. 

E. Rubber Packless Expansion Joints: 


following: 





e. Garlock Sealing Technologies. 

f. General Rubber Corporation. 

g. Mason Industries, Inc.; Mercer Rubber Co. 

h. Metraflex, Inc. 

i. Proco Products, Inc. 

j. Red Valve Company, Inc. 

k. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc. 

2. Standards: ASTM F 1123 and FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion Joints 

and Flexible Pipe Connectors." 

3. Material: Fabric-reinforced rubber complying with FSA-NMEJ-703. 

4. Arch Type: Single or multiple arches with external control rods. 

5. Spherical Type: Single or multiple spheres with external control rods. 

6. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 150 psig at 220 deg F. 

7. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 5 and NPS 6: 140 psig at 200 deg F. 

8. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 8 to NPS 12: 140 psig at 180 deg F. 

9. Material for Water: EPDM. 

10. End Connections: Full-faced, integral steel flanges with steel retaining rings. 

2.3 GROOVED-JOINT EXPANSION JOINTS 


following: 

1. Anvil International, Inc. 



03/16/2012 



2. Shurjoint Piping Products. 

3. Victaulic Company. 

B. Description: Factory-assembled expansion joint made of several grooved-end pipe nipples, 

couplings, and grooved joints. 

C. Standard: AWWA C606, for grooved joints. 

D. Nipples: Galvanized, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, steel pipe with grooved 

ends. 

E. Couplings: flexible type for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM 

gasket suitable for cold and hot water, and bolts and nuts. 

2.4 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS 

A. Alignment Guides: 


following: 


b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. 

c. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 

d. Flexicraft Industries. 

e. Flex-Weld, Inc. 

f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 

g. Metraflex, Inc. 

h. Senior Flexonics Pathway. 



2. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer 

cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding spider for bolting to 

pipe. 

B. Anchor Materials: 

1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head. 

3. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. 

4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in 

hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for 

application. 

a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel. 

b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel. 


5. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud, bonding-system anchor for use with hardened 

portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. 



03/16/2012 




a. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy 

resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be 

installed. 

b. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud unless 



3.1 EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION 

A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed. 

B. Install packed-type expansion joints with packing suitable for fluid service. 

C. Install metal-bellows expansion joints according to EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint 

Manufacturers Association, Inc." 

D. Install rubber packless expansion joints according to FSA-NMEJ-702. 

E. Install grooved-joint expansion joints to grooved-end steel piping 

3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION 

A. Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or 

compression produced during anticipated change in temperature. 

B. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings including tee in 

main. 

C. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including 

tee in riser. 

D. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including 

tee in main. 

3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION 

A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress. 

B. Install [one] [two] guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides 

nearest to expansion joint not more than [four] pipe diameters from expansion 

joint. 

C. Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure. 

D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 

and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. 

E. Anchor Attachments: 



03/16/2012 



1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME 

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 

2. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, 

Type 24, U-bolts bolted to anchor. 

F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with 

ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding. 

2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener 


G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete. 



03/16/2012 








03/16/2012 


SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Sleeves and Stack-sleeve fittings. 

2. Sleeve-seal systems and Sleeve-seal fittings. 

3. Grout. 




2.1 SLEEVES AND STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS 

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron 

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel 

collar; zinc coated. 

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, 

with plain ends. 

D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded 

longitudinal joint 

E. Stack-Sleeve Fittings, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring, bolts, 

and nuts for membrane flashing. 



following: 


HVAC PIPING

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 

2. CALPICO, Inc. 

3. Metraflex Company (The). 

4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 

5. Proco Products, Inc. 

B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space 

between piping and sleeve. 

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. 

Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Stainless steel. 



C. Sleeve-Seal Fittings - Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made 

for imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center 

opening to match piping OD. 

2.3 GROUT 

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, 


B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications. 

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi , 28-day compressive strength. 



3.1 SLEEVE AND STACK SLEEVE FITTING INSTALLATION 

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. 

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to 

provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls. Sleeves are not 

required for core-drilled holes. 

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls 

are constructed. 


a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or 

other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. 

2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal 

system. 



03/16/2012 


HVAC PIPING

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions. 


2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between 


3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants 

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants 

specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 

E. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed. 

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between 


2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane 

waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200 "Sheet 

Metal Flashing and Trim." 

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. 

4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring 

is specified. 

5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings. 

F. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe 

penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in 

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM AND SLEEVE-SEAL FITTING INSTALLATION 

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service 

piping entries into building. 

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for 

sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, 

assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and 

sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a 

watertight seal. 

C. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed. 

D. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. 


E. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms. 

F. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings. 

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE 

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications: 

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above and below Grade, all sizes, Cast-iron wall sleeves with 

water stop/anchor. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between 

piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 



03/16/2012 


HVAC PIPING

2. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade and below Grade, all sizes, Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeveseal 

system. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and 

sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 

3. Concrete Slabs above Grade, all sizes, Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. 

4. Interior Partitions, all sizes, Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. 



03/16/2012 



HVAC PIPING





03/16/2012 


ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Escutcheons. 

2. Floor plates. 




2.1 ESCUTCHEONS 

A. One-Piece, or Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With rough-brass finish and setscrew fastener. 

B. One-Piece or Split Plate Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip 

fasteners. 

2.2 FLOOR PLATES 

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners. 

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge. 



A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors, where 

penetration is exposed to view and on exterior of building. 

23 0518 - 1 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC 

PIPING

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD 


C. Furnish pipe Escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for 

unoccupied areas. 

D. Escutcheons for Moist Areas: Provide cast brass or sheet brass, solid or split hinged. 

E. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors. 

F. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD 


1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type. 

2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type. 


A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials. 



03/16/2012 


23 0518 - 2 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC 

PIPING





03/16/2012 


METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers. 

2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 

3. Thermowells. 

4. Dial-type pressure gages. 

5. Gage attachments. 

6. Test plugs. 

7. Test-plug kits. 

8. Orifice flowmeters. 

9. Turbine flowmeters. 

10. Venturi flowmeters. 

11. Impeller-turbine, thermal-energy meters. 



B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 


A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer. 


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and 


23 0519 - 1 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC 

PIPING


2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS 


following: 

1. Ernst Flow Industries. 

2. Marsh Bellofram. 


4. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. 




8. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA. 

B. Standard: ASME B40.200. 

C. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 3-inch or 5-inch nominal diameter. 

D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F and 

deg C. 

E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle, bottom, with unified-inch screw threads. 

F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 

G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel. 

H. Window: Plain glass. 

I. Ring: Stainless steel. 

J. Element: Bimetal coil. 

K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 

L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1percent of scale range. 

2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS 

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers: 


following: 

a. Flo Fab Inc. 

b. Miljoco Corporation. 

c. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. 

d. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. 

e. Trerice, H. O. Co. 



03/16/2012 


PIPING

f. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 

g. Winters Instruments - U.S. 


3. Case: Cast aluminum 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 

4. Case Form: Adjustable angle. 

5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 

6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings 

graduated in deg F and deg C. 


8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation. 

9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 

10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 

1.5 percent of scale range. 

2.3 DUCT-THERMOMETER MOUNTING BRACKETS 

A. Description: Flanged bracket with screw holes, for attachment to air duct and made to hold 

thermometer stem. 

2.4 THERMOWELLS 

A. Thermowells: 


2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 

3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI. 

4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES or CSA. 

5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 

6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 

7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 

8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 

9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 

10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 

11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer 

connection. 

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin. 

2.5 PRESSURE GAGES 

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: 


following: 

a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge. 

b. Ashcroft Inc. 

c. Ernst Flow Industries. 

d. Flo Fab Inc. 

e. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. 



03/16/2012 


PIPING

f. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. 

g. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. 

h. Trerice, H. O. Co. 

i. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 

j. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 


3. Case: Liquid-filled, cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter. 

4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 

5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 , ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and 

bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 

6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 

7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi. 

8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 


10. Ring: Metal or Brass or Stainless steel. 

11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range. 

2.6 GAGE ATTACHMENTS 

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and 

piston or porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated 

piping. 

B. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of brass pipe with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 pipe threads. 

C. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 

2.7 TEST PLUGS 


following: 








B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended 

stem on units to be installed in insulated piping. 

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. 

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F. 

F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber. 



03/16/2012 


PIPING

2.8 TEST-PLUG KITS 


following: 









B. Furnish one test-plug kit(s) containing one thermometer(s), one pressure gage and adapter, and 

carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of 

diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping. 

2.9 FLOWMETERS 

A. Orifice Flowmeters: 


following: 

a. ABB; Instrumentation and Analytical. 

b. Bell & Gossett; ITT Industries. 

c. Meriam Process Technologies. 

d. Preso Meters; a division of Racine Federated Inc. 

e. S. A. Armstrong Limited; Armstrong Pumps Inc. 

2. Description: Flowmeter with sensor, hoses or tubing, fittings, valves, indicator, and 

conversion chart. 

3. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system 

served. 

4. Sensor: Wafer-orifice-type, calibrated, flow-measuring element; for installation between 

pipe flanges. 

a. Design: Differential-pressure-type measurement for water. 

b. Construction: Cast-iron body, brass valves with integral check valves and caps, and 

calibrated nameplate. 

c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig. 

d. Minimum Temperature Rating: 250 deg F. 

5. Permanent Indicators: Meter suitable for wall or bracket mounting, calibrated for 

connected sensor and having 6-inch- diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper 

tubing for connecting to sensor. 

a. Scale: Gallons per minute. 

b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale range. 

6. Portable Indicators: Hand-held, differential-pressure type, calibrated for connected sensor 

and having two 12-foot hoses, with carrying case. 



03/16/2012 


PIPING



7. Display: Shows rate of flow with register to indicate total volume in gallons. 

8. Conversion Chart: Flow rate data compatible with sensor and indicator. 

9. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter. 

B. Turbine Flowmeters: 


following: 


b. Data Industrial Corp. 

c. EMCO Flow Systems; a division of Spirax Sarco, Inc. 

d. ERDCO Engineering Corp. 

e. Hoffer Flow Controls, Inc. 

f. Liquid Controls; a unit of IDEX Corporation. 

g. McCrometer, Inc. 

h. Midwest Instruments & Controls Corp. 

i. ONICON Incorporated. 

2. Description: Flowmeter with sensor and indicator. 


served. 

4. Sensor: Impeller turbine; for inserting into pipe fitting or for installing in piping and 

measuring flow directly in gallons per minute. 

a. Design: Device or pipe fitting with inline turbine and integral direct-reading scale 

for water. 

b. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with plastic turbine or impeller. 



5. Indicator: Hand-held meter; either an integral part of sensor or a separate meter. 

6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1-1/2 percent. 

7. Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in gallons. 


C. Venturi Flowmeters: 


following: 


b. Gerand Engineering Co. 

c. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 

d. Preso Meters; a division of Racine Federated Inc. 

e. S. A. Armstrong Limited; Armstrong Pumps Inc. 

f. Victaulic Company. 

2. Description: Flowmeter with calibrated flow-measuring element, hoses or tubing, fittings, 

valves, indicator, and conversion chart. 



03/16/2012 


PIPING


served. 

4. Sensor: Venturi-type, calibrated, flow-measuring element; for installation in piping. 

a. Design: Differential-pressure-type measurement for water. 

b. Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel, with brass fittings and 

attached tag with flow conversion data. 



e. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. 

f. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged or welded. 

g. Flow Range: Flow-measuring element and flowmeter shall cover operating range of 

equipment or system served. 

5. Permanent Indicators: Meter suitable for wall or bracket mounting, calibrated for 

connected flowmeter element, and having 6-inch- diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings 

and copper tubing for connecting to flowmeter element. 



6. Portable Indicators: Hand-held, differential-pressure type, calibrated for connected 

flowmeter element and having two 12-foot hoses, with carrying case. 



7. Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in gallons. 

8. Conversion Chart: Flow rate data compatible with sensor. 


2.10 THERMAL-ENERGY METERS 

A. Impeller-Turbine, Thermal-Energy Meters: 


following: 

a. Data Industrial Corp. 

b. Hoffer Flow Controls, Inc. 

c. ISTEC Corporation. 

d. ONICON Incorporated. 

2. Description: System with strainer, flow sensor, temperature sensors, transmitter, indicator, 

and connecting wiring. 

3. Flow Sensor: Impeller turbine with corrosion-resistant-metal body and transmitter; for 

installing in piping. 

a. Design: Total thermal-energy measurement. 

b. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 

c. Minimum Temperature Range: 40 to 250 deg F. 

4. Temperature Sensors: Insertion-type transducer. 



03/16/2012 


PIPING

5. Indicator: Solid-state, integrating-type meter with integral battery pack; for wall mounting. 

a. Data Output: Six-digit electromechanical counter with readout in kilowatts per hour 

or British thermal units. 

b. Battery Pack: Five-year lithium battery. 

6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent. 

7. Display: Visually indicates total fluid volume in gallons and thermal-energy flow in 

kilowatts per hour or British thermal units. 

8. Strainer: Full size of main line piping. 

9. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each thermal-energy meter 

system. 



A. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid or one-third of pipe 

diameter or to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees. 

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if 

required to match sizes. 

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping. 

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium. 

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions. 

F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect 

cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length. 

G. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws. 

H. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the 

most readable position. 

I. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel. 

J. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam). 

K. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam. 

L. Install test plugs in piping tees. 

M. Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing. 

N. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements and 

flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

O. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems. 



03/16/2012 


PIPING

P. Install differential-pressure-type flowmeter elements, with at least minimum straight lengths of 

pipe, upstream and downstream from element according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

Q. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions. 

R. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators. 

S. Mount thermal-energy meters on wall if accessible; if not, provide brackets to support meters. 

T. Install thermometers in the following locations: 

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 

2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler. 

3. Two inlets and two outlets of each chiller. 

4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units. 

5. Two inlets and two outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger. 

6. Inlet and outlet of each thermal-storage tank. 

7. Outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts. 

U. Install pressure gages in the following locations: 

1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. 

2. Inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water connection. 

3. Suction and discharge of each pump. 


A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance 

of meters, gages, machines, and equipment. 

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility. 

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE 

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone shall be the following: 


B. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler, chiller, heat exchanger, each hydronic 

coil in air-handling units and built-up central systems shall be the following: 


C. Thermometers at outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts shall be the following: 

1. Liquid-filled, bimetallic-actuated type. 



03/16/2012 


PIPING

D. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length. 

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE 

A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F and minus 20 to plus 50 deg C. 

B. Scale Range for Condenser-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F and minus 20 to plus 50 deg C. 

C. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F and 0 to plus 115 deg C. 

D. Scale Range for Steam and Steam-Condensate Piping: 30 to 240 deg F and 0 to plus 115 

deg C. 

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE 

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each pressure-reducing valve shall be: 


B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water connection 

shall be: 

1. Liquid-filled, direct -mounted, metal case. 

2. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts. 

C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump shall be: 

1. Liquid-filled, direct -mounted, metal case. 

2. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts. 

3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE 

A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa. 

B. Scale Range for Condenser-Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa. 

C. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa. 

3.8 FLOWMETER SCHEDULE 

A. Flowmeters for Chilled-Water Piping: Venturi type. 

B. Flowmeters for Condenser-Water Piping: Venturi type. 

C. Flowmeters for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: Venturi type. 

D. Flowmeters for Steam and Steam-Condensate Piping: Venturi type. 



03/16/2012 


PIPING

3.9 THERMAL-ENERGY METER SCHEDULE 

A. Thermal-Energy Meters for Chilled-Water Piping: Impeller-turbine type. 

B. Thermal-Energy Meters for Condenser-Water Piping: Impeller-turbine type. 

C. Thermal-Energy Meters for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: Impeller-turbine type. 

D. Thermal-Energy Meters for Steam and Steam-Condensate Piping: Impeller-turbine type. 



03/16/2012 



PIPING





03/16/2012 


GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 

A. This Section describes general requirements for valves common to most mechanical piping 

systems which are specified elsewhere in Division 23. 


A. Submit the following Product Data for all valves under provisions of Section 01300: Body 

material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, 

seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, 


B. Submit operating instructions and maintenance requirements for all valves. 

1.03 STANDARDS: 

A. All valves shall conform to applicable portions of the following standards and as required 

by the appropriate national and local codes. 






Canadian Standards Association (CSA) 






B. Solenoid valves shall be UL listed, FM/AGA/ANSI and CSA approved. 


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 

1. Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rusting and galvanic 

corrosion. 

2. Protect valve ends against mechanical damage to threads, flange faces, and weld 

end preps. 

3. Set valves in best position for handling. Globe and gate valves shall be closed to 

prevent rattling; ball and plug valves shall be open to minimize exposure of 

23 0523 - 1 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR 

HVAC PIPING



03/16/2012 

functional surfaces; butterfly valves shall be shipped closed or slightly open; and 

swing check valves shall be blocked in either closed or open position. 

B. Storage: Use the following precautions during storage: 

1. Valves shall be stored and protected against all dirt, debris and foreign material at 

all times. 

2. Do not remove valve end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall 

for storage. 

3. Protect valves against weather. Where practical, store valves indoors. Maintain 

valve temperature higher than the ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor 

storage is necessary, support valves off the ground and protect in watertight 

enclosures. 

C. Handling: Valves whose size requires handling by a crane or lift shall be slung or rigged 

to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Handwheels and stems shall not be used as 

lifting or rigging points. 





2.02 VALVE FEATURES: 

1. Gate Valves: Nibco, Stockham, Hammond, Milwaukee. 

2. Ball Valves: Apollo, Nibco, Watts, Milwaukee, Stockham, Anvil. 

3. Eccentric Plug Balancing Valves: Keystone/Tyco, Milliken, DeZurik. 

4. Globe Valves: Nibco, Stockham, Hammond, Milwaukee. 

5. Butterfly Valves: Keystone/Tyco, Nibco, Milwaukee, Apollo, Stockham, Anvil. 

6. Swing Check Valves: Nibco, Stockham, Watts (threaded), Apollo, Milwaukee, 

Anvil (grooved only). 

7. Non-Slam Check Valves: Nibco, Keystone/Tyco, Milwaukee, Stockham, 

Centerline, Val-Matic, Metraflex, Technocheck, Golden Anderson, Anvil. 

8. Lift Check Valves: Apollo, Nibco, Milwaukee, Metraflex, Stockham. 

9. Solenoid Valves: Magnatrol Valve Corp., Skinner, General Controls, Asco. 

A. General: Comply with MSS-92 1980 "Valve Users Manual." 

B. All valves of each type shall be of one manufacturer. 

C. Valve Design: Valves shall have rising stem, or rising stem outside screw and yoke design; 

except, non-rising stem valves may be used where headroom prevents full operation of 

rising stem valves. 

D. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. 

(Control valves shall be sized for required flow, 3 psi pressure drop maximum.) 

E. Operators: Provide the following special operator features: 


HVAC PIPING

1. Handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter turn type. 

2. Lever handle on quarter turn valves 6 inch and smaller, except plug valves. 

Provide one wrench for every group of plug valves within a room. 

3. Chainwheel operators for valves 2-1/2 inch and larger that are installed 7’-0” or 

higher above finished floor elevation. Provide chains to an elevation of 6’-3” 

above finished floor elevation. 

4. Worm gear operators of an enclosed weather-proof design shall be provided on 

all quarter turn valves 8 inches and larger. 

F. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems to 

allow full operation of the valve without interference by the insulation. 

G. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45. 

H. End Connections: As specified in the individual valve specifications. 

2.03 GATE VALVES: 

1. Threaded: Comply with ANSI B2.1. 

2. Flanged: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel, and ANSI 

B16.24 for bronze. 

3. Solder-Joint: Comply with ANSI B16.18. 



03/16/2012 

a. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a 

melting point below 840°F for gate, globe, and check valves and below 

421°F for ball valves. 

4. Grooved: Comply with manufacturer’s standards. 

A. Gate Valves – 2” and smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 150, body and bonnet of cast bronze conforming to 

ASTM B-62 for 150 psi, threaded ends, solid wedge disc, union bonnet, rising stem, bronze gland, nonasbestos 

TFE impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. 


B. Gate Valves – 2-1/2” and larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, iron body conforming to ASTM 

A-126 C1 B, bronze trim, 0 S & Y design, flanged ends, and non-asbestos TFEimpregnated 

packing. 

2.04 BALL VALVES: 

Stockham Fig. G-623 

A. Ball Valves – 1” and smaller: MSS SP-110, ANSI B16.34, Class 150 WSP / 600 WOG, 

rated for 150 psi at 350°F, two-piece end-entry body style, bronze body conforming to 

ASTM B-584 (zinc content not exceeding 12%), full-port chrome-plated solid brass ball, 

15% glass reinforced RTFE seats, RTFE packing, adjustable packing nut, blow-out proof 

stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends or threaded ends to match 


Apollo 77C-100/200 


HVAC PIPING

B. Ball Valves – 1-1/4” through 2” and for all silver soldered or brazed lines: MSS SP-110, 

ANSI B16.34, Class 150 WSP / 600 WOG, rated for 150 psi at 350°F. Three-piece body 

style, bronze body conforming to ASTM B-584 (zinc content not exceeding 12%), single 

full-port stainless steel ball and stem of ASTM A-276 type 316, 15% glass reinforced RTFE 

seats, RTFE packing, blow-out proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder 

ends or threaded ends to match piping system. 

Apollo 82-100/200. 

2.05 ECCENTRIC PLUG BALANCING VALVES: 

A. All Sizes: 125 psi rated; cast iron, corrosion-resistant, permanently lubricated body; 

straightway pattern; EPDM encapsulated eccentric plug; lever actuators, except 

handwheels where indicated; and flanged ends. Provide memory stop feature. 

Milliken 600 series. 

B. 2” and smaller: At contractors option, provide combination flow measuring device and 

balancing valve, complete with venturi flow meter on P/T port, and ball valve for control; 

125 psi rated. Provide memory stop feature. Refer to Section 230519, “Meters and 

Gages for HVAC Piping.” 

2.06 GLOBE VALVES: 

A. HVAC Systems – 2” and smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 150 body, bonnet, bonnet ring cast of 

bronze conforming to ASTM B-62, stainless steel 500 BHN disc, union bonnet, nonasbestos 

Teflon-impregnated stem packing, copper-silicon bronze stem, brass packing 

gland, and malleable iron handle. 


B. HVAC Systems – 2-1/2” and larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, body of cast iron conforming 

to ASTM A-126 Class B, bolted bonnet bronze mounted, rising stem / Teflon disc with 

bronze disc holder or bronze disc, OS & Y, non-asbestos Teflon-impregnated stem 

packing, and cast iron or malleable iron hand wheel. 

2.07 BUTTERFLY VALVES: 

Stockham Fig. G-512/F-532 

A. Hydronic Service Butterfly Valves – 2-1/2” to 12”: MSS SP-67; Class 150 cast iron or 

ductile iron body conforming to ASTM A-126 or ASTM A-536 Class B; aluminum bronze 

ASTM B-148 disc; single-piece 416 stainless steel stem; 316 stainless steel taper pin discto-stem 

connection; ten-position lever locking handle for 6” and smaller sizes, worm gear 

actuator for 8” and larger sizes; EPDM replaceable seat and full FDA-approved EPDM 

lining; upper and lower bronze bearing, nonmetallic bushing and stem seal; ANSI class 

150 flange rated for 200 psi pressure differential; 250 psi bi-directional drop-tight shut-off 

dead end service with downstream flange removed; 250°F service temperature rating; and 

extended neck for 2” thick insulation. All valves shall be factory tested to 110% of pressure 

rating. All butterfly valves shall have fully lugged body, drilled and tapped. 



03/16/2012 


HVAC PIPING

2.08 CHECK VALVES: 

Keystone/Tyco Fig. 222 

Anvil Gruvlok Series 7700 

A. Swing Check Valves – 2-1/2” and smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125/150 WSP, cast bronze 

body and cap conforming to ASTM B-62, horizontal swing design, Y-pattern, bronze or 

teflon disc, stainless steel pin, and threaded or solder ends. Class 150 valves meeting the 

above specifications may be used where pressure requires or where Class 125 is not 

available. 

B. Swing Check Valves – 2-1/2” to 3”: MSS SP-71, Class 125, cast iron body and bolted cap 

conforming to ASTM A-126, Class B; horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc 

with bronze disc ring, and flanged ends. For sewage ejector and sump pump discharge 

swing check valves 2-1/2” and larger, provide outside lever with weight or spring to assist 

disc in closing rapidly. 

C. Non-Slam Check Valves – 2” and smaller: Bronze body, 200 psi @ 250 degrees F., 

threaded ends, resilient seats, center guided spring-loaded disk. 

D. Non-Slam Check Valves – 2-1/2” and larger: Class 125 cast iron or stainless steel body, 

replaceable lapped bronze seat and balanced twin bronze flappers or bronze center 

guided disc and stainless steel trim. Valve shall be designed to open and close at 

approximately one foot differential pressure. Twin flappers or center guided disc shall be 

loaded with a stainless steel spring to assure even non-slam checking action. Seals shall 

be EPDM. 

E. Lift Check Valves – 2” and smaller: Class 125 cast bronze body and cap conforming to 

ASTM B-62, horizontal or angle pattern, lift type valve with stainless steel spring, bronze 

disc holder with renewable "Teflon" disc, and threaded ends. 

2.09 DRAIN VALVES: 

A. For HVAC and plumbing hydronic systems, provide ball valve with threaded hose end and 

cap with chain. 

2.10 SOLENOID VALVES: 

Apollo Fig. 78-100/78-200 Series 

A. Solenoid valves shall consist of a solenoid (electromagnet) with its core and a valve body 

containing one or more orifices. The solenoid shall be mounted directly on the valve 

body. 

B. Response time from fully open or closed to fully closed or open shall be slow acting. 

C. Solenoid valves shall be 2- or 3- way type valves. 

D. Solenoid valves shall be normally open or normally closed as required for proper 

operation of the system, for protection against freezing and fire, and for safety. 



03/16/2012 


HVAC PIPING

E. Solenoid enclosures shall meet the ICS-6 ANSI/NEMA standard and UL standards 429, 

508 and/or 1002 as follows: 

1. Type 1: General Purpose. 

2. Type 2: Drip proof. 

3. Type 3 and 3S: Raintight, dust tight and sleet (ice) resistant. 

4. Type 3R: Rainproof, sleet (ice) resistant. 

5. Type 4: Watertight and dust tight. 

6. Type 4X: Watertight, dust tight and corrosion resistant. 

7. Type 6: Submersible. 

8. Type 6P: Submersible, prolonged submersion at a limited depth. 

9. Type 7: Explosion proof, Class I, Division 1, Group A (acetylene); B (hydrogen); C 

(ethyl-ether vapors, ethylene or cyclopropane); D (gasoline, hexane, naphtha, 

benzene, butane, propane, alcohol, acetone, benzol, lacquer, solvent vapors or 

natural gas). 

10. Type 9: Dust-ignition proof, Class II, Group E (metal dust); F (carbon black coal 

or coke dust); G (flour starch or grain dust). 

11. Operating temperatures shall range from 185°F to 842°F for T1 through T6 code 

numbers. 

F. Parts in contact with fluid shall be brass, bronze, or stainless steel; core tube, 305 stainless 

steel; core and plug nut, 430°F stainless steel; seal, BUNA “N"; shading coil, copper; disc, 

BUNA “N" and Nylon; spring, 302 stainless steel (General Service). 

G. Manual reset safety shut-off valve shall open manually and close upon interruption of 

current. 

H. Electric current shall be AC of voltage shown on Division 26 drawings. 

2.11 Electric Valve Actuators: 

1. The valve actuator shall consist of a 120 volt, single phase, permanent split 

capacitor, reversible type electric motor which drives a compound epicyclic gear. 

A manual override handwheel shall be integral to the unit. The electric actuator 

shall have visual mechanical position indication, readable from a distance of 25 

feet, showing output shaft and valve position. Unit shall be capable of mounting 

directly to butterfly valve without brackets or adapters. 

2. The actuator shall have an integral terminal strip for wiring to power supplies. 

Cable entry shall be by means of two (2) 1” NPT threaded connections. Cable 

entries shall have UL recommended gland stops within the NPT hole to prevent 

glands from being screwed in too far and damaging cable. 

3. The actuator shall be constructed to withstand high shock and vibrations without 

operations failure. The actuator cover shall have captive bolts to eliminate loss of 

bolts when removing the cover from the base. One copy of the wiring diagram 

shall be provided with the actuator. 

4. Actuators with 600 in-lbs or more output torque shall have two adjustable factory 

calibrated mechanical torque limit switches of the single pole, double-throw type. 

Motor rotor shaft shall run in ball bearings at each end of the motor. 

5. The actuator housing shall be manufactured to NEMA 4 Standards and shall be 

UL recognized. 

6. The environmental temperature range of the actuator shall be -20ºF to +140ºF (- 

30°C to +60°C). 



03/16/2012 


HVAC PIPING



7. For two-position service, the actuator shall be rated at a 20% duty cycle (i.e., 12 

minutes extended duty in every hour, or alternatively, one complete cycle every two 

minutes). For frequent cycling and modulating service, the actuator shall be rated 

for continuous duty, capable of operating 100% of the time at an ambient 

temperature of 104ºF (40°C). 

8. The actuator shall have a permanently lubricated, self-locking gear train. Motor 

brakes shall not be required to maintain desired valve position. Levers or latches 

shall not be required to engage or disengage the manual override. Mechanical 

travel stops, adjustable to 15º in each direction of 90º rotation, shall be standard, 

as well as two adjustable travel limit switches with electrically isolated contacts. 

Additional adjustable switches shall be provided where required to meet the 

sequence of operation. 

9. The motor shall have Class B insulation capable of withstanding locked rotor 

current for 25 seconds without overheating. Wiring shall also have Class B 

insulation. An auto-reset thermal cut-out protector shall be embedded in the 

motor windings. The motor shall be UL recognized and CSA approved. 

Disassembly of gears shall not be required to remove the motor. 

10. Materials: 



03/16/2012 

a. The electric actuator shall have a pressure die-cast, hard-anodized 

aluminum base and cover. The compound gear shall be made of diecast, 

hard-anodized aluminum or steel. An alloy steel worm gear shall be 

provided for manual override and torque limiting. Bearings for gears 

shall be of the ball and needle type; bronze bearings shall be used on the 

shafting parts. 

11. Electric Valve Actuator Accessories: 

a. Provide thermostatically controlled heaters for all exterior valves. 

b. Provide potentiometer or 4-20 mA transmitter for providing continuous 

feedback of actuator position where required to meet the sequence of 

operations. 

c. Provide an electronic servo amplifier and speed control module capable 

of accepting a 0-5 Kohm, 4-20 mA DC or other input signal for all 

modulating control valves. 

A. Install valves in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, including recommended 

lubrication. 

B. Examine valve interior through the end ports for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter 

and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks used which prevent disc 

movement during shipping and handling. 

C. Actuate valve through an open-close and close-open cycle. Examine functionally 

significant features, such as guides and seats made accessible by such actuation. 

Following examination, return the valve closure member to the position in which it was 

shipped. 


HVAC PIPING

D. Examine threads on both the valve and the mating pipe for form (out-of-round or local 

indentation) and cleanliness. 

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions which might cause leakage. Check bolting for 

proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size and material, 

and for freedom from defects and damage. 

F. Prior to valve installation, examine the piping for cleanliness, freedom from foreign 

materials, and proper alignment. 

G. All valves shall be installed so that they are accessible and serviceable, and such that full 

length operating handles may be used without interference from structure or other pipes 

and/or equipment. 

H. Isolation valves shall be installed: 

1. In piping at each and every piece of equipment. 

2. In piping whenever said pipe enters or leaves an equipment room. 

3. At all branch take-offs from mains. 

4. Where shown on Drawings. 

I. Label all valves with tags indicating service and identification number. Tags shall be 1- 

1/2” in diameter, brass, and with 1/4”-high letters. Securely fasten with chain and hook. 

Match service abbreviations given on mechanical drawings. 

3.02 VALVE SELECTION: 

A. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select valves 

with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: 

1. Copper Tube – 2” and smaller: Soldered ends, except in heating hot water and 

low pressure steam service, where threaded ends shall be used. 

2. Steel Pipe – 2” and smaller: Threaded or grooved-end. 

3. Steel Pipe – 2-1/2” and larger: Flanged or grooved-end. 

4. At all piping hot taps, provide a gate valve at the hot tap and a butterfly valve for 

shut-off service. Hot taps shall be provided only where approved by the Engineer. 


Valve Application Table 

SERVICE VALVE TYPE 

HVAC Hydronic Piping – 2” and smaller Ball Valve 

HVAC Hydronic Piping – 2-1/2” and larger Butterfly Valve 

HVAC Hydronic Pressure Globe Valve 

Reducing Valve Bypass – all sizes 

HVAC Hydronic Balancing Valve – 2” Calibrated Balancing Valve 

and smaller 



03/16/2012 


HVAC PIPING

HVAC Hydronic Balancing Valve – 2-1/2” Eccentric Plug Balancing Valve 

and larger 

HVAC Check Valves – 2” Swing Check 

and smaller 

HVAC Pump Discharge Non-Slam Spring Loaded 

Check Valve – all sizes 

Steam and Condensate Piping Shut-off – 2” Ball Valve 

and smaller 

Steam and Condensate Piping Shut-off – Steam Butterfly Valve 

2-1/2” and larger 

Steam and Condensate Piping Pressure Globe Valve 

Reducing – all sizes 

Steam and Condensate Piping Check Valves – Swing Check 

all sizes 

A. Locate valves for easy access, and provide separate support where necessary. 

B. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment in a manner to allow 

equipment removal without system shut-down. Unions are not required on flanged 

devices. 

C. Install 3-valve bypass around each pressure-reducing valve using throttling type valves. 

D. Gate and globe valves shall be installed with the stem in the upright position. In overhead 

horizontal piping, ball valves shall be installed with the handle at the side or bottom of the 

piping. Butterfly valves shall be installed with the stem within 45 degrees of the horizontal 

position. The handle of quarter turn valves shall point in the direction of flow when the 

valve is open. Quarter turn valves with hand wheels or chain wheels shall be located so 

that the position indicator is visible from the floor without the use of a ladder or climbing 

on equipment or piping. 

E. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow and as follows: 

1. Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin level. 

2. Wafer Check Valves: Install between two flanges in horizontal or vertical 

upward flow position. 

3. Lift Check Valves: Install in piping line with stem upright and plumb. 

3.04 SOLDER CONNECTIONS: 

A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths. 

B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket, using steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire 

brush, to a bright finish. Clean valve socket in same manner. 

C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube. 



03/16/2012 


HVAC PIPING

D. Open gate and globe valves to fully open position. 

E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves with composition discs. 

F. Insert tube into valve socket, ensuring that the end of the tube rests against the shoulder 

inside the valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux. 

G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder will melt upon contact. Feed 

solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating of the 

valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth 

or brush. 

3.05 BRAZED CONNECTIONS: 

A. Protect valves from temperatures which exceed the valve material temperature limitations 

as recommended by the valve manufacturer. 

B. Disassemble 3-piece ball valves prior to brazing. 

3.06 THREADED CONNECTIONS: 

A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve internal seat or 

wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve. 

B. Align threads at point of assembly. 

C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry 

seal threading is specified). 

D. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the 

pipe is being threaded. 

3.07 FLANGED CONNECTIONS: 

A. Align flange surfaces parallel. 

B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and 

gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten 

bolts gradually and uniformly using a torque wrench. 

3.08 GROOVED CONNECTIONS: 

A. Make connections to valves with grooved ends in accordance with manufacturer’s 

published instructions. 

B. Clean pipe ends from indentations, projections, burrs and roll marks from pipe to groove. 

C. Provide gasket, flanges, fittings, bolts, nuts, and lubrication applied per manufacturer’s 

instructions for intended service. 



03/16/2012 


HVAC PIPING

3.09 BUTTERFLY VALVE MOTORIZED ACTUATORS: 

A. Coordinate with the control system installer to set up all end switches, pilot valves, and 


B. Provide power for electric valve actuators in accordance with Division 26. 

C. Locate pilot positioners and valve position indicators so that they will be visible from the 

floor or roof surface, without the need of a ladder or climbing over equipment and piping. 


A. Testing: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final 

adjusting and balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop 

leaks; replace valve if leak persists. 


A. Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and 

prepare to receive finish painting or insulation. 



03/16/2012 



HVAC PIPING





03/16/2012 


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 

A. Extent of supports and anchors required by this Section is indicated on drawings and/or 

specified in other Division 23 sections. 

B. Types of supports and anchors specified in this section include the following: 

1. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports. 

2. Vertical-Piping Clamps. 

3. Hanger-Rod Attachments. 

4. Building Attachments. 

5. Saddles and Shields. 

6. Spring Hangers and Supports. 

7. Miscellaneous Materials. 

8. Roof Equipment Supports. 

9. Anchors. 

10. Equipment Supports. 

C. Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as 

part of equipment assembly in other Division 15 sections. 


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and 

anchors of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in 




1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable plumbing codes pertaining to 

product materials and installation of supports and anchors. 

2. UL and FM Compliance: Hangers, supports, and components shall be listed and 

labeled by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping systems. 

3. Duct Hangers: Comply with SMACNA Duct Manuals. 

4. MSS Standard Compliance: 

a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and 

manufacture comply with MSS SP-58. 

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation 

instructions, for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe hanger and support 


HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each 

required pipe hanger and support. 


support and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of 

assembly of components. 

C. Submit product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying 

that their products meet the specified requirements. 

D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and 

anchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in the Operating and 

Maintenance Manual, in accordance with the requirements of Division 23. 





1. Pipe Hangers and Supports: B-Line Systems Inc.; Carpenter and Patterson, Inc.; 

Fee & Mason Mfg. Co., Div. of Figgie International; Anvil Corp.; PHD 

Manufacturing, Inc.; Elcen Metal Products Company; Michigan Hanger Company; 

Unistrut Metal Framing System; Hubbard Enterprises (supports for domestic water 

piping); Specialty Products Co. (supports for domestic water piping). 

2. Saddles, Shields and Thermal Shield Inserts: Anvil Corp.; Pipe Shields, Inc.; B- 

Line; Insulated Saddle Shield Insert Product, Inc.; Michigan Hanger Company; 

Value Engineered Products, Inc. 

3. Roof Equipment Supports: Custom Curb, Inc.; Pate Co.; Thycurb, Div. of Thybar 

Corp.; Vent Products, Inc. 

4. Concrete Inserts and Anchors: Phillips Drill Company; Michigan Hanger 

Company; Unistrut Metal Framing Systems; Elcen Metal Products Company; ITW 

Ramset/Red Head; Hilti; B-Line. 

2.02 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS: 

A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and 

manufacturer complying with MSS SP-58. 

1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and 

equipment that will not have field-applied finish. 

2. Pipe attachments shall have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where 

attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. 

B. Adjustable Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1. 



3. Cast Iron Pipe, sizes 4” thru 24”, Anvil fig. 590. 



03/16/2012 



C. Adjustable Swivel Rings: MSS Type 10. 

1. Steel Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 2”, Anvil fig. 69; size 2-1/2” thru 8”, Anvil figs. 69 or 

70. 


D. Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 8. 



E. U Bolts: MSS Type 24. 


2. Copper Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 8”, Anvil fig. 137C. 

F. Straps: MSS Type 26. 


G. Pipe Stanchion Saddles: MSS Type 37. 

1. Steel Pipe, sizes 4” thru 12”, Anvil fig. 259. 

H. Yoke & Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43. 

1. Sizes 2-1/2” thru 20”, Anvil fig. 181. 

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous threaded steel, sizes as specified. 

I. Hangers: 

1. Hot Pipes: 



03/16/2012 


b. Sizes 2” through 5”: Adjustable wrought steel clevis. 

c. Sizes 6” and larger: Adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. 

2. Cold Pipes: 


b. Sizes 2” and larger: Adjustable wrought steel clevis. 

3. Multiple or Trapeze: Structural steel channel (with web vertical), with welded 

spacers and hanger rods. Provide cast iron roll and stand for hot pipe sizes six 

inches and larger. Provide hanger rods one size larger than required for largest 

pipe in trapeze. If the deflection at center of trapeze exceeds 1/360 of the 

distance between the end hangers, install an additional hanger at mid-span or 

use a larger channel. 

J. Wall Supports for Horizontal Pipe: 

1. Sizes 1/2” through 3-1/2”: Steel offset hook. 



2. Sizes 4” and larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. Provide 

adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe 200° F and higher and sizes 

six inches and larger. 

K. Supports for Vertical Pipe: Steel riser clamp. 

L. Upper Attachments: 

1. For attaching hanger rods to structural steel I-beams: 



03/16/2012 

a. Provide adjustable beam clamp, Elcen No. 95, with No. 235 rod socket or 

equal. Attach to bottom flange of beam. 

2. For attaching hanger rods to bar joists: 

a. When bottom chord is constructed of structural steel angles, provide Elcen 

No. 84H square washer or equal with nut. Place hanger rod between 

backs of the two angles and support with the washer on top of the angles. 

Spot weld washer to angles. 

3. When bottom chord is constructed of round bars, provide Elcen No. 137 bar joist 

washer or equal. 

2.03 CONCRETE INSERTS AND ANCHORS: 

A. Inserts: Case shall be of galvanized steel with square threaded concrete insert nut for 

hanger rod connection; 3/4” lateral adjustment; top lugs for reinforcing rods, and nail 

holes for attaching to forms. Michigan Hanger models 355 and 355N or equal by 

Unistrut or Elcen. This type of upper attachment is to be used for all areas having pouredin-place 

concrete construction. 

1. Size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 

B. Provide fasteners attached to concrete ceilings that are vibration and shock resistant. 

Provide hangers for piping and cuts attached to concrete construction with one of the 

following types: 

1. Concrete insert per MSS SP-58, Type 18. 

2. Powder driven fasteners, subject to approval. Each fastener shall be capable of 

holding a test load of 1000 pounds, but the actual load shall not exceed 50 

pounds. 

3. Self-drilling expansion shields. The load applied shall not exceed one-fourth the 


4. Machine bolt expansion anchor. The load applied shall not exceed one-fourth the 


C. Anchors: Carbon steel, zinc plated, and coated with a clear chromate finish. Installation 

shall be in holes drilled with carbide-tipped drill bits or by use of self-drilling anchors. 

1. Provide anchors suitable for the location of installation and designed to withstand 

all forces and movements acting on the anchor. Pipe anchors shall be 

manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-58. Provide a safety factor of four for 

the anchor installation. 



2.04 SADDLES AND THERMAL SHIELD INSERTS: 

A. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching 

adjoining insulation. 

1. Anvil Figs. 160-165. 

B. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; 180° arc, minimum 20 ga. galvanized steel, and 

minimum 12” long, to prevent crushing of insulation. 

1. Anvil Fig. 167. 

C. Thermal Shield Inserts: Provide 100-psi minimum compressive strength, waterproof, 

asbestos-free calcium silicate, encased with a sheet metal enclosure. Insert and shield 

shall cover the entire circumference of the pipe and shall be of length recommended by 

the manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation. For cold piping, calcium silicate 

shall extend beyond the sheet metal shield to allow overlap of the vapor barrier. Where 

piping 4” and larger is supported on trapeze or pipe rollers, provide double thickness 

shields. For piping 12” and larger, provide 600 psi calcium silicate structural insert. 

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: 

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A-36. 

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C-150, Type I or Type III) and clean, uniformly 

graded, natural sand (ASTM C-404, Size No. 2). Mix ratio shall be 1.0 part cement to 3.0 

parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and 

hydration. 

C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld 

steel in accordance with AWS standards. 

D. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated 

steel, consisting of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding 

spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), 

and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated 

travel. 

2.06 ROOF EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: 

A. General: Construct roof equipment supports using minimum 18-ga galvanized steel with 

fully mitered and welded corners, 3” cant, internal bulkhead reinforcing, integral base 

plates, pressure treated wood nailer, 18-ga galvanized steel counterflashing and rigid 

insulation. 

B. Configuration: Construct of sizes as indicated, and compensate for slope in roof so that 

top of support is dead level. 



03/16/2012 





A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do 




A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building 

structural work has been completed in areas where these items are to be installed. Correct 

inadequacies, including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other 

building structural attachments. Review Structural Drawings to obtain structural support 

limitations. 

B. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet 

at project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection 

and testing agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordination 

with work of this Section, and Architect/Engineer for the purpose of reviewing material 

selections and procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with the 

requirements specified. Provide Shop Drawings showing methods of installation and 

support locations from structure. 

3.03 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS: 

A. Install building attachments within concrete or on structural steel. Space attachments 

within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional 

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion 

joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is 

placed; fasten insert to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 

psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. 

B. New Construction: 

1. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of 

reinforced concrete beams wherever practicable. 

2. Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. Provide reinforcement rod in 

concrete for inserts carrying pipe larger than 4” or ducts larger than 60” wide. 

3. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, finish inserts flush with slab surface. 

4. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide rod 

with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab if construction above permits. 

C. Existing Construction: 

1. In existing concrete construction, drill into concrete slab and insert and tighten 

expansion anchor bolt. Connect anchor bolt to hanger rod. Care must be taken 

in existing concrete construction not to sever reinforcement rods or tension wires. 

3.04 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: 



03/16/2012 



A. Hangers for single pipes shall be adjustable clevis hangers, zinc-plated for steel pipes and 

copper-plated for copper pipes. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be oversized to 

accommodate pipe insulation thickness. 

B. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from 

building structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel 

runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze 

hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP- 

69. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space 

hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. 

Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from 

other piping. 

C. Install hangers and supports complete with all necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers 

and other accessories. 

D. Provide electrolysis isolators at all hangers and supports for domestic water, condenser 

water, and other water lines which are not insulated. 

E. Prevent electrolysis and abrasion in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and 

supports which are plastic coated, or with EPDM isolation strips. Duct tape or copper 

coated hangers are not acceptable. 

F. Support fire water piping independently from other piping systems. 

G. Install hangers and supports to allow for controlled movement of piping systems, to permit 

freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, 

expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. Install hangers and supports within 

1’– 0” of each horizontal elbow. 

H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and 

stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 

I. Provide vibration isolators on the first three supports upstream and downstream of 

equipment equipped with flexible connectors such as pumps, chillers, cooling towers, etc. 

J. Pipe Sloping: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe sloping, and so that 

maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31.9 Building Services Piping Code are not 

exceeded. 

K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements: 

1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps 

projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. 

2. Saddles: Install protection saddles, MSS Type 39, where supported by pipe rollers. 

Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. 

3. Shields: 



03/16/2012 

a. Install galvanized steel 180° insulation protection shields on all insulated 

piping of sizes 2” and smaller, except where required to be clamped. 

Where necessary to prevent dislocation, strap shield to pipe with wire ties 

or "Zip Strips." Insulation shall be continuous through hanger. 

b. Insulation lengths and galvanized steel saddle lengths and gauges 

(minimums) shall comply with Table 1 below. Where pipe hanger spacing 





03/16/2012 

exceeds 10 feet, a second layer (180°) steel shield shall be used for 

additional strength. 

TABLE 1 

Pipe Size 1/2” to 2” 2-1/2” to 5” 6” to 10” 12” to 18” 20” to 24” 

Insulation Length (in.) 6 9 9 12 24 

Shield Length (in.) 4 6 6 9 18 

Gauge of Steel* 24 20 16 16 16 

*Bottom saddle only; top saddle may be one gauge lighter. 

4. Thermal Inserts: Provide a 360° insert of high density water-proofed calcium 

silicate at all supports for all insulated piping larger than 2” and for all piping 

required to be clamped. Insulation inserts shall extend one inch beyond sheet 

metal shield on all chilled water lines. Provide 180° inserts at clevis and roller 

hangers. Provide 360° inserts for all trapeze and clamped supports. 

L. Except where governed by more stringent local codes, install piping hangers with the 

following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing as indicated in Table 2 below: 

Pipe Material Pipe Size 

TABLE 2 

Max. Hanger 

Spacing 

Min. Hanger Rod 

Diameter 

Steel, Schedule 40 & 80, filled with 1/2" 5'-0" 3/8" 

water 3/4" 6'-0" 3/8" 

1" 7'-0" 3/8" 

1-1/4" 8'-0" 3/8" 

1-1/2" 9'-0" 3/8" 

2" 10'-0" 3/8" 

2-1/2" 11'-0" 1/2" 

3" 12'-0" 1/2" 

4" 14'-0" 5/8" 

5" 16'-0" 5/8" 

6" 17'-0" 3/4" 

8" 19'-0" 7/8" 

10" 22'-0" 7/8" 

12" 23'-0" 7/8" 

Steel, Std. Weight, filled with water 14" 25'-0" 1" 

16" 27'-0" 1" 

18" 28'-0" 1" 

20" to 24" 30'-0" 1-1/2" 

Copper, Types K, L, M and DWV 1/2" 6'-0" 3/8" 

3/4", 1" 8'-0" 3/8" 





03/16/2012 

1-1/4" through 2" 10'-0" 3/8" 

2-1/2" through 5" 12'-0" 1/2" 

6" through 8" 14'-0" 3/4" 

Note: Maximum hanger spacings shown in Table 2 are based on maximum sag of 0.1” between 

hangers for straight pipe. Hanger spacing must be reduced to compensate for any valves and/or 

fittings installed in the pipe run. Spacing shall limit sag to 0.1” between hangers. Minimum 

hanger spacing for fire protection piping shall be per appropriate NFPA requirements. 

M. Support cast iron piping, in addition to the requirements of Table 3, as follows: 

1. Hub & Spigot – All sizes: One hanger to each joint, minimum. 

2. No-Hub – All sizes: 

a. With Clamp-All and Anaheim Series 4000 stainless steel couplings and 

MG cast iron couplings: one hanger to each joint. 

b. With all other stainless steel band-type couplings: one hanger to each 

side of joint. 

3. Support all horizontal cast iron pipe within 18 inches of each joint. 

4. Use hanger rods same size as required for steel. 

5. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each story height and at its base. Secure vertical 

hub-and-spigot pipe immediately below the hub. Support vertical no-hub pipe so 

that the weight is carried from the pipe to the support and not from the joint to the 

support. 

N. Place a hanger within one foot (0.305 m) of each horizontal elbow. 

O. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) minimum after piping 

is erected. 

P. Support vertical steel and copper piping at every story height, but at not more than 15-foot 

intervals for steel and cast iron and 10-foot intervals for copper. 

Q. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide trapeze 

hangers. All hanger members shall be sized with 5-to-1 safety factor. Verify load bearing 

capacity of structure before installation of trapeze hangers. 

R. Where practical, support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 

S. Support steam supply and condensate return pipe runs on adjustable roller hangers. 

T. Each pipe drop to equipment shall be adequately supported. All supporting lugs or guides 

shall be securely anchored to the building structure. 

U. Securely anchor and support plumbing domestic water piping in chases or walls. Use 

factory manufactured clamps and brackets connected to fixture carriers, wall studs or floor. 

Wires or straps will not be permitted. 

1. When copper supplies are connected to flush valves, support the tubing by the 

studs or by a fixture carrier, not by clamping to waste/vent piping. 



2. Prevent copper tubing from making contact with steel brackets, using fire retardant 

polyethylene inserts or other dielectric insulating material. Duct tape shall not be 

used. 

V. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the 

following: 

1. In the event a self-drilling expansion shield or machine bolt expansion shield is 

considered to have been installed improperly, the Contractor shall make an 

acceptable replacement or demonstrate the stability of the anchor by performing 

an on-site test under which the anchor will be subjected to a load equal to twice 

the actual load. 

2. Powder-driven fasteners may be used only where they will be concealed after 

construction is complete. Where an occasional fastener appears to be improperly 

installed, additional fastener(s) shall be driven nearby (not closer than 6 inches) in 

undisturbed concrete. Where it is considered that many fasteners are improperly 

installed, the Contractor shall test load any 50 successively driven fasteners. If 10 

percent or more of these fasteners fail, the Contractor shall utilize other fastening 

means as approved and at no additional cost to the Owner. 

3. Hangers for piping and ductwork shall be attached to cellular steel floor decks 

with steel plates and bolted rods conforming to the steel deck manufacturer's 

requirements. Where the individual hanger load exceeds the capacity of a single 

floor deck attachment, steel angles, beams or channels shall be provided to span 

the number of floor deck attachments required. 

4. Welding may be used for securing hangers to steel structural members. Welded 

attachments shall be designed so that the fiber stress at any point of the weld or 

attachment will not exceed the fiber stress in the hanger rod. 

3.05 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS: 

A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by 

ANSI B31.9, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. 

B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to 

structure. Comply with ANSI B31.9 and with AWS Standard D1.1. 

C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with 

expansion unit manufacturer’s written instructions, to control movement to compensators. 

D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe 

runs and at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Make 

provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and 

contraction of piping. 

3.06 SHEET METAL DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: 

A. Provide in accordance with SMACNA HVAC duct construction standards. 

B. Provide also in the following locations: 

1. 2” to 24” from flexible connections of fans. 



03/16/2012 



2. 2” to 24” from the outlets or flexible connections of VAV control units or mixing 

boxes. 

3. 12” to 36” from the main duct to the first hanger of long branch ducts. 

4. 2” to 12” from the ends of all branch ducts and linear diffuser plenums. 

5. 2” to 24” from fire damper break-away joints. 

6. At throat and heel of round or square elbows 48” or greater in width. 

3.07 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: 

A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support 

equipment above floor. 

B. All steel work shall be in conformance with the requirements of the AISC Specification for 

the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. Material shall 

conform to ASTM A-36. 

C. Bases and supports shall be constructed as detailed on approved shop drawings provided 

by the Contractor. 

D. All structural steel shall receive one coat of industrial enamel primer in the shop after all 

fabrication welding is complete. Paint all field joints with one coat of industrial enamel 

primer. After all steel is properly primed, paint with two coats of exterior grade enamel. 

Color to be as selected by the Architect. 

E. Grouting: Place grout under supports for piping and equipment. 

F. Concrete bases for mechanical equipment indoors and outdoors will be provided by the 

General Contractor only if shown on the architectural or structural drawings. Otherwise, 

all bases shall be provided by this Contractor. 

G. For inertia bases, see Section 230548. 

H. Provide housekeeping bases for all floor-mounted mechanical equipment (pumps, air 

handlers, water heaters, boilers, chillers, tanks, etc.). Bases shall be 4” thick minimum, 

and extended 6” beyond machinery bedplates. Coordinate location and size with the 

General Contractor. 

I. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper size and location of all bases and shall 

furnish all required anchor bolts and sleeves. If bases are provided by the General 

Contractor, furnish him with templates showing the bolt locations. 

J. Equipment shall be secured to the bases with anchor bolts of ample size. Bolts shall have 

bottom plates and pipe sleeves and shall be securely imbedded in the concrete. All 

machinery shall be grouted under the entire bearing surface. After grout has set, all 

wedges, shims and jack bolts shall be removed and the space filled with non-shrinking 

grout. This Contractor shall provide lead washers at all equipment anchor bolts. 

K. Construct equipment supports above floor of structural steel members or steel pipe and 

fittings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. 

L. Provide rigid anchors for ducts and pipes immediately after vibration isolation connections 

to equipment. See also Section 230548. 



03/16/2012 



3.08 PREFABRICATED ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: 

A. Equipment Bases: 

1. Equipment base shall be solid top equipment base with stepped cant to match 

roof insulation. Base shall pitch to match roof pitch and provide level unit 

installation. 

2. Base shall be constructed of reinforced 18-gauge galvanized steel with all welded 

components, full mitered corners, factory installed 1-1/2” thick rigid fiberglass 

insulation, wood nailer, and galvanized steel counterflashing. Base shall be 

shipped as one piece. 

B. Equipment Rails: 

1. Equipment rail shall be constructed of 18-gauge galvanized steel shell, base plate, 

and counterflashing with factory installed wood nailer, fully mitered end sections, 

and stepped cant to match roof insulation. Rails shall pitch to match roof pitch 

and provide level installation. 

C. All supports shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 

3.09 FLASHING AND SAFING: 

A. Flash and counterflash where mechanical equipment passes through weather- or waterproofed 

walls, floors, or roofs. 

B. Provide lead flashing around ducts and pipes passing from equipment rooms, installed 

according to manufacturer's data for sound control. 

3.10 METAL FABRICATION: 

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment 

supports. Install and align fabricated anchors at indicated locations. 

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that 

cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc 

welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding 

work, and the following: 






4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and 

contours at welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 



03/16/2012 



A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to 

achieve indicated slope of pipe. 

B. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection of anchors and supports, clean field welds 

and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for 

shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA-1 requirements for touch-up of field-painted 

surfaces. 

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 

C. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas, and apply 

galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A-780. 



03/16/2012 






03/16/2012 


VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 



A. Extent of vibration control work required by this Section is indicated on drawings 

and schedules, and/or specified in other Division 23 sections. 

1. All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted or in the 

specification shall be mounted on vibration isolators to prevent the 

transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the 

building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with 

the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflection. 

2. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with component 

manufacturer’s and building construction standards. Whenever a conflict 

occurs between the manufacturer's or construction standards, the most 

stringent shall apply. 

3. Any variance from or non-compliance with these specification 

requirements shall be corrected by the contractor in an approved manner. 

B. The work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 

1. Vibration isolation for all mechanical systems/equipment, including, but 

not limited to, the following: 

AC Units 

Air Handling Units 

Chillers 

Compressors 

Computer Room Units 

Condensers 

Condensing Units 

Cooling Towers 

2. Vibration isolation for piping and ductwork. 

3. Equipment isolation bases. 

4. Flexible piping connections. 

Fan-Powered Boxes 

Fans (all types, including life 

safety fans) 

Pumps (all types) 

Rooftop HVAC Units 

Unit Heaters 

Heat Pum 

C. Vibration control products furnished as an integral part of factory-fabricated equipment 

shall be accepted only if they fully comply with the requirements of this Section. 

D. For additional and supplemental requirements, refer to other Division 23 sections for 

equipment foundations; hangers; sealants; gaskets; requirements of electrical connections 

to equipment isolated on vibration control products; and requirements of duct connections 

to air handling equipment isolated on vibration control products. 



CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING 

AND EQUIPMENT

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of vibration 

control products, of types, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in 



1. Except as otherwise indicated, vibration control products shall be obtained from a 

single manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer. 

2. Engage manufacturer to provide technical supervision of installation of support 

isolation and associated inertia bases. 


for each type of vibration control product. Submit schedule showing size, type, deflection, 

and location for each product furnished. 

1. Include data for each type and size of unit, showing isolation efficiency, stiffness, 

natural frequency and transmissibility at lowest operating speed of equipment, 

detailing compliance with the specification. 

2. For spring units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height, solid-compression 

height, operating height, fatigue characteristics, ratio of horizontal to vertical 

stiffness, and basis of spring-rating selection for range of loading weights. 

3. Include detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing 

vibration isolators by referencing numbered descriptive drawings. 

4. Include performance certifications from manufacturers. 


dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components. 

Detail bases, and show location of equipment anchoring points coordinated with 

equipment manufacturer's shop drawings. 

1. Submit shop drawings showing structural design and details of inertia bases, steel 

beam bases and other custom-fabricated work not covered by manufacturer's 

submitted data. 



03/16/2012 

a. Furnish templates, anchor bolts and sleeves for equipment bases, 

foundations and other support systems for coordination of vibration 

isolation with other work. 

b. Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment. 

2. Submit shop drawings indicating scope of vibration isolation work and locations of 

units and flexible connections. Indicate support isolation points for piping and 

ductwork, including risers and inertia bases. 

a. Include schedule of units, showing size or manufacturer's part number, 

and weight supported and resulting deflection for each unit. 

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each type of vibration control product. 

Include this data, product data and shop drawings in the Operating and Maintenance 

Manual, in accordance with requirements of Divisions 23. 

1.04 CODE AND STANDARDS REQUIREMENTS: 



AND EQUIPMENT

A. Applicable Codes and Standards: 

1. The International Building Code (IBC) as published by the International 

Conference of Building officials. 

2. All State and Local Codes. 

3. ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook, Sound and Vibration Control. 

1.05 MANUFACTURER'S RESPONSIBILITY: 

A. Manufacturer of vibration isolation equipment shall have the following responsibilities: 

1.06 RELATED WORK: 

1. Determine vibration isolator sizes and locations. 

2. Provide vibration isolation units as scheduled or otherwise specified. 

3. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision to ensure 

proper installation and performance. 

A. Housekeeping Pads: Details and design of housekeeping pad reinforcement and 

monolithic pad attachment to the structure shall be prepared by the contractor if not 

already indicated on the drawings. 

B. Supplementary Support Steel: Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all 

equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., including roof mounted equipment, as required or 

specified. 



A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the 

following: 

1. Mason Industries, Inc. 

B. Alternate Manufacturer: All vibration isolators described in this Section shall be the 

product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industries’ products are the basis of these 

specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems 

strictly comply with these specifications and have been reviewed by the Engineer. 

Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance with Section 1.03. 

2.02 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS: 

A. The following product descriptions are listed by a letter, which is used as the identifier in 

the Equipment Vibration Isolation Schedule and elsewhere in Part 3 of this Specification. 

1. Mountings: 



03/16/2012 

a. Specification “A”: Double deflection neoprene mountings shall have a 

minimum static deflection of 0.35”. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene 



AND EQUIPMENT



03/16/2012 

covered to avoid corrosion and have friction pads both top and bottom so 

they need not be bolted to the floor. Bolt holes shall be provided for these 

areas where bolting is required. On equipment such as small vent sets 

and close coupled pumps, steel rails shall be used above the mountings 

to compensate for the overhang. Mountings shall be type ND or rails type 

DNR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

b. Specification “B”: Spring type isolators shall be free-standing and laterally 

stable without any housing and complete with ¼” neoprene-acoustical 

friction pads between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall 

have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring 

diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring 

at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid 

equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring 

diameters, deflections, compressed spring height and solid spring height. 

Mountings shall be type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

c. Specification “C”: Equipment with operating weight different from the 

installed weight such as chillers, boilers, etc. and equipment exposed to 

the wind such as cooling towers shall be mounted on spring mountings as 

described in engineering Specification B, except a housing shall be used 

that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is 

removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection, and 

cooling tower mounts shall be located between the supporting steel and 

roof or the grillage and dunnage as shown on the drawings. The 

installed and operating heights shall be the same. A minimum clearance 

of ½” shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the 

housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit 

stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Mountings used 

out-of-doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. Mountings shall be type SLR 

as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

2. Hangers: 

a. Specification “D”: Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring, located 

in a neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent shortcircuiting 

of hanger rod, and 0.3” deflection neoprene element in series. 

The spring shall be color coded for ease of identification. The neoprene 

element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through 

the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall 

be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc 

before contacting the hole and short-circuiting the spring. Springs shall 

have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated 

deflection. Submittals shall include a scale drawing of the hanger 

showing the 30° capability. Hangers shall be type 30N as manufactured 

by Mason Industries, Inc. 

b. Specification “D1”: Vibration hangers shall contain a 0.3” deflection 

neoprene element. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod 

isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Hangers shall be 

type HD as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

c. Specification “E”: Vibration hangers shall be as described in engineering 

Specification D, except they shall be precompressed to the rated deflection 

so as to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during 

installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to 

free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is 

subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of 



AND EQUIPMENT

3. Bases: 



03/16/2012 

a scale. Hangers shall be type PC30N as manufactured by Mason 

Industries, Inc. 

d. Specification “F”: Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring located in 

a neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent short-circuiting 

of the hanger rod. The cup shall contain a steel washer designed to 

properly distribute the load on the neoprene and prevent its extrusion. 

Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough 

to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc before contacting the 

hole and short-circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum 

additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Hangers 

shall be provided with an eye bolt on the spring end and provision to 

attach the housing to the flat iron duct straps. Submittals shall include a 

scale drawing of the hanger showing the 30° capability. Hangers shall be 

type W30 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

a. Specification “G”: Vibration isolator manufacturer shall furnish integral 

structural steel bases. Bases shall be rectangular in shape for all 

equipment other than centrifugal refrigeration machines and pumps, 

which may have ‘T’ or ‘L’ shaped bases. Pump bases for split case pumps 

shall include supports for suction and discharge base ells. All perimeter 

members shall be beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/10 th of the 

longest dimension of the base. Beam depth need not exceed 14” 

provided that the deflection and misalignment are kept within acceptable 

limits as determined by the manufacturer. Height saving brackets shall be 

employed in all mounting locations to provide a base clearance of one 

inch. Bases shall be type WF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

b. Specification “H”: Vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide steel 

members welded to height saving brackets to cradle machines having legs 

or bases that do not require a complete supplementary base. Members 

shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent strains in the equipment. Inverted 

saddles shall be type ICS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

c. Specification “J”: Vibration isolator manufacturer shall furnish rectangular 

structural beam or channel concrete forms for floating foundations. Bases 

for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide support for suction 

and discharge base ells. The base depth need not exceed 12” unless 

specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity. 

In general, bases shall have a minimum depth of 1/12 th of the longest 

dimension of the base, but no less than 6”. Forms shall include minimum 

concrete reinforcement consisting of half-inch bars or angles welded in 

place on 6” centers running both ways in a layer 1-1/2” above the 

bottom, or additional steel as required by the structural conditions. Forms 

shall be furnished with drilled steel members with sleeves welded below 

the holes to receive equipment anchor bolts where the anchor bolts fall in 

concrete locations. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all 

mounting locations to maintain a 1” clearance below the base. Bases 

shall be type K as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. Provide 

concrete fill as required for a complete installation. 

4. Flexible Connectors: 

a. Specification “K”: Spherical flexible connectors shall employ peroxide 

cured EPDM in the covers, liners and Kevlar® tire cord frictioning. Any 



AND EQUIPMENT



03/16/2012 

substitutions must have equal or superior physical and chemical 

characteristics. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raised face 

rubber flanged ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not 

acceptable. Sizes 2" (50mm) and larger shall have two spheres reinforced 

with a ductile iron external ring between spheres. Flanges shall be split 

ductile iron or steel with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16" (400mm) 

to 24" (600mm) may be single sphere. Sizes 3/4" (19mm) to 1½" (38mm) 

may have threaded two-piece bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and 

cable retention. Connectors shall be rated at 250 psi (1.72MPa) up to 

170 o F (77 o C) with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 215 psi 

(1.48MPa) at 250 o F (121 o C) in sizes up through 14" (350mm). 16" 

(400mm) through 24" (600mm) single sphere minimum ratings are 180 

psi (1.24MPa) at 170 o F (77 o C) and 150 psi (1.03 MPa) at 250 o F (121 o C). 

Higher rated connectors may be used to accommodate service conditions. 

All flexible connectors must be factory tested to 150% of rated pressure for 

12 minutes before shipment. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout 

shall be a minimum of 3/1. Concentric reducers to the above ratings 

may be substituted for equal ended connectors. 

b. Flexible connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of 

the connectors under pressure. Control rods need only be used in 

unanchored piping locations where the manufacturer determines the 

installation exceeds the pressure requirement without control rods. If 

control rods are used, they must have ½" (12mm) thick Neoprene washer 

bushings large enough in diameter to take the thrust at 1000 psi (.7 

kg/mm 2 ) maximum on the washer area. 

c. Submittals shall include two test reports by independent consultants 

showing minimum reductions of 20 dB in vibration accelerations and 10 

dB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies on this or 

a similar product by the same manufacturer. All flexible connectors shall 

be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves. Flexible 

connectors shall be SAFEFLEX series, type SFDEJ, SFEJ, SFDCR or SFU and 

control rods type CR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

5. Flexible Hoses: 

a. Specification “L”: Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel 

braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3” and larger shall be flanged. 

Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Lengths for each pipe size shall be 

as tabulated: 

Flanged Male Nipples 

3 x 14 10 x 26 ½ x 9 1-1/2 x 13 

4 x 15 12 x 28 ¾ x 10 2 x 14 

5 x 19 14 x 30 1 x 11 2-1/2 x 18 

6 x 20 16 x 32 1-1/4 x 12 

8 x 22 

b. Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves 

horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible. 

Hoses shall be type BSS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

6. Acoustical Floor, Ceiling, and Wall Seals: 



AND EQUIPMENT



03/16/2012 

a. Specification “M”: Where piping passes through equipment room walls, 

floors or ceilings, the vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide a split 

seal consisting of two bolted pipe halves with ¾” or thicker neoprene 

sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the 

pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the 

piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with 

the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe 

prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall project a 

minimum of 1” past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 

240°F, 10 lb./cu.ft. density fiberglass may be used in lieu of the sponge. 

Seals shall be type SWS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

7. Pipe Anchors: 

a. Specification “N”: Vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide an alldirectional 

acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of a telescopic arrangement 

of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum half inch thickness of 

heavy duty neoprene and duck or neoprene isolation material. Vertical 

restraints shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent 

vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material 

shall not exceed 500 psi, and the design shall be balanced for equal 

resistance in any direction. All-directional anchors shall be type ADA as 

manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

8. Horizontal Thrust Restraints: 

a. Specification “X”: Air handling equipment shall be protected against 

excessive displacement which might result from high air thrusts in relation 

to the equipment weight. The horizontal thrust restraint shall consist of a 

spring element in series with a neoprene pad as described in Specification 

B, with the same deflection as specified for the mountings or hangers. 

The spring element shall be contained within a steel frame and designed 

so it can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to 

allow for a maximum of ¼” movement at start and stop. The assembly 

shall be furnished with one rod and angle brackets for attachment to both 

the equipment and ductwork or the equipment and the structure. 

Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of thrust and 

symmetrically on either side of the unit. Horizontal thrust restraints shall 

be type WB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

9. Curb-Mounted Aluminum Bases: 

a. Specification “Y”: Curb-mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on 

vibration isolation bases that fit over the roof curb and under the isolated 

equipment. The extruded aluminum top member shall overlap the bottom 

member to provide water runoff independent of the seal. The aluminum 

members shall house cadmium plated springs having a 1” minimum 

deflection with 50% additional travel to solid. Spring diameters shall be 

no less than 0.8 of the spring height at rated load. Wind resistance shall 

be provided by means of resilient snubbers in the corners with a minimum 

clearance of ¼” so as not to interfere with the spring action except in high 

winds. The weather seal shall consist of continuous closed cell sponge 

materials both above and below the base and a waterproof flexible 

ductlike EPDM connection joining the outside perimeter of the aluminum 



AND EQUIPMENT





03/16/2012 

members. Foam or other contact seals are unacceptable at the spring 

cavity closure. Caulking shall be kept to a minimum. Submittals shall 

include spring deflections, spring diameters, compressed spring height 

and solid spring height as well as seal and wind resistance details. Curb 

mounted bases shall be type CMAB as manufactured by Mason Industries, 

Inc. 

A. Examine areas and conditions under which vibration control units are to be installed. Do 

not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.02 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS: 

A. General: Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by ASHRAE, for selection 

and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated. 

B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with 

manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation 

materials and units to achieve minimum static deflection and displacement requirements. 

3.03 GENERAL: 

A. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and 

load application to vibration isolation materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units do 

not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not shortcircuited 

by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices (if 

any) intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation. 

B. All vibration isolators must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written 

instructions and all certified submittal data. 

C. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, 

piping or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment. 

D. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that 

degrades the noise and vibration control system herein specified. 

E. The contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, ductwork or conduit which makes 

rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. "Building" includes, but 

is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls. 

F. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact between the building and any 

vibrating equipment, piping, ductwork or conduits. 

G. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact between the building and 

equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be 

brought to the Architect's/Engineer's attention prior to installation. Corrective work 

necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible contractor's expense. 



AND EQUIPMENT

H. Bring to the Architect's/Engineer's attention any discrepancies between the specifications 

and the field conditions or changes required due to specific equipment selection, prior to 

installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the 

responsible contractor's expense. 

I. All installations which are deemed defective in materials and/or workmanship shall be 

corrected at the responsible contractor's expense, at no additional cost to the Owner. 

J. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead support of 

equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of record for 

approval. Generally, bracing may occur from: 

1. Flanges of structural beams. 

2. Upper truss chords in bar joist construction. 

3. Cast-in-place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors. 

K. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as required. 

Independent steel rails are not permitted on this project. 

L. Install vibration isolation units between substrate and equipment as required for secure 

operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces. 

M. Air handling equipment and high pressure axial and centrifugal fans shall be protected 

against excessive displacement which results from high air thrust in relation to the 

equipment weight. 

N. For air handling equipment, install thrust restraints as indicated, and also wherever thrust 

exceeds 10% of equipment weight. 

O. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible. 

P. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim 

units as required where substrate is not level. 

Q. Install inertia base frames on isolator units so that minimum of 1” clearance below base 

will result when frame is filled with concrete and supported equipment has been installed 

and loaded for operation. 

R. Weld riser isolator units in place as required to prevent displacement from loading and 

operations. 

S. Install flexible connectors and hoses on the equipment side of shut-off valves. Install hoses 

horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible. 

3.04 VIBRATION ISOLATION: 

A. Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three pipe hangers for the main lines near the 

mechanical equipment shall be as described in Specification E. Horizontal runs in all other 

locations throughout the building shall be isolated by hangers as described in Specification 

D. Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators as described in Specification C. Heat 

exchangers shall be considered part of the piping run. All Specification E hangers or the 

first three Specification C mounts, as noted above, shall have the same static deflection as 

specified for the mountings under the connected equipment. (Note: If piping is connected 



03/16/2012 



AND EQUIPMENT

to equipment located in basements and hangs from ceiling under occupied spaces, the 

first three hangers shall have 0.75” deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 3”, 1.5” 

deflection for larger pipe sizes up to and including 6”, and 2.5” deflection for pipe sizes 

larger than 6”.) All other hangers and mounts shall have a minimum steel spring 

deflection of 0.75”.) Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead structure as 

practical. 

B. Equipment Room Seals: All piping passing through equipment room walls, floors or 

ceilings shall be protected against sound leakage by means of an acoustical wall seal as 

described in Specification M. 

C. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from Specification E hangers or supported by 

Specification C mountings, with the piping anchored or guided with Specification N 

anchors. Steel spring deflection shall be a minimum of 0.75” except in those expansion 

locations where additional deflection is required to limit load changes to plus or minus 

25% of the initial load. 

D. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated 

by a minimum 1/2” thickness of 60 durometer neoprene. The height of the guides shall 

be preset with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion or contraction. 

Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. 

Guides shall be capable of ± 1-5/8” motion, or as required to meet specific location 

requirements. Pipe guides shall be type VSG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 

E. Duct Isolation: All discharge runs for a distance of 50 feet from the connected equipment 

shall be isolated from the building structure by means of Specification F hangers or 

Specification C floor supports. Spring deflection shall be a minimum of 0.75”. 

F. Flexible Pipe Connections: All equipment that is supported by or mounted on vibration 

isolators shall be piped with flexible connections. Specification “K” or Specification “L” 

flexible connections shall be installed parallel to the equipment shaft insofar as practical 

and on the equipment side of isolation valves. 

G. Equipment Isolation: All mechanical equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolators to 

prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building 

structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so 

as to produce reasonably uniform deflection. Isolator types shall be as noted on the 

equipment schedule below. 

EQUIPMENT VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE: 

(Not all types of equipment listed below are necessarily used on this project.) 

EQUIPMENT TYPE 

Air Handling Units – Floor-Mounted 

Air Handling Units – Structure-Hung 

Condensers/Condensing Units 



03/16/2012 

ISOLATOR SPECIFICATION 

Mount Type B; 

Connector Type K* 

Hanger Type D; 

Connector Type K* 

Mount Type C; 


STATIC DEFLECTION 

(INCHES) 

0.75 



AND EQUIPMENT

Fan-Powered Boxes – Structure-Hung 

Floor-Mounted Fans 

Fan Heads and Axial or Centrifugal Fans 

(where air thrust exceeds 10% of equipment weight) 



03/16/2012 

Hanger Type D; 

Connector Type K** 

Mount Type B***; 

Base Type G 

0.75 

1.50 

Thrust Restraint Type X 1.50 

Structure-Hung Fans Hanger Type D 0.75 


(Slab on Grade) 


Above/Below Occupied Spaces 

Structure-Hung Pumps 

Rooftop HVAC Units 

Unit Heaters 

* Omit if internal isolation is provided. 

** Omit for FPB without hydronic coil. 

*** Use type C mount for outdoor, wind-loaded installations. 

3.05 EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK: 

Mount Type A; 


Base Type J; Spring Type B; 


Hanger Type D 


Mount Type Y; 


Hanger Type D1; 


A. Installer of vibration isolation work shall observe installation of other work related to 

vibration isolation work, including work connected to vibration isolation work; and, after 

completion of other related work (but before equipment start-up), shall furnish written 

report to Engineer listing any observed inadequacies which could prevent proper operation 

and performance of vibration isolation work. Report shall cover, but not necessarily be 


0.75 

1.50 

0.75 

0.75 

1. Equipment installations (performed as work of other sections) on vibration 

isolators. 

2. Piping connections, including flexible connections. 

3. Ductwork connections, including provisions for flexible connections. 

4. Passage of piping and ductwork, which is to be isolated, through walls and floors. 

B. Do not start up equipment until inadequacies have been corrected. 


A. Clean each vibration control unit, and verify that each is working freely and that there is 

no dirt or debris in immediate vicinity of unit that could possibly short- circuit unit isolation. 

3.07 DEFLECTION MEASUREMENTS: 



AND EQUIPMENT

A. Upon completion of vibration isolation work, prepare report showing measured equipment 

deflections, theoretical floor deflection and isolation efficiency for each major item of 

equipment. 








accomplished by means of approved vibration isolators installed in a manner 

recommended by the manufacturer of the isolators. 



03/16/2012 




AND EQUIPMENT





03/16/2012 


MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 

A. Extent of mechanical identification work required by this Section is indicated on the 

drawings and/or specified in other Division 23 sections. 

B. Types of identification devices specified in this section include the following: 


1. Painted Identification Materials 

2. Plastic Pipe Markers 

3. Plastic Tape 

4. Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker 

5. Plastic Duct Markers 

6. Valve Tags 

7. Valve Schedule Frames 

8. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs 

9. Plastic Equipment Markers 

10. Plasticized Tags 

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of identification 

devices of the types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in 




1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, 

colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. 


for each identification material and device required. 

B. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 

8-1/2” x 11” bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as 

shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), size of valve, and variations for 

identification (if any). Only tag valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and 

similar special uses, such as valves to isolate individual system risers and individual floor 

branches, and building system shut-off valves. In addition to mounted copies of the valve 

schedules, furnish extra copies for Operating and Maintenance Manuals as specified in 

Division 23. 

23 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING 

AND EQUIPMENT




following: 

B. Mechanical Identification: 



03/16/2012 

1. Allen Systems, Inc. 

2. Brady (W.H.) Co., Signmark Div. 

3. Brimar Industries, Inc. 

4. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. 

5. Seton Name Plate Corp. 

6. PVC Specialties 

2.02 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS: 

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for 

each application as referenced in other Division 23 sections. Where more than a single 

type is specified for an application, selection is at Installer's option; but provide single 

selection for each product category. 

2.03 PAINTED IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS: 

A. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications, with letter sizes 

generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping or to match existing 

size in existing building, but not less than 1-1/4” high letters for ductwork and not less 

than 3/4" high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions. 

B. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise 

indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade. 

C. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise 

indicated, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors or match existing building standard 


2.04 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS: 

A. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, colorcoded 

pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. 

B. Insulation: Furnish 1” thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe 

marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125°F 

(52°C) or greater. Cut length to extend 2” beyond each end of plastic pipe marker. 

C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6” (including insulation, if any), provide fullband 

pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one 

of the following methods: 


AND EQUIPMENT



03/16/2012 

1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. 


3/4” wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2”. 

D. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6” and larger (including insulation, if any), provide 

either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times the letter height 

(and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods: 

1. Steel spring or non-metallic fasteners. 


1-1/2” wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3”. 

3. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's 

standard stainless steel bands. 

E. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled, shown, or to 

match existing building lettering nomenclature system, and abbreviate only as necessary 

for each application length. 

F. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally 

with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate unit 

of plastic. 

2.05 PLASTIC DUCT MARKERS: 

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic duct markers. 

B. For hazardous exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by ANSI A13.1. 

C. Nomenclature: Include the following: 

2.06 PLASTIC TAPE: 

1. Direction of airflow. 

2. Duct service (supply, return, exhaust, etc.) 

3. Duct origin (from). 

4. Duct destination (to). 

5. Design cfm. 

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive) 

vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick. 

B. Width: Provide 1-1/2” wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including 

insulation, if any) of less than 6”, 2-1/2” wide tape for larger pipes. 

C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated. 

2.07 UNDERGROUND-TYPE PLASTIC LINE MARKERS: 

A. General: Manufacturer’s standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic 

tape, intended for direct-burial service, not less than 6” wide x 4 mils thick. Provide tape 

with printing which most accurately indicates type of service of buried pipe. 


AND EQUIPMENT

B. Provide multi-ply tape consisting of solid aluminum foil core between two layers of plastic 

tape. 

2.08 VALVE TAGS: 

A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gauge polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved 

piping system abbreviation in 1/4” high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2” high, 

and with 5/32” hole for fastener. 



03/16/2012 

1. Provide 1-1/2” diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated. 

2. Fill tag engraving with black enamel. 

OR 

Plastic Laminate Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer’s standard 3/32” thick 

engraved plastic laminate valve tags, with piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high 

letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2” high, and with 5/32” hole for fastener. 

3. Provide 1-1/2” square black tags with white lettering, except as otherwise 

indicated. 



OR 

Plastic Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer's standard solid plastic valve tags with 

printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16” 

high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8” high, and with 

5/32” hole for fastener. 

5. Provide 1-1/8” square white tags with black lettering. 



B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or 

beaded type) and solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags 

to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. 

C. Access Panel Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard 1/16” thick engraved plastic 

laminate access panel markers, with abbreviations and numbers corresponding to 

concealed valve. Include 1/8” center hole to allow attachment. 

2.09 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES: 

A. General: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for 

removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded 

aluminum, with non-glare type sheet glass. 

2.10 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS: 


AND EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, 

in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the 

sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise 

indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary 

because of substrate. 

B. Thickness: 1/8”, except as otherwise indicated. 

C. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive 

where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate. 

2.11 PLASTICIZED TAGS: 

A. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention 

tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4" x 

5-5/8”, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed 

wording including large-size primary wording (such as DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT 

OPERATE). 

2.12 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS: 

A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical 

identification work with corresponding designations shown, specified, scheduled and 

approved by the Owner/Engineer. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated 

and approved by the Owner/Engineer for proper identification and 

operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. 

B. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, 

provide identification which indicates individual system number as designated on the 

drawings or schedule as well as service. 


3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: 

A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, 

painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, 

install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to 

installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. 

3.02 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION: 

A. General: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork and duct access 

doors with duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing ductwork service 

and direction of flow, in black or white (whichever provides the most contrast with 

ductwork color). Identification in an existing building shall match the method which exists 

in the building. 

B. Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed or concealed only by a removable 

ceiling system, locate signs near points where ductwork originates or continues into 



03/16/2012 


AND EQUIPMENT



03/16/2012 

concealed enclosures (shaft, underground or similar concealment), and at 50 ft. spacing 

along exposed runs. 

C. Access Doors: Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in ductwork 

and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment), other maintenance and 

operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information. 

D. Concealed Doors: Where access doors are concealed above acoustical ceilings or similar 

concealment, plasticized tags may be installed for identification in lieu of specified signs, at 

Installer's option. 

3.03 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION: 

A. General: Install pipe markers of the following type on each system indicated to receive 

identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. Identification in an 

existing building shall match the method which exists in the building. 

1. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this 

section. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated 

pipes. 

OR 

Stenciled markers, including color-coded background band or rectangle, and 

contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend color band or rectangle 2” beyond 

ends of lettering. 

OR 

Stenciled markers, with lettering color complying with ANSI A13.1. 

OR 

Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever continuous colorcoded 

painting of piping is provided. 

B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in 

occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, 

plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations: 

1. Near each valve and control device. 

2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark 

each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. 

3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter nonaccessible 

enclosures. 

4. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of 

concealed piping. 

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 

6. Spaced intermediately at a maximum spacing of 25 ft. along each piping run, 

except with spacing reduced to 15 ft. in congested areas of piping and equipment. 

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. 


AND EQUIPMENT

3.04 UNDERGROUND PIPING IDENTIFICATION: 

A. General: During back-filling/top-soiling of each exterior underground piping system, 

install continuous underground type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 

6” to 8” below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in common trench 

and do not exceed an overall width of 16”, install single line marker. 

3.05 VALVE IDENTIFICATION: 

A. General: Provide valve tag on valves in each piping system. List each tagged valve in 

valve schedule for each piping system. 



03/16/2012 

1. Building services main shut-off valves. 

2. Each individual system main shut-off valves. 

3. Each individual system riser shut-off valves. 

4. Each individual system floor shut-off valves. 

5. Each individual system major branch shut-off valves. 

B. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in mechanical equipment rooms where 

directed by Architect/Owner/Engineer. 

C. Where more than one major mechanical equipment room is shown for the project, install 

mounted valve schedule in each major mechanical equipment room, and repeat only the 

main valves which are to be operated in conjunction with operations of more than a single 

mechanical equipment room. 

3.06 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION: 

A. General: Install minimum 2 inch x 4 inch, engraved plastic laminate equipment marker 

on each individual item of mechanical equipment. Provide signs for the following general 

categories of equipment: 

1. Main building systems control and operating valves, including safety devices and 

hazardous units such as gas outlets. 

2. Room thermostats, except gun tag labels are acceptable for room thermostats. 

3. Fuel-burning units including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills and absorption 

chillers. 

4. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers and similar motor-driven units. 

5. Heat exchangers, cooling towers, heat recovery units and similar equipment. 

6. Fans and blowers. 

7. HVAC units. 

8. Tanks and pressure vessels. 

9. Water treatment systems and similar equipment. 

B. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4" high lettering for name of unit. 

C. Text of Signs: In addition to the identified unit, inform operator of operational 

requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and 

improper operations. 



AND EQUIPMENT

A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually 

blocked by work of this division or other divisions. 

B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts. 



03/16/2012 



AND EQUIPMENT





03/16/2012 


TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 

A. This section covers testing and balancing of environmental systems described herein and 

specified under Division 23. The testing and balancing of all environmental systems shall 

be the responsibility of one Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) firm. 

1. Test, adjust and balance the following mechanical systems and the mechanical 

equipment associated with these systems: 

a. Air Side Systems and Equipment 

i. Supply/Return Air Systems 

ii. General Exhaust/Supply Fans 

iii. Air Handling Units 

iv. General Exhaust Systems 

v. Cabinet/Unit Heaters 

vi. Unit Ventilators/Furnaces/Packaged Air Conditioning Units 

b. Hydronic Systems and Equipment 

i. Heating/Chilled Water Systems 

ii. Condenser Water Systems and Equipment 

iii. Hydronic Coils 

iv. Radiators/Convectors 

v. Heat Exchangers 

vi. Hydronic Pumps 

vii. Heating Water Boilers 

c. Refrigeration Systems and Equipment 

i. Condensing Units (Air-Cooled) 

ii. Chillers 

iii. Cooling Towers 

iv. Evaporator Coils 

d. Gas-Fired Systems and Equipment 

i. General 

e. Electrical Components 

i. Electric Resistance Heating and Equipment 

ii. Manual and Magnetic Starters 

iii. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD’s) 

f. Control Systems and Equipment 

23 0593 - 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND 

BALANCING FOR HVAC



03/16/2012 

i. General 

ii. TC Compressed Air Systems and Equipment 

g. Life Safety Systems and Equipment 

1.02 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR: 

i. Smoke Control Pressurization and Exhaust Systems 

ii. Fire/Smoke Dampers and Detection Systems 

iii. Emergency Generator Systems and Equipment 

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall procure the services of an independent testing and 

balancing agency specializing in the testing, adjusting and balancing of environmental 

systems to perform the above-mentioned work. An independent contractor is defined as 

an organization that is not engaged in engineering design and is not a division of a 

mechanical contracting entity which installs mechanical systems. 

B. The actual field work shall be performed by qualified technicians who are currently 

certified by the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Bureau (TABB), the National 

Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), or the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). 

C. The Testing & Balancing Contractor shall have a minimum of three (3) years experience in 

testing and balancing mechanical systems. 

1.03 APPROVAL OF CONTRACTOR: 

A. Following are firms acceptable to perform the work: 

1. Air Right, Inc. 

2. Complete Mechanical Balancing, Inc. 

3. Controlled Air, Inc. 

4. Denver Test and Balance, Inc. 

5. Griffith Engineering Service 

6. JPG Engineering 

7. Midwest Engineering 

8. TAB Services, Inc. 

9. Western Test and Balance, Inc. 

1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS: 

A. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook; Systems Volume; Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 

B. NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental 

Systems." 

C. SMACNA: “HVAC Systems – Testing, Adjusting & Balancing.” 

1.05 PRELIMINARY SUBMITTALS: 


BALANCING FOR HVAC

A. Within ten (10) days of award of the contract, the Mechanical Contractor shall submit the 

name of the Test and Balance Contractor who will be performing the work. The submittal 

shall include a complete list of all technicians who will be performing the field work and 

include a photocopy of their current certification by either NEBB, AABC, or TABB. Only 

those technicians included in the submittal shall perform the work. The use of any 

personnel or staff to perform the work without prior approval of the Engineer, who are not 

included in the submittal, shall be grounds for rejecting the test and balance report and 

the project in whole. 

B. Meet all requirements of Section 230010 as applicable. 

C. Submit a list of all instrumentation to be used on this project, and include calibration 

dates. Submit calibration curves. If more than one instrument of a similar type is used, a 

comparison of individual readings should be made. The variation between instrument 

readings should not exceed plus or minus 5%. 

D. Prior to the start of any test and balance work of the mechanical system, the Contractor 

shall submit six (6) copies of a Preliminary Systematic Procedure. This shall include all 

preliminary information requested in Part 3 of this Section. 

1.06 FINAL REPORTS: 

A. Refer to Division 1 for supplemental requirements. 

B. The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall submit six (6) bound copies of the final testing 

and balancing report at least fifteen (15) calendar days prior to substantial completion of 

project, unless noted otherwise in Division 1. Contents of report shall be per Part 3 of this 

Section. 

C. Meet all requirements of Section 230010 as applicable. 

D. If more than two reports are made by the Contractor, the Owner reserves the right to 

charge the Contractor for subsequent reviews by their consultants. Such extra fees shall be 

deducted from payments by the Owner to the Contractor. 


A. Notify Contractor/Engineer/Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper 

completion of the test and balance work. Provide the Contractor/Architect/Engineer with a 

copy of the notification. 

B. Prepare a project schedule and coordinate with all related contractors. Schedule shall 

indicate critical path of the balancing process and shall incorporate both requirements of 

other contractors necessary to meet test and balance commitments and process flow of test 

and balance work. Coordinate with general and mechanical contractors, and insert 

critical steps into project master schedule. Mechanical, Electrical, Temperature Controls 

and Test & Balance Contractors are to coordinate efforts to start, test, and balance major 

components (i.e. chillers, boilers, etc.) at the same time, in order to avoid duplication of 

efforts. 




03/16/2012 


BALANCING FOR HVAC

2.01 BELTS, SHEAVES, IMPELLERS: 

A. Refer to specific equipment sections and Section 230010 for additional requirements. 

B. The Testing & Balancing Contractor shall coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor to 

supply correctly sized drive belts and sheaves. Impellers shall be trimmed or replaced by 

the Mechanical Contractor and shall be correctly resized and coordinated by the Testing & 

Balancing Contractor per the hydronics systems and equipment portion of this Section. 

C. The Test & Balance Contractor shall determine the fan belt and sheave replacement 

necessary for final balance condition at the specified air quantity when the VFD is 

operating in the bypass mode for final field conditions, without placing the motor over its 

nameplate amp rating. Coordinate VFD start-up with Section 15040 vendor. 


3.01 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES: 

A. Testing and balancing shall not begin until the system has been completed and is in full 

working order and the following project conditions have been determined suitable for start 

of work. 

1. Preliminary Testing & Balancing Contractor requirements shall be ascertained 

prior to the commencement of work through a review of the project plans and 

specifications. Testing and Balancing contractor to meet with Engineer prior to 

beginning work. In addition, visual observations at the site during construction 

shall be made to determine the location of required balancing devices and that 

they are installed properly in an accessible location for the need. Report in writing 

any deficiencies to the Contractor/Engineer/Architect immediately. 

2. Before any air balance work is done, check the system for duct leakage (obtain 

pressure test results), assure that filters are installed, verify that filters are changed 

if they are dirty, check for correct fan rotation, check for equipment vibration, and 

check automatic dampers for proper operation. All volume control dampers and 

outlets shall be wide open at this time. 

3. Before any hydronic, domestic water or applicable system balancing work is done, 

the systems shall be checked for plugged strainers, proper pump rotation, proper 

control valve installation and operation, air locks, proper system static pressure to 

assure a full system, and proper flow meter and check valve installation. All 

throttling devices and control valves shall be open at this time. 

4. Verify that systems do not exhibit excessive sound and/or vibration levels. Report 

in writing any deficiencies to the Contractor/Engineer/Architect immediately. 

B. Testing and balancing shall not begin until a Preliminary Systematic Procedure has been 

completed. This procedure shall be developed from manufacturers’ data, shop drawings, 

and construction documents and shall be submitted before the start of installation of the 

mechanical system. This procedure shall be coordinated with the Mechanical Contractor. 

Preparatory work includes the planning and scheduling of all TAB procedures, collecting 

necessary data, reviewing data, studying the systems to be balanced, recording the 

published data on the test report forms, and making preliminary field checks of the HVAC 

equipment and systems. 

C. Submit the following data for the Preliminary Systematic Procedure, bound in a 3-ring 

binder: 



03/16/2012 


BALANCING FOR HVAC

1. Preliminary Testing and Balancing Schedule: 



03/16/2012 

a. Prepare a project schedule. Schedule shall indicate critical path of the 

balancing process and shall incorporate both requirements of other 

contractors (including joint efforts) necessary to meet test and balance 

commitments and process flow of test and balance work. Coordinate with 

GC and insert critical steps into project master schedule. 

2. Data to be Procured: 

a. Fan and pump curves, including performance data. 

b. Manufacturer's performance data for all equipment to be balanced: Data 

shall include air and hydronic pressure differences, the direction of air 

and water flow, temperature differentials, capacities, operating 

temperatures and pressures, and limit of safety temperatures and 

pressures. 

c. Fan and pump motor nameplate data. 

d. Motor starters, including sizes, locations and thermal overload protection 

ratings. 

e. Drives: Sheave data, pitch diameters, belt sizes and quantities, limits of 

adjustment, types of belt guards, etc. 

f. Effective areas (K factors) for all air terminal devices for the velocitymeasuring 

instrument recommended. Also obtain air pattern adjustment 

and sound data. 

g. Manufacturer's data and test procedures for all air handling devices, such 

as variable air volume boxes, constant volume regulators, static pressure 

dampers, etc. 

h. Manufacturer's data for air pressure drop across louvers, filter banks, 

sound traps, remote coils and other devices in the air distribution system. 

Note whether louvers are provided with screening and whether filter 

pressure drop data is for clean, partially dirty, or dirty filters. 

i. Temperature Control Diagrams: Obtain necessary data required for TAB 

work. 

j. Assemble manufacturer's catalog data for all HVAC equipment, including 

pumps, air moving equipment and air terminal devices. This requirement 

is in addition to shop drawings and submittal data where possible. Only 

include performance data which pertains to the T&B work. Construction 

technical data is not required. 

k. All data shall be compared to the information on the construction 

documents. Discrepancies shall be identified for review by the Engineer. 

All data shall be recorded in the design columns of NEBB report forms. 

3. System Schematic Drawings: 

a. Submit reduced drawings of each HVAC duct system. The test and 

balance contractor can obtain drawing files from MDP& Associates for 

development of these drawings. 

b. Submit similar drawings for extensive piping systems. 

c. For large buildings or where there is more than one system, submit a 

separate layout for each floor or for each system. Identify test locations, 

outlets, etc. on these drawings. 

d. All test locations, which include dampers, regulating devices, terminal 

units, supply outlets, return and exhaust inlets, etc., shall be numbered. 


BALANCING FOR HVAC



03/16/2012 

e. Indicate the sizes, velocities and flow (CFM or gpm) for main and branch 

circuits and ducts. Include outside air intakes, exhaust air and relief air 

louvers. 

f. For rapid identification and for reporting purposes, all outlets shall be 

numbered. The same applies to fan-coil and/or heating/cooling units in 

hydronic systems. 

g. Clearly indicate thermostat locations and other special conditions needed 

by the TAB team in the field. 

4. Report Forms: 

a. Report forms shall be standard NEBB forms. Generate custom forms that 

contain the information required by this Section when a standard NEBB 

form does not exist for certain types of equipment. All design column 

spaces shall be fully filled out for this submittal. When additional 

information is required by this Section, it shall be written in on the NEBB 

form. 

b. If terminal airflows are to be determined by velocity readings, calculate 

and submit the terminal velocities using the manufacturer's K factors. 

c. Submit locations where pitot traverses of duct mains and branches are to 

be made. Determine the number of readings, calculate velocities and set 

up the duct pitot traverse test reports. 

3.02 GENERAL SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES: 

A. Balance all air and water flows at terminals to within +10% to –5% of design flow 

quantities. Notify Contractor/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper 

completion of the test and balance work. Provide the Contractor/Architect/Engineer with a 

copy of the notification. 

B. Pressure relationships indicated on drawings shall take priority over air quantities. 

C. Mark equipment settings with paint, including damper control positions, balancing cocks, 

circuit setters, valve indicators, fan speed control settings and similar controls and devices, 

to show final settings at completion of test-adjust-balance work. 

D. Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings which have been cut or drilled for test 

purposes, in a manner recommend by the original installer. 

E. Measure, adjust and report equipment running motor amps and power factor, KW, rated 

motor amperage, listed motor power factor, voltage, and all other nameplate data. 

Perform these measurements for all equipment operational modes. 

F. Check and adjust equipment belt tensioning. 

G. Check keyway and setscrew tightness. Report any loose screws and notify Mechanical 

Contractor prior to equipment balancing. 

H. Record and include in report all equipment nameplate data. 

I. Verify that all equipment safety and operating controls are in place, tested, adjusted and 

set prior to balancing. 


BALANCING FOR HVAC

J. Verify that manufacturer start-up has occurred per specification prior to balancing. 

3.03 AIR SIDE SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES: 

A. In addition to the procedures identified under each specific heading below, provide 

general data required by 3.02 above. 

B. Filters shall be restricted to increase pressure drop to 50% of span between initial pressure 

drop and final recommended pressure drop for setting final airflows for fans. Check fan 

motor amps with clean filters and simulated loaded filters, and report for each piece of 

equipment. Equipment shall be supplied with clean filters upon completion of balancing. 

Balance and report air quantities. 

C. Supply/Return Air Systems: 

1. Balance and report supply and return diffuser/grille quantities. Air diffusion 

patterns shall be set as noted on drawings and to minimize objectionable drafts 

and noise. 

2. Provide full pitot traverses in duct mains downstream of supply fans, upstream of 

return fans, and in each zone duct downstream of a multizone unit. For VAV 

systems, perform these at the system diversity condition (if any). Balance and 

report air quantities. 

3. Provide full pitot traverses at each air terminal or duct coil. For VAV systems, 

perform these at zone maximum air condition. Balance and report air quantities. 

4. Report design air device inlet and outlet sizes, actual inlet and outlet sizes, and 

design and actual velocities through the orifice for each terminal in the system. 

5. Balance and report the above measurements in all system operational modes: 



03/16/2012 

a. Minimum outside air and 100% outside air economizer modes. 

b. VAV maximum zone air condition and system diversity condition. 

c. Unoccupied mode. 

d. Both speeds of two-speed fan system. 

e. VFD bypass mode and full system demand. 

D. General Exhaust/Supply Fans: 

1. Adjust CFM to system requirements. For belt drive, include sheave and belt 

exchange to deliver airflow within limits of installed motor horsepower and 

mechanical stress limits of the fan. Determine the limiting fan tip speed before 

increasing RPM. Final fan speed setting shall allow for filter loading (as 

applicable) and shall establish proper duct pressures for operation of zone CFM 

regulators. For direct drive fans with speed taps, set fan speed on tap which most 

closely approaches design CFM, and then adjust the speed control. After 

adjustment, check fan’s ability to restart after powering down. Increase setting if 

required for proper starting. 

2. Measure and report static pressures upstream and downstream of all fans. 

3. Measure and report fan RPM. 

4. Report design fan inlet and outlet sizes, actual inlet and outlet sizes, and design 

and actual velocities through the orifice. 

E. Air Handling Units: 


BALANCING FOR HVAC

1. On outdoor units, verify that positively or negatively pressurized curbs are free of 

leaks. 

2. For units with integral outside air intake and relief dampers, measure, adjust, set 

and report outside air, return air and relief air quantities. Perform this as specified 

under supply air systems portions of this Section. 

3. Balance and report supply and return fan CFM’s, as well as upstream and 

downstream static pressures for each. 

4. Measure and report static pressure upstream and downstream of all AHU 

components such as coils, filters (clean and simulated dirty), dampers, etc. 

5. After system and fan balance is complete, perform pitot traverses on all coils in 

100% heating and cooling modes. 

6. Units with economizers shall have all measurements performed and reported at 

minimum outside air, a 50/50% mixed air condition, and 100% outside air. 

7. Units with operational modes for smoke evacuation and/or pressurization shall 

have all measurements performed and reported for all modes. 

8. Balance variable air volume AHU fans for system design diversity. Supply and 

return fan static pressures shall be optimized for VAV system terminal device 

pressure requirements. Report fan, motor and VFD information as previously 

indicated. Verify that an overload condition does not exist when all system VAV 

boxes are 100% open. 

9. Balance all air handling unit coils, and report per hydronic, gas-fired, steam or 

refrigeration equipment portions of this Section. 

10. Report design fan inlet and outlet sizes, actual inlet and outlet sizes, and design 

and actual velocities through the orifice. 

11. Balance and report all temperatures of air side and hydronic systems in normal 

operating modes. 

12. Measure, adjust, set, balance and report outside air, return air and exhaust/relief 

air quantities for all air handling systems. 



03/16/2012 

a. Air quantities shall be determined by pitot traverse/direct airflow 

measuring procedures wherever possible. 

b. Where duct/inlet conditions do not allow for accurate direct measurement 

of outside air, the following method shall be used: 

Outside Air CFM = Supply Fan Total CFM - Return Fan Total CFM 

c. In addition to the direct measuring of airflow quantities, measure and 

record outside air, return air and mixed air temperatures; determine 

thermal/mass energy balance; and provide calculations to verify 

measured airflow quantities. Adjusting and setting the outside air quantity 

as a percentage of damper position will not be acceptable. 

F. General Exhaust Systems: 

1. Balance and report exhaust grille quantities. Report objectionable noise. 

2. Provide full pitot traverses at each individual exhaust riser and at each exhaust fan. 

Balance and report. 

3. Report design air device inlet and outlet sizes, actual inlet and outlet sizes, and 

design and actual velocities through the orifice for each terminal in the system. 

G. Cabinet/Unit Heaters: 

1. Balance and report entering and leaving air temperatures. Report airflow. 

2. Balance all coils per hydronic, gas-fired or steam equipment portions of this 

Section. 


BALANCING FOR HVAC

H. Unit Ventilators/Furnaces/Packaged Air Conditioning Units: 

1. Report static pressure across each unit component. 

2. Balance and report supply air, return air and outside air quantities. 

3. Report mixed air temperature, and balance coils per hydronic, steam, electric 

resistance, gas-fired or refrigeration portions of this Section. 

3.04 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT: 

A. Heating/Chilled Water Systems: 

1. Hydronic Systems With Meters: The system shall be balanced proportionally using 

the flow meters. On completion of the balance, the following information shall be 

recorded in the report: Flow meter size and brand, required flow rate and 

pressure drop, valve settings on meters with a readable scale, and flow rate in 

both full coil flow and full bypass modes. Contractor shall verify that the meters 

are installed per the manufacturer's recommendations and shall notify the 

Mechanical Contractor of any deficiencies before utilizing meter. 

2. Hydronic Systems Without Meters (thermal or terminal rated pressure drop 

balance): The system shall be balanced proportionally to the terminal ratings. 

On completion of the balance, the following information shall be recorded in the 

report: Design entering and leaving water temperatures/pressures, and final 

balanced entering and leaving water temperatures/pressures. 

3. For 3-way valve terminals/heat exchangers, set bypass flow to equal coil flow. 

4. For primary/secondary systems, set crossover/bridle to have constant flow at all 

conditions. 

5. Sample chilled and heating water and report on freeze and burst temperatures of 

the glycol water solution. Report gylcol percentage. 

6. Perform similar operations for hydronic heat reclaim systems. 

B. Condenser Water Systems and Equipment: 

1. Measure and record system static pressure with pumps off. 

2. Where 3-way bypass is used to control condenser water temperature, set the 

control valve pressure value to equal tower pressure drop in full bypass mode. 

3. Measure, set and record system gpm at all flow measurement stations. 

C. Hydronic Coils: 

1. Balance, measure and report inlet and outlet air temperatures for cooling and/or 

heating design air quantities. 

2. Balance, measure and report coil water flow and inlet and outlet water pressures 


3. Evaporative cooling coils: Measure and report inlet and outlet wet bulb and dry 

bulb temperatures. Measure and report inlet and outlet pressures. 

4. Calculate and report face velocities across chilled water and evaporative cooling 

coils. 

D. Radiators and Convectors: 

1. Balance, measure and report gpm, inlet temperature and outlet 

temperature/pressure at full heating. 



03/16/2012 


BALANCING FOR HVAC

E. Heat Exchangers: 

1. Balance, measure and report water flow for full heating. 

2. Report inlet and outlet water pressures and temperatures for full heating. 

3. For steam-to-water heat exchangers, see steam equipment portion of this Section 

for additional requirements. 

F. Hydronic Pumps: 

1. Adjust and balance pumps to provide design system flow rate and design flow to 

most remote system location. Trim or replace impellers as necessary to achieve 

this. Do not induce false head to achieve balance results without the prior 

approval of the Engineer. See Part 2 "Products" of this Section. 



03/16/2012 

a. Prior to trimming of impellers, notify the Architect, Contractor, or Engineer 

in writing of performance of pumps with and without false head induced. 

2. Report impeller size, flow rate, inlet and outlet water pressures, and pump shut-off 

head. Provide pump curve and operating point in final report. Include 

compensations for temperature and glycol percentage. 

G. Heating Water Boilers: 

1. Verify that the boiler has been properly cleaned and flushed and that the burner is 

operating properly prior to balancing. 

2. Check and report on proper operation of boiler feed pumps. 

3. Confirm that automatic and manual air vents work properly. Vent system as 

necessary. 

4. Balance, measure and report boiler water flow rate and inlet and outlet 

temperatures and pressures. 

5. Confirm that temperature and pressure safety relief valves are located properly 

and in working order. 

6. Verify proper operation of emergency power OFF switches. 

3.05 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT: 

A. Condensing Units (Air-Cooled): 

1. Measure and report ambient temperature at installed location (e.g. roof), 

refrigerant suction and discharge pressures, oil pressure, compressor and fan 

KW’s, and compressor and fan amps. 

2. Condensing units integral to the air moving equipment shall be measured at 

minimum outside air. 

3. Perform all measurements at all stages of cooling. 

B. Chillers: 

1. Measure, balance and report inlet and outlet chilled water temperatures and 

pressures, ambient temperature, water flow rate, oil pressure, refrigerant suction 

and discharge pressures, compressor and fan KW, and compressor and fan 

amps. 

2. Verify proper operation of emergency power OFF switches and refrigerant sensors. 

3. Perform all measurements at all stages of cooling. 


BALANCING FOR HVAC

4. Coordinate balance process with equipment manufacturer start-up representative. 

C. Cooling Towers: 

1. Measure and report tower entering and leaving air wet bulb temperatures. 

Compare entering wet bulb temperature against ambient wet bulb temperature to 

verify recirculation is not taking place. Report. 

2. Measure and report entering and leaving water temperatures. Report ambient wet 

bulb temperature that corresponds with these measurements. 

3. Measure, balance and report water flow rate. 

D. Evaporator Coils: 

1. Measure and report temperatures upstream and downstream of evaporator coils 

at all stages of cooling at all design air quantities. Calculate and report coil face 

velocities. 

3.06 GAS-FIRED SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT: 

A. General. 

1. Record gas pressures downstream of each pressure-reducing valve. Verify that 

pressures match those on construction documents, and report. 

2. Measure and report flue temperature at all stages of heating. 

3. Measure and report temperatures upstream and downstream of gas-fired heat 

exchangers at all stages of heating at all design air quantities. 

4. Observe and report operation of all radiant gas-fired heaters, at all stages of 

heating. 

5. Record fan data. 

3.07 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ASSOCIATED WITH MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: 

A. Electric Resistance Heating Systems and Equipment: 

1. Measure full load amperage at full heating and design CFM, and report. 

2. Electric heaters in an air stream shall have entering and leaving air temperatures 

measured and reported for all stages of heating. 

B. Manual and Magnetic Starters: 

1. Check all new and existing thermal overloads. Identify improperly protected 

equipment in report. Furnish and exchange thermals as required for proper 

motor protection. 

2. Motor Control Center Magnetic Starters: Check for correct sizing. Notify Electrical 

Contractor of discrepancies. 

3. Two-speed Starters: In addition to the above, set time delay between change of 

speeds for proper operation. 



03/16/2012 

a. Verify that windings of motor and starter are compatible prior to starting 

any equipment. 

C. Variable Frequency Drives: 


BALANCING FOR HVAC

1. Coordinate balance process with equipment manufacturer start-up representative. 

2. Record nameplate data. 

3. Record motor overload setting. 

4. Record full load amps. 

3.08 CONTROL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT: 

A. General. 

1. Operate all temperature control systems with the Temperature Control 

Contractor's representative present for proper sequence of operation. Be 

responsible for calibration of flow measurement devices used as input to the 

temperature control system. All air system flow measurement stations including 

VAV terminals shall be calibrated against a pitot tube traverse or air diffuser 

capture hood. Balancing Contractor shall assure accuracy of all flow 

measurement devices or shall report their failure to be accurate. 

2. Work with the Controls Contractor to set minimum outside air damper positions. 

3. Work with the Controls Contractor to optimize VAV duct static pressure, VFD pump 

hydronic system pressure differential, and building pressure. 

3.09 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT: 

A. Smoke Control Pressurization and Exhaust Systems: 

1. Balance and report measurements required by Section 3.03 in this operational 

mode. 

2. Perform smoke pressurization/exhaust tests for all zones. Doors shall be 

positioned to simulate normal conditions. 

3. Coordinate with the Fire Department/Authority Having Jurisdiction, Owner and 

Engineer for witnessing of smoke test. 

4. Coordinate with the Fire Department/Authority Having Jurisdiction for any 

additional testing requirements. Complete and submit all documentation required 

by Fire Department/Authority Having Jurisdiction for final acceptance. 

B. Fire/Smoke Dampers and Detection Systems: 

1. Verify that each fire/smoke damper closes when the associated duct or space 

detector is tripped. Verify that air handlers shut down and outside air dampers 

close as dictated by the control sequence. 

2. Verify that air supply units shut down when smoke is detected by the associated 

duct detector. Verify that outside air dampers and system fire/smoke dampers 

close as dictated by the control sequence. 

3. Report any detectors or dampers that are malfunctioning. Report any 

discrepancies from the control sequence. 

C. Emergency Generator Systems and Equipment: 

1. For remote radiators, measure and report steady state radiator system flow rate, 

supply water temperature and return water temperature. 

2. Measure and report generator room steady state temperature with generator and 

room ventilation system running. Report outside air temperature at time of test. 

3. Record pressure relationship of generator room to adjacent spaces and to outside. 



03/16/2012 


BALANCING FOR HVAC

3.10 REPORT OF WORK: 

4. Verify correct sequence of operation of all intake and discharge dampers, 

supply/exhaust fans, etc. 

A. The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall submit six (6) bound copies of the final testing 

and balancing report at least fifteen (15) calendar days prior to the date for which the 

Mechanical Contractor requests final inspection. 

B. A complete reduced set of mechanical contract drawings (showing each system) shall be 

included in the report, with all equipment, flow measuring devices, terminals (inlets, 

outlets, coils, fan-coil units, schedules, etc.) clearly marked and all equipment designated. 

The Test and Balance Contractor can obtain drawing files from MDP& Associates for 

development of these drawings. These drawings shall be developed from the system 

schematic drawings submitted in the Preliminary Systematic Procedures. 

C. Data shall be reported per Part 3 of this Section on standard NEBB forms. Generate 

custom forms that contain the information required by this Section when a standard NEBB 

form does not exist for certain types of equipment. All NEBB forms shall be fully filled out 

for this report. When additional information is required by this Section, it shall be 

provided. Report forms with design columns filled out shall be used from the Preliminary 

Systematic Procedure report submitted previously. 

D. The report shall include a list of all equipment used in the testing and balancing work. 

This list shall closely resemble the list submitted with the Preliminary Systematic Procedures 

report, with any discrepancies accounted for. 

E. Report systems for excessive sound and vibration per the sound and vibration inspection 

and testing portions of this specification. 

F. This project will not be considered substantially complete until a satisfactory report is 

received. The Testing & Balancing Contractor shall respond to and correct all deficiencies 

within seven (7) days of receiving the Engineer's written review of the balancing report. 

Failure to comply will result in holding retainage of the final payment until all items have 

been corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 

G. The report shall be signed by the supervising Registered Professional Engineer and affixed 

with his registration stamp, signed and dated in accordance with state law. 

3.11 GUARANTEE OF WORK: 

A. The Testing & Balancing Contractor shall guarantee the accuracy of the testing and 

balancing for a period of 90 days from the date of final acceptance of the test and 

balance report. During this period, the Testing & Balancing Contractor shall make 

personnel available at no cost to the Owner to correct deficiencies that may become 

apparent in the system balance. 



03/16/2012 



BALANCING FOR HVAC





03/16/2012 


MECHANICAL INSULATION 

A. The work covered by this Specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, 

materials, accessories, and performance of all operations necessary for the installation of 

all insulation on all hot and cold surfaces of plumbing, piping, space heating and air 

conditioning systems in strict accordance with the specifications and applicable drawings. 

B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following: 

1. Piping System Insulation: 


b. Cellular Glass. 

c. Calcium Silicate. 

d. Thermal Ceramic. 

2. Ductwork System Insulation: 


b. Calcium Silicate 

3. Equipment Insulation: 


b. Calcium Silicate. 

c. 25/50 Rated Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric. 

C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for requirements related to protection saddles, 

protection shields, thermal hanger shields, mechanical identification, and duct linings, 

which are not part of the work of this section. 


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical 

insulation products and systems, of the types and sizes required, whose products have 

been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. 

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on 

projects with mechanical insulation. All insulation shall be installed per manufacturer’s 

recommendations by skilled workmen regularly engaged in this type of work. 

C. Furnish insulation systems to the project site bearing the manufacturer’s label with product 


23 0713 - 1 MECHANICAL INSULATION

1.03 FIRE HAZARD RATING: 

A. All insulation products (including insulation, jacket, and adhesive used to adhere the jacket 

to the insulation) shall have composite Fire and Smoke Hazard ratings, as tested under 

procedures defined by ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723, not exceeding: 

Flame Spread 25 

Smoke Developed 50 

B. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements and cloth for fittings shall have the same 

component ratings as listed above. Paper laminate jackets shall be permanently fire and 

smoke resistant. Chemicals used for treating paper in jacket laminates shall not be water 

soluble and shall be unaffected by water and humidity. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions and 

maintenance requirements for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule 

showing manufacturer's product number, k-value, thickness, density, and furnished 

accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. Submit detailed product 

information and installation information for all jacketing systems specified in this section. 


A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with 

manufacturer's stamp or label affixed, showing fire hazard indexes of products. 


A. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, or mechanical damage before, during, and 

after installation. Any such insulation or covering damaged prior to final acceptance of 

the work shall be satisfactorily replaced. 



A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the 


1. Mechanical Insulation: Johns Manville; Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.; 

CertainTeed Corp.; Knauf Fiberglass; Manson; Armstrong World Industries Inc.; 

Pittsburgh Corning Corp.; PABCO, Inc.; Rubatex Corp. 

2. Jacketing & Covering Products: Childers; Ceel-Co; Zeston; Alpha Associates, Inc. 

2.02 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS: 

A. Specification “A”, Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C-547, Class I or Class II unless 

otherwise indicated. “k” factor shall be maximum of 0.24 at 75° F mean temperature. 



03/16/2012 


Insulation shall have jacket with tensile strength of 35 lbs/in and factory applied vapor 

barrier jacket with permeability of 0.02 perm with adhesive self-sealing lap joint. 

B. Specification “B”, Cellular Glass Piping Insulation: ASTM C-552, Type II, Class 2. “k” 

factor shall be maximum of 0.29 at 75° F mean temperature. 

C. Specification “C”, Calcium Silicate Piping Insulation: ASTM C-533, Type I. “k” factor shall 

be maximum of 0.45 at 500° F mean temperature, compression strength of 200 psi for 

5% compression, transverse strength of 200 psi for 5% compression, and minimum 

flexural strength of 60 psi. 

D. Specification “D”, Thermal Ceramic Insulation: “k” factor shall be a maximum of 1.5 at 

1500° F mean temperature, 2000° F temperature limit. 

E. Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C-921, Type I for piping with temperatures below 

ambient, Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all 

piping at Installers option. 

1. Fitting Covers: UV-resistant PVC, premolded, with maximum flame spread rating 

of 25 and maximum smoke developed rating of 50. Use PVC tape for cold 

systems, serrated tacks or PVC tape for hot systems. 

2. Aluminum Jacketing: Manufactured from T3003 (or T5005) H14 to H19 

aluminum alloy with 3/16” corrugations, and having a factory-attached 1 mil thick 

polyethylene moisture barrier continuously laminated across the full width of the 

jacketing. Jacketing shall be .016” thick minimum. Provide matching factoryfabricated 

covers for 90° and 45° elbows, tee fittings, flange fittings, valve bodies, 

blind ends, reducers and other fittings as necessary to make the covering system 

complete, waterproof and weatherproof. 

3. Cloth Jacketing Material: Not less than 8 oz. per square yard, with adhesives, 

cement and sealer as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the intended 

application. PVC premolded fitting covers shall not be provided. 

F. Piping Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, cements and similar 

accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the applications indicated. 

G. Piping Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, sealers, protective finishes and similar 

compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the applications indicated, 

and additional finishes as specified. 

2.03 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS: 

A. Specification “A”, Rigid Fiberglass Insulation Board, 2” thick: ASTM C-612, Class 1, 450°F 

temperature limit, density of 3 lbs. per cu. ft. "k" value shall be maximum of 0.23 at 75°F 

mean temperature, facing of 0.7 mil foil reinforced with glass mesh and laminated to 40 

lb kraft, with factory applied vapor barrier facing. 

B. Specification “B”, Round Surface Semi-Rigid Fiberglass Insulation, 1-1/2” thick: ATSM C- 

612, Class 1, 450°F temperature limit, 3 lbs. per cu. ft. density, "k" value of 0.25 

maximum at 75° F mean temperature and foil-skrim-kraft facing. Orientation of fibers 

shall be perpendicular to facing to facilitate application on round surfaces. 

C. Specification “C”, Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation, 1-1/2” thick, factory applied: 

ASTM C-553, Type I, 1.0 lb. per cu. ft. density. “k” value shall be maximum of 0.25 at 



03/16/2012 


75° F mean temperature, 250° F temperature limit, vapor transmission rating not to 

exceed 0.02 perm, facing of 0.7 mil foil reinforced with glass mesh and laminated to 40 

lb kraft, with factory applied vapor barrier facing. 

D. Specification “D”, 3” thick calcium silicate: ASTM C-534, Type I. 

E. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner 

angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the 


F. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, 

protective finishes and similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for 

the applications indicated. 

2.04 EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS: 

A. Specification “A”, Rigid Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C-612, Class 2. “k” factor 

shall be a maximum of 0.28 at 200° F mean temperature, 6 lbs. per cu. ft. density, 450° F 

temperature limit. 

B. Specification “B”, Rigid Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C-612, Class 2. “k” factor 

shall be a maximum of 0.28 at 200° F mean temperature, 6 lbs.per cu. ft. density, 450° F 

temperature limit. The insulation shall have factory applied FSK vapor barrier facing 

laminate of aluminum foil and kraft paper with reinforced fiberglass scrim. 

C. Specification “C”, Flexible Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C-553, Type I, 1.5 lb. 

per cu. ft. density. “k” factor shall be a maximum of 0.45 at 250° F mean temperature, 

450° F temperature limit. 

D. Specification “D”, Calcium Silicate Equipment Insulation: ASTM C-533, Type I, block-type. 

“k” factor shall be a maximum of 0.87 at 1000° F mean temperature, compression 

strength of 200 psi for 5% compression, and minimum transverse strength 60 psi. 

E. Specification “E”, Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation: ASTM C-534, Type I. “k” 

value shall be a maximum of 0.27 at 75° F mean temperature, 220° F temperature limit, 

and water vapor permeability of 0.10 perm or less. 

F. Jacketing Material for Equipment Insulation: Provide presized glass cloth jacketing 

material, not less than 7.8 ounces per square yard, or metal jacket at Installer's option, 

except as otherwise indicated. 

G. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cements, sealers, mastics and 

protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the applications 

indicated. 

H. Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape, corner 

angles, anchors and stud pins as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the 






03/16/2012 


A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do 



B. Workmanship shall be first class and of the highest quality. Poor installation or 

unacceptable appearance, as determined by the Engineer, shall be due cause to reject the 

entire project in whole, and retainage will be withheld until corrective action is completed 

to the Engineer's satisfaction. 

3.02 PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION: 

A. All portions of the following piping systems shall be insulated with Specification “A” 

Fiberglass Piping Insulation. See Table 1 for minimum insulation thicknesses required. 

1. Piping systems to be insulated: 



03/16/2012 

a. HVAC chilled water supply and return. 

b. Space heating supply and return. 

c. Steam and condensate lines. 

d. Cooling tower/condenser water supply to heat exchangers (where below 

60°F). 

e. Cooling tower water piping exposed to weather. 

f. Cooling tower make-up water piping exposed to weather. 

g. Refrigerant suction and hot gas lines. 

h. Fire protection piping exposed to weather. 

2. Piping Systems on which insulation is not required: 

Piping System Type 

HVAC chilled water supply and 

return. 

a. Flexible connectors, air chambers, strainer and check valve bodies, drain 

lines from water coolers, condensate lines, balancing cocks and flow 

regulators located in conditioned spaces maintained above 50°F (chilled 

water systems not included). 

b. Fire protection piping within conditioned spaces. 

c. Heating water piping within radiation enclosures. 

d. Chilled water piping within equipment such as air handling units and fancoil 

units, provided piping is located over drain pan and/or sloped to 

drain location over drain pan. (Rooftop units and other units exposed to 

weather are not included.) 

e. Indoor condenser/cooling tower water piping (where above 60°F and not 

associated with a heat exchanger). 

Table 1 

Piping Insulation Schedule 

Minimum Insulation Thickness (in.) for Pipe Sizes 

up to 1" 1-1/4"- 2" 2-1/2"- 4” 5"- 6" 8" & up 

1 1 1.5 2 2 


Space heating supply and return. 1 1 1.5 2 2.5 

Steam and condensate lines. 2 3 3 4 4 

Cooling tower/condenser water 

supply to heat exchangers 

(where below 60°F). 



03/16/2012 

1 1 1 1 1 

Cooling tower water piping 

exposed to weather. 

2 2 2 2 2 

Cooling tower make-up water 

piping exposed to weather. 

2 2 2 2 2 

Refrigerant suction and hot gas 

lines. 

1 1 1 1 1 

Fire protection piping exposed to 

weather. 

2 2 2 2 2 

Note: For any piping not noted above to be exposed to outdoor ambient 

temperatures, increase insulation thickness by 0.5 inches where installed in such 

exposed locations. 

B. All portions of Exhaust Piping for emergency generators and fire pumps, including fittings 

and silencers, shall be insulated as follows: 

1. For temperatures up to 1200 deg. F, provide 4” thick calcium silicate insulation, 

Specification “C”. 

2. For temperatures above 1200 deg. F, provide 4” thick thermal ceramic insulation, 

Specification “D”. 

3.03 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION: 

A. Ductwork on which insulation is not required: 

1. Fibrous glass ductwork. 

2. Lined ductwork. 

3. Exhaust air ductwork, except as specifically noted on drawings. 

B. Insulate each ductwork system specified in Table 2 with the type and thickness of insulation shown; omit 

insulation where ductwork is specified to be lined. 

Table 2 

Ductwork Insulation Schedule 

System Specification Vapor Seal Required 

HVAC Supply – concealed C Yes 

HVAC Return – concealed C No 


HVAC Supply – exposed to 

view 

HVAC Return – exposed to 

view 



03/16/2012 

N/A N/A 

N/A N/A 

Outside air intakes A Yes 

Supply and Return ducts 

exposed to weather 

Kitchen hood and range 

exhaust ducts. 

3.04 EQUIPMENT INSULATION: 

A Yes 

D No 

A. Insulate equipment specified in Table 3 with the type and thickness of insulation shown: 

Table 3 

Equipment Insulation Schedule 

Item Specification Thickness 

Chillers, pumps, tanks, 

and all cold 

equipment not factory 

insulated. 

Cold water storage 

tanks 

Vapor Seal 

Required 

B 2" Yes 

B 2" Yes 

Air separators B 2" 

Boilers not factory 

insulated 

Hot water storage 

tanks 

Yes (only on chilled 

water) 

A 2" No 

A 2" No 

Heat exchangers A 3" No 

Condensate receivers A 2" No 

Condensate pumps A 2" No 


Flash tanks A 2" No 

Single wall breeching 

and stacks 

3.05 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION: 



03/16/2012 

D 4" No 




B. Install insulation on piping systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, testing, and 

acceptance of tests. 

C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of 

piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use 

cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. 

D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to 

ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. 

E. Where factory premolded, one-piece, PVC insulated fitting covers are to be used, the 

proper factory precut insulation shall be applied to the fitting using two layers for pipe 

temperatures above 250°F or below 35°F, and single-layer insulation for pipe 

temperatures between 35°F and 250°F. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly 

into the throat of the fitting and the edges adjacent to the pipe covering, tufted and tucked 

in, fully insulating the pipe fitting. Covers shall overlap the adjoining pipe insulation and 

jackets, and on cold pipes shall be sealed at all seam edges with vapor barrier adhesive. 

The circumferential edges of all covers shall be sealed with pressure sensitive tape. The 

tape shall overlap the jacket and cover by at least 1”. 

F. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier jackets on cold pipe insulation, and protect to prevent 

puncture or other damage. 

1. Do not use staples or tacks on vapor barrier jackets. 

2. Seal vapor barrier penetrations with vapor barrier finish recommended by the 

manufacturer. 

3. Seal fitting covers with PVC tape. 

4. Cover all unions, check valves, and other in-line devices. Mark outer covering 

with indelible marker to identify item covered. 

G. Neatly bevel insulation at all exposed edges, and seal with finishing cement. 

H. At locations where PVC covers are prohibited, the Contractor shall insulate fittings, etc., 

using one coat of insulation cement, premolded fiberglass fitting covers and/or segments 

of pipe insulation. Finish shall be ASJ jacket or glass fabric embedded in fire retardant 

mastic. Raw ends shall be coated with vinyl acrylic mastic (CP-10/11) for hot piping or 

shall be coated with vapor barrier mastic (CP-30 or Fosters 30-35) for cold piping. 


I. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and 

composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut 

or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated. 

J. Pipe insulation shall be continuous through walls and floor openings except where walls 

and floors are required to be firestopped. 

K. Insulation on all cold surfaces shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal. 

Supports, anchors, etc. that are secured directly to cold surfaces shall be adequately 

insulated and vapor-sealed to prevent condensation. 

L. Piping installed below grade shall be spiral wrapped with 10 mil PVC tape (Scotchwrap 

No. 50 or equal) with 50% overlap, and laid in bed of sand with 3” minimum cover on all 

sides. Fittings shall be double-wrapped with second layer extended a minimum of 12” 

beyond fittings. 

M. See Section 230529 for insulation inserts and shields. Butt pipe insulation against pipe 

hanger insulation inserts. For all piping, apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on 

butt joints and seal all joints and seams with 3” wide vapor barrier tape or band. 

N. Cellular Glass Insulation: 

1. Apply in a single layer. Secure to pipe with 1/2” wide aluminum bands. 

2. For indoor applications, apply all-purpose Kraft paper/aluminum foil/vinyl coating 

jacket. Seal all lap and butt joints with self-sealing vapor barrier tape. 

O. Calcium Silicate Insulation: 









P. Piping Exposed to Weather: All insulation on piping exposed to weather shall have vapor 

barrier and shall be protected with weather-proof aluminum jacket. 

1. Jacketing shall be secured by 1/2” wide stainless steel bands on 24” centers. All 

joints and seams shall be caulked with clear silicone. Locate all longitudinal 

seams at the bottom of piping to minimize joint exposure to weather. Contractor 

may propose pre-fabricated sealing and fastening systems, for which samples and 

product data must be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 

3.06 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION: 




B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. 



03/16/2012 


C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure 

complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. 

D. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect to prevent puncture 

and other damage. 

1. Avoid the use of staples on vapor barrier jackets. 

2. Seal vapor barrier penetrations with vapor barrier tape recommended by the 

manufacturer. 

E. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork 

penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. 

F. Flexible Fiberglass Insulation: Cut back insulation to provide a 2” facing overlap at all 

seams. Seams shall be stapled at approximately 6” on centers with outward clinching 

staples, then sealed with pressure-sensitive tape matching the facing and designed for use 

with duct insulation. Insulation on the underside of ductwork 24” and wider shall be 

secured with mechanical fasteners and speed clips spaced approximately 18” on centers. 

The protruding ends of the fasteners shall be cut off flush after the speed clips are 

installed, and then sealed with the same tape as specified above. 

G. Corner Angles: Except for oven and kitchen hood exhaust duct insulation, install corner 

angles on all external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before 

covering with jacketing. 

H. Calcium Silicate Insulation: 









I. Installation of external insulation for ductwork exposed to weather: 

1. All insulation shall be applied with edges tightly butted and fastened to the duct 

with mechanical fasteners spaced on 12” to 18” centers or as required to hold 

insulation firmly against the duct surface. Insulation shall be tightly secured in 

place with washers firmly embedded in the insulation. 

2. Apply a heavy brush or trowel coat of weatherproof, fire-retardant, vapor barrier 

mastic to completely seal all joints and extend over adjacent insulation. Embed 

glass cloth into wet mastic to ensure complete and uniform contact, smoothing out 

all wrinkles. Immediately apply a second coat of weatherproof fire-retardant 

vapor barrier mastic over entire membrane surface, leaving a large bead over all 

joints. 

3.07 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION: 



03/16/2012 


A. General: Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's 

written instructions and in compliance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that 

insulation serves its intended purpose. Complete finishes as specified. 

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces. 

Redo poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gaping joints and 

excessive voids resulting from poor workmanship. 

C. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier on equipment insulation, and protect to prevent 

puncture and other damage. 

D. Do not apply insulation to equipment, mufflers, breechings, or stacks while hot. 

E. Apply insulation using staggered joint method and double layer construction; apply each 

layer of insulation separately. 

F. Insulation board shall be cut and mitered to fit the contour of the vessel and shall be 

applied with edges tightly butted, joints staggered where two or more layers are necessary 

(due to available thickness of insulation), and secured with 1/2” x 0.015” galvanized steel 

bands on 12” centers or with weld pins or stick clips with washers on 18” centers. 

G. Coat insulation surfaces with layer of insulating cement, and cover the insulation with 1” 

galvanized wire mesh tightly stretched in place with edges tied together. Finish with two 

coats of insulating cement troweled to a hard finish. 

H. Do not insulate over ASME stamp or manufacturer's nameplate on hot equipment. Provide 

neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation. 

I. Cold equipment requiring access: Provide removable section of insulation, fabricated 

from flexible elastomeric insulation, adhered to an aluminum jacket, and joined with 

velcro strips around entire perimeter. Reinforce removable section and adjoining 

insulation at attachment points. Removable insulation shall be provided for all equipment 

requiring periodic inspection, access or maintenance, including: 

1. Chilled water pump bodies. 

2. Strainer basket access. 

3. Heat exchanger tube access (including chillers). 

4. Handhole/cleanout covers. 

J. Hot equipment requiring access: Provide removable section of insulation, fabricated from 

rigid fiberglass insulation board, adhered to an aluminum jacket, and fastened to the 

equipment with stainless steel bands. At Contractor's option, provide pre-fabricated, 

canvas-jacketed, lace-up insulation blankets. 

Provide removable insulation for hot equipment requiring access with accessible 

components over 100 square inches or any component operating over 200°F, including: 

1. Steam condensate receivers and pumps. 

2. Steam strainers. 

3. Steam pressure regulators. 

4. Heat exchanger tube access. 

5. Handhole/manhole/cleanout access. 



03/16/2012 


K. Equipment Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installation of 

aluminum jacketing, as recommended by manufacturer. On flexible elastomeric 

insulation, apply two (2) coats of manufacturer's approved U.V. resistant finish. 

3.08 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR: 

A. Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation, both previously damaged or 

damaged during this construction period. Use insulation of same thickness as existing 

insulation; install new jacket lapping and seal over existing. 

3.09 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT: 

A. Replace all damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units 

with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units. 

B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation 

work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. 



03/16/2012 







03/16/2012 


FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING 

A. This Section includes fuel oil piping system and equipment, including: 

1. Piping, fittings and specialties. 

2. Oil transfer equipment. 

3. Oil storage tanks and accessories. 

B. Related Sections; The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 


1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation, trenching and backfilling for 

underground piping. 

2. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for cast-in-place concrete, reinforcing and 

formwork for equipment pads. 

3. Division 23 Section "Meters and Gauges" for oil supply and return line 

thermometers, and pressure and vacuum gauges. 

4. Division 25 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identification of 

fuel oil piping and transfer equipment. 

5. Division 25 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for pipe insulation for underground oil 

piping. 

A. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS). 


A. Product data for the following products. 

1. All valves including special duty valves. 

2. Fuel oil piping. 

3. Oil submersible and transfer pumps. Include performance curves, electrical 

characteristics and specified accessories. 

4. Oil piping specialties. 

B. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation of oil storage tanks and accessories. 

Detail equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights, loadings, required 

clearances, method of field assembly, components and location and size of each field 

connection. 

C. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems; differentiating between 

manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring. 

23 1113 - 1 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING

D. Welder Certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements 

specified under "Quality Assurance" article. 

E. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems 

products; in accordance with requirements of Divisions 1 and 23. 

F. Maintenance data for oil transfer equipment, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance 

Manual specified in Divisions 1 and 23. 


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fuel oil systems 

products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory 

use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on 

projects with fuel oil systems work similar to that required for project. 

C. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME "Boiler and 

Pressure Vessel Code, 11 Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes: 

1. NFPA 31 - Standard for the Installation of Oil Burning Equipment, for oil piping 

materials and components, oil piping installations, and inspection and testing of 

fuel oil piping systems. 

2. NFPA 37 - Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines 

and Gas Turbines. 

3. Uniform Mechanical Code and Denver Building Department Code. 

4. BOCA Basic National Mechanical Code. 

5. Local fire department authority. 

6. EPA guidelines and regulations. 

E. UL Compliance: Provide fuel oil piping components which are listed and labeled by UL. 

1. UL 343 - "Standard for Pumps for Oil-Burning Appliances,” for oil transfer pumps. 

2. UL 567 - "Pipe Connections for Flammable and Combustible Liquids and LP-Gas,” 

for pipe connectors for fuel oil piping systems. 

3. UL File MH 1316 - "Standard for Glass-Fiber Reinforced Plastic Underground 

Storage Tanks for Petroleum Products," for oil storage tanks. 

4. American Petroleum Institute Std. 650, Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage 

(ANSI/API Std 650-78). 


A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete ballast pads and fill at sounding boxes for 

housekeeping equipment pads for oil transfer pumps. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad. 

Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. 



03/16/2012 





following: 

1. Special Duty Valves: 



03/16/2012 

a. Webster Electric Co., Sub. of Sta-Rite Industries, Inc. 

2. Vertical Ball Check Valve: 

a. Lukenheimer 

3. Factory Manufactured Below Grade Fuel Oil Piping: 

a. Total Containment 

4. Strainers: 

a. Armstrong Machine Works 

b. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div. 

c. Metraflex Co. 

d. R-P&C Valve; Div. White Consolidated Industries, Inc. 

e. Watts Regulator 

5. Oil Transfer Pumps: 

a. ITT Marlow 

b. Roper Pump Co. 

c. Viking Pump Div.; Houdaille Industries, Inc. 

d. Gordon-Piatt 

6. Submersible Pumps: 

a. Red Jacket Pumps 

7. Oil Piping Specialties: 

a. OPW Division; Dover Corp. 

8. Fuel Oil Gauges: 

2.02 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS: 

a. Hersey Products, Inc. 

b. Pneumercator Co., Inc. 

c. Emco Wheaton 

A. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, 

pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, 


provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation 

requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; 

provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in fuel oil systems. 

B. Unless noted otherwise copper and steel piping as well as fittings and valves shall be rated 

150 psig. 

2.03 BASIC IDENTIFICATION: 

A. General: Provide identification complying with Division-23 Basic Mechanical Materials 

and Methods section "Mechanical Identification", in accordance with the following listing: 

1. Fuel Oil Piping Above Ground: Plastic pipe markers. 

2. Fuel Oil Piping Underground: Underground-type plastic line markers. 

3. Fuel Oil Valves: Brass tags. 

2.04 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS: 

A. General: Refer to Part 3 below, Article "Pipe Application" for identification of systems 

where the below specified pipe and fittings materials are used. 

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe, with beveled ends. 

C. Copper Tubing: ASTM 288, Type L, hard drawn copper tubing and Type K, annealed 

copper tubing. 

2.05 FITTINGS: 

A. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI 316.3, Class 150, standard pattern, for threaded 

joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1. No cast iron fittings allowed. 

B. Steel Fittings: ASTM A234, seamless or welded, for welded joints. Socket weld fittings for 

below grade. 

C. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI 316.5, including volts, nuts and gaskets of the 

following material group, end connection and facing: 


1. Material Group: 1.1. 

2. End Connections: Butt Welding. 

3. Facings: Raised face. 

A. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code 

for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe 

being welded. 

B. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Gasket material shall be full faced for cast-iron flanges and 

raised-face for steel flanges. Select materials to suit the service of the piping system in 

which installed and which conform to their respective ANSI standard (A21.11, B16.20, or 



03/16/2012 


B-15.21). Provide materials that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and 

thermal conditions of the fluid being carried. 

C. Brazing filler Metals: AWS A5.8 classification BAgl (silver). 

2.07 PIPING SPECIALTIES: 

A. Unions: ANSI B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron; female pattern; brass to iron seat; 

ground joint. Threads shall conform to ANSI 31.20.1. 

B. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions with appropriate end connections for the pipe 

materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, or flanged) , which effectively isolate 

dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. 

C. Y-Pattern Strainers: 125 psig working pressure; cast-iron body conforming to ASTM A126, 

Class B; flanged ends for 2-1/2 inch and larger, threaded connections for 2 inch and 

smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless steel screen, and plugged blow-down drain. 

D. Flexible Connectors: For 1-1/2 inches and smaller, provide minimum 150 psig working 

pressure, maximum 25O degrees F. operating temperature; stainless steel bellows with 

woven flexible bronze wire reinforcing protective jacket. Connectors shall have flanged or 

threaded end connections to match equipment connected; and shall be capable of 3/4 

inch misalignment. 

2.08 GENERAL DUTY VALVES: 

A. General duty valves (i.e., gate, globe, ball and butterfly valves) are specified in Division 23 

Section "General Duty Valves." Special duty valves are specified in this Article by their 

generic name. Refer to Part 3 below, Article "Valve Application" for specific uses and 

applications for each valve specified. 

2.09 SPECIAL DUTY VALVES: 

A. Oil Safety Valves: 250 psig maximum working pressure, 550 degrees F. maximum 

operation temperature; ASTM B61 bronze body and bronze bases and discs, and field 

adjustable cadmium-plated carbon steel springs factory-set at 20 percent above operating 

pressure. End connections shall be inside threaded with threads conforming to ANSI 

31.20.1. Valve shall be UL listed for flammable or volatile liquids. 

B. Vertical Ball Check Valves: Class 200, 400 psig maximum operating pressure, 2-piece 

bronze construction with threaded end connections; integral bronze seats and replaceable 

stainless steel ball. 

2.10 FUEL OIL TRANSFER PUMPS AND ACCESSORIES: 

A. General Description: Simplex/Duplex Single-stage, positive displacement rotary type, 

/centrifugal type with the following features and accessories: foot-mounted, cast-iron 

housing, steel gears, bronze bearings, steel shaft, standard mechanical seals; built-in 

pressure relief bypass; steel base and drive coupling. Provide pumps with capacities and 

electrical characteristics as scheduled for number 2 or 3 fuel oil. Pumps shall be 



03/16/2012 


constructed in accordance with UL 343, and be UL listed and bear the UL label. Pump set 

shall be duplex/simplex completely factory pre-piped and mounted on a skid drip pan 

ready to install. Each pump shall have the following: 

1. Oil pressure relief valve and return to suction piping. 

2. Belt/Coupling guard 

3. Back pressure regulating valve (shipped loose; installed by M.C.) 

4. Discharge check valve 

5. Discharge manual valve 

6. Suction side manual valve 

7. Compound pressure gauge on suction line with gauge cock. 

8. Strainer with isolation valves on each side of it. 

9. Pressure gauge or discharge with gauge cock. 

10. Cross over bridge piping on suction and discharge lines for parallel piping 

arrangement on duplex installation. 

11. Provide pressure measuring taps or both suction and discharge for pressure 

differential switch provided by others, coordinate with temperature control 

contractor. 

B. Drive: V-belt drive, with belt guard. 

C. Drive: Direct drive, close coupled. 

D. Motor: Split phase for single-phase motors; capacitor start, induction-run, totally enclosed 

for 3-phase motors. 

E. Controls: Controls shall include simplex/duplex factory prewired control panel consisting 

of H-O-A starter(s), thermal overload protection, auxiliary contacts for remote startstop. 

For duplex installation provide alternator and lead-lag control function. 

2.11 SUBMERSIBLE FUEL OIL PUMP: 

A. Pump shall be complete with the following: 

1. Check valve 

2. Air eliminator 

3. Expansion relief valve 

4. Syphon nozzle and venturi 

5. Syphon check valve and pressure test screw 

6. Accessible capacitor and electrical disconnect 

7. Leak detector head 

8. Bayonet-type electrical connector with explosion-proof electric disconnect without 

separating wires 

9. Pressure relief and check valves which can be isolated during a line pressure test. 

10. Tank and line test ports 

11. All leakage directed into storage tank. 

12. Hydraulically balanced Calcon impellers 

13. On-winding thermal overcurrent motor protection 

14. Permanent split-phase capacitor motor, 208-230 v single phase. 

B. Submersible pump(s) shall be as manufactured by Red Jacket Pumps a Marley Company. 

Capacity and model designation shall be as scheduled on drawings. 



03/16/2012 


2.12 SPECIALTIES: 

A. Foot Valve: Single/Double poppet constructed of plated cast iron/bronze body and bronze 

poppet with replaceable bronze seats and monel/galvanized brass 20/8 screen. 

OPW No. [ ] 

B. Float Vent Valve: Stainless steel ball with Duragard coated seat length determined by tank 

supplier. 

OPW No. 53-V series 

C. Fill/Spill Containers: Container shall consist of Duratuff lower body, cast iron 

cover/aluminum cover, polyethylene gravel guard, epoxy coated cast iron body ring, high 

density polyethylene bellows, acetal-polypropylene drain valve, stainless steel clamps, 

Buna-N seals with a nominal 3 gallon capacity, 

OPW #1. 

D. Vent Caps and Flame Arresters: Provide caps and arresters to melt local code and fire 

department requirements. 

2.13 FUEL OIL LEVEL-INDICATION AND LEAK DETECTION: 

A. General: The tank liquid level management system shall be a fully integrated 

microprocessor based system for 1 to 8 tanks. The system shall continuously monitor the 

liquid inventory of each tank. System shall include an individual selectable display for 

product level in inches, product volume in gallons, level of water, and temperature of 

product for each tank. The visual alarm condition shall be displayed until the condition is 

corrected. The system shall retain in memory the last 3 alarm conditions by tank and last 

10 deliveries by tank. The system shall include battery back-up to retain data stored in 

memory during loss or interruption of power for up to ten years. System shall monitor 

liquid levels and product temperature for tank leak test and/or theft test during tank 

quiescent periods. Inventory reports containing product levels, volumes, water level, and 

product temperatures, alarm history reports, delivery history reports, theft test results, and 

tank leak test results. Reports shall all be presented via a RS-232 data output port built-in 

printer. Reports shall include site name/location, date, and time. System shall operate on 

110-120 V., 60 hertz, A.C. current. 

B. Control Console: Control console shall be constructed in a wall-mountable steel enclosure 

complete with a 5 digit, 0.81, high, 7 segment LED display for inches and gallons of 

product of inventory, level of water and temperature of product. Control console shall 

include individual visual LED light and audible alarm for programmable high level, low 

level and water presence alarm conditions for each tank. Two alarm relays, reach rated 

SPDT-3 amps, shall be provided standard for external control functions. Provide 

additional alarm relays, two per tank (maximum of 16). Audible alarm shall include a 

disable switch. Touch key pad shall be splash proof dual purpose, accommodating tank 

and function selection as well as system programming functions. Control console 

calibration, set-up and diagnostic trouble shooting. The console should provide SPDT 

switch contacts rated 3 AMPS at 120 VAC, for each leak sensor, for controlling external 

devices. Electrical circuitry to tank mounted sensors should be low current rated 

intrinsically safe for hazardous areas. 



03/16/2012 


C. Leak Sensors: Each leak sensor shall contain a 316 stainless steel capacitance element 

bonded to a combination PVC/Epoxy Housing, and a PVC jacketed cable for electrical 

connections. The sensor shall pass through a minimum 2 inch NPT monitor fitting on each 

tank. The sensor shall be able to differentiate between liquid water and liquid hydrocarbon 

to a minimum depth of 0.1 inch and operate from -40° to 130°F and up to 50 

PSIG. Wiring to the console shall be standard 3 conductor (shielded not required) , 

provided by others and terminated at the tank monitor fitting using watertight 1/2 inch 

NPT fittings. 

D. Leak detection shall be as follows: 

1. Control Unit(s) shall be Pneumercator model number LDE90OX. X = number of 

sensing points. 

2. Leak sensors shall be Pneumercator model 9-901 for fiberglass tank annular 

spaces, or model 9-902 for steel tank monitor pipes and piping sump areas. 

2.14 OVERFILL ALARM SYSTEM: 

A. Provide a complete operational working audible and visual alarm system for overfill 

condition. 

B. The system shell include the following construction features and performance. 



1. NEMA 4 painted steel enclosure 

2. Suitable operating temperature range of -40°F to 150°F 

3. 120v/1Phase 

4. Audible alarm 78dB to 103 dB at 10 feet distance, with adjustable duration time 

on from 0 to 60 seconds. 

5. Visual alarm using a 25 watt 120 VAC lamp with red polycarbonate lens and a 

flashing rate of 75 per minute. 

6. Alarm acknowledgment switch with actuating lamp. 

7. Programmable overfill alarm limit set for each tank. 

8. Auxiliary contacts compatible with building automation system for remote 

monitoring. 

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which fuel oil systems materials and 

products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have 

been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 

3.02 INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION: 

A. General: Install mechanical identification in accordance with Division 23 Basic 

Mechanical Materials and Methods section “Mechanical Identification.” 



03/16/2012 


3.03 PIPE APPLICATIONS: 

A. Use steel pipe with welded joints for 3/4 inch and larger. 

B. Use Type L, drawn copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and brazed joints for 2 inch 

and smaller, above ground, within building. 

3.04 PIPE INSTALLATIONS: 

A. General: Refer to Division 23 - "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping 


B. Install supply, return, fill, and vent piping at a uniform grade of 1/4 inch in ten feet 

downward in the direction of the storage tank. 

C. Make changes in directions and branch connections using fittings. 

D. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting install with the level side down. 

E. Install unions in pipes 2 inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections 

each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged 

devices. 

F. Install dielectric unions where piping of dissimilar metals are joined. 

G. Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 inch and larger 

connections. 

H. Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps and other vibration 

producing equipment. 

I. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure regulating valve, oil 

burner connection, and elsewhere as indicated. Install 3/4 inch NPS nipple and ball valve 

in blow down connection of strainers 2 inch and larger. Use same size nipple and valve 

as blow-off connection of strainer. 

J. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction. Install expansion 

loops and joints as indicated on the Drawings and specified in Division-23 Section 

"Expansion Compensation." 

K. Install pipe sleeve seals at foundation and basement wall penetrations, as specified in 

Division-23 Section: Basic Piping Materials and Methods." 

L. Seal pipe penetrations of fire barriers using fire barrier penetration sealers specified in 

Division-7 [079200] Section: "Joint Seallants." 

M. Hanger, supports, and anchors are specified in Division-23 Section "SUPPORTS AND 

ANCHORS." Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports: 

1. Steel Pipe: 

SIZE (NPS) SPACING IN FEET MIN. ROD SIZE- 

INCHES 

1/2 (horizontal) 5 3/8 



03/16/2012 




03/16/2012 

3/4 to 1-1/4 (horizontal) 6 3/8 

1-1/2 to 3 (horizontal) 10 1/2 

3-1/2 to 5 (horizontal) 12 5/8 

All sizes (vertical) every floor level at spacing and not greater than 15 feet. 

2. Copper Tubing: 

3.05 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION: 

SIZE (IN. O.D.) SPACING IN FEET MIN. ROD SIZE- 

INCHES 

1/2 (horizontal) 4 3/8 

5/8 to 1-1/4 (horizontal) 6 3/8 

1/2 to 2 (horizontal) 8 1/2 

1/2 to 4 (horizontal) 10 5/8 

All sizes (vertical) to be supported at every floor level at spacing indicated and not 

greater than 10 feet. 

A. Welded Joints: Comply with the requirements in ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 

Section IX. 

B. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI 21.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. 

Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows: 

1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of 

internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. 

2. Align threads at point of assembly. 

3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads. 

4. Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves 

place the wrench on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. 

5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or 

damaged. If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of 

pipe shall not be used. 

6. Below grade piping shall be all welded joints, not threaded joints below grade 

unless noted otherwise (i.e. , tank bushing connection in sump). 

C. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt 

tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. 

Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to 

appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. 

D. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual." 

1. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly toxic 

fumes when heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation. 

2. CAUTION: Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal 

parts of piping specialties before brazing. 

3. Fill the tubing and fittings during brazing with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon 

dioxide) to prevent formation of scale. 

4. Heat joints to proper and uniform temperature. 



A. General: The Drawings indicate valve types, locations, and arrangements. 

B. General Duty Valve Applications: The Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where 

specific valve types are not indicated the following requirements apply: 

1. Shut-off duty: Use gate valves 

2. Throttling duty: Use globe valves 


A. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage. Tag valves with a 

metal tag attached with a metal chain indicating the piping systems supplied. 

B. Install shut-off duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and elsewhere as 

indicated. 

C. Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and elsewhere as required 

for system drainage. 

D. Install swing check valves as required to control flow direction. 

3.08 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: 

A. Sediment Traps: Install a tee fitting with the bottom outlet plugged or capped as close to 

the inlet of the oil burning appliance as practical. Drip leg shall be a minimum of 3 pipe 

diameters in length. 


A. Test oil piping in accordance with NFPA 31. 

B. Remake leaking joints and connections using new materials. 


A. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and 

equipment. 

B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up 

and shut-down, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance. 

C. Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 section 11 

Project Closeout." 

D. Schedule training with owner through the Architect, with at least 7 days advance notice. 

E. Before activating system perform these steps: 



03/16/2012 


3.11 WIRING: 

1. Open valves to full open position. Close bypass valves. 

2. Remove and clean strainer screens. 

3. Check pump for proper direction of rotation. 

4. Fill oil storage tank with proper fuel type. 

5. Check operating controls of fuel burner units. 

6. Check operation at automatic bypass valves. 

7. Check and set operating temperature controls on oil heaters. 

8. Check corrosion monitoring systems for proper operation. 

9. Check and calibrate fuel oil level gauge. 

10. Check and calibrate leak detection system(s). 

A. All wiring between level transmitters, sensors and monitoring equipment is by this 

contractor. Power wiring for service to equipment will be provided as shown on electrical 

drawings (Division 1G). All other wiring not shown or Division 16 drawings is by the 

mechanical contractor. 



03/16/2012 







03/16/2012 


FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 

A. This Section includes distribution piping systems for natural gas and manufactured gas 

within the building and extending from the point of delivery to the connections with gas 

utilization devices. Piping materials and equipment specified in this section include: 

1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 

2. Special duty valves. 

B. This Section does not apply to LP-gas piping; industrial gas applications using such gases 

as acetylene and acetylenic compounds, hydrogen, ammonia, carbon monoxide, oxygen 

and nitrogen; gas piping, meters, gas pressure regulators and other appurtenances used 

by the serving gas supplier in distribution of gas. 

C. Gas pressures for systems specified in this section are limited to 5 psig. 

D. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include gas meters which will be 

provided by the utility company, to the site, ready for installation. The following is the 

name and address of the utility company: 

Company Xcel Energy 

Address: 1800 Larimer Street 

Denver, CO 80202 

Telephone number: (800) 895-4999 

E. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 


1. Refer to Division 2 for fuel gas service piping, trenching and backfilling which is 

underground, outside the building, and connecting the "Gas Distribution Piping" to 

public utilities (or connecting groups of buildings on the same site). 

2. Refer to other Division 23 sections for materials and methods for trenching and 

backfilling; installation of gas piping; sealing pipe penetrations through basement 

walls; fire and smoke barriers; piping and fittings; and mechanical identification 

of gas piping systems inside and outside the building. 

A. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS). 

B. Gas Distribution Piping: A pipe within the building which conveys gas from the point of 

delivery to the points of usage. 

C. Gas Service Piping: The pipe from the gas main or other source of supply including the 

meter, regulating valve, or service valve to the gas distribution system of the building 

served. 

23 1123 - 1 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

D. Point of Delivery is the outlet of the service meter assembly, or the outlet of the service 

regulator (service shutoff valve when no meter is provided). 


A. Product data for each gas piping specialty and special duty valve. Include rated capacities 

of selected models, furnished specialties and accessories, and installation instructions. 

B. Shop drawings detailing dimensions, required clearances, for connection to gas meter. 



D. Maintenance data for gas specialties and special duty valves, for inclusion in the 

Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 23. 

E. Welders’ qualification certificates, certifying that welders comply with the quality 

requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" below. 

F. Test reports specified in Part 3 below. 


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of natural gas 

systems products, of types, materials, sizes required, whose products have been in 


B. Installer Qualifications: Installation and replacement of gas piping, gas utilization 

equipment or accessories, and repair and servicing of equipment shall be performed only 

by a qualified installer. The term “qualified” is defined as experienced in such work 

(experienced shall mean having a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and 

scope to this project), familiar with precautions required, and has complied with the 

requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Upon request, submit evidence of such 

qualifications to the Architect. 

C. Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators: Comply with the requirements of 

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, "Welding and Brazing Qualification." 

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the following codes: 

1. NFPA 54 – National Fuel Gas Code, for gas piping materials and components, 

gas piping installations, and inspection, testing, and purging of gas piping 

systems. 

2. Local Building Code. 

3. Utility Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with 

local gas utility company requirements. 

4. UMC Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with 

IAPMO "Uniform Mechanical Code." 




03/16/2012 


A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquid from a drip in existing 

gas piping and handle cautiously to avoid spillage or ignition. Notify the gas supplier. 

Handle flammable liquids used by the installer with proper precautions, and do not leave 

on the premises from the end of one working day to the beginning of the next. 


A. Notification of Interruption of Service: Except in the case of an emergency, notify all 

affected users when the gas supply is to be turned off. 

B. Work Interruptions: When interruptions in work occur while repairs or alterations are 

being made to an existing piping system, leave the system in safe condition. 

C. Coordinate the installation of pipe sleeves for foundation wall penetrations. 

1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS: 

A. Valve Wrenches: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, two (2) valve wrenches for each type of 

gas valve installed, requiring same. 




following: 

1. Gas Cocks: 



03/16/2012 

a. Jenkins Bros. 

b. Lunkenheimer Co. 

c. Nibco, Inc. 

d. Powell Co. 

e. Stockham. 

2.02 PIPE, TUBING AND JOINTING MATERIALS: 

A. Provide pipes and pipe fitting complying with Division 23, Section 232113. 

2.03 NATURAL GAS PIPING SPECIALTIES: 

A. Gas Meters: Diaphragm-type, positive displacement gas meters with aluminum cases, 

temperature compensated, with internal corrosion-resistant components; threaded ends 

for 2 inch and smaller, flanged ends for 2-1/2 inch and larger; for gas working pressures, 

specific gravity, and volume flow indicated. 

B. Protective Coating: Provide factory applied polyethylene tape, having the following 

properties: 


1. Overall thickness: 20 mils. 

2. Synthetic adhesive. 

3. Water vapor transmission rate. 

4. Gallons per 100 square inch: 0.10 or less. 

5. Water absorption, percent: 0.02 or less. 

6. Prime pipe and fittings with a compatible primer prior to application of tape. 

7. Pipe wrapping shall conform to the following schedule: 



03/16/2012 

Scotchwrap No. 

Pipe Size Tape Width Standard Cold 

¼ - ¾ inch 1 inch 50 40 

1 – 1½ inch 2 or 4 inch 50 40 

2 inch and larger 4 inch 50 40 

Color backing Black Green 

8. During application of wrap, if the ambient temperature is 40°F or less, use only 

Scotchwrap No. 40 tape. if ambient temperature is 40°F or more, use only 

Scotchwrap No. 50. 

C. Flexible Connectors: Corrugated type 304 stainless steel flexible pipe with stainless steel 

braid and heavy flexible armor shield. 

D. Quick Couplers: One way quick coupler with gas rating in cubic feet per hour equal to 

equivalent gas appliance rating. 

E. Valve cabinets: For gas safety valves, No. 4 stainless steel finish, fully recessed, Series S 

construction, style K stainless steel door with key lock, 4 keys per cabinet, all cabinets 

keyed alike. 

2.04 VALVES: 

1. Modify cabinets for 6”, maximum depth for valve sizes ½” to 1-1/2”, and 8” 

maximum depth for valve sizes 2” to 3”. Label cabinet. 

A. Special duty valves are specified in this section by their generic name. Refer to Part 3, 

"VALVE APPLICATION, 11 for specific uses and applications for valve specified. 

B. Gas Cocks 2 Inch and Smaller: 150 psi WOG, bronze body, straightaway pattern, square 

head, threaded ends. 

C. Gas Cocks 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: MSS SP-78; 175 psi, lubricated plug type, semi-steel 

body, single gland, wrench operated, flanged ends. 

D. Solenoid Valves: Aluminum body, 120 volts AC, 60 Hz, Class B continuous duty molded 

coil; NEMA 4 coil enclosure; electrically opened/electrically closed; dual coils; normally 

closed; UL and FM approved and labeled. 

E. Gas Line Pressure Regulators: Single stage, steel jacketed, corrosion-resistant gas pressure 

regulators; with atmospheric vent, elevation compensator; with threaded ends for 2 inch 

and smaller, flanged ends for 2-1/2 inch and larger; for inlet and outlet gas pressures, 

specific gravity, and volume flow indicated. 


F. Gas Safety Valves: Gas safety valve latched open when energized, free handle design, 

manual reset, and a visual position indicator. 



A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which natural gas systems materials and 

products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have 

been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 


A. Precautions: Before turning off the gas to the premises or section of piping, turn off all 

equipment valves. Perform a leakage test as specified in "FIELD QUALITY CONTROL" 

below, to determine that all equipment is turned off in the piping section to be affected. 

B. Conform with the requirements in NFPA 54 for the prevention of accidental ignition. 

3.03 INSTALLATION OF PIPE: 

A. Install natural gas piping in accordance with Division 23, Section 232113. 

B. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code. 

C. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the 

general location and arrangement of piping systems. Design locations and arrangements 

of piping take into consideration pipe sizing, flow direction, slope of pipe, expansion, and 

other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. 

D. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in an airtight 

conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless black steel with welded joints. Vent 

conduit to the outside and terminate with a screened vent cap. 

1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible above-ceiling 

spaces (subject to the approval of the authority having jurisdiction), whether or not 

such spaces are used as a plenum. Valves shall not be located in such spaces. 

2. In Floors: Piping installed in floors shall have protective wrapping specified in Part 

2 above. Piping cast in concrete slabs shall be surrounded with a minimum of 1- 

1/2 inches of concrete and shall not be in physical contact with other metallic 

structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Piping shall 

not be embedded in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder 

aggregate. 

3. Piping In Partitions: Concealed piping shall not be located in solid partitions. 

Tubing shall not be run inside hollow walls or partitions unless protected against 

physical damage. This does not apply to tubing passing through walls or 

partitions. 

4. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through a circulating air duct, 

clothes chute, chimney or gas vent, ventilating duct or dumb waiter or elevator 

shaft. This does not apply to accessible above-ceiling space specified above. 



03/16/2012 


E. Install pipe sleeve and seals at foundation and basement wall penetrations, as specified in 

Division 23, Section 232113, "Basic Piping Materials and Methods." 

F. Seal pipe penetrations of fire barriers using fire barrier penetration sealers specified in 

Division 23. 

G. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install a drip leg at points where condensate may collect, at 

the outlet of the gas meter, and in a location readily accessible to permit cleaning and 

emptying. Do not install drips where condensate is likely to freeze. 

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using a tee fitting with the bottom outlet 

plugged or capped. Use a minimum of 3 pipe diameters in length for the drip 

leg. Use same size pipe for drip leg as the connected pipe. 

H. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections. 

I. Install gas piping at a uniform grade upward to risers, and from the risers to the meter, or 

service regulator when meter is not provided, or the equipment. 

J. Connect branch outlet pipes from the top of horizontal lines, not from the bottom or sides. 

3.04 NATURAL GAS PIPING SPECIALTIES: 

A. Gas Meters: 

1. Install gas meter in accordance with local Utility company's installation 

instructions, and comply with requirements. 

B. Protective Coating: 

1. Provide protective coating on piping and fittings that will be in contact with 

material or atmosphere exerting a corrosive action, or piping buried in floors. 

C. Flexible Connectors: 

1. Provide flexible connectors with full size quick coupler for all kitchen and heavy 

moveable gas appliance equipment. 

2. Connectors shall be of lengths required to displace equipment for complete 

cleaning under and around gas appliance. 

D. Quick Couplers: 

1. Provide quick coupler at service end of flexible connectors. 

E. Valve Cabinets: 


1. Provide valve cabinets for gas safety valves, mounted 5’-0” from floor to 

centerline. Control panels must be mounted to be visible from entry door of room 

or area within which panels are mounted. 



03/16/2012 


A. General: The Drawings indicate valve types, locations, and arrangements. 

B. Shut-off duty: Use gas cocks. 


A. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage. Tag valves with a 

metal tag attached with a metal chain indicating the piping systems supplied. 

B. Install a gas cock upstream of each gas pressure regulator. Where two gas pressure 

regulators are installed in series in a single gas line, a manual valve is not required at the 

second regulator. 

C. Install pressure relief or pressure limiting devices so they can be readily operated to 

determine if the valve is free, tested to determine the pressure at which they will operate, 

and examined for leakage when in the closed position. Pipe atmospheric vent to outdoors. 

D. Solenoid valves shall be mounted with the solenoid in the vertical upright position only. 

1. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 16. Coordinate 

electrical requirements and connections. 

E. Valves shall be installed with unions or other means to facilitate removal or repair without 

disassembly of connecting piping. 

F. Gas Safety Valves: 

1. Install gas safety valves in wall boxes [exposed]. 

2. Coordinate electrical requirements with Division 16 contractor. Provide neoprene 

grommets for all piping and electrical conduit entering and existing cabinets. 

3.07 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: 

A. Install gas cock upstream and within 6 feet of gas appliance. Install a union or flanged 

connection downstream from the gas cock to permit removal of controls. 

B. Sediment Traps: Install a tee fitting with the bottom outlet plugged or capped as close to 

the inlet of the gas appliance as practical. Drip leg shall be a minimum of 3 pipe 

diameters in length. 

C. Flexible Hose Gas Connectors: For use connecting to vibrating equipment; corrugated 

Type 304 stainless steel flexible pipe with stainless steel braid. 

3.08 ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING: 

A. Install above-ground portions of gas piping systems, upstream from equipment shutoff 

valves, electrically continuous and bonded to a grounding electrode in accordance with 

NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code." 

B. Do not use gas piping as a grounding electrode. 



03/16/2012 


C. Conform to NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical connections between wiring 

and electrically operated control devices. 


A. Piping Tests: Inspect, test, and purge natural gas systems in accordance with NFPA 54 

and local utility requirements. 

B. Test system before covering underground lines. 

C. Submit written results of tests to Architect/Engineer. 

3.10 SPARE PARTS: 

A. Valve Wrenches: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, two (2) valve wrenches for each type of 

gas valve installed, requiring same. 



03/16/2012 







03/16/2012 


HYDRONIC PIPING 

A. This Section specifies piping materials, testing and installation methods common to 

Division 23 and includes joining materials, piping specialties, and basic piping installation 

instructions. 

B. Related Sections: Refer to other Division 23 sections for fire protection systems, piping 

specialties, valves, expansion compensation, supports and anchors, mechanical 

identification, mechanical insulation, meters and gauges, and fire barrier penetration 

seals. 

C. Standards: Piping materials and installation methods shall meet the requirements of the 

applicable sections of the latest standards of the following organizations listed below: 

Air-conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 






Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) 






National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau (NCPWB) 

Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) 

Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI) 

D. All piping shall conform to applicable portions of the above standards and as required by 

the appropriate national and local codes. 




B. Product Data: Submit industry standard and manufacturer’s technical product data, 

installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of pipe and pipe fitting. 

C. Submit piping schedule showing pipe or tube weight, fitting type, and joint type for each 


D. Submit Welder’s certifications. 

23 2113 - 1 HYDRONIC PIPING

E. Submit data on Joining Materials. 

F. Submit welding Procedures Specifications. 

G. Brazing Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work. 

H. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product submittals 

and shall be specifically identified with the applicable Victaulic style or series number. 

1.03 SCHEDULING: 

A. Plan the work so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference with other trades. Inform 

the General Contractor of openings required in the building structure and coordinate 

mechanical equipment locations with the Structural Shop Drawings. 

B. Install pipe and duct sleeves and pipe support inserts before concrete is poured. 

C. Cutting and patching made necessary by failure to plan the work shall be the responsibility 

of this Contractor. 


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of pipes and pipe 

fittings of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar 


B. Welder's Qualifications: All welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and 

Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. 

C. Welding procedures and testing shall comply with the latest revisions of the applicable 

sections of B31 of the ANSI/ASME standard codes for pressure piping, noted as follows: 

B31.1 – Pressure Piping Code / B31.2 – Fuel Gas Piping Code / B31.5 – Refrigeration 

Piping / B31.9 – Building Service Piping Code. 

D. Before any welding is performed, the contractor shall submit to the owner, or his 

authorized representative, a copy of the Manufacturer's Record of Welder or Welding 

Operator Qualification Tests and his Welding Procedure Specification together with the 

Procedure Qualification Record as required by Section IX of ASME Boiler and Pressure 

Vessel Code. 

E. The types and extent of non-destructive examinations required for pipe welds are as shown 

in Table 136.4 of the ASME Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI/ASME B31.1 – Power Piping. 

If requirements for non-destructive examination are to be other than that stated above, the 

degree of examination and basis for rejection shall be a matter of prior written agreement 

between the fabricator or contractor and the purchaser. 

F. All welding performed on the mechanical systems shall be done following acceptable 

procedures by operators qualified for the type of welding and materials being welded. 

Each manufacturer or contractor shall be responsible for the quality of welding done by his 

organization, whether performed at the job site or in the fabrication shop, and shall repair 

or replace any work not in accordance with these specifications. 



03/16/2012 


G. Soldering and brazing materials and procedures shall conform to applicable sections of 

the CDA Copper Tube Handbook and applicable sections of the latest published version of 

the ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31. 

H. To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components in grooved piping systems, 

all grooved products utilized shall be supplied by a single manufacturer including gaskets, 

valves, and straining devices. Grooving tools shall be supplied by the same manufacturer 

as the grooved components. 


2.01 GENERAL: 

A. Piping Materials: Provide piping and tubing of type, pressure and temperature ratings, 

capacities, joint type, grade, size and weight (wall thickness or class) indicated for each 

service. Where type, grade or class is not indicated, provide proper selection as 

determined by Installer for installation requirements, and comply with governing 

regulations and industry standards. 

B. Pipe/Tube Fittings: Provide factory-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class and 

pressure rating indicated for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching 

the pipe, tube, valve or equipment connection in each case. Where not otherwise 

indicated, comply with governing regulations and industry standards for selections, and 

with pipe manufacturer's recommendations where applicable. 

2.02 STEEL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS: 

A. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53, Grade B, type E, electric resistance welded. 

B. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53, Grade B. 

C. Seamless Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53, Grade B, type S or A106 high temperature. 

D. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A-312; Grade TP 304 (high temperature and corrosive service, 

1/8” thru 30”). 

E. Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Pipe: AWWA C-205. 

F. Cast-Iron Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.1, including bolting (Class 125 and 250). 

G. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4 (Class 125 and 250). 

H. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated (Class 

125 and 300). 

I. Malleable-Iron Threaded Unions: ANSI B16.30, Class 150, 250 or 300; selected by 

Installer for proper piping fabrication and service requirements, including style, end 

connections, and metal-to-metal seats (iron, bronze or brass); plain or galvanized as 

indicated (Class 150, 250 and 300). 

J. Threaded Pipe Plugs: ANSI B16.14. 



03/16/2012 


K. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, ASTM A-234 (Fire Protection) including bolting and 

gasketing of the following material group, end connections and facings, except as 


Material Group: Group 1.1. 

End Connections: Buttwelding. 

Facings: Raised-face. 

L. Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service: AWWA C-207 (water service piping only). 

M. Corrosion-Resistant Cast Flanges/Fittings: MSS SP-51, including bolting and gasketing 

(threaded where pressure is not critical). 

N. Forged-Steel Socket-Welding and Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.11, except MSS SP-79 for 

threaded reducer inserts; rated to match schedule of connected pipe (up to 4” pipe size). 

O. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short-radius 

elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe. 

P. Stainless-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: MSS SP-43. 

Q. Stainless-Steel Vic Press 304 Fittings: Use with ½” through 2” Schedule 10S, Type 

304/304L stainless steel piping systems up to a maximum 500 psig. Precision cold drawn 

stainless steel fittings with Grade “H” HNBR suitable for potable water up to 210 deg. F or 

Grade “E” EPDM suitable for hot water up to 250 deg. F and pressure-sealed ends. 

R. Stainless-Steel Grooved End Fittings: ANSI /AWWA C606. 

S. Cast-Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.12. 

T. Forged Branch-Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as 

determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 

U. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use 

less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2” and 

where pipe size is less than 1-1/2”, and do not thread nipples full length (no closenipples). 

2.03 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS: 

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B-88; Type K or L as indicated for each service; hard-drawn 

tempered, except as otherwise indicated. 

B. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B-306. 

C. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B-280. 

D. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.18. 

E. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22. 

F. Cast-Copper Solder-joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23 (drainage and vent with DWV 

or tube). 



03/16/2012 


G. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29. 

H. Cast-Copper Flared Tube Fittings: ANSI B16.26. 

I. Bronze Pipe Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.24 (Class 150 and 300). 

J. Copper-Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use 

in service indicated. 

K. Grooved End Copper-Tube Dimensioned Couplings and Fittings: ANSI / AWWA C606. 

2.04 BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS: 

A. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B-43 

B. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.15, Class 125 or 250 

C. Cast-Bronze Threadless Fittings: ASTM B-61 or B-62, brazed joints. 

2.05 CAST-IRON PRESSURE PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS: 

A. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Class 52, ANSI A21.51; AWWA C-151; 350 psi pressure rating. 

B. Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water: ANSI 

A21.4; AWWA C-104. 

C. Polyethylene Encasement for Gray and Ductile Cast-Iron Piping: ANSI A21.5; AWWA C- 

105. 

D. Cast-Iron Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C-110/A21.10. 

E. Gray-Iron Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C-110/A21.10. 

F. Ductile-Iron Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C-110/A21.10. 

G. Rubber-Gasket Joints: ANSI/AWWA C-111/A21.11. 

2.06 GROOVED PIPING PRODUCTS: 

A. General: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings may be used for piping systems 

having operating conditions not exceeding 250 deg. F (120 deg. C), excluding steam 

piping and any other service not recommended by manufacturer, in lieu of welded, 

flanged, or threaded methods. 

B. Coupling Housings: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536. 

C. Flexible Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages 

grooved pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create 

seal. Cast in two parts, and secured together during assembly with nuts and bolts. 

Permits degree of contraction and expansion as specified in manufacturer's latest 

published literature. 



03/16/2012 


1. Flexible couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors for vibration isolation 

at equipment connections. Three couplings, for each connector, shall be placed in 

close proximity to the source of vibration. 



03/16/2012 

a) 2” through 8”: Installation Ready, stab-on design, for direct ‘stab’ installation 

onto grooved end pipe without prior field disassembly and no loose parts. 

Grade “EHP” EPDM gasket suitable for hot water up to 250 deg F. Victaulic 

Style 177 QuickVic. 

D. Rigid Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved 

pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast in 

two parts with angled mating pads which grip the pipe rigidly and force the pipe ends to 

their maximum separation. Secured together during assembly with nuts and bolts. 

1. Rigid couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors for vibration isolation at 

equipment connections. Three couplings, for each connector, shall be placed in 

close proximity to the source of vibration. 

a) 2” through 8”: Installation Ready, stab-on design, for direct ‘stab’ installation 

onto grooved end pipe without prior field disassembly and no loose parts. 

Grade “EHP” EPDM gasket suitable for hot water up to 250 deg F. Victaulic 

Style 107H QuickVic. 

E. Copper-Tube Couplings, 2” through 8”: Installation Ready, stab-on design for direct 

‘stab’ installation onto roll grooved copper tube without prior field disassembly and no 

loose parts. Housings shall be ASTM A536 ductile iron cast with offsetting, angle-pattern 

bolt pads coated with copper-colored enamel, Grade “EHP” EPDM gasket suitable for hot 

water up to 250 deg F, and plated steel bolts and nuts. Victaulic Style 607 QuickVic. 

F. Stainless Steel Pipe Couplings 2-1/2” to 12”: Two or more segments of cast stainless steel 

conforming to ASTM A351, A743, and A744. Gaskets shall be Grade “E” EPDM suitable 

for hot water up to 230 deg F, and stainless steel bolts and nuts, Type 316, conforming to 

ASTM A193, Grade B8M, Class 2. 

1. Rigid Type: Housings cast with key designed to clamp the bottom of the groove to 

provide an essentially rigid joint. Victaulic Style 489. 

2. Flexible Type: Use in seismic areas and locations where vibration attenuation and 

stress relief are required. Victaulic Style 77S. 

G. Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure-responsive so that internal 

pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties as 

designated by ASTM D-2000. 

1. Water Services: EDPM Grade E, with green color code identification or Grade 

EHP, with red color code identification. 

2. Other Services: As recommended by Manufacturer. 

H. Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A-183 and A-449, minimum tensile 

strength of 110,000 psi. Provide tamper-resistant nuts in exposed locations. 

I. Branch Fittings: Similar to coupling, with full circumference gasket and integral branch 

outlet in both the housing and gasket. 

J. Fittings: Grooved end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings. 


1. Ductile Iron: ASTM A-536. 

2. Fabricated Steel: ASTM A-53, carbon steel, Schedule 40, Type F, for 3/4” to 

4”; Type E or S, Grade B, for 5” to 20”. 

3. Steel: ASTM A-234. 

4. Wrought Copper and Bronze: ASTM B-75 tube and ASTM B-584 bronze castings 

with copper tube dimensioned grooved ends (flaring of tube and fitting ends to IPS 

dimensions is not permitted). 

5. Galvanized: ASTM A-106, ASTM A-46 or A-536. Couplings for use with AWWAdimensioned 

piping shall conform to AWWA C-606. Victaulic Style 31. 

6. Stainless Steel Fittings: Fittings shall be manufactured of stainless steel conforming 

to ASTM A403, WPW, WPW/S9 or CR/S9, or shall be fabricated from stainless 

steel pipe conforming to ASTM A312, with factory grooved ends. Fittings shall be 

Type 304/304L or Type 316/316L stainless steel. 

K. Grooves: Conform to the following: 

1. Standard Steel: Square cut or roll grooved in accordance with manufacturer’s 


2. Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved. 

3. Stainless Steel: Square cut or roll grooved in accordance with manufacturer’s 

specifications. Schedule 10 pipe shall be roll grooved only. 

4. Cast or Ductile Iron: Radius cut grooved, AWWA C-606. 

L. All other pipe products shall conform to the requirements of the Division 15 sections. 

Acceptance of grooved pipe systems does not imply acceptance of the coupling 

manufacturer’s valves, flow measuring stations, strainers, or other specialties. 

M. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping products 

by one of the following: 

Anvil International – Gruvlok. 

Grinnell Mechanical Products, Div. of Tyco. 

Victaulic Company of America (Design Basis). 


A. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide lead- and zinc-free welding 

materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 

1. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding 

materials. 

B. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide silver soldering materials. 

1. Above Ground: 95-5 Tin-Antimony, ASTM B-32, Grade 95TA (lead-free type). 

2. All refrigeration piping and all below-ground water piping: Silver-Tin-Copper 

Alloy, ASTM B-32 (NSF). 

C. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials to comply with 

installation requirements. 

1. Comply with AWSA 5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for 

brazing filler metal materials. 



03/16/2012 




03/16/2012 

a. Copper phosphorus – BCuP. 

b. Silver – BAg 

D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for 

steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Piping Connectors for Dissimilar Non-Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric annular ring insert, or 

elastomeric flexible coupling secured at each end with stainless steel clamps, sized for 

exact fit to pipe ends and subject to approval by plumbing code. 

F. Pipe Thread Sealant Material: Except as otherwise indicated, provide all pipe threads with 

the sealant material as recommended by the manufacturer for the service. 

2.08 PIPING APPLICATION: 

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping thread 

sealant material. “Tyte-Unyte” for general use and Acorn no. 3500 for cleanouts. 

A. Natural Gas Piping: 

1. Above Grade: 

a. Exposed locations: 

i. 2” and smaller: Schedule 40 black steel pipe, beveled ends, with 

150 psi malleable iron fittings and threaded joints. 

ii. Larger than 2”: Schedule 40 black steel pipe with seamless steel 

butt-weld fittings and welded joints. 

b. Inaccessible Locations: 

2. Below Grade: 

i. All sizes: Schedule 40 seamless black steel pipe, beveled ends, 

with socket-weld fittings same thickness as pipe, and welded 

joints. 

a. Within Building: Schedule 40 seamless black steel with 150 psi forged 

steel fittings and welded joints. Provide piping with machine-applied 

coating and wrapping in accordance with local code and utility company 

requirements. Provide cathodic protection as called for on the drawings. 

b. Outside of Building: Polyethylene (PE) pipe, as approved by local utility 

company and code authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Space Heating Water, Chilled Water, and Condenser Water Piping: 

1. 2-1/2” and smaller: 

a. Schedule 40 black steel with 150 psi malleable iron threaded fittings; or 

Type L copper tube, ASTM B-88, with wrought copper or bronze fittings 

per ANSI B16.22, brazed or lead-free soldered. 

2. 3” and larger: 




03/16/2012 

a. Schedule 40 seamless black steel with flanged or welded joints. 

b. Fittings: Standard weight seamless steel, butt-weld type. 

c. Flanges: 150 psi forged steel slip-on or welding neck type. 

d. Bolting: Regular square head machine bolts with heavy hexagonal nuts. 

e. Gaskets: Material, type and thickness suitable for fluid to be handled, at 

design temperature and pressures. 

C. Equipment Drains, Condensate Drains and Overflows: 

1. Type “M” or “DWV” copper. 

D. Refrigerant Piping (field installed): 

1. Type "K" hard-drawn copper tubing with wrought copper silver soldered fittings 

and couplings; or type “L” copper, refrigerant grade, color coded and marked 

“ACR” (cleaned, dehydrated, and capped at the factory), using wrought copper 

fittings with brazed joints. Soft-annealed copper tubing may be used in sizes up to 

1-3/8”, and, when used, shall be enclosed in iron or steel piping or in conduit, 

molding or raceway which will protect said tubing against damage. 

E. Diesel Generator Exhaust: 

1. Schedule 40 black steel with all welded joints. 

F. Fuel Oil Piping: 

1. Refer to Section 231113 – Fuel Oil Systems. 

G. Chemical Treatment or Cooling Tower Bypass Filter Piping: 



1. PVC Class 12454-B, schedule 80, with schedule 80 threaded pressure fittings. 


be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, original design, and the 



connections in order to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. 



A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices 

which will achieve permanently leak-proof piping systems, capable of performing each 

indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and 

couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and 


maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use 

of reducing fittings. Make pipe runs straight and true. Align piping accurately at 

connections, within 1/16” misalignment tolerance. 

1. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping. 

2. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and 

other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures. Only piping 

serving this type of equipment space shall be allowed. 

3. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) 

indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. Locations and 

arrangements of piping take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, 

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, 

install piping as indicated. 

4. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections. 

5. Install piping at right angles, parallel or at right angles to the building walls, and 

as high as possible. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated. 

6. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, 

and below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view. 

7. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent 

elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation application, with 1” 

clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling 

panels to allow for panel removal. 

8. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit application of 

insulation and servicing of valves. 

9. Provide for complete drainage of water systems. At all low points in mains, risers, 

and branch lines, provide drains consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4” ball valve, and 

short 3/4” threaded-end nipple and cap with chain. 

10. Install all piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to 

permit proper insulation application. 

11. Fire and Smoke Wall Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire and smoke 

rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors, maintain the fire and smoke rated 

integrity. Refer to Division 23, Sections 230517 for materials. 

12. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using 

sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals (see Section 15120). Pipe sleeves smaller 

than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch and larger shall be sheet metal. 

13. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction. 

14. Coordinate penetrations through foundation and all other structural penetrations 

with structural engineer. 

15. Install hangers and guides as necessary to provide piping systems which are selfsupporting 

and not dependent upon connection to equipment. All piping shall be 

adequately supported from the building structure with adjustable hangers to 

maintain uniform grading where required and to prevent sagging and pocketing. 

16. Allow flexibility in the erection of the piping system in order to prevent excessive 

stresses in materials and joints due to thermal expansion or equipment vibration. 

Provide sufficient swing joints, anchors, expansion loops, expansion joints, and/or 

other devices as necessary, and install so as to permit free expansion and 

contraction without causing undue stresses. Make all changes in direction with 

fittings. Support piping independently at all equipment so that its weight shall not 

be supported by the equipment. Provide bracing where necessary to prevent 

swaying. 

17. At high points of all piping, install manual air vents consisting of a line size nipple 

6 inches long for an air collection chamber, pipe cap on top of nipple with 1/4 

inch top, and 1/4 inch copper tubing with gauge cock. Locate gauge cock at 



03/16/2012 


accessible location and anchor to adjacent pipe or wall. Provide access panels as 

required for access. 

18. Provide shutoff valves and unions or flanges to isolate each item of equipment, 

branch circuit, or section of piping. Unions shall be provided at each threaded 

valve (manual or automatic) and at all equipment having threaded connections. 

19. Arrange piping and valves near each piece of equipment to allow for complete 

service and maintenance of the equipment without disturbing the shutoff valves. 

20. Provide dielectric unions or "Clearflow" fittings at all junctions of dissimilar metals 

in fresh water systems. 

21. Use full lengths of pipe; short lengths with couplings will not be permitted. All 

pipe sections shall be de-burred to full I.D. before joining. 

22. Extend chains for valve operators to 6'-3" above the floor or platform. Brace 

extension handles and provide a means of indicating open and closed positions. 

23. All piping installed below grade (unless factory pre-insulated) shall be spiral 

wrapped with 10 mil PVC tape (Scotchwrap No. 50 or equal) with 50% overlap, 

and laid in bed of sand with 3” minimum cover on all sides unless otherwise 

noted. Compaction per Division 2. 

B. Hydronic Piping: 



03/16/2012 

a. Fittings shall be double-wrapped with second layer extended a minimum 

of 12” beyond fittings. 

1. Make reductions in hydronic pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with 

the level side up. 

2. Install hydronic piping branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main with 

take-off out the bottom of the main, except for up-feed risers, which shall have 

take-off out the top of the main line. Install all hydronic piping level with manual 

air vent at all high points in direction of flow. 

3. Install hydronic piping level except for gravity flow systems such as condenser 

water and condensate drain piping. 

C. Refrigerant Piping: 

1. General: Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15, "The 

Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." 

2. Make joints smooth and unconstricted inside and out, and ream pipe ends 

thoroughly to remove all burrs. 

3. Install piping in as short and direct arrangement as possible to minimize pressure 

drop. 

4. Install piping for minimum number of joints using as few elbows and other fittings 

as possible. 

5. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and servicing of compressor and other 

equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for 

servicing and inspection. 

6. Provide adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers, and 

between pipes, for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or 

ceilings, sized to permit installation of full thickness insulation. 

7. Insulate all refrigerant lines. 

a. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all 

leaks have been eliminated. 

8. Install branch tie-in lines to parallel compressors at equal length, and pipe 

identically and symmetrically. 


9. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing 

may be exposed to possible mechanical injury. 

10. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 



03/16/2012 

a. Install horizontal hot gas discharge piping with 1/2 inch per 10 feet 

downward slope away from the compressor. 

b. Install horizontal suction lines with 1/2 inch per 10 feet downward slope 

to the compressor, with no long traps or dead ends which may cause oil 

to separate from the suction gas and return to the compressor in 

damaging slugs. 

c. Install traps and double risers where indicated, and where required to 

entrain oil in vertical runs. 

d. Liquid lines may be installed level. 

D. Condensate Drain Piping: 

1. Condensate drain piping from air conditioning unit coil condensate drain pans 

shall be of the sizes shown on the drawings. 

2. Slope condensate lines minimum 1/8 inch per foot. 

E. Natural Gas Piping: 

1. Provide 6” drip leg for piping trapped by change of grade and at final connection 

to equipment. 

3.03 PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS: 

A. General: Provide joints of type indicated for each piping system. 

B. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 

Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint 

compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, 

on male threads at each joint, and tighten joint to leave not more than three threads 

exposed. 

C. Braze copper tube-and-fitting joints in accordance with ASME B-31. 

D. Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints with silver solder or 95-5 tin-antimony solder. Cut 

tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and 

inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full 

depth into fitting, and solder in a manner which will draw solder to full depth and 

circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens. 

E. Welding: 

1. All welding on piping, including tack welding, shall be performed by welders currently 

qualified and certified for the applicable welding process. A file shall be 

maintained, for examination upon request, of all qualified welding procedures 

and the names of the qualified welders performing this work. 

2. Examine the inside of each length of piping to ensure it is free from dirt and 

obstructions. If obstructed in any way, the pipe shall be swabbed out before being 

incorporated into the system. 


3. Before and after piping fabrication, all flanges, threaded connections, and 

beveled pipe ends shall be protected with end protectors and suitable grease to 

prevent corrosion and damage until installed into the system. 

4. Before welding, the end of the pipe and fittings shall be cleaned of rust, scale, dirt, 

grease, protective coating, or other foreign matter which might affect the quality of 

the welds. 

5. When pipes of different wall thicknesses are to be welded together, the end of the 

thicker pipe shall be smoothly tapered to the wall thickness of the thinner pipe. 

The taper angle shall not be more than 30° from the axis of the pipe. 

6. Before welding, the piping shall be aligned as required in ASME Code for Pressure 

Piping B-31. 

7. Pipe, flanges, and fittings damaged during fabrication or shipment shall be 

replaced. Any damaged sections shall be removed from the job site. 

8. The necessity of preheating of welds and the temperature used are requirements 

of the welding procedure. If the metal temperature is below 32°F, local 

preheating to a temperature warm to the hand is required for materials which 

otherwise do not require preheating. 

9. The preparation of butt-welded ends of pipe, welding neck flanges, pipe fittings, 

and any other piping component, including valves which are butt-welded into the 

piping system, shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.25 with the following 

exceptions: 



03/16/2012 

a. No permanent backing rings shall be used. 

b. Use of consumable inserts is permitted and encouraged as a means of 

obtaining required weld quality. 

10. Spacers may be used in fitting up pipe and weld fittings for tack welding to a 

proper gap for full penetration welds. Small tack welds which penetrate to the 

bottom of the welding groove shall be used. Tack welds lacking full penetration 

are not acceptable and shall be removed. 

11. All pipe welds that allow visual inspection on the inside and that can be reached 

by hand shall be inspected by the welder immediately after welding, and the 

following actions shall be taken: 

a. Weld spatter, flux, and debris shall be removed. 

b. Excessive penetration shall be removed by grinding. 

c. Areas without penetration or fusion shall be ground to sound metal and 

repair welded. 

12. Cleaning of excessive flux shall be performed between welding passes using wire 

brushing or grinding. 

13. Flanges welded to pipe spools shall be oriented with the bolt-holes straddling the 

centerlines established on the piping drawings. Take precautions throughout 

fabrication not to mar the gasket face on flanges. 

F. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and 

equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform 

compression of gaskets. 

G. Hubless Cast-Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer's installation instructions. 

H. Stainless Steel Pressure-Sealed Joints: Install in accordance with manufacturer's latest 

recommendations. Follow the instructions listed in the latest Victaulic I-500 assembly 

manual. Schedule 10S stainless steel pipe shall be square cut, +/- 0.030", properly 


deburred and cleaned. Pipe ends shall be marked at the required location to ensure full 

insertion into the coupling or fitting during assembly. Use a Victaulic "PFT" series tool with 

the proper sized jaw for pressing. 

3.04 GROOVED PIPING SYSTEMS: 

A. All changes in direction shall be made with radius type elbows. 

1. Use long radius (R=1.5D) fittings wherever possible. 

2. Angles less than 22-1/2° may be made with pre-manufactured mitered fittings. 

3. Use of the angular deflection capabilities of grooved pipe couplings for intentional 

changes of direction shall not be allowed. 

B. All changes in pipe size shall be made with reducing fittings, not bushings or reducing 

couplings. 

C. All branch outlets shall be made with Victaulic Style 920/920N Mechanical-T® bolted 

branch outlets for branches more than four pipe sizes smaller than the main, or Victaulic 

No. 25 or W25 grooved end reducing tees. 

D. Pipe shall be adequately laterally supported to prevent "pipe squirm." Provide a minimum 

of one hanger per pipe section. No pipe section shall be left unsupported between any 

two couplings. 

E. Risers more than 8’ high shall be made with rigid type couplings. 

F. Rigid style couplings shall be used in mechanical rooms, except where flexible style 

couplings are specifically allowed for thermal expansion compensation and/or vibration 

isolation, and to accommodate seismic movement. 

G. Flanges shall be standard welded slip-on or weld neck with a spool piece to a grooved 

end joint. "Flange adapters" are not allowed. 

H. Grooved pipe systems shall not be considered to be electrically conductive. 

1. Provide wire jumpers across all couplings where the piping system is required to 

be electrically conductive. 

I. Flexible couplings may be used for vibration elimination. 

1. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations. 

2. Provide 3 degrees of freedom by installing sufficient flexible couplings in different 

orientations. 

3. Use spring hangers for all sections of pipe intended for deflection. 

4. Roll-grooved fittings and pipe shall be considered to have 1/2 the deflection of 

cut-grooved fittings and pipe. 

J. Victaulic Style 177, 77 or W77 flexible couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors 

for vibration isolation at equipment connections. Three (3) couplings, for each connector, 

shall be placed in close proximity to the source of vibration. 

K. Grooved joint piping systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's 

guidelines and recommendations. All grooved couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties 



03/16/2012 


shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same 

manufacturer as the grooved components. 

L. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the 

intended service as specified. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by Victaulic. 

M. Grooved end shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the 

area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing. 

N. A Victaulic factory-trained field representative shall provide on-site training for contractor's 

field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools and installation of grooved piping 

products. Factory-trained representative shall periodically review the product installation. 

Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products. 

3.05 EXPOSED PIPING IN FINISHED AREAS: 

A. Plumbing piping and fittings which are exposed (and uninsulated) in finished areas 

generally occupied by people, including, but not limited to, kitchens, animal 

cagewash/equipment washing rooms, hospital autoclave or sterilizing rooms, shall be 

installed with a smooth, high polish, durable chrome-plated finish. 

3.06 PIPING TESTS: 

A. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Test 

piping system before insulation is installed, wherever feasible; and remove control devices 

before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not 

use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure 

rating. Fill each section with water, and pressurize for indicated pressure and time 

duration. 

B. Test all piping systems as specified. Correct leaks by remaking joints. Remove equipment 

not able to withstand test procedure during test. 

C. Work to be installed shall remain uncovered until the required tests have been completed. 

D. Piping which is to be concealed shall be tested before being permanently enclosed. 

E. When work has been completed, conduct preliminary tests to ascertain compliance with 

specified requirements. Make repairs or replacements as required. 

F. Give a minimum of twenty-four hours notice to Engineer of dates when acceptance test will 

be conducted. Conduct tests as specified for each system in presence of representative of 

agency having jurisdiction or his representative. 

G. Submit three (3) copies of successful test report to the Engineer for his review. Report shall 

state the following: Date of test, lines tested, test medium, length of time, test pressure 

held, pressure drop or rise, and extent of venting or repressurizing. 

H. Contractor shall obtain certificates of approval, acceptance and compliance with 

regulations of agencies having jurisdiction. Work shall not be considered complete until 

such certificates have been delivered by the Engineer to the Owner. 



03/16/2012 


I. All costs involved in these tests shall be borne by Contractor. Should contractor refuse or 

neglect to make any test necessary to satisfy the Architect/Engineer, such test may be made 

by an independent testing company and Contractor charged for all expenses. 

J. System Tests 

1. Hydrostatic Test: The test shall be accomplished by hand pumping the system to 

the specified water pressure, and maintaining that pressure until the entire system 

has been inspected for leaks, but in no case for a time period of less than eight 

hours. 



03/16/2012 

a. Domestic water systems: 100 psig or 150% of system pressure, whichever 

is greater. 

b. Heating water system: 100 psig or 150% of operating pressure, 


c. Chilled water system: 100 psig or 150% of system pressure, whichever is 

greater. 

d. Condenser water system: 100 psig or 150% of system pressure, 


e. Compressed air system: 150 psig or 150% of system pressure, whichever 

is greater. 

f. Gas: 100 psig air test. 

2. Compressed Air or Nitrogen Test: Compressed air tests may be substituted for 

hydrostatic tests only when ambient conditions or existing building conditions or 

prohibit safe use of hydrostatic testing and must be reviewed by the Engineer prior 

to any testing. For tests of this type, the piping system shall be subjected to the 

gas pressure indicated for that specific system. The piping shall be capped or 

plugged and water-pumped with oil-free air, or nitrogen from a bottle shall be 

introduced into the entire system to the pressure specified. The system shall 

maintain that pressure for the duration of a soapy water test of each joint. 

3. Waste, Drain and Vent Piping: All waste and vent piping, including building 

drain, roof drain and building sewer, shall be subjected to a water test. All 

openings in the piping system shall be tightly closed, except the highest opening, 

and the system filled with water to the point of overflow. The water shall be kept 

in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 15 minutes before inspection 

starts; the system shall then be tight to all points. No section shall be tested with 

less than a ten foot head of water. Roof drain piping shall be closed at the lowest 

point and filled with water to the point of overflow. 

4. Sump Pump Discharge: With water in sump and pump running at full capacity, 

check for leaks until satisfied that system is tight. 

5. Test all refrigerant piping systems with nitrogen at 300 psig pressure on high side 

of system, and at 150 psig pressure on low side of system. Maintain pressure 

without loss for a time period of not less than 4 hours. After test has been 

completed, the piping shall be evacuated by means of a vacuum pump for a 

period of not less than 24 hours or until system has been completely evacuated. 

6. Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by disassembly and 

re-installation, using new materials to extent required to eliminate leakage. Do 

not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair 

methods. 

7. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been 

completed. 


3.07 UNDERGROUND PIPE INSTALLATION: 

A. Clean fittings, nipples and other field joints thoroughly before coating. 

B. Protect gray and ductile cast iron pipe installed below grade with polyethylene encasement 

applied in strict accordance with ANSI/AWWA C-105/A21.5. 

C. Install ductile iron pipe below grade as prescribed by AWWA C-600. 

D. Provide concrete thrust block and 3/4” threaded steel tie bar at each change of direction 

on underground pressure pipe. Imbed tie bar in thrust block and connect to upstream 

fitting. Paint tie bar with two coats of bitumastic #50 paint. 

E. Bury all outside domestic water, waste, and storm piping minimum 5’-0” below grade 

(earth cover below finish grade) to top of pipe. 


A. Preparation for testing: Prepare hydronic piping in accordance with ASME B-31.9 and as 

follows: 

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during the 

test. 

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints which cannot sustain the 

reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are not practical, isolate 

expansion joints from testing. 

3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 

4. Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure from the piping. 

If a valve is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing 

against the test pressure without damage to the valve. 

5. Install relief valve set at a pressure not more than 1/3 higher than the test 

pressure, to protect against damage by expansion of liquid or other source of 

overpressurization during the test. 

B. Testing: Test hydronic piping as follows: 

1. Use ambient temperature water as the testing medium, except where there is a risk 

of damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workmen 

and compatible with the piping system components. 

2. Use vents, installed at high points in the direction of flow, in the system to release 

trapped air while filling the system. Use drains installed at low points for complete 

removal of the liquid. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot 

withstand test pressures are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure 

that it is tight and that low-pressure filling lines are disconnected. 

4. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the 

system is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not 

exceed the maximum pressure rating for any vessel, pump, valve, or other 

component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to 

pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of 

specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the “SE” value in Appendix A of 

ASME B31.9, Code For Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping. 

5. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least four hours, 

examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by 



03/16/2012 


tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat 

hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 

6. “Stop-Leak” compounds shall not be added to the system at any time. 


A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and 

prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out piping systems with clean 

water before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of each system for 

completion of joints, supports and accessory items. 

1. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31. 

B. Disinfect all potable water mains and water service piping in accordance with local health 

department requirements. Submit test results report. 

C. Clean and flush hydronic piping systems. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens. 

After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping system, but before balancing, remove 

disposable fine mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers. 

D. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing 

has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position. 

E. Chemical Treatment: Provide hydronic systems with a water analysis prepared by the 

chemical treatment supplier to determine the type and level of chemicals required for 

prevention of scale and corrosion. Perform initial treatment after completion of system 

testing. 

3.10 STERILIZATION: 

A. Each unit of domestic water supply and distribution system shall be sterilized with liquid 

chlorine or hypochlorite before acceptance for operation, in accordance with American 

Water Works Association G601 “Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains.” Work shall be 

done by contractor, and, unless otherwise required by legally constituted authorities having 

jurisdiction, sterilization shall conform to the following: 

B. Materials: 

1. Liquid Chlorine: U.S. Army Specification No. 4-1. 

2. Hypochlorite: Liquid shall conform to FS 0-C-114a, and Int. Amendment 3, 

Grade D. 

3. Method: Amount of chlorine used shall provide a concentration of not less than 

50 parts per million. 

4. Introduce chlorination material into lines and distribution system in manner 

approved by the Architect/ Engineer. 

5. After a contact period of not less than 24 hours, during which period chlorine 

residual shall be maintained at not less than five parts per million, flush out 

systems with clean water until residual content is not greater than 0.2 parts per 

million. 

6. Flush entire system, including all hose bibs, fixture outlets, dead ends, and other 

points where stagnant water may collect. 

7. Open and close valves in lines being sterilized several times during contact period. 



03/16/2012 



8. Furnish a copy of test report of complete and adequate sterilization to the 

Architect/Engineer before final acceptance of work. Certificates shall bear 

signature of an official of laboratory responsible for test. 

A. Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment. 

B. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system is 



1. Open valves to full open position. Close coil bypass valves. 


3. Check pump for proper rotation and proper wiring. 

4. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. 

5. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and 

operating freely (automatic type) or able to bleed air completely (manual type). 

6. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 

7. Check operation of automatic bypass valve. 

8. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to 

design requirements. 

9. Lubricate motors and bearings. 



03/16/2012 







03/16/2012 


HYDRONIC PUMPS 

A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of HVAC pumps and accessories. 

Extent of HVAC pump work required by this Section is indicated on drawings and 

schedules, and by requirements of this Section. 

B. Types of pumps specified in this Section include the following: 

1. Vertical In-Line 

2. Frame-Mounted End Suction 

C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for other work that is not work of this Section. 

D. Provide the following electrical work as work of this Section, complying with requirements 



1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and pump 


a. Control wiring specified as work of Division 23 for Automatic Temperature 

Controls is work of that section. 

A. Hydraulic Institute Compliance: Design, manufacture and installation of HVAC pumps 

shall be in accordance with “Hydraulic Institute Standards.” 

B. UL Compliance: Provide HVAC pumps that are listed and labeled by UL and comply with 

UL Standard 778 “Motor Operated Water Pumps.” 

C. All pump motors shall be NEMA rated and UL listed. 

D. Nameplates showing pump manufacturer’s name, model and/or serial number, impeller 

size, and motor data shall be clearly visible. If impeller has been trimmed from standard 

size, this information shall appear on the nameplate also. 

E. Certified performance data including vibration criteria shall be furnished for all custom 

and non-cataloged pumps. 

F. Standards: 

1. Hydraulic Institute (HI) 

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 

3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 

4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 

23 2123 - 1 HYDRONIC PUMPS

5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 

6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 

7. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) 

8. National Electrical Code (NEC) 

G. Certification of Pump Performance: Provide pumps whose performance, under specified 

operating conditions, is certified by manufacturer. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications, installation and start-up 

instructions, and current accurate pump characteristic performance curves, including pump 

curve and system curves, with selection points clearly indicated. Motors shall be selected 

for operation at site altitude. 



components. Include manufacturer’s standard pump and motor balance (vibration) 

criteria. 


to HVAC pumps. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and 

control wiring. Diagrams shall clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are 

factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. 

D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems 


E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of pump, 

control, and accessory, including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, 

product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in the Operating and Maintenance 

Manual, in accordance with requirements of Division 23. 

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: 

A. Handle HVAC pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking denting and 

scoring. Do not install damaged HVAC pumps or components; replace with new. 

B. Store HVAC pumps and components in a clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, 

fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage. 

C. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading HVAC 

pumps and moving them to final location. 




following in each applicable category: 



03/16/2012 


2.02 PUMPS: 

1. Vertical In-Line Pumps: 



03/16/2012 


b. Taco 

c. Bell & Gossett, Inc. 

d. Peerless Pumps 

e. Paco 

2. Frame-Mounted End Suction Pumps: 


b. Taco 

c. Bell & Gossett, Inc. 

d. Paco 

e. Peerless Pumps 

A. General: Provide factory-tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned, and painted with one coat of 

machinery enamel prior to shipment. Type, size, and capacity of each pump is listed in 

pump schedule. Provide pumps of same type by one manufacturer. 

B. Pump motor shall be sized so as not to be overloaded at any point along impeller curve 

for specified performance. 

C. All pump couplers shall be suitable for both constant speed and variable speed operation. 

2.03 VERTICAL IN-LINE PUMPS: 

A. General: Provide bronze-fitted vertical in-line pumps where indicated, and of capacities as 

scheduled. 

B. Type: Vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled, single-stage, designed for 175 psi 

working pressure. 

C. Body: Cast iron, with 125 psi ANSI rated flanges of equal size, and tappings for gauge 

and drain fittings. 

D. Shaft: Steel with replaceable shaft sleeve. 

E. Seal: Mechanical seal with ceramic seal seat. 

F. Motor: Pump motor shall be non-overloading at any point on pump curve, open dripproof 

type, and shall meet requirements of Section 230513. 

G. Impeller: Bronze enclosed type, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft 

and secured with locking screw. Assembly components shall be of type 304 stainless steel. 

2.04 FRAME-MOUNTED END SUCTION PUMPS: 


A. General: Provide frame-mounted bronze-fitted end suction pumps where indicated, and 

of capacities and characteristics as scheduled. 

B. Type: Horizontally mounted, single-stage, vertical split-case with flexible coupling, basemounted, 

designed for 175 psi working pressure. 

C. Casing: Cast iron, with 125 psi ANSI rated flanges and tappings for gauge and drain 

connections. 

D. Shaft: Steel with replaceable shaft sleeve. 

E. Bearings: Regreaseable ball bearings. 

F. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon seal ring and ceramic seat. 

G. Motor: Pump motor shall be non-overloading at any point on pump curve and shall meet 

requirements of Section 230513. 

H. Impeller: Bronze enclosed type, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft 

and secured with locking screw. Assembly components shall be type 304 stainless steel. 

I. Baseplate: Structural steel with welded cross members and open grouting area. 

J. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration, and equipped with coupling 

guard. 


3.01 EQUIPMENT BASES: 

A. Supervise construction of concrete equipment pads as follows: 


1. Form concrete pads using framing lumber with form release compounds. 

Chamfer top edge and corners of pad. 

2. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves using 

manufacturer’s installation template. 

3. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of pumps. Use Portland 

Cement conforming to ASTM C150, 4,000 psi compressive strength, and normal 

weight aggregate. 

A. General: Comply with the manufacturer’s written installation and alignment instructions. 

B. Install pumps in locations and in such an arrangement as to provide access for periodic 

maintenance, including removal of motors, impellers, couplings and accessories. 

C. Support pumps and piping separately so that the weight of the piping system does not 

bear on the pump. 



03/16/2012 


D. Suspend in-line pumps using all-thread hanger rods and vibration isolation hangers of 

sufficient size to support the weight of the pump independent from the piping system. 

Separate suspension is not required for in-line booster and circulating pumps unless 


E. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling halves before 

setting. Do not reconnect couplings until the alignment operations have been completed. 


1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims or on metal 

wedges having a small taper at points near the foundation bolts to provide a gap 

of 3/4" to 1-1/2” between the pump base and the foundation for grouting. 

2. Adjust the metal supports or wedges until the shafts of the pump and driver are 

level. Check the coupling faces and suction and discharge flanges of the pump to 

verify that they are level and plumb. 

A. Install suction and discharge pipes of sizes equal to or greater than the diameter of the 

pump nozzles. 

B. Install a non-slam check valve, balancing valve, and shut-off valve on the discharge side 

of all pumps. The check valve shall be installed at a minimum of four pipe diameters from 

the pump discharge connection. 

C. Install a shut-off valve and strainer on the suction side of all pumps. 

D. Install a pump suction diffuser on the suction side of base-mounted, end-suction pumps, 


E. Install flexible connectors on the suction and discharge sides of each base-mounted pump. 

Install flexible connectors between the pump casing and the discharge valves and 

upstream of the pump suction diffuser. 

F. Install pressure/temperature test plugs on the suction and discharge of each pump housing 

using the integral gauge tapings provided. 

3.04 ALIGNMENT: 

1. Install pressure gauge with shut-offs where shown. 

2. Install other pressure/temperature test plugs in piping around pumps as shown. 

A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundations, after 

grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and after other piping 

connections have been made. 

1. Adjust alignment of pump and motor shafts for angular and parallel alignment by 

one of the two methods specified in the Hydraulic Institute guide “Centrifugal 

Pumps – Instruction for Installation, Operation, and Maintenance”. 

2. Alignment tolerances shall meet manufacturer’s recommendations. 



03/16/2012 


B. After alignment is correct, tighten the foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Fill the 

baseplate completely with non-shrink, non-metallic grout, with metal blocks and shims or 

wedges in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts. 


A. Check suction line connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into the pump. 

3.06 START-UP: 

A. Final checks before start-up: Perform the following preventative maintenance operations 

and checks before start-up: 

1. Lubricate oil- and/or grease-lubricated bearings. 

2. Check that pump is free to rotate by hand. For pumps handling hot liquids, pump 

shall be free to rotate with the pump hot and cold. If the pump is bound or even 

drags slightly, do not operate the pump until the cause of the trouble is 

determined and corrected. 

3. Check motor for proper rotation. Rotation shall match direction of rotation 

marked on pump casing. 

B. If the pump is to be started against a closed check valve with the discharge gate valve 

open, the steps are the same, except that he discharge gate valve is opened some time 

before the motor is started. 


A. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with 

manufacturer’s touch-up paint. 



03/16/2012 







03/16/2012 


METAL DUCTS 

A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements 


DUCT SERVICE TYPE/CONSTRUCTION 

Supply air between fans and terminal units 

(medium and high pressure). 

Supply air from discharge of terminal units/fans 

to air devices (low pressure). 

Galvanized steel; spiral, round, oval, or 

rectangular (lined where noted on drawings); 

factory fabricated. 

Galvanized sheet metal; spiral, round, oval or 

rectangular (lined where noted on drawings); 

factory or shop fabricated. 

Return air ductwork. Galvanized sheet metal (lined where noted on 

drawings); factory or shop fabricated. 

General building exhaust. Galvanized sheet metal (lined where noted on 

drawings); factory or shop fabricated. 

Transfer ducts. Galvanized sheet metal, internally lined, as 

described above for low-pressure supply; 

factory or shop fabricated. 

Sound elbows for R.A. grilles Galvanized sheet metal (internally lined). 

OR 

Fibrous glass ductboard. 

Outdoor air intake ductwork. Galvanized sheet metal, rectangular; factory or 

shop fabricated. 

Exterior uninsulated ductwork. Aluminum, 304 SS, or painted galvanized steel. 

Pool room supply/Exhaust, Shower, locker room Aluminum with silicone sealant. 

exhaust. 

B. Exterior insulation of metal ductwork is specified in other Division 23 sections, and is 

included as work of this section. 

C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for ductwork accessories. 

D. Refer to other Division 23 sections for fans and air handling units. 

E. Refer to other Division 23 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of metal ductwork 

systems. 


A. Low Pressure Duct: Duct required by the drawings, specifications, or referenced standards 

to be constructed to 2” w.g. or less positive or negative pressure class. 

23 3113 - 1 METAL DUCTS

B. Medium or High Pressure Duct: Duct required by the drawings, specifications, or 

referenced standards to be constructed to greater than 2” w.g. positive or negative 

pressure class. 


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork 

products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory 

use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 

B. Installer’s Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on 

projects with metal ductwork systems similar to those required for this project. 

C. References to SMACNA, ASHRAE, and NFPA are minimum requirements. The Contractor 

shall fabricate, construct, install, seal and leak test all ductwork as described in this 

specification and as shown on the drawings, in addition to the minimum requirements of 

these standard references. 

D. Codes and Standards: 

1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 

Metal and Flexible” for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. Comply 

with SMACNA “HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual” for testing of duct systems. 

2. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A, “Standard for the Installation of Air 

Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,” and NFPA 90B, “Standard for the 

Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.” 

E. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of 

SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible,” and SMACNA “HVAC 

Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.” 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data and installation instructions 

for ductwork materials and products. Provide product data for manufactured joining 

systems. Include sound attenuation by octave band for sound rated flexible duct. 

B. Shop Drawings: Submit ¼” scaled fabrication and layout drawings of metal ductwork and 

fittings including, but not limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of 

horizontal runs; wall and floor penetrations; and connections. Show interface and spatial 

relationship between ductwork and proximate equipment. Show modifications of indicated 

requirements, made to conform to local shop practice, and how those modifications 

ensure that free area, materials, and rigidity are not reduced. 

C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems, in 

accordance with requirements of Divisions 1 and 23. 

D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for metal ductwork materials 

and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings in the 

Operating and Maintenance Manual, in accordance with requirements of Divisions 1 and 

23. 



03/16/2012 



A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and 

purchased products from damage during shipping, storage, and handling. Prevent end 

damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings. 

B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where 

necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. 





1. Duct Liner: 



03/16/2012 

a. CertainTeed Corp. 

b. Johns Manville 

c. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. 

d. Pittsburgh Corning Corp. 

2. Flexible Ducts: 

a. Flexmaster 

b. Hart & Cooley 

c. Hercules Industries 

d. Thermaflex 

3. Duct Take-Off Fittings: 

a. Flexmaster 

b. Thermaflex 

c. Ominair 

d. Hercules Industries 

4. Round and Flat Oval Ductwork (low, medium, and high pressure): 

2.02 DUCTWORK MATERIALS: 

a. Semco Mfg., Inc. 

b. United Sheet Metal Div., United McGill Corp. 

c. Sheet Metal Products Co. 

d. Spiral Pipe of Texas, Inc. 

e. Hercules Industries 

A. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is exposed to view in occupied spaces, 

provide materials which are free from visual imperfections, including pitting, seam marks, 

roller marks, stains, dents, discolorations, size markings, and other imperfections, 

including those which would impair painting. 


B. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel 

complying with ASTM A-527, lock forming quality; with G-90 zinc coating in accordance 

with ASTM A-525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations. Provide flat seam 

construction where standing seams are a hazard to the Owner’s operation personnel. 

C. Stainless Steel Sheet: Where indicated, provide stainless steel complying with ASTM A- 

167; type 304 or 316; and with No. 4 finish where exposed to view in occupied spaces, 

No. 1 finish elsewhere. Protect finished surfaces with mill-applied adhesive protective 

paper, maintained through fabrication and installation. 

D. Aluminum Sheet: Where indicated, provide aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B-209, 

Alloy 3003, Temper H14. 

E. Uncoated carbon steel shall comply with ASTM A-569, hot rolled steel sheet. 

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS: 

A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated, and, 

where not otherwise indicated, provide types and sizes required to comply with ductwork 

system requirements, including proper connection of ductwork and equipment. 

B. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15 deg. 

elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90 deg. branches are indicated, provide 

conical type tees. 

C. Duct Liner: Fibrous glass, complying with ASTM C1071; of thickness indicated. 

1. Unless otherwise noted, provide 1” thick, 1½ lb/cu.ft. density fiberglass duct liner 

meeting ASTM C-1071 Type I, NFPA 90A and 90B, and TIMA AHC-101, with 

minimum NRC (noise reduction coefficient) of 0.70 as tested per ASTM C-423 

using an “A” mounting with minimum “K” factor of 0.25. Liner shall be U.L. 

approved, made from flame attenuated glass fiber bonded with a thermosetting 

resin with acrylic smooth surface treatment and factory applied edge coating. 

Materials shall conform to revised NFPA 90A standards, with a maximum flame 

spread rating of 25 and a maximum smoke development rating of 50. 

D. Duct Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C-916, “Specifications for Adhesives for Duct 

Thermal Insulation.” 

E. Duct Liner Fasteners: Comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Article 

S2.11. 

F. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, of type 

applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by 

manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork. 

G. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped 

galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. 

1. For exposed stainless steel ductwork, provide matching stainless steel support 

materials. 

2. For aluminum ductwork, provide aluminum support materials, except where 

materials are electrolytically separated from ductwork. 



03/16/2012 


H. Flexible Ducts: Flexible air ducts shall be listed under UL-181 standards as Class I Air Duct 

Material and shall comply with NFPA Standards 90A and 90B. Minimum operating 

pressure rating shall be 6” W.C. through a temperature range of -20° to 150°F; minimum 

working velocity rating shall be 4000 f.p.m. Contractor shall assume responsibility for 

supplying material approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 

1. All insulated flexible ducts shall be constructed of a metalized ripstop reinforced 

laminate inner core; 1-1/2” thick, ¾ lb./cu.ft. density fiberglass insulation with 

“C” factor of 0.23 or less; and an outer jacket made exclusively of fire retardant 

reinforced aluminized material. 



03/16/2012 

a. Flexmaster Type 5M. 

I. Duct Takeoff Fittings: Provide spin-in fittings at flexible or round sheet metal duct takeoffs 

to air devices. Fittings downstream of air terminals shall include butterfly type manual 

volume damper with end bearings, regulator, and locking device. 

J. See details on drawings for installation requirements. 

K. All fasteners and hardware for stainless steel ductwork shall be made of stainless steel. 

2.04 FABRICATION: 

A. Fabricate ductwork in 4, 8, 10, or 12-ft lengths, unless otherwise indicated or as required 

to complete runs. Pre-assemble work in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize 

field assembly of systems. Disassemble systems only to extent necessary for shipping and 

handling. Match-mark systems for reassembly and coordinated installation. 

B. Fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with SMACNA “HVAC Duct 

Construction Standards.” Use minimum 26 ga. where ducts are within corridors. 

1. Where the Standard allows the choice of external reinforcing or internal tie rods, 

only the external reinforcing options shall be used. 

2. If manufacturer flange joining systems are used as part of the reinforcing, the EI 

rating and rigidity class shall be equivalent to the reinforcing requirements of the 

Standard. Submit manufacturer’s product data. 

3. Aluminum duct shall be fabricated using the aluminum thickness equivalence table 

in the Standard. Simply increasing the thickness by two gauges is not acceptable. 

C. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as 

applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line 

radius equal to 1.5 times the associated duct width; fabricate to include turning vanes in 

elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30 deg. for contracting 

tapers and 20 deg. for expanding tapers. Divided flow fittings shall be 45° inlet branches, 

stationary splitters and elbows, or as shown on drawings. 

D. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent 

possible. Refer to Division 23 section “Ductwork Accessories” for accessory requirements. 

E. Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where indicated. Laminate liner 

to internal surfaces of duct in accordance with instructions by manufacturers of lining and 


adhesive, and fasten with mechanical fasteners. Provide sheet metal nosing on all leading 

edges preceded by unlined duct, at duct openings, and at fan or terminal unit connections. 

2.05 LOW PRESSURE ROUND DUCTWORK: 

A. Material: Galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A-527, lockforming quality, with 

ASTM A-525, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. Spiral lockseam construction. 

Individual runouts to diffusers may be longitudinal seam. 

B. Gauge: 28 gauge minimum for round and oval ducts and fittings 4” through 24” in 

diameter. Minimum 26 gauge where ducts are within a corridor. 

C. Elbows: One-piece construction for 90 deg. and 45 deg. elbows 14” diameter and 

smaller. Provide multiple gore construction for larger diameters, with standing seam 

circumferential joint. Radius to centerline shall be 1.5 times duct diameter. Spot-welded 

D. Divided Flow Fittings: 90 deg. tees, constructed with branch spot-welded and bonded to 

duct fitting body. 

2.06 MEDIUM AND HIGH PRESSURE ROUND AND FLAT OVAL DUCTWORK: 

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated duct and fittings. 

B. Duct gauges given below are minimum values; in no case shall the duct gauge be less 

than that recommended by SMACNA for the operation pressures of the systems shown on 

the drawings (both positive and negative pressures), including proper reinforcement. 

C. Elbows: One-piece construction for 90 deg. and 45 deg. elbows 14” diameter and 

smaller. Provide multiple gore construction for larger diameters, with standing seam 

circumferential joint. Radius to centerline shall be 1.5 times duct diameter. Fully welded 

construction. 

D. Divided Flow Fittings: Full body fittings with solid welded construction. Provide conical 

laterals, conical tees, 45° inlet tees, wye fittings, or as shown on drawings. Straight tap 

tees shall not be used. 

E. Round Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A-527 by the 

following methods and in minimum gauges listed. 

Diameter Minimum Gauge Method of Manufacture 

3” to 14” 26 Spiral Lockseam 





Over 60” 

16 

18 

Longitudinal Seam 

Spiral Lockseam 

1. Provide locked seams for spiral duct; fusion-welded butt seam for longitudinal 

seam duct. Provide internal stiffener rings and external reinforcement as required 

to meet operating static pressures scheduled on drawings. 



03/16/2012 


2. Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide continuous 

welds along seams. 



03/16/2012 

Diameter Minimum Gauge 

3” to 14” 24 

15” to 26” 22 

28” to 50” 20 

52” to 60” 18 

Over 62” 16 

F. Flat-Oval Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A-527, 

using spiral lockseam construction, in minimum gauges listed. 



Maximum Width Minimum Gauge 

Under 25” 24 

25” to 48” 22 

49” to 70” 20 

Over 70” 18 (or 16 ga. with longitudinal welded seam) 

1. Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide continuous 

weld along seams. 

Maximum Width Minimum Gauge 

Under 37” 20 

37” to 59” 18 

Over 59” 16 

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. 

Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK: 

A. Duct Sealing: 

1. Seal all low-pressure ducts to SMACNA Seal Class “B”. 

2. Seal all medium and high-pressure ducts to SMACNA Seal Class “A”. 

B. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices, 

which will achieve airtight and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems capable of 

performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align 

ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8” misalignment tolerance and with internal 

surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of 

types that will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling, popping or compressing. 

Support vertical ducts at every floor. 

C. onstruct ductwork to schedule of operating pressures as shown on drawings. 


D. Inserts: Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with formwork, as 

required to avoid delays in work. 

E. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shopfabricated 

work and accommodate installation requirements. 

F. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally 

and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details 

and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not 

obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold 

ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent 

enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to ½” where furring is shown for enclosure 

or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate 

insulated ductwork for 1” clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished 

and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow 

wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid 

partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and 

lighting layouts and similar finished work. 

G. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route ductwork through transformer vaults and their 

electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. 

H. Slope shower, locker room, and high moisture ductwork down to air device. 

I. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through fire rated walls and do not contain fire or smoke 

dampers, protect with fire stop material installed in accordance with its listing. Where 

ducts pass through interior partitions or exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal 

space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges 

of same gauge as duct. Overlap opening on all four sides by at least 1-1/2”, and fasten 

flange to duct only. Where ducts penetrate non-fire rated walls which are mechanically, 

electrically or acoustically sensitive, provide ½” to ¾” annular space between duct and 

wall, pack annular space with mineral wool insulation, and caulk both sides with nonhardening 

acoustical sealant. 

J. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil 

frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system. 

K. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction 

Standards. 

L. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air 

distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of 

polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until 

time connections are to be completed. 

3.03 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER: 

A. General: Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction 

Standards. 

3.04 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS: 



03/16/2012 


A. Maximum Length: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed 5’-0”. 

B. Installation: Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction 

Standards, Metal and Flexible.” 


A. Leakage Tests: Conduct duct leakage test in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct 

Leakage Test Manual. Repair leaks and repeat tests until total leakage is less than the 

maximum permissible leakage as specified below. 

B. General: 

1. Ductwork pressure tests shall be observed by Architect/Engineer prior to 

installation of insulation. 

2. Ductwork systems in 3” W.G. pressure class and higher shall be tested in their 

entirety for leaks. Arbitrary sections of ductwork in 2” W.G. and lower pressure 

class shall be tested as required by Architect/Engineer. 

3. Test Failures: Duct systems shall be repaired if test pressure and leakage 

requirements are not met or if air noise condition is encountered. Repairs and 

sealing shall be done with sheet metal, tape, sealant or a combination thereof. 

C. Test Equipment: 

1. Portable rotary type blower or tank type vacuum cleaner with control damper. 

Equipment shall have sufficient capacity to properly test reasonably large duct 

system section. 

2. Orifice assembly consisting of straightening vanes and calibrated orifice plate 

mounted in a straight tube with properly located pressure taps. 

3. Two (2) U-tube manometers, one to measure drop across calibrated orifice and 

one to measure S.P. in duct being tested. Provide low differential pressure Dwyer 

magnehelic gauges for low leak testing in lieu of U-tube manometers. 

4. Provide Dwyer magnehelic gauge with 0-.25” W.C. range for testing 0% leakage 

ductwork. 

D. Testing Pressures and Permissible Leakage: 

1. Test pressure shall be equal to the construction class. Negative pressure duct shall 

be tested at the equivalent positive pressure. 

2. Allowable leakage shall be determined from the following equation (or figure 4-1 

in the above referenced Standard): 

F = C L (P) .65 



03/16/2012 

Where: F = Allowable leakage factor in CFM/100 Sq. Ft. 

C L = Leakage Class 

P = Test pressure in inches W.C. 

3. Leakage class shall be as follows: 

a. Seal class A, round or oval duct: C L = 3. 

b. Seal class A, rectangular duct: C L = 6. 

c. Seal class B, round or oval duct: C L = 6. 




03/16/2012 

d. Seal class B, rectangular duct: C L = 12. 

e. Seal class C, round or oval duct: C L = 12. 

f. Seal class C, rectangular duct: C L = 24. 

4. Record all tests using the procedure and forms in the above referenced Standard. 

5. All plenums and casings shall be tested by pressurizing to the pressure class 

indicated and visually observing leakage and panel deflection. 

3.06 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: 

a. No noticeable leakage shall be allowed. 

b. Deflection shall be less than 1/8” per foot. 

A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated; provide flexible connection 

for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or 

equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors where required for 

service, maintenance and inspection of ductwork accessories. See Section 15910. 


A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external 

surfaces of foreign substances. Where ductwork is to be painted, clean and prepare 

surface for painting. 

B. Protection: 

1. Store duct a minimum of 4” above ground or floor to avoid damage from weather 

or spills. 

2. Cover all stored ducts to protect from moisture or debris. 

3. Cover all ends of installed ductwork at the end of each workday or when dust- 

and debris-producing construction (such as fire proofing, drywalling, sanding, or 

core drilling) is occurring. 

C. Ductwork contaminated or damaged above “shop” or “mill” conditions shall be cleaned, 

repaired or replaced to the Engineer’s satisfaction. 

1. Ductliner pre-installed in stored duct which has become wet may be installed if 

first allowed to completely dry out. 

2. Ductliner in installed ductwork which has become wet must be completely 

removed and replaced. 

3. Torn ductliner may be repaired by coating with adhesive if damage is minor and 

isolated. Extensively damaged liner shall be replaced back to a straight cut joint. 

D. Strip protective paper from stainless ductwork surfaces, and repair finish wherever it has 

been damaged. 

E. Balancing: Refer to Division 23 section “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing” for air 

distribution balancing of metal ductwork; not work of this Section. Seal any leaks in 

ductwork that become apparent during the balancing process. 







03/16/2012 


DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 

A. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following: 


1. Manual Volume Dampers. 

2. Control Dampers. 

3. Counterbalanced Relief Dampers. 

4. Fire Dampers. 

5. Smoke Dampers. 

6. Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers 

7. Turning Vanes. 

8. Duct Hardware. 

9. Duct Access Doors. 

10. Flexible Connections. 

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork 

accessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in 


B. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of 

ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated. 

C. UL Compliance: Fire dampers shall be constructed, tested, and labeled in accordance 

with UL Standard 555, "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers," and U.L. Standard 555S, 

"Motor-Driven Fire/Smoke Dampers." 

D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A, "Air Conditioning 

and Ventilating Systems," pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories. 

E. SMACNA Compliance: All exhaust ducts shall comply with "Fire Damper and Heat Stop 

Guide." 

F. All fire dampers, smoke dampers, fire/smoke dampers and radiation dampers shall meet 

the latest local building code requirements. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork 

accessory, including dimensions, capacities, materials of construction, and installation 

instructions. 

23 3300 - 1 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES


ductwork accessory, showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening 

or support, and methods of assembly of components. Include details of construction 

equipment and accessories being provided. 

C. Submittals for all damper types specified in this Section shall include a schedule for each 

damper indicating net free area, actual face velocity and pressure drop (at sea level) 

based on net free area, and the maximum air quantity which will be passing through the 

damper. Submittals without this information will be rejected. 



E. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each 

type of duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in the 

Operating and Maintenance Manual, in accordance with requirements of Division 15. 





1. Dampers: 



03/16/2012 

a. Greenheck 

b. AWV 

c. Air Balance, Inc. 

d. Anemostat 

e. Arrow Louver and Damper; Div. of Arrow United Industries, Inc. 

f. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. 

g. Penn Ventilator Co. 

h. Dowco Corp. 

i. Airstream Products, Inc. 

j. Cesco-Advanced Air 

k. Phillips Industries, Inc., Conaire Division 

l. Ruskin 

m. Vent Products, Inc. 

2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: 

a. Greenheck 

b. Air Balance, Inc. 

c. Phillips Industries, Inc., Conaire Division 

d. Ruskin 

3. Turning Vanes: 

a. Aero Dyne Co. 

b. Airsan Corp. 

c. Barb-Aire 




03/16/2012 

d. Duro Dyne Corp. 

e. Environmental Elements Corp., Subs. of Koppers Co., Inc. 

f. Hart & Cooley Mfg. Co. 

4. Duct Hardware: 

a. Ventfabrics, Inc. 

b. Young Regulator Co. 

5. Duct Access Doors: 

a. Kess 

b. Greenheck 

c. Flexmaster (Inspector Series) 

d. Cesco-Advanced Air 

e. Duro Dyne Corp. 

f. Ventfabrics, Inc. 

6. Flexible Connections: 

a. Duro Dyne Corp. 

b. Ventfabrics, Inc. 

c. General Rubber Corp. (Process Exhaust Only) 

7. Constant Velocity Exhaust Fan Dampers: 

2.02 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS: 

a. American Warming and Ventilating 

A. Low Pressure Rectangular Dampers (less than 2000 FPM and under 4” W.C. S.P. 

Differential): 

1. For 12” in height or larger, use multiple opposed blade type and close fitted to 

ducts. The frame and blades shall be constructed of 16 ga. galvanized steel with 

carbon steel shaft mounted with oil-impregnated bronze/stainless steel bearings. 

Dampers shall be fitted with aluminum/stainless steel jamb seals and dual 

durometer vinyl/silicone blade edge seals. Linkage shall be in-jamb fixed type 

located outside the air stream and made of plated steel tie bar and crank plates, 

with stainless steel pivots. / on-blade fixed type located within the air stream and 

made of galvanized steel interconnected with plated steel brackets and pivots. 

Damper panels shall not exceed 48” wide. Provide jack shafting when duct size 

required is greater than 48” wide. Provide notched shaft end indicating damper 

position, locking quadrant to fix damper position, and handle. For flat oval and 

round ductwork, provide type C housing. 

2. For ducts less than 12” in height, frame shall be 16 ga. galvanized steel, with 20 

ga. galvanized steel blades, steel axle with nylon bearings, locking quadrant 

handle, and notched shaft end indicating damper position. 

OR 

Aluminum frame with stainless steel bearings. 


B. Low Pressure Round Dampers (less than 1500 FPM and under 1” W.C. S.P. differential): 

1. Dampers 4” diameter through 18” diameter shall have 18 ga. galvanized steel 

frame and the following blade construction: 

4”-12” diameter, 22 ga. galvanized steel; 13”-18” diameter, 20 ga. galvanized 

steel. 



03/16/2012 

Axle shaft shall be carbon steel with retainers mounted on nylon bearings with 

notched end shaft indicating damper position, locking quadrant and handle. 

C. Medium/High Pressure Rectangular Dampers (less than 4000 FPM and under 6” W.C. S.P. 

(48” wide or less) or 8” W.C. S.P. (36” wide or less)): 

1. Dampers shall be opposed blade for volume control and parallel blade for 

isolation/shut-off service. 

2. Frame shall be 16 ga. galvanized steel with welded corners / 1/8 inch thick 6063- 

T5 alloy aluminum frame. Blades shall be double skin galvanized steel with 

single-lock seam / .081" thick 6060-T5 extruded aluminum, airfoil shape. Blade 

edge seals shall be double durometer vinyl and metallic compression seals at the 

jambs. Axles shall be solid carbon steel mounted on bronze oilite bearings. 

Linkage shall be in-jamb type located outside the airstream. Maximum damper 

size shall be 48” wide and 60” high. For fixed position balancing damper, delete 

blades to maintain 30% free area with all other damper blades 100% closed. For 

isolation or shut-off duty, damper leakage shall not exceed 9.5 CFM/sq.ft. at 4” 

W.C. S.P. differential. Provide extended shaft with notched end indicating damper 

position, locking quadrant, and handle. 

Air Balance Model AC-S15/AC-S16 (steel) 

OR 

Air Balance Model AC-52S/AC-S26 (aluminum) 

D. Medium/High Pressure Round and Flat Oval Dampers (less than 3000 FPM and under 4” 

W.C. S.P. differential): 

1. Damper frame construction shall be galvanized steel as follows: 

ROUND 

Under 6” diameter 12 gauge 

6” to 18” diameter 14 gauge 

20” to 30” diameter 2 x 1/2 x 1/8 channel 

32” to 42” diameter 2 x 1 x 1/8 channel 

FLAT OVAL 

6” to 18” wide 2 x 1/2 x 14 gauge channel 

19” to 48” wide 2 x 1/2 x 1/8 channel 

49” to 72 wide ( 6” to 18” high) 2 x 1/2 x 1/8 channel 

(19” to 26” high) 2 x 1/2 x 1/8 channel 

2. Amper blades shall be galvanized steel as follows: 




03/16/2012 

ROUND 




FLAT OVAL 

6” to 12” wide 14 gauge 



3. Axles shall be ½” diameter galvanized steel up to 18” diameter and 18” wide flat 

oval, and ¾” diameter plated steel sleeve pressed into the frame with stainless 

steel thrust washers with nylon/oil impregnated bronze bearings for larger sizes. 

4. Provide notched end shaft to indicate damper position, locking quadrant, and 

lever handle. 

5. For fixed position balancing damper, provide reduced blade area to provide 30% 

free area with damper 100% closed. 

6. Isolation or shut-off service dampers shall be provided with EPT edge seals with a 

leakage rate not to exceed 7 CFM/sq.ft. at 1” W.C. S.P. differential (based on 18” 

diameter). 

2.03 COUNTERBALANCED PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS: 

A. For velocities less than 3000 FPM and under 2” W.C. S.P. differential, provide dampers 

with parallel blades, counterbalanced and factory-set, field adjustable, to relieve at 

indicated static pressure. Construct blades of 16 ga. aluminum, and provide ½” diameter 

ball bearings, with ½” diameter steel axles spaced on 9” centers. Construct frame of 2” x 

½” x 1/8” steel channel for face areas 25 sq. ft. and under, and 4” x 1-1/4” x 16 ga. 

channel for face areas over 25 sq. ft. Provide galvanized steel finish on frame with 

aluminum touch-up. 

B. For velocities above 3000 FPM and static pressure differential above 2” W.C., provide 

dampers with parallel blades, counterbalanced and factory-set, field adjustable to start to 

open at indicated pressure. Construct blades of 16 gauge galvanized steel up to 32” 

length and 14 gauge over 32” length, ¾” diameter plated steel full length axles, 

relubricable ball bearings, heavy duty carbon steel linkage located out of airstream, 10 

gauge galvanized steel frame, silicone blade edge seals and silicone jamb seal, full 

flanges on both sides, mill finish with touch-up on welds, and prime coat on black steel. 

2.04 FIRE DAMPERS: 

A. Fabricated Fire Dampers: Provide dampers constructed in accordance with SMACNA "Fire 

Damper and Heat Stop Guide." 

B. Fire Dampers: Provide dynamic rated type B or C fire dampers except as noted on 

drawings. Construct sleeve of galvanized steel with bonded red acrylic enamel finish, 

gauge as required by the listing. All fire dampers shall be UL labeled. Provide fusible link 

rated at 160 to 165 deg. F (71 to 74 deg. C) unless otherwise indicated. See architectural 

drawings for the separations and listings. Provide horizontal mounted fire damper with 

positive lock in closed position, and with the following additional features: 


1. Damper Blade Assembly: Curtain Type. 

2. Blade Material: Galvanized steel. 

C. Provide integral sleeve type G fire dampers for sidewall air devices terminating at fire rated 

walls. Ruskin DIBD20-G or equivalent. 

2.05 SMOKE DAMPERS: 

A. Motor-Driven Smoke Dampers: Provide UL labeled, Class II, motor-driven smoke 

dampers in sizes indicated, with frame constructed of 16-ga. steel, type 304 stainless steel 

side seals, silicone edge seals, bronze oilite or stainless steel sleeve bearings, airfoil 

shaped galvanized steel formed interlocking blades, with factory mounted actuator motor, 

motor mounting bracket, along with the following features: 

1. Temperature Class 350°F. 

2. Out-of-airstream in-jamb linkage with stainless steel pivots. 

3. Factory sleeve. 

4. Factory mounted 24V/120V spring return electric actuator. 

B. Where indicated on drawings, or where required by the sequence of controls, provide 

factory mounted blade position switches to indicate fully open and fully closed. 

C. Damper actuator shall fail open or close (upon coordination with smoke control) upon loss 

of power. 

D. UL 555S & Class II 

E. Leakage not greater than 10 CFM per square foot at 1” W.C. pressure differential. 

F. Ruskin Model SD60-II 

2.06 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS: 

A. Provide UL labeled, Class II minimum, motor-driven combination fire/smoke dampers in 

sizes indicated, with type 304 stainless steel side seals, combination silicone/galvanized 

steel edge seals, bronze oilite or stainless steel sleeve bearings, airfoil shaped galvanized 

steel parallel acting blades along with the following features. 

1. Out-of-airstream in-jamb linkage with stainless steel pivots. 

2. Factory sleeve, red enamel finish, caulked and attached to damper in accordance 

with UL fire damper requirements. 

B. Provide factory mounted pneumatic spring return actuator, 120V/24V electro pneumatic 

valve, and an automatic reset thermal release device set to close the damper at 

165°F/212°F. In addition, provide a second manual reset thermal release device set to 

close the damper when the duct temperature is above the damper's degradation 

temperature. Provide factory mounted and wired terminal strip to allow field connection of 

normal and override circuits. "Normal" circuit shall be through both thermal release 

devices; "override" circuit shall bypass first thermal release device but shall include second 

high limit device. The damper shall at all times be connected to the actuator. Damper 

closure shall be controlled to not less than 7 seconds and not more than 15 seconds. 



03/16/2012 


Replaceable fusible elements are not acceptable. Actuator shall be suitable for 20 psi 

control air. 

C. Where indicated on the drawings or indicated in the sequence of control, provide factory 

mounted blade position switches to indicate fully open and fully closed. 

D. Damper actuator shall fail closed upon loss of power/control air. 

E. 1½-hour or 3-hour rating as required by construction type. 

F. UL 555, 555S, Class II, 350°F. 

G. Suitable for vertical or horizontal mounting. 

H. Leakage not greater than 10 CFM per square foot at 1” W.C. pressure differential. 

I. Ruskin FSD60 

2.07 TURNING VANES: 

A. Fabricated Turning Vanes: Provide fabricated 24 gauge double bladed, 4-1/2” radius, 3- 

1/4” spacing turning vanes and type 2, 4-1/2” wide runners, constructed in accordance 

with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Fig 2.3. 

B. Do not use trailing edge turning vanes. 

2.08 DUCT HARDWARE: 

A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on 

project, for the following: 

1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as 

indicated, duct test holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests. 

2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each manual volume damper, quadrant lock device 

on one end of shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 

12". Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for 

externally insulated ductwork. 

2.09 DUCT ACCESS DOORS: 

A. Access Doors for Low Pressure Rectangular Duct: Construct of same or greater gauge as 

ductwork served; provide double wall insulated doors for insulated ductwork. Provide flush 

frames for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for externally insulated duct. All access 

doors shall have gasket and shall be air tight. Provide one side hinged; provide other side 

with one handle-type latch for doors 12” high and smaller, two handle-type latches for 

larger doors. Where a hinged door cannot be fully opened, a removable door may be 

used. 

B. Access Doors for Medium and High Pressure Rectangular Duct: Insulated double wall 

round door and frame arranged for "Spin-In" installation, with continuous gasket in frame 

for door. Leakage of less than 0.5 CFM at 6” W.G. 



03/16/2012 


Flexmaster "Inspector Series Spin Door," or equivalent. 

C. Access Doors for Round Duct 20” and Less: Sandwich type door, constructed of an 

insulated double wall outer door connected to gasketed inner plate carriage bolts with 

hand knobs, and formed to fit the radius of the duct. 

Ductmate "Sandwich" or equivalent. 

D. Access Door for Round Duct Greater Than 20”: 18” round insulated double wall access 

door in gasketed frame, attached to duct section similar to tee fitting. 

E. Access Doors for Flat Oval Duct: Use door specified for medium and high pressure 

rectangular duct in flat portion; use door specified for round duct in curved portion. 

2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: 

A. General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibrationisolated 

equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric 

crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. 

Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional 

movement, and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment. Shelf life 

shall be verified to not exceed six (6) months. Any sign of cracking on interior or exterior 

shall be cause for replacement immediately. 

B. Use the following product types for each application accordingly: 



1. Indoor Equipment Non-Corrosive Air Systems: Heavy glass fabric, double-coated 

with DuPont's NEOPRENE, noncombustible fabric, fire retardant coating with good 

resistance to abrasion and flexing. Fabric shall be 30 oz per square yard, capable 

of operating at -10°F to 2000°F, waterproof, air tight, 6 inches wide, compliant 

with NFPA 90 and UL Standard #214. “Ventglas" model as manufactured by 

VentFabrics, Inc. 

2. Outdoor Equipment Non-Corrosive Air Systems (exposed to weather and sun): 

Heavy glass fabric, double-coated with DuPont's HYPALON, non-combustible 

fabric, fire retardant coating with superb resistance to sunlight, ozone and 

weather, and which has documented 20-year-old exposure tests. Fabric shall be 

26 oz. per square yard, capable of operating at -10°F to 250°F, waterproof, air 

tight, 6 inches wide, and compliant with NFPA 90 and UL Standard #214. 

“Ventlon” Model as manufactured by VentFabrics, Inc. 

3. High Temperature Non-Corrosive Air Systems: Heavy glass fabric coated with 

silicone rubber, non-combustible fabric, fire retardant coating, capable of 

operating and maintaining flexibility between temperatures of -25°F to 500°F. 

Fabric shall be 16 oz. per square yard, waterproof, air tight, 6 inches wide, and 

compliant with NFPA 90, UL Standard #214. “Ventsil” Model as manufactured by 

VentFabrics, Inc. 



03/16/2012 


A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not 

proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner 

acceptable to the Engineer. 

3.02 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES: 

A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, 

with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in 

accordance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that products serve intended 

function. 

B. Install turning vanes in square and rectangular 90 deg. elbows in supply, return and 

exhaust air systems, and elsewhere as indicated. 

C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either 

side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter. 

D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of 

ductwork accessories properly with other work. 

E. Provide duct access doors, whether shown or not, for inspection and cleaning upstream of 

all coils, fans, automatic dampers, fire dampers (minimum 16” x 24” in ducts larger than 

18”), fire/smoke dampers, duct smoke detectors and elsewhere as indicated. Review 

locations prior to fabrication. Provide multiple access doors for large ductwork to provide 

adequate reach to equipment. 

F. Install fire dampers and smoke dampers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

G. Provide fire dampers and smoke dampers at locations shown where ducts and outlets pass 

through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 

H. Provide balancing dampers at points on low-pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems 

where branches are taken from larger ducts and as required for air balancing. 

I. Provide balancing dampers on high-pressure systems where indicated. Use splitter 

dampers only where indicated on Drawings. 

J. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with 

fans and equipment subject to forced vibration. Provide matching flanged backing frame 

with flexible connector where flanged fan connections are provided. 


A. Operate installed ductwork accessories after installation to demonstrate compliance with 

requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty 

accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance. 

B. After installation, test all fire and fire/smoke dampers for proper operation. Provide letter 

to the Architect/Engineer certifying this work is complete and all dampers are functioning 

properly. 



03/16/2012 



A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings. Install fusible links in fire 

dampers and adjust for proper action. 

B. Label access doors in accordance with Division 15 section "Mechanical Identification.” 

C. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division 15 section "Testing, Adjusting, 

and Balancing." 

D. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with 


3.05 EXTRA STOCK: 

A. Furnish extra fusible links to Owner, one link for every 10 installed of each temperature 

range; obtain receipt. 



03/16/2012 







03/16/2012 


HVAC FANS 

A. Extent of air handling equipment work required by this section is indicated on drawings and 

schedules, and by requirements of this section. 

B. This Section includes the following types of air-handling equipment: 

1. Centrifugal fans. 

2. Utility set fans. 

3. Tubular centrifugal fans. 

4. Inline centrifugal fans. 

5. Axial fans. 

6. Propeller fans. 

7. Pre-fabricated roof curbs. 

C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for vibration control; control system; sequence of 

operation; testing, adjusting and balancing. 

D. Refer to Division 16 section for the following work; not work of this section. 

1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connections at air handling units. 

E. Refer to Section 230513 for requirements of sheaves and belts for critical areas. 


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air handling 

equipment of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar 



1. Fans Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power air density, speed of 

rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA 

Standard 210/ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. 

2. UL Compliance: Provide air handling equipment which are listed by UL and have UL 

label affixed. 

3. UL Compliance: Provide air handling equipment which are designed, manufactured, 

and tested in accordance with UL 705 "Power Ventilators." 

4. NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and electrical accessories complying with NEMA 

standards. 

5. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for 

Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from laboratory Test Data." Test fans in accordance 

with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating." 

23 3413 - 1 HVAC FANS


6. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Fans and 

components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term “NRTL” shall be defined in 

OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 

7. Electrical Component Standards: Components and installation shall comply with 

NFPA 70 "National Electrical-Code." 

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for air handling equipment including 

specifications, capacity ratings, dimensions, weights, materials, operating service/access 

clearance accessories furnished, and installation instructions. 

B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construction 

details, methods of assembly of components, and field connection details. 

C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to 

air-handling units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and 

control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are manufacturer-installed 

and portions to be field-installed. 

D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products; in 

accordance with requirements of Division 23. 

E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of power and gravity 

ventilator, accessory, and control. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring 

diagrams in maintenance manuals in accordance with requirements of Division 23. 


A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. 

B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following 


C. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, 

with protective crating and covering. 


A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into 

pad. 

B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. 

C. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members. 

1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS: 

A. Furnish one additional complete set of belts for each belt-driven fan. 



03/16/2012 

23 3413 - 2 HVAC FANS




following: 

1. Centrifugal Fans: 



03/16/2012 

a. Buffalo Forge Co. 

b. Loren Cook Co. 

c. New York Blower Co. 

d. Trane Co. 

e. Twin City Fan and Blower Co. 

f. Greenheck 

g. York; Division of York International 

2. Utility Sets: 

a. Buffalo 


c. New York Blower Cc. 

d. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc. 

e. Trane Co. 

f. Twin City Fan and Blower Co. 

g. Greenheck 

3. Tubular Centrifugal Fans: 

a. Buffalo 


c. New York Blower Co. 

d. Twin City Fan and Blower Co. 

e. Greenheck 

4. Inline Centrifugal Fans: 

a. Buffalo 


c. Penn Ventilator Co. 

d. Jenn Industries Inc. 

e. New York Blower Co. 

f. Greenheck 

5. Propeller Fans: 

a. Aerovent Inc. 

b. Carnes Company, Inc. 

c. Loren Cook Co. 

d. Jenn Industries, Inc. 

e. New York Blower Co. 

f. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc. 

g. Greenheck 

23 3413 - 3 HVAC FANS

2.02 FANS, GENERAL: 

6. Vaneaxial Fans: 



03/16/2012 

a. Aerovent, Inc. 

b. New York Blower Co. 

c. Trane Co. 

d. Twin City Fan and Blower Co. 

e. Flakt 

f. Greenheck 

7. Prefabricated Roof Curbs 

a. Greenheck 

b. Custom Curb, Inc. 

c. Pate Co. 

d. S & L Manufacturing Co. 

e. ThyCurb Div.; Thybar Corp. 

A. General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory 

finished, with indicated capacities and characteristics. 

B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation 

at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. 

1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 

70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fan's class. 

C. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 

1. Service Factor: 1.5. 

D. Belts: Oil-resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic. 

E. Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 HP; fixed pitch 

for use with motors larger than 5 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the middle of 

the adjustment range at fan design conditions. Provide energy efficient motor. 

1. Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the fan 

cabinet. 

F. Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median life "Rating Life" AFBMA L50 of 

200,000 hours calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and 

AFBMA Standard 11 for roller bearings. 

G. Factory Finish: The following finishes are required: 

1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coating prior to final assembly. 

2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel or electrostatically applied baked polyester powder 

finish coat after assembly. 

H. Vibration: Provide vibration isolators as specified in Section 230548 and as indicated. 

23 3413 - 4 HVAC FANS

2.03 CENTRIFUGAL FANS: 

A. General Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, 

bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure. 

B. Housings: Fabricated from formed and reinforced galvanized steel panels to form curved 

scroll housings with continuously welded or deep-locked seams and access doors or panels to 

allow access to internal parts and components. 

1. Inlet Cones: Spun metal. 

2. Duct Connections: Flanged. 

3. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and 

supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories. 

C. Fan Wheels: Single-width, single-inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun steel 

inlet cone, with hub keyed to the shaft. 

D. Fan Wheels: Double-width, double-inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun steel 


1. Blade Materials: Steel. 

2. Blade Type: Backward-curved, flat-plate type. 

3. Blade Type: Backward-curved, airfoil type. 

4. Blade Type: Forward-curved, airfoil type. 

E. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillowblock type ball bearings. 

F. Accessories: The following accessories are required. 

2.04 UTILITY SET FANS: 

1. Scroll Bypass Dampers: Aluminum, opposed, airfoil blades with extruded vinyl seals 

on blades, low-friction bearings, and positive control linkage for manual or automatic 

operation. 

2. Scroll Housing Access Doors: Latch-type handles; flush-mounted for uninsulated 

housings and raised-mounted for insulated housings. 

3. Inlet Vanes: Radial vanes with linkage for manual or automatic operation. 

a. Double-Width Fans Inlet Vanes: Connected for single operator. 

4. Inlet Screens- Heavy wire mesh screens, mounted inside of shaft bearings. 

5. Discharge Dampers: Heavy-gauge steel, opposed blade design, with linkage for 

manual or automatic operation. 

6. Drain Connections: Threaded, 3/4-inch NPS, capped nipple installed at lowest point 

of housing. 

7. Shaft Cooler: Metal disc between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate heat 

from shaft. 

8. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA construction option A, B, or C as indicated. 

9. Shaft Seals: Air-tight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans. 

10. Special Coatings: Provide protective coatings on fans as indicated. 

11. Extended Grease Lines: Extend grease lines from bearings to a convenient, visible 

location and terminate with grease fitting. 

A. General Description: Belt-driven, centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, 

bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories. 



03/16/2012 

23 3413 - 5 HVAC FANS

B. Housings: Fabricated from heavy-gauge steel with side sheets fastened to scroll sheets by 

means of continuously welding seams. Scroll wrapper shall be 14 ga. steel; scroll side panels 

shall be 12 ga. steel; bearing support shall be 10 ga. welded steel. 

1. Inlet: Round duct collar. 

2. Discharge: Slip-joint duct connection. 

3. Housings Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to 8 standard positions. 

C. Fan Wheels: Single-width, single-inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun steel 


1. Blade Materials: Steel. 

2. Blade Type: Backward-curved, die-formed. 

3. Blade Type: Forward-curved, die-formed. 

D. Shaft Bearings: Heavy duty regreaseable ball or roller type in a cast iron pillowblock housing. 

E. Accessories: The following accessories are required where indicated: 

1. Backdraft Dampers: Gravity-actuated with counterweight and interlocking aluminum 

blades and felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge. 

2. Access Doors: Gasketed doors with latch-type handles. 

3. Scroll Dampers: Single-blade damper installed at fan scroll top with adjustable 

linkage. 


5. Inlet Screens: Removable, heavy wire mesh. 

6. Drain Connections: 3/4-inch, threaded coupling drain connection installed at lowest 

point of housing. 

7. Weather Hoods: Weather-resistant with stamped vents over motor and drive 

compartment. 


2.05 TUBULAR CENTRIFUGAL FANS: 

A. A. General Description: Tubular, inline, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, 

wheel, outlet guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor and disconnect switch, 

mounting brackets, and accessories. 

B. Housings: Fabricated from formed and reinforced galvanized steel panels with welded seams. 

1. Duct Connections: Spun inlet cones with flange removable for access to internal 

parts, and an outlet flange. 

2. Mounting Brackets: Suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting. 

3. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning. 

4. Fan Wheels: Single-width, single-inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun 

steel inlet cone, with hub keyed to the shaft. 



03/16/2012 

a. Blade Materials: Steel. 

b. Blade Type: Backward-curved, flat-plate type. 

c. Blade Type: Backward-curved, airfoil type. 

C. Shaft Bearings: Pre-lubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillowblock-type ball bearings. 

23 3413 - 6 HVAC FANS

D. Accessories: The following accessories are required where indicated: 

1. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet connections. 

2. Weather Cover: Heavy-gauge, galvanized, sheet steel with ventilation slots, bolted to 

housing. 

3. Belt Guard: Manufacturer's standard to meet OSHA requirements. 

4. Ceiling Brackets: Structural angles welded and drilled for hanger rod attachment. 

5. Inlet Vanes: Radial vanes with linkage suitable for manual or automatic operation. 

6. Access Doors: Located over wheel in an accessible position, hinged and having latchtype 

handles; flush mounted for uninsulated housings, raised-mounted for insulated 

housings. 


8. Inlet and Outlet Screens: Removable, heavy wire mesh. 


10. Drain Connections: Provide 3/4" threaded coupling drain connection at lowest point 

of housing. 

2.06 INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS: 

A. General Description: Inline, belt-driven, centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet 

guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor and disconnect switch, mounting 

brackets, and accessories. 

B. Housing: Split, spun-aluminum housing, with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet 

flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting. 

C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory-wired to disconnect 

located on outside of fan housing. 

D. Belt-Drive Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure 

around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside 

of fan housing. 

E. Wheel: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub. 

F. Bearings: Grease lubricated ball or roller anti-friction type with extended lubrication lines to 

outside fan housing. 

G. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated: 

2.07 AXIAL FANS: 

1. Volume Control Damper: Manual operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet. 

2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections. 

3. Fan Guards: Expanded metal in removable frame. 

4. Speed Control: Variable speed switch with on-off control and speed control for 100 to 

50 percent of fan air delivery. 

A. General Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive as indicated, axial fans consisting of housing, 

wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories. 

B. Housing: welded steel. 



03/16/2012 

23 3413 - 7 HVAC FANS

C. Fan Wheel: Steel hub and blades. 

D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following features: 

1. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch. 

2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball 

bearings. 

3. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub. 

E. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated: 

2.08 PROPELLER FANS: 

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal overload protection mounted inside 

fan housing, factory-wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 

2. Dampers: Motor-operated, parallel-blade, volume control dampers mounted in curb 

base. 



03/16/2012 

a. Blades: Die-formed sheet aluminum. 

b. Frame: Extruded aluminum, with waterproof, felt blade bumpers. 

c. Linkage: Nonferrous metals. 

d. Operators: Manufacturer's standard electric motor. 

A. General Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive propeller fans as indicated consisting of fan 

blades, hub, housing, orifice ring, motor, drive, and accessories. 

B. Housings: Galvanized, sheet steel with flanged edges, and integral orifice ring. 

C. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, cast-aluminum blades fastened to cast- aluminum hub. Factory set 

pitch angle of blades. 

D. Drive Assembly: Direct-drive or belt-driven as indicated. 

E. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following features: 

1. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch. 

2. Shaft Bearings: Heavy duty regreaseable ball or roller type in a cast iron pillowblock 

housing. 

3. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub. 

4. Motor and Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing. 

F. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated: 

1. Belt Guards: Expanded metal with reinforced edges. 

2. Gravity Shutters: Gravity-type shutters with aluminum blades in steel frames, mounted 

on discharge side of fan. 

2.09 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS: 

A. Furnish and install roof curbs as scheduled for duct openings through the roof and for exhaust 

fan support. The curbs shall be galvanized steel self-flashing type/with integral cant, for 

23 3413 - 8 HVAC FANS



flashing in the field. If the curbs are to have sound attenuation qualities, they shall be not less 

than those catalogued for the equipment specified. 

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances, housekeeping pads, and other conditions affecting performance of 

fans. 

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: 

A. Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Support 

units using vibration control devices as indicated. Vibration control devices are specified in 

Division 23 Section "Vibration Controls." 

1. Secure roof -mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. 



03/16/2012 

a. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7. 

2. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded 

steel rods and vibration isolation springs. 

B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and 

maintenance. 


A. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 23 sections. Make final duct 

connections on inlet and outlet duct connections with flexible connections. 

B. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be 

factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical 

Installer. 

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal 

and installation requirements of Division -26 sections. Ensure that rotation is in 

direction indicated and intended for proper performance. Do not proceed with 

centrifugal fan start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to centrifugal fan 

Installer. 

2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring are specified in Division 23. 

3. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National 

Electrical Code. 


23 3413 - 9 HVAC FANS

A. Upon completion of installation of air handling equipment, and after motor has been 

energized with normal power source, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with 

requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to 

demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected. 

B. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Arrange and pay f or a factory- authorized service 

representative to perform the following: 

1. Inspect the field assembly of components and installation of fans including ductwork 

and electrical connections. 

2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions. 

3.05 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING: 

A. Startup, test and adjust air handling equipment in presence of manufacturer's authorized 

representative. 

B. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 

C. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. 

Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet. 


A. General: Furnish to Owner with receipt one spare set of belts for each belt driven air handling 

equipment. 


A. Final Checks Before Start-Up: Perform the following operations and checks before start-up: 

1. Remove shipping blocking and bracing. 

2. Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for 

piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify proper thermal overload 

protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects. 

3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section. 

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan 

wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system, 

align belts, and install belt guards. 

5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended 

lubricants. 

6. Verify manual and automatic volume control and that fire and smoke dampers in 

connected ductwork systems are in the full-open position. 

7. Disable automatic temperature control operators. 

B. Starting procedures for fans: 

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. 

Adjust fan to indicated RPM. 

2. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. 

3. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage. 



03/16/2012 

23 3413 - 10 HVAC FANS

C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature control operators. 

D. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for airhandling-system 

testing, adjusting, and balancing. 

3.08 DEMONSTRATION: 

A. Demonstration Services: Arrange and pay for a factory-authorized service representative to 

train Owner's maintenance personnel on the following: 

1. Procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, 

servicing, preventative maintenance, and how to obtain replacement parts. 

2. Familiarization with contents of Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in 

Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" and Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical 

Requirements." 

B. Schedule training with at least 7 days, advance notice. 



03/16/2012 


23 3413 - 11 HVAC FANS





03/16/2012 


AIR TERMINALS 

A. Extent of air terminals work required by this Section is indicated on drawings and 

schedules, and by requirements of this Section. 

B. Types of air terminals specified in this Section include the following: 

1. Variable Air Volume Terminals 

a. Single-Duct with and without Reheat 

2. Fan-Powered Terminals 

a. Parallel 

b. Series 

C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for related work in addition to the requirements of this 

Section. 

D. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work, not work of this Section. 

1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on air terminals. 

Include disconnects and required electrical devices, except where specified as 

furnished or factory-installed by manufacturer. 

E. Provide the following electrical work as work of this Section, complying with requirements 



1. Control wiring between field-installed controls and air terminals. 

a. Control wiring specified as work of Division 23 for Automatic Temperature 

Controls is work of that section. 

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air terminals 

with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in 



1. ADC Compliance: Provide air terminals which have been tested and rated in 

accordance with ADC standards and bear ADC Seal. 

2. ARI Compliance: Provide air terminals which have been tested and rated in 

accordance with ARI 880, "Industry Standard for Air Terminals," and bear ARI 

23 3600 - 1 AIR TERMINAL UNITS


certification seal. Hot water coils shall have been tested and rated in accordance 

with ARI Standard 410. 

3. NFPA and UL Compliance: Air terminals shall be constructed using acoustical 

and thermal insulations complying with NFPA 90A, "Air Conditioning and 

Ventilating Systems," and UL 181. 

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including acoustical/thermal 

insulation characteristics and performance and sound data, for each size and type of air 

terminal furnished; schedule showing drawing designation, room location, quantity 

furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished; and installation and start-up 

instructions. 



components. 

C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder-type wiring diagrams for electric power and control 

components, clearly indicating required field electrical connections. 



E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of air terminal, 

including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, shop 

drawings, and maintenance data in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, in 

accordance with requirements of Division 23. 


A. Deliver air terminals wrapped in factory-fabricated fiberboard type containers. Identify on 

outside of container the type of air terminal and location of installation. Avoid crushing or 

bending, and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in boxes. 

B. Store air terminals in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work 

traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above 

grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. 




following: 

1. Air Terminals: 

a. Price 

b. Carnes 



03/16/2012 


2.02 AIR TERMINALS: 



03/16/2012 

c. Carrier 

d. Environmental Technologies 

e. Krueger 

f. Metal-Aire 

g. Titus 

h. Trane 

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated and tested air terminals as indicated, selected with 

performance characteristics which match or exceed those indicated on schedule. 

B. Air terminal units shall be of low pressure drop design, single-duct throttling-type, 

pressure-independent, and suitable for use in medium pressure variable volume air 

distribution systems. 

C. Casing shall be of minimum 22-gauge galvanized steel construction, with internal 

acoustical, coated, ½” thick, 1-½ lb./cu. ft. density fiberglass insulation and inlet and 

outlet duct connections. Gasketed and insulated quick-opening access doors shall be 

provided for air terminals with internally mounted serviceable components, including 

actuators and fan motors. Access doors shall allow for removal of fan and/or servicing of 

unit without disturbing ductwork and piping connections. 

D. Internal air volume damper blade shall be of extruded aluminum or 18-gauge steel with 

keyed fit shaft and nylon bushing. Damper shall be constructed to prevent air leakage in 

excess of 2% of rated air quantity at 4.0” w.g. inlet static pressure. All mechanical parts 

shall be galvanized or non-ferrous. 

E. Hot water heating coils shall be designed for 200 psig maximum working pressure and 

200°F maximum operating temperature. Coils shall be serpentine-type, constructed of ½” 

O.D. copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fins, with galvanized steel casting. 

F. Electric heating coils shall be constructed of electric resistance heating elements in a 

galvanized steel casing with integral control panel housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure, with 

hinged access door and factory wiring. Coils shall include primary automatic reset 

thermal cutout, secondary manual reset thermal cutout, line fuses, differential pressure air 

flow switch, door interlocking disconnect, magnetic contactors, terminal blocks for power 

and control connections, and UL listing as a duct heater. Provide a minimum of two 

stages for heaters 3 KW and above, except as otherwise indicated on drawings or 

schedules. 

G. All terminal units with electrical components shall be provided with a single-point electrical 

connection for the entire unit. All electrical components shall be UL listed and installed in 

accordance with the National Electrical Code. 

1. All line voltage electrical components shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure. 

2. The entire assembly shall be UL or ETL listed. 

3. Class II, 24V (AC), 40 VA transformer shall be provided for control power. 

H. Each terminal unit shall be provided with labeling showing plan designation, unit location, 

unit size, cfm range and settings, damper fail position, thermostat action, and calibration 

chart. 


2.03 FAN-POWERED TERMINALS: 

A. In addition to the above requirements for Air Terminals (Part 2.02), comply with the 

following: 

B. Fan section shall include a galvanized steel plenum, acoustically lined, housing a 

dynamically balanced fan with forward-curved blades, direct-driven from a permanent 

split-capacitor motor with SCR variable speed control, integral thermal overload 

protection, permanently-lubricated bearings, and fan contactor factory-wired to power and 

control terminal blocks in a sheet metal enclosure. Motor shall be specifically designed for 

use with an SCR for fan speed adjustment and shall include an anti-backward rotation 

device. Motor and fan shall be internally vibration-isolated from unit casing. 

1. For parallel variable air volume terminals, the fan shall be mounted in a separate 

compartment. The fan shall operate intermittently, drawing only plenum air. Unit 

shall include backdraft damper to prevent primary air from bypassing to the 

plenum. Damper shall be constructed of aluminum blades, gasketed to prevent 

leakage. 

2. For series constant volume terminals, the fan shall be mounted in a common 

compartment with the primary air damper. The fan shall operate continuously, 

drawing a mixture of plenum air and primary air. 

C. Fan controls shall be incorporated in a factory-assembled control panel and shall include 

pre-wired manual disconnect switch, a contractor, and a manually adjustable speed 

control for the fan, installed and wired by the terminal unit manufacturer. 

D. Units shall include filter rack and 1” thick throwaway filter, with side or rear access, on 

secondary air inlet. Provide two complete sets of filters. 

2.04 CONTROLS: 

A. Air terminal unit manufacturer shall mount DDC controller and actuator provided by 

temperature controls manufacturer. See Section 230900. 



A. Examine areas and conditions under which air terminals are to be installed. Do not 

proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.02 COORDINATION: 

A. The Contractor is responsible for determining the position of controls, actuators, and 

access. Coordinate each air terminal’s position with building elements, piping, conduit, 

ductwork and other items. Order left/right hand units as required, and inform all other 

trades as required. Relocate interfering items or terminal as required to provide proper 

access, if not coordinated beforehand. 



03/16/2012 


3.03 INSTALLATION OF AIR TERMINALS: 

A. General: Install air terminals as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's 


B. Location: Install each unit level and accurately in position indicated in relation to other 

work; and maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, but in no 

case less than that recommended by manufacturer. 

C. Duct Connections: Connect ductwork to air terminals in accordance with Division 23 

ductwork sections. 

1. Provide conical taps at medium-pressure branch duct takeoffs from main trunk 

duct to terminal units. 

2. Arrange medium-pressure branch ducts and takeoffs so that there are no more 

than two elbows or bends up to 90 degrees in branch duct to terminal unit inlets; 

“U” bends will not be allowed. 

3. Inlet branch ducts greater than 20 feet in length shall be increased in size to one 

full duct size larger than the terminal inlets to which they are connected. Locate 

reducer 3 feet ahead of terminal inlet. 

4. Inlet branch ducts shall have a minimum of 3 feet of straight duct ahead of the 

unit inlet, including no reducers. 

5. Medium-pressure flexible ductwork (with flexible aluminum core), when used, and 

where allowed by local Code, shall be limited to a maximum of 6 feet per inlet. 

6. Provide a minimum of 4 feet of lined low-pressure ductwork between the terminal 

unit outlet and the first spin-in fitting or supply air outlet branch duct takeoff. 

D. For fan-powered terminals, provide plenum air inlet sound attenuating boot, as indicated 

on drawings, and flexible connector at unit outlet. 


A. Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that air 

terminals, and duct connections to air terminals, are leak-tight. 

B. Repair or replace air terminals and duct connections as required to eliminate leaks, and 

retest to demonstrate compliance. 


A. Clean exposed factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with 

manufacturer’s touch-up paint. 

3.06 BALANCING: 

A. See Section 230593. Balancing contractor shall set all air quantity limits, and shall not 

rely on any factory calibration. Report air quantity as measured by the air terminal’s 

velocity pressure pickup, in addition to pitot traverses and outlet readings. 



03/16/2012 







03/16/2012 


DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 

A. Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by 

requirements of this Section. 

B. Types of air outlets and inlets required for this project include the following: 

1. Ceiling air diffusers. 

2. Wall registers and grilles. 

3. Louvers. 

C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for ductwork, duct accessories, and testing and 

balancing, not work of this Section. 


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and 

inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in 

similar service for not less than five years. 



1. ARI Compliance: Air outlets and inlets shall be tested and rated in accordance with 

ARI 650, "Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets." 

2. ASHRAE Compliance: Air outlets and inlets shall be tested and rated in accordance 

with ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets 

and Inlets." 

3. ADC Compliance: Air outlets and inlets shall be tested and rated in certified 

laboratories under requirements of ADC 1062, "Certification, Rating and Test 

Manual." 

4. ADC Seal: Air outlets and inlets shall bear ADC Certified Rating Seal. 

5. AMCA Compliance: Louvers shall be tested and rated in accordance with AMCA 

500, "Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters." 

6. AMCA Seal: Louvers shall bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal for both air 

performance and water penetration. 

7. NFPA Compliance: Air outlets and inlets shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 

90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets, 

including the following: 

23 3713 - 1 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND 

GRILLES

1. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, indicating drawing designation, 

manufacturer and model number, size, materials of construction, finish, accessories 

furnished, and mounting details. 

2. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including throw 

and drop, and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data. 

B. Samples: Submit three samples of each type of finish furnished. 

C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air 

outlet and inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components. 

D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products, 

in accordance with requirements of Division 23. 

E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, 

and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data and shop drawings in the Operating 

and Maintenance Manual, in accordance with requirements of Division 23. 

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: 

A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. 

Identify on outside of container the type of outlet or inlet and location of installation. Avoid 

crushing or bending, and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices. 

B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction 

work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above 

grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. 





1. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles: 



03/16/2012 

a. Carnes 

b. Krueger 

c. Titus 

d. Metal-Aire 

2. Louvers: 

a. Air Balance 

b. American Warming & Ventilating 

c. Arrow United Industries 

d. Dowco 

e. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. 

f. Penn Ventilator 

g. Ruskin 


GRILLES

2.02 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS: 



03/16/2012 

h. Greenheck 

i. Vent Products 

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard ceiling air 

diffusers where shown; of sizes, shapes, capacities and types indicated; constructed of 

materials and components as indicated; and as required for complete installation. 

B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, throw and drop, and 

noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data. 

C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent 

ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with 

accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and 

specifications for types of ceiling systems which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser. 

D. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of types, capacities, and with accessories and finishes as 

listed on air device schedule. 

1. All linear slot diffusers shall have air pattern control vanes, capable of 180º air 

pattern adjustment, and internally lined plenum boot, except as otherwise indicated 

or scheduled. 

E. Dampers: Volume dampers shall not be provided at diffuser necks unless otherwise 

specifically indicated or scheduled. 

2.03 REGISTERS AND GRILLES: 

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard registers and 

grilles where shown; of sizes, shapes, capacities and types indicated; constructed of 

materials and components as indicated; and as required for complete installation. 

B. Performance: Provide registers and grilles that have, as minimum, throw and drop, and 

noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data. 

C. Wall/Ceiling/Floor Compatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are 

compatible with adjacent wall/ceiling/floor systems, and that are specifically manufactured 

to fit into wall/ceiling/floor construction with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to 

general construction drawings and specifications for types of wall/ceiling/floor construction 

which will contain each type of wall/ceiling/floor register and grille. 

D. Types: Provide registers and grilles of types, capacities, and with accessories and finishes as 

listed on air device schedule. 

1. All sidewall-type supply air registers shall be double deflection adjustable blade 

type, except as otherwise indicated or scheduled. 

2. All sidewall-type return and exhaust registers shall be 35º fixed blade type, except 

as otherwise indicated or scheduled. 


GRILLES

E. Dampers: Opposed blade volume dampers shall be provided for all sidewall-type supply 

air registers, sidewall-type exhaust air registers (installed on wall or in ceiling), and floor 

supply air registers, except as otherwise indicated or scheduled. 

2.04 LOUVERS: 

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard 6” deep, 

stationary, drainable blade-type louvers with hidden vertical mullions, frame with integral 

caulking slots and sill extension, and aluminum bird screen, where shown; of sizes 

indicated; constructed of extruded aluminum; with components as indicated; and as 

required for complete installation. Louvers shall be Ruskin model ELF6375DX (extruded 

aluminum, 6” deep, 37½° fixed blades) or approved equivalent. 

B. Performance: Provide louvers that have a minimum of 50% free area (applicable to 48” x 

48” size) and a maximum pressure drop through the free area not exceeding that of those 

specified on drawings and schedules for each type as listed in manufacturer's current data. 

C. Substrate Compatibility: Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with 

adjacent substrate, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings 

with accurate fit and adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to general 

construction drawings and specifications for types of substrate which will contain each type 

of louver. 

D. Materials: Louver frames and blades shall be constructed of 0.080” thick aluminum 

extrusions, ASTM B-221, Alloy 6063-T5. Units shall be welded or assembled with stainless 

steel fasteners. 

E. Louver Screens: 3/4” square mesh anodized aluminum wire bird screen, mounted in 

removable extruded aluminum frame, shall be provided on inside face of exhaust air outlet 

louvers and outside face of outside air intake louvers. 

F. Finish: Color and finish type shall be as specified by Architect. 



A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not 

proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions 

and in accordance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that products serve intended 

functions. 

B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to 

interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work. 



03/16/2012 


GRILLES

C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles as indicated on general construction 

"Reflected Ceiling Plans." Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical 

ceiling modules. All ceiling-mounted air devices shall be installed and supported per 

manufacturer’s recommendations and per applicable codes. 

D. Louvers shall be installed per architectural details and/or manufacturer’s recommendations. 

Frames shall be caulked weather-tight to the structure using approved material from 

Division 7. 

E. Directional throw patterns for diffusers and registers shall be furnished and/or adjusted to 

match those shown and/or scheduled on the drawings. 

F. Ductwork visible behind grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be painted flat black. 

G. Appropriate A k factors shall be furnished to the Section 230593 Test and Balance 

Contractor. 


A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, three operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that 

requires them. 



03/16/2012 



GRILLES





03/16/2012 

SECTION 23 5233.19 

BOILERS 

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes gas fired, finned copper water tube boilers for heating hot water. 


1. Division 23 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks" for connections to breechings, 

chimneys, and stacks. 

2. Division 23 Section "Feedwater Equipment" for connections to condensate and feedwater 

system. 

3. Division 23 Sections for control wiring for automatic temperature control. 


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished 

specialties; and accessories for each model indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances, 

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate 

between manufacturer installed and field installed wiring. 

C. Source Quality Control Tests and Inspection Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for 

compliance with performance requirements before shipping. 

D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. 

E. Maintenance Data: Include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include parts list, 

maintenance guide, and wiring diagrams for each boiler. 


A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are 

listed and labeled. 

23 5233.19 - 1 BOILERS

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. 

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A “Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory” as 

defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 

B. ASME Compliance: Boilers shall bear ASME "H" stamp and be National Board listed. 

C. FM Compliance: Control devices and control sequences according to requirements of FM. 

D. CSD-1 Compliance: Control devices and control sequences according to requirements of CSD-1. 

E. IRI Compliance: Control devices and control sequences according to requirements of IRI. 

F. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical components and installation. 


A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork 

requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other 

rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in 

addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements 

of the Contract Documents. Installing contractor shall provide one year of warranty parts and labor. 

B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the contractor for the heat exchanger. 

1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of 

Substantial Completion on the heat exchanger. Warranty shall be non-prorated and not 

limited to thermal shock. Additional 21 year thermal shock warranty on heat exchanger. 



A. Available Manufacturers: Manufacturer shall be a company specializing in manufacturing the 

products specified in this section with minimum five (5) years experience. Subject to compliance with 

requirements, manufacturers offering boilers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but 

are not limited to, the following: 

B. Design: Boilers shall be CSA (AGA/CGA) design certified and shall not release any condensate 

during operation. Boilers shall be designed for operation with natural gas and have a CSA certified 

input rating as noted on the drawings, and a thermal efficiency rating of 81% (8900) and 82% 

(8800). 



03/16/2012 

23 5233.19 - 2 BOILERS

C. Service Access: The boilers shall be provided with access covers for easily accessing all serviceable 

components. The boilers shall be manufactured with steel frame structures to provide access to 

entire combustion chamber, including heat exchanger. Heat exchanger must be a “slide out” design 

allowing removal without disturbing the vent system or upper jacketing of the boiler. All gas train 

components must be accessible and able to adjust without the removal of covers or cabinet 

components. 

D. Manufacturers: RBI (a Mestek company) is the basis of design. Listed acceptable manufacturers 

shall be subject to compliance with requirements. Provide boilers by one of the following: 

1. RBI (a Mestek company) - 8900 / 8800 Series 

2. Laars Heating Systems – Mighty Therm Series 

3. Lochinvar Corp - Copper Fin Series 

4. Raypak Corp – Raytherm W/H Series 

2.2 COMPONENTS 

A. Combustion Chamber: The combustion chamber shall be enclosed with high temperature ceramic 

fiberboard insulation. An access panel shall be provided on right and left hand sides for ease of 

service and inspection of the heat exchanger, refractory, and entire burner assembly. The boiler 

shall provide a heat exchanger slide-out guide rail to allow removal through the front of the heater 

without removal of the chimney, draft diverter, or top jacket panels. 

B. Heat Exchanger: The heat exchanger shall be inspected and bear the A.S.M.E. Section IV seal of 

approval. The A.S.M.E. Section IV seal of approval will not be provided as standard for jurisdictions 

not requiring the A.S.M.E. Section IV seal of approval. The heat exchanger shall be a two-pass 

design with maximum working pressure of 160 psi. The water tube shall be of straight 7/8” I.D., 

.064” minimum wall thickness; integral finned copper tube, 7 fins per inch, with a fin height of 3/8”. 

The water tubes shall be set horizontally with heavy galvanized steel “V” baffles tightly secured above 

the tubes throughout the length of the water tubes. Each end of the water tubes shall be strength 

rolled onto a steel tube sheet. The headers shall be secured to the tube sheet by properly placed 

stud bolts, flange nuts and with the use of “o” rings. Headers will be of bronze construction for the 

8800 series and cast iron for 8900 series. “O” rings must be constructed of EPDM and Silicone, 

capable of withstanding temperature of 540° F, 282° C. The use of red “o” rings constructed of 

Neoprene and Silicone with temperature ratings of 250° F, 121° C will not be allowed. A pressure 

relief valve of 50 lb/sq in shall be equipped with the boiler and factory mounted. 

C. Jacket: 18 gauge galvanized steel with factory applied baked enamel. 

D. Gas Burners: The burners shall be constructed of Aluminized or Stainless Steel Alloy and fire on a 

horizontal plane. 

E. Rated Capacity: The boiler shall be capable of operating at rated capacity with pressures as low as 

6” W.C. at the inlet to the burner pressure regulator. 

F. The burner shall be capable of 81% (8900) and 82% (8800) efficiency. 

G. The burner and gas train shall be provided with the following trim and features: 

1. Burner Firing: On/Off 

2. Burner Firing: 2 Stage 

3. Burner Firing: 4 Stage 



03/16/2012 

23 5233.19 - 3 BOILERS

4. Burner Firing: Modulation with motorized gas valves 

5. Burner Ignition: Intermittent grounded spark to pilot. Ceramic hot surface ignition will not be 

accepted. 

6. Safety Controls: Energize ignition, limit time for establishing flame, prevent opening of gas 

valve until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow on ignition failure, and allow gas valve to 

open. 

7. Flue Gas Collector: Integral diverter 

8. Gas Train: Manual gas valves (2), redundant main gas valves (solenoid/diaphragm), 

(optional motorized), firing valve, ‘B’ valve, pilot gas pressure regulator, and automatic pilot 

gas valve. All components to be factory mounted. 

9. Safety Devices: Optional high/low gas pressure switches. All safeties to be factory mounted. 

2.3 BOILER TRIM 

A. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated, factory set to protect boiler and piping as per schedule/drawings. 

B. Gauge: Combination water pressure and temperature. Inlet/outlet temperature gauges to be an 

integral part of the supply/inlet header to allow for consistent easy monitoring of temperatures 

factory mounted and wired. 

C. Low Water Cutoff and Outlet Flow Switch: Prevent burner operation when water falls below a safe 

level or when water flow is low. Flow switch shall be factory mounted. Provision for installation of a 

low water cut off shall be provided. 

D. Operating Controls: Standard control system will be a Honeywell S8610M spark-to-pilot proven 

ignition with full flame monitoring capability. Optional Honeywell RM7800 Series flame safeguard 

control with diagnostic readout. For four stage Tekmar control. 

E. Operating Temperature Control: Boiler staging will be controlled by Honeywell aquastat 

controller(s). 

F. High Limit: Temperature control with manual reset limits boiler water temperature in series with the 

operating control. High limit shall be factory mounted and sense the outlet temperature of the boiler 

through a dry well. 

G. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING STANDARD TRIM: 

1. Bronze headers (8800), Cast iron headers (8900) 

2. Terminal board for all electrical connections 

3. Flow switch (factory mounted and wired) 

4. Operating control 

5. Temperature/pressure gauge 

6. Manual reset high limit 

7. Field reversible headers 

8. Inlet/outlet thermometers (factory mounted and wired) 

9. CSD-1 gas train 

H. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING JOB SPECIFIC TRIM AND FEATURES: 

1. Bronze fitted circulator provided by the manufacturer (shipped loose) 

2. Direct vent inducer and termination hood for sidewall termination of vent pipe (shipped loose) 

3. CSD-1 controls 

4. FM or IRI controls and gas train. 



03/16/2012 

23 5233.19 - 4 BOILERS

2.4 MOTORS 

5. Probe type low water cut off, manual reset (shipped loose) 


A. Test and inspect boilers according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV. Boilers 

shall be test fired in the factory with a report attached permanently to the exterior cabinet of the 

boiler for field reference. 



A. Examine area to receive boiler for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other 

conditions affecting boiler performance. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory 

conditions have been corrected. 


A. Install boilers level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and referenced 

standards. 

B. Install gas fired boilers according to NFPA 54. 

C. Support boilers on 4 in (100 mm) thick concrete base, 4 in (100 mm) larger on each side than base 

of unit. 

D. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler, but not specified to be factory mounted. 

E. Install a 1” drain valve on the outlet piping prior to the first shut off valve. 


A. Connect gas piping full size to boiler gas train inlet with union. 

B. Connect hot water piping to supply and return boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange 

at each connection. 

C. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain. 

D. Connect breeching to boiler outlet, full size of outlet. The boiler shall operate on negative stack 

pressure and Category I vent material according to ANSI standards (AGA) (standard vertical 

venting). 

E. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections. 

F. Ground equipment. 



03/16/2012 

23 5233.19 - 5 BOILERS

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening 

values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in 

UL 486A and UL 486B. 


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to supervise the 

field assembly of components and installation of boilers, including piping and electrical connections. 

Report results in writing. 

1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and 

equipment. 

B. Manufacturer’s representative shall supply a factory authorized service technician to start up the 

boilers. 

3.5 CLEANING 

A. Flush and clean boilers on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

B. After completing boiler installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. 

Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, 

and abrasions with manufacturer's touchup paint. 

3.6 COMMISSIONING 

A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to provide startup service. Start up to be 

performed only after complete boiler room operation is field verified to offer a substantial load, and 

complete system circulation. One year warranty shall be handled by factory authorized tech. 

B. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified. 

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation 

requirements in Division 26 Sections. Do not proceed with boiler startup until wiring 

installation is acceptable to equipment Installer. 

C. Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checklist and verify the following: 

1. Boiler is level on concrete base. 

2. Flue and chimney are installed without visible damage. 

3. No damage is visible to boiler jacket, refractory, or combustion chamber. 

4. Pressure reducing valves are checked for correct operation and specified relief pressure. 

Adjust as required. 

5. Clearances have been provided and piping is flanged for easy removal and servicing. 

6. Heating circuit pipes have been connected to correct ports. 

7. Labels are clearly visible. 

8. Boiler, burner, and flue are clean and free of construction debris. 

9. Pressure and temperature gauges are installed. 

10. Control installations are completed. 



03/16/2012 

23 5233.19 - 6 BOILERS

D. Ensure pumps operate properly. 

E. Check operation of pressure reducing valve on gas train, including venting. 

F. Check that fluid level, flow switch, and high temperature interlocks are in place. 

G. Start pumps and boilers, and adjust burners to maximum operating efficiency. 

1. Fill out startup checklist and attach copy with Contractor Startup Report. 

2. Check and record performance of factory provided boiler protection devices and firing 

sequences. 

3. Check and record performance of boiler fluid level, flow switch, and high temperature 

interlocks. 

4. Run-in boilers as recommended or required by manufacturer. 

H. Perform the following tests for each firing rate for high/low burners, four stage and modulating 

burners. Adjust boiler combustion efficiency at each firing rate. Measure and record the following: 

1. Inlet gas pressure. 

2. Gas pressure on manifold. 

3. Flue gas temperature at boiler discharge. 

4. Flue gas carbon dioxide and oxygen concentration. 

5. Natural flue draft. 

I. Measure and record temperature rise through each boiler. 


A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as 

specified below: 

1. Operate boiler, including accessories and controls, to demonstrate compliance with 

requirements. 

2. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and 

shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance. 

3. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 

4. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and 

Maintenance Data." 

5. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days advance notice. 



03/16/2012 

END OF SECTION 23 5233.19 

23 5233.19 - 7 BOILERS





03/16/2012 


HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 



1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes plate heat exchangers. 


A. TEMA: Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association. 



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and 

accessories. 

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail equipment 

assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field 

assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints and for 

designing bases. 

2. Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to 

supported equipment. 

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: Details and design calculations for seismic restraints for heat 

exchangers. 


A. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room, drawn to scale, on which the following items are 

shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 

1. Tube-removal space. 

2. Structural members to which heat exchangers will be attached. 

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For heat exchanger, accessories, and components, from 

manufacturer. 

23 5700 - 1 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of 

assembled components or on calculation. 

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Heat Exchanger: Identify center of gravity and locate 

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 

3. Detailed description of heat exchanger anchorage devices on which certification is based 

and their installation requirements. 

C. Product Certificates: For each type of shell-and-tube heat exchanger. Documentation that shelland-tube 

heat exchangers comply with "TEMA Standards." 

D. Source quality-control reports. 

E. Field quality-control reports. 

F. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty. 


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to include in emergency, operation, and 


1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or 

replace components of domestic-water heat exchangers that fail in materials or workmanship 

within specified warranty period. 


a. Structural failures including heat exchanger, storage tank, and supports. 

b. Faulty operation of controls. 

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion. 


a. Plate, Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers: 



03/16/2012 

1) Brazed-Plate Type: One. 

2) Plate-and-Frame Type: One. 


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 

"Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints for heat exchangers. 

2.2 GASKETED-PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on 

Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 


1. Alfa Laval Inc. 

2. API Heat Transfer Inc. 

3. APV; a brand of SPX Corporation. 

4. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 

5. Delta T Heat Exchangers. 

6. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. 

7. Mueller, Paul, Company. 

8. Polaris Plate Heat Exchangers. 

9. SEC Heat Exchangers. 

10. TACO Incorporated. 

11. Thermo Dynamics Ltd. 

12. Tranter, Inc. 

B. STANDARDS 

1. ASME Section II - Material Specification 

2. ASME Section V - Non-Destructive Testing 

3. ANSI B 16.5 - Flanged fittings 

4. ASME Section IX - Welding and brazing qualifications 

5. ASME Section VIII, Division I - Pressure Vessel Code 

6. OSHA 

C. CERTIFICATION 

1. Plate Heat Exchangers shall be designed, constructed and tested in accordance with 

Section VIII, Division I of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code, and shall be code stamped. CRN 

numbers are required for all vessels with Canadian destinations. 

2.3 MECHANICAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 

A. General 

1. The Plate Heat Exchanger Manufacturer shall not subcontract or purchase the plates for 

resale. He shall press his own patterns of plates. 

2. The Plate Heat Exchanger Manufacturer shall have an established and on-going 

3. QA/QC program including manuals available for inspection at plant. 

B. Frame Components 

1. Preference will be given to single pass designs with all connections on the fixed cover. 

2. The fixed and movable covers shall be of sufficient uniform thickness to withstand all 

loadings. Welded reinforcements or stiffeners are not permitted. 

3. The movable cover shall be provided with a roller bearing for units greater than 50" in 

height. This allows the cover to be moved with greater ease during plate inspection. 

4. The carrying and guide bars shall be designed to allow for a plate pack expansion of at 

least 10% while still providing maintenance space. 

5. The surfaces of the carrying and guide bars that come into contact with the plates shall be 

stainless steel. All carbon steel frame components (except bolts) shall be painted or zinc 

plated. 

6. The heat exchanger frame shall be of bolted construction. Welding of the pressure 

retaining components is not permitted. 



03/16/2012 


7. Tightening bolts shall be equipped with lockwashers at the movable cover to facilitate 

opening and closing of the unit from the fixed cover. Bearing Box Washers shall be 

supplied at the fixed cover on all units greater than 50" in height. 

8. Plate and carrying bar design shall permit the removal of any plate in the plate pack 

without the need to remove any other plates. 

9. Tightening bolts shall be equipped with captive nuts at the fixed cover and threaded nuts at 

the movable cover. Welding of the nut to the tightening bolt is prohibited. Tightening bolts 

shall be coated with a rust preventative lubricant. In addition, a protective sleeve shall be 

installed on all exposed threads. 

10. The bolting system shall be designed such that only four (4) tightening bolts are required 

for 80% of the pressure plate travel during opening and closing of the unit. This is required 

to minimize maintenance downtime. 

11. The plate pack shall be covered with a shroud in accordance with OSHA. Preference shall 

be given to stainless steel. 

12. The mechanical alignment system of the plates shall be designed to minimize horizontal 

(perpendicular to carrying bar) and vertical movement of the plates. This alignment system 

shall be built into the carrying and guide bars as well as pressed into the plate pattern. No 

alignment with the use of the gaskets is permitted. 

13. Lifting devices shall be supplied on all units with 6" ports or larger. These shall be designed 

to support one and a half times the unit's weight. Instructions for lifting shall be clearly 

visible on the unit. 

C. Surface Preparation and Painting 

1. The following requirements shall be adhered to for all carbon steel components excluding 

tightening bolts and fasteners: 

2. Preblast Preparation 

a. Rough and/or sharp edges shall be broken with a power grinder. 

b. All threaded openings shall be sealed. 

c. All surfaces shall be solvent cleaned per SSPC requirement SP-1. 

3. Blasting Requirements 

a. All steel surfaces to be coated shall be cleaned by blasting metal in accordance with 

SSPC requirement SP- IO. 

b. The surface anchor profile shall adhere to the painting manufacturer's 

recommendations and shall be recorded. 

4. Painting Application Requirements 

D. Connections 

a. Painting shall commence within four hours of blasting. 

b. Surfaces shall be clean, free from dust, and dry before painting or application of 

any coating. 

c. All paints shall be furnished mixed and applied in accordance with the 

manufacturer's recommendations. 

d. The finish coat shall be inspected for adequate total dry film thickness over its entire 

surface. 

1. Connections equal to or less than 2" shall be NPT type. 



03/16/2012 


E. Plates 

2. Studded Port Connections. Unless otherwise specified, all plate type heat exchangers with 

connections of greater than 2" shall be equipped with studded port type connections with 

the following requirements: 

a. Each connection shall be equipped with a liner which prevents the process fluids 

from coming in contact with the covers. 

b. Liners shall be fabricated from materials which are compatible with the process 

fluids (generally the same materials as the plate/gaskets). 

1. Individual plates shall be pressed from a single metal sheet in one step. No multistage 

pressing of one sheet is allowed. Plate inspection shall be performed during production to 

ensure uniformity of pressing depth and absence of defects. 

2. All plates shall be permanently marked to identify plate material, thickness, raw plate 

supplier and heat numbers. 

3. The plates should include the following: 

F. Gaskets 

a. Bridge Zone - The area that connects the port to the distribution area. 

b. Drainage Chamber - The area vented to the atmosphere to prevent fluid 

interleakage. The drainage chamber should include a drainage channel. 

c. Distribution Zone - The top and bottom areas responsible for distributing the fluid 

d. The design of plates shall be such that each plate channel can withstand the Design 

Pressure with no pressure on the adjacent plate channels (Full Differential Pressure). 

e. Plate design shall allow and require plate-to-plate contact for structural integrity and 

elimination of vibration. 

f. End plates shall be provided and sufficiently gasketed at the fixed and movable 

covers to prevent hot and cold medium from coming in contact with these covers. 

g. Gasket grooves in the plates shall be designed to contain the gaskets while allowing 

for thermal expansion. 

h. The Suspension and Guidance method should support the plates uniformly and 

should mechanically align the plates during tightening. This area should be 

reinforced for all plates greater than 50" in height. 

1. Gaskets shall have relieving grooves in the leakage chamber zone to prevent intermixing 

of fluids and to cause any leak to be visually evident at the external surface of the plate 

pack. 

2. One piece molded gaskets are required for all fluid sealing areas. 

3. Mixing of gasket materials within fully gasketed units is not preferable. 

4. The sealing system should only be used for sealing and not for alignment. Preference shall 

be given to non-glued gasketing systems. 

5. If an adhesive is used, it shall be compatible with the gasket material and the process 

fluids. The standard adhesive shall be a 2 component epoxy glue and heat cured. 

2.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING 

A. Hydrostatic test shall be in accordance with ASME Section VIII Division 1, paragraph UG-99. 



03/16/2012 


2.5 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT 

A. All openings shall be protected with suitable covers. 

B. A nameplate shall be securely attached to the exchanger In a location that is easily accessible 

and visible after installation. The vessel identification number along with other pertinent design 

details shall be on the nameplate. 

C. Port locations should be clearly marked and correspond with the certified vendor drawings. 

2.6 DOCUMENTATION 

A. Certified Print 

B. ASME U- I or U-3 form 

C. Certificate of Compliance to ASME Sec. VIII, Div. I 

D. Instruction Manual 



A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for structural 

rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat exchangers. 

B. Examine roughing-in for heat-exchanger piping to verify actual locations of piping connections 

before equipment installation. 


3.2 GASKETED-PLATE HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION 

A. Install gasketed-plate heat exchanger on custom-designed wall supports anchored to structure as 

indicated on Drawings. 

B. Install metal shroud over installed gasketed-plate heat exchanger according to manufacturer's 



A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping." 

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 

B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for tube removal, service, and maintenance. 

C. Install piping adjacent to heat exchangers to allow space for service and maintenance of heat 

exchangers. Arrange piping for easy removal of heat exchangers. 



03/16/2012 


D. Install shutoff valves at heat-exchanger inlet and outlet connections. 

E. Install relief valves on heat-exchanger heated-fluid connection and install pipe relief valves, full 

size of valve connection, to floor drain. 

F. Install vacuum breaker at heat-exchanger steam inlet connection. 

G. Install hose end valve to drain shell. 

H. Install thermometer on heat-exchanger and[ inlet and] outlet piping, and install thermometer on 

heating-fluid[ inlet and] outlet piping. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in 

Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." 

I. Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger and heating-fluid piping. Comply with requirements 

for pressure gages specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." 


A. Perform the following tests and inspections[ with the assistance of a factory-authorized service 

representative]: 

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until 

no leaks exist. 


equipment. 

B. Heat exchanger will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 


3.5 CLEANING 

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. 

Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. 


A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to 

adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers. 



03/16/2012 







03/16/2012 


FAN COIL UNITS 

A. Extent of terminal unit work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements 


B. Types of terminal units required for project include the following: 

1. Fan-coil units. 

C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for piping; ductwork; testing, adjusting and balancing 

of terminal units; not work of this Section. 

D. Refer to Division 26 section for the following work; not work of this Section. 

1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on terminal units. 

2. Provide the following electrical work as work of this Section, complying with 

requirements of Division 26 sections: 

a. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and 

terminal unit control panels. 

i. Control wiring specified as work of Division 23 for Automatic 

Temperature Controls is work of that Section. 

E. Refer to other Division 23 sections for automatic temperature controls not factory installed, 

required in conjunction with terminal units; not work of this Section. 


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of terminal units, 




1. ASHRAE Compliance: Test coils in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 33, 

"Methods of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Heating Coils." 

2. ARI Compliance: Test and rate fan-coil units in accordance with ARI Standard 

440, "Room Fan-Coil Air Conditioners." 

3. UL Compliance: Construct and install fan-coil units in compliance with UL 883, 

"Safety Standards for Fan Coil Units and Room Fan Heater Units." 

4. UL Compliance: Provide terminal units with electrical components which have 

been listed and labeled by UL. 

23 8219 - 1 FAN COIL UNITS


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for terminal units, showing 

dimensions, capacities, ratings, performance characteristics, gauges and finishes of 

materials, and installation/startup instructions. 

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating terminal 

unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, field connection 

details, and methods of assembly of components. 


to terminal units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and 

control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed 




E. Samples: Submit three (3) samples of each type of cabinet finish furnished. 

F. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including lubrication instructions, 

filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, control, accessories, "trouble-shooting” 

maintenance guide, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop 

drawings in Operating and Maintenance Manual, in accordance with requirements of 

Division 23. 


A. Handle terminal units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting 

and scoring. Do not install damaged terminal units or components; replace with new. 

B. Store terminal units and components in a clean, dry location. Protect from weather, dirt, 


C. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading terminal 

units and moving them to final location. 





1. Fan Coil Units 



03/16/2012 

a. International Environmental Coproration 

b. Carrier Corp. 

c. McQuay Inc. 

d. Trane 

e. York; Div. of York International 


2.02 FAN-COIL UNITS: 

A. General: Provide fan-coil units having cabinet sizes, and in locations indicated, and of 

capacities, style, and having accessories as scheduled. Include in basic unit chassis, coils, 

fanboard, drain pan assembly, fans, housing, motor, filter, and insulation. 

B. Chassis: Construct chassis of galvanized steel with flanged edges. 

C. Insulation: Faced, heavy density glass fiber. 

D. Cabinet: Construct of 18-ga steel removable panels, 16-ga front. Provide insulation over 

entire coil section. Clean cabinet parts, bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with 

baked-on primer. Standard factory color selected baked enamel finish. / Custom color as 

selected by Architect in baked enamel finish. 

E. Coils: Construct of ½” seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to configurated 

aluminum fins. Design for 250 psi working pressure, and leak tested at 350 psi under 

water. 

F. Auxiliary Heating Coils: Construct of ½” seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to 

configurated aluminum fins. Design for 250 psi working pressure. 

G. Drain Pans: Construct of galvanized steel. Insulate with polystyrene or polyurethane 

insulation. Provide drain connection. 

H. Fans: Provide centrifugal forward curved double width wheels of reinforced fiberglass, in 

galvanized steel fan scrolls. 

I. Motors: Provide motors with integral thermal overload protection. Run test motors at 

factory in assembled unit prior to shipping. Provide quickly detachable motor cords. 

J. Filters: Provide ill thick throwaway type filters in fiberboard frames. 

K. Dampers: Provide 18-ga steel damper blades with polyurethane stop across entire blade 

length. Provide factory-mounted electric operators for 25% open cycle. 

L. Accessories: Provide the following accessories as indicated and/or scheduled: 



1. Wall Boxes: Provide aluminum wall boxes with integral eliminators and insect 

screen. 

2. Discharge Grille Panels: Provide 18-ga galvanized steel, stamped integral grilles, 

with access doors. 

3. Sub-Bases: Provide 18-ga steel sub-base, height as indicated. 

4. Extended Oilers: Provide plastic motor oiler tubes extending to beneath top 

discharge grille. 

5. Recessing Flanges: Provide 18-ga steel flanges for recessing fan-coil units into 

wall or ceiling. 



03/16/2012 


A. Examine areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be installed. Do not 



3.02 INSTALLATION OF FAN COIL UNITS: 

A. General: Install fan-coil units as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's 


B. Locate fan-coil units as indicated, coordinate with other trades to assure correct recess size 

for recessed units. 

C. Provide piping as detailed on the drawings. 

D. Provide ¾” condensate drain pipe from unit drain pan connection to nearest adequate 

floor drain or drain pipe. 

E. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction. 

3.03 ELECTRICAL WIRING: 

A. General: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be 

factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturers wiring diagram submittal to Electrical 

Installer. 

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer I s 

submittal and installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed 


installer. 


A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed unit surfaces, 

and vacuum clean terminal coils and inside of cabinets. 

B. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish 

materials furnished by manufacturer. 

C. Install new filter units for terminals requiring same. 


A. Start up, test, and adjust terminal units in accordance with manufacturer's published startup 

instructions. Adjust for proper air flow where applicable. 



03/16/2012 







03/16/2012 


UNIT HEATERS 

A. Extent of terminal unit work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements 


B. Types of terminal units required for project include the following: 

1. Unit heaters. 

2. Cabinet unit heaters. 

C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for piping; ductwork; testing, adjusting and balancing 

of terminal units; not work of this Section. 

D. Refer to Division 26 section for the following work; not work of this Section. 

1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on terminal units. 

2. Provide the following electrical work as work of this Section, complying with 

requirements of Division 26 sections: 

a. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and 

terminal unit control panels. 

i. Control wiring specified as work of Division 23 for Automatic 

Temperature Controls is work of that Section. 

E. Refer to other Division 23 sections for automatic temperature controls not factory installed, 

required in conjunction with terminal units; not work of this Section. 


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of terminal units, 





1. ASHRAE Compliance: Test coils in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 33, 

"Methods of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Heating Coils." 

2. UL Compliance: Provide terminal units with electrical components which have 

been listed and labeled by UL. 

23 8239 - 1 UNIT HEATERS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for terminal units, showing 

dimensions, capacities, ratings, performance characteristics, gauges and finishes of 

materials, and installation/startup instructions. 

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating terminal 

unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, field connection 

details, and methods of assembly of components. 


to terminal units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and 

control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed 




E. Samples: Submit three (3) samples of each type of cabinet finish furnished. 

F. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including lubrication instructions, 

filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, control, accessories, "trouble-shooting” 

maintenance guide, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop 

drawings in Operating and Maintenance Manual, in accordance with requirements of 

Division 23. 


A. Handle terminal units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting 

and scoring. Do not install damaged terminal units or components; replace with new. 

B. Store terminal units and components in a clean, dry location. Protect from weather, dirt, 


C. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading terminal 

units and moving them to final location. 





1. Unit Heaters 



03/16/2012 

a. Airtherm Mfg. Co. 

b. Buffalo Forge Co. 

c. Dunham-Bush, Inc. 

d. McQuay Inc. 

e. Modine Mfg. Co. 

f. Trane 

g. Wing (The) Co.; Div. Wing Industries, Inc. 


2.02 UNIT HEATERS: 



03/16/2012 

h. Young Radiator Co. 

i. Chromalox 

j. Markel 

2. Cabinet Unit Heaters 

a. Airtherm Mfg. Co. 

b. Dunham-Bush, Inc. 

c. McQuay Inc. 

d. Trane 

e. Young Radiator Co. 

A. General: Provide unit heaters in locations as indicated, and of capacities, style, and 

having accessories as scheduled. 

B. Horizontal Unit Heaters: 

1. Casings: Construct of steel, phosphatized inside and out, and finished with 

standard color baked enamel finish. Provide motor- mounted panel, minimum of 

13-ga steel. Fabricate casing to enclose coil, louvers, and fan blades. Provide 

louvers for 4-way air diffusion. 

2. Fans: Construct of aluminum, and factory-balance. Provide fan inlet orifice, 

smooth, and drawn into casing back panel. 

C. Vertical Unit Heaters: 

1. Casings: Construct of steel, phosphatized inside and out, and finished with 

standard color baked enamel finish. Design casing to enclose fan, motor, and 

coil, design fan orifice formed into discharge panel. Provide air diffusers as 

scheduled. 

2. Fans: Construct of aluminum and factory-balance. Design so motor and fan 

assembly is removable through fan outlet panel. 

D. Coils: Construct of plate-type aluminum fins, mechanically bonded to copper tubes. 

Design coil for use in steam/hot water applications. 

E. Motors: Provide totally enclosed motors, with built-in overload protection, having electrical 

characteristics as scheduled. 

2.03 CABINET UNIT HEATERS: 

A. General: Provide hot water cabinet heaters having cabinet sizes and in locations as 

indicated, and of capacities, style, and having accessories as scheduled. Include in basic 

unit chassis, coil, fanboard, fan wheels, housings, motor, and insulation. 

B. Chassis: Galvanized steel wrap-around structural frame with edges flanged. 

C. Insulation: Faced, heavy density glass fiber. 


D. Cabinet: 16-ga removable front panel, 18-ga top and side panels. Insulate front panel 

over entire coil section. Provide access door on coil connection side. Clean cabinet parts, 

bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer. Standard factory color 

selected baked enamel finish/Custom color as selected by Architect in baked enamel 

finish. 

E. Water Coils: Construct of 5/8” seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to 

configurated aluminum fins. Design for 300 psi and leak test at 300 psi under water. 

Provide same end connections for supply and return. 

F. Fans: Provide centrifugal, forward curved double width fan wheels constructed of noncorrosive, 

molded, fiberglass reinforced thermo-plastic material. Construct fan scrolls of 

galvanized steel. 

G. Motors: Provide shaded pole motors with integral thermal over-load protection, and 

motor cords for plug-in to junction box in unit. 

H. Filters: Provide 1” thick throwaway type filters in fiberboard frames. 

I. Accessories: Provide the following accessories as indicated and/or scheduled: 



1. Wall Boxes: Provide aluminum wall boxes with integral eliminators and insect 

screen. 

2. Recessing Flanges: Provide 18-ga steel flanges for recessing cabinet heaters into 

wall or ceiling. 

3. Sub-bases: Provide 18-ga steel sub-base for vertical units, height as indicated. 

4. Extended Oilers: Provide plastic motor oiler tubes extending to beneath top 

discharge grille. 

A. Examine areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be installed. Do not 



3.02 INSTALLATION OF UNIT HEATERS: 

A. General: Install unit heaters as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's 


B. Uncrate units and inspect for damage. Verify that nameplate data corresponds with unit 

designation. 

C. Hang units from building substrate, not from piping. Mount as high as possible to 

maintain greatest headroom possible unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Support units with rod-type hangers anchored to building substrate. 

E. Install piping as indicated. 



03/16/2012 


F. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction. 

3.03 INSTALLATION OF CABINET HEATERS: 

A. General: Install cabinet heaters as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's 


B. Locate cabinet heaters as indicated, coordinate with other trades to assure correct recess 

size for recessed units. 

C. Install piping as indicated. 

D. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction. 

3.04 ELECTRICAL WIRING: 

A. General: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be 

factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturers wiring diagram submittal to Electrical 

Installer. 

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer I s 

submittal and installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed 


installer. 


A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed unit surfaces, 

and vacuum clean terminal coils and inside of cabinets. 

B. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish 

materials furnished by manufacturer. 

C. Install new filter units for terminals requiring same. 


A. Start up, test, and adjust terminal units in accordance with manufacturer's published startup 

instructions. Adjust for proper air flow where applicable. 



03/16/2012 







03/16/2012 


MECHANICAL DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS 



1.2 Description 

A. Furnish and install, as shown in plans and schedule and as specified herein, an indoor swimming 

pool heat pump dehumidification system with air-to-water and air-to-air heat recovery. The unit 

shall be completely factory-assembled, including all internal piping and control wiring. The 

system shall include a compressor, a pool water condenser, an evaporator coil, an air side 

condenser reheat coil, a circulating fan, and a micro-processor based control system. 

B. Units shall be manufactured and tested in the U.S.A. and listed by and carry the label of ETL. 

1.3 Intent 

A. It is the intent of this Section of the specifications to provide a complete and operable natatorium 

dehumidification system as shown and scheduled on the plans. 

1.4 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes packaged, factory-assembled and -tested, refrigerant-type, mechanical 

dehumidification units designed for indoor installation. 


A. Seismic Performance: Dehumidification units shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions 

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts 

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 


A. Product Data: For each dehumidification unit indicated. Include rated capacities, operating 

characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 

B. Shop Drawings: For each dehumidification unit indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, 


23 8416 - 1 MECHANICAL DEHUMIDIFICATION 

UNITS

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required 

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field 

connection. 



A. Source quality-control reports. 

B. Field quality-control reports. 

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For dehumidification units to include in emergency, 

operation, and maintenance manuals. 


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective 

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Filters: One set(s) of each type of filter specified. 

2. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each belt-drive fan. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by 

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 

B. ASHRAE Compliance: 

1. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5, "Systems and Equipment" and 

Section 7, "Construction and Startup." 

2. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems." 

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6, 

"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." 


A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. 

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. 



03/16/2012 


UNITS

1.12 WARRANTY 


replace components of dehumidification units that fail in materials or workmanship within 


1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years 

from date of Substantial Completion. 

2. Warranty Period for Refrigerant Coils: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five 

years from date of Substantial Completion. 



A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on 

Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 

1. PoolPak 

2. Four Seasons 

3. Munters/Des Champs 

2.2 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION 

A. The unit shall control space temperature and relative humidity and pool water temperature. 

Warm moist air from the natatorium is drawn over an evaporator, and the latent and sensible 

heat is removed from the air. The heat captured by this process and the heat generated from the 

compressor power consumption are absorbed by a mechanical refrigeration system. The 

resulting dryer, cooler air is drawn over a reheat condenser coil and auxiliary heating coil (if 

provided) by a supply fan. 

B. The refrigeration system is activated if any of the following occur: 

1. Relative humidity rises above set point. 

2. Space temperature rises above the set point. 

C. The unit shall monitor space temperature and relative humidity, pool water temperature and 

building surface temperature. 

1. The thermal energy absorbed by the refrigeration system is distributed as follows: 

2.3 CONSTRUCTION 



03/16/2012 

a. To maintain the natatorium space temperature. 

b. To maintain pool water temperature. 

c. Rejected to Water Cooled Condenser 

A. The cabinet shall be fabricated out of a minimum of 20 gauge G90 galvanized steel. The unit 

shall be painted with an electrostatically applied polyamide epoxy powder coating, with a 

thickness of 2-3 mils, baked and bonded at 420°F until it forms a hard, textured surface. 


UNITS

B. Construction shall be modular, consisting of removable panels with permanently affixed 

fasteners. Base pans shall be formed out of a minimum of 16 gauge G90 galvanized steel with 

floor mounting support channels. The condensate drain pan under the evaporator shall be epoxy 

coated galvanized steel. The compressor and controls shall be located in a compartment out of 

the air stream. Surfaces adjacent to the coil compartment shall be insulated with insulation to 

prevent condensation. 

C. The unit shall be of horizontal design. The supply air discharge shall be horizontal. 

D. Hinged Access Doors shall be provided at the openings for Compressor, Electrical Panel, 

Blowers, Motors and Drives. Doors shall be double-wall, insulated, mounted on a continuous 

piano hinge, secured with latches and sealed against a rigid steel frame with hollow-bulb rubber 

gasket material. 

2.4 COMPRESSOR 

A. The compressor shall be high-efficiency scroll type operating at scheduled voltage, phase, and 

frequency. 

B. The suction gas cooled compressor shall be equipped with thermal overload protection and a 

crankcase heater to prevent refrigerant migration to the compressor oil during shutdown. 

C. Provide a compressor sound jacket consisting of reinforced vinyl sewn around a 2 pound density 

fiberglass blanket to provide acoustical attenuation. 

2.5 FILTER RACK AND FILTERS 

A. The dehumidification unit shall include a weather tight air filter section with a duct flange and 

access door for side loading of filters. The filters shall be Class II, two inch, throw away. 

2.6 REFRIGERANT 

A. The refrigerant shall be R-410A. 

2.7 FAN 

A. The fan shall be a forward-curved, centrifugal blower. The wheel shall be dynamically balanced 

and installed on a steel shaft. The blower scroll and housing shall be constructed of cold-rolled 

steel, coated with an electrostatically applied acrylic enamel paint or G90 galvanized steel. 

B. The fan shall operate at the scheduled supply air CFM, outside air CFM (if equipped with this 

option) and W.C. external static pressure (ESP). 

2.8 FAN MOTOR 

A. The class B winding fan motor shall be belt drive. The motor shall comply with the efficiency 

requirements of EPACT-92. The belt drive assembly shall include a single “A” or “B” section belt 

and an adjustable motor sheave or double “B” section belt and non-adjustable motor sheave 



03/16/2012 


UNITS

depending upon motor horsepower for establishing the specified CFM. Single phase motors shall 

be capacitor start. The fan motor horsepower, voltage and frequency shall be as scheduled. 

2.9 EVAPORATOR (DEHUMIDIFICATION) COIL 

A. The coil shall be of adequate face area and rows to remove the specified amount of moisture 

from the air stream at specified conditions. 

B. The evaporator coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. 

The fins shall be acrylic-coated for added corrosion protection. 

2.10 AIR CONDENSER (AIR REHEAT) COIL 

A. The coil shall be of sufficient size to reject the required amount of total heat. 

B. The condenser coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. 

The fins shall be acrylic-coated for added corrosion protection. 

2.11 AUXILIARY AIR HOT WATER COIL 

A. The hot water coil shall be factory mounted after the air reheat condenser coil. The installing 

contractor shall install the control valve (by others) and pipe the hot water to the connections on 

the outside of the unit. The control device for the valve must be interlocked with the terminal strips 

in the unit. 

B. Coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. The fins shall 

be acrylic-coated for added corrosion protection. 

2.12 WATER CONDENSER (POOL HEATING) 

A. For recovering heat to pool water, the unit shall be equipped with a vented refrigerant-to-water, 

helically wound coaxial vented condenser sized to reject the required amount of heat. The water 

side tubing shall be constructed of cupronickel for corrosion protection. The maximum water 

pressure drop shall be as scheduled. 

2.13 CONTROL PANEL 

A. The control panel shall have a 4 line, 20 character LCD display, LED annunciators, and a 6 

button operator interface. The controller main board shall have all set points and program 

information stored in nonvolatile memory for protection from power failure. 

B. The control panel shall be wall or unit mounted. It shall be capable of being mounted up to 1000 

feet from the unit. All internal circuit boards shall be conformal coated. The control panel shall be 

connected to the unit by standard six wire RJ-25 phone cord. The control panel shall be capable 

of being directly connected to the unit for service convenience. 

C. The controller shall be micro-processor based. The following set points shall be programmable at 

the panel: 



03/16/2012 


UNITS

1. Space Air Temperature 

2. Space Relative Humidity 

D. The following LCD readouts or annunciators shall be provided: 

1. Start Up Screen: Power On Screen ; Version No.; Date 

2. Setpoints 

3. Readouts 



03/16/2012 

a. Space Air Temperature 

b. Space Relative Humidity 

c. Dewpoint (Space) 

d. Water Heating - (Yes/No) 

e. Aux. Water Heating - (Yes/No) 

f. Water Temp 

g. Space (Cooling) - (Yes/No) 

h. Aux. Air Heat - (Yes/No) 

i. Dehumidify - (Yes/No) 

j. Economizer - (Yes/No) 

k. Suction Temperature 

l. Suction Pressure 

m. Discharge Pressure 

4. Service Parameters Password Protected Including 

a. Degree F or Degree C Selections 

b. Economizer Options 

c. Deadbands 

d. Anti Cycle Timer 

e. Offset Selection 

f. Fire Trip Action (Open or Close on Alarm) 

g. Manual Control 

h. Sensor Offsets 

5. Service Diagnostic Codes 

6. Service Information Including: 

a. Surface Temperature 

b. Dewpoint Temperature 

c. Network Control - (Yes/No) 

d. Run Hours 

7. Faults – Global 

1) Compressor 

2) Fan 

3) A/C 

4) Aux. Air Heat 

5) Aux. Water Heat 

a. High Discharge Pressure 

b. Low Suction Pressure 

c. High Compressor Motor Temperature 

d. and “Count to Ten” Lockout 


UNITS

8. AC Proof Status – Both Air and Water 

2.14 CONTROL SENSORS 

A. The unit shall be provided with the following factory mounted and wired control devices: 

1. Space Dry Bulb Temperature Sensor (field wired with economizer option) 

2. Space Relative Humidity Sensor (field wired with economizer option) 

3. Pool Water Temperature Sensor Defrost Controller 

4. Defrost Controller 

B. The unit shall be delivered with the following factory supplied sensors to be installed in the 

field: 

1. Cold Surface Condensation Prevention Temperature Sensor (Dew Point Reset). 

C. An anti-cycle timer shall be provided in the unit control system to prevent short-cycling of the 

compressor. 

D. Under normal conditions, the unit fan shall operate continuously, to provide air circulation within 

the pool enclosure. 

E. The compressor shall not operate if the defrost thermostat set point has been reached. 

Evaporator coil defrost shall be accomplished by the flow of air drawn across the coil by the unit 

fan. 

2.15 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 

A. Description 

1. All essential operating and logic controls shall be factory mounted and wired in the unit. 

Control sequences shall be designed specifically to control swimming pool environmental 

conditions. 

B. Humidity Control 

1. When the humidity is above the set point the controller energizes the compressor and 

directs hot gas to air reheat condenser. If the pool water temperature is below the set 

point, the recovered heat is directed to the pool water condenser and the air reheat 

condenser or the auxiliary air cooling condenser, if so equipped. If the pool water 

temperature is at or above the set point, the recovered heat is directed to the air reheat 

condenser or the auxiliary air cooling condenser, if so equipped. 

C. Pool Water Heating 

1. When the dehumidifier is in either the dehumidifying and/or air conditioning mode and 

the pool water temperature is below the set point, a portion of the recovered heat is 

directed to the pool water condenser. At other times when the pool water requires heat, the 

PoolComPak activates the main pool water heater. 

D. Space Heating 



03/16/2012 


UNITS

1. When the compressor is running in the dehumidification mode and the pool water 

temperature is at or above the set point and the space temperature is below the set point, 

the recovered heat is directed to the air reheat condenser. If the space temperature drops 

more than 2°F below the set point, the auxiliary space heating system (by others) shall be 

activated by a dry contact closure from the controller. A further drop in space temperature 

will activate the second stage of auxiliary heat (if available). 

E. Space Humidity Reset Control based on Cold Surface Temperature 

1. When the temperature of the interior surface at the cold surface sensor drops to within 5ºF 

of the absolute humidity set point (dew point), the absolute humidity set point is offset 

downward. This condition causes the dehumidifier system to activate humidity control, 

lowering the space dew point and hindering the formation of condensate on the cold 

surfaces. 

F. Air Conditioning 

1. Water Cooled Condenser 

G. Fire Trip 



03/16/2012 

a. In order to achieve space cooling of the natatorium by the rejection of reclaimed 

heat, the dehumidifier shall be equipped with an auxiliary water cooled condenser 

and shall automatically change over from heating to air conditioning as a function 

of dry bulb cooling demand in the natatorium. The sensible and latent heat 

recovered in air conditioning mode is rejected to the auxiliary water cooled 

condenser if pool water temperature is satisfied. This condenser shall be factorymounted 

and refrigerant-piped, non-cleanable, with a head pressure controlled 

water regulating valve. 

b. The condensing water shall be noncorrosive and non-fouling with a temperature 

range of 45°F to 85°F. The condenser shall be a counterflow, helically wound, 

coaxial, tube-in-tube heat exchanger for maximum heat transfer from the 

refrigerant to the condensing water. The water tube shall be constructed of 

corrosion-resistant cupronickel. The water circuit connections shall be MPT. The heat 

exchanger shall be UL Listed and/or CSA Certified. 

1. Upon receipt of a contact closure from a fire control system (by others) a fire trip cycle shall 

be initiated. Compressor and fan motor shall be de-energized. For units equipped with 

the optional economizer, the dry contact shall open causing the outside and exhaust air 

dampers to close and the return air damper to open. Contact action is programmable. 

2.16 PROTECTIVE WRAPPING FOR SHIPPING AND/OR STORAGE 

A. Provide a heavy plastic protective wrapping around the top and sides of the unit to protect the 

unit from weather or road dirt while being shipped and / or stored. The wrapping shall be 

draped over the unit and secured with stretch wrap. 


UNITS



A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Examine roughing-in for hot-water and chilled water piping systems to verify actual locations of 

piping connections before equipment installation. 

C. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where dehumidification units will be 

installed. 

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Equipment Mounting: Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in 

Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 

1. Minimum Deflection: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 

B. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stop of size required 

to support weight of dehumidification unit. 

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548 

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Fabricate brackets or 

supports as required. 

2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 230529 "Hangers 

and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 


A. Where piping is installed adjacent to dehumidification units, allow space for service and 

maintenance of dehumidification units. 

B. Connect piping to dehumidification units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors. 

C. Connect condensate drain pans using minimum NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) copper tubing. Extend to 

nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan, and install 

cleanout at changes in direction. 

D. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping." Connect to 

supply and return coil tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection. 

E. Hot-Water Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping." Connect to 

supply coil tappings with shutoff valve, return coil tappings with balancing valve, and union or 

flange at each connection. 

F. Steam and Condensate Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 232213 "Steam and 

Condensate Heating Piping." Connect with shutoff valve and union or flange. 



03/16/2012 


UNITS

G. Duct installation requirements are specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" and Section 233116 

"Nonmetal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are 

specific connection requirements: 

1. Install ducts to termination in roof-mounted frames. Where indicated, terminate return-air 

duct through roof structure and insulate the space between roof and bottom of 

dehumidification unit. 


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, 

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. 

B. Perform tests and inspections. 

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect 

components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist 

in testing. 

C. Tests and Inspections: 

1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils with water, and test coils and connections for 

leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 

2. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no 

leaks exist. 


equipment. 

D. Dehumidification unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 

E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE 

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Perform the following final checks before startup: 

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to 

piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload 

protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 

3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section. 

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify free fan 

wheel rotation and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, 

and install belt guards. 

5. Check lubrication of bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts. 

6. Set outside- and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside-air setting. 

7. Install clean filters. 



03/16/2012 


UNITS

8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in 

connected duct systems are in fully open position. 

C. Starting procedures for dehumidification units include the following: 

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan 

to indicated rpm. Replace malfunctioning motors, bearings, and fan wheels. 

2. Measure and record motor's electrical values for voltage and amperage. 

3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan 

performance. 

D. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for 

testing, adjusting, and balancing of dehumidification unit. 

E. Startup Report: Report findings during startup. Identify startup steps, corrective measures taken, 

and final results. 

3.6 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 

B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. 

3.7 CLEANING 

A. Clean dehumidification units internally, on completion of installation, according to 

manufacturer's written instructions. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and 

construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheels, cabinets, and coils' entering-air face. 

B. After completing system installation, testing, and startup service of dehumidification units, clean 

filter housings and install new filters. 


A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to 

adjust, operate, and maintain dehumidification units. 



03/16/2012 



UNITS





03/19/2012 


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 


A. VFC: Variable frequency controller. 


2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 

2. Alpha Wire. 

3. Belden Inc. 

4. Encore Wire Corporation. 

5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 

6. Southwire Incorporated. 

B. Aluminum and Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658. 

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN-2 or 

Type XHHW-2. 

D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for armored cable, Type AC 

and metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire, and Type MCAP cable. 

E. VFC Cable: 

1. Comply with UL 1277, UL 1685, and NFPA 70 for Type TC-ER cable. 

260519 - 1 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 

POWER CONDUCTORS AND 

CABLES

2. Type TC-ER with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus 85 

percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire, and sunlight- and 

oil-resistant outer PVC jacket. 

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES 



1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 

2. Gardner Bender. 

3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 

4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 

5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. 

6. NSi Industries LLC. 

7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 

8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. 

9. Tyco Electronics. 

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, 

and class for application and service indicated. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by 


B. Comply with NFPA 70. 


3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS 

A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 

AWG and larger. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and 

larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded. 

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING 

METHODS 

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, XHHW-2 single conductors in raceway. 

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, XHHW-2 single conductors in raceway or Metal-clad 

cable, Type MC. 



03/19/2012 



CABLES

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, 

single conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC, Type MCAP and Metal-clad cable, 

Type MC. 

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2- 

THWN-2, single conductors in raceway and Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. 

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in 

raceway, Armored cable, Type AC and Metal-clad cable, Type MCAP, Type MC. 

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single 

conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC and Metal-clad cable, Type MCAP, Type MC. 

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN- 

2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. 

H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainlesssteel, 

wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. 

I. VFC Output Circuits: Type XHHW-2 in metal conduit or Type TC-ER cable with braided shield. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to 

Section 26 0533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and 

cables. 

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used 

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended 

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. 

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will 

not damage cables or raceway. 

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and 

follow surface contours where possible. 

F. Support cables according to Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 


A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening 

values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in 

UL 486A-486B. 

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that 

possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced 

conductors. 

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors. 



03/19/2012 



CABLES

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. 

3.5 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26 0553 "Identification for 

Electrical Systems." 

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end as spare. 

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS 

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with 

requirements in Section 26 0544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 

3.7 FIRESTOPPING 

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore 

original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 07 8413 "Penetration 

Firestopping." 


A. Test and Inspection Reports for feeders: Prepare a written report to record the following: 

1. Procedures used. 

2. Results that comply with requirements. 

3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve 

compliance with requirements. 

B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 



03/19/2012 




CABLES





03/19/2012 


GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 



1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment. 

B. Building has existing grounding and bonding systems. Electrical Contractor shall verify conditions 

and functionality of the existing electrodes and conductors. 


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and 


1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," 

include the following: 

1) Include recommended testing intervals. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, for 

intended location and application. 

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 





1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 

2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC. 

3. ERICO International Corporation. 

4. Fushi Copperweld Inc. 

5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. 

260526 - 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING 

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

6. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 

7. ILSCO. 

8. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 

9. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 

10. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a 

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 

2.3 CONDUCTORS 

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by 

applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Bare Copper Conductors: 

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper 

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, 

with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply 

with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be, impulse tested at 5000 V. 

2.4 CONNECTORS 

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in 

which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items 

connected. 

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy. 

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for 

materials being joined and installation conditions. 

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless [compression] [exothermic]type 

wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. 



03/19/2012 



2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES 

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet. 


3.1 APPLICATIONS 

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for 

No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install barecopper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. 

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade. 

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On 

feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, 

with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two 

bands of yellow. 

D. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise 

indicated. 

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE 

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the 

ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses. 

3.3 GROUNDING SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS 

A. Generator: Install grounding electrode(s) at the generator location. The electrode shall be 

connected to the equipment grounding conductor and to the frame of the generator. 

3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING 

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. 

B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted 

electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, 

humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct 

and connected metallic piping. 



03/19/2012 



C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment 

grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to 

heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. 

D. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor 

connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from 

panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the 

applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or 

feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway 

fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate 

insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from 

panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the 

applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated 

equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit 

conductors. 

G. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2. 

1. Grounding Conductor: Bare copper, not less than No. 8 AWG. 

2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper. 


A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise 

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may 

be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. 

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 

when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground 

directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service 

grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode 

conductor, and install in conduit. 

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless 


1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as 

otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length 

from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, 

and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. 

D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are 

specified in Section 26 0543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall 

be at least 12 inches deep, with cover. 

1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install 

at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with 

finished grade or floor. 



03/19/2012 



E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except 

where routed through short lengths of conduit. 

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate 

any adjacent parts. 

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install 

bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is 

required, use a bolted clamp. 

F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from 

building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service 

entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; 

use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of 

the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect 

grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or 

sleeve to conductor at each end. 

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water 

meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff 

valve. 

G. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column 

and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart. 


A. Tests and Inspections: 

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been 

energized, test for compliance with requirements. 

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical 

connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance 

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells. 

Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. 

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of 

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural 

drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of 

reducing natural ground resistance. 

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 

4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod 

assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, 

and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and 

their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena 

that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. 

B. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 



03/19/2012 




D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 

2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 

3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 

E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect 

promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. 



03/19/2012 








03/19/2012 


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 


A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. 

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 


A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported 

systems and its contents. 

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported 

equipment and connected systems and components. 


A. Comply with NFPA 70. 


A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, 

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications. 

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items 

are specified in Section 07 7200 "Roof Accessories." 

260529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS 

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field 

assembly. 

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 


following: 


following: 

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. 

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 

c. ERICO International Corporation. 

d. GS Metals Corp. 

e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 

g. Wesanco, Inc. 

3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA- 

4. 

4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. 

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. 

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated 

fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. 

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded 

body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in 

riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as 

required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. 

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, 

and bars; black and galvanized. 

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their 

supports to building surfaces include the following: 

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement 

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for 

supported loads and building materials where used. 

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 



b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one 

of the following: 



03/19/2012 

1) Hilti Inc. 

2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 

3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 


ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS



03/19/2012 

4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened 

portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for 

supported loads and building materials in which used. 

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 



b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 


1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 

2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 

3) Hilti Inc. 

4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 

5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS 

Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached 

structural element. 

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES 

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions 

of supported equipment. 

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes 

and plates. 



A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical 

equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. 

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for 

EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. 

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or 

other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without 

exceeding specified design load limits. 

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps, single-bolt 

conduit clamps, or single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in 

support channel. 


ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2inch 

and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended 

ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this 

Article. 

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC 

may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. 

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will 

be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum 

static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 

200 lb. 

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten 

electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless 

otherwise indicated by code: 

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor 

fasteners on solid masonry units. 

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 

5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock 

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or 

greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 

4 inches thick. 

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 or 

Spring-tension clamps. 

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 

8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, 

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, 

transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. 

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing 

bars. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS 

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated 

metal supports. 

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation 

to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 



03/19/2012 


ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

3.4 CONCRETE BASES 

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both 

directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from 

edge of the base. 

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and 

placement requirements are specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting 

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be 

embedded. 

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 

3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 



03/19/2012 



ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS





03/19/2012 


RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 

2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 

3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 

4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 

5. Surface raceways. 

6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 

7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. 


A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. 

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. 

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 


2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS 




2. Allied Tube & Conduit. 

3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 

4. Electri-Flex Company. 

5. O-Z/Gedney. 

6. Picoma Industries. 

7. Republic Conduit. 

8. Robroy Industries. 

9. Southwire Company. 

26 0533 - 1 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR 

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 

12. Wheatland Tube Company. 

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in 

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. 

D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. 

E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. 

F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated [rigid steel conduit] [IMC]. 

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 

2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum. 

G. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 

H. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum. 

I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. 

J. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. 

2. Fittings for EMT: 

a. Material: Steel or die cast. 

b. Type: Setscrew or compression. 

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for 

environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with 

overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. 

K. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having 

jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect 

threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS 




2. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 

3. Arnco Corporation. 

4. CANTEX Inc. 

5. CertainTeed Corporation. 

6. Condux International, Inc. 

7. Electri-Flex Company. 



03/19/2012 


ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

8. Kraloy. 

9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 

10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 

11. RACO; Hubbell. 


B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as 

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and 

application. 

C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653. 

D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. 

E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. 

F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A. 

G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B. 

H. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485. 

I. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14. 

J. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and 

material. 

K. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B. 

L. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, 

respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

M. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of 

the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile 

Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS 



1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 

2. Hoffman. 

3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 

4. Square D. 

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R unless 

otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a 




03/19/2012 


ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, 

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for 

complete system. 

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type or Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 

2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS 



1. Allied Moulded Products, Inc. 

2. Hoffman. 

3. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 

4. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 

B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as 


application. 

C. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without 

holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with 

captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have stainlesssteel 

screws and oil-resistant gaskets. 

D. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on 

cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners. 

E. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down 

straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete 

system. 

F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, 

respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of 

the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile 

Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 

2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS 

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as 


application. 

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. 

Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. 



03/19/2012 


ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS



following: 

a. Mono-Systems, Inc. 

b. Panduit Corp. 

c. Wiremold / Legrand. 

C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and 

manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's 

standard colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing 




following: 

D. Tele-Power Poles: 

a. Hubbell Incorporated. 

b. Mono-Systems, Inc. 

c. Panduit Corp. 

d. Wiremold / Legrand. 



following: 

a. Mono-Systems, Inc. 

b. Panduit Corp. 

c. Wiremold / Legrand. 

2. Material: Galvanized steel with ivory baked-enamel finish. 

3. Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses, devices, 

mounting materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with tele-power pole as 

required for complete system. 

2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS 



1. Adalet. 

2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 

3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 

4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 

5. FSR Inc. 

6. Hoffman. 

7. Hubbell Incorporated. 

8. Kraloy. 

9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 

10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 

11. O-Z/Gedney. 



03/19/2012 


ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

12. RACO; Hubbell. 

13. Robroy Industries. 

14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 

15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures. 


17. Wiremold / Legrand. 

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets 

installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. 

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. 

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy or aluminum, 

Type FD, with gasketed cover. 

E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. 

F. Metal Floor Boxes: 

1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal. 

2. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 

for intended location and application. 

G. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round or rectangular. 

1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in 

NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 

H. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. 

Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and 

marked for the maximum allowable weight. 

I. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb. 

1. Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in 

NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 

J. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. 

K. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773. 

L. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed 

box. 

M. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R with 

continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 

2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic. 

3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. 

N. Cabinets: 



03/19/2012 


ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and 

removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 

3. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 

4. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 

5. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified 

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 

2.7 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING 

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as 

defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a 


B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and 

aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a 

combination of the two. 



following: 

a. Armorcast Products Company. 

b. Carson Industries LLC. 

c. NewBasis. 

d. Oldcastle Precast, Inc. 

e. Quazite: Hubbell Power System, Inc. 

f. Synertech Moulded Products. 

2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 

3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 

4. Cover: Weatherproof, having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and 

handhole location. 

5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 

6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." 

7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts 

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 

8. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks 

and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured. 

C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with frame 

and covers of polymer concrete. 



following: 

a. Armorcast Products Company. 

b. Carson Industries LLC. 

c. NewBasis. 



03/19/2012 


ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

d. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc. 

e. Oldcastle Precast, Inc; Christy Concrete Products. 

f. Quazite: Hubbell Power System, Inc; Hubbell Power Systems. 

g. Synertech Moulded Products. 

2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 

3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 

4. Cover: Weatherproof, having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and 

handhole location. 

5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 

6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." 

7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts 

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 

8. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks 

and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured. 


3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION 

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC, IMC, EMT, PVC. 

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC, IMC, EMT, or RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC. 

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC Type EPC-80-PVC. 

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, 

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC or LFNC. 

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT, ENT or RNC. 

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 

3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC or IMC. Raceway locations include 


a. Loading dock. 

b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. 

c. Mechanical rooms. 

d. Gymnasiums. 

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, 

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet 

locations. 

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC or IMC. 

7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel 

or nonmetallic in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. 

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size. 

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 



03/19/2012 


ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless 

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type 

of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing 

conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in 

thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 

3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 

4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with 

NEMA FB 2.20. 

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum 

raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. 

F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. 

G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F. 


A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on 

Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply 

with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of 

floors. 

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. 

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 

C. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for 

hangers and supports. 

D. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. 

E. Support conduit within 18 inches of enclosures to which attached. 

F. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main 

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab 

support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals. 

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions. 

4. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, GRC or IMC before rising above floor. 

G. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 

1. Use EMT, IMC, FMC or RMC for raceways. 

2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or 

in an enclosure. 

H. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound 

prior to assembly. 



03/19/2012 


ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to 

protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. 

J. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes 

or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal 

bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated 

throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. 

K. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install 

locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. 

L. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in 

the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. 

M. Surface Raceways: 

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 

2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 

48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support 

surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not 

acceptable support methods. 

N. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with 

listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a 

blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway 

sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. 

O. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or 

boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all 

raceways at the following points: 

1. Where required by NFPA 70. 

P. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. 

Q. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature 

change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install 

in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental 

temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 

100 feet. 

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each 

of the following locations: 

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. 

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. 

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F 

temperature change. 

d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. 

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of 

length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) 

that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of 

straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits. 



03/19/2012 


ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure 

expansion joints. 

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected 

according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of 

installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. 

R. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of 

flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise 

transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 

2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. 

S. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually 

indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box 


T. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, 

and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a 

raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. 

U. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same 

vertical channel. 

V. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. 

W. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing 

members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. 

X. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by 

conduits. 

Y. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. 

Z. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT 

A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench 

bottom as specified in Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in 

nominal diameter. 

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving." 

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of 

conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as 

temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to 

provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches 

of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling 

with normal compaction as specified in Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving." 

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building 

entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts 

throughout length of elbow. 



03/19/2012 


ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at 

building entrances through floor. 

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase 

coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the 

coupling. 

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits 

penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 

60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding 

bushings on terminations at equipment. 

6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried 

conduits but a minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of 

conduit. 

7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 26 0553 "Identification 

for Electrical Systems." 

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES 

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with 

connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. 

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 

1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. 

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of 

other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade. 

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS 

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with 

requirements in Section 26 0544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 

3.6 FIRESTOPPING 

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with 

requirements in Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping." 


A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating 




03/19/2012 



ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS




03/19/2012 


SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 




1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 

2. Sleeve-seal systems. 

3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 

4. Grout. 

5. Silicone sealants. 


1. Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fireresistance-rated 

walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without 

penetrating items. 


2.1 SLEEVES 

A. Wall Sleeves: 

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain 

ends. 

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure 

pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel 

sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with 

tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board. 

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 

2. Minimum Metal Thickness: 


ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND 

CABLING

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side 

larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. 

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more 

sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. 


A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between 

sleeve and raceway or cable. 



following: 

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 

b. CALPICO, Inc. 

c. Metraflex Company (The). 

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 

e. Proco Products, Inc. 

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include 

type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 



2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS 

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in 

concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to 

match piping OD. 

2.4 GROUT 



following: 

a. Presealed Systems. 

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-firerated 

walls or floors. 

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, 


C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 




03/19/2012 



CABLING

2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS 

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of 

grade indicated below. 

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal 

surfaces that are not fire rated. 

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand 

and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. 


3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS 

A. Comply with NECA 1. 

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations. 

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit 

Floors and Walls: 

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: 

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant 

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in 

Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants." 

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly 

between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; 

protect material while curing. 

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 

3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or 

cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. 

Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both 

surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above 

finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors. 

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved 

opening. 

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board 

assemblies. 

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boottype 

flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. 



03/19/2012 



CABLING

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and 

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe 

and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to 

allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeveseal 

system. 

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION 

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway 

entries into building. 

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable 

material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve 

seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against 

pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION 

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed. 

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. 


C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms. 

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings. 



03/19/2012 




CABLING





03/19/2012 


IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Identification for raceways. 

2. Identification of power and control cables. 

3. Identification for conductors. 

4. Underground-line warning tape. 

5. Warning labels and signs. 

6. Instruction signs. 

7. Equipment identification labels. 

8. Miscellaneous identification products. 


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1. 


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. 

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. 

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used 

by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. 


A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in 

other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's 

wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by 

codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. 

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces 

where devices are to be applied. 

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. 

26 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR 

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 


2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS 

A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 

Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. 

B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer 

or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a 

weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label. 

C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white 

letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. 

D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White 

letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. 

2.2 CABLE TIES 

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 

nylon. 

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 

4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding. 

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, 

self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 


2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 


4. Color: Black. 

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking. 


2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 

3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 


5. Color: Black. 

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS 

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application 

requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or 

interior). 



03/19/2012 


ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine 

screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. 



A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. 

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing 

without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. 

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. 

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and 

methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. 

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners 

appropriate to the location and substrate. 

F. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below: 

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 

2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. 

G. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous undergroundline 

warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes 

where width of multiple lines installed in a common trenchexceeds 16 inches overall. 

H. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation 

and paint application. 

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE 

a. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 

1) Phase A: Black. 

2) Phase B: Red. 

3) Phase C: Blue. 

b. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 



03/19/2012 

1) Phase A: Brown. 

2) Phase B: Orange. 

3) Phase C: Yellow. 

B. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that 

is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. 

Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control 

panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, 

lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is 

provided with its own identification. 


ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

1. Labeling Instructions: 

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. 

Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters 

on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches 

high. 

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. 

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for 

viewing from the floor. 

d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with 

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of 

the enclosure. 

2. Equipment to Be Labeled: 

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by 

panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, 

engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. 

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. 

c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. 

d. Switchgear. 

e. Switchboards. 

f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the 

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. 

g. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. 

h. Motor-control centers. 

i. Enclosed switches. 

j. Enclosed circuit breakers. 

k. Enclosed controllers. 

l. Variable-speed controllers. 

m. Push-button stations. 

n. Power transfer equipment. 

o. Contactors. 

p. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. 

q. Monitoring and control equipment. 



03/19/2012 



ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS





03/19/2012 


LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Time switches. 

2. Photoelectric switches. 

3. Standalone daylight-harvesting switching controls. 

4. Indoor occupancy sensors. 

5. Outdoor motion sensors. 

6. Lighting contactors. 

7. Emergency shunt relays. 


1. Section 26 2726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, 

and manual light switches. 


2.1 TIME SWITCHES 



1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 

2. Intermatic, Inc. 

3. Invensys Controls. 

4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 

5. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 

6. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand. 

B. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying with 

UL 917. 

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for 


2. Contact Configuration: SPST or DPST. 

26 0923 - 1 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

3. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac or 20-A ballast load, 120-/240- 

V ac. 

4. Programs: Two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for 

each day of the week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation 

on holidays. 

5. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a 

program. 

6. Astronomic Time: All channels. 

7. Automatic daylight savings time changeover. 

8. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock. 

C. Electromechanical-Dial Time Switches: Comply with UL 917. 



2. Contact Configuration: SPST or DPST. 

3. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac or 20-A ballast load, 120-/240- 

V ac. 

4. Circuitry: Allows connection of a photoelectric relay as a substitute for the on-off function 

of a program. 

5. Astronomic time dial. 

6. Eight-Day Program: Uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays. 

7. Skip-a-day mode. 

8. Wound-spring reserve carryover mechanism to keep time during power failures, minimum 

of 24 hours. 

2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES 




2. Intermatic, Inc. 


4. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand. 

B. Description: Solid state, with SPST or DPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA 

inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with 

UL 773A. 



2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off 

levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of the photocell to prevent fixed 

light sources from causing turn-off. 

3. Time Delay: Fifteen second minimum, to prevent false operation. 

4. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor. 

5. Mounting: Twist lock complies with NEMA C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or 

stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky 

exposure. 

C. Description: Solid state, with SPST or DPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA, to operate connected 

load, complying with UL 773. 



03/19/2012 




2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off 

levels within that range. 

3. Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation. 

4. Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type. 

5. Mounting: Twist lock complying with NEMA C136.10, with base. 

2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS 



1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company. 


3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 


5. Lightolier Controls. 

6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 

7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 


9. RAB Lighting. 

10. Sensor Switch, Inc. 

11. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 

12. Watt Stopper. 

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy 

sensors with a separate power pack. 



2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, 

and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable 

over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. 

3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. 

Sensor is powered from the power pack. 

4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A 

tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 

power source, as defined by NFPA 70. 

5. Mounting: 

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. 

b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical 

enclosure. 

c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged 

door. 

6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal 

operation of sensor. 

7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 

8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected 

lighting level is present. 



03/19/2012 


C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and movement. 

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a 

human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in.. 

2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. 

when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. 

3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10foot- 

high ceiling. 

D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern changes 

of reflected ultrasonic energy . 

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 

inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 

2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 

600 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. 

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area 

of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. 

4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 

2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. 

5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when mounted 

on a 10-foot- high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet. 

E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and 

ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that 

control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 

2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a 

human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of 

average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical 

manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area 

of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. 

2.4 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS 



1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company. 


3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 


5. Lightolier Controls. 

6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 

7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 


9. RAB Lighting. 

10. Sensor Switch, Inc. 





03/19/2012 


B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for 

mounting in a single gang switchbox. 



2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F. 

3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent at 277 V, 

and 800-W incandescent. 

C. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag 1: 

1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with 

a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. 

2. Sensing Technology: Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic. 

3. Switch Type: SP. 

4. Voltage: Dual voltage, 120 and 277 V; dual-technology type. 

5. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc. 

The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set 

point of the sensor. 

6. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes. 

7. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of the 

space and helps eliminate false "off" switching. 

D. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag 2: 

1. Standard Range: 210-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.. 

2. Sensing Technology: PIR. 

3. Switch Type: SP. 

4. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage; passive-infrared type. 

5. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc. 

The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set 

point of the sensor. 

6. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes. 

7. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of the 

space and helps eliminate false "off" switching. 

2.5 LIGHTING CONTACTORS 



1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation. 

2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co. 

3. Eaton Corporation. 

4. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution; Total 

Lighting Control. 


B. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination-type lighting contactors 

with nonfused disconnect, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. 



03/19/2012 


1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, 

including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or 

less total harmonic distortion of normal load current). 

2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the 

point of installation. 

3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250. 

4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, matching the NEMA type 

specified for the enclosure. 

2.6 EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY 



1. Lighting Control and Design; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 


B. Description: Normally closed, electrically held relay, arranged for wiring in parallel with manual 

or automatic switching contacts; complying with UL 924. 

1. Coil Rating: 120 or 277 V. 

2.7 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. 

Comply with requirements in Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and 

Cables." 

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not 

smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage 

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller 

thanNo. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power 

Conductors and Cables." 


3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION 

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that 

penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke 

detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies. 

B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas 

indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. 



03/19/2012 


3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION 

A. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited 

conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless 


C. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, 

pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. 


A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 26 0553 "Identification 

for Electrical Systems." 

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 

2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each 

sensor. 

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. 


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service: 

1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry 

has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. 


equipment. 

B. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 


3.5 ADJUSTING 

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial 

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. 

Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set 

time delay to suit Owner's operations. 

2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's 

operations. 

3. Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool. 



03/19/2012 



A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements 

for low-voltage, programmable lighting control systems specified in Section 26 0943.13 

"Addressable-Fixture Lighting Controls" and Section 26 0943.23 "Relay-Based Lighting Controls." 

B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. 



03/19/2012 




1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Central dimming control systems. 





03/19/2012 


CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS 

1. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices 

2. Section 260923 – Lighting Control Devices: Occupancy sensors. 

A. American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE) 

(www.ansi.org and www.ieee.org) 

1. C62.41-1991 – Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. 

B. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org) 

1. D4674 -02a Standard Test Method for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics Exposed to 

Indoor Fluorescent Lighting and Window-Filtered Daylight. 

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) (www.nema.org) 

1. WD1 (R2005) - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. 

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) (www.ul.com): 

1. 489 (2002) - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker 

Enclosures. 

2. 508 (1999) - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. 

3. 1472 (1996) - Solid-State Dimming Controls. 

4. 924 (2003) - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment 


A. Central dimming control system 

1. Factory assembled dimming and switching panels and interfaces and modules. 

2. Low voltage wall stations and control interfaces. 

3. Solid-state high frequency fluorescent dimming ballasts. 

26 0933 - 1 CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS


A. Sustainable Design Closeout Documentation 

1. Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide Enhanced Startup documentation that details the 

start-up procedure being performed including a process to follow, details on tests performed and 

an area that documents any test results. 


A. Manufacturer: Minimum 10 years of experience in manufacture of architectural lighting controls. 

B. Manufacturer’s Quality System: Registered to ISO 9001:2000 Quality Standards, including in-house 

engineering for product design activities. 

C. Central dimming control system: 

1. Listed by UL specifically for the required loads. Provide evidence of compliance upon request. 


A. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive equipment: 

1.7 WARRANTY 

1. Ambient temperature: 0 degrees to 40 degrees C (32 degrees to 104 degrees F). 

2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing. 

3. Lighting control system must be protected from dust during installation. 

A. Provide Manufacturer’s Warranty: 

1. Enhanced 8-year Silver Level limited parts warranty, Includes: 

a. Years 1 

B. Provide Manufacturer’s Support and Maintenance Plan for 1 years covering 100 percent parts and 100 

percent labor after system startup completion. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. – System: Lutron GRAFIK Eye or equal 

2.2 GENERAL 

A. Provide system hardware that is designed, tested, manufactured, and warranted by a single 

manufacturer. 

2.3 POWER PANELS 

A. Product: Lutron or equal. 



03/19/2012 


B. Electrical: 

1. Panels contain branch circuit protection for each input circuit unless the panel is a dedicated feedthrough 

type panel or otherwise indicated on the drawings. 

2. Branch circuit breakers; meet following performance requirements: 

a. Listed to UL 489 as molded case circuit breaker for use on lighting circuits. 

b. Contain visual trip indicator; rated at 10,000 AIC, 120 V Dimming, or 14,000 AIC, 277 V 

Dimming, or 18,000 AIC, 277 V Switching. 

c. Thermal-magnetic construction for overload, short-circuit, and over-temperature protection. 

Use of breakers without thermal protection requires dimmers/relays to have integral thermal 

protection to prevent failures when overloaded or ambient temperature is above rating of 

panel. 

d. Accept tag-out/lock-out devices to secure circuit breakers in off position when servicing 

loads. 

e. Replaceable without moving or replacing dimmer/relay assemblies or other components in 

panel.UL listed as switch duty (SWD) so that loads can be switched on and off by breakers. 

3. Minimum UL listed Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of [25,000A] [45,000A] [65,000A]. 


A. Perform full-function testing on 100 percent of all system components and panel assemblies. 



A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. 

B. Provide complete installation of system in accordance with Contract Documents. 

C. Define each dimmer's/relay’s load type, assign each load to a zone, and set control functions. 

D. Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on Drawings. Provide any additional 

equipment required to provide control intent. 

3.2 SERVICE AND SUPPORT 

A. Startup and Programming 

1. Provide factory-certified field service engineer to a site visit to ensure proper system installation and 

operation under following parameters: 

a. Qualifications for factory-certified field service engineer: 

1) Minimum experience of 2 years training in the electrical/electronic field. 

2) Certified by the equipment manufacturer on the system installed. 

b. Make a visit upon completion of installation of central dimming control system: 

1) Verify connection of power feeds and load circuits. 

2) Verify connection and location of controls. 

3) Verify proper connection of panel links (low voltage/data) and address panel. 



03/19/2012 


B. Tech Support 



03/19/2012 

4) Check dimming/switching panel load types and currents and remove by-pass 

jumpers. 

5) Verify system operation control by control, circuit by circuit. 

6) Verify proper operation of supplied interfacing equipment to other devices. 

7) Obtain sign-off on system functions. 

8) User to be trained on system operation. 

1. Provide factory direct technical support hotline 24 hours per day, 7 days per week. 


A. Manufacturer Services 

3.4 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES 

A. Training Visit 

a. Facility Representative to coordinate on-site meeting with Lighting Control System 

Manufacturer and Lighting Design Consultant to make required lighting adjustments to the 

system for conformance with the Lighting Design Consultant’s original design intent.] 

1. Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide on-site system training to site personnel. 

3.5 MAINTENANCE 

A. Capable of providing on-site service support within 24 hours anywhere in continental United States and 

within 72 hours worldwide except where special visas are required. 

B. Offer renewable service contract on yearly basis, to include parts, factory labor, and annual training 

visits. Make service contracts available up to ten years after date of system startup. 







03/19/2012 


LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 



1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with 

capacities up to 1000 kVA: 

1. Distribution transformers. 


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and 



A. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer. 

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for 

intended use. 

C. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers." 


A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Concrete, 

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. 

B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer 

provided. 

262200 - 1 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS



A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

1. ACME Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division. 

2. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.; a division of Eaton Corp. 

3. Controlled Power Company. 

4. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 

5. Federal Pacific Transformer Company; Division of Electro-Mechanical Corp. 

6. General Electric Company. 

7. Hammond Co.; Matra Electric, Inc. 

8. Magnetek Power Electronics Group. 

9. Micron Industries Corp. 

10. Myers Power Products, Inc. 

11. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 

12. Sola/Hevi-Duty. 

13. Square D; Schneider Electric. 

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS 

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service. 

B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel. 

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. 

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 

2. Coil Material: Aluminum or Copper. 

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 

A. Comply with NEMA ST 20 and list and label as complying with UL 1561. 

B. Cores: One leg per phase. 

C. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2. 

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air. 

D. Taps for Transformers Smaller than 3 kVA: None. 

E. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below 

normal full capacity. 



03/19/2012 


F. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps 

below normal full capacity. 

G. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 

150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature. 

H. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: 

1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels. 

2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2. 

I. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets. 

2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer, 

mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in 

Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 


A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91. 

B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project. 



A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for 

each transformer. 

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by 

NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions. 

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where 

transformers will be installed. 

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 26 0526 "Grounding and 

Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at 

location of transformer. 

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb. 



03/19/2012 



A. Ground equipment according to Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 

B. Connect wiring according to Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and 

Cables." 


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

B. Tests and Inspections: 

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA 

Acceptance Testing Specification. 

C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above. 

3.5 CLEANING 

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. 



03/19/2012 







03/19/2012 


PANELBOARDS 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Distribution panelboards. 

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 

3. Load centers. 

4. Electronic-grade panelboards. 


A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. 

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 


A. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. 


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, 

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 7823 

"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective 

device that allows adjustments. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and 

accessories from single source from single manufacturer. 

262416 - 1 PANELBOARDS

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards 

including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with 

indicated maximum dimensions. 

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by 


D. Comply with NEMA PB 1. 

E. Comply with NFPA 70. 


A. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407. 


A. Environmental Limitations: 

1. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise 

indicated: 

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F to plus 104 deg F. 

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. 

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by 

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to 

provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption 

of electric service. 

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's written 

permission. 

3. Comply with NFPA 70E. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that 

penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, 

raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. 

Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors 

and panels. 

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt 

inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with 

concrete. 



03/19/2012 


1.10 WARRANTY 


replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within 


1. Warranty Period: One years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS 

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in 

Section 26 0548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 

B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets. 

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. 

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 

b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 

c. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 

d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box 

dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged 

trim cover. 

4. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral 

with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 

5. Finishes: 

a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating 

with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and 

thermosetting topcoat. 

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. 

6. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder. 

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. 

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum or Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 

2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding 

conductors; bonded to box. 

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum or Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 

2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. 

3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type. 



03/19/2012 


4. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate 

at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 

5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. 

Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 

6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at 

same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 

7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-capacity 

neutral bus. 

F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances 

required for future installation of devices. 

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or 

remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type 

of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit 

rating by an NRTL. 

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current 

available at terminals. 

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 



1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 



B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. 

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike. 

D. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only. 

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Plugin 

or Bolt-on circuit breakers. 

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolton 

circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires 

mechanical release for removal. 

G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches. 

H. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purpose controller, with 

same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard. 

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and 

secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection. 

2. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit. 



03/19/2012 


2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 







B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. 

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only. 

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in or Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without 

disturbing adjacent units. 

E. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purpose controller, with 

same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard. 

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and 

secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection. 

2. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit. 

F. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 

G. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box 

equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses. 

2.4 LOAD CENTERS 







B. Load Centers: Comply with UL 67. 

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only. 

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing 

adjacent units. 

E. Conductor Connectors: Mechanical type for main, neutral, and ground lugs and buses. 

2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 





03/19/2012 






B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating to 

meet available fault currents. 

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, 

and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting 

for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, 

field-adjustable trip setting. 

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable 

electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: 

a. Instantaneous trip. 

b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 

c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 

d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I 2 t response. 

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less 

than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault 

protection (6-mA trip). 

6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault 


7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, 

single-pole configuration. 

8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: 

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 

b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor 

materials. 

c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent 

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) 

lighting circuits. 

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Remote-mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable 

pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. 

e. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at percent of 

rated voltage. 

f. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without 

intentional time delay. 

g. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic 

circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker 

contacts. 

h. Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit 

breaker trips. 

i. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall 

be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. 

j. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking 

ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices. 

k. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a 

single unit. 



03/19/2012 


l. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in 

on or off position. 

m. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on 

position. 

C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle. 

1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Section 26 2813 

"Fuses." 

2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles. 

3. Auxiliary Contacts: One or Two normally open and normally closed contact(s) that 

operate with switch handle operation. 

2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES 

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device 

test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. 

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from 

panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and 

switchboard class relays. 



A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407. 

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or 

have been subjected to water saturation. 

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation 

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407. 

B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch nominal thickness. Comply 

with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, 

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards. 

3. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard. 

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and 

temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards. 



03/19/2012 


D. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed 

panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. 

F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. 

G. Install filler plates in unused spaces. 

H. Comply with NECA 1. 


A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning 

signs complying with Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. 

Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten 

directories are not acceptable. 

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements 

for identification specified in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a 

nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 0553 

"Identification for Electrical Systems." 


A. Perform tests and inspections. 

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, 

and control circuit. 

2. Test continuity of each circuit. 


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA 

Acceptance Testing Specification. 

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate 

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 



03/19/2012 


3.5 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as 


B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. 



03/19/2012 







03/19/2012 


WIRING DEVICES 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 

2. Twist-locking receptacles. 

3. Receptacles with integral surge-suppression units. 

4. Tamper-resistant receptacles. 

5. Weather-resistant receptacles. 

6. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 

7. Solid-state fan speed controls. 

8. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors. 

9. Communications outlets. 

10. Pendant cord-connector devices. 

11. Cord and plug sets. 

12. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies. 


A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. 

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. 

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. 

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. 

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Coordination: 

1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 

2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. 

262726 - 1 WIRING DEVICES




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packinglabel 

warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 



A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following 

manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 

2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 

3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 

4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single 

source from single manufacturer. 

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a 



C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under 

the following conditions: 

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 

2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section. 

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES 

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 

Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 



a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). 

b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). 

c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). 

d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex). 



03/19/2012 


B. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, 

NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596. 



a. Cooper; TR8300. 

b. Hubbell; HBL8300SGA. 

c. Leviton; 8300-SGG. 

d. Pass & Seymour; TR63H. 

2. Description: Labeled shall comply with NFPA 70. 

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES 

A. General Description: 

1. Straight blade, feed-through type. 

2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 

3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer 

provides proper GFCI protection. 

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15A or 20 A: 



a. Cooper; VGF20. 

b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. 

c. Pass & Seymour; 2095. 

d. Leviton; 7590. 

C. Tamper-Resistant GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15A or 20 A: 



a. Hubbell; GFTR20. 

b. Pass & Seymour; 2095TR. 

2.5 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES 

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 

Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498. 



a. Cooper; CWL520R. 

b. Hubbell; HBL2310. 

c. Leviton; 2310. 

d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R. 



03/19/2012 


2.6 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES 

A. Description: 

1. Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector. 

2. NEMA WD 6 Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade, and FS W-C-596. 

3. Body: Nylon, with screw-open, cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external 

cable grip. 

4. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength, galvanized-steel wire 

strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for 

corresponding connector. 

2.7 CORD AND PLUG SETS 

A. Description: 

1. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of 

equipment being connected. 

2. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with 

green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the 

equipment rating. 

3. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for 

connection. 

2.8 TOGGLE SWITCHES 

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. 

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 



1) Single Pole: 



03/19/2012 

2) Cooper; AH1221. 

3) Hubbell; HBL1221. 

4) Leviton; 1221-2. 

5) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1. 

6) Two Pole: 



9) Leviton; 1222-2. 


11) Three Way: 



14) Leviton; 1223-2. 




03/19/2012 


16) Four Way: 

C. Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A: 



19) Leviton; 1224-2. 




a. Cooper; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V. 

b. Hubbell; HBL1201PL for 120 and 277 V. 

c. Leviton; 1221-LH1. 

d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1RPL7 for 277 V. 

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off." 

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 



a. Cooper; AH1221L. 

b. Hubbell; HBL1221L. 

c. Leviton; 1221-2L. 

d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L. 

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle. 

E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A; for use 

with mechanically held lighting contactors. 



a. Cooper; 1995. 

b. Hubbell; HBL1557. 


d. Pass & Seymour; 1251. 

F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 

120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in 

lieu of switch handle. 



a. Cooper; 1995L. 

b. Hubbell; HBL1557L. 

c. Leviton; 1257L. 


d. Pass & Seymour; 1251L. 

2.9 DECORATOR-STYLE DEVICES 

A. Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 

Configuration 5-15R, and UL 498. 




b. Hubbell; DR15. 



B. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with 

NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, and UL 498. 




b. Hubbell; DR15TR. 

c. Pass & Seymour; TR26252. 

2. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and 

Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section. 

C. GFCI, Feed-Through Type, Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with 

NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A. 



a. Cooper; VGF15. 

b. Hubbell; GF15LA. 



D. GFCI, Tamper-Resistant and Weather-Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 

15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, UL 498, and UL 943 

Class A. 



a. Cooper; TWRVGF15. 

b. Hubbell; GFTR15. 

c. Pass & Seymour; 1594TRWR. 





03/19/2012 


E. Toggle Switches, Square Face, 120/277 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W- 

S-896. 



a. Cooper; 7621 (single pole), 7623 (three way). 

b. Hubbell; DS115 (single pole), DS315 (three way). 

c. Leviton; 5621-2 (single pole), 5623-2 (three way). 

d. Pass & Seymour; 2621 (single pole), 2623 (three way). 

F. Lighted Toggle Switches, Square Face, 120 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. 



a. Cooper; 7631 (single pole), 7633 (three way). 

b. Hubbell; DS120IL (single pole), DS320 (three way). 

c. Leviton; 5631-2 (single pole), 5633-2 (three way). 

d. Pass & Seymour; 2625 (single pole), 2626 (three way). 

2. Description: With neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off." 

2.10 RESIDENTIAL DEVICES 

A. Residential-Grade, Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15 A: Comply with 





b. Hubbell; RR155TR. 

c. Leviton; T5320. 

d. Pass & Seymour; TR62. 



B. Weather-Resistant and Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15 A: Comply with 




a. Cooper; TWR270. 

b. Hubbell; RR155WRTR. 

c. Leviton; TWR15. 

d. Pass & Seymour; 3232TRWR. 


Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section, 

when installed in wet and damp locations. 



03/19/2012 


C. Fan Speed Controls: 

1. Modular, 120-V, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches and audible 

frequency and EMI/RFI filters. 

2. Comply with UL 1917. 

3. Continuously adjustable slider or rotary knob, 1.5 A. 

4. Three-speed adjustable slider or rotary knob, 1.5 A. 

D. Telephone Outlet: 



a. Cooper; 3560-6. 

b. Leviton; 40649. 

2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; 

TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863. 

E. Combination TV and Telephone Outlet: 




b. Leviton; 40159. 

2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; 

complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863. 

2.11 WALL-BOX DIMMERS 

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with 

audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters. 

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with 

UL 1472. 

C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off 

switch positions shall bypass dimmer module. 

1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices 

2. Retain "Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches" Paragraph below with compatible dimmingtype 

ballasts. Coordinate with Section 26 5100 "Interior Lighting." Use uniform ballast and 

lamp types to obtain consistent dimming characteristics. 

D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim 

potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent 

dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness. 



03/19/2012 


2.12 WALL PLATES 

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 

2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel or Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 

4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and 

labeled for use in wet and damp locations. 

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weatherresistant, 

die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. 

2.13 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS 

A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used. 

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. 

C. Service Plate: Rectangular or Round, die-cast aluminum or solid brass with satin finish. 

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 jacks for UTP 

cable complying with requirements in Section 27 1500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling." 

2.14 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES 



B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the 

following: 

1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 

2. Pass & Seymour/Legrand. 

3. Square D/Schneider Electric. 


5. Wiremold/Legrand. 

C. Description: 

1. Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multichanneled, 

through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service-outlet assembly. 

2. Comply with UL 514 scrub water exclusion requirements. 

3. Service-Outlet Assembly: Flush type with two or four simplex receptacles and space for 

two or four RJ-45 jacks complying with requirements in Section 27 1500 "Communications 

Horizontal Cabling." 

4. Size: Selected to fit nominal 3-inch or 4-inch cored holes in floor and matched to floor 

thickness. 

5. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly. 



03/19/2012 


6. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 3-inch or 4-inch cored openings and reestablish 

fire rating of floor. 

7. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors 

and a minimum of four, four-pair cables that comply with requirements in 

Section 27 1500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling." 

2.15 FINISHES 

A. Device Color: 

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless 

otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 

3. TVSS Devices: Blue. 

4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange. 

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color. 



A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

B. Coordination with Other Trades: 

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device 

boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside 

of boxes. 

2. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint 

unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 

3. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. 

C. Conductors: 

1. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid 

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 

2. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, 

Article 300, without pigtails. 

3. Existing Conductors: 

a. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough. 

D. Device Installation: 

1. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last 

possible moment. 

2. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 

3. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid 

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 

4. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 

5. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice 

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 



03/19/2012 


6. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 

E. Receptacle Orientation: 

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted 

receptacles to the left. 

2. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral 

blade at the top. 

F. Dimmers: 

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 

2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 

3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to 

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions. 

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical 

and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, 

multigang wall plates. 

H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and 

furnishings. 


A. Comply with Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or 

machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags 

inside outlet boxes. 


A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 

1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99. 

2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 

2. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 

3. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 

4. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit 

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar 

problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new 

ones, and retest as specified above. 

C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 



03/19/2012 







03/19/2012 


FUSES 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches, enclosed controllers 

and motor-control centers. 

2. Plug fuses rated 125-V ac and less for use in plug-fuse-type enclosed switches, fuseholders 

and panelboards. 

3. Spare-fuse cabinets. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source 

from single manufacturer. 

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by 


C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses. 

D. Comply with NFPA 70. 

E. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses. 


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more 

than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings. 


A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size 

and with system short-circuit current levels. 

262813 - 1 FUSES





1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 

2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 

3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 

4. Littelfuse, Inc. 

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES 

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with 

circuit voltages. 

2.3 PLUG FUSES 

A. Characteristics: UL 248-11, nonrenewable plug fuses; 125-V ac. 

2.4 SPARE-FUSE CABINET 

1. Use existing. 



A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically 

damaged. 

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions 

affecting performance, such as rejection features. 

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and 

with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment. 

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to 

fuse ratings. 

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS 

A. Cartridge Fuses: 

1. Service Entrance: Class L, time delay. 



03/19/2012 

262813 - 2 FUSES

2. Feeders: Class L, time delay; Class RK1, time delay; Class RK5, time delay; Class J, fast 

acting; Class J, time delay. 

3. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1 or Class RK5, time delay. 

4. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay; Class J, fast acting; Class J, time delay. 

5. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting or time delay. 


A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing 

fuse. 

B. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s). 


A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 0553 

"Identification for Electrical Systems". 



03/19/2012 


262813 - 3 FUSES





03/19/2012 


ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 


Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Fusible switches. 

2. Nonfusible switches. 

3. Receptacle switches. 

4. Shunt trip switches. 

5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 

6. Molded-case switches. 

7. Enclosures. 


A. NC: Normally closed. 

B. NO: Normally open. 

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in 

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in 

Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit 

breakers. 

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent 

protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective 

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

262816 - 1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND 

CIRCUIT BREAKERS


A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, 

components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single 

manufacturer. 

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed 

switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces 

and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. 

C. Comply with NFPA 70. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following 

conditions unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. 

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by 

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to 

provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of 

proposed interruption of electric service. 

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 

3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's written 

permission. 

4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment 

served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances 

for equipment access doors and panels. 


2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES 









03/19/2012 


CIRCUIT BREAKERS

B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, 

horsepower rated, with cartridge or plug fuse interiors to accommodate specified indicated fuses, 

lockable handle with capability to accept one padlock, and interlocked with cover in closed 

position. 

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, 

horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified indicated fuses, lockable 

handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. 

D. Accessories: 

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground 

conductors. 

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; 

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 

4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate 

before switch blades open. 

5. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 

6. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 

7. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac. 

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES 







B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower 

rated, lockable handle with capability to accept one padlock, and interlocked with cover in closed 

position. 

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, 

horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with 

cover in closed position. 

D. Accessories: 

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground 

conductors. 

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; 

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 

3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate 

before switch blades open. 

4. Lugs: Mechanical or Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor 

material. 

5. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 24-V ac or 120-V ac. 



03/19/2012 


CIRCUIT BREAKERS

2.3 RECEPTACLE SWITCHES 







B. Type HD, Heavy-Duty, Single-Throw Fusible Switch: 240-V ac, 30, 60, or 100 A; UL 98 and 

NEMA KS 1; horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified indicated fuses; 

lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed 

position. 

C. Type HD, Heavy-Duty, Single-Throw Nonfusible Switch: 240-V ac, 30, 60, or 100 A; UL 98 and 

NEMA KS 1; horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept one padlock; 

interlocked with cover in closed position. 

D. Interlocking Linkage: Provided between the receptacle and switch mechanism to prevent 

inserting or removing plug while switch is in the on position, inserting any plug other than 

specified, and turning switch on if an incorrect plug is inserted or correct plug has not been fully 

inserted into the receptacle. 

E. Receptacle: Polarized, three-phase, four-wire receptacle (fourth wire connected to enclosure 

ground lug). 

2.4 SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES 



1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 

2. Eaton. 

3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 

4. Littelfuse, Inc. 

B. General Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kA interrupting 

and short-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses. 

C. Switches: Three-pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism and Class J fuse 

block; lockable handle with capability to accept one padlock; interlocked with cover in closed 

position. 

D. Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from integral control power transformer, with primary and 

secondary fuses, with a control power transformer of enough capacity to operate shunt trip, 

connected pilot, and indicating and control devices. 

E. Accessories: 

1. Oiltight key switch for key-to-test function. 

2. Oiltight green ON pilot light. 

3. Isolated neutral lug; 100 percent rating. 



03/19/2012 


CIRCUIT BREAKERS

4. Mechanically interlocked auxiliary contacts that change state when switch is opened and 

closed. 

5. Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped. 

6. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-safety and alarm relay; 120-V ac or 24-V dc coil voltage. 

7. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-alarm voltage monitoring relay complying with NFPA 72. 

2.5 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 







B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting 

capacity to comply with available fault currents. 

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and 

instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuitbreaker 

frame sizes 250 A and larger. 

D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, fieldadjustable 

trip setting. 

E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following 

field-adjustable settings: 

1. Instantaneous trip. 

2. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 

3. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 

4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I 2 t response. 

F. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less 

than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 

G. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse 

listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse 

compartment door. 

H. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations 

with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). 

I. Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault 


J. Features and Accessories: 

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 

2. Lugs: Mechanical or Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and 

conductor material. 



03/19/2012 


CIRCUIT BREAKERS

3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent 

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting 

circuits. 

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type 

with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay 

settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zerosequence 

current transformer/sensor. 

5. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 

6. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional 

time delay. 

7. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuitbreaker 

contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts. 

8. Alarm Switch: One NO or NC contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped. 

9. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be 

removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. 

10. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault 

protection function. 

11. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations. 

12. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered; 120-V ac or 24-V dc. 

2.6 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES 







B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit 

withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating. 

C. Features and Accessories: 

1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles. 

2. Lugs: Mechanical or Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and 

conductor material. 

3. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered type with 

mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, 

push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence 

current transformer/sensor. 

4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 

5. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional 

time delay. 

6. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic switch 

contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts. 

7. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when switch has tripped. 

8. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit switch operation; key shall be removable 

only when switch is in off position. 

9. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with ground-fault shunt trip unit; for interlocking 

ground-fault protection function. 

10. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations. 



03/19/2012 


CIRCUIT BREAKERS

11. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered; 120-V ac or 24-V dc. 

2.7 ENCLOSURES 

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to 

comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 

3. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X,. 

4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 

5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: 

NEMA 250, Type 12. 



A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance 

with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 



A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless 


B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 26 0548 "Vibration and 

Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and 

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. 

D. Install fuses in fusible devices. 

E. Comply with NECA 1. 


A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide 

warning signs. 

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. 



03/19/2012 


CIRCUIT BREAKERS


A. Perform tests and inspections. 

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, 

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 

2. Test continuity of each circuit. 


1. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate 

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 

2. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and 

malfunctioning controls and equipment. 

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and 

inspections. 

3.5 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as 


B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 26 0573 "Overcurrent 

Protective Device Coordination Study." 



03/19/2012 



CIRCUIT BREAKERS





03/19/2012 


INTERIOR LIGHTING 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 

2. Emergency lighting units. 

3. Exit signs. 

4. Lighting fixture supports. 

5. Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures. 


1. Section 26 0923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time 

switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and 

contactors. 

2. Section 26 0933 "Central Dimming Controls" for architectural dimming systems. 

3. Section 26 2726 "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps. 


A. BF: Ballast factor. 

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature. 

C. CRI: Color-rendering index. 

D. HID: High-intensity discharge. 

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. 

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. 

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. 

26 5100 - 1 INTERIOR LIGHTING


A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include 

data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 

2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 

3. Ballast, including BF. 

4. Energy-efficiency data. 

5. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 

a. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a 

manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary 

Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. 

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, 




connection. 


C. Installation instructions. 


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the 

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the 

items involved: 

1. Lighting fixtures. 

2. Suspended ceiling components. 

3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches of the 

plane of the luminaires. 

4. Ceiling-mounted projectors. 

5. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. 

6. Other items in finished ceiling including the following: 

a. Air outlets and inlets. 

b. Speakers. 

c. Sprinklers. 

d. Smoke and fire detectors. 

e. Occupancy sensors. 

f. Access panels. 

7. Perimeter moldings. 

B. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from 

manufacturer. 


D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 



03/19/2012 



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, 

operation, and maintenance manuals. 

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. 


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent 

agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as 

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & 

Calculation Guides. 



C. Comply with NFPA 70. 

D. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for 

indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global. 

E. Mockups: Provide interior lighting fixtures for room or module mockups, complete with power 

and control connections. 

1. Obtain Architect's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations. 

2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for 

judging the completed Work. 

3. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at 

time of Substantial Completion. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other 

construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, firesuppression 

system, and partition assemblies. 



A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated 

into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings. 

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS 

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. 



03/19/2012 


B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to 

NEMA LE 5A. 

C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to 

NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. 

D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B. 

E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 

F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent 

warping and sagging. 

G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under 

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to 

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during 

relamping and when secured in operating position. 

H. Diffusers and Globes: 

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing 

and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. 

b. UV stabilized. 

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 

I. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. 

Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from 

normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: 

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. 

b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, 

triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent 

luminaires. 

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for 

HID luminaires. 

d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact 

fluorescent luminaires. 

e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. 

f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires. 

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS 

A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts: 

1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. 

2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 

3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level 

control is indicated. 



03/19/2012 


4. Sound Rating: Class A. 

5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 

6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 

7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher. 

8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 

9. BF: 0.88 or higher. 

10. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 

11. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall be 

connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. 

B. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts. 

C. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5 and T5HO Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and 


1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps. 

2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 

D. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P, 

and having automatic-reset thermal protection. 

1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label. 

E. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements and 

bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in 

the field. 

F. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments: 

1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F starting and 

operating temperature with indicated lamp types. 

2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with 

indicated lamp types. 

G. Ballasts for Residential Applications: Fixtures designated as "Residential" may use low-powerfactor 

electronic ballasts having a Class B sound rating and total harmonic distortion of 

approximately 30 percent. 

H. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type. 

1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens. 

2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. 

3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and 

lamp type indicated. 

4. Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the ballast, 

controller, and connecting wiring are compatible. 

I. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type. 

1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output 

of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off. 

a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. 

b. Low-Level Operation: 30 percent of rated lamp lumens. 



03/19/2012 


2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 

3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and 

lamp type indicated. 

2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS 

A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with 

ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for 

full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 

2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 




6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 


8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 

9. Power Factor: 0.95, except fixtures designated as "Residential" may use low-power-factor 

electronic ballasts or higher. 

10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on 

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 

2.5 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS 

A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. 

Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 

2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F for single-lamp ballasts. 

3. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. 

4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life. 

B. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise 

indicated: 

1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F for single-lamp ballasts. 

2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 deg F. 

3. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 





8. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher. 

9. Protection: Class P thermal cutout. 

10. Bi-Level Dimming Ballast: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light 

output of the associated fixture between high- and low-level and off. 

a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. 

b. Low-Level Operation: 35 percent of rated lamp lumens. 

c. Compatibility: Certified by ballast manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control 

system and lamp type indicated. Certified by lamp manufacturer that ballast 



03/19/2012 




03/19/2012 

operating modes are free from negative effect on lamp life and color-rendering 

capability. 

11. Continuous Dimming Ballast: Dimming range shall be from 100 to 35 percent of rated 

lamp lumens without flicker. 

a. Ballast Input Watts: Reduced to a maximum of 50 percent of normal at lowest 

dimming setting. 

C. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type, with solid-state igniter/starter. 

Igniter/starter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/startercase 

temperature of 90 deg C. 

1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F. 

2.6 QUARTZ LAMP LIGHTING CONTROLLER 

A. General Requirements for Controllers: Factory installed by lighting fixture manufacturer. Comply 

with UL 1598. 

B. Standby (Quartz Restrike): Automatically switches quartz lamp on when a HID lamp in the fixture 

is initially energized and during the HID lamp restrike period after brief power outages. 

C. Connections: Designed for a single branch -circuit connection. 

D. Switching Off: Automatically switches quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 

percent light output. 

2.7 EXIT SIGNS 

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, 

and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Internally Lighted Signs: 

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 

2.8 FLUORESCENT LAMPS 

A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens 

(minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature as specified on drawings, and average rated 

life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. 

B. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumens 


life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. 

C. T5 rapid-start lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 2900 initial lumens 


life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. 


D. T5HO rapid-start, high-output lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 

5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature as specified on drawings, 

and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature as specified on 

drawings, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start, and suitable for 

use with dimming ballasts unless otherwise indicated. 

1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). 



4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 




2.9 HID LAMPS 

A. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K. 

B. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K. 

C. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K. 

D. Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI 78.41, CRI 0, and color temperature 1800 K. 

2.10 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS 

A. Comply with Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and 

angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. 

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish 

same as fixture. 

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single 

fixture. Finish same as fixture. 

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage. 

E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. 

F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with 

threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. 

2.11 RETROFIT KITS FOR FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES 

A. Reflector Kit: UL 1598, Type I. Suitable for two- to four-lamp, surface-mounted or recessed 

lighting fixtures by improving reflectivity of fixture surfaces. 

B. Ballast and Lamp Change Kit: UL 1598, Type II. Suitable for changing existing ballast, lamps, 

and sockets. 



03/19/2012 




A. Lighting fixtures: 

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Install lamps in each luminaire. 

B. Temporary Lighting: Use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the 

minimum number of luminaires necessary. 

C. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that 

recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance 

between ballast and luminaire. 

D. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element. 

1. Install 2 ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension 

devices, for each fixture. 

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each 

fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. 

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or 

center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch 

metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. 

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting 

fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor 

of 3. 

E. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 

3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for 

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 

4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to 

building structure. 

F. Connect wiring according to Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and 

Cables." 


A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply 

with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical 

Systems." 



03/19/2012 


3.3 STARTUP SERVICE 

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by 

Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 

100 hours at full voltage. 

3.4 ADJUSTING 

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, 

provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. 

Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 

Some of this work may be required after dark. 

1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect. 



03/19/2012 







03/19/2012 


EXTERIOR LIGHTING 



1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 

2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays. 

3. Poles and accessories. 


1. Section 26 5100 "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior 

surfaces of buildings. 


A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. 

B. CRI: Color-rendering index. 

C. HID: High-intensity discharge. 

D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. 

E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. 

F. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination. 

G. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above. 

1.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION 

A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and 

supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M. 

B. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire and banners and banner arms, calculated 

and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M. 

265600 - 1 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles exceeding 49.2 feet in height is 100 

mph . 


a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0. 

b. Minimum Design Life: 50 years. 

c. Velocity Conversion Factors: 1.0. 

A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting 

unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 

1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, 

and verification of indicated parameters. 

2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 

3. Details of installation and construction. 

4. Luminaire materials. 

5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with indicated 

lamps, ballasts, and accessories. 

a. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's 

laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory 

Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. 

6. Photoelectric relays. 

7. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data. 

8. Lamps, including life, output, CCT, CRI, lumens, and energy-efficiency data. 

9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. 

10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for 

components involved. 

11. Anchor bolts for poles. 

12. Manufactured pole foundations. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 



connection. 

2. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 



A. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that 

products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4-M and that load 

imposed by luminaire and attachments has been included in design. The certification shall be 

based on design calculations by a professional engineer. 

B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures. 


D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 



03/19/2012 



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation, 

and maintenance manuals. 


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' 

laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program 

for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. 



C. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code." 

D. Comply with NFPA 70. 


A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660. 

B. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. 

Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation. 

C. Handle wood poles so they will not be damaged. Do not use pointed tools that can indent pole 

surface more than 1/4 inch deep. Do not apply tools to section of pole to be installed below 

ground line. 

D. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on fiberglass and laminated wood poles until right before 

pole installation. Handle poles with web fabric straps. 

E. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For 

poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps. 

1.10 WARRANTY 


replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, 

perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty 

period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or 

unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage. 

1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: One years from date of Substantial Completion. 

2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: One years from date of Substantial Completion. 

3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: One years from date of Substantial Completion. 

4. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in 

finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but 

not less than one years from date of Substantial Completion. 



03/19/2012 




A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated 

into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings. 

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES 

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations 

by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. LER Tests Incandescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A. 

2. LER Tests Fluorescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and 

NEMA LE 5A as applicable. 

3. LER Tests HID Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B. 

B. Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light 

distribution patterns indicated for luminaires. 

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 

D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and 

support to prevent warping and sagging. 

E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform 

in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. 

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under 

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to 

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during 

relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or 

replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens. 

G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. 

H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, 

and UV radiation. 

I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light 

distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field. 

J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated: 

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 

K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and 

cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. 



03/19/2012 


L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested 

luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support 

materials. 

M. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for 

Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to 

remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind 

welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, 

from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast 

Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 

2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer 

and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel. 

a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors. 

b. Color: Match Architect's sample of manufacturer's standard color. 

c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

N. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual 

for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum 

Association for designating aluminum finishes. 

2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff 

complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax. 

3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; 

Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear 

coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. 

4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; 

Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally 

colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with 

AAMA 611. 

a. Color: Dark bronze or Black. 

O. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. 

Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from 

normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: 

a. "USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type. 

b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple), 

base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. 

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for 

HID luminaires. 

d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent 

luminaires. 

e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. 

f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires. 



03/19/2012 


2.3 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS 

A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A. 

B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory 

set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15-second minimum time 

delay. Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources from 

causing false turnoff. 

1. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with ANSI C136.10. 

2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points. 

2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS 

A. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments: 

1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F starting and 

operating temperature with indicated lamp types. 

2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with 

indicated lamp types. 

B. Ballast Characteristics: 

1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 



4. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor, 

Class P, automatic-reset thermal protection. 

5. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum. 

6. Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A 

or better. 

C. Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast 

provided at temperatures 0 deg F and higher. 

2.5 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS 

A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction 

of average lamp life. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 


3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. 

4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current 

ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer. 

B. Auxiliary, Instant-On, Quartz System: Factory-installed feature automatically switches quartz 

lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. System 

automatically turns quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent of light 

output. 



03/19/2012 


C. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type with solid-state igniter/starter and capable 

of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Igniter/starter shall have an 

average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C. 

1. Instant-Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory installed 

within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to 150 W. 

a. Restrike Range: 105- to 130-V ac. 

b. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac rms. 


2.6 HID LAMPS 

A. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), CCT color temperature 

1900 K, and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum. 

1. Dual-Arc Tube Lamp: Arranged so only one of two arc tubes is lighted at one time and, 

when power is restored after an outage, the cooler arc tube, with lower internal pressure, 

lights instantly, providing an immediate 8 to 15 percent of normal light output. 

B. Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.43. 

C. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65, and CCT color temperature 4000 K. 

D. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and CCT color temperature 4000 K. 

E. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and CCT color temperature 

4000 K. 

2.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS 

A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M. 

1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, 

permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Structural 

Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article. 

2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of 

luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be 

used in pole selection strength analysis. 

B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. 

Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support 

components. 

1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 

2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication 


3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel. 



03/19/2012 


D. Handhole: Oval-shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches, with cover secured 

by stainless-steel captive screws. 

E. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. 

Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place 

Concrete." 

F. Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural steel 

complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M; 

and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and strength required to 

support pole, luminaire, and accessories. 

G. Breakaway Supports: Frangible breakaway supports, tested by an independent testing agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, according to AASHTO LTS-4-M. 

2.8 STEEL POLES 

A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig; 

one-piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall. 

1. Shape: as noted on drawings. 

2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway 

support. 

B. Steel Mast Arms: Single-arm type, continuously welded to pole attachment plate. Material and 

finish same as pole. 

C. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, cantilever, without underbrace. 

1. Adapter fitting welded to pole, allowing the bracket to be bolted to the pole mounted 

adapter, then bolted together with galvanized-steel bolts. 

2. Cross Section: Tapered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire. 

3. Match pole material and finish. 

D. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and 

securely fastened to pole top. 

E. Steps: Fixed steel, with nonslip treads, positioned for 15-inch vertical spacing, alternating on 

opposite sides of pole; first step at elevation 10 feet above finished grade. 

F. Intermediate Handhole and Cable Support: Weathertight, 3-by-5-inch handhole located at 

midpoint of pole with cover for access to internal welded attachment lug for electric cable support 

grip. 

G. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in 

Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding 

and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole. 

H. Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable 

and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor. 

I. Platform for Lamp and Ballast Servicing: Factory fabricated of steel with finish matching that of 

pole. 



03/19/2012 


J. Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting. 

K. Galvanized Finish: After fabrication, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M. 

L. Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and 

Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to 

remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind 

welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, 

from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast 

Cleaning," or with SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 

2. Interior Surfaces of Pole: One coat of bituminous paint, or otherwise treat for equal 

corrosion protection. 

3. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer 

and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel. 

2.9 ALUMINUM POLES 

a. Color: As selected by Architect or Interior Designer from manufacturer's full range. 

A. Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6 

with access handhole in pole wall. 

B. Poles: ASTM B 209, 5052-H34 marine sheet alloy with access handhole in pole wall. 

1. Shape: as noted on drawings. 

2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway 

support. 

C. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and 

securely fastened to pole top. 

D. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in 

Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding 

and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole. 

E. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, with pole and adapter fittings of cast aluminum. Adapter 

fitting welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with stainless-steel bolts. 

1. Tapered oval cross section, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire. 

2. Finish: Same as pole. 

F. Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting. 

G. Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal 

Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum 

Association for designating aluminum finishes. 

2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff 

complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax. 



03/19/2012 


3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; 

Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear 

coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. 

4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; 

Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally 

colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with 

AAMA 611. 

2.10 FIBERGLASS POLES 

a. Color: As selected by Architect or Interior Designer from manufacturer's full range. 

A. Poles: Designed specifically for supporting luminaires, with factory-formed cable entrance and 

handhole. Not less than 65 percent fiberglass, with resin and pigment making up the remainder. 

1. Resin Color: Dark bronze; provide uniform coloration throughout entire wall thickness. 

2. Surface Finish: Pigmented polyurethane, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. 

Polyurethane may be omitted if the surface layer of pole is inherently UV inhibited. 

2.11 DECORATIVE POLES 

A. Pole Material: 

1. Cast ductile iron. 

2. Cast gray iron, according to ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30. 

3. Cast aluminum. 

4. Cast concrete. 

5. Spun concrete. 

6. Steel tube, covered with closed-cell polyurethane foam, with a polyethylene exterior. 

B. Mounting Provisions: 

1. Bolted to concrete foundation. 

2. Embedded. 

C. Fixture Brackets: 

1. Cast ductile iron. 

2. Cast gray iron. 

3. Cast aluminum. 

D. Pole Finish: As selected by Architect or Interior Designer from manufacturer's full range.. 

2.12 POLE ACCESSORIES 

A. Duplex Receptacle: 120 V, 20 A in a weatherproof assembly complying with Section 26 2726 

"Wiring Devices" for ground-fault circuit-interrupter type. 

1. Surface mounted, 12 inches above finished grade. 

2. Nonmetallic polycarbonate plastic or reinforced fiberglass, weatherproof in use, cover, 

that when mounted results in NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure. 



03/19/2012 


3. With cord opening. 

4. With lockable hasp and latch that complies with OSHA lockout and tag-out requirements. 

B. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and 

nuts. Finish same as pole. 


3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION 

A. Install lamps in each luminaire. 

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. 

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the 

application and approved by manufacturer. 

C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. 

3.2 POLE INSTALLATION 

A. Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires 

and their mounting provisions on the pole. 

B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and 

underground features unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: 

1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches. 

2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet. 

3. Trees: 15 feet from tree trunk. 

C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by 

pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in 

Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 

D. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level 

recommended by pole manufacturer. 

1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and 

approved by manufacturer. 

2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete 

grout firmly packed to fill space. 

3. Install base covers unless otherwise indicated. 

4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. 

Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole. 

E. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete Paved Areas: Install poles with minimum of 6-inch- 

wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of adjacent concrete slab. 

Fill unpaved ring with pea gravel to a level 1 inch below top of concrete slab. 

F. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable). 



03/19/2012 


3.3 BOLLARD LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION 

A. Align units for optimum directional alignment of light distribution. 

B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at bollard location. 

Cast conduit into base, and shape base to match shape of bollard base. Finish by troweling and 

rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Section 03 3000 

"Cast-in-Place Concrete." 

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTING LUMINAIRES 

A. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location. 

Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, 

installation, and finishing are specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 

3.5 CORROSION PREVENTION 

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar 

metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment. 

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 26 0533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In 

concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied 

with a 50 percent overlap. 

3.6 GROUNDING 

A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Section 26 0526 "Grounding and 

Bonding for Electrical Systems." 

1. Install equipment grounding conductor for each pole unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding 

system. 

B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Section 26 0526 "Grounding and 

Bonding for Electrical Systems." 

1. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector. 

2. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations. 


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. 

B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires 

and energizing circuits with normal power source. 

1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls. 

C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and 

interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance 

with standards. 



03/19/2012 



A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaire lowering 

devices. 



03/19/2012

substitution request - Alliance Construction Solutions

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?